MANUAL DE INSTALACIÓN

OPERACIÓN Y MANTENIMIENTO

CELDAS DE FLOTACIÓN
WEMCO N° 300 M3

AKER SOLUTIONS
PROYECTO ESPERANZA

FLSmidth Minerals S.A.

Providencia - Santiago - CHILE

Orden de Compra N°
320-M-MR-081
Proyecto FLSmidth N° 12319
 HOJA DE REVISIONES

A Emitido para revisión del cliente Oct.-30-2009 LS CF NG

Rev. DESCRIPCIÓN FECHA AUTOR REVISÓ APROBÓ CLIENTE
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 TABLA DE CONTENIDOS 12319
MCN2006-0039 1 (1 de 3)

Página
G-F5100. – INFORMACION GENERAL ……………………………………………………………….. 1
Prólogo ………………………………………………………………………………………. 1
A. - Información General ……………………………………………………………………….. 2
1. - Recepción e Inspección ………………………………………………………….. 2
2. - Cubiertas y Cajas de Embalaje …………………………………………………. 2
3. - Barras y Grapas de Embalaje …………………………………………………… 2
4. - Servicios de Mantenimiento y Puesta en Marcha …………………………….. 2
5. - Pedidos de Partes y Repuestos ………………………………………………… 2
6. - Almacenamiento ………………………………………………………………….. 3
7. - Almacenamiento de Productos de Caucho ……………………………………. 3
8. - Pintura y Soldadura en Terreno ………………………………………………… 4
B. - Procedimientos de Seguridad 5
F5-D319. – INSTALACION ……………………………………………………………………………… 6
A. - Instalación de la Celda de Flotación ……………………………………………………... 6
1. - Fundaciones ………………………………………………………………………. 6
2. - Levante de Estanque y Componentes …………………………………………. 6
3. - Montaje en Terreno del Estanque de la Celda ………………………………… 8
4. - Instalación de los Depósitos de Alimentación y Descarga …………………… 9
5. - Instalación de la Válvula de Dardo ……………………………………………… 10
6. - Instalación del tubo de Aspiración y Doble Fondo ……………………………. 11
7. - Instalación del Anillo Partido (Collar) …………………………………………… 11
8. - Instalación de las Unidades de Bafles Verticales y Canaletas Radiales …… 11
9. - Instalación de la Unidad del Mecanismo ………………………………………. 12
10. - Instalación del Guarda Correa ………………………………………………….. 13
11. - Instalación de las Poleas y Ajuste de las mismas ……………………………. 14
12. - Instalación de la Correa de Transmisión ………………………………………. 15
13. - Instalación de la Unidad de Flotador de Nivel ………………………………… 16
14. - Instalación del Sensor de Nivel de Espuma …………………………………… 16
15. - Instalación de los Controles y Energía Eléctrica ……………………………… 16
16. - Inspección Final antes de la Puesta en Marcha ………………………………. 17
G-X104. – CHEQUEO MECANICO DEFINITIVO …………………………………………………….. 19
F5-D411. – LUBRICACION ……………………………………………………………………………... 20
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 TABLA DE CONTENIDOS 12319
MCN2006-0039 2 (2 de 3)

Página
G1-D19. – PROCEDIMIENTOS DE SEGURIDAD …………………………………………………… 21
F5-D408. – MANTENIMIENTO …………………………………………………………………………. 22
A. - Inspección y Mantenimiento General ……………………………………………………. 22
1. - Limpieza General …………………………………………………………………. 22
2. - Tensión de Accionamiento de las Correas en V ………………………………. 22
3. - Lubricación ………………………………………………………………………… 23
4. - Unidad de Control de Aire ……………………………………………………….. 23
5. - Unidades de Válvula de Dardo y Actuador …………………………………….. 23
6. - Parada Programada para efectos de Mantenimiento e Inspección …………. 24
B. - Retiro del Mecanismo ……………………………………………………………………… 26
1. - Retiro del Motor …………………………………………………………………… 26
2. - Preparación para el Retiro del Mecanismo ……………………………………. 26
3. - Levante y Retiro del Mecanismo ………………………………………………... 26
4. - Reinstalación del Mecanismo …………………………………………………… 27
C. - Retiro e Instalación de los Componentes ……………………………………………….. 28
1. - Unidad del Motor ………………………………………………………………….. 28
2. - Unidad del Collar del Tubo de Succión ………………………………………… 29
3. - Unidad de Control de Aire ……………………………………………………….. 29
4. - Sectores de Cubierta …………………………………………………………….. 29
5. - Dispersor …………………………………………………………………………... 30
6. - Rotor Estrella ……………………………………………………………………… 31
7. - Especificación de Torque para Sujetadores …………………………………… 32
F5-D502. – OPERACIÓN ………………………………………………………………………………... 33
®
A. - Celdas de Flotación “WEMCO ” – Modelo “SMARTCELL” …………………………… 33
1. - Unidad de Flotación – Descripción General …………………………………… 33
2. - El Mecanismo ……………………………………………………………………... 34
3. - El Estanque y las Cajas de Control …………………………………………….. 34
B. - Controles del Nivel de la Celda …………………………………………………………… 35
1. - Sistema Sensor de Nivel Ultrasónico …………………………………………... 35
2. - Válvulas de Dardo ………………………………………………………………… 36
3. - Control Experto Incluido …………………………………………………………. 36
C. - Puesta en Marcha y Operación …………………………………………………………… 37
D. - Parada ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 38
1. - Parada de Planta Planificada ……………………………………………………. 38
2. - Parada de Planta no Planificada ………………………………………………... 39
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 TABLA DE CONTENIDOS 12319
MCN2006-0039 3 (3 de 3)

Página
F5-D505. – RESOLUCION DE FALLAS ……………………………………………………………. 40

01-AA17. – OFICINAS ………………………………………………………………………………… 45

G-F5100. – LISTADO DE CHEQUEO MECANICO FINAL ………………………………………. 46
01-AA17. – GARANTIA MECANICA ………………………………………………………………... 50

■. - LISTADO DE PARTES N° PL-12319-300m3

■. - DATA SHEETS

1. - DATA SHEET 320-M-DS-081-1 Rougher Flotation Cells

2. - DATA SHEET 320-M-DS-081-2 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
3. - DATA SHEET 320-M-DS-081-3 First Cleaner Flotation Cells

■. - LISTADO DE PLANOS DE DISPOSICION GENERAL Y MONTAJE

1. - PLANOS DE DISPOSICION GENERAL

2. - PLANOS DE MONTAJE
3. - TABLA DE TORQUES

■. - MANUALES Y CATALOGOS VENDORS

1. - Motores
2. - Reductores
3. - Actuadores
4. - Medidores de Nivel
Rev. A G-F5100
1-2009 INFORMACION GENERAL 12319
MCN2006-0001 1

PROLOGO

Con el fin de mantener el compromiso de FLSmidth Minerals S.A de proporcionar la última tecnología y los
últimos avances en sus productos, FLSmidth Minerals S.A también se compromete a brindarle el más alto nivel
de servicio y asesorarlo en la resolución de sus problemas de proceso.

Por consiguiente, si FLSmidth Minerals S.A puede asistirle en el funcionamiento de su equipo de flotación, no
dude en comunicarse con nosotros al (801) 526-2000 o por FAX al (801) 526-2001. Además, si tiene alguna
sugerencia o comentario para ayudarnos a brindarle un mejor servicio, no dude en enviarlo.

Para garantizar que reciba los beneficios completos de una instalación, mantenimiento y funcionamiento
adecuado de las unidades de flotación WEMCO®, le solicitamos leer cuidadosamente y familiarizarse con las
instrucciones de este manual. Consulte la Tabla de contenidos que se entrega al comienzo del manual.

El equipo, incluido el equipo accesorio suministrado por FLSmidth Minerals S.A, pero fabricado por terceros,
deberá almacenarse, instalarse, operarse y mantenerse de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante para
garantizar la vigencia de la garantía.

Las instrucciones de este manual se basan en información disponible al momento de la publicación del mismo.
FLSmidth Minerals S.A., se reserva el derecho de realizar cambios posteriores en las instrucciones sin obligación
de reemplazar las copias existentes.

Los documentos, planos, manuales técnicos y toda otra información contenida en este manual, proporcionada
conjuntamente con la compra de los productos y servicios FLSmidth Minerals S.A, son propiedad de FLSmidth
Minerals S.A y tienen un carácter confidencial por lo cual se prohíbe su reproducción o divulgación.

En ningún momento, FLSmidth Minerals S.A proporcionará copias en formato electrónico editable, tanto para
planos, como documentos de datos.

FLSmidth Minerals S.A no acepta ningún tipo de responsabilidad por cambios no autorizados y/o alteraciones en
los datos proporcionados.

El idioma que prevalece es el inglés. Cuando los manuales se proporcionen en inglés y en otro idioma que no
sea inglés, LA TRADUCCIÓN DEL INGLÉS SE ENTREGA SOLO PARA COMODIDAD DEL LECTOR.
FLSmidth Minerals S.A no será responsable de los daños causados por errores en la traducción. La
versión en inglés prevalecerá en caso de discrepancias menores. En caso de discrepancias mayores, notifique
inmediatamente a su representante de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. Consulte la página “Oficinas” de este manual
para obtener la dirección y el número de teléfono correspondientes.

Derechos reservados

Para uso confidencial solamente, se prohíbe su circulación, distribución o reproducción sin permiso previo por
escrito. Copyright © 2008 por FLS. Todos los derechos reservados.
Rev. A G-F5100
1-2009 INFORMACION GENERAL 12319
MCN2006-0001 2

A. Información general

1. Recepción e inspección

Aunque se tomen todas las precauciones posibles para proteger el equipo contra daños o pérdidas
durante el envío, antes de aceptar el envío revise todos los artículos con la lista de empaque. En caso
de mermas o evidencia de daño físico, notifique inmediatamente a la compañía de transporte.

Deberá notificar a FLSmidth Minerals S.A dentro de un período de 7 días (máximo) en caso de mermas
o discrepancias de acuerdo con la lista de empaque. Si no se notifica a FLSmidth Minerals S.A, éste no
se hará responsable del reemplazo de dichos artículos. Sugerimos llevar un registro de todos los
reclamos y de la correspondencia. Se recomienda tomar fotografías.

2. Cubiertas y cajas de embalaje

No retirar las cubiertas protectoras a menos que haya indicios de daños. Las cajas que se abren para
inspección e inventario deberán reembalarse cuidadosamente para garantizar la protección de los
contenidos o en su defecto envolver y almacenar los componentes en un lugar seguro. Verificar si
existen artículos guardados en todas las cajas de embalaje, envoltorios y cubiertas, especialmente si
éstas se van a botar a la basura. Consultar instrucciones de almacenamiento.

3. Barras y grapas de embalaje

Las abrazaderas de soporte, barras, cintas, etc., utilizadas para el embalaje, deben permanecer
colocadas hasta que sea necesario. Las abrazaderas de embalaje generalmente se marcan o pintan,
aunque no siempre, para indicar su calidad de soporte temporales de embalaje.

4. Servicios de mantenimiento y puesta en marcha

FLSmidth Minerals S.A pone a su disposición experimentados ingenieros y personal de servicio para
asesorarlo acerca del funcionamiento y el mantenimiento de este equipo. Ellos le entregan el beneficio
de su conocimiento técnico de primera mano de los equipos, además del apoyo de toda la ingeniería e
instalaciones de investigación de FLSmidth Minerals S.A.

Pueden entregarle instrucciones sobre procedimientos apropiados de funcionamiento y mantenimiento,

brindar asesoría para la resolución de fallas o problemas de proceso. Si necesita dicha asistencia,
comuníquese con nosotros al (801) 526-2000 (EE. UU.), por FAX al (801) 526-2001 o llame a su
representante de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. Para ello consulte la página “Oficinas”.

5. Pedidos de partes y repuestos

Para garantizar que usted reciba los repuestos correctos para su equipo y evitar demoras innecesarias
es importante que entregue cada pedido entregue la siguiente información:

a. Tamaño y tipo de unidad: Esta información se indica en la portada de este manual y en el

Listado de Partes.

En el presente caso: CELDA DE FLOTACION WEMCO N° 300 M3

Rev. A G-F5100
1-2009 INFORMACION GENERAL 12319
MCN2006-0001 3

b. Número de pedido del cliente: Se debe indica en el Índice del Listado de Partes y en el Listado
de Partes.

c. Número y descripción de partes: Información enumerada en el Listado de Partes de cada ítem.

Envíe sus pedidos de partes a FLSmidth Minerals S.A y para ello consulte la página “Oficinas” en este
manual.

6. Almacenamiento

Cuando el equipo no se instala inmediatamente, el almacenamiento apropiado es importante para

garantizar la cobertura de la garantía.

a. Almacene los motores, si se enviaron por separado, en un recinto seco y ventilado,

si es posible. Consulte las instrucciones del fabricante del motor. Si debe
almacenar a la intemperie, cúbralos con una lona para protegerlos contra la lluvia,
humedad y el polvo.

b. Almacene los mecanismos de la unidad de accionamiento colocándolos en bloques

sobre el nivel del suelo y cúbralos con una lona.

c. Si el almacenamiento dura más de 2 meses o se realiza en condiciones adversas,

deberá colocar un agente anti-corrosivo apropiado a todas las superficies que
puedan verse afectadas por el óxido o la corrosión.

d. Compruebe la formación de óxido, especialmente en superficies brillantes de acero

o sin pintar. Retire el óxido o la corrosión y aplique un anti-corrosivo adecuado.

e. Consulte Almacenamiento de productos de caucho a continuación.

7. Almacenamiento de productos de caucho

Durante su almacenamiento, los productos de caucho pueden estar expuestos a los siguientes
factores: temperatura, humedad, ozono, luz solar, aceites, solventes, líquidos corrosivos, gases,
insectos, roedores y radiación.

a. Las partes de caucho deben protegerse del sol y del daño físico causado por
objetos cortantes o que provoquen roturas.

b. El área de almacenamiento debe mantenerse relativamente fresca, protegida de la

luz solar sin humedad y moho. Todos los productos de caucho deben almacenarse
siguiendo el método primero en entrar, primero en salir ya que incluso en estas
condiciones un período de tiempo de almacenamiento inusual puede tener como
resultado el deterioro de ciertos productos.

c. Los productos de caucho no deben almacenarse en condiciones de mucha o poca

humedad.

d. La temperatura de almacenamiento ideal para los productos de caucho es de 50 a

70°F (de 10 a 21°C) con un límite máximo de 100°F (38°C). Si se almacenan a una
temperatura menor a 32°F (0°C), es posible que algunos productos se endurezcan y
se deban calentar antes de su uso.
Rev. A G-F5100
1-2009 INFORMACION GENERAL 12319
MCN2006-0001 4

Los productos de caucho no deben almacenarse cerca de fuentes de calor, tales como
radiadores y calefacción de base.

e. Para proteger los productos de caucho contra los efectos adversos del ozono, no deben
almacenarse cerca de equipos eléctricos que pueda generar ozono ni tampoco permanecer
durante períodos prolongados en áreas geográficas conocidas por sus elevadas
concentraciones de ozono. Se debe evitar también la exposición a la luz solar directa o
reflejada.

f. En lo posible, almacenar los productos de caucho en sus contenedores de embalaje originales,

especialmente cuando dichos contendores son cajones de madera o cajas de cartón, ya que
de esa forma se brindará protección contra los efectos de deterioro de aceites, solventes,
líquidos corrosivos y también se ofrecerá cierta protección contra el ozono y la luz solar.

g. Debido a que algunos roedores e insectos se reproducen en los productos de caucho, se debe
proporcionar la protección adecuada contra los mismos.

8. Pintura y soldadura en terreno

Si se realizara una aplicación en terreno de una capa protectora (pintura, caucho, etc.) al mecanismo,
es posible que esta deba aplicarse primero en algunos componentes antes de su instalación. Las
partes a las que se les debe aplicar una capa protectora antes de la instalación son las que serán
inaccesibles después de su instalación. No pintar a menos de 3” de todas las soldaduras realizadas en
terreno. Estudie cuidadosamente los planos de ensamblaje y montaje, luego determine las áreas con
soldaduras en terreno necesarias antes de comenzar el proceso.

ADVERTENCIA: Los vapores liberados durante las actividades de soldadura y corte pueden
ser nocivos para la salud de los operadores. Algunos gases, tales como los
que se producen al trabajar con zinc, cadmio y superficies pintadas, pueden
resultar tóxicos.
Rev. A G1-D19
11-96 PROCEDIMIENTO DE SEGURIDAD 12319
MCN96-0704 5

B. PROCEDIMIENTO DE SEGURIDAD

DECLARACION DE SEGURIDAD

Ningún miembro del personal autorizado o no autorizado, debe depender por completo de los dispositivos de
seguridad para evitar accidentes. La finalidad de las funciones y dispositivos de seguridad es complementar
las prácticas apropiadas, cuidadosas y seguras del individuo.

ADVERTENCIA: Si se comprometen o se ignoran los procedimientos de seguridad

proporcionados en este manual es posible que se produzcan
lesiones personales graves con resultado de muerte.
Recomendamos cumplir las prácticas de seguridad aceptadas por la
industria, así como también las establecidas por organismos
responsables de su fiscalización.

ADVERTENCIAS DE SEGURIDAD PARA EL PERSONAL

ADVERTENCIA: Tenga extremo cuidado cuando trabaje cerca de partes rotatorias u otras partes movibles
para evitar lesiones personales o a terceros. Además, cualquier persona que ingrese al
área donde se encuentra el equipo deberá utilizar los elementos de seguridad adecuados
como son lentes, zapatos de seguridad, cascos, etc.

ADVERTENCIA: Mantenga los objetos extraños, las manos, etc., alejados de los componentes móviles del
equipo (correas, poleas). No operar el equipo si ha retirado sus protecciones, cubiertas
eléctricas u otros dispositivos de seguridad.

ADVERTENCIA: Suprimir el paso de corriente desde el equipo instalando un disyuntor manual, desconectar
el interruptor o dispositivo de bloqueo antes de comenzar cualquier trabajo o tarea de
mantenimiento en el equipo. Bloquear y enclavar el interruptor desconectado para que no
pueda activarse.

ADVERTENCIA: La experiencia con este equipo o el conocimiento del mismo son esenciales para un
desensamblaje y una reparación segura. Por lo tanto, en caso de dudas sobre los
procedimientos seguros, contacte de inmediato a FLSmidth Minerals S.A.

ADVERTENCIA: Los vapores emanados durante los procesos de soldadura y corte pueden ser nocivos
para la salud de los operadores. Algunos gases, tales como los que se producen al
trabajar con zinc, cadmio y superficies pintadas, pueden resultar tóxicos.
Rev. A F5-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 6

HERRAMIENTAS Y SUMINISTROS ESPECIALES PARA LA INSTALACION (SUMINISTRADOS POR

TERCEROS)

• Medidor de Tensión de Correas

• Teodolito
• Llave de torque
• Resorte de alineación
• 4 bloques pequeños de alineación
• Nivel de Carpintero
• Compuesto tipo “No Adhesivo”
• Equipo de Soldadura
• Equipo de Levante

INSTALACION DE LA CELDA DE FLOTACION

Los tanques se instalan en terreno según la orientación de los planos de Arreglo General y planos de
Ensamble.

Nota: Consultar planos indicados en capítulo “Planos de Arreglo General” de este manual con respecto a
orientación de la caja de descarga, celda del estanque y secuencia de montaje. Es muy importante
que los números de identificación de los componentes coincidan con los números indicados
en el Plano de Montaje y Listado de Partes.

Nota: La instalación se realiza de acuerdo con los planos de montaje y listado de partes, copias de los
cuales se incluyen en este manual. En caso de existir discrepancias entre planos e instrucciones,
prevalecerán los planos en todos los casos. Si existen discrepancias mayores o cualquier duda,
favor consultar inmediatamente a su representante local de FLSmidth Minerals S.A al Departamento
de Servicio al Cliente.

1. Fundaciones

Consultar Planos de Arreglo General para detalles del modelo de perno de anclaje, detalles del fondo
del soporte del tanque, requerimiento de espacio y altura.

a. La fundación debe sostener el peso operativo y el momento de volcamiento del equipo según
cuadro de “Datos de Diseño por celda” del Plano de Arreglo General.

b. La fundación del tanque deben estar nivelada dentro de una tolerancia total de ±1/8" (±3 mm).
Una superficie de montaje nivelada ahorrará tiempo más adelante durante la instalación de los
tanques.

2. Levante de Estanque y Componentes

ADVERTENCIA: Tomar las precauciones necesarias durante el levante de

componentes estructurales para evitar lesiones a usted mismo o a su
personal. Además, toda persona que ingresa a la zona donde se
encuentre el equipo, debe portar el equipo de seguridad necesario
como lentes, zapatos, y casco de seguridad, etc.
Rev. A F5-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 7

ADVERTENCIA: Mantener una distancia prudente durante el levante del equipo.

PRECAUCION: Todo el trabajo de levante y amarre debe ser realizado por personal
experimentado, debidamente entrenado en procedimientos adecuados de
amarre y levante de componentes estructurales de gran tamaño.

PRECAUCION: Comprobar que el equipo de amarre y grúas tenga la capacidad necesaria.

a. Las secciones del estanque, cajas de alimentación y descarga y componentes internos (tubo
de succión, fondo falso, canaletas radiales, etc.) se embarcan separadamente para montaje en
terreno.
b. Confirmar capacidad de grúa y dispositivos de amarre para comprobar que tienen la capacidad
de sostener el peso del equipo especificado en Listado de Partes.

c. Antes de retirar cada componente o unidad del carro de transporte es importante confirmar el
retiro de bloqueos, apuntalamiento, flejes de fijación y que la unidad esté lista para su traslado.

ADVERTENCIA: No retirar bloqueo, apuntalamiento o cualquier material de protección o

soporte hasta finalizar la instalación del estanque.

d. En lo posible, usar levante de multipuntos.

e. Durante el levante de componentes estructurales del equipo evitar inclinar o torcer los
componentes. Usar vigas de extensión, si fuese necesario, para sostener completamente los
componentes a medida que son levantados.

f. Confirmar que el equipo que se levanta o el equipo de levante NO tenga contacto con cables
eléctricos aéreos, etc.

g. Levantar el equipo una o dos pulgadas fuera del carro de transporte para comprobar que su
desplazamiento es libre y equilibrado. Mantener nivelado en todo momento durante el levante.
Quizás sea necesario usar un cable amortiguador para estabilizar la unidad.

h. No mover el equipo a tirones o en forma brusca y evitar que se golpee contra el suelo, su base
u otros equipos.
Rev. A F5-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 8

3. Montaje en terreno del estanque de la Celda

a. Consultando los procedimientos de levante mencionados anteriormente, primero coloque los

segmentos del fondo del estanque en su lugar de fundación y sobre los pernos de anclaje y
oriéntelos de acuerdo a lo indicado en los planos de distribución general. Instale pero no
apriete los pernos de anclaje del estanque (fabricados por otros)

b. Los segmentos inferiores y superiores del estanque están enflanchados, los cuales serán
unidos de acuerdo a las especificaciones y planos de ensamble. Realizar retoques de pintura,
si procede.

c. El procedimiento de ensamble será desarrollado por el instalador

Nota: Durante la puesta en marcha inicial, es posible que se observen pequeñas filtraciones
en bridas y conexiones. Normalmente éstas se sellan rápidamente a medida que se
rellenan con material fino luego de la puesta en marcha.

d. Instalar las vigas de soporte en las bridas del estanque, como indica el plano de montaje del
estanque. Apretar sujetadores.

e. Utilizar técnicas múltiples de levante, levantar el estanque desde la estructura de soporte

temporal con las vigas de soporte y ajustarlas a su posición final.

f. El chequeo del nivel del estanque se hace en ambas direcciones (90o) de lado a lado.

El estanque debe tener una nivelación en un rango total de ±3/8” (±10 mm). Favor, contactar
a FLSmidth Minerals S.A si las canaletas no cumplen con estas tolerancias. Consultar Figura
N° 1 (Página 8).

g. Verificar la nivelación de las vigas de soporte sobre la conexión del estanque. Los cuatro
puntos deben tener una tolerancia mínima de nivelación dentro de ±1/16” (1.6mm). Si estos
valores están fuera de rango, ajustar instalando lainas. Fijar la viga a los sujetadores del
estanque.
Rev. A F5-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 9

5
3

Figura N° 1

1 - Canaleta radial 3 – Compuerta 5 – Nivelación.

2 - Canaleta periférica 4 - Pared del Estanque

4. Instalación de los depósitos de alimentación y descarga

El procedimiento de instalación de los dos depósitos es el mismo por lo que las instrucciones
entregadas a continuación, para el montaje del depósito de alimentación, es aplicable al montaje del
depósito de descarga.

a. Consultando el plano de montaje final, aplicar una capa del sello de uretano especificado entre
la brida de conexión del estanque y el depósito de alimentación en la primera celda del
estanque.

b. Cuando el sello tenga una apariencia pegajosa, instalar la empaquetadura en la brida. Esta
debe extenderse a través de toda la longitud de la brida dentro de los orificios de pernos a
ambos costados y fuera de los orificios de perno en la parte superior e inferior como indica el
Plano e Montaje Definitivo. No se permite la existencia de separaciones, arrugas o traslapos.

c. Colocar una capa de sello de 6 mm sobre la superficie de la empaquetadura de la caja de

alimentación descrita en el párrafo anterior.

d. La caja de alimentación debe estar en contacto con la primera celda del estanque. Las
superficies se adherirán al hacer contacto. Apernar las bridas de la caja de alimentación y la
primera celda del estanque con los tornillos de máquina, pernos y arandelas especificados.
Rev. A F5-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 10

e. Inicialmente, apretar levemente todos los tornillos de máquina y tuercas y finalmente apriete
uniformemente todos los sujetadores (Ver plano N° 114808 “Valores para Torque”). Si las
superficies embridadas no hacen contacto al unirse, éstas deben unirse con los tornillos de
máquina y tuercas.

Nota: Durante la puesta en marcha inicial, es posible observar pequeñas filtraciones en las
bridas y conexiones. Normalmente, estas se sellan rápidamente a medida que se comienzan a
rellenar con finos luego de la puesta en marcha.

5. Instalación de la Válvula de Dardo

Hay dos tipos diferentes de montaje para las bisagras de las valvulas dardos para los tanques
descendientes y para los de descarga. Asegurarse de consultar los planos y el listado de repuestos
correspondientes cuando se instalen las válvulas dardo con bisagras.

a. Instalar las ménsulas actuadoras a los soportes del mecanismo, usando los sujetadores
especificados.

Nota: La ménsula actuadora del tanque de descarga fue incluida con las piezas para el
montaje del mismo.

b. Montar el actuador a las ménsulas actuadoras, consultando las instrucciones del fabricante en
la sección Accesorio del equipo de este manual.

c. Instalar las placas adaptadoras de la válvula dardo al tanque usando los sujetadores
especificados. Consultar los planos de la Válvula Dardo con Bisagras.

d. Colocar la válvula dardo al marco usando los sujetadores especificados.

e. Instalar la placa adaptadora de la válvula del dardo al marco usando los sujetadores
especificados.

f. Con el apuntalamiento del fondo del tanque, poner la válvula dardo y el marco en posición.

g. Usando las bisagras, conectar el marco con el tanque, haciendo uso de los planos de las
válvulas dardo con bisagras.

h. Instalar la barra de la válvula al eje actuador usando la horquilla y los sujetadores

especificados.

i. Unir la barra de la válvula al marco usando las bisagras, las placas y los sujetadores
especificados.

j. Asegurar todos los sujetadores.

k. Quitar el apuntalamiento que sujeta el marco con el tanque.

l. Comprobar que el montaje de válvula dardo opere apropiadamente y que la válvula dardo esté
sellada como corresponde sobre las placas adaptadoras. Verificar el funcionamiento y
asegurarse que las bisagras operen bien. Ajustar si es necesario.
Rev. A F5-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 11

6. Instalación del tubo de aspiración y doble fondo

a. De acuerdo con los números de parte que aparecen en el plano del Conjunto Estanque,
coloque las secciones de tubo en su posición sobre los tubos de soporte del Tubo de
Aspiración (draft tube) (parte inferior del estanque).

b. Coloque las golillas de nylon en la parte superior de los tubos soporte del tubo de succión.
Use silicona para mantener las golillas en su posición. En cuanto a los procedimientos de
levante, coloque el tubo de succión y las orejas en su lugar en el estanque, orientándolos como
indica el plano de montaje del estanque.

c. Instale el tubo de succión sobre el falso fondo y sobre los soportes del tubo de succión, usando
para ello los pernos y golillas especificados.

d. Monte los arietes del fondo falso de la misma forma, según lo indicado en el Plano de Montaje
del Estanque.

e. Verifique que el tubo de aspiración y el doble fondo estén bien centrados en el estanque, y
efectúe los ajustes necesarios. Apriete bien todos los pernos de montaje (Para el torque a
aplicar ver plano N° 114808 “Valores para Torque”).

7. Instalación del anillo partido (collar)

a. De acuerdo con los números de parte del plano del Montaje del Estanque, instale la unidad de
anillo partido en posición en el tubo de succión, utilizando para ello los pernos especificados.

b. Verifique el centrado del anillo partido en el tubo de aspiración e instale los pernos sin apretar.

8. Instalación de las unidades de bafles verticales y canaletas radiales

a. Instale los vertederos, de acuerdo a los planos de ensamblaje de los vertederos, canaletas
radiales y bafles.

b. Coloque los bafles a la pared del estanque, de acuerdo a lo indicado en los planos de
ensamblaje de los vertederos, canaletas radiales y bafles.

c. Instale los soportes de las canaletas a los bafles, de acuerdo a lo indicado en los planos de
ensamblaje de los vertederos, canaletas radiales y bafles.

d. Monte los bafles verticales a los soportes de los bafles, y las canaletas a los soportes de las
canaletas, de acuerdo a lo indicado en los planos de ensamblaje de los vertederos, canaletas
radiales y bafles.

e. Instale las canaletas radiales, montándolas en los bafles verticales con los pernos
especificados. Consulte el plano del Ensamble Canaleta Radial.
Rev. A F5-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 12

f. Verifique todas las canaletas radiales con respecto a su altura, nivel y separación con el borde
del estanque periférico. Ajuste, si es necesario, usando para ello los agujeros de montaje
ranurados. Apriete la totalidad de los pernos y las abrazaderas de mangueras (Para el torque
a aplicar ver plano N° 114808 “Valores para Torque”).

9. Instalación de la unidad del mecanismo

El mecanismo deberá armarse totalmente en un soporte temporal (suministrado por terceros) para
ser posteriormente levantado e instalado en las vigas de soporte del estanque como un componente
individual.

a. Colocar el soporte del mecanismo en el accesorio de soporte o bloqueo a una altura suficiente
que permita el montaje del mecanismo en terreno.

b. Instalar la placa de montaje del motor, placa de montaje del reductor y placas de retención de
las vigas de soporte como indican los planos de montaje del mecanismo y unidad del
accionamiento, siguiendo las instrucciones del Listado de Partes para los sujetadores
especificados.

c. Instalar el motor en la placa de montaje del motor, usando los sujetadores especificados.

d. Si el acoplamiento se embarca separado del reductor, instálelo en este momento. Asegúrese

de que las superficies de brida de encaje estén completamente limpias y luego instale el eje la
celda de Flotación 300 M3 “WEMCO” en el acoplamiento del reductor usando los tornillos de
máquina, arandelas y tuercas especificados en el plano de Montaje del Mecanismo.

e. Descienda el reductor con la unidad del eje a través de la parte superior del soporte del
mecanismo colocándolo en la placa de montaje del reductor usando los tornillos de máquina
especificados. Asegúrese que las superficies de encaje estén totalmente limpias.

f. Instalar la brida del adaptador en el rotor-estrella como indica el plano de montaje del
mecanismo. Asegúrese de que las superficies de ajuste estén completamente limpias.

g. Usando un sistema de levante apropiado, eleve el rotor-estrella hasta su posición de montaje y

coloque el eje del adaptador al eje de flotación usando los tornillos de máquina especificados.
Instalar la tapa del rotor como especifican los planos.

Nota: Pintar los sujetadores o cubrir con sello luego del montaje para evitar la corrosión.

h. Montar el CROWDER / STAND PIPE en la base del mecanismo soporte.

i. Montar las dos partes que componen el DISPERSOR en el CROWDER de acuerdo a los
planos de montaje.

j. Aplicar silicona a cada una de las protecciones de poliuretano de los pernos de fijación, para
evitar la pérdida de las mismas.

k. Apretar todas las tuercas en forma uniforme en medios giros para levantar uniformemente el
dispersor hasta que todos los pernos alcancen un torque de 150 pies por libra. (200 N-m).
Rev. A F5-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 13

l. Recuerde que debe volver a reapretar las tuercas a un torque de 150-pies por libra (200 N-m)
luego de un mes de operación de la celda de flotación.

m. Instalar los 12 sectores de cubierta del dispersor en forma individual, montándolos en el

dispersor y empleando para ello las placas de fijación. Dejar los sujetadores sin apretar hasta
que se instalen y se fijen los sectores de cubierta.

n. Conectar los sectores de cubierta del dispersor entre sí, usando los sujetadores especificados
en el plano de montaje del mecanismo. Apretar los sujetadores sin aplicar torque en este
momento.

o. Apretar todos los demás sujetadores, siguiendo las instrucciones del plano de valores de
torque del capítulo de planos de este manual.

p. Usando las técnicas de levante de multipuntos y las eslingas debajo de los extremos de las
vigas de soporte del mecanismo, levantar la unidad de mecanismo con la grúa justo a la altura
necesaria para verificar su nivelación y equilibrio. Verificar el sistema de amarre y comprobar
que se desplace libremente.

q. Centrar cuidadosamente la unidad del mecanismo en el estanque antes de bajarla a su

posición definitiva. Si los sectores del estator quedan atascados o apretados pueden
resultar dañados, si eso ocurre, deben cambiarse por unidades nuevas.

r. Bajar la unidad del mecanismo alrededor de 12” (300 mm) sobre las vigas de soporte del
estanque, orientándolas como indica el plano de montaje del mecanismo. Bajar lenta y
cuidadosamente la unidad del mecanismo hasta su posición, mientras verifica que los sectores
del estator tengan la separación adecuada con respecto a las vigas de soporte del mecanismo
y unidad de canaleta radial. Verificar la separación entre rotor y unidad del collar. Acuñar
cualquier espacio existente entre el mecanismo y la viga del estanque, como indica el plano de
montaje final. Acuñar cualquier separación entre las vigas del mecanismo y las vigas del
estanque, como se indica en el Plano de Montaje Final unir las vigas del mecanismo con las
vigas del estanque usando los sujetadores especificados. Aplicar torque de acuerdo a los
valores de la Tabla de Torque (Ver plano N° 114808 “Valores para Torque”).

s. Instalar las vigas de la plataforma, viga de refuerzo de escaleras, y pasamanos, de acuerdo a

requerimientos y siguiendo las indicaciones del plano de Montaje de la Plataforma.
t. Instalar plataformas y parrillas de piso.
u. Instalar guarda correas y la cubierta, luego de la instalación de las poleas acanaladas.

10. Instalación del guarda correas

a. Instale el protector de cubierta, consultando los planos de ensamblaje de guarda correas y de

ensamblaje del mecanismo

ADVERTENCIA: Todos los guarda correas deben instalarse antes de poner en

funcionamiento cualquier unidad propulsora. Las correas y poleas
desprotegidas pueden generar lesiones graves.
Rev. A F5-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 14

11. Instalación de Poleas y ajuste

Nota: Aplicar un compuesto “no adherente” al eje del motor y a los diámetros internos de la polea
del rotor antes de instalar la polea.

a. Instalar el buje cónico seccionado de la polea conductora en el eje del motor, con su respectiva
chaveta. Colocar la polea en el buje. Instalar pernos, pero dejarlos sueltos para su futuro
ajustamiento vertical.

b. Instalar el buje cónico seccionado de polea conducida, incluyendo la chaveta, con la brida
sobre el hombro del eje del mecanismo. Colocar la polea conducida en su ubicación en el
buje. Ajustar los tornillos en secuencia cruzada, según valores indicados en Especificaciones
de Torque para pernos, de la sección Mantenimiento de este manual.

c. Chequear el desplazamiento horizontal de la polea haciéndola girar manualmente. Si el

desplazamiento es superior a ± 1/32” (± 1 mm), aflojar la polea desde el buje seccionado
cónico. Repetir este proceso hasta que la medida del desplazamiento cumpla con los valores
de tolerancia anteriormente indicados. Ajustar los pernos.

6
3
4
2

Figura N° 2

1.- Alineación incorrecta. 3. - Poleas conducida 5. - (4) Bloques espaciadores

Se necesita alinear. trabajados con maquinarias.
2. - Alineación correcta 4. - Polea conductora 6. - Cuerda de nylon

d. El último ajuste de la Polea Conductora. Con una conducción de láser o una viga de alineación,
ajustar la parte superior de la polea conductora para hacerla coincidir con la superficie superior
de la polea conducida. Las superficies de ambas poleas deben estar dentro de las medidas
±1/32” (±1 milímetro) a lo largo de línea central de la polea. (Ver Figura 10). Ajustar los
sujetadores.

NO soltar los pernos de montaje del motor o tuercas de ajuste para alinear la polea del motor.
Rev. A F5-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 15

12. Instalación de la correa de transmisión

a. Ajuste la holgura de la correa. Suelte las contratuercas de los pernos de ajuste y asegure el
motor con los dos (2) pernos de ajuste, girándolos por igual y permitiendo que exista la
holgura suficiente para que las correas en V desciendan sobre la polea del motor y
permanezcan en su lugar.

b. Instale las correas en V en cada mecanismo. Coloque las correas en V sobre las poleas y en
las gargantas. (Ver Listado de partes del ensamblaje del mecanismo para obtener el número
requerido de correas). Es posible que existan condiciones en las que el número de ranuras de
las poleas proporcionadas sea mayor que el número de correas suministradas. En ese caso,
instale las correas en ranuras paralelas

c. Tense las correas en V girando uniformemente los pernos de regulación, juntos para disminuir
la huelga de las correas. La alineación correcta distribuye la carga proporcionalmente para
cada correa en V

d. Para lograr la tensión correcta, consulte la placa de tensión de correas en el guarda correas, y
según indicaciones de la Figura N° 3, para obtener la tensión y la curvatura requeridas por
correa. Una correa de transmisión en V transmite exitosamente la potencia nominal en caballos
de fuerza si las correas se tensan correctamente. No supere la tensión especificada para las
correas

Nota: La tensión excesiva de las correas ocasionará un gran desgaste de las mismas, lo cual
reducirá la vida del útil del rodamiento y posiblemente haga fallar el eje.

e. Luego de tensar las correas en V, ajuste las contratuercas de los pernos de ajuste y asegure
los pernos de montaje de los puntales del motor.

Figura N° 3

1- PRECAUCION: EVITAR EL EXCESO DE TENSION DE LAS CORREAS EN V (CIRCUITO ROUGHER)

2- 33 Libras Máx. / 22 Libras min. Por correa / banda 3.- 0.87” Curvatura
1- PRECAUCION: EVITAR EL EXCESO DE TENSION DE LAS CORREAS EN V (CIRCUITO CLEANER/SCAV.)

2- 31 Libras Máx. / 21 Libras min. Por correa / banda 3.- 0.88” Curvatura
Rev. A F5-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 16

f. Posteriormente y luego de unos pocos días de funcionamiento, las correas se asentarán en las
ranuras de las poleas y es posible que sea necesario regular su ajuste. Si las correas
producen chirridos en otro momento diferente a la puesta en marcha, repetir el procedimiento
para lograr la tensión correcta de la correa.

13. Instalación de la unidad de flotador de nivel

Nota: Las plataformas deben instalarse antes de colocar la unidad de flotador de nivel.

a. Siguiendo las indicaciones del Plano de Montaje del Flotador de Nivel, proceda a armar la
unidad de flotador de nivel (si no viene instalada de fábrica).

b. Siguiendo las instrucciones de los planos de Montaje Final de la Unidad de Nivel de Flotador y
planos de Montaje Final, instalar nivel de flotador en la pasarela usando los pernos y tuercas
tipo U especificadas.

14. Instalación del sensor de nivel de espuma

Nota: Las plataformas deben instalarse antes de colocar la unidad de flotador de nivel.

a. Guiándose por el plano de Montaje del Nivel de espuma, localice e instale los puntales del
sensor de espuma a las vigas del estanque, en terreno y taladre haciendo calzar los orificios de
montaje, usando los puntales como ejemplo.

b. Montar el conjunto del sensor a las vigas del estanque, usando los pernos especificados en el
plano del Conjunto del Sensor de Nivel de espuma.

15. Instalación de controles y energía eléctrica

Controles eléctricos

FLSmidth Minerals S.A. no suministra, instala, ni realiza el cableado de interconexión, tubería

neumática, etc. Sin embargo, tenga en cuenta que el cableado de interconexión y las conexiones de
cableado deben cumplir con los códigos eléctricos locales. Consulte el plano del diagrama de
tuberías e instrumentos.

Es importante tomar nota de lo siguiente:

a. Todo el cableado debe instalarse en un conducto de corriente pesado debidamente atornillado.

Para todo el cableado del motor se debe utilizar un conducto pesado y flexible. Queda
prohibido el uso de conductores y cables sin aislamiento

b. Cuando conecte aluminio con cobre u otros materiales de cableado diferentes, se deben
utilizar empalmes/separadores para evitar el contacto de los materiales. Además, se
recomienda el uso de un antioxidante en las conexiones. De esa forma, se evita la corrosión
galvánica que puede ocasionar un incendio por problemas eléctricos e interrupciones
peligrosas de las conexiones.
Rev. A F5-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 17

c. Todas las cajas y paneles eléctricos deben estar cubiertos durante el funcionamiento o cuando
la energía esté conectada en el equipo. Observe todas las advertencias en los paneles y en las
cajas eléctricas.

d. Conecte los motores a la energía de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante y asegúrese
de que los motores estén conectados a tierra. El sentido del rotor es a elección del cliente. Sin
embargo, FLSmidth Minerals S.A. recomienda que el sentido de rotación se alterne de un
estanque a otro estanque (es decir, uno de cada dos rotores tiene una dirección de
rotación opuesta o inversa con respecto al rotor del estanque anterior).

ADVERTENCIA: NO PONER EN OPERACIÓN EL EQUIPO SI EXISTEN

CAJAS O CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS SIN BLOQUEO.

ADVERTENCIA: INSTALAR TODAS LAS CUBIERTAS Y DISPOSITIVOS DE

PROTECCION ANTES DE PONER EN OPERACIÓN LA
UNIDAD. EL CONTACTO CON CORREAS, POLEAS O
ACOPLAMIENTOS PUEDE CAUSAR LESIONES.

e. Para garantizar un mantenimiento y una reparación segura, los motores deben poseer
dispositivos de bloqueo y enclavamientos individuales. Además, para evitar que el equipo
reanude su funcionamiento en forma accidental luego de un corte o sobrecarga de energía, el
cableado debe poseer un dispositivo de reencendido u otro tipo de dispositivo evite reanudar
accidentalmente el funcionamiento de los motores al producirse la recuperación del suministro
eléctrico.

f. Para las instrucciones de los controles, consultar las instrucciones de Operación en este
manual.

16. Inspección final antes de la puesta en marcha

a. Inspeccione los mecanismos, estanques y cajas en busca de tuercas y pernos sueltos,

herramientas, desechos y otros objetos. Compruebe que todos los protectores, dispositivos de
protección y cubiertas se encuentren debidamente instalados.

b. Realice una prueba con agua en el estanque y verifique si existen filtraciones. Las pérdidas
menores del tanque se pueden producir en las conexiones con los pernos pero desaparecerían
al sellarse completamente con los sólidos finos en la lechada de alimentación. Realice ajustes
o correcciones, de acuerdo a requerimientos.

c. Verifique que los controles funcionen automáticamente.

Rev. A F-D319
1-2009 INSTALACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 18

ADVERTENCIA: ESTUDIE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES CUIDADOSAMENTE

ANTES DE UTILIZAR LAS UNIDADES PARA GARANTIZAR
UN ENCENDIDO Y UN FUNCIONAMIENTO SEGURO Y
SATISFACTORIO. TODO EL PERSONAL ENCARGADO DEL
FUNCIONAMIENTO DEBE LEER Y COMPRENDER ESTAS
INSTRUCCIONES.

ADVERTENCIA: SI LAS UNIDADES PERMANECEN INACTIVAS DURANTE

UN PERIODO DE TIEMPO, BLOQUEAR EL PASO DE
CORRIENTE CON UN DISPOSITIVO DE BLOQUEO Y
ENCLAVAMIENTO APROBADOS PARA EVITAR UN
ENCENDIDO ACCIDENTAL Y PELIGROS POR PROBLEMAS
ELECTRICOS.

Instalación del conjunto de entrada de aire

1. Instalar el conjunto de entrada de aire, usando los pernos indicados en los planos respectivos.

2. Ajuste todos los pernos, de acuerdo a la sección de planos de este manual.

Rev. A G-X104
5-2009 CHEQUEO MECANICO DEFINITIVO 12319
MCN2002-0256 19

CHEQUEO MECÁNICO DEFINITIVO

FLSmidth Minerals S.A. exige que un representante de la Compañía realice un chequeo mecánico final en
terreno al término del período de instalación o montaje del equipo. Lo anterior es obligatorio salvo en caso
que exista un documento firmado por escrito del Representante de Servicio de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. luego
de finalizado este chequeo. De lo contrario, la garantía no tendrá validez.

No se considerará ningún tipo de inspección previa para la aceptación final a menos que exista una
autorización firmada por el representante de Servicio de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. Además, y de acuerdo a las
inspecciones previas, es probable que este chequeo final se facture como una llamada de servicio pagada
adicionalmente.

TRAMITES PARA ACCEDER AL SERVICIO

Los arreglos para el chequeo mecánico en terreno deben realizarse con una anticipación mínima de
dos semanas con su representante de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. Consultar página “Oficinas” del presente
manual para hacer los arreglos pertinentes.

NO LLENAR EL ESTANQUE CON AGUA

El chequeo mecánico no puede realizarse si el estanque está lleno de agua. En este caso, si el chequeo no
es factible, esta visita será considerada como una llamada de servicio pagada adicionalmente.
Rev. A F5-D411
2-2006 LUBRICACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 20

Las dos partes de la celda de flotación que requieren lubricación son: el motor y el reductor.

1. Para la lubricación del motor y el reductor, consultar las instrucciones y recomendaciones

del proveedor, en el capítulo “Accesorios” del presente manual.
Rev. A G1-D19
11-96 PROCEDIMIENTOS DE SEGURIDAD 12319
MCN96-0704 21

PRINCIPIOS DE SEGURIDAD

Ningún personal autorizado o no dependerá exclusivamente de los dispositivos de seguridad para la

prevención de accidentes. Los dispositivos y medidas de seguridad sólo constituyen un complemento del
adecuado cumplimiento de prácticas y normas de seguridad por parte de los empleados.

ADVERTENCIA: Si no se cumplen u observan los procedimientos de seguridad

incluidos en el presente manual es probable que se produzcan
accidentes o lesiones graves del personal e incluso la muerte. Por
tanto es obligatorio cumplir y observar todas las prácticas y normas
de seguridad generalmente aceptadas al igual que todas aquellas
establecidas por los organismos fiscalizadores pertinentes.

ADVERTENCIA DE SEGURIDAD PERSONAL

ADVERTENCIA: Tener sumo cuidado cuando se trabaja en las cercanías de piezas o partes móviles,
evitando lesiones a usted mismo o su personal. Además, toda persona que ingresa a
la zona donde se encuentra el equipo debe usar el equipo de seguridad
recomendado tales como guantes, lentes, zapatos, cascos, etc.

ADVERTENCIA: Mantener objetos extraños, manos, etc. a una distancia prudente de las piezas
móviles (correas, poleas). No operar el equipo si ha retirado los dispositivos de
protección o tapas.

ADVERTENCIA: Desconectar suministro de energía eléctrica del equipo mediante el uso de un

interruptor o disyuntor de desconexión manual o tecla de bloqueo antes de iniciar
cualquier trabajo o mantenimiento del equipo. Bloquear y tapar el interruptor de
desconexión de manera de evitar su activación.

ADVERTENCIA: La experiencia y conocimiento de este equipo es esencial para un desmontaje y

reparación segura del equipo. Por lo tanto, en caso de dudas con respecto a
procedimientos de seguridad, contactar inmediatamente a FLSmidth Minerals S.A.

ADVERTENCIA: Los vapores emanados durante el proceso de corte y soldadura pueden resultar
nocivos para la salud de los operadores. Algunos vapores como los producidos
durante el trabajo con Zinc, Cadmio y superficies pintadas pueden resultar altamente
tóxicos.
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 MANTENIMIENTO 12319
MCN2006-0039 22

A. INSPECCION Y MANTENIMIENTO GENERAL

ADVERTENCIA: Consultar página sobre advertencias de seguridad personal en este

manual antes de iniciar cualquier inspección, mantenimiento o reparación del equipo. El
término bloqueo indica que el suministro de energía eléctrica se interrumpe mediante un
bloqueo o enclavamiento.

La limpieza general, inspección y mantenimiento preventivo del equipo de flotación se realiza en forma
regular de acuerdo a la frecuencia recomendada y cada vez es necesario detener el funcionamiento de las
unidades.

1. Limpieza general

Mantener pasamanos, escaleras y zona general de trabajo totalmente despejados sin obstáculos,
como herramientas, restos de huaipe, cajas, etc. Limpiar derrames de lubricante, agua, etc. Retirar
periódicamente cualquier acumulación de sólidos mediante un lavado intenso del mecanismo en la
parte inferior del accionamiento del motor, incluyendo estanque e inspeccionar totalmente el equipo.
Dejar drenajes abiertos hasta finalizar el proceso de limpieza.

2. Tensión del accionamiento de correas en V.

ADVERTENCIA: Bloquear paso de energía eléctrica hacia el accionamiento.

Confirmar tensión de correas en forma semestral y ajustar si las correas presentan chirridos.

a. Retirar guarda-correa superior.

Verificar desgaste, grietas y cristalización de componentes internos de la correa, principales

características que aconsejan un cambio de correas. Si existe una correa dañada, es necesario
cambiarlas todas. Las nuevas correas en V se instalan en pares.

b. Verificar tensión de correas, siguiendo indicaciones de la placa de seguridad de correas en V

instalada en la unidad de guarda-correas para confirmar tensión y deflexión para cada correa.
Consultar Figura N° 3 (Página 15) que muestra una reproducción de esta placa.

c. Para regular la tensión de las correas en V, soltar levemente los cuatro pernos de la placa del
motor para permitir mover la placa. Luego girar las dos tuercas de regulación en forma
uniforme a la tensión necesaria de libras o al valor indicado de deflexión de la placa de tensión.
Las tuercas deben girarse en forma uniforme para mantenerse igualmente alineadas en
sentido paralelo a las poleas para realizar una distribución de carga uniforme en cada correa.

d. Volver a verificar la tensión, consultando la placa de seguridad de las correas en V y garantizar

una tensión adecuada. Un accionamiento de correas en V transmite su valor de potencia en
forma adecuada si las correas tienen la tensión necesaria. Un exceso de tensión produce un
desgaste excesivo de correas, acortando la vida útil del motor y finalmente se traduce en una
falla del eje.

e. Reinstalar tapa del guarda-correas.

Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 MANTENIMIENTO 12319
MCN2006-0039 23

ADVERTENCIA: Instalar guarda-correas antes de poner en marcha el accionamiento.

3. Lubricación

Consultar instrucciones de LUBRICACION con respecto a frecuencia y lubricante recomendado.

4. Unidad del Control de Aire

La unidad de control de aire instalada alrededor del eje y del tubo vertical permite el paso de aire entre
el interior del tubo vertical y el exterior. El flujo de aire se controla mediante una compuerta deslizante
que debe permanecer totalmente abierta para que el flujo de aire circule libremente desde el rotor y
genere la máxima cantidad de espuma, disminuyendo el consumo de espumante.

Verificar la existencia de acumulaciones de espuma y sólidos alrededor de la unidad y el eje,

eliminándolos con un chorro de agua para obtener una libre circulación de aire.

5. Unidades de válvulas de dardo y actuador

ADVERTENCIA: Bloquear paso de energía hacia el accionamiento del rotor como

medida de precaución cada vez que ingrese al estanque.

a. La formación de costras puede disminuir la efectividad de las válvulas. Revisar, mensual o

periódicamente de acuerdo a la experiencia práctica, el movimiento del eje durante el
accionamiento del cilindro con respecto a filtración, etc. Confirmar, además, que el aire esté
limpio y tenga la presión adecuada. Ver más adelante desde el punto b hasta el d para la
regulación de las válvulas.

b. Durante las paradas de planta es importante confirmar desgaste de válvulas de dardo y

asientos circulares. El asiento de la válvula está expuesto a una considerable abrasión y
probablemente requiera un cambio periódico.

Cambiar asentamiento tirando la válvula hasta su posición máxima. Luego desconectar placa
de adaptador de válvula existente y anillo de refuerzo de goma (asiento) y cambiarlo por una
placa y unidad de placa de refuerzo nueva. Bajar la válvula hasta el centro del anillo de
refuerzo y luego apretar placa del adaptador.

c. Si la válvula de dardo no se acomoda al empujar totalmente el brazo de levante del actuador

en posición descendente entonces es necesario realizar un ajuste mecánico. No hacer el
ajuste mecánico con el controlador de nivel.

1) Extender los vástagos de las válvulas de dardo de forma tal que éstas se asienten en los
aros de refuerzo (que rodean las aberturas inferiores).

2) A medida que baja lentamente las válvulas de dardo, observar para comprobar si ingresan y
se acomodan concéntricamente en los aros de refuerzo.
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 MANTENIMIENTO 12319
MCN2006-0039 24

3) Los ejes de las válvulas deben quedar perpendiculares y centrados con respecto a los aros
de refuerzo. Si una válvula de dardo aparece descentrada, regular ajustando el rodamiento
del vástago de la válvula en los orificios ranurados, verificando que quede totalmente fija
luego de la regulación. Quizás, sea necesario regular también el ajuste de la unidad
cilindro/actuador o cambiar rodamiento gastado (buje) del vástago de válvula.

4) Las válvulas de dardo también deben asentarse en las placas sobre los aros de refuerzo
cuando éstas quedan totalmente extendidas. De lo contrario es necesario regular el
actuador de la válvula en su orificio ranurado desde la ménsula de soporte. En algunos
casos, la válvula está gastada y la única alternativa es cambiarla. Asegúrese que los
sujetadores estén fijos.

d. Si falla el cilindro del actuador neumático de la válvula, verificar la existencia de posibles

obstrucciones o roturas de tuberías de aire. La presión del suministro de aire no debe superar
las 15 psi. Como normalmente la presión de los cilindros actuadores de la válvula alcanza a 60
psi, cualquier presión superior puede dañar el actuador. (El aire se amplifica desde el control
de aire a una mayor presión de diseño).

e. Los problemas del controlador de nivel pueden originar un funcionamiento deficiente de los
distintos tipos de válvulas. Consultar instrucciones del fabricante de sensores y sistema de
controlador de nivel.

6. Parada programada para efectos de mantenimiento e Inspección

Durante una parada programada de la planta es necesario realizar las siguientes inspecciones o
mantenimientos.

Drenar y lavar el estanque para poder inspeccionar el rotor, collar, cubierta, dispersor y tubo vertical.

ADVERTENCIA: Bloquear paso de suministro de energía eléctrica. Ver Advertencia anterior.

a. Rotor-estrella y Collar

Verificar desgaste excesivo y daño de aspas del rotor y collar. Fijarse cuando exista metal
sobresaliente de la cubierta de goma, desgaste sin uniformidad, muescas profundas, etc. El
rotor debe invertir su sentido de rotación para aumentar su duración. Reemplazar el rotor si
presenta un desgaste importante.

Confirmar concentricidad del collar del tubo de succión con respecto al rotor. Esta debe
corresponder a aproximadamente + 1/8" (+ 3 mm) para entregar una óptima circulación y
suspensión de sólidos. La concentricidad sólo se puede realizar ajustando ya sea el
mecanismo o el fondo falso, si es necesario, junto con las asas del collar al tubo de aspiración
y no pueden ser ajustados.
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 MANTENIMIENTO 12319
MCN2006-0039 25

b. Sectores de Cubierta y Dispersor

NOTA: Los pernos de retención deben reapretarse durante el primer ciclo de mantenimiento
(aproximadamente un mes). Ver punto C.- ”Retiro e instalación de los componentes”. N° 5.-
Dispersor".

Verificar desgaste en dirección descendente de sectores hacia la tela de refuerzo. Cambiar

todos los sectores si uno aparece gastado. Reemplazar el dispersor si está roto, separado o
muy gastado.

c. Tubo Vertical

Confirmar grado de desgaste e instalación del revestimiento.

d. Unidad de Lavado de Canaleta

Si el equipo viene con unidades de lavado de canaleta (suministradas por terceros), cada vez
que vacía el estanque, abrir válvulas de cada tubería de agua hacia las canaletas y depósitos
de agua confirmando cualquier obstrucción o patrón de pulverización en cada boquilla de
descarga, fijándose si existen boquillas obstruidas.

Sacar boquillas para limpieza, durante el retiro, lavar con agua las tuberías para asegurarse
que queden completamente despejadas. Reinstalar y repetir chequeo.

e. Válvulas y Actuadores

Durante cada parada, lavar cajas de conexión y descarga, inspeccionando desgaste de

válvulas de dardo, aros de refuerzo, vástagos y guías. Cambiar todos los componentes que
tengan desgaste excesivo.

Chequear centrado de válvulas con respecto a aros de refuerzo activando las válvulas o
aplicando aire, revisando simultáneamente el libre desplazamiento de vástagos. Verificar
también alineación perpendicular de los ejes con respecto a la placa de aros de refuerzo para
garantizar el centrado de las válvulas. Ver punto A.- “Inspección y Mantenimiento General”. N°
5.- “Unidades de válvulas de dardo y actuador”.

f. Controles de Nivel Automático

Inspeccionar los controles de nivel de los depósitos de agua de acuerdo a las

recomendaciones del fabricante, consultando sus instrucciones para inspección y
mantenimiento.

g. Sujetadores

Revisar frecuentemente los sujetadores, al menos cada seis meses, para asegurar un apriete
adecuado. Consulte plano N° 114808 “Valores de Torque para sujetadores”
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 MANTENIMIENTO 12319
MCN2006-0039 26

B. RETIRO DEL MECANISMO

Para cambio o reparación del rotor –estrella, eje y rodamiento, tubo vertical, dispersor, es necesario
retirar el mecanismo desde el estanque.

ADVERTENCIA: Desconectar y cortar el paso de corriente del motor antes de comenzar el

desmontaje.

1. Retiro del Motor

Si debe sacar el motor, consultar punto C.- ”Retiro e instalación de los componentes”. N° 1.-
“Unidad del Motor."

2. Preparación para retiro del mecanismo (Consultar Plano de Montaje del Mecanismo)

a. Se requiere un dispositivo de soporte de mantenimiento o anclaje temporal para sostener el

mecanismo durante reparaciones o mantenimientos. Este debe sujetar el mecanismo sobre el
suelo soportándolo a una altura suficiente como para permitir retirar el rotor estrella. Este debe
soportar con sus cuatro vigas de marco de soporte. El dispositivo o anclaje debe ser
completamente seguro para sostener todo el peso del mecanismo, según lo indicado en el
Listado de Partes. Dejar espacio necesario para el retiro del rotor.

b. Es probable que la unidad de cubierta sea demasiado grande para encajar en la apertura
interna de la plataforma de pasarela cuando es necesario retirar tanto la pasarela y los
soportes. Si el tamaño de la cubierta es levemente superior a la separación entre los ángulos
de soporte del mecanismo, será necesario retirar alguno de los sectores de la cubierta y
soportes en un extremo para dejar el espacio requerido (A pesar de que los sectores de
cubierta son de caucho pueden quebrarse o dañarse). Por lo tanto los sectores de cubierta
deben desconectarse desde los brazos de soporte externos y de la brida de la tubería vertical.
Asegúrese de guardar los pernos y arandelas para su reutilización.

c. También es probable que el cono de espuma sea demasiado grande para encajar entre las
vigas de soporte y quizás deba retirar las dos secciones. Colocar las secciones en el fondo del
estanque.

d. Retirar los pernos de montaje de mecanismo y mantener los pernos y guardar cualquier cuña o
perno que se haya utilizado. Bloquear la localización de las cuñas.

3. Levante y retiro del mecanismo

a. Verificar las capacidades de la grúa y del equipo de levante para confirmar que puede levantar
el peso completo del mecanismo y vigas de soporte. Consultar punto anterior y pesos del
Listado de Partes.

ADVERTENCIA: Si el motor se conecta al suministro de energía eléctrica, bloquearlo y luego

desconectar el suministro hacia el motor.
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 MANTENIMIENTO 12319
MCN2006-0039 27

b. Retirar temporalmente los guardas correas superiores e inferiores de la polea de propulsión y

correas para evitar que se dañe la unidad de accionamiento del motor durante el proceso de
levante.

Para retirar las correas en V y poleas, soltar los dos pernos de ajuste colocados debajo de la
placa de montaje. Soltar cada perno en forma uniforme para evitar adherencia. Ajustar los
pernos con respecto a la tensión necesaria para retirar las correas desde la polea acanalada
del motor. Un movimiento de aproximadamente 2" (50 mm) debería permitir el retiro de la
correa. Retirar la polea acanalada.

c. Levantar el mecanismo usando las eslingas colocadas bajo las vigas de soporte del
mecanismo en cada una y con una viga extensora evitar el contacto las unidades superiores.
Nota: Usar arietes de levantes si vienen provistos con la unidad.

ADVERTENCIA: Asegúrese de que la unidad se desplace libremente y que los cables de

levante estén firmes antes de iniciar el proceso de levante.

Mantener el mecanismo nivelado en todo momento durante el levante usando una viga de
extensión para equilibrar la cara. Verificar el equilibrio levantando lo suficiente como para
sostener el mecanismo completo con los cables de levante.

Colocar el mecanismo en el accesorio de soporte de mantenimiento o anclaje. Fijar el

mecanismo.

d. Consultar más adelante el punto C.- “Retiro e Instalación de los Componentes”

4. Reinstalación del mecanismo

Básicamente, el mecanismo se instala en el orden inverso al retiro. Tomar nota de lo siguiente:

a. Utilizar el mismo método de levante durante la etapa de retiro de componentes.

b. Asegurarse de que las cuñas previamente utilizadas para efectos de nivelación o alineación del
mecanismo estén debidamente instaladas en su ubicación original, de acuerdo a las marcas.

c. Levantar el mecanismo en posición en los soportes del mecanismo, orientándolo

cuidadosamente entre los soportes y observando la separación entre la cubierta y unidad del
cono de espuma. El rotor deberá estar concéntrico con respecto al carrete del tubo de succión.

Apernar el mecanismo a sus soportes, consultando el plano N° 114808 “Valores de Torque de

los Sujetadores”.

d. Verificar el carrete del tubo de succión con respecto a su concentricidad con el rotor. Esta
debe estar dentro de una tolerancia de ± 1/8" (± 3 mm) en su alrededor para suministrar la
circulación óptima de lodo y la suspensión de sólidos. Regular la concentricidad del carrete
con el rotor soltando los pernos y deslizando el carrete en el espaciador. No se requiere
alcanzar una concentricidad perfecta. En caso de existir una gran desalineación, volver a
chequear el centrado del mecanismo de accionamiento, consultando párrafos anteriores.
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 MANTENIMIENTO 12319
MCN2006-0039 28

e. Reinstalar el guarda correa inferior y las poleas. Instalar y regular la tensión de las correas
siguiendo las instrucciones anteriores en el punto A.- “Inspección y Mantenimiento General”, N°
2.- “Tensión de accionamiento de correas en V" Confirmar instalación del guarda correa
superior.

f. Si ha tenido que retirar cualquiera de los sectores de cubierta, consultar el punto C. –“Retiro e
Instalación de los Componentes”. N° 4.- “Sectores de Cubierta” para instrucciones sobre
“Instalación”.

C. RETIRO E INSTALACION DE LOS COMPONENTES

Ver los planos de Instalación del mecanismo.

ADVERTENCIA: Bloquear paso de energía antes de iniciar cualquier tipo de desmontaje.

1. Unidad del motor

Retiro

a. Desconectar paso de corriente hacia el motor y proteger tuberías.

b. Desconectar el cableado del motor y tapar todas las cañerías. Retirar el guarda correa.

c. Retirar las correas en V. Soldar los dos pernos de ajuste instalados bajo la placa de montaje.
Un movimiento de aproximadamente 2" (50 mm) debiera permitir el retiro de la correa.

d. Retiro de poleas acanaladas.

e. Sostener el motor con un cable o una eslinga de acuerdo a las instrucciones del fabricante de
motor y levantarlo sin su placa de montaje.

f. Colocar el motor en cualquier área de mantenimiento que se encuentre limpia y seca.

Instalación

a. Reinstalar el motor consultando los párrafos anteriores y siguiendo el orden inverso. Consultar
el párrafo A.- “Inspección y Mantenimiento General”, N° 2. – “Tensión de accionamiento de
correas en V”. Instalar las correas en V en una unidad machihembrada. No mezclar las
correas antiguas con las nuevas.

b. Ajustar tensión de las correas en V, siguiendo las instrucciones del punto A.- “Inspección y
Mantenimiento General”, N° 2.- “Tensión de accionamiento de correas en V”. Instalar el
guarda correas.
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 MANTENIMIENTO 12319
MCN2006-0039 29

2. Unidad del Collar del tubo de Succión

Consultar la unidad general del estanque y los planos de montaje del estanque.

Retiro

La unidad del collar del tubo de succión, que va instalada en el tubo de succión, se gasta con el paso
del tiempo a pesar de su cubierta de elastómero. No es necesario retirar el mecanismo para el
cambio de la unidad del collar.

a. Desconectar los sujetadores que sostienen las mitades de la unidad del collar y retirar las
mitades de la unidad del collar instaladas alrededor del tubo de succión. Quizás sea posible
guardar los pernos, tuercas y espaciadores para una nueva utilización.

Instalación

a. Colocar las nuevas secciones del collar en posición alrededor del tubo de succión como indica
el plano de montaje del collar e instalar sin apretar los pernos con tuercas y arandelas y los
espaciadores en los empalmes.

b. Regular a la altura especificada y fijar el collar en el tubo de succión, consultando el plano de

montaje del collar.

c. Verificar la concentricidad del rotor con respecto a la unidad del collar, siguiendo las
instrucciones de instalación.

3. Unidad de Control de Aire

Consultar plano de Montaje del Mecanismo.

El flujo de aire entre el tubo vertical interno y la atmósfera se regular con esta unidad de ducto de aire y
por lo tanto debe permanecer despejada para la libre circulación de aire generada por el rotor y control
de espuma regulable. Normalmente, no es necesario cambiarla pero es posible que se oxide la puerta
y esto impida su ajuste. En ese caso, el ducto de aire y la unidad de la puerta de control deberían
cambiarse como una unidad completa.

4. Sectores de Cubierta

Consultar el plano de Montaje del Mecanismo

La cubierta consiste en doce sectores que van apernados a la tubería vertical y entre sí.

Retiro

La unidad de cubierta puede ser demasiado grande para encajar entre los ángulos de soporte y
efectuar un retiro sin problemas con el mecanismo y por lo tanto será necesario retirar un par de
sectores de cubierta y sus brazos de soporte en un extremo de la cubierta para entregar el espacio
requerido. Si solo se debe retirar la cubierta para reemplazo o reparación, el mecanismo puede
permanecer en el estanque.

a. Desconectar los sectores de la cubierta entre si. Guardar los lomos, tornillos de máquina,
arandelas y tuercas para su reutilización.

b. Desconectar los sectores desde la brida de la tubería vertical y retirar. Verificar desgaste y
deterioro.
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 MANTENIMIENTO 12319
MCN2006-0039 30

Instalación

a. Siguiendo las indicaciones del plano de montaje del mecanismo, instalar los 12 sectores de la
cubierta en forma individual, colocándolos en el cono de espuma y tubería vertical, usando los
lomos y grapas del sector de cubierta. Dejar los sujetadores sin apretar hasta que se han
instalado todos los sectores de cubierta y fijar en conjunto.

b. Conectar los sectores de cubierta del dispersor entre si, usando los sujetadores especificados.

c. Apretar todos los sujetadores, siguiendo las instrucciones del cuadro de valores de torque en el
capitulo de planos de este manual.

5. Dispersor

Consultar el plano de montaje del mecanismo.

Retiro

Si bien el dispersor puede estar bastante gastado, todavía conserva su firmeza y control. Sostenerlo
completamente durante el proceso de retiro. Para peso, consultar “Listado de Partes”. Es importante
tener en cuenta que un dispersor de uretano será más pesado que uno de caucho. El rotor estrella se
extiende por aproximadamente 11" (275 mm) bajo el dispersor.

a. Dependiendo del ajuste de altura del mecanismo, quizás sea posible retirar el espaciador y
carrete del tubo de succión para tener mayor espacio durante el recambio del dispersor. La
alternativa consiste en retirar el mecanismo desde el estanque siguiendo las instrucciones en
el punto B.- “Retiro del mecanismo”, N° 3.- “Levante y Retiro del Mecanismo"

b. Si el mecanismo se retira del estanque, colóquelo en un accesorio o anclaje donde el dispersor

pueda desconectarse desde el cono de espuma y tubo vertical.

c. El anillo superior del dispersor se mantiene con unos montantes colocados en un anillo que
une el dispersor con la tubería vertical con pernos y arandelas. Sostener el dispersor en
posición con un bloqueo o dispositivo ajustable como por ejemplo un carro de levante, gata o
pallet., etc. hasta retirar todos los pernos.

d. Levantar el mecanismo a una altura suficiente como para retirar el dispersor y reemplazarlo por
una unidad nueva.

Instalación

Usar el dispositivo de levante para sostener el dispersor.

a. Levantar el dispersor hasta el tubo vertical y desplazar los puntales a través del anillo
horizontal en la tubería vertical.

b. Aplicar un compuesto anti-adherente a la rosca de los puntales y luego instalar las arandelas,
tuercas y apretar levemente.

c. Apretar todas las tuercas uniformemente con medios giros para sacar el dispersor hasta que
todas las tuercas queden apretadas al valor indicado en la tabla de valores de Torque.

d. Es necesario reajustar el torque de las tuercas luego de un mes de operación de las unidades
de flotación.
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 MANTENIMIENTO 12319
MCN2006-0039 31

6. Rotor Estrella

Consultar planos de Montaje del Mecanismo.

Para reducir el desgaste no uniforme del rotor y aumentar su vida útil, es necesario invertir el sentido
de rotación del rotor por lo menos una vez al mes. El rotor también debe girarse de extremo a extremo
para verificar desgaste adicional. Los rotores deberán cambiarse si aparecen flectados en condiciones
de carga mínima, lo que se hace evidente a través de una mezcla deficiente.

Retiro -

a. Retirar el mecanismo desde el estanque siguiendo las instrucciones en párrafo B.- “Retiro del
Mecanismo”, N° 3.- “Levante y Retiro del Mecanismo”

b. Colocar la unidad del mecanismo en un soporte accesorio o anclaje con el eje del rotor en
posición vertical, de manera que el rotor pueda bajar o subir a su posición debajo del eje
usando un carro de levante o eslinga.

c. Mientras sostiene el rotor desde la parte inferior, destornillar la brida del rotor y adaptador
desde el extreme del eje. Consultar el plano de la unidad del mecanismo.

d. Bajar el rotor hasta una distancia suficiente para despejar el extremo del eje, y luego colocarlo
en un bloqueo lo suficientemente grande como para sostenerlo al menos con cuatro paletas.

Instalación

El rotor estrella puede invertirse para desgaste en la punta o costado opuesto. La cubierta de tuerca se
utilizó para proteger el manguito de montaje del rotor en el extremo del rotor. La instalación del rotor
estrella es básicamente la misma del retiro, solo que se realiza en la dirección opuesta.

a. Si va a reutilizar el motor mediante la inversión desde extremo a extremo, retirar la tapa del
rotor y e instalarlo en el extremo opuesto. Asegurarse de que la superficie de montaje de la
cubierta superior del rotor esté completamente limpia.

b. Instalar la brida del adaptador en el rotor estrella como indica el plano de montaje del
mecanismo.

c. Usar un carro u horquilla de levante, subir el rotor estrella a su posición desde la parte inferior y
colocar la brida del adaptador en el eje de flotación usando los tornillos de maquina
especificados.

d. Aplicar torque a todos los sujetadores siguiendo las instrucciones del plano N° 114808 “Valores
de Torque”.

Nota: Pintar los sujetadores, o cubrirlos con sello luego de la instalación para evitar la
corrosión.

e. Instalar la unidad del mecanismo, siguiendo las instrucciones anteriores y las instrucciones de
instalación del presente manual.
Rev. A F5-D408
2-2006 MANTENIMIENTO 12319
MCN2006-0039 32

7. Especificaciones de Torque para Sujetadores

Todos los pernos de alta resistencia deben apretarse con el método del giro de tuercas, indicado a
continuación. No reutilizar los pernos de alta resistencia.

Longitud del Perno Disposición de las caras externas de las piezas apernadas
Una cara normal
Ambas caras
hasta el eje del
Medido desde el inclinadas no más de
perno y la otra cara
costado inferior de la Ambas caras 1.20 desde normal al
inclinada no más
cabeza hasta el extremo normales hasta el eje del perno. (No se
de 1.20 (no se
del punto. eje del perno utiliza la arandela
utiliza la arandela
biselada).
biselada).
Hasta e incluido (4)
1/ 3 giro 1/2 giro 2/3 giro
diámetros
Más de (4) diámetros
pero sin exceder (8) 1/2 giro 2/3 giro 5/6 giro
diámetros
Sobre (8) diámetros
pero sin sobrepasar los 2/3 giro 5/6 giro 1 giro
(12) diámetros
La rotación de las tuercas corresponde a la rotación relativa al perno sin considerar el
elemento (tuerca o perno). La tolerancia de rotación es sobre o bajo 30o

Apretar todos los otros sujetadores de acuerdo a los valores de Torque del plano N° 114808 “Valores
para Torque” en el capítulo “Planos” del presente manual. Observe que todos los valores de torque de
los sujetadores se miden en roscas secas y limpias.

Si el sujetador se sostiene contra una pieza recubierta de goma, no apretar en exceso ya que esto
puede dañar el recubrimiento de goma.
Rev. A F5-D502
2-2006 OPERACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 33

Flotación
La flotación de la espuma mineral es la técnica de procesamiento más importante que existe en la actualidad.
En la flotación las burbujas de gas producidas por la agitación mecánica de los mecanismos se utilizan para
flotar las partículas minerales mediante la adherencia hacia la superficie de las celdas para efectos de
recuperación.

Básicamente la adherencia de las pequeñas partículas de las burbujas de gas reduce el peso específico de
las partículas combinadas de aire y mineral. De esta manera el peso específico de su unión es menor al de
la pulpa lo cual induce que estas partículas aumenten en la pulpa y floten hacia la superficie para ser
descargadas en forma de espuma.

TM
A. CELDAS DE FLOTACIÓN WEMCO – MODELO SMARTCELL

Consultar Planos de Montaje del Mecanismo en el capítulo de planos del presente manual.

La celda de flotación modelo “SMARTCELL” corresponde a una unidad de diseño único con un rotor-
dispersor patentado que entrega una mezcla y aireación intensa. El aire ambiental ingresa a la celda y
se distribuye uniformemente a través de la pulpa generando un contacto óptimo entre el aire y las
partículas. Un tubo de succión cónico transporta el flujo para la recirculación de una gran cantidad de
pulpa.

La combinación de aireación eficiente y una cantidad óptima de sólidos en suspensión genera una
recuperación de gran cantidad de especies y una ley de concentrado de alto rendimiento mientras
disminuye el consumo de reactivo. Las características más importantes de las unidades de flotación
marca “WEMCO” son: Una puesta en marcha fácil, operación simple, bajo consumo de reactivo, larga
duración del mecanismo y mantenimiento mínimo.

1. Unidad de Flotación – Descripción General

Su celda de Flotación marca WEMCO es un estanque cilíndrico con una capacidad de volumen
nominal de 300 m3. Viene equipada con un mecanismo de eje WEMCO Nº 300 M3 para operación de
trabajo pesado, un tubo de succión cónico para una circulación mejorada, un cono de espuma y una
tubería vertical para acelerar el movimiento superficial de los sólidos, una caja de alimentación para la
distribución de los sólidos alimentados y una caja de conexión y descarga con válvulas de dardo para
el control de nivel.

Existen características de control opcionales que pueden incluirse en la unidad tales como control de
aire, sensor ultrasónico de nivel de pulpa, lavado de espuma y controles expertos incorporados.

La unidad de flotación compuesta por un estanque cilíndrico y una unidad de accionamiento

corresponde al módulo básico del sistema “WEMCO”. Las celdas generalmente se conectan en pares
y en un arreglo de filas de hasta una docena o más celdas. Cada par se dispone en etapas elevadas
para que la pulpa circule por gravedad. Consultar Plano de Arreglo General para los tamaños y arreglo
de las celdas.

La forma cilíndrica del estanque mejora la mezcla y distribución de aire debido a que todos los puntos
que se encuentran en la periferia del estanque están equidistantes desde la descarga del rotor.
Normalmente el fondo del estanque es liso pero en algunas aplicaciones únicas el vértice entre el
fondo y la pared lateral se encuentra biselado.
Rev. A F5-D502
2-2006 OPERACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 34

2. El Mecanismo

La posición del rotor, localizada bastante más arriba que el fondo del estanque elimina el contacto
con el material abrasivo capturado de gran tamaño, reduciendo así el desgaste de las superficies del
dispersor y rotor. El flujo de aire inducido en dirección hacia la pulpa mediante el rotor giratorio
entrega una excelente aireación.
Como no se requiere un suministro de aire forzado, es posible sacar el mecanismo para efectos de
mantenimiento sin necesidad de detener todo el banco de celdas o su mantención puede efectuarse en
línea. Existe un sistema automático de compensación del flujo para las densidades de alimentación
variables.

Además, el rotor elevado permite reiniciar instantáneamente las celdas luego de una detención a
diferencia de los sistemas con aire forzado en los cuales el rotor se queda atascado en los sólidos
sedimentados. . También puede reiniciar su funcionamiento bajo carga completa. Se reduce el
desgaste del mecanismo debido a la gran separación que existe entre el rotor y dispersor.

El cono de espuma y la tubería vertical corresponde a una unidad de cilindro de acero revestida con
elastómero debajo de la unidad de rodamiento del eje que controla el flujo de aire hacia la pulpa de
mezcla. Este es el punto donde el aire se dispersa cuidadosamente a través de la pulpa en la forma de
burbujas que se unen con las partículas para efectos de flotación.

La cubierta del dispersor se anexa a un anillo especial alrededor del extremo inferior de la tubería
vertical. Los sectores de cubierta dispersan las burbujas mezcladas y partículas desde el cono de
espuma y tubería vertical y del rotor hacia la superficie de la celda de flotación.

La unidad de entrada de aire manual, instalada en la placa de base el soporte de rodamiento y que
se extiende hasta la tubería vertical, dejando pasar el flujo de aire inducido del rotor en movimiento
hacia la pulpa dentro de la tubería vertical. El flujo de aire se controla mediante una puerta de control
de aire a medida que el aire generado por el rotor entrega la máxima formación de espuma con un
consumo mínimo de agente espumante. El flujo de aire inducido entrega una excelente aireación con
simplicidad mecánica.

3. El estanque y las Cajas de Control

El tubo de Succión y el Fondo Falso estimulan la circulación y suspensión de los sólidos de la celda
de flotación haciendo que la pulpa suba desde el fondo del estanque hacia el tubo de succión al
interior del rotor y tubería vertical donde la pulpa se mezcla con aire y se retro-bombea, regresando a la
celda. Los tubos de succión son famosos por su eficiencia de mezcla. El fondo cónico aumenta la
circulación en la periferia del estanque.

El diseño del fondo falso controla las partículas gruesas. Toda la pulpa circula a través del tubo de
succión. El fondo falso aumenta la velocidad de la pulpa a medida que circula a través del fondo para
dirigirse hacia el tubo de succión.

Cono de Espuma y Tubería Vertical, en la superficie del agua, acelera el movimiento de la espuma a
través de la superficie del estanque, disminuyendo el tiempo de residencia en la etapa de espuma y el
requerimiento de aire necesario para sostener la espuma. El acortamiento del período de recuperación
se traduce en ahorro de energía, aumento de recuperación y mejoramiento de la ley de mineral.

Longitud de los rebordes de la canaleta interna de espuma se relaciona con la eliminación de

espuma. La longitud del reborde de una celda redonda es superior al de una canaleta equivalente de
volumen rectangular. El diseño de la canaleta interna conserva el espacio del suelo de la planta.
Rev. A F5-D502
2-2006 OPERACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 35

La caja de Alimentación es una caja de diseño circular que recibe la descarga desde el circuito de
molienda de la celda de flotación anterior o de otra operación unitaria de la planta. Estimula el flujo de
masa y entrega una distribución uniforme de alimentación hacia la celda.

El sistema “HINGE” constituye el medio para realizar el control de nivel y mantener un flujo uniforme
entre las celdas. Las válvulas de dardo de la caja de conexión mantienen el nivel de pulpa de la celda
de flotación controlando el flujo entre celdas.

La Caja de Descarga mantiene el nivel de pulpa de las celdas anteriores y entrega una conexión hacia
el depósito de colas.

Las válvulas de dardo, instaladas en las cajas de conexión y de descarga se utilizan para controlar el
flujo de pulpa entre las celdas y desde la caja de descarga. Las válvulas se levantan y bajan mediante
posicionadores neumáticos que reciben señales desde los controles de nivel descritos a continuación:

B. CONTROLES DE NIVEL DE LAS CELDAS DE FLOTACIÓN SMARTCELL

El nivel de Pulpa en las celdas de flotación se controla mediante las válvulas de dardo de
funcionamiento automático, instaladas en las cajas de conexión y que terminan en la caja de descarga.

El Control de nivel es una actividad totalmente esencial para el buen rendimiento de las celdas de
flotación. Los componentes claves del control de nivel son:

1. Sensor de nivel
2. Controlador del sistema de Distribución suministrado por el cliente (DCS).
3. Posicionador Inteligente (Foundation Fieldbus)
4. Válvulas de Dardo

1. Sistema Sensor de Nivel Ultrasónico

Para: 1) Nivel de Pulpa

2) Nivel de Espuma

Los sensores de nivel vienen calibrados de fábrica y solo deben ser regulados por personal calificado.
Como se especificó previamente se trata de dispositivos electrónicos altamente confiables y si se
mantiene su limpieza y no se someten a funcionamiento forzado deberían operar en forma óptima
durante el servicio prolongado de planta.

El sistema está formado de los siguientes componentes:

- Sistema de amortiguación de señal, con un flotador

- Una fuente y sensor ultrasónico
- Un sistema de control de distribución suministrado por el Cliente (DCS) y
- Válvulas de Dardo con accionamiento neumático

El sistema de amortiguación minimiza la turbulencia y espuma alrededor del flotador. El flotador con el
blanco colocado sobre la superficie sube y baja con el nivel de la superficie.

El sensor ultrasónico envía una señal al blanco y recibe el reflejo de la señal. La señal del sensor
ultrasónico se dirige al sistema de control de distribución (DCS) suministrado por el cliente que
transmite una señal a las válvulas de dardo de accionamiento automático que se abren y cierran para
mantener el nivel de pulpa. El nivel de espuma tiene un control o monitoreo similar.
Rev. A F5-D502
2-2006 OPERACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 36

2. Válvulas de Dardo

Las válvulas de dardo controlan en flujo de pulpa a través de las celdas de flotación para mantener el
nivel de pulpa. Las válvulas se accionan mediante varillas desde posicionadores neumáticos que
levantan y bajan las válvulas en asientos circulares en la parte inferior de las cajas de descarga y
conexión.

Los posicionadores neumáticos reciben una señal desde el sistema de control de distribución (DCS)
suministrado por el cliente a través de un posicionador inteligente, vía protocolo de comunicación
Foundation Fieldbus.

Si la válvula de dardo no se asienta completamente cuando el brazo de palanca del actuador recorre
toda la posición ascendente, entonces es necesario hacer un ajuste mecánico, siguiendo las
instrucciones de mantenimiento. El control de nivel no se utiliza como medio para la regulación de
válvulas.

Durante las paradas de planta, es necesario verificar el desgaste de las válvulas de dardo y
asentamientos circulares. El asentamiento de la válvula de dardo está sometido a una gran cantidad
de abrasión y requerirá un cambio periódico. Consultar instrucciones de mantenimiento.

Deberá existir disponibilidad de técnicos instrumentistas para que verifiquen la operación de los
actuadores con posicionador inteligente, válvulas de cierre y sensores de nivel y, para que realicen la
calibración en caso necesario.

Ver Índice de Contenidos, Capítulo de Equipo Accesorio para instrucciones de mantenimiento del
sensor y controles de nivel.

3. Control experto incluido

Es una opción altamente recomendada por “EIMCO”. La flotación es un proceso dinámico que no
puede optimizarse usando estrategias de control constantes. Históricamente los resultados
metalúrgicos óptimos se lograron con operadores calificados y experimentados en condiciones de
proceso variables.

Los sistemas de control experto incorporados tienen un objetivo similar y mejorar este tipo de control,
empleando procesos automatizados con observación permanente y con bases de datos sobre normas
operativas preparadas con la ayuda de computadores.

Estos sistemas fueron originalmente desarrollados por “EIMCO Pyramid Resources” con la finalidad de
optimizar las operaciones de chancado y molienda y también se han utilizado para aumentar el
rendimiento económico global de todas las instalaciones de concentración.

Los sistemas de control de Pyramid administran las condiciones de proceso en tiempo real y regulan en
forma instantánea la estrategia operacional para obtener resultados óptimos.
Rev. A F5-D502
2-2006 OPERACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 37

C. PUESTA EN MARCHA Y OPERACIÓN

1. Antes de iniciar el proceso de flotación realice una inspección general:

a. Comprobar si existen pernos y tuercas sueltos.

b. Verificar que todas las correas tienen la tensión correcta con su guarda correa correctamente
instalado.

c. Verificar apriete de todas las conexiones de energía y aire instrumental.

d. Chequear y eliminar cualquier desecho desde los estanques, cajas de conexión y pasarelas.

2. Conectar el suministro de energía para todos los controles de instrumentación y de nivel.

3. Cerrar las válvulas de dardo.

4. Llenar las celdas con pulpa o agua. Cada banco de celdas de una fila de celdas de flotación
que finaliza en una caja de conexión o de descarga deberá llenarse hasta la profundidad operativa
luego de poner en marcha la caja de alimentación. Los mecanismos normalmente no operan
durante el llenado de celdas. Ver punto 5 más adelante).

Si las celdas tienen una cantidad significativa de arena acumulada en el fondo no habrá problemas
para poner en marcha el mecanismo. No obstante, quizás demore aproximadamente una hora en
volver a suspender todos los sólidos.

5. Si bien los mecanismos pueden ponerse en marcha en cualquier momento, el proceso de bombeo
no podrá iniciarse hasta que el nivel de pulpa se aproxime a la parte superior del tubo de succión.

Poner en marcha los rotores cuando el nivel de pulpa sea uniforme con los orificios de las filas
superiores en el mecanismo dispersor.

El funcionamiento de los mecanismos cuando las celdas se están llenando con pulpa
acondicionada con un agente químico puede producir una espuma bastante profunda y un flujo
excesivo hacia las canaletas de espuma a medida que aumenta el nivel de pulpa hasta la
profundidad operativa óptima.

6. Verificar el flujo de espumante a través de los vertederos. Consultar instrucciones de

mantenimiento para la regulación, adición o retiro de las barras de rebalse de los vertederos.

7. Regular el nivel operativo de la pulpa para entregar el nivel esperado de espuma. Consultar las
instrucciones del fabricante para el ajuste del nivel operativo de control de nivel, de los sensores de
nivel y de las válvulas de dardo.

8. Verificar la filtración y sello de cajas. Es probable que al inicio se produzcan filtraciones menores
en las conexiones apernadas pero éstas irán disminuyendo paulatinamente a medida que se
empiecen a sellar con los sólidos finos de la pulpa.

9. Ajustar los reactivos (depósito y espumante) y la toma de aire para suministrar el espumante y flujo
de rebalse deseado.
Rev. A F5-D502
2-2006 OPERACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 38

10. Utilizar la cantidad mínima de agua de enjuague en las canaletas de concentrado ya que esto
aumenta el flujo volumétrico hacia la etapa siguiente, incrementando los problemas de desaguado
y disminuyendo el tiempo de retención de las etapas subsiguientes.

11. A veces se produce un oleaje excesivo (aumentos) de la pulpa alimentada de flotación durante las
primeras horas del día cuando la unidad opera con un funcionamiento inestable aguas arriba del
circuito de flotación.

En este caso se recomienda retirar las barras del vertedero instaladas en las cajas de conexión y
de descarga hasta que el vertedero se nivele con respecto al nivel de pulpa de la celda lo y alcance
la profundidad de espuma deseada. Entonces las oleadas con gran cantidad de flujo pasarán a
través del vertedero sin inundar las canaletas de espuma.

Los ajustes del controlador no deben modificarse para la liberación rápida de la oleada ya que esto
terminará en un control deficiente durante la operación normal de la unidad, una vez resueltos los
trastornos de oleadas de alimentación.

12. Cuando el funcionamiento de la celda es suave y su nivel metalúrgico es aceptable, abstenerse de

realizar ajustes.

13. Operar el circuito en forma consistente con los principios de control e instrucciones para todos los
turnos. Al modificar las estrategias de operación se genera una mayor cantidad de pérdida de
recuperación y esto constituye un trastorno de la condición normal de operación.

14. Operar siempre la unidad teniendo en consideración el principio de seguridad y el objetivo de

alcanzar una producción de calidad.

D. PARADA

1. Parada de Planta Planificada

a. Interrumpir la alimentación hacia las celdas.

b. Una vez desconectada la alimentación, regular el control de nivel para evacuar lentamente cada
una de las celdas.

No abrir las válvulas de dardo a su capacidad máxima ya que esto puede causar inundaciones
aguas abajo.

c. Desconectar el mecanismo cuando el motor ya no esté sumergido en la pulpa ya que no es

necesario que el rotor funcione debido a que no continuará realizando la mezcla.

d. Una vez que las celdas estén vacías, verificar si existe acumulación de arena en las celdas y en
cajas de alimentación, conexión y descarga. Limpiar todas las áreas con acumulación de arena
que pudieran originar fallas durante la próxima puesta en marcha.

e. La parada es completa y por lo tanto deberá desconectar todo el suministro de energía.

f. Verificar los mecanismos. Notificar de inmediato al supervisor sobre los componentes que deben
repararse luego de detectar su falla.
Rev. A F5-D502
2-2006 OPERACION 12319
MCN2006-0039 39

2. Parada No Planificada

a. Cuando existe una parada no planificada, desconectar el paso de energía hacia los mecanismos
del motor y controladores para evitar una puesta en marcha inesperada.

ADVERTENCIA: Bloquear el paso de energía si va a realizar cualquier trabajo de

mantenimiento o reparación.

Normalmente las válvulas de dardo se cerrarán automáticamente. La mezcla en el interior

de las celdas probablemente se habrá detenido pero esto no debiera generar problemas.
Si es necesario abrir válvulas con tanques de aire de reserva.

b. Una vez que las celdas están vacías, confirmar si existe acumulación de arena en la caja
de alimentación, conexión y de descarga. Eliminar cualquier acumulación de arena que
pudiese generar problemas durante la siguiente puesta en marcha.

c. Notifique de inmediato sobre los componentes que requieren reparación a medida que
detecta su falla.
Rev. A F5-D505
1-2009 RESOLUCION DE FALLAS 12319
MCN2006-0039 40

FALLA CAUSA POSIBLE MEDIDA CORRECTIVA

1. No parte el motor
a. No existe paso de energía eléctrica
hacia el motor.
(1) Verificar que el disyuntor eléctrico esté en posición
ON (Conectado).
(2) Con el voltímetro verificar el paso de energía hacia el
motor.
(3) Verificar parada de emergencia

b. Motor Bloqueado o desconectado
(1) Retirar las correas en V y girar el eje del motor en
forma manual. ADVERTENCIA: Bloquear el paso de
energía
(2) Si el motor no gira en forma manual, consultar
instrucciones del fabricante.
(3) Cambiar el motor

c. Mecanismo del rotor bloqueado o (1) Retirar las correas en V y girar las poleas acanaladas
detenido propulsadas en forma manual. ADVERTENCIA:
Bloquear el paso de energía hacia el motor.

2. El motor se detiene durante la a. Pérdida de energía eléctrica (1) Verificar fuente de alimentación
operación (2) Chequear paso de energía al motor con un voltímetro
(3) Verificar fusible de control. Ver punto 2c más
adelante.

b. El partidor del motor desconectado
(1) Temperatura ambiente del motor demasiado elevada.
Ver punto 3 “ Calentamiento del motor”
(2) Voltaje demasiado bajo. Verificar el suministro de
voltaje y comprobar requerimientos del motor en placa
de identificación.
(3) Verificar amperaje durante aplicación de carga.
Quizás requiera cambiar el motor.
(4) Revisar caja de partidor para confirmar tamaño
adecuado de los calentadores

c. Fusible de control del motor
(1) Verificar el sobrecalentamiento del motor, Ver punto 3
– “Calentamiento del motor”
(2) Comprobar si existe sobrecarga del motor. Consultar
instrucciones del fabricante.
(3) Las conexiones del motor tienen el voltaje incorrecto.
Verificar el voltaje de la línea en la placa de
identificación de voltaje. Ver “Punto 3” más adelante.
(4) Verificar que la conexión al motor tenga los
acoplamientos adecuados.

3. Calentamiento del motor a. Sobrecarga del motor (1) Verificar amperaje a través de los cables durante la
aplicación de carga total en la placa de identificación.
Ver (3) más adelante.
(2) Verificar fuente de suministro eléctrico y conexiones

b. Flujo de aire inadecuado hacia el
motor
(1) Verificar el flujo de aire alrededor del motor. Limpiar la
superficie del motor para que exista una mejor
transferencia de calor.
(2) Comprobar que el ventilador del motor gire y que
todas las aspas se encuentren en buen estado.
Rev. A
1-2009
MCN2006-0039
FALLA
4. El accionamiento
generalmente emite ruido y
vibra en exceso.
5. El rotor no gira cuando existe
paso de energía eléctrica
6. Las RPM del rotor son
inferiores al valor de diseño y
afectan el resultado final
7. Filtración del estanque
RESOLUCION DE FALLAS
CAUSA POSIBLE
a. Los rodamientos del motor
requieren lubricación
b. Rotor desalineado o se observa
haciendo contacto con otros
componentes y con otros objetos
atascados en el tubo de succión.
c. Desalineación de poleas
acanaladas
a. No funciona el motor
b. Correas de accionamiento
excesivamente sueltas o separadas
c. Eje de rotor quebrado
a. Las correas en V del accionamiento
están sueltas y corridas
b. Separación excesiva entre correa
en V y accionamiento.
c. Sobrecarga del motor
a. Costuras de instalación nuevas sin
la empaquetadura requerida o con
empaquetadura dañada.
b. El daño o separación del
recubrimiento interno permite
acelerar el desarrollo de la corrosión
F5-D505
12319
41
MEDIDA CORRECTIVA
(1) Los rodamientos del motor requieren lubricación o
está fallando un rodamiento. Consultar instrucciones
del fabricante.
(1) Detener el rotor. Verificar si existen paletas faltantes
o contacto con otros componentes tales como
dispersor. ADVERTENCIA: Bloquear el paso de
emergía
(2) Si faltan paletas, cambiar el rotor
(3) Si existen otros componentes sueltos y en contacto
con el rotor, reparar o cambiar.
(4) Verificar la existencia de material atascado en el
interior del tubo de succión
(5) Consultar “Mantenimiento” para reparación o
recambio.
(1) Verificar corrimiento en el diámetro externo de la
polea acanalada usando un indicador de disco.
(2) Verificar para confirmar que el eje del motor quede
paralelo al eje del rotor.
3) Comprobar que tanto las poleas acanaladas
propulsadas y el propulsor queden paralelas.
(1) Consultar falla Nº 1 – No parte el motor y “2” El motor
se detiene durante el funcionamiento.
(1) Verificar las correas para asegurarse de que están
intactas.
2) Verificar tensión de las correas. Ver Instrucciones de
Mantenimiento para regulación de tensión.
ADVERTENCIA: Bloquear paso de energía eléctrica.
(1) Revisar eje del rotor.
(1) Una correa que emite un chirrido es una correa que
se desliza. Regular tensión de las correas. Ver
mantenimiento.
(2) Las nuevas correas tienden a estar tirantes por lo
tanto requieren una regulación de la tensión.
(1) Verificar tamaños de poleas acanaladas con la
especificación de diseño
(2) Comprobar que las correas se ajusten en las ranuras
de las poleas acanaladas.
(1) Ver Falla “3”. Calentamiento del motor letras “a” y “c”.
(1) Es normal que exista algo de filtración. Normalmente
esta se elimina cuando los finos rellenan y tapan la
filtración
(2) La filtración persistente puede corregirse rellenando la
zona de unión con un sello de masilla.
3) Si la filtración se encuentra en la junta de expansión,
verificar la correcta instalación de la barra de refuerzo
(1) Reparar la zona de filtración mediante la colocación
de parches y soldaduras. ADVERTENCIA: Utilizar
soldadores expertos y bloquear el paso de corriente
hacia el accionamiento.
(2) Volver a cubrir la superficie con la capa de material
especificado.
Rev. A
1-2009 RESOLUCION DE FALLAS
MCN2006-0039
FALLA CAUSA POSIBLE
8. Parada no planificada a. Perdida de energía eléctrica
b. Falla mecánica
c. Pérdida de Alimentación
9. La celda no produce espuma o a. El rotor no gira cuando existe paso
burbujas de flotación de corriente.
b. Obstrucción de la entrada de aire
c. Parte o todo el dispersor se ha
salido de su anillo bajo la tubería
vertical.
d. El rotor aparece suelto o ha perdido
alguna de sus paletas.
10. La pulpa se rebalsa con la a. Nivel de pulpa excesivo dentro de la
espuma. celda.
F5-D505
12319
42
MEDIDA CORRECTIVA
(1) Las válvulas de dardo pueden permanecer abiertas y
evacuar las celdas para disminuir la acumulación de
arena. Evitar que se evacuen las celdas, cerrar
manualmente la válvula de dardo pero dejar que se
evacue algo de flujo para disminuir la acumulación de
arena.
(2) Bloquear el paso de energía para evitar la partida
accidental al reanudarse el suministro de energía
eléctrica. Realizar mantenimiento en caso necesario.
(3) Comprobar la acumulación de arena cuando las
celdas estén vacías.
(1) Consultar “Parada” en instrucciones operativas.
(2) >Bloquear el paso de corriente antes de iniciar las
actividades de reparación.
(3) Realizar la parada de planta para efectos de
mantenimiento antes de que se produzca la falla del
equipo.
(1) Seguir operando la unidad hasta que la caída de nivel
impide la operación normal y en ese momento
detener la unidad.
(2)) Si el tiempo de detención es demasiado corto,
agregar agua para mantener la operación.
(1) Ver falla Nº 7."
(1) Tubería de aire con obstrucciones. Limpiar tubería de
aire.
(2) Válvula de control de aire permanece cerrada. Abrir
válvula de control de aire.
(1) Sacar el mecanismo y cambiar o volver a colocar el
dispersor. Ver “Mantenimiento”
(2) Cuando se instala el dispersor verificar que éste se
instale en la forma correcta con sus sujetadores
totalmente fijos.
(1) Reinstalar el rotor. Es posible que el rotor esté
desconectado debido a una instalación deficiente.
Consultar Instrucciones de Mantenimiento para una
correcta instalación.
(2) Cambiar el rotor si está dañado. Un rotor dañado
vibrará en forma excesiva. Ver Falla Nº 6.
(1) Es probable que el nivel operativo de pulpa del
vertedero tenga que ser ajustado a la profundidad
deseada de espumante
(2) El valor prefijado del control de nivel debe ajustarse al
nivel operativo. Ver Instrucciones de Operación y
control de nivel en instrucciones del fabricante.
(3) Verificar si las válvulas de dardo están cerradas en
forma manual. Abrir válvulas. Verificar las cañerías de
aire hacia las válvulas de los actuadores
(4) Revisar el control de la válvula de dardo. Quizás no
este funcionando adecuadamente para el nivel de
pulpa. Verificar la salida hacia el transductor de
entrada y la señal enviada al actuador. Ver
instrucciones del Controlador.
Rev. A
1-2009 RESOLUCION DE FALLAS
MCN2006-0039
FALLA CAUSA POSIBLE
b. Es posible que la velocidad de
alimentación sea excesiva.
c. Valor prefijado del controlador no
restablecido al nivel adecuado
luego de realizar cambios
temporales.
11. Recuperación deficiente de a. Nivel de pulpa excesivamente bajo
espumante que no satisface los en la celda con respecto al nivel de
requerimientos de la unidad. espumante.
b. Obstrucción del control de aire o
dispositivo regulado
incorrectamente.
c. Velocidad de lavado de agua
demasiado elevada
d. Agente químico reactivo y/o
espumante incorrecto para el tipo
de pulpa
F5-D505
12319
43
MEDIDA CORRECTIVA
(1) Verificar la velocidad del flujo de la caja de descarta.
Si la velocidad es elevada, disminuir la velocidad de
alimentación.
(2) Ninguna medida, debido a que los flujos de oleadas
pueden ocurrir durante los primeros días de
operación debido a la existencia de operaciones
inestables aguas arriaba.
(3) Verificar las velocidades de flujo de la caja de
conexión y de descarga que podrían indicar un
funcionamiento deficiente de la válvula. Ver más
arriba
(1) Restablecer los valores prefijados del controlador si
es que no se pretenden modificar para la liberación
temporal de oleadas de alimentación.
(2) Volver a verificar el valor prefijado y comprobar que
equivale el valor correcto.
(1) Nivel de alimentación bajo o inexistente. Verificar
velocidad del flujo.
2) Nivel de vertederos demasiado bajo para la
profundidad requerida de espumante. Regular el nivel
en sentido ascendente.
3) Valor del controlador demasiado bajo para la posición
de la válvula de dardo. Aumentar el valor prefijado
para la profundidad deseada de espumante.
(1) Retirar cualquier acumulación de sólidos alrededor de
la toma de aire. Ver Mantenimiento.
(2) Tratar de aumentar la toma de aire hacia la tubería
vertical. Confirmar la limpieza de la toma de aire.
(1) El lavado de la canaleta debe aumentar o ser
intermitente para disminuir la dilución de espumante.
(2) Suministro de presión de agua excesivo. Disminuir la
presión.
(3) Cambiar los sellos de la válvula de agua, regular la
válvula de desconexión del solenoide o, regular el
temporizador del controlador (si se suministra).
Consultar las instrucciones del fabricante, efectuar
mantenimiento.
(1) Dosis inadecuada o incorrecta. Se requiere realizar
pruebas de banco para determinar el reactivo o
espumante y sus valores correctos.
(2) Verificar la toma de aire. Ver párrafos anteriores.
(3) Se ha modificado la composición de la alimentación.
Se requiere una evaluación más frecuente de la dosis
de reactivos.
(4) Disminuir el flujo de alimentación a través de las
celdas. La velocidad es superior al valor óptimo
deseado de espumante.
Rev. A F5-D505
1-2009 RESOLUCION DE FALLAS 12319
MCN2006-0039 44

FALLA CAUSA POSIBLE MEDIDA CORRECTIVA

e. Falla mecánica del mecanismo del
rotor o este opera a un valor no
óptimo.
(1) Las RPM del rotor deben aumentar. Ver Falla N° 8.
Las RPM del rotor son inferiores al valor de diseño y
afectan el resultado. Ver falla Nº 11 “La celda no
produce."
(3) Verificar si el mecanismo vibra, si reduce su
capacidad de mezcla. Ver Falla Nº 6."

12. Nivel del líquido distinto al
valor original.
a. Funcionamiento deficiente
controlador de nivel.
del (1) Consultar las instrucciones del fabricante del
controlador con respecto a su operación y
mantenimiento.
(2) Verificar la respuesta de las válvulas de dardo frente
al controlador. Consultar punto anterior con respecto
al controlador. Consultar mas adelante para las
válvulas.

b. Funcionamiento inadecuado de las (1) Verificar el movimiento del eje de válvulas. Un

válvulas de dardo. movimiento brusco indica problemas de alineación o
corrosión. Ver Mantenimiento. Ninguna medida indica
una falla del controlador, ver punto "a."anterior
(2) Verificar la existencia de filtración de aire en las
válvulas. Verificar que exista una presión adecuada
presión de activación de aire. Ver mantenimiento.
(3) Las válvulas de dardo pueden estar filtrando en los
anillos de refuerzo debido a un desgaste excesivo.
Consultar mantenimiento.
(4) Las válvulas normalmente se abren con pérdida de
energía. Verificar la existencia de válvulas cerradas.
(5) Verificar la presión de suministro de control de aire.
(6) Verificar la señal de aire hacia el posicionador (señal
de 3-15 psig) para garantizar que el posicionador está
recibiendo la señal adecuada.

c. Se restableció accidentalmente el (1) Restablecido para el valor prefijado correcto.

controlador con un valor prefijado
incorrecto luego de un cambio (2) Evite modificar el valor prefijado para cambios
temporal. temporales en el flujo de pulpa.

13. Acumulación de arena en
celdas y cajas.
a. Acumulación de arena en las cajas
de conexión.
(1) Mantener las válvulas de dardo parcialmente abiertas
durante la puesta en marcha para permitir el paso de
flujo.
(2) Verificar la activación de las válvulas. Consultar
causa de la falla “14” punto "b."

b. Acumulación de arena en celdas
(1) Poner nuevamente en marcha el rotor. Este se pondrá
en marcha a pesar de que existe arena en el fondo de
la celda. El rotor empezará a resuspender
gradualmente la arena.
(2) Vaciar el estanque en caso de una parada
prolongada.
(3) Verificar el proceso del flujo. Las alimentaciones con
un exceso de sólidos grueso a veces obstaculizan
mantener las partículas en suspensión.

c. La falla del mecanismo impide una (1) Consultar la causa de falla “13.”, punto “e.”
mezcla adecuada de alimentación y
suspensión de sólidos. (2) Consultar instrucciones de Mantenimiento.
Rev. A 01-AA17
2-2009 OFICINAS 12319
MCN2006-0039 45

FLSmidth Minerals INC

2850 South Decker Lake Drive
Salt Lake City, Utah 84119-2300
Telephone: 801-526-2000
Facsimile: 801-526-2001

Una vez terminado el contrato, todos los servicios, y repuestos serán atendidos por nuestra Oficina y Casa Matriz para la Región de
América Latina.

Oficina para la Región de América del Norte: Oficina para Europa, Africa y Medio Oriente:

FLSmidth Minerals FLSmidth Minerals

2850 South Decker Lake Drive Swift House
Salt Lake City, Utah 84119-2300, U.S.A. Cosford Lane
Teléfono: 1 + 801-526-2000 Rugby, Warwickshire
Facsimil: 1 + 801-526-2001 Inglaterra, Reino Unido de Gran Bretaña
CV21 1QN
Teléfono: 44 + (0) 1788-555777
Facsímil: 44 + (0) 1788-555778

FLSmidth Minerals. FLSmidth Minerals

Av. Venustiano Carranza No. 990 Sudáfrica Pty. Ltd.
Piso 11 Oficina “E” 24 Cavora Street
Colonia Moderna, C.P. 78250 Jet Park, Boksburg 1463, Sudáfrica
San Luis Potosí, S.L.P., México Teléfono: 27+11-397-3975
Teléfono: 52+444-811-1848 Facsímil: 27+11-397-3978
Facsímil: 52+444-811-1776

Oficina para la Región de América Latina: Oficina para la Región Asia Pacífico

FLSmidth Minerals FLSmidth Minerals.

Nueva de Lyon 072 – Oficina 1102 31 Kaki Bukit Road 3, #05-07 Techlink
Santiago - Chile Singapur 417818
Teléfono: 56 + 2-290-0000 Teléfono: 65 + 6743-0338
Facsímil: 56 + 2-334-3949 Facsímil: 65 + 6743-0339

FLSmidth Minerals. FLSmidth Minerals.

Rua Antonio das Chagas, 1321 11 Bowen Crescent
04714-002 - Chacara Santo Antonio West Gosford. NSW 2250, Australia
Sao Paulo - S.P. - Brasil Teléfono 61+ 2-4320-4700
Teléfono: 55+11-5683-3300 Facsímil: 61+ 2-4320-4777
Facsímil: 55+11-5683-3333

Oficina para la Región de Canadá: FLSmidth Minerals

Room 805, Jingguang Center Office Building
FLSmidth Minerals. Mailbox 8806 Pekín
174 West Street South HU Jia Lou, Distrito Chao Yang
Casilla 1200 Pekín 100029
Orillia, Ontario L3V 6L4 Canadá República Popular China
Teléfono: (705) 325-6181 Teléfono: 86+10-6597-8686
Facsímil: (705) 325-3363 Facsimil: 86+10-6597-8133

Oficina de Ventas Locales: FLSmidth Minerals.

Nueva de Lyon 072 – Oficina 1102
Santiago - Chile
Teléfono: 56 + 2-290-0000
Facsimil: 56 + 2-334-3949

Nota: Todos los números telefónicos / fax van precedidos por el código de país (por ejemplo Reino Unido de Gran Bretaña 44 +).
Rev. A G-F5100
1-2009 LISTADO DE CHEQUEO MECANICO FINAL 12319
MCN2006-0001 46 (1 de 4)

NUMERO DE SERIE: 12319

Cada chequeo mecánico debe ir debidamente firmado con sus iniciales y la fecha respectiva. Una vez finalizado el
chequeo mecánico final tanto el personal de servicio de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. y la empresa a cargo de la instalación
montajista deben firmar y fechar este listado de chequeo y devolver una copia de cada unidad de la celda de Flotación
#257 que debe ser entregada al Departamento de Administración de Proyectos de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. a objeto de
garantizar la cobertura de la garantía.

FIRMA DEL FIRMA DEL PERSONAL

CHEQUEO REFERENCIA INSTALADOR DE SERVICIO EIMCO

INSTALACION DEL ESTANQUE

Confirmar que las fundaciones tengan una Plano de Arreglo y Montaje General
nivelación dentro de 6 mm (1/4”) e instrucciones de instalación del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.

Confirmar daño en estanques, caja de Instrucciones de Instalación y

conexión, alimentación, descarga y Mantenimiento del manual
revestimientos. FLSmidth Minerals S.A.

Verificar que las conexiones estanque a Planos de Montaje final, Listado de

estanque tengan las empaquetaduras y Partes e Instrucción de instalación
placa de orificio correctas. del Manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.

Confirmar que los pernos de estanque a Instrucciones de Instalación del

estanque tengan el torque adecuado. Manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.

Confirmar el anclaje de los estanques a Plano de Arreglo y Montaje General

las fundaciones. e instrucciones de instalación del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.

MONTAJE DEL ESTANQUE

Confirmar nivelación de las descargas de Instrucciones de instalación del
la celda. manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.

Confirmar que las conexiones de Instrucciones de instalación del

estanque a estanque no presentan
filtraciones luego de la puesta en marcha
Confirmar que el collar tenga el enganche
especificado con respecto al rotor
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Planos de Montaje e instrucciones
de instalación del manual FLSmidth
Minerals S.A.

Verificar que el tubo de aspiración tenga la Instrucciones de Instalación del

concentricidad especificada con respecto
al rotor, con una tolerancia de +-1/4”.
Confirmar que los pernos del fondo falso
tengan el torque apropiado.
Manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Planos de Montaje, Listado de
Partes e instrucciones de
instalación del manual FLSmidth
Minerals S.A.

Verificar posición de canaletas. Ver plano de Montaje de canaletas

en el manual FLSmidth Minerals
S.A.

Verificar que el contacto entre la celda y la Ver plano de instalación del

fundación sea el adecuado estanque en el manual FLSmidth
Minerals S.A.
Rev. A
1-2009
MCN2006-0001
CHEQUEO
Verificar posición de canaletas.
Verificar que el contacto entre la celda y la
fundación sea el adecuado
CAJAS DE DESCARGA, CONEXION Y ALIMENTACION
Confirmar que las conexiones
enflanchadas de la caja de conexión
estén totalmente apretadas.
Verificar que las conexiones enflanchadas
de la caja de descarga estén debidamente
apretadas
Verificar el encaje correcto de las válvulas
de dardo en los respectivos asientos de
válvulas
Confirmar alineación del eje de la válvula
de dardo.
Verificar que los controles estén
debidamente instalados.
Comprobar que la presión de suministro
de aire corresponda a las
especificaciones.
UNIDAD DEL MECANISMO
Confirmar la nivelación del mecanismo.
Verificar que la viga de soporte del
mecanismo a las conexiones de los
estanques tengan el torque especificado.
Confirmar verticalidad del eje (rotor) del
mecanismo.
Comprobar que las conexiones de las
vigas principales a las vigas del
mecanismo tengan los pernos
especificados.
Verificar que las conexiones entre vigas
principales –vigas I del mecanismo y
estructuras del mecanismo tengan pernos
con torque adecuado.
G-F5100
LISTADO DE CHEQUEO MECANICO FINAL 12319
47 (2 de 4)
FIRMA DEL FIRMA DEL PERSONAL
REFERENCIA INSTALADOR DE SERVICIO EIMCO
Ver plano de Montaje de canaletas
en el manual FLSmidth Minerals
S.A.
Ver plano de instalación del
estanque en el manual FLSmidth
Minerals S.A.
Instrucciones de Instalación del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Instrucciones de instalación del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Planos de montaje e instrucciones
de instalación del manual FLSmidth
Minerals S.A.
Instrucciones de Instalación y
Mantenimiento del manual
FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Planos de Arreglo, Montaje General
y P&ID e instrucciones de
instalación del manual FLSmidth
Minerals S.A.
Planos P&ID e instrucciones de
instalación del manual FLSmidth
Minerals S.A.
Instrucciones de Instalación del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Planos de Montaje y Arreglo
General de Vigas y Cajas e
instrucciones de instalación del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Planos de montaje e instrucciones
de instalación y mantenimiento del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Planos de Montaje final e
instrucciones de instalación del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Planos de montaje general, Listado
de partes e instrucciones de
instalación y mantenimiento del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Rev. A
1-2009 LISTADO DE CHEQUEO MECANICO FINAL
MCN2006-0001
CHEQUEO
Confirmar que la conexión entre el motor y
la placa de montaje tengan los pernos
especificados.
Confirmar que los pernos entre el motor y
la placa de montaje tienen el torque
adecuado.
Verificar alineación de poleas
Confirmar tensión de correas en V
Comprobar estado general de las
conexiones del motor
Confirmar que los rodamientos del eje del
rotor y el motor tienen la lubricación
adecuada.
Verificar que el sentido de giro del motor.
Verificar que los guarda-correas estén
debidamente instalados
INSTRUMENTACION Y CONTROLES
Revisar cableado del sistema de control
de nivel
Chequear cableado del sistema de flujo
de espumante
Revisar los componentes del sistema de
aire confirmando su adecuada instalación
y operación.
MISCELANEOS
Comprobar que todos los letreros de
ADVERTENCIA y PRECAUCION estén
debidamente instalados con buena
visibilidad y se puedan leer fácilmente.
G-F5100
12319
48 (3 de 4)
FIRMA DEL FIRMA DEL PERSONAL
REFERENCIA INSTALADOR DE SERVICIO EIMCO
Planos de Montaje, Listado de
Partes e instrucciones de
Instalación y mantenimiento del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Planos de Montaje, Listado de
partes e instrucciones de instalación
y Mantenimiento manual FLSmidth
Minerals S.A.
Instrucciones de instalación del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Instrucciones de Instalación y
Mantenimiento del manual
FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Instrucciones del Fabricante en el
capítulo de equipo accesorio del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Instrucciones de Lubricación del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Plano de Arreglo y Montaje
General, e instrucciones del
Fabricante de motor en capítulo de
equipo accesorio del manual
FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Planos de Montaje, Listado de
Partes e instrucciones de
Instalación del manual FLSmidth
Minerals S.A.
Instrucciones del Fabricante en
capítulo de equipo accesorio del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Instrucción del Fabricante del
capítulo de equipo accesorio del
manual FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Planos de Montaje e
instrucciones de
instalación del manual
FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
Rev. A G-F5100
1-2009 LISTADO DE CHEQUEO MECANICO FINAL 12319
MCN2006-0001 49 (4 de 4)

Notas y Comentarios:

Firma del Instalador / Montajista Fecha

Firma Representante de Servicio FLSmidth Minerals S. A. Fecha

Rev. A 01-AA17
2-2009 GARANTIA MECANICA 12319
MCN2006-0039 50

GARANTÍA MECÁNICA
Las partes y equipos de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. están respaldadas por la siguiente garantía.

Solamente para beneficio del usuario original, FLSmidth Minerals S.A. garantiza que todos los nuevos equipos y partes fabricados por ésta y
suministrados al usuario original (colectivamente, "Productos") están libres de defectos en el material y fabricación por un año desde la fecha de
despacho de cada Producto por parte de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. ("Vigencia de la Garantía").

Si cualquier Producto de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. no cumple con la presente garantía, FLSmidth Minerals S.A. deberá efectuar lo siguiente:

(a) Reparar o reemplazar sin costo para el usuario original, EX FABRICA de los talleres de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. u otro lugar que FLSmidth
Minerals S.A. designe, cualquier producto o partes en cuestión devueltas a FLSmidth Minerals S.A., cuyo examen deberá demostrar que
han fallado bajo uso y servicio normal por parte del usuario original dentro de la Vigencia de la Garantía; suponiendo que fuese
impracticable para el Producto o parte en cuestión ser devuelto a FLSmidth Minerals S.A., FLSmidth Minerals S.A. enviará a un
representante al puesto de trabajo del usuario original para inspeccionar el producto. Si se determina después de la inspección que
FLSmidth Minerals S.A. es responsable bajo esta garantía de reparar o reemplazar el producto o parte, FLSmidth Minerals S.A. deberá
asumir el costo de devolver el Producto a FLSmidth Minerals S.A. para su inspección o enviar a un representante al puesto de trabajo; sin
embargo, si se determina después de la inspección que FLSmidth Minerals S.A. no es responsable bajo esta garantía, el cliente de
FLSmidth Minerals S.A. o el usuario original deberá pagar los costos; o

(b) A la sola opción de FLSmidth Minerals S.A., reembolsar todo o parte del precio de compra asignable al Producto defectuoso, o partes en
cuestión.

Para que FLSmidth Minerals S.A. sea responsable con respecto a esta garantía, el usuario original debe hacer su reclamación con respecto
a esta garantía en forma escrita no más allá de 30 días después de la fecha en que el usuario original descubre las bases para su
reclamación de garantía y en ningún caso más allá de los 30 días después de la expiración de la Vigencia de la garantía.

Además de cualquier otra limitación o descargos con respecto a esta garantía, FLSmidth Minerals S.A. no tendrá responsabilidad alguna,
con respecto a lo siguiente:

(I) Falla de los Productos, o daños a ellos, debido a la negligencia o mal manejo intencional, abuso o almacenaje inapropiado, instalación,
aplicación o mantenimiento (según lo especificado en los manuales o instrucciones escritas que FLSmidth Minerals S.A. entrega al
comprador) del usuario original;

(II) Productos que hayan sido alterados o reparados en cualquier forma sin la autorización previa por escrito de FLSmidth Minerals S.A.;

(III) Descomposición de los Productos por acción química, erosión o corrosión o desgaste de los Productos causada por materiales abrasivos; o

(IV) Reclamos con respecto a partes que son consumibles y normalmente reemplazadas durante el mantenimiento, tales como medios de filtro,
correas, filtro de drenajes y similares, a excepción en donde dichas partes no estén rindiendo de acuerdo a la estimación de vida útil normal
de FLSmidth Minerals S.A., en cuyo caso, FLSmidth Minerals S.A. deberá responsabilizarse sólo del costo pro rata de reemplazo de dichas
partes basándose en la estimación de cual debería haber sido la restante vida útil de dichas partes, suponiendo que la falla de dichas partes
no resultó de ninguno de los temas listados en las causas (i) a (iv) anteriores.

Con respecto a las partes, equipo, accesorios o componentes suministrados por terceros, la responsabilidad de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. quedará
restringida solamente a la asignación de garantías de terceros disponibles para el usuario original al respecto. Es responsabilidad del cliente de
FLSmidth Minerals S.A. o del usuario original contratar ingenieros u otros expertos para determinar la adaptabilidad del producto para uso del
usuario original. FLSmidth Minerals S.A. no se hará responsable del diseño o adaptabilidad de ningún Producto para ningún uso en particular a
excepción que se establezca, expresamente en un documento escrito, una garantía con respecto a dicha materia ejecutada por un representante
autorizado de FLSmidth Minerals S.A.). Al hacer las interpretaciones de los datos, los empleados de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. le darán el beneficio
al cliente de su juicio profesional razonable en cuanto a la interpretación correcta, pero FLSmidth Minerals S.A. no puede garantizar y no
garantiza la precisión o exactitud de dichas interpretaciones (a excepción que se establezca, expresamente en un documento escrito, una
garantía con respecto a dicha materia ejecutada por un representante autorizado de FLSmidth Minerals S.A.).

El precio cotizado para los Productos de FLSmidth Minerals S.A. se basa en esta garantía. Cualquier incremento en la obligación de la garantía
puede estar sujeto a un incremento en el precio.

LA PARTES ACUERDAN EN QUE TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO GARANTÍA DE AJUSTE PARA UN
PROPÓSITO PARTICULAR Y COMERCIALIZACIÓN, YA SEA ESCRITA, ORAL O ESTATUTARIA, ESTÁN EXCLUIDAS HASTA EL ALCANCE
MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY. TODAS LAS GARANTÍAS Y OBLIGACIONES DE EIMCO TERMINARÁN SI: (1) EL CLIENTE DE EIMCO O
USUARIO ORIGINAL NO CUMPLE CON LAS OBLIGACIONES ESTABLECIDAS BAJO ESTO U OTRO CONTRATO ENTRE LAS PARTES; O
(2) EL CLIENTE DE EIMCO Y EL USUARIO ORIGINAL NO PAGAN CUALQUIER OTRO CARGO DE OTRO MODO DEBIDO A EIMCO.

FLSmidth Minerals S.A. no se hará responsable de ningún daño indirecto, punitivo, ejemplar o consecuencial, incluyendo daños por
pérdida de producción, paralización de planta, interrupciones de servicio, incremento en los gastos de producción, incremento en los
gastos de suministro de energía, pérdida de uso de capital, pérdida de ingresos, pérdida de productos, pérdida de utilidades o pérdida
de oportunidades de negocio, resultantes de cualquier causa que sea, incluyendo la negligencia de cualquier persona o entidad.

EIMCO, BIRD, WEMCO, SHRIVER™, KnowledgeScape™ Y PYRAMID SON PRODUCTOS DE FLSmidth Minerals S.A.

QFORM 0115-02032 Rev. B

 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

IT N° PAGE NUMERO DE PARTE PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION OBS

1 2-3 12319ME01EN001-A 12342ME01EN01 GENERAL ASSEMBLY CELLS MODEL 300m3
2 4 12319ME01EN005-A 12319ME01EN005 FEED BOX ASSY MODEL 300m3
3 5 12319ME01EN006-A 12319ME01EN006 DISCHARGE BOX ASSY MODEL 300m3 - ROUGHER
4 5 12319ME01EN006-C 12319ME01EN006 DISCHARGE BOX ASSY MODEL 300m3 CLEANER / SCAVENG.
5 6-7 12319ME01EN004-A 12319ME01EN04 MECHANISM ASSEMBLY ROUGHER TYPE -A
6 8-9 12319ME01EN004-C 12319ME01EN04 MECHANISM ASSEMBLY CLEANER & SCAVENGER TYPE -C
7 10 589347 589347 BELT GUARD, MODEL 300, WEMCO FLOT, STEEL
8 11 1193075 1193075 MANUAL AIR INLET ASSEMBLY
9 12 12319ME01EN10 12319ME01EN10 RADIAL LAUNDER ASSY TYP
10 13 12319ME01EN11 12319ME01EN11 RADIAL LAUNDER ASSY FOR HINGED
11 14 12319ME01EN007-A 12319ME01EN007 DRAFT TUBE ASSY. ROUGHER TYPE -A MODEL 300m3
12 14 12319ME01EN007-C 12319ME01EN007 DRAFT TUBE ASSY. CLEANER & SCAVENGER TYPE -C 300m3
13 15 12319ME01EN08-A 12342ME01EN08 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY TYPE -A
14 16 12319ME01EN08-C 12342ME01EN08 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY TYPE -C
15 17 12319ME01EN08-D 12342ME01EN08 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY TYPE -D
16 18 12319ME01EN09-A 12342ME01EN09 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY (DISCHARGE) TYPE -A
17 19 12319ME01EN09-C 12342ME01EN09 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY (DISCHARGE) TYPE -C
18 20 574769 574769 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY
19 20 574770 574770 LEVEL FLOAT ASSEMBLY
20 21-22-23 12319ME01EN16 12319ME01EN16 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY ROUGHER
21 24-25-26 12319ME01EN17 12319ME01EN17 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY CLEANER/ SCAVENGER

Pág. 1 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION OBS
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE
1 12319ME01EN001-A 12342ME01EN01 GENERAL ASSEMBLY CELLS MODEL 300m3
1 4 4 12319ME01EN005-A 12319ME01EN005 FEED BOX ASSY MODEL 300m3
2A 2 2 12319ME01EN006-A 12319ME01EN006 DISCHARGE BOX ASSY MODEL 300m3 - ROUGHER
2C 2 2 12319ME01EN006-C 12319ME01EN006 DISCHARGE BOX ASSY MODEL 300m3 CLEANER / SCAVENG.
3 14 14 12319ME01EN004-A 12319ME01EN04 MECHANISM ASSEMBLY ROUGHER TYPE -A
4 12 12 12319ME01EN004-C 12319ME01EN04 MECHANISM ASSEMBLY CLEANER & SCAVENGER TYPE -C
5 26 26 577919-A 577919 TANK UPPER SEGMENT 300m3
6 8 8 577924-A 577924 TANK LOWER TANK TO TANK 300m3 (AS SHOWN)
7 8 8 577924-C 577924 TANK LOWER TANK TO TANK 300m3 (OPPOSITE)
8 5 5 577926-A 577926 TANK LOWER DROP TANK 300m3 (AS SHOWN)
9 5 5 577926-C 577926 TANK LOWER DROP TANK 300m3 (OPPOSITE)
10
11 16 16 12319ME01EN10 12319ME01EN10 RADIAL LAUNDER ASSY TYP
12 10 10 12319ME01EN11 12319ME01EN11 RADIAL LAUNDER ASSY FOR HINGED
13
14 14 14 12319ME01EN007-A 12319ME01EN007 DRAFT TUBE ASSY. ROUGHER TYPE -A MODEL 300m3
15 12 12 12319ME01EN007-C 12319ME01EN007 DRAFT TUBE ASSY. CLEANER & SCAVENGER TYPE -C 300m3
16 52 52 570114-01 570114 FALSE BOTTOM TAB
17 156 156 570113-01 570113 FALSE BOTTOM SECTION MODEL 300m3
18 26 26 568625-01 568625 CONE, FLOOR, DRAFT TUBE, 300m3
19 1716 1716 903944A 903944 WASHER, NYLON, 3mm THKx 30 mmIDx100mmOD
20 1716 1716 903895A 903895 HOSE, 3-1/2" ID, MULTIPLIES, EPDM
21 1820 1820 W57774B 57774B GROMMET 4" RUBBER
22 14 14 574769 574769 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY
23 1 1 12319ME01EN16 12319ME01EN16 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY ROUGHER
24 26 26 86801-W 86801 BLIND FLANGE DIA 18"
25 26 26 12319ME01EN01-25 - GASKET DIA. 18"
26 30 30 12319ME01EN01-26 - GASKETING, NEOPRENE 25mm x 50mm x 8000mm
27 45 45 903150A 903150 SEALANT, URETHANE ADHESIVE

Pág. 2 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION OBS
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE
28 1 1 12319ME01EN17 12319ME01EN17 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY CLEANER/ SCAVENGER
29 6 6 12319ME01EN08-A 12342ME01EN08 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY TYPE -A
30 2 2 12319ME01EN08-C 12342ME01EN08 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY TYPE -C
31 2 2 12319ME01EN08-D 12342ME01EN08 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY TYPE -D
32 2 2 12319ME01EN09-A 12342ME01EN09 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY (DISCHARGE) TYPE -A
33 2 2 12319ME01EN09-C 12342ME01EN09 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY (DISCHARGE) TYPE -C
34
35
36
37
38
39 20 20 12319ME01EN001-39 GASKET
40 10 10 12319ME01EN001-40 EPOXIC PASTE RUBBER
41 3744 3744 F10407 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 5/8-11x2
42 784 784 F10427 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 3/4-10x3
43 416 416 1142644-01 1142644 CAPSCREW HX HD, GR5 ZNC 7/8-9x15
44 468 468 12319ME01EN001-44 CAPSCREW HX HD, M24x 70 A304
45 1352 1352 12319ME01EN001-45 CAPSCREW HX HD, M24x 55 A304
46 416 416 F10051 BOLT, HX HD, TYPE 1-1/4-7x4 GR5 ZNC
47 208 208 M028095 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 1-8x3-1/2
48
51 3744 3744 F10858 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 5/8-11
52 728 728 F10889 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 3/4-10
53 416 416 M034362 NUT, HX, GR5 ZNC, 7/8-9
54
55
56 416 416 F10845 NUT, HVY HX, A325, 1-1/4-7
57 208 208 F10854 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 1-8
58

Pág. 3 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION OBS
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE
60
61 11232 11232 M025683 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-N, F844, ZNC, 5/8
62 1512 1512 F11200 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-W, 3/4x2x,148,STL
63 832 832 F16802 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-W, F844, ZNC, 7/8
64 1820 1820 12319ME01EN001-64 WASHER, M24x 70 A304
65
66 832 832 F50133 WASHER, FLAT, THRU HDN, F436HDG 1 1/4
67 416 416 F12647 WASHER, FLAT, THRU HDN, F436, 1"
68
69
70

Pág. 4 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION OBS
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE
4 12319ME01EN005-A 12319ME01EN005 FEED BOX ASSY MODEL 300m3
1 1 4 12319ME01FA005-A 12319ME01FA005 FEED BOX MODEL 300m3
2 1 4 RM12319ME01EN005-02 NATURAL RUBBER 6mm M.O.R.

Pág. 5 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION OBS
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE
2 12319ME01EN006-A 12319ME01EN006 DISCHARGE BOX ASSY MODEL 300m3 - ROUGHER
1 1 2 12319ME01FA006-A 12319ME01FA006 DISCHARGE BOX MODEL 300m3 (PIPE DIA. 34") ROUGHER
2 1 2 RM12319ME01EN006-02 NATURAL RUBBER 10 & 6mm M.O.R.

2 12319ME01EN006-C 12319ME01EN006 DISCHARGE BOX ASSY MODEL 300m3 CLEANER / SCAVENG.

1 1 2 12319ME01FA006-C 12319ME01FA006 DISCHARGE BOX MODEL 300m3 (PIPE DIA. 24") CLEANER/ SCAVENG.
2 1 2 RM12319ME01EN006-02 NATURAL RUBBER 10 & 6mm M.O.R.

Pág. 6 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE TOTAL
14 12319ME01EN004-A 12319ME01EN04 MECHANISM ASSEMBLY ROUGHER TYPE -A
1 1 14 589345-06 589345 / 589346 SHAFT MODEL 300m3 ROUGHER M.O.R. / STL 502,3
2 1 14 589349-06 589349 / 589350 1510mm (59.5") STAR ROTOR (103 RPM) M.O.R. / STL 1949,2
3 12 168 570086 570086 DISPERSER HOOD SECTOR URETHANE 445,5
4 1 14 589358-06A 589358 /589359 CROWDER LINED - A TYPE STL/ M.O.R. 1914,3
5 2 28 573999 573999 DISPERSER MODEL 300m3 URETHANE 1559,8
6 1 14 568608 568608 MECHANISM SUPPORT MODEL 300m3 A36 STL 2855,7
7 1 14 1193075-01L 1193075 MANUAL AIR INLET ASSY, 14" STL 69,2
8 1 14 568612 568612 REDUCER MOUNTING PLATE A36 STL 1511,3
9 1 14 570104-06 570104 ROTOR CAP M.O.R. / STL 12,0
10 4 56 903150A 903150 SEALANT, ADHESIVE URETHANE 0,0
11 1 14 589344 589344 MOTOR MOUNT FRAME A36 STL 400,2
12 2 28 573998 573998 MOUNT, RAIL, MOTOR STL /ZNC 195,4
13 1 14 541744 FLENDER REDUCER, B3BV15 4459,2
14 1 14 589347 589347 / 589348 BELT GUARD ASSY MODEL 300m3 STL 98,2
15 10 140 589368 V-BELT, 8VX1800 RUBBER 16,9
16 1 14 577944 SHEAVE, 24.8" O.D. CAST IRON 236,8
17 1 14 589366 SHEAVE 19.0" O.D. CAST IRON 122,2
18 1 14 579763 ADAPTER PLATE A36 STL 53,2
19 1 14 1160208-01 1160208 RETAINER, SEAL, REDUCER, SIZE 15 A36 STL 10,5
20 1 14 1160209-01 1160209 SEAL, REDUCER, SIZE 15 G.B. NEOPRENE 2,0
21 1 14 12319-I LIST MOTOR-500HP, 3/3300/50 (SIEMENS) 3022,7
22 12 168 574768 HOOD SECTOR CLAMP A36 STL 40,0
23 48 672 1126231-01 1126231 HOOD SECTOR BOSS A53 GRB STL 1,9
24 216 3024 574005 M12 BOLT CAP URETHANE 1,1
25 44 616 574001 M20 BOLT CAP URETHANE 3,9
26 115 1610 301246 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 x 45 CL 8.8 ZNC 6,5
27 6 84 301556 CAPSCR, HEX, M16 x 60 CL 8.8 ZNC 0,8
28 14 196 301878 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 50 CL 8.8 ZNC 13,2

Pág. 7 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE TOTAL
29 78 1092 301879 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 60 CL 8.8 ZNC 10,8
30 61 854 301880 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 70 CL 8.8 ZNC 17,2
31 48 672 301881 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 80 CL 8.8 ZNC 13,1
32 12 168 302177 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 80 CL 8.8 ZNC 11,7
33 12 168 302179 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 100 CL 8.8 ZNC 5,9
34 18 252 303393 CAPSCR, HEX, M36 x 160 MOLYBOND 31,3
35 4 56 583212 CAPSCR, HEX, M52 x 170 CL 8.8 ZNC 18,4
36 108 1512 308137 NUT, HEX, M12 CL 8.8 ZNC 1,8
37 83 1162 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8.8 ZNC 6,9
38 18 252 308142 NUT, HEX, M36 MOLYBOND 7,0
39 115 1610 307167 WSHR, HRD, M12, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 0,7
40 240 3360 307169 WSHR, HRD, M20, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 5,4
41 6 84 583216 WSHR, LOCK, M20 TP200 ZNC 0,1
42 12 168 574760 WSHR, NORD-LOCK, M24 TP200 ZNC 0,3
43 28 392 307160 WSHR, HRD, M24, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 0,9
44 36 504 583211 WSHR, HRD, M36, DIN 125A MOLYBOND 1,7
45 4 56 583213 WSHR, HRD, M52, DIN 125B TP200 ZNC 1,3
46 1 14 566867-29 566867 NAMEPLATE 316 SS 0,4
47 1 14 W69017-1 W69017 DECAL - WARNING, "MOVING PARTS" 316 SS 0,0
48 1 14 75305-01 W75305 CAUTION PLATE, V-BELT 316 SS 0,1
49 10 140 W234140 RIVET - STD POP, 3/16 x .375 AL-5056 0,0
50 1 14 589358-06C 589358 CROWDER - LINED - C TYPE M.O.R. / A36 965,8
51 8 112 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 90, CL 8,8 ZNC STL 2,4
52 118 1652 579756-06 579756 M24 BOLT CAP URETHANE 7,1
53 30 420 579757 WSHR, FENDER, DIN 9021 B, M20 TP200 ZNC 2,3
54 16 224 12319ME01EN04-81 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 80, MOLYBOND MOLYBOND 6,7

Pág. 8 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE TOTAL
12 12319ME01EN004-C 12319ME01EN04 MECHANISM ASSEMBLY CLEANER & SCAVENGER TYPE -C
1 1 12 579761-06 579761 / 579762 SHAFT M.O.R. / STL 502,3
2 1 12 589349-06 589349 / 589350 1510mm (59.5") STAR ROTOR (103 RPM) M.O.R. / STL 1949,2
3 12 144 570086 570086 DISPERSER HOOD SECTOR URETHANE 445,5
4 1 12 589358-06A 589358 /589359 CROWDER LINED - A TYPE STL/ M.O.R. 1914,3
5 2 24 573999 573999 DISPERSER MODEL 300m3 URETHANE 1559,8
6 1 12 568608 568608 MECHANISM SUPPORT MODEL 300m3 A36 STL 2855,7
7 1 12 1193075-01L 1193075 MANUAL AIR INLET ASSY, 14" STL 69,2
8 1 12 568612 568612 REDUCER MOUNTING PLATE A36 STL 1511,3
9 1 12 570104-06 570104 ROTOR CAP M.O.R. / STL 12,0
10 4 48 903150A 903150 SEALANT, ADHESIVE URETHANE 0,0
11 1 12 589344 589344 MOTOR MOUNT FRAME A36 STL 400,2
12 2 24 573998 573998 MOUNT, RAIL, MOTOR STL /ZNC 195,4
13 1 12 541744 FLENDER REDUCER, B3BV15 4459,2
14 1 12 589347 589347 / 589348 BELT GUARD ASSY MODEL 300m3 STL 98,2
15 10 120 589368 V-BELT, 8VX1800 RUBBER 16,9
16 1 12 577944 SHEAVE, 24.8" O.D. CAST IRON 136,8
17 1 12 589367 SHEAVE 18.0" O.D. CAST IRON 122,2
18 1 12 579763 ADAPTER PLATE A36 STL 53,2
19 1 12 1160208-01 1160208 RETAINER, SEAL, REDUCER, SIZE 15 A36 STL 10,5
20 1 12 1160209-01 1160209 SEAL, REDUCER, SIZE 15 G.B. NEOPRENE 2,0
21 1 12 12319-I LIST MOTOR-500HP, 3/3300/50 (SIEMENS) 3022,7
22 12 144 574768 HOOD SECTOR CLAMP A36 STL 40,0
23 48 576 1126231-01 1126231 HOOD SECTOR BOSS A53 GRB STL 1,9
24 216 2592 574005 M12 BOLT CAP URETHANE 1,1
25 44 528 574001 M20 BOLT CAP URETHANE 3,9
26 115 1380 301246 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 x 45 CL 8.8 ZNC 6,5
27 6 72 301556 CAPSCR, HEX, M16 x 60 CL 8.8 ZNC 0,8
28 14 168 301878 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 50 CL 8.8 ZNC 13,2

Pág. 9 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE TOTAL
29 78 936 301879 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 60 CL 8.8 ZNC 10,8
30 61 732 301880 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 70 CL 8.8 ZNC 17,2
31 48 576 301881 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 80 CL 8.8 ZNC 13,1
32 12 144 302177 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 80 CL 8.8 ZNC 11,7
33 12 144 302179 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 100 CL 8.8 ZNC 5,9
34 18 216 303393 CAPSCR, HEX, M36 x 160 MOLYBOND 31,3
35 4 48 583212 CAPSCR, HEX, M52 x 170 CL 8.8 ZNC 18,4
36 108 1296 308137 NUT, HEX, M12 CL 8.8 ZNC 1,8
37 83 996 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8.8 ZNC 6,9
38 18 216 308142 NUT, HEX, M36 MOLYBOND 7,0
39 115 1380 307167 WSHR, HRD, M12, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 0,7
40 240 2880 307169 WSHR, HRD, M20, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 5,4
41 6 72 583216 WSHR, LOCK, M20 TP200 ZNC 0,1
42 12 144 574760 WSHR, NORD-LOCK, M24 TP200 ZNC 0,3
43 28 336 307160 WSHR, HRD, M24, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 0,9
44 36 432 583211 WSHR, HRD, M36, DIN 125A MOLYBOND 1,7
45 4 48 583213 WSHR, HRD, M52, DIN 125B TP200 ZNC 1,3
46 1 12 566867-29 566867 NAMEPLATE 316 SS 0,4
47 1 12 W69017-1 W69017 DECAL - WARNING, "MOVING PARTS" 316 SS 0,0
48 1 12 75305-01 W75305 CAUTION PLATE, V-BELT 316 SS 0,1
49 10 120 W234140 RIVET - STD POP, 3/16 x .375 AL-5056 0,0
50 1 12 589358-06C 589358 CROWDER - LINED - C TYPE M.O.R. / A36 965,8
51 8 96 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 90, CL 8,8 ZNC STL 2,4
52 118 1416 579756-06 579756 M24 BOLT CAP URETHANE 7,1
53 30 360 579757 WSHR, FENDER, DIN 9021 B, M20 TP200 ZNC 2,3
54 16 192 12319ME01EN04-81 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 80, MOLYBOND MOLYBOND 6,7

Pág. 10 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
26 589347 589347 BELT GUARD, MODEL 300, WEMCO FLOT, STEEL
1 1 26 589348-A 589348 BELT GUARD WELDMENT 100,0
2 1 26 589348-C 589348 DOOR TYPE C 27,0
3 1 26 589348-D 589348 DOOR TYPE D 27,0
4 2 52 589348-G 589348 PLATE 3 x DIA. EXT 40 x DIA. INT 14 Steel 0,0
5 2 52 12319ME01EN12-5 Wing Nut, 1/2-13 UNC Steel 0,0
6 1 26 589348-E 589348 COVER TYPE E A36 STL 3,0
7 1 26 589348-F 589348 COVER TYPE F A36 STL 5,0
8 16 416 12319ME01EN12-8 Plain Washer 1/4 DIA. ANSI B18.22.1-1965, R1990 Gr.5ZNC 0,0
9 16 416 12319ME01EN12-9 HEX. CAP 1/4 x 3/8 Gr.5ZNC 0,0

Pág. 11 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION OBS
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE
26 1193075 1193075 MANUAL AIR INLET ASSEMBLY
4 1 26 1193058-01 1193058 AIR INLET PIPE #450, WEMCO FLOT, STEEL
7 1 26 1193063-01 1193063 AIR INLET ARM, 14", MANUAL BUTTERFLY, STEEL
10 1 26 1193065-01 1193065 AIR INLET PLATE, 14", MANUAL BUTTERFLY, STL
12 2 52 83747AK 83747 U-BOLT, RND, STL, W/NUTS, GR2, ZNC
13 4 104 F12197 NUT, HX, GR2, ZNC, 1/4-20
18 1 26 M032288 NUT, WING, TYPE A, ZNC, 3/8-16
21 6 156 F11817 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 7/8-9x2-1/2
24 12 312 F16802 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-W, F844, ZNC, 7/8
(FLAT, THRU HDN, F436)
27 6 156 F10859 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 7/8-9 (NUT, HVY HX, A325)

Pág. 12 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
16 12319ME01EN10 12319ME01EN10 RADIAL LAUNDER ASSY TYP
1 12 192 574766-02 CIRCUMFERENTIAL WEIR UHMWPE 7
2 24 384 568629 RADIAL LAUNDER URETHANE 426.3
4 24 384 570088 RADIAL LAUNDER LOCK NUT URETHANE 26.2
5 12 192 589355 STIFENER UPPER 173.5
6 12 192 589356 STIFENER LOWER 130.7

8 12 192 589353 BAFFLE; PL 6 x 1130 x 1856 A36 STL 1134.4

9 12 192 589354 LAUNDER SUPPORT; PL 6 A36 STL 227.1
10 72 1152 300927 CAPSCR, HEX, M10 x 30 A316L 2.2
11 228 3648 301555 CAPSCR, HEX, M16 x 50 A316L 27.7
12 72 1152 308136 NUT, HEX, M10 A316L .7
13 228 3648 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 A316L 8.2
14 144 2304 27-Dic WSHR, HRD, 10, DIN 125A A316L .7
15 420 6720 29-Dic WSHR, HRD, 16, DIN 125A A316L 5

Pág. 13 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
10 12319ME01EN11 12319ME01EN11 RADIAL LAUNDER ASSY FOR HINGED
1 12 120 574766-02 1108840 CIRCUMFERENTIAL WEIR UHMWPE 7,0
2 22 220 568629 1123229 RADIAL LAUNDER URETHANE 390,8
3 2 20 589352 SP1123908 RADIAL LAUNDER PLUG URETHANE 9,2
4 24 240 570088 1108847 RADIAL LAUNDER LOCK NUT URETHANE 26,2
5 10 100 589355 STIFENER UPPER 144,6
6 10 100 589356 1108851 STIFENER LOWER 108,9
7 2 20 589357 1108850 SHORT STIFENER 13,8
8 12 120 589353 BAFFLE; PL 6 x 1130 x 1856 A36 STL 1134,4
9 10 100 589354 LAUNDER SUPPORT; PL 6 A36 STL 189,2
10 72 720 300927 1123229 CAPSCR, HEX, M10 x 30 A316L 2,2
11 213 2130 301555 CAPSCR, HEX, M16 x 50 A316L 25,9
12 72 720 308136 NUT, HEX, M10 A316L 0,7
13 213 2130 26-Ago NUT, HEX, M16 A316L 7,6
14 144 1440 27-Dic WSHR, HRD, 10, DIN 125A A316L 0,7
15 393 3930 29-Dic WSHR, HRD, 16, DIN 125A A316L 4,6

Pág. 14 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
14 12319ME01EN007-A 12319ME01EN007 DRAFT TUBE ASSY. ROUGHER TYPE -A MODEL 300m3
1 2 28 577918 577918 DRAFT TUBE , SPLIT 924,53
2 2 28 589343 589343 COLLAR, SPLIT, 300 CUBIC METER, WEMCO FLOTATION 323,83
3 56 784 12319ME01EN007-3 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.500, A304
4 56 784 12319ME01EN007-4 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304
5 112 1568 12319ME01EN007-5 WSHR,PLN,TYPB-N,.750, A304
6 16 224 12319ME01EN007-6 SCR,HHC, .625-11X1.75, A304
7 16 224 12319ME01EN007-7 NUT, HEX .625-11 A304
8 32 448 12319ME01EN007-8 Washer .6250 A304

12 12319ME01EN007-C 12319ME01EN007 DRAFT TUBE ASSY. CLEANER & SCAVENGER TYPE -C 300m3
1 2 24 577918 577918 DRAFT TUBE , SPLIT 924,53
2 2 24 577914 577914 COLLAR, SPLIT, 300 CUBIC METER, WEMCO FLOTATION 247,47
3 56 672 12319ME01EN007-3 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.500, A304
4 56 672 12319ME01EN007-4 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304
5 112 1344 12319ME01EN007-5 WSHR,PLN,TYPB-N,.750, A304
6 12 144 12319ME01EN007-6 SCR,HHC, .625-11X1.75, A304
7 12 144 12319ME01EN007-7 NUT, HEX .625-11 A304
8 24 288 12319ME01EN007-8 Washer .6250 A304

Pág. 15 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
6 12319ME01EN08-A 12342ME01EN08 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY TYPE -A
1 2 12 RMP-RAM-3104-001 ACTUATOR 22,6
2 2 12 589342 ACTUATOR SUPPORT; PL12 x635 x635 A36 STL 34,1
3 1 6 589370 ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY, 300M3 CELL 238,1
4 2 12 578506-A ACTUATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY 57,8
5 6 36 1152920 HINGE ASSY 4,5
6 4 24 1152921 UNION PLATE; PL 10 x 120 x 130 SST 1,1
7 9 54 1153155 PLATE SST 0,2
8 2 12 578504 UPPER FRAME - HINGED DART 53
9 2 12 578503-A LOWER FRAME - TYPE A - HINGED DART 66,7
10 2 12 1152924 BAFFLE - HINGED DART 250 7,9
11 2 12 541719 DART VALVE 900mm O.D. (26 IN GROMMET) 87,1
12 2 12 589360 DART VALVE SEAT, 26" 36,2
13 16 96 MO26427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.500,A304 SST 0,3
14 4 24 MO16030 SCR,HHC,.750-10X8.00,A304 SST 0,5
15 24 144 MO19811 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00, A304 SST 0,2
16 16 96 MO16688 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.50,A304 SST 0,2
17 4 24 F13486 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.250,A304 SST 0,2
18 8 48 F10403 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.000,GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,2
19 8 48 F24599 SCR,HHC,.500-13X1.250,A304 SST 0,1
20 34 204 F11747 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304 SST 0,1
21 8 48 F50473 NUT,HEX,.500-13,A304 SST 0,0
22 66 396 F13396 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.750,A304 SST 0,0
23 12 72 F11200 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.750X2.000X.148,STLZNC STLZNC 0,0
24 16 96 MO25311 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.500X1.375X.107,A304 SST 0,0
25 4 24 589364 SPECIAL Washer 3/4",W/ RUBBER 0,1
26 4 24 F10427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00,GRD5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,2
27 12 72 F10889 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,1
28 8 48 12319ME01EN08-28 Hex Nut,M30-1.5, GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,3
29 8 48 Plain Washer ANSI B18.22 M - 30 N GR5ZNC 0,1

Pág. 16 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
2 12319ME01EN08-C 12342ME01EN08 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY TYPE -C
1 2 4 RMP-RAM-3104-001 ACTUATOR 22,6
2 2 4 589342 ACTUATOR SUPPORT; PL12 x635 x635 A36 STL 34,1
3 1 2 589370 ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY, 300M3 CELL 238,1
4 2 4 578506-A ACTUATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY 57,8
5 6 12 1152920 HINGE ASSY 4,5
6 4 8 1152921 UNION PLATE; PL 10 x 120 x 130 SST 1,1
7 9 18 1153155 PLATE SST 0,2
8 2 4 578504 UPPER FRAME - HINGED DART 53
9 2 4 578503-C LOWER FRAME TYPE C - HINGED DART 65,8
10 2 4 1152924 BAFFLE - HINGED DART 250 7,9
11 2 4 1152923 DART VALVE 750mm O.D. (20 IN GROMMET) 53,2
12 2 4 589361 DART VALVE SEAT, 20" 51,7
13 16 32 MO26427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.500,A304 SST 0,3
14 4 8 MO16030 SCR,HHC,.750-10X8.00,A304 SST 0,5
15 24 48 MO19811 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00, A304 SST 0,2
16 16 32 MO16688 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.50,A304 SST 0,2
17 4 8 F13486 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.250,A304 SST 0,2
18 8 16 F10403 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.000,GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,2
19 8 16 F24599 SCR,HHC,.500-13X1.250,A304 SST 0,1
20 34 68 F11747 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304 SST 0,1
21 8 16 F50473 NUT,HEX,.500-13,A304 SST 0,0
22 66 132 F13396 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.750,A304 SST 0,0
23 12 24 F11200 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.750X2.000X.148,STLZNC STLZNC 0,0
24 16 32 MO25311 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.500X1.375X.107,A304 SST 0,0
25 4 8 589364 SPECIAL Washer 3/4",W/ RUBBER 0,1
26 4 8 F10427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00,GRD5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,2
27 12 24 F10889 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,1
28 8 16 12319ME01EN08-28 NUT HEX,M30-1.5, GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,3
29 8 16 Plain Washer ANSI B18.22 M - 30 N GR5ZNC 0,1

Pág. 17 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
2 12319ME01EN08-D 12342ME01EN08 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY TYPE -D
1 2 4 RMP-RAM-3104-001 ACTUATOR 22,6
2 2 4 589342 ACTUATOR SUPPORT; PL12 x635 x635 A36 STL 34,1
3 1 2 589370 ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY, 300M3 CELL 238,1
4 2 4 578506-A ACTUATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY 57,8
5 6 12 1152920 HINGE ASSY 4,5
6 4 8 1152921 UNION PLATE; PL 10 x 120 x 130 SST 1,1
7 9 18 1153155 PLATE SST 0,2
8 2 4 578504 UPPER FRAME - HINGED DART 53,0
9 2 4 578503-F LOWER FRAME TYPE F - HINGED DART 65,2
10 2 4 1152924 BAFFLE - HINGED DART 250 7,9
11 2 4 1152923 DART VALVE 750mm O.D. (20 IN GROMMET) 53,2
12 2 4 561516 DART VALVE SEAT, 18" 56,0
13 16 32 MO26427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.500,A304 SST 0,3
14 4 8 MO16030 SCR,HHC,.750-10X8.00,A304 SST 0,5
15 24 48 MO19811 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00, A304 SST 0,2
16 16 32 MO16688 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.50,A304 SST 0,2
17 4 8 F13486 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.250,A304 SST 0,2
18 8 16 F10403 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.000,GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,2
19 8 16 F24599 SCR,HHC,.500-13X1.250,A304 SST 0,1
20 34 68 F11747 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304 SST 0,1
21 8 16 F50473 NUT,HEX,.500-13,A304 SST 0,0
22 66 132 F13396 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.750,A304 SST 0,0
23 12 24 F11200 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.750X2.000X.148,STLZNC STLZNC 0,0
24 16 32 MO25311 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.500X1.375X.107,A304 SST 0,0
25 4 8 589364 SPECIAL Washer 3/4",W/ RUBBER 0,1
26 4 8 F10427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00,GRD5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,2
27 12 24 F10889 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,1
28 8 16 12319ME01EN08-28 Hex Nut,M30-1.5, GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,3
29 8 16 Plain Washer ANSI B18.22 M - 30 N GR5ZNC 0,1

Pág. 18 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
2 12319ME01EN09-A 12342ME01EN09 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY (DISCHARGE) TYPE -A
1 2 4 RMP-RAM-3104-001 ACTUATOR 22,6
2 2 4 589342 ACTUATOR SUPPORT; PL12 x635 x635 A36 STL 34,1
3 1 2 578511 ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY, 300M³ CELL 214,5
4 2 4 578506-C ACTUATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY 66,8
5 6 12 1152920 HINGE ASSY 4,5
6 4 8 1152921 UNION PLATE; PL 10 x 120 x 130 Stainless Steel 1,1
7 10 20 1153155 PLATE Stainless Steel 0,2
8 2 4 578504 UPPER FRAME - HINGED DART 53,0
9 2 4 578503-D LOWER FRAME TYPE-D - HINGED DART 65,3
10 2 4 1152924 BAFFLE - HINGED DART 250 7,9
11 2 4 1152923 DART VALVE 750mm O.D. (20 IN GROMMET) 53,2
12 2 4 561516 DART VALVE SEAT, 18" 56,0
13 4 8 MO16030 SCR,HHC,.750-10X7.500,A304 Stainless Steel 0,5
14 8 16 MO26427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.500,A304 Stainless Steel 0,3
15 8 16 MO19811 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00, A304 Stainless Steel 0,2
16 24 48 M026160 SCR,HX HD FT,.750-10X3,A316 Stainless Steel 0,2
17 8 16 F24599 SCR,HHC,.500-13X1.250,A304 Stainless Steel 0,1
18 16 32 MO16688 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.50,A304 Stainless Steel 0,2
19 16 32 F10420 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.250,GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,2
20 42 84 F11747 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304 Stainless Steel 0,1
21 8 16 F50473 NUT,HEX,.500-13,A304 Stainless Steel 0,0
22 8 16 12319ME01EN08-28 Hex Nut,M30-1.5, GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,3
23 12 24 F11200 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.750X2.000X.148,STLZNC GR5ZNC 0,0
24 8 16 12319ME01EN08-29 ANSI B18.22 M - 30 N GR5ZNC 0,1
25 4 8 589364 SPECIAL Washer 3/4",W/ RUBBER 0,1
26 16 32 MO25311 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.500X1.375X.107,A304 Stainless Steel 0,0
27 66 132 F13396 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.750,A304 Stainless Steel 0,0
28 4 8 F10889 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,1

Pág. 19 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
2 12319ME01EN09-C 12342ME01EN09 HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY (DISCHARGE) TYPE -C
1 2 4 RMP-RAM-3104-001 ACTUATOR 22,6
2 2 4 589342 ACTUATOR SUPPORT; PL12 x635 x635 A36 STL 34,1
3 1 2 578511 ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY, 300M³ CELL 214,5
4 2 4 578506-C ACTUATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY 66,8
5 6 12 1152920 HINGE ASSY 4,5
6 4 8 1152921 UNION PLATE; PL 10 x 120 x 130 Stainless Steel 1,1
7 10 20 1153155 PLATE Stainless Steel 0,2
8 2 4 578504 UPPER FRAME - HINGED DART 53,0
9 2 4 578503-E LOWER FRAME TYPE-E - HINGED DART 63,3
10 2 4 1152924 BAFFLE - HINGED DART 250 7,9
11 2 4 58936 DART VALVE 660mm O.D. (12 IN GROMMET) 40,2
12 2 4 589362 DART VALVE SEAT, 12" 66,7
13 4 8 MO16030 SCR,HHC,.750-10X7.500,A304 Stainless Steel 0,5
14 8 16 MO26427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.500,A304 Stainless Steel 0,3
15 8 16 MO19811 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00, A304 Stainless Steel 0,2
16 24 48 M026160 SCR,HX HD FT,.750-10X3,A316 Stainless Steel 0,2
17 8 16 F24599 SCR,HHC,.500-13X1.250,A304 Stainless Steel 0,1
18 16 32 MO16688 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.50,A304 Stainless Steel 0,2
19 16 32 F10420 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.250,GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,2
20 42 84 F11747 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304 Stainless Steel 0,1
21 8 16 F50473 NUT,HEX,.500-13,A304 Stainless Steel 0,0
22 8 16 12319ME01EN08-28 Hex Nut,M30-1.5, GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,3
23 12 24 F11200 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.750X2.000X.148,STLZNC GR5ZNC 0,0
24 8 16 12319ME01EN08-29 ANSI B18.22 M - 30 N GR5ZNC 0,1
48 4 8 589364 SPECIAL Washer 3/4",W/ RUBBER 0,1
26 16 32 MO25311 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.500X1.375X.107,A304 Stainless Steel 0,0
27 66 132 F13396 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.750,A304 Stainless Steel 0,0
28 4 8 F10889 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5ZNC GR5ZNC 0,1

Pág. 20 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION OBS
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE
14 574769 574769 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY
1 1 14 30-Ago 574770 LEVEL FLOAT ASSEMBLY
5 1 14 1121125-01 1121125 SUPPORT, LEVEL FLOAT
11 2 28 83747G 83747 U-BOLT, RND, ST , W/NUTS, GR2 ZNC**
5/8-11x6 PIPE
20 4 56 F10407 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5ZNC 5/8-11x2
21 4 56 F10858 NUT, HX, GR5ZNC 5/8-11
22 12 168 F11197 WASHER, PLN TYPE A-W, THRU HDN STL ZNC**
5/8" x 1 3/4 x ,134
14 574770 574770 LEVEL FLOAT ASSEMBLY
1 1 14 1109224-01 1109224 WELL, STILLING, SHORT
2 1 14 1071405-01 1071405 PLATE, TARGET, PVC
4 1 14 1109109-01 1109109 PLATE, SENSOR, 2" FPT, PVC
5 1 14 1109264-01 1109264 CAGE, FLOAT
7 3 42 F14804 CAPSCREW, HX HD GR5ZNC 1/4- 20x 3/4
8 1 14 12319-I LIST 12319-I LIST DETECTOR, SONIC LEVEL
9 1 14 1113228-01 1113228 FLOAT, BALL, 6" DIA, 304 SS
13 1 14 1071772-02 ALL THREAD, 304SS, 1/4-20x38"
14 8 112 F10430 CAPSCREW, HX, GR5ZNC 3/8-16X1 1/2
15 4 56 F10417 CAPSCREW, HX, GR5ZNC 1/2-13X2 1/2
17 2 28 F11198 WASHER, PLN TYPE A-W, F844ZNC 1/4
18 16 224 F11173 WASHER, PLAIN, TYPE A-W, F844ZNC, 3/8
19 8 112 F11199 WASHER, PLAIN, TYPE A-W, THRU
HDN, STL, ZNC, 1/2"x 1-3/8 x ,109
23 2 28 M024371 NUT, HX, GR5ZNC 1/4-20
24 8 112 F10855 NUT, HX, GR5ZNC 3/8-16
25 4 56 F10856 NUT, HX, GR5ZNC 1/2-13

Pág. 21 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
1 12319ME01EN16 12319ME01EN16 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY ROUGHER
1 1 1 12319ME01FA40-A HANDRAIL FA40-A 71
2 1 1 12319ME01FA40-C HANDRAIL FA40-C 71
3 7 7 12319ME01FA41-A HANDRAIL FA41-A 78
4 7 7 12319ME01FA41-C HANDRAIL FA41-C 78
5 12 12 12319ME01FA42-A HANDRAIL FA42-A 132
6 8 8 12319ME01FA42-C HANDRAIL FA42-C 132
7 1 1 12319ME01FA43-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA43-A 59
8 1 1 12319ME01FA43-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA43-C 59
9 3 3 12319ME01FA44-A HANDRAIL FA44-A 47
10 3 3 12319ME01FA44-C HANDRAIL FA44-C 47
11 8 8 12319ME01FA45-A HANDRAIL FA45-A 44
12 3 3 12319ME01FA46-A HANDRAIL FA46-A 51
13 3 3 12319ME01FA46-C HANDRAIL FA46-C 51
14 1 1 12319ME01FA47-A HANDRAIL FA47-A 78
15 1 1 12319ME01FA47-C HANDRAIL FA47-C 78
16 1 1 12319ME01FA48-A HANDRAIL FA48-A 109
17 1 1 12319ME01FA48-C HANDRAIL FA48-C 109
18 1 1 12319ME01FA49-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA49-A 66
19 1 1 12319ME01FA49-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA49-C 67
20 1 1 12319ME01FA50-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA50-A 44
21 1 1 12319ME01FA50-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA50-C 44
22 4 4 12319ME01FA51-A HANDRAIL FA51-A 55
23 1 1 12319ME01FA52-A HANDRAIL FA52-A 40
24 1 1 12319ME01FA52-C HANDRAIL FA52-C 40
25 2 2 12319ME01FA53-A HANDRAIL FA53-A 64
26 4 4 12319ME01FA54-A HANDRAIL FA54-A 58
27 1 1 12319ME01FA55-A HANDRAIL FA55-A 128
28 1 1 12319ME01FA55-C HANDRAIL FA55-C 128

Pág. 22 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
29 12 12 12319ME01FA56-A HANDRAIL FA56-A 82
30 1 1 12319ME01FA57-A HANDRAIL FA57-A 33
31 1 1 12319ME01FA57-C HANDRAIL FA57-C 33
32 1 1 12319ME01FA58-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA58-A 50
33 1 1 12319ME01FA58-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA58-C 50
34 8 8 12319ME01FA61-A 12319ME01FA61-A 64
35 2 2 12319ME01FA62-A 12319ME01FA62-A 28
36 2 2 12319ME01FA62-C 12319ME01FA62-C 4
37 2 2 12319ME01FA63-A 12319ME01FA63-A 45
38 2 2 12319ME01FA63-C 12319ME01FA63-C 10
39 8 8 12319ME01FA64-A 12319ME01FA64-A 68
40 1 1 12319ME01FA71-A C BEAM FA71-A 110
41 6 6 12319ME01FA71-C C BEAM FA71-C 109
42 22 22 12319ME01FA71-D C BEAM FA71-D 109
43 6 6 12319ME01FA71-E C BEAM FA71-E 109
44 1 1 12319ME01FA71-F C BEAM FA71-F 109
45 2 2 12319ME01FA71-G C BEAM FA71-G 86
46 1 1 12319ME01FA71-H C BEAM FA71-H 110
47 1 1 12319ME01FA71-J C BEAM FA71-J 109
48 2 2 12319ME01FA71-K C BEAM FA71-K 109
49 1 1 12319ME01FA71-L C BEAM FA71-L 111
50 1 1 12319ME01FA71-M C BEAM FA71-M 111
51 2 2 12319ME01FA71-N C BEAM FA71-N 86
52 1 1 12319ME01FA71-S C BEAM FA71-S 110
53 1 1 12319ME01FA71-R C BEAM FA71-R 110
54 1 1 12319ME01FA72-A I BEAM FA72-A 106
55 1 1 12319ME01FA72-C I BEAM FA72-C 104
56 1 1 12319ME01FA72-D I BEAM FA72-D 101
57 1 1 12319ME01FA72-E I BEAM FA72-E 104

Pág. 23 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
58 1 1 12319ME01FA72-F I BEAM FA72-F 100
59 1 1 12319ME01FA72-G I BEAM FA72-G 106
60 1 1 12319ME01FA72-H I BEAM FA72-H 104
61 1 1 12319ME01FA72-K I BEAM FA72-K 104
62 6 6 12319ME01FA73-A C BEAM FA73-A 50
63 3 3 12319ME01FA73-C C BEAM FA73-A 50
64 3 3 12319ME01FA73-E C BEAM FA73-A 50
65 1 1 12319ME01FA74-A PLATFORM FA74-A 266
66 1 1 12319ME01FA74-C PLATFORM FA74-C 266
67 2 2 12319ME01FA75-A C BEAM FA75-A 40
68 2 2 12319ME01FA75-C C BEAM FA75-A 41
69 2 2 12319ME01FA76-A C 10 x 15.3 x 2610 Steel 34
70 2 2 12319ME01FA76-C C 10 x 15.3 x 2610 Steel 34
71 2 2 12319ME01FA77-A C BEAM FA77-A 26
72 2 2 12319ME01FA78-A C BEAM FA78-A 68
73 2 2 12319ME01FA78-C C BEAM FA78-C 68
74 2 2 12319ME01FA79-A C BEAM FA79-A 18
75 4 4 12319ME01FA80-A I BEAM FA80-A 194
76 2 2 12319ME01FA80-C I BEAM FA80-C 194
77 15 15 12319ME01FA81-01 L 80 x 80 x 6; L:906 Steel 6
78 12 12 12319ME01FA81-02 L 80 x 80 x 6; L:1965 mm Steel 14
79 12 12 12319ME01FA84 GRATING FA84 Steel 1462
80 12 12 12319ME01FA85 GRATING FA85 Steel 767
81 1 1 12319ME01FA87 GRATING FA87 96
82 2 2 12319ME01FA88 GRATING FA88 Steel 717
83 2 2 12319ME01FA89 GRATING FA89 Steel 575
84 2 2 12319ME01FA90 GRATING FA90 Steel 421
85 2 2 12319ME01FA91 GRATING FA91 Steel 1075
86 12 12 12319ME01FA92 GRATING FA92 Steel 2239

Pág. 24 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
87 12 12 12319ME01FA93 GRATING FA93 Steel 1179
88 12 12 12319ME01FA94 GRATING FA94 Steel 1159
89 6 6 12319ME01FA95 GRATING FA95 Steel 450
90 2 2 12319ME01FA96 GRATING FA96 Steel 1088
91 12 12 12319ME01FA97 GRATING FA97 Steel 522
92 4 4 12319ME01FA98 GRATING FA98 Steel 694
93 2 2 12319ME01FA99 GRATING FA99 Steel 469
94 1 1 589380-A SUPPORT BEAM 1840
95 6 6 589380-C SUPPORT BEAM 1751
96 6 6 589380-D SUPPORT BEAM 1760
97 1 1 589380-E SUPPORT BEAM 1840
98 1 1 589380-F SUPPORT BEAM 1857
99 1 1 589380-G SUPPORT BEAM 1817
100 1 1 589380-H SUPPORT BEAM 1864
101 1 1 589380-J SUPPORT BEAM 1784
102 1 1 589380-K SUPPORT BEAM 1874
103 1 1 589380-L SUPPORT BEAM 1824
104 2 2 589380-M SUPPORT BEAM 1759
105 2 2 589380-N SUPPORT BEAM 1759
109 24 24 12319ME01EN16-109 Hex Bolt - 3/4-10 UNC - 2,5 GR5ZNC 0,2
110 224 224 12319ME01EN16-110 Hex Bolt - 3/4-10 UNC - 2 GR5ZNC 0,2
111 8 8 12319ME01EN16-111 Hex Bolt - 5/8-11 UNC - 3,25 GR5ZNC 0,2
112 268 268 12319ME01EN16-112 Hex Bolt - 5/8-11 - 2 UNC GR5ZNC 0,1
113 440 440 12319ME01EN16-113 Hex Bolt -5/8-11 UNC - 1,5 GR5ZNC 0,1
114 124 124 12319ME01EN16-114 Hex Bolt - 1/2-13 UNC - 2 GR5ZNC 0,1
115 64 64 12319ME01EN16-115 Hex Bolt - 3/8-16 UNC - 1,25 UNC GR5ZNC 0,0
116 248 248 12319ME01EN16-116 Hex Nut 3/4 - 10 GR5ZNC 0,1
117 712 712 12319ME01EN16-117 Hex Nut 5/8 - 11 GR5ZNC 0,0
118 124 124 12319ME01EN16-118 Hex Nut 1/2 - 13 GR5ZNC 0,0

Pág. 25 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
119 64 64 12319ME01EN16-119 Hex Nut 3/8 - 16 GR5ZNC 0,0
120 496 496 12319ME01EN16-120 Washer A narrow 3/4 GR5ZNC 0,0
121 1424 1424 12319ME01EN16-121 Washer A wide 5/8 GR5ZNC 0,0
122 8 8 12319ME01EN16-122 Washer A narrow 5/8 GR5ZNC 0,0
123 248 248 12319ME01EN16-123 Washer A 1/2 - wide - Type A GR5ZNC 0,0
124 128 128 12319ME01EN16-124 Washer A wide 3/8 GR5ZNC 0,0

Pág. 26 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
1 12319ME01EN17 12319ME01EN17 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY CLEANER/ SCAVENGER
1 2 2 12319ME01FA40-A HANDRAIL FA40-A 71
2 2 2 12319ME01FA40-C HANDRAIL FA40-C 71
3 6 6 12319ME01FA41-A HANDRAIL FA41-A 78
4 6 6 12319ME01FA41-C HANDRAIL FA41-C 78
5 14 14 12319ME01FA42-A HANDRAIL FA42-A 132
6 10 10 12319ME01FA42-C HANDRAIL FA42-C 132
7 1 1 12319ME01FA43-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA43-A 59
8 1 1 12319ME01FA43-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA43-C 59
9 4 4 12319ME01FA44-A HANDRAIL FA44-A 47
10 4 4 12319ME01FA44-C HANDRAIL FA44-C 47
11 7 7 12319ME01FA45-A HANDRAIL FA45-A 44
12 4 4 12319ME01FA46-A HANDRAIL FA46-A 51
13 3 3 12319ME01FA46-C HANDRAIL FA46-C 51
14 1 1 12319ME01FA47-A HANDRAIL FA47-A 78
15 1 1 12319ME01FA47-C HANDRAIL FA47-C 78
16 1 1 12319ME01FA48-A HANDRAIL FA48-A 109
17 1 1 12319ME01FA48-C HANDRAIL FA48-C 109
18 1 1 12319ME01FA49-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA49-A 66
19 1 1 12319ME01FA49-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA49-C 67
20 2 2 12319ME01FA50-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA50-A 44
21 2 2 12319ME01FA50-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA50-C 44
22 6 6 12319ME01FA51-A HANDRAIL FA51-A 55
23 1 1 12319ME01FA52-A HANDRAIL FA52-A 40
24 1 1 12319ME01FA52-C HANDRAIL FA52-C 40
25 2 2 12319ME01FA53-A HANDRAIL FA53-A 64
26 4 4 12319ME01FA54-A HANDRAIL FA54-A 58
27 1 1 12319ME01FA55-A HANDRAIL FA55-A 128
28 1 1 12319ME01FA55-C HANDRAIL FA55-C 128

Pág. 27 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
29 12 12 12319ME01FA56-A HANDRAIL FA56-A 82
30 1 1 12319ME01FA57-A HANDRAIL FA57-A 33
31 1 1 12319ME01FA57-C HANDRAIL FA57-C 50
32 2 2 12319ME01FA58-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA58-A 50
33 2 2 12319ME01FA58-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA58-C 50
34 16 16 12319ME01FA61-A 12319ME01FA61-A 64
35 2 2 12319ME01FA62-A 12319ME01FA62-A 28
36 2 2 12319ME01FA62-C 12319ME01FA62-C 4
37 4 4 12319ME01FA63-A 12319ME01FA63-A 45
38 4 4 12319ME01FA63-C 12319ME01FA63-C 10
39 8 8 12319ME01FA64-A 12319ME01FA64-A 68
40 1 1 12319ME01FA70-A C BEAM FA71-D 104
41 1 1 12319ME01FA71-A C BEAM FA71-A 109
42 5 5 12319ME01FA71-C C BEAM FA71-C 109
43 26 26 12319ME01FA71-D C BEAM FA71-D 109
44 5 5 12319ME01FA71-E C BEAM FA71-E 109
45 1 1 12319ME01FA71-F C BEAM FA71-F 109
46 3 3 12319ME01FA71-G C BEAM FA71-G 86
47 1 1 12319ME01FA71-H C BEAM FA71-H 110
48 1 1 12319ME01FA71-J C BEAM FA71-J 109
49 2 2 12319ME01FA71-K C BEAM FA71-K 109
50 1 1 12319ME01FA71-L C BEAM FA71-L 111
51 1 1 12319ME01FA71-M C BEAM FA71-M 111
52 3 3 12319ME01FA71-N C BEAM FA71-N 86
53 2 2 12319ME01FA71-P C BEAM FA71-P 109
54 1 1 12319ME01FA71-R C BEAM FA71-R 110
55 1 1 12319ME01FA71-S C BEAM FA71-S 110
56 2 2 12319ME01FA72-A I BEAM FA72-A 106
57 2 2 12319ME01FA72-C I BEAM FA72-C 104

Pág. 28 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
58 1 1 12319ME01FA72-D I BEAM FA72-D 101
59 1 1 12319ME01FA72-E I BEAM FA72-E 104
60 1 1 12319ME01FA72-F I BEAM FA72-F 100
61 2 2 12319ME01FA72-G I BEAM FA72-G 106
62 2 2 12319ME01FA72-H I BEAM FA72-H 104
63 1 1 12319ME01FA72-K I BEAM FA72-K 104
64 5 5 12319ME01FA73-A C BEAM FA73-A 50
65 4 4 12319ME01FA73-C C BEAM FA73-A 50
66 3 3 12319ME01FA73-E C BEAM FA73-A 50
67 1 1 12319ME01FA74-A PLATFORM FA74-A 266
68 1 1 12319ME01FA74-C PLATFORM FA74-C 266
69 2 2 12319ME01FA75-A C BEAM FA75-A 40
70 2 2 12319ME01FA75-C C BEAM FA75-A 41
71 2 2 12319ME01FA76-A C 10 x 15.3 x 2610 Steel 34
72 2 2 12319ME01FA76-C C 10 x 15.3 x 2610 Steel 34
73 2 2 12319ME01FA77-A C BEAM FA77-A 26
74 3 3 12319ME01FA78-A C BEAM FA78-A 68
75 1 1 12319ME01FA78-C C BEAM FA78-C 68
76 2 2 12319ME01FA79-A C BEAM FA79-A 18
77 4 4 12319ME01FA80-A I BEAM FA80-A 194
78 2 2 12319ME01FA80-C I BEAM FA80-C 194
79 15 15 12319ME01FA81-01 L 80 x 80 x 6; L:906 Steel 6
80 12 12 12319ME01FA81-02 L 80 x 80 x 6; L:1965 mm Steel 14
81 14 14 12319ME01FA84 GRATING FA84 Steel 1462
82 14 14 12319ME01FA85 GRATING FA85 Steel 767
83 2 2 12319ME01FA86 GRATING FA86 Steel 1149
84 4 4 12319ME01FA87 GRATING FA87 96
85 2 2 12319ME01FA88 GRATING FA88 Steel 717
86 4 4 12319ME01FA89 GRATING FA89 Steel 575

Pág. 29 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
87 2 2 12319ME01FA90 GRATING FA90 Steel 421
88 2 2 12319ME01FA91 GRATING FA91 Steel 1075
89 14 14 12319ME01FA92 GRATING FA92 Steel 2239
90 14 14 12319ME01FA93 GRATING FA93 Steel 1179
91 14 14 12319ME01FA94 GRATING FA94 Steel 1159
92 5 5 12319ME01FA95 GRATING FA95 Steel 450
93 2 2 12319ME01FA96 GRATING FA96 Steel 1088
94 12 12 12319ME01FA97 GRATING FA97 Steel 522
95 4 4 12319ME01FA98 GRATING FA98 Steel 694
96 2 2 12319ME01FA99 GRATING FA99 Steel 469
97 1 1 589380-A SUPPORT BEAM 1840
98 8 8 589380-C SUPPORT BEAM 1751
99 8 8 589380-D SUPPORT BEAM 1760
100 1 1 589380-E SUPPORT BEAM 1840
101 1 1 589380-F SUPPORT BEAM 18857
102 1 1 589380-G SUPPORT BEAM 1817
103 1 1 589380-H SUPPORT BEAM 1864
104 1 1 589380-J SUPPORT BEAM 1784
105 1 1 589380-K SUPPORT BEAM 1874
106 1 1 589380-L SUPPORT BEAM 1824
107 2 2 589380-M SUPPORT BEAM 1759
108 2 2 589380-N SUPPORT BEAM 1759
109 24 24 12319ME01EN17-109 Hex Bolt - 3/4-10 UNC - 2,5 GR5ZNC 0,2
110 224 224 12319ME01EN17-110 Hex Bolt - 3/4-10 UNC - 2 GR5ZNC 0,2
111 8 8 12319ME01EN17-111 Hex Bolt - 5/8-11 UNC - 3,25 GR5ZNC 0,2
112 316 316 12319ME01EN17-112 Hex Bolt - 5/8-11 - 2 UNC GR5ZNC 0,1
113 452 452 12319ME01EN17-113 Hex Bolt -5/8-11 UNC - 1,5 GR5ZNC 0,1
114 124 124 12319ME01EN17-114 Hex Bolt - 1/2-13 UNC - 2 GR5ZNC 0,1
115 96 96 12319ME01EN17-115 Hex Bolt - 3/8-16 UNC - 1,25 UNC GR5ZNC 0,0

Pág. 30 de 31
 LISTADO DE PARTES

PART LIST N° : PL-12319-300m3 REV : B REF : 12319

Realizado por : IMF Revisado por : JSM

Aprobado por : CFS Fecha Impr. : 14-Oct-08

ITEM CANT TOTAL NUMERO PESO

PLANO N° REF DESCRIPCION MATERIAL
N° UNID ORDEN DE PARTE (Kg)
116 248 248 12319ME01EN17-116 Hex Nut 3/4 - 10 GR5ZNC 0,1
117 772 772 12319ME01EN17-117 Hex Nut 5/8 - 11 GR5ZNC 0,0
118 124 124 12319ME01EN17-118 Hex Nut 1/2 - 13 GR5ZNC 0,0
119 96 96 12319ME01EN17-119 Hex Nut 3/8 - 16 GR5ZNC 0,0
120 496 496 12319ME01EN17-120 Washer A narrow 3/4 GR5ZNC 0,0
121 1544 1544 12319ME01EN17-121 Washer A wide 5/8 GR5ZNC 0,0
122 8 8 12319ME01EN17-122 Washer A narrow 5/8 GR5ZNC 0,0
123 248 248 12319ME01EN17-123 Washer A 1/2 - wide - Type A GR5ZNC 0,0
124 192 192 12319ME01EN17-124 Washer A wide 3/8 GR5ZNC 0,0

Pág. 31 de 31
DATA SHEETS
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-1 Rougher Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
PROJECT ESPERANZA PROJECT REV
CLIENT MINERA ESPERANZA

GENERAL DATA AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

PURCHASE ORDER No. 320M-MR-081-01
VENDOR / CONTRACTOR FLSmidth
EQUIPMENT TAG NUMBER(S) 322-FC-001 @ 014
EQUIPMENT NAME(S) ROUGHER FLOTATION CELL
QUANTITY 14
TYPE Self Aspirating
PLANT AREA FLOTATION (ROUGHER FLOTATION)
MANUFACTURER FLSmidth
MODEL / DESCRIPTION Wemco Smartcell Model 300 m3
SPECIFICATION No. 320-M-TS-081

1.0 NOTES
1.1 Vendor shall fill in this Data Sheet and send it as Vendor Document.

1.2
1.3

2.0 OPERATING CONDITIONS

2.1 SLURRY CHARACTERISTICS
Cyclone overflow feed. Concentrates report to
2.1.1 FEED DESCRIPTION
regrinding feed and tails go to tailings thickeners
2.1.2 DESCRIPTION PULP COPPER
2.1.3 PULP DENSITY % w/w 38
2.1.4 SPECIFIC GRAVITY 1.3
2.1.5 PROCESS WATER SEA WATER
2.1.6 SLURRY TEMPERATURE ºC 20-25
2.1.7 pH 8-9
2.1.8 ORE SPECIFIC GRAVITY 2.7
2.1.9 ORE FEED SIZE, F80 μm 210
2.1.10 REAGENTS, CONTAMINANTS, ADDITIVES COLLECTORS, DIESEL AND FROTHERS

2.2 DESIGN AND CAPACITY REQUIREMENTS

CONTINUOUS, 24 HOURS/DAY, 7 DAYS A
2.2.1 DUTY CYCLE WEEK

2.2.2 INSTALLATION OUTDOORS

2.2.3 NUMBER OF LINES 2
2.2.4 SOLIDS NEW FEED RATE t/h/line 2078
2.2.5 SLURRY NEW FEED RATE m³/h/line 4165
2.2.6 TOTAL SLURRY FEED TO ROUGHERS m³/h 8329
2.2.7 FLOTATION RETENTION TIME min 26
2.2.8 CELL TYPE / NOMINAL CAPACITY Type/m³ Metallic tank / 300
2.2.9 FIXED BOX WITH DART VALVES Internal arrangements
2.2.10 AERATION By Vendor
2.2.11 CONFIGURATION % 2 rows with 7 cell
2.2.12 FEED
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-1 Rougher Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
2.2.13 PIPE inch 42
2.2.14 SLOPE 1.1
2.2.15 FLOW TYPE % w/w Free surface
2.2.16 INLET Over top of the feed box

3.0 INFORMATION FURNISHED BY VENDOR

3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 VENDOR Flsmidth Minerals

3.1.2 MANUFACTURER Flsmidth Minerals Chile S.A

3.1.3 MANUFACTURER LOCATION Chile (Antofagasta- Santiago-Other)
3.1.4 TYPE Self Aspirating
3.1.5 MODEL & SIZE Wemco Smartcell Model 300 m3
3.1.6 ARRANGEMENT 2 x (1-2-2-2)
3.1.7 EQUIPMENT NUMBER 322-FC-001@014
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.1.10

3.2 OPERATING DATA

3.2.1 CELL VOLUME (EFFECTIVE) m3 300

3.2.2 CELL DIMENSIONS mm 8570 Dia. X 6442 Height

3.2.3 WEIR ADJUSTMENT mm 50-70
3.2.4 RETENTION TIME min 27,7
3.2.5 POWER REQUIRED PER CELL kW 375
3.2.6 POWER REQUIRED TOTAL kW 5520
3.2.7 AIR REQUIREMENTS PER CELL Not required
3.2.8 PRESSURE kPa (g) N/A
3.2.9 FLOW PER CELL Nm3/h N/A
3
3.2.10 TOTAL FLOW Nm /h N/A
3.2.11

3.3 EQUIPMENT DATA

3.3.1 AGITATOR MECHANISM
3.3.1.1 STANDPIPE CONSTRUCTION Mild Steel

3.3.1.2 ABRASION RESISTANT COVERING 6 mm Rubber (inside) – special paint (external)

3.3.1.3 SHAFT
3.3.1.4 MATERIAL (TYP AND SPECIFICATION) Pipe in Steel A106 and A36 steel
3.3.1.5 DIAMETER mm 381
3.3.1.6 HARDNESS BHN N/A
3.3.1.7 RUBBER (DUROMETER) 6 mm wet part
3.3.1.8 BEARING TYPE N/A
3.3.1.9 BEARING L10 LIFE h N/A
3.3.1.10 LENGHT mm 1310
3.3.1.11 WEIGHT kg 502
3.3.1.12 IMPELLER
3.3.1.13 TYPE Star Rotor
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-1 Rougher Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
3.3.1.14 MATERIAL (TYPE AND SPECIFICATION) Rubber on Steel core
3.3.1.15 HARDNESS Shore 55 Shore A ASTM Method
3.3.1.16 LINING AND DUROMETER Rubber (MOR)
3.3.1.17 DIAMETER mm 1511
3.3.1.18 SPEED RPM 103
3.3.1.19 TIP SPEED 7,6
3.3.1.20 QUANTITY PER CELL 1
3.3.1.21 WEIGHT kg Approx. 1950
3.3.1.22 DISPERSER
3.3.1.23 MATERIAL (TYPE AND SPECIFICATION) Molded Urethane
3.3.1.24 METHOD OF SUPPORT Bolted to Standpipe
3.3.1.25 ABRASSION RESISTANT COVERING N/A
3.3.1.26 LINING AND THICKNESS N/A
3.3.1.27 CLEARANCE FROM IMPELLER mm Proprietary

3.3.2 CELL TANK

3.3.2.1 TYPE Mild Steel
3.3.2.2 MATERIAL (TYPE AND SPECIFICATION) A36 Steel
3.3.2.3 WALL THICKNESS mm 6 in sidewall, 10 on floor
3.3.2.4 SIZE DIA. x H mm 8570 x 6442
3.3.2.5 LINING MATERIAL Rubber (MOR)
3.3.2.6 LINING THICKNESS (WALL AND BOTTOM) mm 12 (bottom) /6mm sides with special painting
3.3.2.7 DESIGN / BOTTOM SHAPE Beveled tank design
3.3.2.8 LINING AREA m² 30 (approx)

3.3.3 FEED BOX

3.3.3.1 MATERIAL CONSTRUCTION Mild Steel A36

3.3.3.2 WALL THICKNESS mm 6

3.3.3.3 TYPE Cylindrical
3.3.3.4 SIZE, D x H mm 2610 x 7292.
3.3.3.5 FEED SIZE mm N/A
3.3.3.6 CONNECTION SIZE mm N/A
3.3.3.7 DISCHARGE SIZE mm 2270 x 950.
3.3.3.8 DIFFERENTIAL HEAD mm 1500
3.3.3.9 DISCHARGE HEAD mm N/A
3.3.3.10 LINING
3.3.3.11 MATERIAL Natural Rubber (MOR)
3.3.3.12 THICKNESS BOTTOM/SIDES mm 6
3.3.3.13 LINING AREA m² 62 (Approx.)
3.3.3.14
3.3.3.15

3.3.4 JUNCTION BOX

3.3.4.1 SIZE, LxWxH mm N/A
3.3.4.2 MATERIAL N/A
3.3.4.3 WALL THICKNESS mm N/A
3.3.4.4 HEIGHT OF STEP mm N/A
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-1 Rougher Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
3.3.4.5 LINING N/A

3.3.4.6 MATERIAL N/A

3.3.4.7 THICKNESS BOTTOM/SIDES mm N/A

3.3.4.8 LINING AREA m² N/A

3.3.5 INTERMEDIATE AND DISCHARGE BOX

3.3.5.1 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION Steel A 36

3.3.5.2 SIZE, LxWxH mm 2610 Dia. x 7292 height

3.3.5.3 WALL THICKNESS mm 6

3.3.5.4 HEIGHT OF STEP mm 1000

3.3.5.5 FEED SIZE N/A

3.3.5.6 CONNECTION SIZE mm N/A

3.3.5.7 DISCHARGE SIZE mm 863

3.3.5.8 DART VALVE CONTROL yes

3.3.5.9 TYPE OF DART VALVE Hinged Dart Valves

3.3.5.10 DIFFERENTIAL HEAD mm 5800 app.

3.3.5.11 DISCHARGE HEAD mm 215

3.3.5.12 DART VALVE MATERIALS Urethane

3.3.5.13 DART VALVE SEAT MATERIAL Urethane

Connection boxes two (2) 28 in; Discharge Box

3.3.5.14 VALVE QTY/SIZE
two (2) 18 in

3.3.5.15 LINING
3.3.5.16 MATERIAL Natural rubber (MOR)

3.3.5.17 THICKNESS BOTTOM/SIDES mm 6

3.3.5.18 LINING AREA m² 62 app.

3.3.6 FROTH COLLECTION WEIRS

Mild Steel A36, Lined with 6 mm natural rubber
3.3.6.1 MATERIAL (TYPE AND SPECIFICATION)

3.3.6.2 DISCHARGE SIZE mm 762 (approx.)

3.3.6.3 HEIGHT FROM BOTTOM CELL SUPPORT mm 4911 to Discharge nozzle centerline

3.3.6.4 SLOPE OF FROTH DISCHARGE % 12%

Internal peripheral launder and 24 radial launder
3.3.6.5 SINGLE SIDE DISCHARGE mm

3.3.7 BAFFLE RECOMMENDATION

3.3.7.1 N° OF BAFFLES 12 per Cell

3.3.7.2 HEIGHT x WIDTH x THICKNESS mm 1856 x 1130 x 6

3.3.7.3 CLEARANCE FROM TANK WALL mm 486 (Launder Width)

3.3.7.4 POSITIONING Below Radials

3.3.8 V-BELT DRIVE/REDUCER

Flender Reducer with V-Belt Primary Reduction
3.3.8.1 MANUFACTURER

3.3.8.2 MANUFACTURER LOCATION Germany

3.3.8.3 DRIVE SHEAVE DIAMETER mm 483

3.3.8.4 DRIVEN SHEAVE DIAMETER mm 630

3.3.8.5 CENTER TO CENTER DISTANCE mm 1410

Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-1 Rougher Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
3.3.8.6 SPEED RATIO sheaves = 1.3 Gearbox = 10.874

3.3.8.7 SIZE OF BELTS 8V - 8 Grv

3.3.8.8 NUMBER OF BELTS 8

3.3.8.9 SERVICE FACTOR 1,2

3.3.9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

3.3.9.1 AIR FLOW TRANSMITTER TYPE None Required, Self Aspirating
Manual Valve, Auto Control not required or
3.3.9.2 AIR CONTROL VALVE/POSITIONER TYPE recommended

3.3.9.3 LEVEL SENSOR / TRANSMITTER Siemens Ultrasonic

3.3.9.4 DART VALVES POSITIONER TYPE SMC Actuador with Fisher positioner

3.3.9.5 CONTROL SYSTEM TYPE From DCS

3.5 WEIGHTS
249000 app. for 7 tanks, feed box and discharge
3.5.1 SHIPPING WEIGHT kg box

3.5.2 OPERATING WEIGHT kg 360000 app. Per cell

3.5.3 AGITATOR MECHANISM & MOTOR kg 20500 kg/cell app.

3.5.4 BLOWER (IF APPLICABLE) kg

3.5.5 TOTAL SHIPPING WEIGHT kg 400000 per row

3.5.6 TOTAL SHIPPING VOLUME m³

3.5.7 HEAVIEST ITEM DURING ERECTION kg 8400 app. quarter of tank

3.5.8 HEAVIEST ITEM DURING MAINTENANCE kg 9000 app. Mechanism

3.6 AGITATOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTORS DATA (SEE NOTE 1BELOW)

3.6.1 MOTOR IDENTIFICATION To see note (1)

3.6.2 EQUIPMENT NUMBER 322-FC-001A@014A

3.6.3 SITE ALTITUDE m 2300

3.6.4 RATED POWER OUTPUT kW 500 HP (373 kW)

3.6.5 VOLTAGE V 3300

3.6.6 FULL LOAD CURRENT A 79,3

3.6.7 FREQUENCY Hz 50
(1 or 1
3.6.8 SERVICE FACTOR
1.5)
3.6.9 SPEED
3.6.10 SYNCHRONOUS rpm 1500

3.6.11 FULL LOAD rpm 1489

3.6.12 LOCKED - ROTOR CURRENT A 502,1

3.6.13 STALL TIME: HOT/COLD s To see note (1)

3.6.14 COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING min To see note (1)

3.6.15 COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED min To see note (1)

% of To see note (1)
3.6.16 CURRENT UNBALANCE
FLC
3.6.17 TYPE (SQUIRREL CAGE - WOUND ROTOR) Squirrel Cage

3.6.18 SECONDARY N/A

3.6.19 SHORT - CIRCUIT A N/A

3.6.20 OPEN CIRCUIT V N/A

3.6.21 POWER FACTOR

3.6.22 STARTING
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-1 Rougher Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
3.6.23 FULL LOAD 86,2

3.6.24 75% FULL LOAD 84

3.6.25 50% FULL LOAD 77,4

3.6.26 EFFICIENCY
3.6.27 FULL LOAD 95,5

3.6.28 75% FULL LOAD 95,7

3.6.29 50% FULL LOAD 95,4

3.6.30 SURGE PROTECTION YES/NO Quoted as option

3.6.31 INVERTER DUTY no

3.6.32 TORQUE NEMA DESIGN (A,B,C,D) Meet NEMA table MG 1-12

3.6.33 FULL LOAD TORQUE Nm 1763 Lbs.ft.

3.6.34 STARTING TORQUE (% OF FULL LOAD) 122

3.6.35 PULL-UP TORQUE (% OF FULL LOAD) 109

3.6.36 BREAKDOWN TORQUE (% OF FULL LOAD) 245

3.6.37 LOAD Wk2 Nm² 199,2 lb.ft2

3.6.38 TIME DUTY (CONTINUOS OR TIME RATED) Continous

3.6.39 INSULATION CLASS F

3.6.40 TEMPERATURE RISE OVER 40°C AMBIENT °C 80

3.6.41 THERMAL PROTECTION REQUIRED Included Windings and bearings RTD's

3.6.42 ENCLOSURE TEFC

3.6.43 FRAME NUMBER G5012

3.6.44 HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL Horizontal

3.6.45 CABLE SIZE kCM

3.6.46 SPACE HEATERS W/V Included 220 Volts

3.6.47 BEARINGS (SEALED, ANTI-FRICTION, ETC.) Antifriction

3.6.48 ROTATION (VIEWED FROM SHAFT END) Bidirectional

3.6.49 DRIVE CONNECTION Direct

3.6.50 SLIDE RAIDS Quoted as option

3.6.51 SHAFT DETALIS

3.6.52 LENGTH 10 in.

3.6.53 DIAMETER 4,125 in.

3.6.54 KEYWAY SQ 1,0 in. Lgth 8 in.

NOTES
(1) After the P.O. award the Vendor shall fill in the Motor Data Sheet attached to Specification 000-E-TS-013 "MV
Induction Motors" for each specified or supplied motor
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-2 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
PROJECT ESPERANZA PROJECT REV
CLIENT MINERA ESPERANZA

GENERAL DATA AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

PURCHASE ORDER No. 320M-MR-081-01
VENDOR / CONTRACTOR FLSmidth
EQUIPMENT TAG NUMBER(S) 324-FC-001/002 & 324-FC-008/009
EQUIPMENT NAME(S) FIRST CLEANER FLOTATION CELLS
QUANTITY 4
TYPE Self Aspirating
PLANT AREA FLOTATION (FIRST CLEANER FLOTATION)
MANUFACTURER FLSmidth
MODEL / DESCRIPTION Wemco Smartcell Model 300 m3
SPECIFICATION No. 320-M-TS-081

1.0 NOTES
1.1 Vendor shall fill in this Data Sheet and send it as Vendor Document.

1.2
1.3

2.0 OPERATING CONDITIONS

2.1 SLURRY CHARACTERISTICS
Concentrate Regrinding Product to flotation
2.1.1 FEED DESCRIPTION column cells feed pump box and tails to Scavenger
Flotation
2.1.2 DESCRIPTION COPPER CONCENTRATE
2.1.3 PULP DENSITY % w/w 17
2.1.4 SPECIFIC GRAVITY 1.13
2.1.5 PROCESS WATER SEA WATER
2.1.6 SLURRY TEMPERATURE ºC 20-25
2.1.7 pH 8-12
2.1.8 ORE SPECIFIC GRAVITY 3.1
2.1.9 ORE FEED SIZE, F80 μm 50 (80% -325#)
2.1.10 REAGENTS, CONTAMINANTS, ADDITIVES COLLECTORS, DIESEL AND FROTHERS

2.2 DESIGN AND CAPACITY REQUIREMENTS

CONTINUOUS, 24 HOURS/DAY, 7 DAYS A
2.2.1 DUTY CYCLE WEEK

2.2.2 INSTALLATION OUTDOORS

2.2.3 NUMBER OF LINES 2
2.2.4 SOLIDS NEW FEED RATE t/h/line 480
2.2.5 SLURRY NEW FEED RATE m³/h/line 2499
2.2.6 TOTAL SLURRY FEED TO ROUGHERS m³/h 4997
2.2.7 FLOTATION RETENTION TIME min 12
2.2.8 CELL TYPE / NOMINAL CAPACITY Type/m³ Metallic tank / 300
2.2.9 FIXED BOX WITH DART VALVES Internal disposition
2.2.10 AERATION By Vendor
2.2.11 CONFIGURATION % 2 rows with 2 cells
2.2.12 FEED
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-2 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
2.2.13 PIPE inch 24
2.2.14 FLOW TYPE Pressure
2.2.15 INLET Over top of the feed box

3.0 INFORMATION FURNISHED BY VENDOR

3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 VENDOR Flsmidth Minerals

3.1.2 MANUFACTURER Flsmidth Minerals Chile S.A

3.1.3 MANUFACTURER LOCATION Chile (Antofagasta- Santiago-Other)
3.1.4 TYPE Self Aspirating
3.1.5 MODEL & SIZE Wemco Smartcell Model 300 m3
3.1.6 ARRANGEMENT 2 x (2)
3.1.7 EQUIPMENT NUMBER 324-FC-001/002 & 324-FC-008/009
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.1.10

3.2 OPERATING DATA

3.2.1 CELL VOLUME (EFFECTIVE) m3 300

3.2.2 CELL DIMENSIONS mm 8570 Dia. X 6442 Height

3.2.3 WEIR ADJUSTMENT mm 50-70
3.2.4 RETENTION TIME min 27,7
3.2.5 POWER REQUIRED PER CELL kW 335
3.2.6 POWER REQUIRED TOTAL kW 1340
3.2.7 AIR REQUIREMENTS PER CELL Not required
3.2.8 PRESSURE kPa (g) N/A
3.2.9 FLOW PER CELL Nm3/h N/A
3.2.10 TOTAL FLOW Nm3/h N/A
3.2.11

3.3 EQUIPMENT DATA

3.3.1 AGITATOR MECHANISM
3.3.1.1 STANDPIPE CONSTRUCTION Mild Steel

3.3.1.2 ABRASION RESISTANT COVERING 6 mm Rubber (inside) – special paint (external)

3.3.1.3 SHAFT
3.3.1.4 MATERIAL (TYP AND SPECIFICATION) Pipe in Steel A106 and A36 steel
3.3.1.5 DIAMETER mm 381
3.3.1.6 HARDNESS BHN N/A
3.3.1.7 RUBBER (DUROMETER) 6 mm wet part
3.3.1.8 BEARING TYPE N/A
3.3.1.9 BEARING L10 LIFE h N/A
3.3.1.10 LENGHT mm 1310
3.3.1.11 WEIGHT kg 502
3.3.1.12 IMPELLER
3.3.1.13 TYPE Star Rotor
3.3.1.14 MATERIAL (TYPE AND SPECIFICATION) Rubber on Steel core
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-2 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
3.3.1.15 HARDNESS Shore 55 Shore A ASTM Method
3.3.1.16 LINING AND DUROMETER Rubber (MOR)
3.3.1.17 DIAMETER mm 1511
3.3.1.18 SPEED RPM 96
3.3.1.19 TIP SPEED 7,6
3.3.1.20 QUANTITY PER CELL 1
3.3.1.21 WEIGHT kg Approx. 1950
3.3.1.22 DISPERSER
3.3.1.23 MATERIAL (TYPE AND SPECIFICATION) Molded Urethane
3.3.1.24 METHOD OF SUPPORT Bolted to Standpipe
3.3.1.25 ABRASSION RESISTANT COVERING N/A
3.3.1.26 LINING AND THICKNESS N/A
3.3.1.27 CLEARANCE FROM IMPELLER mm Proprietary

3.3.2 CELL TANK

3.3.2.1 TYPE Mild Steel
3.3.2.2 MATERIAL (TYPE AND SPECIFICATION) A36 Steel
3.3.2.3 WALL THICKNESS mm 6 in sidewall, 10 on floor
3.3.2.4 SIZE DIA. x H mm 8570 x 6442
3.3.2.5 LINING MATERIAL Rubber (MOR)
3.3.2.6 LINING THICKNESS (WALL AND BOTTOM) mm 12 (bottom) /6mm sides with special painting
3.3.2.7 DESIGN / BOTTOM SHAPE Beveled tank design
3.3.2.8 LINING AREA m² 30 (approx)

3.3.3 FEED BOX

3.3.3.1 MATERIAL CONSTRUCTION Mild Steel A36

3.3.3.2 WALL THICKNESS mm 6

3.3.3.3 TYPE Cylindrical
3.3.3.4 SIZE, D x H mm 2610 x 7292.
3.3.3.5 FEED SIZE mm N/A
3.3.3.6 CONNECTION SIZE mm N/A
3.3.3.7 DISCHARGE SIZE mm 2270 x 950.
3.3.3.8 DIFFERENTIAL HEAD mm 1500
3.3.3.9 DISCHARGE HEAD mm N/A
3.3.3.10 LINING
3.3.3.11 MATERIAL Natural Rubber (MOR)
3.3.3.12 THICKNESS BOTTOM/SIDES mm 6
3.3.3.13 LINING AREA m² 62 (Approx.)
3.3.3.14
3.3.3.15

3.3.4 JUNCTION BOX

3.3.4.1 SIZE, LxWxH mm N/A
3.3.4.2 MATERIAL N/A
3.3.4.3 WALL THICKNESS mm N/A
3.3.4.4 HEIGHT OF STEP mm N/A
3.3.4.5 LINING N/A
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-2 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
3.3.4.6 MATERIAL N/A

3.3.4.7 THICKNESS BOTTOM/SIDES mm N/A

3.3.4.8 LINING AREA m² N/A

3.3.5 INTERMEDIATE AND DISCHARGE BOX

3.3.5.1 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION Steel A 36

3.3.5.2 SIZE, LxWxH mm 2610 Dia. x 7292 height

3.3.5.3 WALL THICKNESS mm 6

3.3.5.4 HEIGHT OF STEP mm 1000

3.3.5.5 FEED SIZE N/A

3.3.5.6 CONNECTION SIZE mm N/A

3.3.5.7 DISCHARGE SIZE mm 610

3.3.5.8 DART VALVE CONTROL yes

3.3.5.9 TYPE OF DART VALVE Hinged Dart Valves

3.3.5.10 DIFFERENTIAL HEAD mm 5800 app.

3.3.5.11 DISCHARGE HEAD mm 215

3.3.5.12 DART VALVE MATERIALS Urethane

3.3.5.13 DART VALVE SEAT MATERIAL Urethane

Connection boxes two (2) 21 in; Discharge Box

3.3.5.14 VALVE QTY/SIZE
two (2) 15 in

3.3.5.15 LINING
3.3.5.16 MATERIAL Natural rubber (MOR)

3.3.5.17 THICKNESS BOTTOM/SIDES mm 6

3.3.5.18 LINING AREA m² 62 app.

3.3.6 FROTH COLLECTION WEIRS

Mild Steel A36, Lined with 6 mm natural rubber
3.3.6.1 MATERIAL (TYPE AND SPECIFICATION)

3.3.6.2 DISCHARGE SIZE mm 762 (approx.)

3.3.6.3 HEIGHT FROM BOTTOM CELL SUPPORT mm 4911 to Discharge nozzle centerline

3.3.6.4 SLOPE OF FROTH DISCHARGE % 12%

Internal peripheral launder and 24 radial launder
3.3.6.5 SINGLE SIDE DISCHARGE mm

3.3.7 BAFFLE RECOMMENDATION

3.3.7.1 N° OF BAFFLES 12 per Cell

3.3.7.2 HEIGHT x WIDTH x THICKNESS mm 1856 x 1130 x 6

3.3.7.3 CLEARANCE FROM TANK WALL mm 486 (Launder Width)

3.3.7.4 POSITIONING Below Radials

3.3.8 V-BELT DRIVE/REDUCER

Flender Reducer with V-Belt Primary Reduction
3.3.8.1 MANUFACTURER

3.3.8.2 MANUFACTURER LOCATION Germany

3.3.8.3 DRIVE SHEAVE DIAMETER mm 457

3.3.8.4 DRIVEN SHEAVE DIAMETER mm 630

3.3.8.5 CENTER TO CENTER DISTANCE mm 1430

3.3.8.6 SPEED RATIO sheaves = 1.4 Gearbox = 10.874

Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-2 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
3.3.8.7 SIZE OF BELTS 8V - 8 Grv

3.3.8.8 NUMBER OF BELTS 8

3.3.8.9 SERVICE FACTOR 1,2

3.3.9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

3.3.9.1 AIR FLOW TRANSMITTER TYPE None Required, Self Aspirating
Manual Valve, Auto Control not required or
3.3.9.2 AIR CONTROL VALVE/POSITIONER TYPE recommended

3.3.9.3 LEVEL SENSOR / TRANSMITTER Siemens Ultrasonic

3.3.9.4 DART VALVES POSITIONER TYPE SMC Actuador with Fisher positioner

3.3.9.5 CONTROL SYSTEM TYPE From DCS

3.5 WEIGHTS
249000 app. for 7 tanks, feed box and discharge
3.5.1 SHIPPING WEIGHT kg box

3.5.2 OPERATING WEIGHT kg 360000 app. Per cell

3.5.3 AGITATOR MECHANISM & MOTOR kg 20500 kg/cell app.

3.5.4 BLOWER (IF APPLICABLE) kg

3.5.5 TOTAL SHIPPING WEIGHT kg 400000 per row

3.5.6 TOTAL SHIPPING VOLUME m³

3.5.7 HEAVIEST ITEM DURING ERECTION kg 8400 app. quarter of tank

3.5.8 HEAVIEST ITEM DURING MAINTENANCE kg 9000 app. Mechanism

3.6 AGITATOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTORS DATA (SEE NOTE 1BELOW)

3.6.1 MOTOR IDENTIFICATION To see note (1)

3.6.2 EQUIPMENT NUMBER 324-FC-001A / 002A & 324-FC-008A / 009A

3.6.3 SITE ALTITUDE m 2300

3.6.4 RATED POWER OUTPUT kW 450 HP (335 kW)

3.6.5 VOLTAGE V 3300

3.6.6 FULL LOAD CURRENT A 79,3

3.6.7 FREQUENCY Hz 50
(1 or 1
3.6.8 SERVICE FACTOR
1.5)
3.6.9 SPEED
3.6.10 SYNCHRONOUS rpm 1500

3.6.11 FULL LOAD rpm 1489

3.6.12 LOCKED - ROTOR CURRENT A 502,1

3.6.13 STALL TIME: HOT/COLD s To see note (1)

3.6.14 COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING min To see note (1)

3.6.15 COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED min To see note (1)

% of To see note (1)
3.6.16 CURRENT UNBALANCE
FLC
3.6.17 TYPE (SQUIRREL CAGE - WOUND ROTOR) Squirrel Cage

3.6.18 SECONDARY N/A

3.6.19 SHORT - CIRCUIT A N/A

3.6.20 OPEN CIRCUIT V N/A

3.6.21 POWER FACTOR

3.6.22 STARTING
3.6.23 FULL LOAD 86,2
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-2 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
3.6.24 75% FULL LOAD 84

3.6.25 50% FULL LOAD 77,4

3.6.26 EFFICIENCY
3.6.27 FULL LOAD 95,5

3.6.28 75% FULL LOAD 95,7

3.6.29 50% FULL LOAD 95,4

3.6.30 SURGE PROTECTION YES/NO Quoted as option

3.6.31 INVERTER DUTY no

3.6.32 TORQUE NEMA DESIGN (A,B,C,D) Meet NEMA table MG 1-12

3.6.33 FULL LOAD TORQUE Nm 1763 Lbs.ft.

3.6.34 STARTING TORQUE (% OF FULL LOAD) 122

3.6.35 PULL-UP TORQUE (% OF FULL LOAD) 109

3.6.36 BREAKDOWN TORQUE (% OF FULL LOAD) 245

3.6.37 LOAD Wk2 Nm² 199,2 lb.ft2

3.6.38 TIME DUTY (CONTINUOS OR TIME RATED) Continous

3.6.39 INSULATION CLASS F

3.6.40 TEMPERATURE RISE OVER 40°C AMBIENT °C 80

3.6.41 THERMAL PROTECTION REQUIRED Included Windings and bearings RTD's

3.6.42 ENCLOSURE TEFC

3.6.43 FRAME NUMBER G5012

3.6.44 HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL Horizontal

3.6.45 CABLE SIZE kCM

3.6.46 SPACE HEATERS W/V Included 220 Volts

3.6.47 BEARINGS (SEALED, ANTI-FRICTION, ETC.) Antifriction

3.6.48 ROTATION (VIEWED FROM SHAFT END) Bidirectional

3.6.49 DRIVE CONNECTION Direct

3.6.50 SLIDE RAIDS Quoted as option

3.6.51 SHAFT DETALIS

3.6.52 LENGTH 10 in.

3.6.53 DIAMETER 4,125 in.

3.6.54 KEYWAY SQ 1,0 in. Lgth 8 in.

NOTES
(1) After the P.O. award the Vendor shall fill in the Motor Data Sheet attached to Specification 000-E-TS-013 "MV
Induction Motors" for each specified or supplied motor
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-3 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
PROJECT ESPERANZA PROJECT REV
CLIENT MINERA ESPERANZA

GENERAL DATA AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

PURCHASE ORDER No. 320M-MR-081-01
VENDOR / CONTRACTOR FLSmidth
EQUIPMENT TAG NUMBER(S) 324-FC-003 @ 006 & 324-FC-010 @ 013

EQUIPMENT NAME(S) SCAVENGER FLOTATION CELL

QUANTITY 8

TYPE Self Aspirating

PLANT AREA FLOTATION (SCAVENGER FLOTATION)

MANUFACTURER FLSmidth

MODEL / DESCRIPTION Wemco Smartcell Model 300 m3

SPECIFICATION No. 320-M-TS-081

1.0 NOTES
1.1 Vendor shall fill in this Data Sheet and send it as Vendor Document.

1.2
1.3

2.0 OPERATING CONDITIONS

2.1 SLURRY CHARACTERISTICS
Tails from first cleaner. Concentrates report to
2.1.1 FEED DESCRIPTION regring cyclone feed pump box and tails go to
tailings thickeners
2.1.2 DESCRIPTION COPPER CONCENTRATE

2.1.3 PULP DENSITY % w/w 12-13

2.1.4 SPECIFIC GRAVITY 1.09

2.1.5 PROCESS WATER SEA WATER

2.1.6 SLURRY TEMPERATURE ºC 20-25

2.1.7 pH 8-12

2.1.8 ORE SPECIFIC GRAVITY 3

2.1.9 ORE FEED SIZE, F80 μm 50 (80% -325#)

2.1.10 REAGENTS, CONTAMINANTS, ADDITIVES COLLECTORS, DIESEL AND FROTHERS

2.2 DESIGN AND CAPACITY REQUIREMENTS

CONTINUOUS, 24 HOURS/DAY, 7 DAYS A
2.2.1 DUTY CYCLE WEEK

2.2.2 INSTALLATION OUTDOORS

2.2.3 NUMBER OF LINES 2
2.2.4 SOLIDS NEW FEED RATE t/h/line 219

2.2.5 SLURRY NEW FEED RATE m³/h/line 1636

2.2.6 TOTAL SLURRY FEED TO ROUGHERS m³/h 3271

2.2.7 FLOTATION RETENTION TIME min 33

2.2.8 CELL TYPE / NOMINAL CAPACITY Type/m³ Metallic tank / 300

2.2.9 FIXED BOX WITH DART VALVES Internal disposition
2.2.10 AERATION By Vendor
2.2.11 CONFIGURATION % 2 rows with 4 cells
2.2.12 FEED
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-3 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
2.2.13 PIPE (FROM COLUMN FLOTATION) inch 42
2.2.14 FLOW TYPE Pressure
2.2.15 INLET Over top of the feed box
2.2.16 PIPE (FROM FIRST CLEANER) inch By Vendor (connection size)
2.2.15 INLET Bottom feed box

3.0 INFORMATION FURNISHED BY VENDOR

3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 VENDOR Flsmidth Minerals

3.1.2 MANUFACTURER Flsmidth Minerals Chile S.A

3.1.3 MANUFACTURER LOCATION Chile (Antofagasta- Santiago-Other)
3.1.4 TYPE Self Aspirating
3.1.5 MODEL & SIZE Wemco Smartcell Model 300 m3
3.1.6 ARRANGEMENT 2 x (2-2)
3.1.7 EQUIPMENT NUMBER 324-FC-003@006 & 324-FC-010@013
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.1.10

3.2 OPERATING DATA

3.2.1 CELL VOLUME (EFFECTIVE) m3 300

3.2.2 CELL DIMENSIONS mm 8570 Dia. X 6442 Height

3.2.3 WEIR ADJUSTMENT mm 50-70
3.2.4 RETENTION TIME min 27,7
3.2.5 POWER REQUIRED PER CELL kW 335
3.2.6 POWER REQUIRED TOTAL kW 2680
3.2.7 AIR REQUIREMENTS PER CELL Not required
3.2.8 PRESSURE kPa (g) N/A
3
3.2.9 FLOW PER CELL Nm /h N/A
3.2.10 TOTAL FLOW Nm3/h N/A
3.2.11

3.3 EQUIPMENT DATA

3.3.1 AGITATOR MECHANISM
3.3.1.1 STANDPIPE CONSTRUCTION Mild Steel

3.3.1.2 ABRASION RESISTANT COVERING 6 mm Rubber (inside) – special paint (external)

3.3.1.3 SHAFT
3.3.1.4 MATERIAL (TYP AND SPECIFICATION) Pipe in Steel A106 and A36 steel
3.3.1.5 DIAMETER mm 381
3.3.1.6 HARDNESS BHN N/A
3.3.1.7 RUBBER (DUROMETER) 6 mm wet part
3.3.1.8 BEARING TYPE N/A
3.3.1.9 BEARING L10 LIFE h N/A
3.3.1.10 LENGHT mm 1310
3.3.1.11 WEIGHT kg 502
3.3.1.12 IMPELLER
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-3 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
3.3.1.13 TYPE Star Rotor
3.3.1.14 MATERIAL (TYPE AND SPECIFICATION) Rubber on Steel core
3.3.1.15 HARDNESS Shore 55 Shore A ASTM Method
3.3.1.16 LINING AND DUROMETER Rubber (MOR)
3.3.1.17 DIAMETER mm 1511
3.3.1.18 SPEED RPM 96
3.3.1.19 TIP SPEED 7,6
3.3.1.20 QUANTITY PER CELL 1
3.3.1.21 WEIGHT kg Approx. 1950
3.3.1.22 DISPERSER
3.3.1.23 MATERIAL (TYPE AND SPECIFICATION) Molded Urethane
3.3.1.24 METHOD OF SUPPORT Bolted to Standpipe
3.3.1.25 ABRASSION RESISTANT COVERING N/A
3.3.1.26 LINING AND THICKNESS N/A
3.3.1.27 CLEARANCE FROM IMPELLER mm Proprietary

3.3.2 CELL TANK

3.3.2.1 TYPE Mild Steel
3.3.2.2 MATERIAL (TYPE AND SPECIFICATION) A36 Steel
3.3.2.3 WALL THICKNESS mm 6 in sidewall, 10 on floor
3.3.2.4 SIZE DIA. x H mm 8570 x 6442
3.3.2.5 LINING MATERIAL Rubber (MOR)
3.3.2.6 LINING THICKNESS (WALL AND BOTTOM) mm 12 (bottom) /6mm sides with special painting
3.3.2.7 DESIGN / BOTTOM SHAPE Beveled tank design
3.3.2.8 LINING AREA m² 30 (approx)

3.3.3 FEED BOX

3.3.3.1 MATERIAL CONSTRUCTION Mild Steel A36

3.3.3.2 WALL THICKNESS mm 6

3.3.3.3 TYPE Cylindrical
3.3.3.4 SIZE, D x H mm 2610 x 7292.
3.3.3.5 FEED SIZE mm N/A
3.3.3.6 CONNECTION SIZE mm N/A
3.3.3.7 DISCHARGE SIZE mm 2270 x 950.
3.3.3.8 DIFFERENTIAL HEAD mm 1500
3.3.3.9 DISCHARGE HEAD mm N/A
3.3.3.10 LINING
3.3.3.11 MATERIAL Natural Rubber (MOR)
3.3.3.12 THICKNESS BOTTOM/SIDES mm 6
3.3.3.13 LINING AREA m² 62 (Approx.)
3.3.3.14
3.3.3.15

3.3.4 JUNCTION BOX

3.3.4.1 SIZE, LxWxH mm N/A
3.3.4.2 MATERIAL N/A
3.3.4.3 WALL THICKNESS mm N/A
Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-3 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
3.3.4.4 HEIGHT OF STEP mm N/A
3.3.4.5 LINING N/A

3.3.4.6 MATERIAL N/A

3.3.4.7 THICKNESS BOTTOM/SIDES mm N/A

3.3.4.8 LINING AREA m² N/A

3.3.5 INTERMEDIATE AND DISCHARGE BOX

3.3.5.1 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION Steel A 36

3.3.5.2 SIZE, LxWxH mm 2610 Dia. x 7292 height

3.3.5.3 WALL THICKNESS mm 6

3.3.5.4 HEIGHT OF STEP mm 1000

3.3.5.5 FEED SIZE N/A

3.3.5.6 CONNECTION SIZE mm N/A

3.3.5.7 DISCHARGE SIZE mm 610

3.3.5.8 DART VALVE CONTROL yes

3.3.5.9 TYPE OF DART VALVE Hinged Dart Valves

3.3.5.10 DIFFERENTIAL HEAD mm 5800 app.

3.3.5.11 DISCHARGE HEAD mm 215

3.3.5.12 DART VALVE MATERIALS Urethane

3.3.5.13 DART VALVE SEAT MATERIAL Urethane

Connection boxes two (2) 21 in; Discharge Box

3.3.5.14 VALVE QTY/SIZE
two (2) 15 in

3.3.5.15 LINING
3.3.5.16 MATERIAL Natural rubber (MOR)

3.3.5.17 THICKNESS BOTTOM/SIDES mm 6

3.3.5.18 LINING AREA m² 62 app.

3.3.6 FROTH COLLECTION WEIRS

Mild Steel A36, Lined with 6 mm natural rubber
3.3.6.1 MATERIAL (TYPE AND SPECIFICATION)

3.3.6.2 DISCHARGE SIZE mm 762 (approx.)

3.3.6.3 HEIGHT FROM BOTTOM CELL SUPPORT mm 4911 to Discharge nozzle centerline

3.3.6.4 SLOPE OF FROTH DISCHARGE % 12%

Internal peripheral launder and 24 radial launder
3.3.6.5 SINGLE SIDE DISCHARGE mm

3.3.7 BAFFLE RECOMMENDATION

3.3.7.1 N° OF BAFFLES 12 per Cell

3.3.7.2 HEIGHT x WIDTH x THICKNESS mm 1856 x 1130 x 6

3.3.7.3 CLEARANCE FROM TANK WALL mm 486 (Launder Width)

3.3.7.4 POSITIONING Below Radials

3.3.8 V-BELT DRIVE/REDUCER

Flender Reducer with V-Belt Primary Reduction
3.3.8.1 MANUFACTURER

3.3.8.2 MANUFACTURER LOCATION Germany

3.3.8.3 DRIVE SHEAVE DIAMETER mm 457

3.3.8.4 DRIVEN SHEAVE DIAMETER mm 630

Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-3 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
3.3.8.5 CENTER TO CENTER DISTANCE mm 1430

3.3.8.6 SPEED RATIO sheaves = 1.4 Gearbox = 10.874

3.3.8.7 SIZE OF BELTS 8V - 8 Grv

3.3.8.8 NUMBER OF BELTS 8

3.3.8.9 SERVICE FACTOR 1,2

3.3.9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

3.3.9.1 AIR FLOW TRANSMITTER TYPE None Required, Self Aspirating
Manual Valve, Auto Control not required or
3.3.9.2 AIR CONTROL VALVE/POSITIONER TYPE recommended

3.3.9.3 LEVEL SENSOR / TRANSMITTER Siemens Ultrasonic

3.3.9.4 DART VALVES POSITIONER TYPE SMC Actuador with Fisher positioner

3.3.9.5 CONTROL SYSTEM TYPE From DCS

3.5 WEIGHTS
249000 app. for 7 tanks, feed box and discharge
3.5.1 SHIPPING WEIGHT kg box

3.5.2 OPERATING WEIGHT kg 360000 app. Per cell

3.5.3 AGITATOR MECHANISM & MOTOR kg 20500 kg/cell app.

3.5.4 BLOWER (IF APPLICABLE) kg

3.5.5 TOTAL SHIPPING WEIGHT kg 400000 per row

3.5.6 TOTAL SHIPPING VOLUME m³

3.5.7 HEAVIEST ITEM DURING ERECTION kg 8400 app. quarter of tank

3.5.8 HEAVIEST ITEM DURING MAINTENANCE kg 9000 app. Mechanism

3.6 AGITATOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTORS DATA (SEE NOTE 1BELOW)

3.6.1 MOTOR IDENTIFICATION To see note (1)

3.6.2 EQUIPMENT NUMBER 324-FC-003A@006A & 324-FC-010A@013A

3.6.3 SITE ALTITUDE m 2300

3.6.4 RATED POWER OUTPUT kW 450 HP (335 kW)

3.6.5 VOLTAGE V 3300

3.6.6 FULL LOAD CURRENT A 79,3

3.6.7 FREQUENCY Hz 50
(1 or 1
3.6.8 SERVICE FACTOR
1.5)
3.6.9 SPEED
3.6.10 SYNCHRONOUS rpm 1500

3.6.11 FULL LOAD rpm 1489

3.6.12 LOCKED - ROTOR CURRENT A 502,1

3.6.13 STALL TIME: HOT/COLD s To see note (1)

3.6.14 COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING min To see note (1)

3.6.15 COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED min To see note (1)

% of To see note (1)
3.6.16 CURRENT UNBALANCE
FLC
3.6.17 TYPE (SQUIRREL CAGE - WOUND ROTOR) Squirrel Cage

3.6.18 SECONDARY N/A

3.6.19 SHORT - CIRCUIT A N/A

3.6.20 OPEN CIRCUIT V N/A

3.6.21 POWER FACTOR

Aker Kvaerner Project C-531
Detail Engineering –EPCM Services
Data Sheet 320-M-DS-081-3 First Cleaner Flotation Cells
Rev. 1
3.6.22 STARTING
3.6.23 FULL LOAD 86,2

3.6.24 75% FULL LOAD 84

3.6.25 50% FULL LOAD 77,4

3.6.26 EFFICIENCY
3.6.27 FULL LOAD 95,5

3.6.28 75% FULL LOAD 95,7

3.6.29 50% FULL LOAD 95,4

3.6.30 SURGE PROTECTION YES/NO Quoted as option

3.6.31 INVERTER DUTY no

3.6.32 TORQUE NEMA DESIGN (A,B,C,D) Meet NEMA table MG 1-12

3.6.33 FULL LOAD TORQUE Nm 1763 Lbs.ft.

3.6.34 STARTING TORQUE (% OF FULL LOAD) 122

3.6.35 PULL-UP TORQUE (% OF FULL LOAD) 109

3.6.36 BREAKDOWN TORQUE (% OF FULL LOAD) 245

3.6.37 LOAD Wk2 Nm2 199,2 lb.ft2

3.6.38 TIME DUTY (CONTINUOS OR TIME RATED) Continous

3.6.39 INSULATION CLASS F

3.6.40 TEMPERATURE RISE OVER 40°C AMBIENT °C 80

3.6.41 THERMAL PROTECTION REQUIRED Included Windings and bearings RTD's

3.6.42 ENCLOSURE TEFC

3.6.43 FRAME NUMBER G5012

3.6.44 HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL Horizontal

3.6.45 CABLE SIZE kCM

3.6.46 SPACE HEATERS W/V Included 220 Volts

3.6.47 BEARINGS (SEALED, ANTI-FRICTION, ETC.) Antifriction

3.6.48 ROTATION (VIEWED FROM SHAFT END) Bidirectional

3.6.49 DRIVE CONNECTION Direct

3.6.50 SLIDE RAIDS Quoted as option

3.6.51 SHAFT DETALIS

3.6.52 LENGTH 10 in.

3.6.53 DIAMETER 4,125 in.

3.6.54 KEYWAY SQ 1,0 in. Lgth 8 in.

NOTES
(1) After the P.O. award the Vendor shall fill in the Motor Data Sheet attached to Specification 000-E-TS-013 "MV
Induction Motors" for each specified or supplied motor
PLANOS
 LISTADO DE PLANOS
INCLUIDOS EN EL MANUAL

IT NUMERO ULTIMA
DESCRIPCION DEL PLANO
N° DEL PLANO REV
1 570091 General Arrangement – Cleaner & Scavenger Flotation E
2 570092 General Arrangement – Rougher Flotation E
3 570095 Anchor Arrangement – Cleaner & Scavenger Flotation B
4 570096 Anchor Arrangement – Rougher Flotation B
5 570107 General Arrangement Single Cell E
6 570108 P & ID 300 cubic meter Wemco Flotation B
7 574769 Level Sensor Assembly 300 m3 Cell Wemco Flotation A

8 574770 Level Float Assembly 300 m3 Cell Wemco Flotation A

9 589347 Belt Guard Assembly 300 m3 Cell Wemco Flotation 1
10 1193075 Air Inlet Assembly 14” Manual Butterfly Wemco Flotation A

11 12319ME01DG003 Platform Arrangement Clear & Scavenger Flotation F

12 12319ME01DG004 Platform Arrangement Rougher Flotation F
13 12319ME01DG005 General Arrangement Feed Box Model 300 m3 Cell D

14 12319ME01DG006 General Arrangement Discharge Box Model 300 m3 Cell D

15 12319ME01EN001 General Assembly Cells Model 300 m3 A
16 12319ME01EN004 Mechanism Assembly Rougher Type A – Cleaner Scavenger Type C A

17 12319ME01EN005 Assembly Drawings Feed Box Model 300 m3 Cell Wemco Flotation A
18 12319ME01EN006 Rubber Lined Detail Discharge Box A
19 12319ME01EN007 Draft Tube Assy, Cleaner & Scavenger Type C – Rougher Type A A

20 12319ME01EN08 Hinged Dart Valve Assy Rougher Drop Tank 0

21 12319ME01EN09 Hinged Dart Valve Assembly Type C 1
22 12319ME01EN10 Radial Launder Assy, Type 300 m3 Cell Details Part List A

23 12319ME01EN11 Radial Launder Assy, Type 300 m3 Cell Details Part List A
24 12319ME01EN16 300 m3 Platform Assy Clear & Scavenger Assembly Part List B
25 12319ME01EN17 300 m3 Platform Assy Rougher Assembly Part List B

26 114808 Torque Values B

 PLANOS
DISPOSICIÓN GENERAL
 ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL PART NO. DRAWING NO. TOTAL WEIGHT
1 1 BELT GUARD WELDMENT 589348-A 100.1
1 2 1 DOOR TYPE C 589348-C 26.8
2310 1
3 1 DOOR TYPE D 589348-D 26.8
4 2 PLATE 3 x DIA. EXT 40 x DIA. INT 14 Steel 589348-G .1
5 2 Wing Nut, 1/2-13 UNC Steel .2
6 1 COVER TYPE E A36 STL 589348-E 2.5
7 1 COVER TYPE F A36 STL 589348-F 4.7
8 16 Type A Plain Washer Steel, Mild ANSI B18.22.1-1965, R1990 0
9 16 HEX. CAP 1/4 x 3/8 STEEL 0

445
TOTAL APPROXIMATE WEIGHT 143 KGS.

1
2 4

1
DETAIL 1 5

DETAIL 2

2230 1
1
2150 1 396 1
20

2
7
983

945
A A

400
2

3 6

3
4
2

1 SECTION A-A
1 DETAIL 4

9 NOTES:
8
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
1

7 D
COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G

DETAIL 3 THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
ES0001 APPLIES

D ORIGINAL S.O. DO NOT SCALE PRINTS

MODIFIED ITEM N° 2 & 3. - JSM CFS 14-08-09 1 STANDARD BELT GUARD ASSEMBLY REF. FROM 1192911
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION IMF CFS 09-07-09 0 DATE 09/07/2009 300 CUBIC METER SHEET 1 OF 1
INITIAL RELEASE A DRAWN IMF
WEMCO FLOTATION DWG.
589347
REV

REVISION EN BY CHECK'D DATE CHCK'D CFS NO. 1

 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3301
A

275 150 Feed Box Seismic Analysis - Esperanza

R25 75 Tank steel weight 10372 lbf

D R Tank diameter
Tank height
102,76
286,81
in
in
D
Volume of liquid 2378478,9 in^3
1376,4 ft^3
Density of liquid 1,3
Weight of liquid 111656,3 lbf
Total weight 122028,4 lbf

Chilean code Nch 2369

Zeta - Table 5.5 0,02
R value Table 5.6 4
Seismic coefficient Table 5.7 0,32

275
Design base shear 40.100 lbf
Calculated shear per bolt 15.040 lbf
Overturning moment 4.974.150 in.lbf
Ø57
414.516 ft.lbf.
Calculated tension in bolt - uplift 40.812 lbf.

525

28
NOTE : USING 1 3/4” ANCHOR BOLT
MATERIAL: ASTM A36

400
7292 (HEIGHT)

372
L 150 x 150 x 12
C C
BOTTOM Ø57
RUBBER LINING
NATURAL RUBBER
10mm THICKNESS
R

12
138
L 150 x 150 x 12

VISTA F - F
SECTION R- R

2408

1204

SLOTS

B B 22 DIA x 32LG

1052
960
22
DETAIL C

17
A C

108
B n2922 (OUTSIDE) B

ELEVATION VIEW VIEW A-A

F F n2922
30°
P.)
5°
(TY
OUTSIDE

R1386
(BOLT RADIUS)
R1386 3D VIEW

25°
2490 (OUTSIDE FLANGE)

R1305
INSIDE

50°
REVISION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION BY APPROVED DATE REV
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL IMF CFS 29-01-2009 A
MODIFIED PER CUSTOMER COMMENTS DMS CFS 13-03-2009 B
1245

GENERAL REVISION DMS CFS 20-03-2009 C

GENERAL REVISION DMS CFS 22-04-2009 D

A
D A
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA Rev G (12/02)

DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01DG005 REF. FROM

5°

PLAN VIEW
DATE 26-01-2009 SHEET 1 OF 1
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
DRAWN IMF REV.

SECTION B-B FEED BOX MODEL 300m3 CELL

FMG
D
CHECK'D DWG.
APPR CFS WEMCO FLOTATION No. 12319ME01DG005
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

C Discharge Box Seismic Analysis - Esperanza

LIFTING LUG
ACTUATOR Tank steel weight 10372,00 lbf
Tank diameter 102,76 in
D Tank height 286,81 in D
Volume of liquid 2378478,9 in^3
1376,4 ft^3
ACTUATOR SUPPORT Density of liquid 1,3
Weight of liquid 111656,4 lbf
Total weight 122028,4 lbf

Chilean code Nch 2369

Zeta - Table 5.5 0,02
R value Table 5.6 4,00
Seismic coefficient Table 5.7 0,32
Design base shear 40.100 lbf
Calculated shear per bolt 15.040 lbf
Overturning moment 4.974.150 in.lbf
414.516 ft.lbf.
Calculated tension in bolt - uplift 40.812 lbf.

VALVE ROD

NOTE : USING 1 3/4” ANCHOR BOLT

MATERIAL: ASTM A36
DETAIL C
7292 HEIGHT
BOTTOM
RUBBER LINNING
C NATURAL RUBBER C
10mm THICKNESS

D
2408

1204

465 (CLEANER & SCAVENGER CIRCUIT)

E

592 (ROUGHER CIRCUIT)

A A
1052
960

323

E
493 493
n2922 (OUTSIDE)
TAILING DISCHARGE SIZES:
24" (CLEANER & SCAVENGER) &
SECTION B-B
34" (ROUGHER)
VIEW E-E ELEVATION VIEW ANSI B.16.5 150#
B B

1616 R1411 1493

275
(OUTSIDE FLANGE)
150

K R25 75
VALVE

ADAPTER PLATE &

F R1305 GROMMET
(INSIDE)

F R1386
ANCHOR BOLT
RADIUS n57
DETAIL D

275
30°

30°

28
3D VIEW
525

B B
REVISION HISTORY
30°

DESCRIPTION BY APPROVED DATE REV

ISSUED FOR APPROVAL IMF CFS 29-01-2009 A

400
MODIFIED PER CUSTOMER COMMENTS DMS CFS 13-03-2009 B

372
GENERAL REVISION DMS CFS 20-03-2009 C
GENERAL REVISION DMS CFS 22-04-2009 D
L 150 x 150 x 12 n57

A
D A
12 100 12 THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V

12
SECTION A-A PLAN VIEW L 150 x 150 x 12 138 NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING
DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Rev G (12/02)

DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01DG006 REF. FROM

K DATE 27-01-2009 SHEET 1 OF 1

SECTION K - K GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
VIEW F-F DRAWN IMF
DISCHARGE BOX
REV.

FMG
D
CHECK'D DWG.
APPR CFS MODEL 300m3 WEMCO FLOTATION No. 12319ME01DG006
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PLANOS
MONTAJE
 ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL PART NO. DRAWING NO. TOTAL WEIGHT
1 1 SHAFT, MODEL 300m3 ROUGHER M.O.R./ STL 589345-06 429.7
2 1 1510mm (59.5") STAR ROTOR, 300 M³ M.O.R./STL 589349-06 568605 1875.1
3 12 DISPERSER HOOD SECTOR URETHANE 570086 448.4
4 1 CROWDER - LINED - A TYPE A36 /M.O.R. 589358-06A 589358 966
6
5 2 DISPERSER, 300 CUBIC METER, WEMCO FLOTATION URETHANE 573999 1559.9
12 6 1 MECHANISM SUPPORT MODEL 300m3 A36 STL 568608 2855.7
21
7 1 MANUAL AIR INLET ASSY, 14" STL 1193075-01L 1193075 69.2
4
8 1 REDUCER MOUNTING PLATE A36 STL 568612 1511.7
9 1 ROTOR CAP 300 M³ MO.R./STL 570104-06 12
LAY A HEAVY BEAD OF SEALANT INSIDE 10 4 SEALANT, ADHESIVE URETHANE 903150A 903150 0
10 BOLT HOLES PRIOR TO PLACING ITEM 8 11 1 MOTOR MOUNT FRAME A36 STL 589344 420.1
12 2 MOUNT, RAIL, MOTOR STL 573998 195.4
EF)
1438 (R 13 1 FLENDER REDUCER, B3BV15 541744 4459.1
8
14 1 BELTGUARD MODEL 300m3 589347 161.3
15 10 V-BELT,8VX1800 RUBBER 589368 17.9
13 16 1 SHEAVE, 24.8", 300m3 MODEL 577944 236.8
28 37 40 52 17 1 SHEAVE 19.0" O.D. 589366 19.5
3
18 1 ADAPTER PLATE A36 STL 579763 62.1
19 1 RETAINER, SEAL, REDUCER, SIZE 15 A36 STL 1160208-01 1160208 10.5
2 REQ'D
2 45 35 20 1 SEAL, REDUCER, SIZE 15 G.B. NEOPRENE 1160209-01 1160209 2
F 21 1 MOTOR 500 HP 3/3300/50 SIEMENS 12319- I-LIST 500 Hp 12317
22 12 HOOD SECTOR CLAMP A36 STL 574768 40
F 8 23 48 HOOD SECTOR BOSS A53 GRB STL 1126231-01 1126231 1.9
24 216 M12 BOLT CAP URETHANE 574005 1.1
25 44 M20 BOLT CAP URETHANE 574001 3.9
40 31
26 115 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 x 45, CL 8.8 ZNC STL 301246 6.5
27 6 CAPSCR, HEX, M16 x 60 - CL 8.8 ZNC STL 301556 .8
30 37 40 28 14 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 50, CL 8.8 ZNC STL 301878 2.8
C 29 78 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 60, CL 8.8 ZNC STL 301879 17.5
C (2) REQUIRED 30 61 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 70, CL 8.8 ZNC STL 301880 15.2
E E 31 48 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 80 - CL 8.8 ZNC STL 301881 13.1
32 12 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 80, CL8.8 ZNC 302177-1 5
11 33 12 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 100, CL 8.8 ZNC STL 302179 5.9
34 18 CAPSCR, HEX, M36 x 160 - MOLYBOND MOLYBOND 303393 31.3
35 4 CAPSCR, HEX, M52 x 170, CL 8.8 ZNC STL 583212 18.4
32 43
36 108 NUT, HX, M12, CLASS 8.8 STL 308137 1.8
6
37 83 NUT, HEX, M20 CL8.8 ZNC 308139 5.5
38 18 NUT, HEX, M36 MOLYBOND MOLYBOND 308142 7

47
SECTION A-A 6 39 115 WSHR,HRD,M12,DIN 125A, TP200 ZNC STL 307167 .7
40 240 WSHR,HRD,M20,DIN 125A, TP200 ZNC STL 307169 4.1
41 6 WSHR,LOCK,.M20,ZNC TP200 ZNC 583216 .1
A A 49 42 12 WSHR,NORD-LOCK,M24 TP200 ZNC 574760 .3
43 28 WSHR,HRD,M24,DIN 125A, TP200 HDG TP200 ZNC 307160 .9
49
44 36 WSHR,HRD,M36, MOLYBOND MOLYBOND 583211 3.3
45 4 WSHR,HRD,M52,DIN 125B, TP200 ZNC STL 583213 1.3
46 1 NAMEPLATE 316 SS 566867-29 566867 .4
47 1 DECAL - WARNING, "MOVING PARTS" 316 SS W69017-1 W69017 0
27 41 8
1 46
19
48 1 CAUTION PLATE, V-BELT 316 SS 75305-01 W75305 .1
48 49 10 RIVET - STD POP, 3/16 x .375 AL-5056 W234140 0
50 1
50 CROWDER - LINED - C TYPE M.O.R. /A36 589358-06C 589358 965.8
51 8 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 90, CL 8.8 ZNC STL M20 x 90 2.4
20
52 118 M24 BOLT CAP URETHANE 579756-06 579756 7.1
53 30 WSHR,FENDER,DIN 9021 B, M20 TP200 ZNC 579757 2.3

B B DETAIL 1 54 16 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 80, MOLYBOND MOLYBOND 12319ME01EN04-81 6.7

PART NAME: MECHANISM ASSY. TYPE -A (ROUGHER)

13

PART N°: 12319ME01EN004-A

(4 PLACES) 4 40 37 51 WEIGHT: 16961 [kg]
(TYP)
SECTION E-E

40 37 30 NOTES:

(2 REQ'D) 1 - ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

24
LEAVE BOLTS LOOSE 2 TORQUE TO 6101 N-m.
UNTIL ALL HOOD SECTORS 3 3
ARE IN PLACE AND 3 FILL & COVER WITH SEALANT (ITEM 10) AFTER ASSEMBLY
FASTENED TOGETHER 3 53 29 52 TO PROTECT FROM ABRASION.

4 NOTE THAT CROWDER (ITEM 4 & 55) USE FASTENERS (ITEMS 50, 37 & 40)
40 29 52 IN MECHANISM SUPPORT (ITEM 6) PROVIDED.
3
6
5 ATTACH AIR INLET (ITEM 7) TO REDUCER MOUNTING PLATE (ITEM 8) USING
23 FASTENERS PROVIDED WITH AIR INLET ASSEMBLY.

6 STAMP OR ENGRAVE CAUTION PLATE - V BELT (ITEM 48) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
3 ROUGHER:
3 3 DEFLECTION = 22mm (.87")
22 MAX FORCE = 147 N (33 lbs) per belt
MIN FORCE = 99 N (22 lbs) per belt
39 36 26 24 INITIAL FORCE = 196 N (44 lbs) per belt

CLEANER / SCAVENGER :
SECTION D-D DEFLECTION = 22mm (.88")
MAX FORCE = 138 N (31 lbs) per belt
(FROM SHEET 2) SECTION F-F MIN FORCE = 93 N (21 lbs) per belt
INITIAL FORCE = 182 N (41 lbs) per belt

D
COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS ES0001 APPLIES
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.

SECTION C-C D ORIGINAL S.O. DO NOT SCALE PRINTS

C STANDARD MECHANISM ASSEMBLY REF. FROM 541751 & 541752

B DATE 24-06-2009 300 CUBIC METER SHEET 1 OF 3

REV
INITIAL RELEASE A DRAWN CM2
WEMCO FLOTATION DWG.
12319ME01EN004
REVISION EN BY CHECK'D DATE CHCK'D CFS NO. A
 26 39 (7 PLACES)
6

ATTACH TO GUARD
5 7 46 47 48 USING 51 6
14 16 15 17

8 J

H DETAIL J

N
H
40 37 51

2 REQ'D.

(TO SHEET 1) D D 13
50
40 37 30 4

3
P 2 REQ'D.
34 38 44
MOLYBOND
M
50

DETAIL P
K K
DETAIL N L
2
5

SECTION G-G
1
25 3

G
2

VIEW B-B 52 33 42 3
43 54

18

14 15 (10 REQ'D)

16

10 FILL GAP AFTER ASSEMBLY

40 37 30

2
3 10 54 43
9
25 3 MOLYBOND
21

13
DETAIL L
SECTION H-H DETAIL M
SECTION K-K
(BOTH SIDES)
D
COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS
ES0001 APPLIES
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.

DWG. REV
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS SHEET 2 OF 3 12319ME01EN004
NO. A
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL PART NO. DRAWING NO. TOTAL WEIGHT
1 1 SHAFT, MODEL 300m3 CLEANER/SCAVENG. M.O.R. / STL 579761-06 579761 521.8
2 1 1510mm (59.5") STAR ROTOR, 300 M³ M.O.R. / STL 589349-06 589349 1875.1
3 12 DISPERSER HOOD SECTOR URETHANE 570086 570086 448.4
4 1 CROWDER - LINED - A TYPE M.O.R. / A36 589358-06A 589358 966
5 2 DISPERSER, 300 CUBIC METER, WEMCO FLOTATION URETHANE 573999 573999 1559.9
6 1 MECHANISM SUPPORT MODEL 300m3 A36 568608 568608 2855.7
7 1 MANUAL AIR INLET ASSY, 14" A36 1193075-01L 1193075 69.2
D 8 1 REDUCER MOUNTING PLATE A36 568612 1511.7 D
9 1 ROTOR CAP 300 M³ M.O.R. / STL 570104-06 570104 12
10 4 SEALANT, ADHESIVE URETHANE 903150A 0
11 1 MOTOR MOUNT FRAME A36 589344 589344 420.1
12 2 MOUNT, RAIL, MOTOR A36 /ZNC 573998 573998 195.4
13 1 FLENDER REDUCER, B3BV15 541744 541744 4459.1
14 1 BELTGUARD MODEL 300m3 A36 589347 589347 161.3
15 10 V-BELT,8VX1800 Rubber 589368 589368 17.9
16 1 SHEAVE, 24.8", 300m3 MODEL 577944 577944 236.8
17 1 SHEAVE, 18" O.D. 589367 589367 18.7
18 1 ADAPTER PLATE A36 STL 579763 579763 62.1
19 1 RETAINER, SEAL, REDUCER, SIZE 15 A36 STL 1160208-01 10.5
20 1 SEAL, REDUCER, SIZE 15 G.B. NEOPRENE 1160209-01 2
21 1 MOTOR 450 HP 3/3300/50 SIEMENS 12319- I-LIST 450 Hp 12317
22 12 HOOD SECTOR CLAMP A36 STL 574768 574768 40
23 48 HOOD SECTOR BOSS A53 GRB STL 1126231-01 1126231 1.9
24 216 M12 BOLT CAP URETHANE 574005 1.1
25 44 M20 BOLT CAP URETHANE 574001 3.9
26 115 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 x 45, CL 8.8 ZNC STL 301246 6.5
27 6 CAPSCR, HEX, M16 x 60 - CL 8.8 ZNC STL 301556 .8
28 14 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 50, CL 8.8 ZNC STL 301878 2.8
29 78 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 60, CL 8.8 ZNC STL 301879 17.5
30 61 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 70, CL 8.8 ZNC STL 301880 15.2
31 48 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 80 - CL 8.8 ZNC STL 301881 13.1
32 24 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 80, CL 8.8 ZNC 302177-1 10
33 12 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 100, CL 8.8 ZNC STL 302179 5.9
34 18 CAPSCR, HEX, M36 x 160 - MOLYBOND MOLYBOND 303393 31.3
35 4 CAPSCR, HEX, M52 x 170, CL 8.8 ZNC STL 583212 18.4
C C
36 108 NUT, HX, M12, CLASS 8.8 STL FM0770 1.8
37 83 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8.8 ZNC 308139 5.5
38 18 NUT, HEX, M36 MOLYBOND MOLYBOND 308142 7
39 115 WSHR,HRD,M12,DIN 125A, TP200 ZNC STL 307167 .7
40 240 WSHR,HRD,M20,DIN 125A, TP200 ZNC STL 307169 4.1
41 6 WSHR,LOCK,.M20,ZNC TP200 583216 .1
42 12 WSHR,NORD-LOCK,M24 STL 574760 .3
43 28 WSHR,HRD,M24,DIN 125A, TP200 HDG STL 307160 .9
44 36 WSHR,HRD,M36, MOLYBOND MOLYBOND 583211 3.3
45 4 WSHR,HRD,M52,DIN 125B, TP200 ZNC STL 583213 1.3
46 1 NAMEPLATE 316 SS 566867-29 .4
47 1 DECAL - WARNING, "MOVING PARTS" 316 SS W69017-1 0
48 1 CAUTION PLATE, V-BELT 316 SS 75305-01 .1
49 10 RIVET - STD POP, 3/16 x .375 AL-5056 W234140 0
50 1 CROWDER - LINED - C TYPE M.O.R. / A36 589358-06C 589358 965.8
51 8 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 90, CL 8.8 ZNC STL M20 x 90 2.4
52 118 M24 BOLT CAP URETHANE 579756 7.1
53 30 WSHR,FENDER,DIN 9021 B, M20 TP200 ZNC 579757 2.3
54 4 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 80, MOLYBOND MOLYBOND 12319ME01EN04-81 1.7

PART NAME: MECHANISM ASSY. TYPE -C (CLEANER / SCAVENG.)

B B

PART N°: 12319ME01EN004-C

WEIGHT: 16961 [kg]

A A

D
COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS
ES0001 APPLIES
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.

DWG. REV
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS SHEET 3 OF 3 12319ME01EN004
NO. A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MATERIAL MASS
1 1 12319ME01FA005 FEEDBOX WELDMENT 4471 kg
2 1 RM12319ME01EN005-02 NATURAL RUBBER, 6MM NAT. RUBBER 333 kg

D D

C C

A A
7280 RUBBER LINED HEIGHT

PLAN VIEW
6mm RUBBER LINED
INSIDE

10mm RUBBER LINED

B B
3D SECTION

3D VIEW

PART NAME: FEED BOX ASSEMBLY MODEL 300m3

10mm RUBBER LINED PART Nº: 12319ME01EN005-A
WEIGHT: 4805 [kg]

3
FLANGE
1448 RUBBER LINED REVISION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION BY APPROVED DATE REV
1451 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION IMF CFS Aug,12/2009 A

A
D A
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Rev G (12/02)
SECTION A-A
DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01EN005 REF. FROM

DATE 26-01-2009 SHEET 1 OF 1

ASSEMBLY DRAWING
DRAWN
IMF REV.

CHECK'D
JSM
FEED BOX MODEL 300m3 CELL
APPR CFS WEMCO FLOTATION
DWG.
No. 12319ME01EN005 A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MATERIAL MASS
1 1 12319ME01FA006-A & C DISCHARGE BOX WELDMENT 5126 kg
2 1 RM12319ME01EN006-2 RUBBER LINED Rubber 464 kg

B
D D

A A

C C
7302 RUBBER LINED HEIGHT

PLAN VIEW B

6mm RUBBER LINED

INSIDE

BOTTOM
RUBBER LINED
B
10mm BOTTOM B
RUBBER LINED
3D VIEW 10mm
3D SECTION

PART NAME: DISCHARGE BOX ASSEMBLY MODEL 300m3 (ROUGHER)

10mm RUBBER LINED PART Nº: 12319ME01EN006-A
10mm
WEIGHT: 4508 [kg]
RUBBER
LINED RUBBER LINED PART NAME: DISCHARGE BOX ASSEMBLY MODEL 300m3 (CLEANER/ SCAVENG.)
6mm
PART Nº: 12319ME01EN006-C
WEIGHT: 4508 [kg]
3 3
FLANGE B FLANGE
RUBBER LINED 1616 (P/N 12319ME01EN006-A &-C) 1493 RUBBER LINED REVISION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION BY APPROVED DATE REV
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION IMF CFS 12-08-2009 A
MODIFIED AS INDICATED IMF CFS Oct,13/2009 B

A
SECTION A-A D A
C COPYRIGHT GL&V
SECTION B -B
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA Rev G (12/02)

DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01EN006 REF. FROM

DATE 26/01/2009 SHEET 1 OF 1

RUBBER LINED DETAIL
DRAWN
IMF REV.
DISCHARGE BOX MODEL 300m3 CELL
CHECK'D
JSM
APPR CFS WEMCO FLOTATION
DWG.
No. 12319ME01EN006 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PART Nº: 12319ME01EN07-A
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MATERIAL MASS
1 2 577918 DRAFT TUBE , SPLIT 924,61 kg
2 2 589343 COLLAR, SPLIT, 300 CUBIC METER, WEMCO FLOTATION 323,83 kg
3 56 12319ME01EN07-3 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.500, A304 A304 0,21 kg
4 56 12319ME01EN07-4 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304 A304 0,05 kg
5 112 12319ME01EN07-5 WSHR,PLN,TYPB-N,.750 A304 A304 0,01 kg
D 6 16 12319ME01EN07-6 SCR,HHC,.625-11X1.75, A304 A304 0,11 kg D
8 7 6 7 16 12319ME01EN07-7 NUT, HEX .625-11 GR.5 GALV. A304 0,04 kg
8 32 12319ME01EN07-8 Washer 0.6250 N A304 A304 0,01 kg

5 4 3
DETAIL A
(COLLAR ONLY)
A
A

3
PART Nº: 12319ME01EN07-C
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MATERIAL MASS

808
4
1108

1 2 577918 DRAFT TUBE , SPLIT 924,61 kg

5 2 2 577914 COLLAR, SPLIT, 300 CUBIC METER, WEMCO FLOTATION 247,47 kg
3 56 12319ME01EN07-3 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.500, A304 A304 0,21 kg
3 4 5
4 56 12319ME01EN07-4 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304 A304 0,05 kg
5 112 12319ME01EN07-5 WSHR,PLN,TYPB-N,.750 A304 A304 0,01 kg
B 6
7
12
12
12319ME01EN07-6
12319ME01EN07-7
SCR,HHC,.625-11X1.75, A304
NUT, HEX .625-11 GR.5 GALV.
A304
A304
0,11 kg
0,04 kg
B 8 24 12319ME01EN07-8 Washer 0.6250 N A304 A304 0,01 kg
DETAIL B

C C

3327
3627

2519
2519

PART NAME: DRAFT TUBE ASSEMBLY

B PART NAME: DRAFT TUBE ASSEMBLY MODEL 300m3 (CLEANER/SCAV.) B

MODEL 300m3 (ROUGHER)

PART Nº: 12319ME01EN007-C
PART Nº: 12319ME01EN007-A WEIGHT: 2362 [kg]
WEIGHT: 2515 [kg]

3D VIEW

REVISION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION DATE BY APPROVED REV
INITIAL RELEASE, ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 12/10/2009 IMF CFS A
D
A COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS A
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS ES0001 APPLIES
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.

ORIGINAL S.O. DO NOT SCALE PRINTS

DRAFT TUBE ASSY REF. FROM
DATE 12-10-2009 MODEL 300m3 SHEET 1 OF 1
DRAWN IMF DWG REV
CHCK'D CFS NO. 12319ME01EN007 A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL
TANK
1 2 RMP-RAM-3104-001 ACTUATOR 22,6 kg
2 2 589342 ACTUATOR SUPPORT; PL12 x635 x635 34,1 kg A36 STL
2 3 1 589370 ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY, 300M3 CELL 238,1 kg
23 27 18
1 4 2 578506-A ACTUATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY 57,8 kg
D 4 1 5 6 1152920 HINGE ASSY 4,5 kg D
6 4 1152921 UNION PLATE; PL 10 x 120 x 130 1,1 kg Stainless Steel
2 7 9 1153155 PLATE 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
28 29 8 2 578504 UPPER FRAME - HINGED DART 53,0 kg
9 2 578503-A LOWER FRAME - TYPE A - HINGED DART 66,7 kg
10 2 1152924 BAFFLE - HINGED DART 250 7,9 kg
3
11 2 541719 DART VALVE 900mm O.D. (26 IN GROMMET) 87,1 kg
1 12 2 589360 DART VALVE SEAT, 26" 36,2 kg
26 27 23 13 16 MO26427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.500,A304 0,3 kg Stainless Steel
3 14 4 MO16030 SCR,HHC,.750-10X8.00,A304 0,5 kg Stainless Steel
15 24 MO19811 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00, A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
1 16 16 MO16688 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.50,A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
17 4 F13486 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.250,A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
18 8 F10403 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.000,GR5ZNC 0,2 kg GR5ZNC
19 8 F24599 SCR,HHC,.500-13X1.250,A304 0,1 kg Stainless Steel
A A
20 34 F11747 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304 0,1 kg Stainless Steel
21 8 F50473 NUT,HEX,.500-13,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
2 22 66 F13396 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.750,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
23 12 F11200 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.750X2.000X.148,STLZNC 0,0 kg STLZNC
24 16 MO25311 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.500X1.375X.107,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
25 4 589364 SPECIAL Washer 3/4",W/ RUBBER 0,1 kg
26 4 F10427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00,GRD5ZNC 0,2 kg GR5ZNC
C 27 12 F10889 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5ZNC 0,1 kg GR5ZNC C
28 8 12319ME01EN08-28 Hex Nut,M30-1.5, GR5ZNC 0,3 kg GR5ZNC
29 8 Plain Washer ANSI B18.22 M - 30 N 0,1 kg GR5ZNC

4 22 20 13
4 16 5 7
8
6
PLAN VIEW 6
7 14
5
14 20 22 25
7
RUBBER LINED
1 TH: 6mm
17
6 3
9
2
3
8

24 21 19
B B
26 27 8 DETAIL 2 15 22 20

9 B B
11
15 20 22 10 12
4 RUBBER LINED
10 TH: 6mm

DETAIL 3
TANK 11
P N° : 12319ME01EN08-A
12 22 13 P NAME: HINGED DART VALVE ASSY
11 DROP TANK, Ø26" OPENING GROMMET, TYPE A
DETAIL 1 MASS: 1050 [Kg]

A SECTION A-A TANK

D A
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

SECTION B-B FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA Rev G (12/02)

DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01EN08 REF. FROM

DATE 10/06/2009 SHEET 1 OF 3

HINGED DART VALVE ASSY
DRAWN
IMF REV.

CHECK'D
JSM
ROUGHER DROP TANK
APPR CFS 300M³ SMARTCELL
DWG.
No. 12319ME01EN08 0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL
TANK
1 2 RMP-RAM-3104-001 ACTUATOR 22,6 kg
23 27 18
2 2 589342 ACTUATOR SUPPORT; PL12 x635 x635 34,1 kg A36 STL
2 3 1 589370 ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY, 300M3 CELL 238,1 kg
1 4 2 578506-A ACTUATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY 57,8 kg
D 4 1 5 6 1152920 HINGE ASSY 4,5 kg D
6 4 1152921 UNION PLATE; PL 10 x 120 x 130 1,1 kg Stainless Steel
2 7 9 1153155 PLATE 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
28 29 8 2 578504 UPPER FRAME - HINGED DART 53,0 kg
9 2 578503-C LOWER FRAME TYPE C - HINGED DART 65,8 kg
10 2 1152924 BAFFLE - HINGED DART 250 7,9 kg
3
11 2 1152923 DART VALVE 750mm O.D. (20 IN GROMMET) 53,2 kg
1 12 2 589361 DART VALVE SEAT, 20" 51,7 kg
26 27 23 13 16 MO26427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.500,A304 0,3 kg Stainless Steel
3 14 4 MO16030 SCR,HHC,.750-10X8.00,A304 0,5 kg Stainless Steel
15 24 MO19811 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00, A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
1 16 16 MO16688 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.50,A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
17 4 F13486 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.250,A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
18 8 F10403 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.000,GR5ZNC 0,2 kg GR5ZNC
19 8 F24599 SCR,HHC,.500-13X1.250,A304 0,1 kg Stainless Steel
A A
20 34 F11747 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304 0,1 kg Stainless Steel
21 8 F50473 NUT,HEX,.500-13,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
2 22 66 F13396 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.750,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
23 12 F11200 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.750X2.000X.148,STLZNC 0,0 kg STLZNC
24 16 MO25311 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.500X1.375X.107,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
25 4 589364 SPECIAL Washer 3/4",W/ RUBBER 0,1 kg
26 4 F10427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00,GRD5ZNC 0,2 kg GR5ZNC
C 27 12 F10889 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5ZNC 0,1 kg GR5ZNC C
28 8 12319ME01EN08-28 Hex Nut,M30-1.5, GR5ZNC 0,3 kg GR5ZNC
29 8 Plain Washer ANSI B18.22 M - 30 N 0,1 kg GR5ZNC

4 22 20 13
4
16 5 7
8
6
PLAN VIEW 6
7
5 25 14
14 20 22 25
7
RUBBER LINED
1
17 TH: 6mm
6 3
2 9
3
8

B 24 21 19 B
26 27 8 DETAIL 2
15 22 20
9 B B

RUBBER LINED 15 20 22 10 11 12
4
10 TH: 6mm

DETAIL 3
TANK 11
P N° : 12319ME01EN08-C
22 13
12 P NAME: HINGED DART VALVE ASSY
11 DROP TANK, Ø20" OPENING GROMMET, TYPE C
DETAIL 1 MASS: 1050 [Kg]

A SECTION A-A TANK

D A
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

SECTION B-B FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA Rev G (12/02)

DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01EN08 REF. FROM

DATE 10/06/2009 SHEET 2 OF 3

HINGED DART VALVE ASSY
DRAWN
IMF REV.

CHECK'D
JSM
ROUGHER DROP TANK
APPR CFS 300M³ SMARTCELL
DWG.
No. 12319ME01EN08 0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL
1 2 RMP-RAM-3104-001 ACTUATOR 22,6 kg
TANK 23 27 18
2 2 589342 ACTUATOR SUPPORT; PL12 x635 x635 34,1 kg A36 STL
2 3 1 589370 ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY, 300M3 CELL 238,1 kg
1 4 2 578506-A ACTUATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY 57,8 kg
D 4 1 5 6 1152920 HINGE ASSY 4,5 kg D
6 4 1152921 UNION PLATE; PL 10 x 120 x 130 1,1 kg Stainless Steel
2 7 9 1153155 PLATE 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
28 29 8 2 578504 UPPER FRAME - HINGED DART 53,0 kg
9 2 578503-F LOWER FRAME TYPE F - HINGED DART 65,2 kg
10 2 1152924 BAFFLE - HINGED DART 250 7,9 kg
3
11 2 1152923 DART VALVE 750mm O.D. (20 IN GROMMET) 53,2 kg
1 12 2 561516 DART VALVE SEAT, 18" 56,0 kg
26 27 23 13 16 MO26427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.500,A304 0,3 kg Stainless Steel
3 14 4 MO16030 SCR,HHC,.750-10X8.00,A304 0,5 kg Stainless Steel
15 24 MO19811 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00, A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
1 16 16 MO16688 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.50,A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
17 4 F13486 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.250,A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
18 8 F10403 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.000,GR5ZNC 0,2 kg GR5ZNC
A A 19 8 F24599 SCR,HHC,.500-13X1.250,A304 0,1 kg Stainless Steel
20 34 F11747 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304 0,1 kg Stainless Steel
21 8 F50473 NUT,HEX,.500-13,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
2 22 66 F13396 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.750,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
23 12 F11200 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.750X2.000X.148,STLZNC 0,0 kg STLZNC
24 16 MO25311 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.500X1.375X.107,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
25 4 589364 SPECIAL Washer 3/4",W/ RUBBER 0,1 kg
26 4 F10427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00,GRD5ZNC 0,2 kg GR5ZNC
C 27 12 F10889 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5ZNC 0,1 kg GR5ZNC C
28 8 12319ME01EN08-28 Hex Nut,M30-1.5, GR5ZNC 0,3 kg GR5ZNC
29 8 Plain Washer ANSI B18.22 M - 30 N 0,1 kg GR5ZNC

4 22 20 13
4
16 5 7
8
6
PLAN VIEW 6
7
5 14
14 20 22 25
7
RUBBER LINED
1
17 TH: 6mm
6 3
2 9
3
8

B 24 21 19 B
26 27 8 DETAIL 2
15 22 20
9 B B

RUBBER LINED 15 20 22 10 11
4
10 TH: 6mm

DETAIL 3
TANK 11

22 13
12 P N° : 12319ME01EN08-D
11
P NAME: HINGED DART VALVE ASSY
DETAIL 1 DROP TANK, Ø18" OPENING GROMMET, TYPE D
MASS: 1050 [Kg]

A SECTION A-A TANK

D A
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

SECTION B-B FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA Rev G (12/02)

DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01EN08 REF. FROM

DATE 10/06/2009 SHEET 3 OF 3

HINGED DART VALVE ASSY
DRAWN
IMF REV.

CHECK'D
JSM
ROUGHER DROP TANK
APPR CFS 300M³ SMARTCELL
DWG.
No. 12319ME01EN08 0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL
1 2 RMP-RAM-3104-001 ACTUATOR 22,6 kg
1 2 2 589342 ACTUATOR SUPPORT; PL12 x635 x635 34,1 kg A36 STL
3 3 1 578511 ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY, 300M³ CELL 214,5 kg
4 2 578506-C ACTUATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY 66,8 kg
5 6 1152920 HINGE ASSY 4,5 kg
D D
6 4 1152921 UNION PLATE; PL 10 x 120 x 130 1,1 kg Stainless Steel
7 10 1153155 PLATE 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
D.BOX 1
8 2 578504 UPPER FRAME - HINGED DART 53,0 kg
9 2 578503-D LOWER FRAME TYPE-D - HINGED DART 65,3 kg
10 2 1152924 BAFFLE - HINGED DART 250 7,9 kg
11 2 1152923 DART VALVE 750mm O.D. (20 IN GROMMET) 53,2 kg
12 2 561516 DART VALVE SEAT, 18" 56,0 kg
13 4 MO16030 SCR,HHC,.750-10X7.500,A304 0,5 kg Stainless Steel
14 8 MO26427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.500,A304 0,3 kg Stainless Steel
15 8 MO19811 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00, A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
4 16 24 M026160 SCR,HX HD FT,.750-10X3,A316 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
17 8 F24599 SCR,HHC,.500-13X1.250,A304 0,1 kg Stainless Steel
18 16 MO16688 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.50,A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
19 16 F10420 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.250,GR5ZNC 0,2 kg GR5ZNC
20 42 F11747 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304 0,1 kg Stainless Steel
21 8 F50473 NUT,HEX,.500-13,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
22 8 12319ME01EN08-28 Hex Nut,M30-1.5, GR5ZNC 0,3 kg GR5ZNC
23 12 F11200 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.750X2.000X.148,STLZNC 0,0 kg GR5ZNC
A A 24 8 12319ME01EN08-29 ANSI B18.22 M - 30 N 0,1 kg GR5ZNC
25 4 589364 SPECIAL Washer 3/4",W/ RUBBER 0,1 kg
26 16 MO25311 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.500X1.375X.107,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
C 27 66 F13396 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.750,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel C
28 4 F10889 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5ZNC 0,1 kg GR5ZNC

18
7 5 RUBBER LINED
4 TH: 6mm
14 20 27 13
PLANTA 6

13 20 27 25
19
11

2
1 7
8
5 12
5
22 24 6 8
23 28 19 9
B 8 B
3
5 2 3 10
DETAIL 2 16
26 21 17
D.BOX
RUBBER LINED
12 12 TH: 6mm
9
10
DETAIL 3
11
B B
PART N° : 12319ME01EN09-A
P. NAME: HINGED DART VALVE ASSY.
27 15 16 DISCHARGE BOX, Ø18" GROMMET OPENING, TYPE A
27
MASS: 1025 [Kg]

4 REVISION HISTORY
REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APPROVED
0 INITIAL RELEASE; ISSUED TO CONSTRUCTION. IMF 11/06/2009 JOS-CL
DETAIL 1 1 QTY. OF ITEM 10 WAS MODIFIED IMF 15-10-2009 CFS

A
11
D A
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

SECTION A-A FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA Rev G (12/02)

DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01EN09 REF. FROM

DETAIL B-B DATE 10-06-2009 SHEET 1 OF 2

HINGED DART VALVE ASSY.
DRAWN
IMF REV.

CHECK'D
JSM
ROUGHER DISCHARGE BOX
APPR CFS 300M³ SMARTCELL
DWG.
No. 12319ME01EN09 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL
1 2 RMP-RAM-3104-001 ACTUATOR 22,6 kg
1 2 2 589342 ACTUATOR SUPPORT; PL12 x635 x635 34,1 kg A36 STL
3
3 1 578511 ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY, 300M³ CELL 214,5 kg
4 2 578506-C ACTUATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY 66,8 kg
5 6 1152920 HINGE ASSY 4,5 kg
D D
6 4 1152921 UNION PLATE; PL 10 x 120 x 130 1,1 kg Stainless Steel
D.BOX 1 7 10 1153155 PLATE 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
8 2 578504 UPPER FRAME - HINGED DART 53,0 kg
9 2 578503-E LOWER FRAME TYPE-E - HINGED DART 63,3 kg
10 2 1152924 BAFFLE - HINGED DART 250 7,9 kg
11 2 58936 DART VALVE 660mm O.D. (12 IN GROMMET) 40,2 kg
12 2 589362 DART VALVE SEAT, 12" 66,7 kg
13 4 MO16030 SCR,HHC,.750-10X7.500,A304 0,5 kg Stainless Steel
14 8 MO26427 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.500,A304 0,3 kg Stainless Steel
15 8 MO19811 SCR,HHC,.750-10X3.00, A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
4 16 24 M026160 SCR,HX HD FT,.750-10X3,A316 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
17 8 F24599 SCR,HHC,.500-13X1.250,A304 0,1 kg Stainless Steel
18 16 MO16688 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.50,A304 0,2 kg Stainless Steel
19 16 F10420 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.250,GR5ZNC 0,2 kg GR5ZNC
20 42 F11747 NUT,HEX,.750-10, A304 0,1 kg Stainless Steel
21 8 F50473 NUT,HEX,.500-13,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
22 8 12319ME01EN08-28 Hex Nut,M30-1.5, GR5ZNC 0,3 kg GR5ZNC
23 12 F11200 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.750X2.000X.148,STLZNC 0,0 kg GR5ZNC
24 8 12319ME01EN08-29 ANSI B18.22 M - 30 N 0,1 kg GR5ZNC
A A 48 4 589364 SPECIAL Washer 3/4",W/ RUBBER 0,1 kg
26 16 MO25311 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.500X1.375X.107,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel
C 27 66 F13396 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.750,A304 0,0 kg Stainless Steel C
28 4 F10889 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5ZNC 0,1 kg GR5ZNC

4 18
7 5 RUBBER LINED
14 20 27 TH: 6mm
13
6

13 20
PLANTA 19

11
7
2
1 8
5 5 12
8

22 24 6 8
23 28 19 9
B B
3 5 2 3 DETAIL 2
10

RUBBER LINED 26 21 17 16 20
D.BOX
TH: 6mm
12
12
9
11
10
DETAIL 3
16 20 27
B B
27 15
PART N° : 12319ME01EN09-C
P. NAME: HINGED DART VALVE ASSY.
DISCHARGE BOX, Ø12" GROMMET OPENING, TYPE C
MASS: 1025 [Kg]

DETAIL 1

A
SECTION A-A
11
D A
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

DETAIL B-B FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA Rev G (12/02)

DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01EN09 REF. FROM

DATE 10-06-2009 SHEET 2 OF 2

HINGED DART VALVE ASSY.
DRAWN
IMF REV.

CHECK'D
JSM
DISCHARGE BOX
APPR CFS 300M³ SMARTCELL
DWG.
No. 12319ME01EN09 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL PART NO. DRAWING NO. TOTAL WEIGHT
1 12 CIRCUMFERENTIAL WEIR UHMWPE 574766-02 574766 7
1 2 24 RADIAL LAUNDER URETHANE 589351 418
3 24 RADIAL LAUNDER LOCK NUT URETHANE 570088 26
4 12 STIFFENER UPPER 589355 150
5 12 STIFFENER LOWER 589356 131
6 --
7 --
8 12 BAFFLE; PL 6 x 1130 x 1856 A36 STL 589353 1134
3 9 12 LAUNDER SUPPORT A36 STL 589354 193
10 72 CAPSCR, HEX, DIA. 3/8-16 x 1 1/2"LG A304 A304 300927 2
11 252 CAPSCR, HEX, DIA. 5/8-11 x 2"LG A304 A304 301555 31
12 72 NUT, HEX, DIA. 3/8-16 A304 A304 308136 1
13 264 NUT, HEX, DIA 5/8-11 A304 A304 308138 9
14 144 WSHR, HRD, 3/8" A304 A304 307166 1
15 336 WSHR, HRD, 5/8 A304 A304 307168 4
16 180 WASHER 5-8 - Ø44 Out.- A304 A304 12319ME01EN10-16 8
1
1 3

7.5°
C

C
B
A
4
9
4

1250

1250
12

A
5

E E
R3799 5
RUBER LINED
I.S.TANK PLAN VIEW D
Th: 6mm
R
DE

R 3805
N
AU

2
D
LC L

11 13 16 15
RUBER LINED I.S.
PERIMETRAL LAUNDER SECTION B-B
Th: 6mm SECTION A-A

TANK
1
(REF) 11 13 15

SECTION C-C (2 REQ'D)

(TYP)
3 3 P N° : 12319ME01EN10
(TYP) P NAME: RADIAL LAUNDER ASSY TYP.
MASS: 2100 [Kg]
SECTION D-D
RUBBER LINED
TH: 6 mm

10 12 14 9
11 13 15 16
REVISION HISTORY
(2 REQ'D) REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APPROVED
(TYP) RUBBER LINED A INITIAL RELEASE; ISSUED TO CONSTRUCTION IMF 23/07/2009 CFS
TH: 6 mm

C
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA Rev G (12/02)

SECTION E-E DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01EN10 REF. FROM

DETAIL 1 DATE 04-12-2008

RADIAL LAUNDERS ASSY, TYP. SHEET 1 OF 1
DRAWN
IMF REV.
300M3 CELLS
CHECK'D
JSM
APPR CFS
DETAILS, PART LIST
DWG.
No. 12319ME01EN10 A
 ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL PART NO. DRAWING NO. TOTAL WEIGHT
1 12 CIRCUMFERENTIAL WEIR UHMWPE 574766-02 574766 7
2 22 RADIAL LAUNDER URETHANE 589351 382.8
1 3 24 RADIAL LAUNDER LOCK NUT URETHANE 570088 26.2
4 10 STIFFENER UPPER 589355 125
5 10 STIFFENER LOWER 589356 108.9
6 2 SHORT STIFFENER 589357 13.8
7 2 RADIAL LAUNDER PLUG URETHANE 589352 9.2
1 8 12 BAFFLE; PL 6 x 1130 x 1856 A36 STL 589353 1134.4
9 10 LAUNDER SUPPORT 589354 161.1
10 72 CAPSCR, HEX, DIA. 3/8-16 x 1 1/2"LG A304 A304 300927 2.2
11 235 CAPSCR, HEX, DIA. 5/8-11 x 2"LG A304 A304 301555 28.6
12 72 NUT, HEX, DIA. 3/8-16 A304 A304 308136 .7
13 235 NUT, HEX, DIA 5/8-11 A304 A304 308138 8.4
14 144 WSHR, HRD, 3/8" A304 A304 307166 .7
15 305 WSHR, HRD, 5/8 A304 A304 307168 3.6
16 165 WASHER 5-8 - Ø44 Out.- A304 A304 12319ME01EN11-16 6.9
8
1
CONSIDER ITEM 8 3
TO CLOSE ASSY HERE

D
7.5° C

B
C
B D
A
4
4

8
RUBER LINED
I.S.TANK
Th: 6mm
A
5

F F
6

E
PLAN
R3799
11 13 15 16
2
E
2

8
SECTION A-A SECTION B-B
6

SECTION C-C
RUBER LINED 9
I.S. PERIMETER LAUNDER R3793 11 13 15 16
TANK
Th: 6mm 1
(REF)

SECTION D-D
3 3 (TYP)
P N° : 12319ME01EN11-A
5
P NAME: RADIAL LAUDER ASSY SP.
11 13 15
MASS: 2066 [Kg]
9

10 12 14 11 13 15 16
5 REVISION HISTORY
REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APPROVED
(2 REQ'D) A INITIAL RELEASE, ISSUED TO CONSTRUCTION. IMF 23/07/2009 CFS
(TYP)

C
SECTION E-E THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA Rev G (12/02)

DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01EN11 REF. FROM

SECTION F-F DATE 04/12/2008 SHEET 1 OF 1
RADIAL LAUNDERS ASSY, SP
DETAIL 1 DRAWN
IMF
300M3 CELLS
REV.

CHECK'D
CFS
APPR CFS
DETAILS, PART LIST
DWG.
No. 12319ME01EN11 A
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List Parts List Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL
109 24 Hex Bolt - 3/4-10 UNC - 2,5 ,2 kg Steel, Mild 61 1 12319ME01FA72-K I BEAM FA72-K 104 kg 1 1 12319ME01FA40-A HANDRAIL FA40-A 71 kg
110 224 Hex Bolt - 3/4-10 UNC - 2 ,2 kg Steel, Mild 62 6 12319ME01FA73-A C BEAM FA73-A 50 kg 2 1 12319ME01FA40-C HANDRAIL FA40-C 71 kg
111 8 Hex Bolt - 5/8-11 UNC - 3,25 ,2 kg Steel, Mild 63 3 12319ME01FA73-C C BEAM FA73-A 50 kg 3 7 12319ME01FA41-A HANDRAIL FA41-A 78 kg
112 268 Hex Bolt - 5/8-11 - 2 UNC ,1 kg Steel, Mild 64 3 12319ME01FA73-E C BEAM FA73-A 50 kg 4 7 12319ME01FA41-C HANDRAIL FA41-C 78 kg
113 440 Hex Bolt -5/8-11 UNC - 1,5 ,1 kg Steel, Mild 65 1 12319ME01FA74-A PLATFORM FA74-A 266 kg 5 12 12319ME01FA42-A HANDRAIL FA42-A 132 kg
D D
114 124 Hex Bolt - 1/2-13 UNC - 2 ,1 kg Steel, Mild 66 1 12319ME01FA74-C PLATFORM FA74-C 266 kg 6 8 12319ME01FA42-C HANDRAIL FA42-C 132 kg
115 64 Hex Bolt - 3/8-16 UNC - 1,25 UNC 0 kg Steel, Mild 67 2 12319ME01FA75-A C BEAM FA75-A 40 kg 7 1 12319ME01FA43-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA43-A 59 kg
116 248 Hex Nut 3/4 - 10 ,1 kg Steel, Mild 68 2 12319ME01FA75-C C BEAM FA75-A 41 kg 8 1 12319ME01FA43-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA43-C 59 kg
117 712 Hex Nut 5/8 - 11 0 kg Steel, Mild 69 2 12319ME01FA76-A C 10 x 15.3 x 2610 34 kg Steel 9 3 12319ME01FA44-A HANDRAIL FA44-A 47 kg
118 124 Hex Nut 1/2 - 13 0 kg Steel, Mild 70 2 12319ME01FA76-C C 10 x 15.3 x 2610 34 kg Steel 10 3 12319ME01FA44-C HANDRAIL FA44-C 47 kg
119 64 Hex Nut 3/8 - 16 0 kg Steel, Mild 71 2 12319ME01FA77-A C BEAM FA77-A 26 kg 11 8 12319ME01FA45-A HANDRAIL FA45-A 44 kg
120 496 Washer A narrow 3/4 0 kg Steel, Mild 72 2 12319ME01FA78-A C BEAM FA78-A 68 kg 12 3 12319ME01FA46-A HANDRAIL FA46-A 51 kg
121 1424 Washer A wide 5/8 0 kg Steel, Mild 73 2 12319ME01FA78-C C BEAM FA78-C 68 kg 13 3 12319ME01FA46-C HANDRAIL FA46-C 51 kg
122 8 Washer A narrow 5/8 0 kg Steel, Mild 74 2 12319ME01FA79-A C BEAM FA79-A 18 kg 14 1 12319ME01FA47-A HANDRAIL FA47-A 78 kg
123 248 Washer A 1/2 - wide - Type A 0 kg Steel, Mild 75 4 12319ME01FA80-A I BEAM FA80-A 194 kg 15 1 12319ME01FA47-C HANDRAIL FA47-C 78 kg
124 128 Washer A wide 3/8 0 kg Steel, Mild 76 2 12319ME01FA80-C I BEAM FA80-C 194 kg 16 1 12319ME01FA48-A HANDRAIL FA48-A 109 kg
77 15 12319ME01FA81-01 L 80 x 80 x 6; L:906 6 kg Steel 17 1 12319ME01FA48-C HANDRAIL FA48-C 109 kg
78 12 12319ME01FA81-02 L 80 x 80 x 6; L:1965 mm 14 kg Steel 18 1 12319ME01FA49-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA49-A 66 kg
79 12 12319ME01FA84 GRATING FA84 1462 kg Steel 19 1 12319ME01FA49-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA49-C 67 kg
80 12 12319ME01FA85 GRATING FA85 767 kg Steel 20 1 12319ME01FA50-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA50-A 44 kg
34 81 1 12319ME01FA87 GRATING FA87 96 kg 21 1 12319ME01FA50-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA50-C 44 kg
82 2 12319ME01FA88 GRATING FA88 717 kg Steel 22 4 12319ME01FA51-A HANDRAIL FA51-A 55 kg
18
32 83 2 12319ME01FA89 GRATING FA89 575 kg Steel 23 1 12319ME01FA52-A HANDRAIL FA52-A 40 kg
35 84 2 12319ME01FA90 GRATING FA90 421 kg Steel 24 1 12319ME01FA52-C HANDRAIL FA52-C 40 kg
117 121 112 85 2 12319ME01FA91 GRATING FA91 1075 kg Steel 25 2 12319ME01FA53-A HANDRAIL FA53-A 64 kg
119 124 115
86 12 12319ME01FA92 GRATING FA92 2239 kg Steel 26 4 12319ME01FA54-A HANDRAIL FA54-A 58 kg
C 112 121 117 87 12 12319ME01FA93 GRATING FA93 1179 kg Steel 27 1 12319ME01FA55-A HANDRAIL FA55-A 128 kg C
88 12 12319ME01FA94 GRATING FA94 1159 kg Steel 28 1 12319ME01FA55-C HANDRAIL FA55-C 128 kg
58 89 6 12319ME01FA95 GRATING FA95 450 kg Steel 29 12 12319ME01FA56-A HANDRAIL FA56-A 82 kg
90 2 12319ME01FA96 GRATING FA96 1088 kg Steel 30 1 12319ME01FA57-A HANDRAIL FA57-A 33 kg
91 12 12319ME01FA97 GRATING FA97 522 kg Steel 31 1 12319ME01FA57-C HANDRAIL FA57-C 33 kg
37 92 4 12319ME01FA98 GRATING FA98 694 kg Steel 32 1 12319ME01FA58-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA58-A 50 kg
117 121 112 93 2 12319ME01FA99 GRATING FA99 469 kg Steel 33 1 12319ME01FA58-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA58-C 50 kg
94 1 589380-A SUPPORT BEAM 1840 kg 34 8 12319ME01FA61-A 12319ME01FA61-A 64 kg
95 6 589380-C SUPPORT BEAM 1751 kg 35 2 12319ME01FA62-A 12319ME01FA62-A 28 kg
HANDRAIL FA58 & STAIRS HANDRAIL FA49 & BEAM FA72 96 6 589380-D SUPPORT BEAM 1760 kg 36 2 12319ME01FA62-C 12319ME01FA62-C 4 kg
(BOLT UNION TYP.) 97 1 589380-E SUPPORT BEAM 1840 kg 37 2 12319ME01FA63-A 12319ME01FA63-A 45 kg
(BOLT UNION TYP.)
98 1 589380-F SUPPORT BEAM 1857 kg 38 2 12319ME01FA63-C 12319ME01FA63-C 10 kg
99 1 589380-G SUPPORT BEAM 1817 kg 39 8 12319ME01FA64-A 12319ME01FA64-A 68 kg
100 1 589380-H SUPPORT BEAM 1864 kg 40 1 12319ME01FA71-A C BEAM FA71-A 110 kg
101 1 589380-J SUPPORT BEAM 1784 kg 41 6 12319ME01FA71-C C BEAM FA71-C 109 kg
112 121 117 112 121 117 65 102 1 589380-K SUPPORT BEAM 1874 kg 42 22 12319ME01FA71-D C BEAM FA71-D 109 kg
121 112
103 1 589380-L SUPPORT BEAM 1824 kg 43 6 12319ME01FA71-E C BEAM FA71-E 109 kg
116 120 109
104 2 589380-M SUPPORT BEAM 1759 kg 44 1 12319ME01FA71-F C BEAM FA71-F 109 kg
105 2 589380-N SUPPORT BEAM 1759 kg 45 2 12319ME01FA71-G C BEAM FA71-G 86 kg
46 1 12319ME01FA71-H C BEAM FA71-H 110 kg
47 1 12319ME01FA71-J C BEAM FA71-J 109 kg
58 48 2 12319ME01FA71-K C BEAM FA71-K 109 kg
B 49 1 12319ME01FA71-L C BEAM FA71-L 111 kg B
5
42 95 50 1 12319ME01FA71-M C BEAM FA71-M 111 kg
55 51 2 12319ME01FA71-N C BEAM FA71-N 86 kg
104 52 1 12319ME01FA71-S C BEAM FA71-S 110 kg
121 112
112 117 121 53 1 12319ME01FA71-R C BEAM FA71-R 110 kg
PLATFORM BEAM & BEAM SUPP.
(BOLT UNION TYP.) 54 1 12319ME01FA72-A I BEAM FA72-A 106 kg
55 1 12319ME01FA72-C I BEAM FA72-C 104 kg
56 1 12319ME01FA72-D I BEAM FA72-D 101 kg
PLATFORM FA74 & BEAM SUPP. 57 1 12319ME01FA72-E I BEAM FA72-E 104 kg
(BOLT UNION (TYP.) 121 117 112 58 1 12319ME01FA72-F I BEAM FA72-F 100 kg
59 1 12319ME01FA72-G I BEAM FA72-G 106 kg
25 60 1 12319ME01FA72-H I BEAM FA72-H 104 kg
121 117 111 7 65 HANDRAIL w/PLATE
110 116 120
26 69 (UNION BOLT TYP.)
58 112 121 117
112 121 117
35
117 121 113
REVISION HISTORY
REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APPROVED
A INITIAL RELEASE; ISSUED TO CONSTRUCTION. IMF 27/08/2009 CFS
B ADD TYPICAL BOLTED DETAIL & BOLT ITEMS. IMF 13/10/2009 CFS

A
117 122 121 112
PLATFORM FA74 & BEAM FA72 117 121 113
113 121 117
73 D A
65 (BOLT UNION TYP.) 25 THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA Rev G (12/02)
DISCHARGE PLATFORM BEAMS 67 69 DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01EN16 REF. FROM
PLATFORM FA74 & HANDRAIL (BOLT UNION TYP.) DATE 27/08/2009 SHEET 1 OF 5
(BOLT UNION TYP.) HANDRAIL w/ANGLE 300M³ PLATAFORM ASSY
DRAWN
IMF REV.
(BOLT UNION TYP.) CLEAR & SCAVENGER
CHECK'D
CFS DWG.
APPR CFS
ASSEMBLY, PART LIST No. 12319ME01EN16 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

SECTION A-A

C C

A A

B B

PLAN VIEW
GENERAL PLATFORM ASSY
A A

D
COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS
ES0001 APPLIES
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.

DWG. REV
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS SHEET 2 OF 5
NO. 12319ME01EN16 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

74 48 42 97 42 43 62 41 42 95 42 55 45 54 42 95 42 43 62 41 42 105 58 57 45 44 42 95 42 43 62 41 42 99 42 49 71

69

40

67

73

72

C C

70
78
68

78 77
98 63 96 37 38 96 63 104 35 76 65 36 96 63 94
77
75
76
75
75 78
78 102 62 95 62 64 105 36
64 95 38 37 100
77 66 35 95 62 64
52 75

69

67

B B

72

73 46

70

68 74 48 42 103 42 41 43 42 96 42 60 51 59 42 96 42 41 43 42 104 56 61 51 47 42 96 42 41 43 42 101 42 50 71

PLAN VIEW
BEAM SUPPORT & PLATFORM BEAMS
A A

D
COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS
ES0001 APPLIES
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.

DWG. REV
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS SHEET 3 OF 5
NO. 12319ME01EN16 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

20 22 5 9 3
25 26 23 5 4 11 3 5 9 20 5 4 11 3 5 7 18 14 5 4 11 3 5 9

D D

SECTION B-B

C C
26 23 5 4 11 3 5 9 22 1 5 4 11 3 5 9 22 14 5 4 11 3 5 9 22 1 5 9

25

B B
26

30 3

29 29 27 12 6 32 20 6 12 16 7 29 29 11 18 6 12 6 20 32 6 29
B 29 B

29 13 6 33 21 6 13 11 17 29 29 8 11 6 21 33 5 29
29 28 19 13
29
31

26 4

25

26

4 5 10 22 2 6 10
24 5 12 5 10 22 2 5 3 22 15 5 3 11 4 5 10

A A

PLAN VIEW D
HANDRAILS COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS
ES0001 APPLIES
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.

DWG. REV
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS SHEET 4 OF 5
NO. 12319ME01EN16 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

92 92 82 79 87 88 86 80 79 87 88 86 80 83 79 87 88 86 80 79 87 88 86 80 84 79 87 88 86 80 79 87 88 86 80

C C
85
93

90 89
91 89 83 81 89 39 91

91
83 34 90 89
89 89 39

93
85

B B

92 92 79 87 88 86 80 79 87 88 86 83 79 87 88 80 80 79 87 88 86 80 84 79 87 88 80 80 79 87 88 86 80

PLAN VIEW
GRATING

A A

D
COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS
ES0001 APPLIES
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.

DWG. REV
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS SHEET 5 OF 5
NO. 12319ME01EN16 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List Parts List Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL
109 24 Hex Bolt - 3/4-10 UNC - 2,5 ,2 kg Steel, Mild 61 2 12319ME01FA72-G I BEAM FA72-G 106 kg 1 2 12319ME01FA40-A HANDRAIL FA40-A 71 kg
110 224 Hex Bolt - 3/4-10 UNC - 2 ,2 kg Steel, Mild 62 2 12319ME01FA72-H I BEAM FA72-H 104 kg 2 2 12319ME01FA40-C HANDRAIL FA40-C 71 kg
111 8 Hex Bolt - 5/8-11 UNC - 3,25 ,2 kg Steel, Mild 63 1 12319ME01FA72-K I BEAM FA72-K 104 kg 3 6 12319ME01FA41-A HANDRAIL FA41-A 78 kg
112 316 Hex Bolt - 5/8-11 - 2 UNC ,1 kg Steel, Mild 64 5 12319ME01FA73-A C BEAM FA73-A 50 kg 4 6 12319ME01FA41-C HANDRAIL FA41-C 78 kg
113 452 Hex Bolt -5/8-11 UNC - 1,5 ,1 kg Steel, Mild 65 4 12319ME01FA73-C C BEAM FA73-A 50 kg 5 14 12319ME01FA42-A HANDRAIL FA42-A 132 kg
D D
114 124 Hex Bolt - 1/2-13 UNC - 2 ,1 kg Steel, Mild 66 3 12319ME01FA73-E C BEAM FA73-A 50 kg 6 10 12319ME01FA42-C HANDRAIL FA42-C 132 kg
115 96 Hex Bolt - 3/8-16 UNC - 1,25 UNC 0 kg Steel, Mild 67 1 12319ME01FA74-A PLATFORM FA74-A 266 kg 7 1 12319ME01FA43-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA43-A 59 kg
116 248 Hex Nut 3/4 - 10 ,1 kg Steel, Mild 68 1 12319ME01FA74-C PLATFORM FA74-C 266 kg 8 1 12319ME01FA43-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA43-C 59 kg
117 772 Hex Nut 5/8 - 11 0 kg Steel, Mild 69 2 12319ME01FA75-A C BEAM FA75-A 40 kg 9 4 12319ME01FA44-A HANDRAIL FA44-A 47 kg
118 124 Hex Nut 1/2 - 13 0 kg Steel, Mild 70 2 12319ME01FA75-C C BEAM FA75-A 41 kg 10 4 12319ME01FA44-C HANDRAIL FA44-C 47 kg
119 96 Hex Nut 3/8 - 16 0 kg Steel, Mild 71 2 12319ME01FA76-A C 10 x 15.3 x 2610 34 kg Steel 11 7 12319ME01FA45-A HANDRAIL FA45-A 44 kg
120 496 Washer A narrow 3/4 0 kg Steel, Mild 72 2 12319ME01FA76-C C 10 x 15.3 x 2610 34 kg Steel 12 4 12319ME01FA46-A HANDRAIL FA46-A 51 kg
121 1544 Washer A wide 5/8 0 kg Steel, Mild 73 2 12319ME01FA77-A C BEAM FA77-A 26 kg 13 3 12319ME01FA46-C HANDRAIL FA46-C 51 kg
122 8 Washer A narrow 5/8 0 kg Steel, Mild 74 3 12319ME01FA78-A C BEAM FA78-A 68 kg 14 1 12319ME01FA47-A HANDRAIL FA47-A 78 kg
123 248 Washer A 1/2 - wide - Type A 0 kg Steel, Mild 75 1 12319ME01FA78-C C BEAM FA78-C 68 kg 15 1 12319ME01FA47-C HANDRAIL FA47-C 78 kg
124 192 Washer A wide 3/8 0 kg Steel, Mild 76 2 12319ME01FA79-A C BEAM FA79-A 18 kg 16 1 12319ME01FA48-A HANDRAIL FA48-A 109 kg
77 4 12319ME01FA80-A I BEAM FA80-A 194 kg 17 1 12319ME01FA48-C HANDRAIL FA48-C 109 kg
78 2 12319ME01FA80-C I BEAM FA80-C 194 kg 18 1 12319ME01FA49-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA49-A 66 kg
79 15 12319ME01FA81-01 L 80 x 80 x 6; L:906 6 kg Steel 19 1 12319ME01FA49-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA49-C 67 kg
80 12 12319ME01FA81-02 L 80 x 80 x 6; L:1965 mm 14 kg Steel 20 2 12319ME01FA50-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA50-A 44 kg
34 81 14 12319ME01FA84 GRATING FA84 1462 kg Steel 21 2 12319ME01FA50-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA50-C 44 kg
18 82 14 12319ME01FA85 GRATING FA85 767 kg Steel 22 6 12319ME01FA51-A HANDRAIL FA51-A 55 kg
32 83 2 12319ME01FA86 GRATING FA86 1149 kg Steel 23 1 12319ME01FA52-A HANDRAIL FA52-A 40 kg
35 84 4 12319ME01FA87 GRATING FA87 96 kg 24 1 12319ME01FA52-C HANDRAIL FA52-C 40 kg
117 121 112
85 2 12319ME01FA88 GRATING FA88 717 kg Steel 25 2 12319ME01FA53-A HANDRAIL FA53-A 64 kg
119 124 115
86 4 12319ME01FA89 GRATING FA89 575 kg Steel 26 4 12319ME01FA54-A HANDRAIL FA54-A 58 kg
C 112 121 117 87 2 12319ME01FA90 GRATING FA90 421 kg Steel 27 1 12319ME01FA55-A HANDRAIL FA55-A 128 kg C
58 88 2 12319ME01FA91 GRATING FA91 1075 kg Steel 28 1 12319ME01FA55-C HANDRAIL FA55-C 128 kg
89 14 12319ME01FA92 GRATING FA92 2239 kg Steel 29 12 12319ME01FA56-A HANDRAIL FA56-A 82 kg
90 14 12319ME01FA93 GRATING FA93 1179 kg Steel 30 1 12319ME01FA57-A HANDRAIL FA57-A 33 kg
91 14 12319ME01FA94 GRATING FA94 1159 kg Steel 31 1 12319ME01FA57-C HANDRAIL FA57-C 33 kg
37 92 5 12319ME01FA95 GRATING FA95 450 kg Steel 32 2 12319ME01FA58-A STAIR HANDRAIL FA58-A 50 kg
117 121 112
93 2 12319ME01FA96 GRATING FA96 1088 kg Steel 33 2 12319ME01FA58-C STAIR HANDRAIL FA58-C 50 kg
94 12 12319ME01FA97 GRATING FA97 522 kg Steel 34 16 12319ME01FA61-A 12319ME01FA61-A 64 kg
95 4 12319ME01FA98 GRATING FA98 694 kg Steel 35 2 12319ME01FA62-A 12319ME01FA62-A 28 kg
HANDRAIL FA58 & STAIRS HANDRAIL FA49 & BEAM FA72 96 2 12319ME01FA99 GRATING FA99 469 kg Steel 36 2 12319ME01FA62-C 12319ME01FA62-C 4 kg
(BOLT UNION TYP.) (BOLT UNION TYP.)
97 1 589380-A SUPPORT BEAM 1840 kg 37 4 12319ME01FA63-A 12319ME01FA63-A 45 kg
98 8 589380-C SUPPORT BEAM 1751 kg 38 4 12319ME01FA63-C 12319ME01FA63-C 10 kg
99 8 589380-D SUPPORT BEAM 1760 kg 39 8 12319ME01FA64-A 12319ME01FA64-A 68 kg
100 1 589380-E SUPPORT BEAM 1840 kg 40 1 12319ME01FA70-A C BEAM FA71-D 104 kg
101 1 589380-F SUPPORT BEAM 1857 kg 41 1 12319ME01FA71-A C BEAM FA71-A 110 kg
112 121 117 112 121 117 65 102 1 589380-G SUPPORT BEAM 1817 kg 42 5 12319ME01FA71-C C BEAM FA71-C 109 kg
121 112
103 1 589380-H SUPPORT BEAM 1864 kg 43 26 12319ME01FA71-D C BEAM FA71-D 109 kg
116 120 109
104 1 589380-J SUPPORT BEAM 1784 kg 44 5 12319ME01FA71-E C BEAM FA71-E 109 kg
105 1 589380-K SUPPORT BEAM 1874 kg 45 1 12319ME01FA71-F C BEAM FA71-F 109 kg
106 1 589380-L SUPPORT BEAM 1824 kg 46 3 12319ME01FA71-G C BEAM FA71-G 86 kg
107 2 589380-M SUPPORT BEAM 1759 kg 47 1 12319ME01FA71-H C BEAM FA71-H 110 kg
58 108 2 589380-N SUPPORT BEAM 1759 kg 48 1 12319ME01FA71-J C BEAM FA71-J 109 kg
B 49 2 12319ME01FA71-K C BEAM FA71-K 109 kg B
42 50 1 12319ME01FA71-L C BEAM FA71-L 111 kg
55 5 51 1 12319ME01FA71-M C BEAM FA71-M 111 kg
104 95
121 112 52 3 12319ME01FA71-N C BEAM FA71-N 86 kg
PLATFORM BEAM & BEAM SUPP. 53 2 12319ME01FA71-P C BEAM FA71-P 109 kg
(BOLT UNION TYP.) 112 117 121 54 1 12319ME01FA71-R C BEAM FA71-R 110 kg
55 1 12319ME01FA71-S C BEAM FA71-S 110 kg
56 2 12319ME01FA72-A I BEAM FA72-A 106 kg
PLATFORM FA74 & BEAM SUPP. 57 2 12319ME01FA72-C I BEAM FA72-C 104 kg
(BOLT UNION (TYP.) 121 117 112 58 1 12319ME01FA72-D I BEAM FA72-D 101 kg
59 1 12319ME01FA72-E I BEAM FA72-E 104 kg
25 60 1 12319ME01FA72-F I BEAM FA72-F 100 kg
121 117 111 7 65 110 116 120
26 69
58 112 121 117 HANDRAIL w/PLATE
(UNION BOLT TYP.)
35
REVISION HISTORY
112 121 117
REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APPROVED
117 121 113
A INITIAL RELEASE; ISSUED TO CONSTRUCTION. IMF 27/08/2009 CFS
67 B ADD TYPICAL BOLTED DETAILS & BOLT ITEMS. IMF 13/10/2009 CFS

A
117 122 121 112
PLATFORM FA74 & BEAM FA72 117 121 113
113 121 117
73 25
69
D A
65 (BOLT UNION TYP.) THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING
FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA Rev G (12/02)
DISCHARGE PLATFORM BEAMS DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12319ME01EN17 REF. FROM
PLATFORM FA74 & HANDRAIL (BOLT UNION TYP.)
(BOLT UNION TYP.) HANDRAIL w/ANGLE DATE 27/08/2009
300M³ PLATAFORM ASSY SHEET 1 OF 5
(BOLT UNION TYP.)
DRAWN
IMF REV.
ROUGHER
CHECK'D
CFS DWG.
APPR CFS
ASSEMBLY, PART LIST No. 12319ME01EN17 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

ELEVATION A-A

C C

A A

B B

A PLAN VIEW A

GENERAL PLATFORM ASSY

D
COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS
ES0001 APPLIES
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.

DWG. REV
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS SHEET 2 OF 5
NO. 12319ME01EN17 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

76 49 43 100 43 44 64 42 43 98 43 57 46 56 43 98 43 44 64 42 43 108 60 59 46 45 43 98 43 44 64 42 43 98 43 57 46 56 43 102 50 73

54

71

69

74

74
C C

41
72
80
70

37 38 99 99 99 37 38 97 79
80 79 101 65 99 65 107 35 78 67 36 65

78
77 77
80 36 80
66 98 37 38 98 64 66 108 37 103
105 40 79 68 98 64 66 98 38
77 35 77

55

70 47

71

69

B B

75

74

72

48 99 42 44 99 43 62 52 61 104 43 51 73
76 49 43 106 53 65 53 43 99 62 52 99 43 42 44 43 107 58 63 52 43
61

PLAN VIEW
SUPPORT BEAMS & PLATFORM BEAMS

A A

D
COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS
ES0001 APPLIES
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.

DWG. REV
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS SHEET 3 OF 5
NO. 12319ME01EN17 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

22 5 9 3
25 26 23 5 4 11 3 5 9 20 5 4 11 3 5 7 18 14 5 4 11 3 5 9 20

D D

SECTION B-B

C 26 23 5 4 11 3 5 9 22 1 5 4 11 3 5 18 9 22 14 5 4 11 3 5 9 22 5 9 C

25

B B
26
3
29 29 27 12 6 32 20 6 12 16 7 29 29 11 18 6 12 6 32 6 29
29
B B
29 28 13 6 33 21 6 13 17 8 29 29 33 21 5 29
29 11 6 13 6
29

31

4
26

25

26

24 5 12 5 10 22 5 3 11 4 5 19 10 22 15 5 3 11 4 5 10 22 2 6 10

A A
PLAN VIEW
HANDRAILS D
COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS
ES0001 APPLIES
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.

DWG. REV
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS SHEET 4 OF 5
NO. 12319ME01EN17 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D D

96 89 82 81 89 102 88
95 85 81 90 89 82 81 90 89 82 86 81 90 90 89 82 87 81 90 89 82 81 90 89 82 86 81 90

C C

34 84 91
93 91 92 91
91 92 86 84 91 92 91
91
94 94
94
93
34 84 92 39
92 34 84

B B

81 90 91 89 82 88
91 89 82 81 90 91 89 82 86
81 90 91 89 82 87 81 90
90 91 89 82 86 81 90 91 89 82
96 95 85 81 90 91 106 82 83 81

PLAN VIEW
GRATING

A A

D
COPYRIGHT© 2007 BY
FLSMIDTH MINERALS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - REV G
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR
WORKMANSHIP STANDARD
EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. OR INSTALLING, OPERATING OR MAINTAINING FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC. EQUIPMENT. UNLESS
ES0001 APPLIES
OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO INC.

DWG. REV
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS SHEET 5 OF 5
NO. 12319ME01EN17 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TABLA DE
TORQUES
MANUALES Y CATÁLOGOS
VENDORS
 LISTADO DE PLANOS, CATALOGOS Y MANUALES VENDORS
INCLUIDOS EN EL MANUAL

G. - MOTORES
1. - Manual de Instalación, Operación y Mantenimiento
2. - Data Sheet, Curvas de Rendimiento y Plano Motor de 450 HP
3. - Data Sheet, Curvas de Rendimiento y Plano Motor de 500 HP

H. - REDUCTORES
1. - Plano Reductor Vertical B3BV 15
2. - Lista de Recambios
3. - Instrucciones de Operación Bomba STOZ
4. - Instrucciones de Operación switch De Presión
5. - Instrucciones de Operación Conector 1-1-80-652-002
6. - Instrucciones de Operación Termostato
7. - Instrucciones de Operación Filtro Doble
8. - Conexión y Data Indicador de Presión Diferencial

9. - Instrucciones de Servicio BA 5017 Reductor del tipo B.BV

10. - Instrucciones de Servicio BA 7300 Recomendaciones de Lubricantes
11. - Instrucciones de Operación Unidad de Enfriamiento

I. - ACTUADORES
1. - Desembalaje de los Actuadores
2. - Plano N° RMP-RAM-3104-001 – Montaje Cilindro CS1BCO-K1N001-350
3. - Catálogo Cilindro Neumático Serie CS1
4. - Catálogo Filtro Regulador AW1000 a 4000
5. - Instrucciones de Montaje y Operación – Posicionador Electro-neumático

J. - MEDIDORES DE NIVEL
1. - Información Técnica – Medidor de Nivel Ultrasónico
2. - Instrucciones de Operación – Medidor de Nivel Ultrasónico
G. - MOTORES
Motores / generadores Instalación
Funcionamiento
de inducción Mantenimiento

Horizontal - Medallion
Bastidores 500, 580, 708, 788, 880
Carcasas TEFC y a prueba de explosiones

Tipo CZ, NCZ, CGZ, CGZZ

ANIM-03522-0402SPN
(Nueva edición)
©2002 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Todos los derechos reservados.
Índice

Página Página
ÍNDICE 1 Funcionamiento 10
PROCEDIMIENTOS DE SEGURIDAD 2 Arranque inicial 10
INTRODUCCIÓN 3 Sistemas de circulación de aceite 10
Garantía 3 Funcionamiento normal 10
Recepción 3 Variación de tensión / frecuencia 10
Manipulación 4 Resolución de problemas 11
Almacenamiento temporal 4 Mantenimiento 13
Designaciones de tipo 4 Mantenimiento preventivo 13
Instalación 5 Inspección 14
Dimensiones del motor 5 Mantenimiento correctivo 15
Ubicación 5 Limpieza del rotor 16
Fundación 5 Limpieza del estator 16
Montaje 5 Resistencia del aislamiento 16
Acoplamiento de motores con cojinetes 5 Secado del aislamiento 16
de manguito
Cableado externo 6 Cojinetes 17
Cambio de la dirección de rotación 6 Lubricación de los cojinetes 20
Alineación 6 Reemplazo de los cojinetes 21
Alineación en caliente 7 REPUESTOS 25
Vibración 8 Identificación 25
Ensamble con pasadores guía 8 REGISTRO DE SERVICIO DEL MOTOR 29
Lubricación a presión 8 HOJA DE ANÁLISIS DE VIBRACIÓN 30
Parámetros típicos de control del motor 9 NOTAS 31

Nota: Estas instrucciones no pretenden incluir todos los detalles o variaciones de los equipos, ni tampoco dar
una solución para todas las posibles contingencias que surjan en relación con la instalación, el funcionamiento o
el mantenimiento. Si desea obtener más información o si surge algún problema en particular que no se trate con
suficiente detalle a los fines del usuario, debe consultar a la Oficina de Ventas local de Siemens. El contenido de
este manual de instrucciones no formará parte de ningún acuerdo, compromiso o relación existente o anterior, ni
los modificará. El contrato de venta contiene todas las obligaciones de Siemens. La garantía incluida en el
contrato entre las partes constituye la totalidad de la garantía de Siemens. Las manifestaciones incluidas en el
presente no crean ninguna garantía nueva ni modifican la garantía existente.

Las máquinas de Siemens se fabrican de acuerdo con la última revisión aplicable del Código Eléctrico Nacional
(National Electric Code), las Normas y Procedimientos de Underwriters Laboratories y las Normas de la
Asociación Nacional de Fabricantes de Productos Eléctricos (National Electrical Manufacturers Association,
NEMA). Debe leer atentamente y comprender estas publicaciones y el presente manual de instrucciones, antes
de comenzar a trabajar con este equipo.

La intención de la información incluida en el presente es ayudar al personal de operaciones brindando

información sobre las características generales del equipo comprado. No exime al usuario de la responsabilidad
de usar prácticas de ingeniería aceptadas en lo que respecta a la instalación, el funcionamiento y el
mantenimiento de este equipo.

Si surgiera algún conflicto entre la información general de este manual y el contenido de los dibujos y el material
complementario, prevalecerá este último.

Las ilustraciones de este manual corresponden a máquinas típicas. Las características especiales son distintas
de las de los gráficos.

-1-
Procedimientos de seguridad
Este equipo funciona con tensiones peligrosas. Si no
sigue las instrucciones de seguridad, pueden
producirse daños a los bienes, lesiones físicas graves
o la muerte.
El funcionamiento satisfactorio y seguro de los
motores y generadores depende de la manipulación,
la instalación, el funcionamiento y el mantenimiento
adecuados, así como del diseño y la fabricación
correctos. No respetar determinados requisitos
fundamentales de instalación y mantenimiento puede
causar lesiones físicas y provocar la falla y pérdida
del motor, así como daños a otros bienes.
Sólo personal calificado debe trabajar con este
equipo, o en las inmediaciones, después de haberse
familiarizado exhaustivamente con todas las
advertencias, avisos de seguridad y procedimientos
de mantenimiento incluidos en el presente. Sólo
personal calificado debe participar en los
procedimientos de inspección, mantenimiento y
reparación, y se deben respetar todos los
procedimientos de seguridad de la planta.
Persona calificada: A los fines de este manual y las
etiquetas del producto, una persona calificada es
aquella que está familiarizada con la instalación, la
fabricación y el funcionamiento del equipo, y con los
peligros involucrados. Además, dicha persona debe
reunir los siguientes requisitos:
a. Estar capacitada y tener la autorización para
activar, desactivar, eliminar, conectar a tierra y
etiquetar circuitos y equipos de conformidad con
las prácticas de seguridad establecidas.
b. Estar capacitada para cuidar y usar correctamente
los equipos de protección, como por ejemplo,
guantes de caucho, casco, anteojos de seguridad,
protectores faciales, ropa de protección contra
chispazos, etc., de conformidad con las prácticas
de seguridad establecidas.
c. Estar capacitado en primeros auxilios.
Peligro: A los fines de este manual y las etiquetas del
producto, Peligro indica una situación de peligro
inminente que, si no se evita, puede ocasionar la
muerte o una lesión grave.
Advertencia: A los fines de este manual y las
etiquetas del producto, Advertencia indica una
situación de peligro potencial que, si no se evita,
puede ocasionar una lesión leve o moderada.
-2-
Precaución: A los fines de este manual y las
etiquetas del producto, Precaución indica una
situación de peligro potencial que, si no se evita,
puede ocasionar una lesión leve o moderada.
También se usa para advertir contra
prácticas inseguras.
Los motores se deben instalar y conectar a tierra de
acuerdo con los códigos locales y nacionales.
No haga funcionar este equipo con valores que
superen los especificados en la placa de identificación
o que contradigan las instrucciones incluidas en este
manual. El equipo (o un prototipo) ha sido
comprobado en fábrica y se ha determinado que
cumple satisfactoriamente con la condición para la
cual se ha vendido. Hacer funcionar el equipo en
condiciones que superen las especificadas puede
causar cargas y tensiones que superen las
limitaciones de diseño. Hacer caso omiso de esta
advertencia puede ocasionar daños a los equipos y
posibles lesiones físicas.
PELIGRO
Tensión peligrosa.
Puede causar la muerte, lesiones
graves, electrocución o daños a
los bienes.
Desconecte todas las fuentes de
energía antes de trabajar con
este equipo.
NOTA
Las máquinas de inducción de jaula de ardilla pueden ser
accionadas por distintos tipos de máquinas motrices.
Éstas actuarán como generadores de inducción. El
presente manual de instrucciones se aplica tanto a
motores como a generadores de inducción. No obstante,
por cuestiones de claridad, la máquina se mencionará
como "motor".
Introducción
PELIGRO
Tensión peligrosa.
Puede causar la muerte, lesiones
graves, electrocución o daños a los
bienes.
Desconecte todas las fuentes de
energía antes de trabajar con este
equipo.
Estas instrucciones incluyen recomendaciones
generales para la instalación, el funcionamiento y el
mantenimiento de los motores de inducción
fabricados en la planta de Norwood. Si se necesita
más información, comuníquese con Siemens Energy
& Automation.
Garantía
Consulte la cobertura de la garantía en su contrato de
venta. Es posible que se requiera la documentación
de mantenimiento en almacenamiento, alineación y
reengrase para ciertos aspectos de la garantía.
Recepción
Los motores se envían en condiciones de primera.
Han sido inspeccionados y cuentan con patines para
prevenir daños ocasionados por la manipulación
usual durante el envío.
Inspeccione los motores nuevos para comprobar
que cuenten con la facturación de envío. Realice
la inspección antes de retirar el motor del automóvil o
camión. Si hay daños evidentes o si hay una
indicación obvia de maltrato, presente
una reclamación ante la compañía de transporte
de inmediato y notifique al representante de ventas
de Siemens.
Retire únicamente la factura de envío. No quite las
etiquetas relativas a las instrucciones de lubricación,
funcionamiento y almacenamiento. Lea y siga todas
las instrucciones para asegurarse de que no se
produzcan daños en los cojinetes del motor (debido a
condensación) ni en los devanados del motor durante
el almacenamiento.
Sea cuidadoso al manipular el producto. Dejar caer el
motor o imponer cargas de choque de algún otro
modo puede causar daños inadvertidos e
indetectables en los cojinetes. Estos daños, como por
ejemplo, falso desgaste de los anillos de rodadura de
los cojinetes antifricción, pueden ocasionar fallas
prematuras de los cojinetes.
Si corresponde, active los calentadores de espacio
para ayudar a prevenir la condensación dentro de la
carcasa del motor.
Los motores que vienen con cojinetes de manguito o
cojinetes antifricción lubricados con aceite se envían
SIN ACEITE en el depósito de los cojinetes. Estas
-3-
superficies de los cojinetes y de las chumaceras
están protegidas durante el envío por una película
temporal de aceite que inhibe la formación de óxido o,
cuando un motor se entrega específicamente con
"indicaciones para lubricación por pulverización de
aceite" (sistema de suministro de aceite provisto por
el usuario), el motor se envía de fábrica con grasa en
los cojinetes.
Al recibir un motor con cojinetes de manguito:
1. Retire los materiales que bloquean el eje.
2. Inspeccione visualmente el estado de los
cojinetes a través de la abertura de la mirilla y del
drenaje de los cojinetes.
3. Controle si hay acumulación de humedad. Retire
cualquier rastro de oxidación antes de poner el
motor en funcionamiento.
4. Llene los depósitos de los cojinetes hasta el nivel
normal con aceite lubricante industrial de alto
grado. Consulte la Sección de mantenimiento de
este manual de instrucciones para determinar el
nivel de aceite correcto.
5. Rote el eje un mínimo de 10 vueltas completas a
mano para distribuir el aceite sobre las piezas de
los cojinetes. Asegúrese de que los anillos de
aceite de cada cojinete roten libremente.
Al recibir un motor con cojinetes antifricción
lubricados con grasa:
Los motores que tienen cojinetes antifricción
lubricados con grasa se envían con los cojinetes
lubricados y listos para utilizar.
Si el tiempo transcurrido desde el momento del envío
hasta el momento en que la unidad se debe arrancar
supera los tres (3) meses, vuelva a engrasar los
cojinetes de acuerdo con la placa de lubricación
colocada en el motor.
Al recibir un motor con cojinetes antifricción
lubricados por pulverización de aceite:
1. Asegúrese de que el motor no quede almacenado
al aire libre.
2. Asegúrese de que la lubricación por pulverización
de aceite esté conectada y en funcionamiento
antes de arrancar el motor.
3. La lubricación por pulverización de aceite debe
estar en funcionamiento dentro de las
dos semanas posteriores a la recepción de
fábrica del motor.
Al recibir un motor con "indicaciones para
lubricación por pulverización de aceite":
1. Deje la grasa en los cojinetes si el motor quedará
almacenado.
2. Antes de hacer funcionar el motor con
la lubricación por pulverización de aceite,
desarme el motor y limpie la grasa de
los cojinetes, las tapas terminales y las cavidades
de los alojamientos de los cojinetes con un
solvente adecuado.
Introducción

ADVERTENCIA
Equipo pesado.
La manipulación indebida puede causar la muerte,
lesiones graves o daños a los bienes.
Controle los dispositivos de elevación antes de levantar
el equipo. Use cuerdas, cadenas y separadores
adecuados.
Observe todas las placas de advertencia del motor y
siga las instrucciones de cada placa.
Manipulación
Almacenamiento temporal
Si el equipo no se instalará y utilizará inmediatamente
después de recibido, almacénelo en un lugar limpio,
seco y bien ventilado, donde no existan vibraciones ni
variaciones de temperatura grandes o bruscas. Todos
los meses, rote el eje a mano un mínimo de 10 vueltas
completas para cubrir los cojinetes con lubricante, lo
que retardará la oxidación o la corrosión y evitará el
posible falso desgaste. Si se proporcionan tapones de
drenaje en los motores cerrados, se deben retirar
periódicamente para drenar toda acumulación de agua
del motor. Se considera que una unidad está en
almacenamiento cuando:

Los dispositivos de elevación se proporcionan 1. Se ha entregado al lugar de trabajo y todavía no

únicamente para la manipulación. Se debe contar con se ha instalado.
un aparejador experimentado para instalar 2. Se ha instalado, pero su funcionamiento está
los motores. demorado más de 30 días a la espera de la
finalización de la construcción de la planta.
Para evitar daños, se recomienda utilizar barras 3. Existen períodos prolongados (30 días) entre
separadoras en izamientos que no sean de un solo ciclos de funcionamiento.
punto. Los dispositivos de elevación se proporcionan 4. La planta (o el departamento) permanece cerrada
para facilitar la manipulación con argollas y cables. durante 30 días.
Evite golpear o chocar el eje, el acoplamiento o las
piezas de los cojinetes, ya que los golpes pueden
dañar los cojinetes. NOTA
TENGA EN CUENTA EL PESO ANTES DE Los requisitos de almacenamiento varían dependiendo de
LEVANTAR EL EQUIPO. El peso está indicado en el la duración del almacenamiento y del clima. Para
períodos de almacenamiento de tres meses o más, o
dibujo esquemático. Aplique tensión en los cables en para variaciones climáticas, consulte las
forma gradual. No sacuda la unidad ni intente moverla Recomendaciones de Almacenamiento ANIM-03114 de
de golpe. Siemens. El mantenimiento en almacenamiento se debe
documentar con fines informativos para la garantía.
Pesos del motor en kg (libras)
Tamaño del Mínimo Máximo
bastidor
Designaciones de tipo
500 1497 (3300) 2404 (5300) La designación de tipo de motor consiste en una o
580 2087 (4600) 3039 (6700) más letras básicas que indican el tipo de carcasa del
708 3719 (8200) 4491 (9900) motor. A estas letras pueden agregarse otras letras
788 5216 (11500) 6214 (13700)
880 7167 (15800) 8936 (19700)
que denotan las modificaciones.

Tipo de motor Carcasa del motor

Totalmente cerrada, enfriada
CZ, NCZ o CGZ
por ventilador
A prueba de explosiones o
CGZZ
A prueba de ignición de polvo

-4-
Instalación
Dimensiones del motor
Para motores fabricados con los tamaños de bastidor
indicados en este manual, las dimensiones
correspondientes a las letras están definidas de
acuerdo con las normas NEMA establecidas. Las
dimensiones establecidas para estos bastidores
pueden encontrarse en las hojas del catálogo o en los
planos certificados.
PRECAUCIÓN
Lugar húmedo.
Puede ocasionar daños a los bienes si el equipo se
utiliza en forma intermitente.
Use calentadores de espacio para prevenir la humedad.
Engrase los encastres maquinados cuando se vuelve a
armar la unidad para prevenir la corrosión.
Ubicación
Ubique el motor y la unidad accionada en un lugar
que:
1. Esté limpio, seco y bien ventilado, que cuente con
un drenaje adecuado y que proporcione
accesibilidad para su inspección, lubricación y
mantenimiento.
2. Permita que haya suficiente espacio para retirar el
motor sin desplazar la unidad accionada.
3. Deje que el motor entregue la energía necesaria
en forma segura. El aumento de temperature
de un motor estándar se basa en el
funcionamiento a una altura que no supere los
1005.8 m (3.300 pies) sobre el nivel del mar.
4. Evite la condensación de humedad en los
cojinetes y en los devanados. Los motores no se
deben almacenar ni utilizar en áreas que están
sujetas a rápidos cambios de temperatura, a
menos que los motores se activen o estén
protegidos con calentadores de espacio.
Fundación
El concreto (reforzado según sea necesario) constituye
la mejor fundación, especialmente para grandes
motores y unidades accionadas. Con la masa
suficiente, proporciona un soporte rígido que minimiza
la deflexión y la vibración. Puede ubicarse en el suelo,
en acero estructural o en pisos de construcción
siempre que el peso total (motor, unidad
accionada, fundación) no supere la carga portante
permitida del soporte.
Las cargas portantes permitidas del acero estructural
y de los pisos pueden obtenerse consultando
manuales de ingeniería. Los códigos de construcción
de las comunidades locales proporcionan las
cargas portantes permitidas recomendadas para los
distintos tipos de suelo. Como cálculo aproximado, la
-5-
fundación debe tener alrededor de 2 1/2 veces el peso
total de la unidad.
Antes del vaciado, ubique los tornillos de anclaje
utilizando un encofrado como plantilla y proporcione
una anclaje seguro (no rígido). Se recomienda utilizar
una base de acero labrado entre las patas del motor y
la fundación. Consulte los planos certificados del
motor, la base y la unidad accionada para ver la
ubicación exacta de los tornillos de anclaje. Tenga en
cuenta la lechada de la base al vaciar el concreto.
Moldee los apoyos de la base de manera que queden
nivelados y en el mismo plano.
Montaje
Monte la base del motor (si la utiliza) sobre la
fundación u otro soporte. Coloque cuñas según sea
necesario para nivelar. Use un nivel láser
o un nivel de burbuja (controle las dos direcciones a
90o) a fin de asegurarse de que las patas del motor
estén en un solo plano (la base no esté arqueada)
cuando se ajusten los tornillos de la base. Fije el motor
en la base, coloque las tuercas y ajústelas.
NO LAS AJUSTE HASTA NO HABER REALIZADO
LA ALINEACIÓN.
NOTA
La experiencia ha demostrado que cualquier conjunto de
motor y unidades accionadas montado en una base,
alineado temporalmente en fábrica, puede torcerse
durante el envío. Por consiguiente, se debe controlar la
alineación después del montaje. La realineación se debe
documentar con fines informativos para la garantía.
Acoplamiento de motores con
cojinetes de manguito
Los cojinetes de manguito no toleran un empuje axial
generado externamente. Los cojinetes antifricción
normalmente están diseñados para tolerar un empuje
mínimo. A medida que el motor y el equipo accionado
se calientan, pueden dilatarse de modo tal que se
acerquen y, si el acoplamiento no es correcto, puede
generarse una fuerza axial. Por consiguiente, la
selección del acoplamiento es sumamente importante.
Si se instalan correctamente, se considera que los
siguientes tipos de acoplamientos no desarrollan
empuje axial y pueden utilizarse:
1. Tipo disco de metal laminado
2. Tipo oblea de caucho (diseñado para velocidad)
Los modelos con holgura axial limitada de los tipos
que se enumeran a continuación pueden obtenerse a
través de distintos fabricantes de acoplamientos y
pueden utilizarse si se selecciona la holgura axial
correcta (Consulte “Holgura axial. Cojinetes de
manguito” en la sección Reemplazo de los cojinetes)
3. Tipo pasador y casquillo
4. Tipo engranaje
Instalación

Cableado externo Dirección de los ventiladores del motor

Velocidad del motor
Bastidor 3600 – 3000 1800 – 1500 1200 RPM y
PELIGRO RPM RPM menos
Tensión peligrosa.
Puede causar la muerte, lesiones 500
graves, electrocución o daños a
los bienes. 580 NO DIRECCIONAL
Desconecte todas las fuentes de
energía antes de trabajar con 708
este equipo.
788 DIRECCIONAL
NOTA
880
Antes de poner en funcionamiento el motor, consulte
Arranque inicial.
Los dispositivos de control de arranque y sobrecarga
deben coincidir con la capacidad nominal del motor.
NOTA
Por cuestiones de seguridad o comodidad, es posible Será necesario volver a balancear el rotor si se cambian
que deban instalarse a cierta distancia del motor. Siga los ventiladores.
las instrucciones del fabricante del dispositivo de
control para realizar las instalaciones y conexiones
correctas. Cumpla con lo siguiente: Alineación
1. Conecte el suministro de energía eléctrica según Es fundamental que exista una alineación precisa del
las disposiciones del Código Eléctrico Nacional y eje entre el motor y el equipo accionado. Una
demás reglamentaciones locales. La tensión de la
alineación incorrecta puede provocar vibraciones,
línea y la capacidad del cable deben coincidir con
la capacidad nominal del motor indicada en la sobrecarga en los cojinetes y tensiones excesivas en
placa de identificación. el eje. Los acoplamientos flexibles no compensarán
2. Con el equipo accionado desconectado, una desalineación excesiva.
active momentáneamente el motor para controlar
la rotación.
3. Si el motor es de tipo trifásico, invierta el sentido NOTA
de rotación (si es necesario) intercambiando dos
de los tres conductores de alimentación. Una regla básica es que no haya más de cinco cuñas en
un conjunto de cuñas debajo de una pata del motor. Los
Cambio de la dirección de rotación conjuntos de cuñas formados por muchas cuñas
Busque las placas de rotación generalmente montadas delgadas, que proporcionan gran espesor total,
en el alojamiento del ventilador del motor. provocarán que la pata no esté firme, que haya vibración
excesiva o que el bastidor se tuerza (la pata del motor
sale del plano).
PRECAUCIÓN
Calentamiento excesivo. Alineación paralela
El motor puede sobrecalentarse si los ventiladores de Después de posicionar la unidad para obtener una
refrigeración del motor funcionan en la dirección holgura axial correcta, separe las mitades del
equivocada. acoplamiento y monte un indicador de cuadrante
Ponga en funcionamiento el motor en la dirección firmemente sobre una mitad del acoplamiento, con el
indicada en el motor o cambie los ventiladores. botón sobre la superficie cilíndrica de la otra mitad.
Si cambia la dirección de rotación en motores Rote los ejes juntos, y controle la lectura del indicador
equipados con ventiladores externos montados en el en la posición superior, inferior y lateral. Alinee el eje
eje, debe tener en cuenta la dirección de los de modo tal que la diferencia entre las lecturas de la
ventiladores externos. Consulte la siguiente tabla de posición superior e inferior y la de la lateral sea como
Dirección de los Ventiladores del Motor para identificar máximo de 0,0508 mm (0,002 pulgadas) para un
qué motores tienen ventiladores direccionales acoplamiento flexible.
externos. Todos los ventiladores direccionales deben
reemplazarse por un ventilador diseñado para la
dirección de rotación deseada.

-6-
Instalación
Alineación angular
Mantenga cada eje con la máxima holgura axial. Rote
ambos ejes juntos, y mida entre los puntos de
coincidencia por el diámetro exterior de las superficies
de acoplamiento para la parte superior, inferior y
ambos lados. Use dos indicadores dado que puede
producirse movimiento axial del eje. Lea la diferencia
de variación entre ambos.
Alinee los ejes de modo tal que la variación total de los
indicadores no supere 0,0508 mm (0,002 pulgadas).
(Vea la figura 1).
NOTA
Si los niveles de vibración aumentan de frío a caliente,
se debe controlar la alineación en caliente para verificar
que el motor y el equipo accionado estén alineados
correctamente a la temperatura de funcionamiento.
Realice ajustes si es necesario.
Desalineación paralela
Desalineación angular
Figura 1. Los diagramas muestran la desalineación
paralela y angular
Plano de las patas
El plano de las patas será correcto cuando se hayan
instalado cuñas adecuadas para asegurar que exista
una presión equivalente sobre cada pata o esquina del
motor cuando los tornillos de montaje están flojos.
Para determinar el plano correcto de las patas:
1. Monte el indicador de cuadrante en el eje que
controlará, de modo tal que el contacto se apoye
contra el eje adyacente o un soporte de la
fundación o base.
2. Con los tornillos de montaje ajustados y el
indicador en cero, afloje un tornillo del extremo de
la extensión del eje de la unidad y controle que el
indicador registre un cambio de 0,0254 mm
(0,001 pulgadas), como máximo.
-7-
3. Si no se indica ningún cambio, reajuste el tornillo y
repita el procedimiento con cada uno de los tres
tornillos de montaje restantes.
4. Si se indica un cambio, agregue cuñas debajo
de la pata del motor y reajuste hasta que
el movimiento del indicador se reduzca
o desaparezca.
NOTA
1. El plano de las patas es importante para cada unidad
del equipo rotativo. Controle el equipo accionado si
es necesario.
2. La rigidez de la base o fundación también puede
afectar la vibración; controle si hay resonancia en la
estructura de soporte.
3. Vuelva a controlar la alineación después de realizar
cualquier cambio en las cuñas y documente las
lecturas de la alineación con fines informativos para
la garantía.
Correas trapezoidales
Consulte las recomendaciones del fabricante de las
correas para la obtener máxima velocidad de
roldanas y correas, diámetros primitivos mínimos,
cantidad máxima de correas permitida y ancho
máximo de las roldanas.
Cuando el motor tenga transmisión por correas
trapezoidales, consulte la descripción del motor para
conocer los límites de tracción de la correa, de
distancia entre la roldana y el motor, y de diámetro de
la roldana establecidos por el fabricante del motor.
Use únicamente juegos de correas compatibles. Las
ranuras en V deben estar alineadas; y las roldanas
deben estar paralelas y alineadas en sentido axial.
Las correas deben entrar y salir de las roldanas sin
que los lados se doblen. Para una mayor vida útil
de los cojinetes, la tensión de las correas es
importante; consulte al fabricante de correas para
conocer la tensión adecuada para la transmisión.
Proteja las correas de la grasa y el aceite. NUNCA use
pasta para correas.
Alineación en caliente
Es posible que la altura del eje del motor cambie en
relación con el equipo accionado, y esto se debe
compensar durante el procedimiento de alineación. El
calor del equipo accionado también puede provocar
desalineación horizontal.
ADVERTENCIA
Piezas giratorias.
Pueden causar lesiones graves.
Desconecte y bloquee las fuentes de energía antes de
trabajar en el equipo.
Si el funcionamiento del motor es anormal (alta
temperatura, vibraciones extremas, etc.) consulte a la
fábrica para recibir instrucciones especiales o
información adicional.
Instalación
Controle la alineación vertical (paralelismo) de la
transmisión acoplada de la siguiente forma:
1. Opere la unidad hasta que alcance una temperatura
normal (pueden requerirse varias horas).
2. Apague el motor y bloquee el interruptor.
3. Monte el indicador de cuadrante como se indica en
la Figura 2.
4. Rote el eje, observando las lecturas a 0°, 90°, 180°
y 270° (ambos lados, parte superior y parte
inferior). Si la lectura total del indicador se
encuentra dentro del límite de 0,0508 mm
(0,002 pulgadas) o dentro de otro límite
especificado por la fábrica, la unidad es apta para
funcionamiento.
5. Si no se encuentra dentro de los límites, agregue o retire
cuñas según se requiera para elevar o bajar el motor.
6. Si se cambian las cuñas para que funcione a alta
temperatura, repita el procedimiento de alineación
en la medida que sea necesario para asegurar una
alineación correcta. Documente las lecturas con
fines informativos para la garantía.
Impulsor Accion
Brida
Figura 2. Control de alineación vertical
Vibración
Los límites estándar de vibración no filtrada del
alojamiento medidos sin carga, sin acoplamiento y con
montaje rígido, de acuerdo con los requisitos de
MG1-7.8 de NEMA, son los siguientes:
Velocidad Velocidad, pico mm/seg.
(pico pulgadas/seg.)
1200 – 3600 RPM 3,048 (0,120)
1000 RPM 2,667 (0,105)
900 RPM 2,4384 (0,096)
750 RPM 2,0066 (0,079)
720 RPM 1,905 (0,075)
600 RPM 1,6002 (0,063)
Una vez que la alineación esté completa y los tornillos
de montaje de las patas estén ajustados, ponga el
motor en funcionamiento sin carga (o con la mínima
carga posible). Controle la vibración. Si hay vibración
excesiva y la alineación es aceptable, controle el plano
de las patas aflojando un tornillo de montaje del
extremo de la transmisión por vez, según se detalla a
continuación. Esto se debe documentar con fines
informativos para la garantía. Cuando está sobre
montaje elástico, los niveles permitidos son un 25 %
más altos.
-8-
La rigidez de la base o fundación también puede
afectar la vibración; controle si hay resonancia en la
estructura de soporte.
Vuelva a controlar la alineación después de realizar
cualquier cambio en las cuñas y documente las lecturas
de la alineación con fines informativos para la garantía.
Finalización de la instalación mecánica
Después de controlar la holgura axial del rotor y
establecer una alineación exacta, se recomienda
perforar y escariar la placa soporte y las patas del
motor juntas para colocar pasadores guía. (Consulte
Ensamble con pasadores guía).
Vuelva a controlar la alineación paralela y angular antes
de sujetar el acoplamiento con los tornillos. El eje del
motor debe estar nivelado dentro de un límite de
0,762 mm (0,03 pulgadas) después de la alineación.
Ensamble con pasadores guía
Ensamblar el motor (y la unidad accionada) con
pasadores guía:
1. Limita el movimiento.
2. Facilita la realineación si se retira el motor de la base.
3. Contiene temporalmente al motor, en caso de que
se aflojen los tornillos de montaje.
Colocación de pasadores guía
Se recomienda realizar el siguiente procedimiento:
a. Controle la alineación después de que la unidad
haya estado en funcionamiento durante
aproximadamente una semana. Realice las
correcciones necesarias.
b. Usando los agujeros preperforados para los
pasadores en las patas del motor como guías,
perfore la base de montaje.
c. Escarie agujeros en las patas y la base para
obtener el diámetro correcto para los pasadores
guía ahusados. Limpie las virutas.
d. Inserte los pasadores guía.
Lubricación a presión
Si se usa lubricación a presión, lave bien las líneas de
lubricación para asegurarse de que estén limpias
antes de conectarlas a los alojamientos de cojinetes.
Asegúrese de que las cavidades de los cojinetes
tengan el nivel de aceite correcto antes de arrancar el
motor. Consulte el dibujo esquemático del motor para
determinar el nivel de aceite correcto. Asegúrese de
que el sistema de suministro proporcione la presión y
el flujo de aceite correctos. Verifique que el flujo del
drenaje de aceite se adecue a los requisitos de fábrica.
No se deben modificar la orientación ni el tamaño de
las tuberías de drenaje de aceite provistas con el
motor. Las tuberías de drenaje de aceite deben ser del
mismo tamaño o más grandes que las tuberías del
motor que van al cárter de aceite. Las tuberías deben
estar inclinadas hacia abajo. La acumulación de
presión en la línea de drenaje entre el cárter de aceite
y el alojamiento de cojinete del motor puede causar
fugas de aceite. Documente las lecturas con fines
informativos para la garantía.
Instalación

Parámetros típicos de control del motor

Parámetros de
Disparo
Alarma disparo del
(apagado)
temporizador(1)
Temperatura del devanado
• Aislamiento clase B 130 °C 155 °C
• Aislamiento clase F 155 °C 170 °C

Temperatura de los cojinetes del motor

(Termopar o RTD)
• Cojinete de manguito 90 °C 95 °C
• Cojinete antifricción 100 °C 105 °C

4 amperios (2) 8 amperios (2) 0,2 seg. (2)

Falla a tierra Circuito Circuito
primario primario
Sobrecorriente instantánea
• Con retardo de ½ ciclo 1,8 veces los amperios del
rotor bloqueado (2)
• Sin retardo 2,4 veces los amperios del
rotor bloqueado (2)

Tensión máxima 110 % de la tensión nominal 10 seg.

Tensión mínima (la tensión mínima también
se aplica al arranque, a menos que se 90 % de la tensión nominal 10 seg.
especifique lo contrario)
Desviación de frecuencia máxima ±5 % 10 seg.
Tensión más desviación de frecuencia máxima ±10 % 10 seg.
Desequilibrio de tensión máximo (3) 1% 15 seg.
Desequilibrio de corriente máximo (3) 8% 15 seg.

Límites de vibración sugeridos

RPM 3600 1800 1200 900 y menos
Eje (milésimas, pico 3,3 3,7 4,3 5,0
a pico)
Alojamiento mm/seg. 6,35 (0,25) 6,35 (0,25) 6,35 (0,25) 6,35 (0,25)
(pulg./seg.)
(1)
Tiempo máximo en condiciones máximas antes de que funcione el dispositivo de control.
(2)
Se debe aumentar según sea necesario para evitar disparos molestos.
(3)
Es la desviación máxima del promedio de las tres fases.

-9-
Funcionamiento
Arranque inicial
PRECAUCIÓN
No exceda la cantidad de arranques en caliente y en
frío por hora especificados por Siemens.
Puede causar sobrecalentamiento.
Espere un tiempo entre los arranques para dejar que los
devanados del estator y la jaula del rotor se enfríen.
NOTA
Si el motor ha estado fuera de servicio o almacenado
durante más de 30 días, consulte las Recomendaciones
de Almacenamiento ANIM-03114 de Siemens,
Preparación para poner en servicio.
Una vez completada la instalación, pero antes de
poner el motor en funcionamiento regular, realice un
arranque inicial como se indica a continuación:
1. Controle que las conexiones del motor, el
arranque y el dispositivo de control concuerden
con los diagramas de cableado.
2. Controle que la tensión, la fase y la frecuencia del
circuito de línea (suministro de energía)
concuerden con la placa de identificación del
motor.
3. Controle el registro de servicio del motor y las
etiquetas que acompañan al motor. Asegúrese de
que los cojinetes estén correctamente lubricados y
las cubetas de aceite estén llenas. Consulte el
dibujo esquemático del motor para determinar el
nivel de aceite correcto.
4. De ser posible, retire la carga externa (desconecte
la transmisión) y gire el eje a mano para
asegurarse de que rote libremente. Si esto ya se
ha realizado durante el procedimiento de
instalación, y las condiciones no han cambiado, es
posible que no sea necesario realizar este control.
5. Si la transmisión está desconectada, ponga el
motor en funcionamiento sin carga durante el
tiempo suficiente para asegurarse de que no
exista ninguna condición inusual. Escuche y
controle si hay ruido, vibración, chasquidos o
golpeteos excesivos, y verifique que los anillos de
aceite giren, si están instalados. Si alguno de
estos factores está presente, detenga el motor
inmediatamente. Investigue la causa y corrija el
problema antes de poner el motor en
funcionamiento.
6. Si no se puede desconectar la transmisión,
interrumpa el ciclo de arranque después de que el
motor haya acelerado hasta una baja la velocidad.
Observe atentamente para detectar condiciones
inusuales mientras el motor se detiene por inercia.
Repita este procedimiento varias veces si es
- 10 -
necesario. Consulte la placa de identificación del
Régimen de Arranque del motor (si está incluida) o
la Hoja de Datos del Motor para obtener la
cantidad de arranques recomendada y los tiempos
de enfriamiento entre arranques.
7. Cuando todos los controles sean satisfactorios,
haga funcionar la unidad con la menor carga
posible y observe si detecta alguna condición
inusual. Aumente la carga lentamente al máximo,
controlando que la unidad funcione
satisfactoriamente.
Sistemas de circulación de aceite
Para motores con sistemas de circulación de aceite,
proceda según se detalla, antes de la puesta
en marcha.
1. Llene los depósitos del motor al nivel normal
(consulte el dibujo esquemático del motor).
2. Siga las instrucciones del proveedor del sistema
de circulación de aceite.
3. Ponga en funcionamiento el sistema de circulación
de aceite antes de arrancar el motor.
Funcionamiento normal
Arranque el motor de acuerdo con las instrucciones
estándar para el equipo de arranque usado. En
ocasiones, se puede reducir la carga al mínimo,
particularmente para arranques con tensión reducida o
cargas conectadas de alta inercia.
Variación de tensión / frecuencia
Los motores funcionarán satisfactoriamente en las
siguientes condiciones de variación de tensión y
frecuencia, pero no necesariamente de acuerdo con
las normas establecidas para el funcionamiento en
condiciones nominales:
1. Si la variación de tensión no supera el 10 % por
encima ni por debajo de la tensión nominal, con
todas las fases equilibradas. El desequilibrio de
tensión no debe superar el 1 %.
2. Si la variación de frecuencia no supera el 5 % por
encima ni por debajo de la frecuencia nominal.
3. Si la suma de las variaciones de tensión y
frecuencia no supera el 10 % por encima ni por
debajo de los valores nominales, siempre que la
variación de frecuencia no supere el 5 %.
Funcionamiento
Resolución de problemas
Entre las inspecciones de mantenimiento
regular, esté atento para detectar signos de
PELIGRO
problemas en el motor. En la siguiente tabla se Tensión peligrosa.
mencionan los síntomas más comunes. Corrija Puede causar la muerte, lesiones
cualquier problema inmediatamente. EVITE graves, electrocución o daños a
REPARACIONES COSTOSAS Y TENER QUE los bienes.
PONER LA UNIDAD FUERA DE SERVICIO. Desconecte todas las fuentes de energía
antes de trabajar con este equipo.

PROBLEMA POSIBLES CAUSAS CORRECCIÓN

El motor no arranca. Generalmente, problema de la línea. Controle la fuente de alimentación. ¡NO realice
Funcionamiento con una sola fase en el los controles con el motor activado! Verifique
arrancador. sobrecargas, controles y fusibles. Controle la
tensión y compárela con la capacidad nominal
de la placa de identificación.
Baja tensión. Controle la tensión en los terminales del motor.
Compárela con la placa de identificación.
Carga excesiva. Desconecte el motor de la carga para
comprobar si arranca sin carga. Reduzca la
carga o reemplace el motor por una unidad de
mayor capacidad.
Zumbido excesivo. Alta tensión. Controle la tensión de entrada. Controle que las
conexiones sean correctas.
Rotor desbalanceado. Balancee el rotor.
Desgaste excesivo de los cojinetes de Reemplace los cojinetes. Realice un control
manguito. para determinar la causa del desgaste y
reemplace según sea necesario. Controle la
alineación.
Chasquidos regulares. Materia extraña en el entrehierro. Quite la materia extraña.
Golpes rápidos. Cojinete antifricción defectuoso o suciedad en Reemplace el cojinete, limpie las cavidades de
el lubricante. engrase y renueve el lubricante.
Vibración. Desalineación en el acoplamiento o las patas. Realinee el motor y el equipo accionado.

Acumulación de suciedad en el ventilador. Limpie el motor.

Vibración en la máquina accionada. Ponga en funcionamiento el motor
desconectado de la carga accionada y controle
la vibración. Elimine la fuente del equipo
accionado.
Frecuencia natural del sistema (resonancia). Modifique la rigidez de la estructura de la base.
Vibración después de Rotor no balanceado; pesas de balanceo de Balancee el rotor.
reparar el motor. los ventiladores desplazadas en el rotor.
Sobrecalentamiento Sobrecarga. Mida la carga y compárela con la capacidad
del motor. (Controle nominal de la placa de identificación. Controle
con el termopar o a si hay fricción excesiva en el motor o la
través del método de transmisión completa. Reduzca la carga o
resistencia, no se fíe reemplace el motor por una unidad de mayor
solamente del tacto). capacidad.
Funcionamiento con una sola fase. Controle la corriente en todas las fases.

Suciedad en el motor. Controle el flujo de aire.

Controle los filtros, si están instalados.
Limpie el motor.

Tensión desequilibrada. Controle la tensión en todas las fases.

Fricción del rotor sobre el estator. Controle el entrehierro. Repare el motor según
sea necesario.

- 11 -
Funcionamiento

Resolución de problemas
PELIGRO
Tensión peligrosa.
Puede causar la muerte, lesiones
graves, electrocución o daños a los
bienes.
Desconecte todas las fuentes de energía
antes de trabajar con este equipo.

PROBLEMA POSIBLES CAUSAS CORRECCIÓN

Sobrecalentamiento del Devanados del estator abiertos. Desconecte el motor de la carga. Controle los
motor (continuación…) amperios en ralentí para verificar el equilibrio en las
tres fases. Controle la resistencia del estator en las
tres fases para verificar el equilibrio.
Recirculación de aire. Controle que no haya obstrucciones en la entrada y
la salida de aire. Controle la temperatura de la
entrada de aire.
Sobretensión/baja tensión. Controle la tensión y compárela con la placa de
capacidad nominal.
Conexión a tierra. Localice la falla con una lámpara de prueba o un
comprobador de aislamiento y repárela.
Conexiones eléctricas inadecuadas. Vuelva a controlar las conexiones eléctricas.
Tubos del intercambiador de calor Limpie los tubos, si están instalados.
bloqueados.
Tubos del intercambiador de calor flojos. Si están instalados, gire los tubos para expandir el
diámetro interno de los tubos usando la herramienta
de expansión adecuada.
Polvo fino debajo del Desalineación. Realinee el motor y el equipo accionado.
acoplamiento con Inspeccione el acoplamiento.
amortiguadores o
pasadores de caucho.

Sobrecalentamiento de Nivel de aceite demasiado alto o
los cojinetes. demasiado bajo (cojinete de manguito).
Desalineación.
Tensión excesiva en la transmisión por
correas.
Empuje final excesivo.
Demasiada grasa
(cojinetes de bolas o de rodillos).
Anillo de aceite pegajoso
(cojinete de manguito).
Fugas de aceite o uso Piezas no selladas correctamente.
excesivo de aceite.
Orificios de retorno de aceite obstruidos
en los sellos de aceite.
Fluctuación excesiva Alta presión o vacío en la cavidad
del nivel de aceite. del cojinete.
Corrija el nivel de aceite. Consulte la sección
Mantenimiento de este manual de instrucciones
para determinar el nivel de aceite correcto.
Realinee el motor y el equipo accionado.
Reduzca la tensión al punto adecuado.
Reduzca el empuje. Vuelva a controlar el montaje
y la alineación.
Disminuya el suministro al punto especificado
por el fabricante.
Limpie, repare o reemplace. Vuelva a controlar
el montaje.
Selle los tapones y las conexiones de los tubos.
Selle la línea de división del alojamiento de cojinete.
Selle la unión del sello de aceite.
Desmantele y limpie los sellos de aceite.
Mida la presión o el vacío con un manómetro
(Consulte “Presiones de la cavidad” en la
sección Cojinetes).
Controle si hay obstrucciones en los orificios
de ventilación.
Controle que haya uniformidad en el espacio del
sello de aceite.

- 12 -
Mantenimiento
Mantenimiento preventivo
Los motores están diseñados para proporcionar un
funcionamiento confiable durante muchos años con
cuidados mínimos. No se puede esperar un
funcionamiento sin problemas si se pospone o no se
realiza el mantenimiento correcto.
Realice el mantenimiento correcto del equipo. Siga
atentamente las instrucciones mencionadas en el
presente. Asegúrese de que el personal revise,
comprenda y siga estos procedimientos durante las
inspecciones de mantenimiento periódicas.
PELIGRO
Tensión peligrosa.
Puede causar la muerte, lesiones
graves, electrocución o daños a
los bienes.
Desconecte todas las fuentes
de energía antes de trabajar con
este equipo.
El mantenimiento debe ser realizado
únicamente por personal calificado.
PRECAUCIÓN
Suciedad, polvo u otras partículas voladoras.
Pueden causar lesiones oculares.
Use anteojos de seguridad y máscara contra polvo
cuando trabaje con aire comprimido.
PRECAUCIÓN
Piezas flojas o fuego.
Pueden causar fallas en el producto o daños graves
a los bienes.
- 13 -
Lista de verificación de mantenimiento
1. Verifique que el motor esté limpio, y que los
conductos de ventilación del estator y el rotor no
estén obstruidos.
2. Controle que la carga o el factor de servicio no
sean excesivos.
3. Verifique que el aumento de temperatura del
devanado no supere el valor nominal.
4. Verifique que la resistencia del aislamiento esté
por encima del mínimo recomendado.
5. Verifique la variación de tensión y frecuencia.
6. Controle el entrehierro.
7. Verifique que las temperaturas de los cojinetes
se encuentren dentro de los límites y que el
lubricante esté limpio y en el nivel correcto.
8. Verifique que no haya vibración o ruidos inusuales.
9. Controle la alineación.
10. Controle que haya una lubricación correcta.
Se debe establecer un cronograma definido de
inspecciones de mantenimiento preventivo para
evitar desperfectos, daños graves y tiempo de
inactividad excesivo. El cronograma dependerá de
las condiciones de funcionamiento y la experiencia
con equipos similares. Para asegurar un
mantenimiento adecuado, y que se consideren
ciertos aspectos de la garantía, es fundamental
mantener registros completos para cada motor, en
los que se incluya su descripción y capacidad
nominal, el cronograma de mantenimiento y las
reparaciones requeridas o realizadas.
Esta lista de verificación no representa un análisis
exhaustivo de los pasos de mantenimiento
necesarios para asegurar el funcionamiento seguro
de este equipo. Determinadas aplicaciones
específicas pueden requerir otros procedimientos. Si
desea obtener más información o si surge algún
problema en particular que no se trate con suficiente
detalle a los fines del comprador, debe consultar a
la Oficina de Ventas local de Siemens.
ADVERTENCIA
El mantenimiento incorrecto puede causar la
muerte, lesiones graves o daños a los bienes.
Use únicamente las piezas autorizadas de fábrica para
reparar el equipo.
El mantenimiento debe ser realizado únicamente por
personal calificado.
Mantenimiento
ADVERTENCIA
Explosión o fuego.
Puede causar la muerte, lesiones graves o daños a
los bienes.
No modifique los motores a prueba de explosiones o a
prueba de ignición de polvo. Estos motores están
construidos de manera tal que cumplan con el Manual
de Procedimientos de Servicio de Etiquetas de U.L.
Cuando vuelva a armar un motor que tenga una
Etiqueta de U.L., es imprescindible:
1. Mantener los encastres y las tolerancias
originales.
2. Ajustar bien todos los tapones y piezas de
ferretería.
3. Reemplazar cualquier pieza por duplicados
exactos del original.
4. Inspeccionar los motores rearmados en virtud del
Programa de Servicio de Seguimiento de U.L.; los
motores reparados deben volver a etiquetarse en
un taller de servicio incluido en la lista de U.L.
Violar cualquiera de las indicaciones anteriores
invalidará el significado de esta etiqueta, dado que el
motor ya no cumplirá con los requisitos de seguridad
para uso en lugares peligrosos.
Inspección
Se debe inspeccionar cada motor a intervalos
regulares. La frecuencia y la rigurosidad de
dichas inspecciones dependerá de las horas
de funcionamiento, la naturaleza del servicio
y el entorno.
Cojinete antifricción
Se puede acceder al interior del motor quitando el
alojamiento de cojinete.
1. Retire los tornillos que sujetan la tapa terminal
del cojinete interno al alojamiento.
2. Retire los tornillos que sujetan el alojamiento de
cojinete a la culata.
3. Retire el alojamiento de cojinete separándolo
del frente de la culata. Será necesario retirar
primero el alojamiento del ventilador y el
ventilador externo del extremo del motor no
conectado a la transmisión para poder acceder
al alojamiento de cojinete.
- 14 -
Cojinete de manguito - Bastidor 500
Se puede acceder al interior del motor retirando la
mitad superior del soporte del cojinete partido
horizontalmente.
1. Retire los tornillos separadores de la división
horizontal.
2. Retire los tornillos de la circunferencia exterior
de la mitad superior del soporte del cojinete
partido.
3. Tire del soporte superior para separarlo del
frente del bastidor y retírelo.
Se puede realizar todo este procedimiento
sin alterar la carcasa del cojinete ni la alineación
del acoplamiento del motor con la carga. La
cápsula del cojinete partido se mantiene unida
mediante tornillos.
Cojinete de manguito – Bastidores 580, 708,
788, 880
Se puede acceder al interior del motor retirando el
soporte del cojinete de la siguiente manera:
1. Primero retire la tapa del alojamiento de cojinete
y los revestimientos interiores de los cojinetes,
según se describe en Reemplazo de los
cojinetes.
2. Retire los sellos de laberinto flotantes o los
sellos de aceite, según lo que esté instalado.
3. Retire el alojamiento de cojinete del soporte del
cojinete.
4. Retire cuidadosamente del motor el soporte del
cojinete con el sello interno del motor.
Limpieza
Se debe mantener el exterior libre de aceite, polvo,
suciedad, agua y productos químicos. Es
particularmente importante mantener las aberturas de
la entrada y la salida de aire libres de obstrucciones.
NOTA
Si el equipo se opera en forma intermitente en
lugares muy húmedos, se lo debe proteger con
calentadores de espacio. Para retardar la corrosión,
engrase todos los encastres maquinados cuando
vuelva a armar la unidad después de un control
de mantenimiento.
Carga
La sobrecarga causa sobrecalentamiento y reduce
la vida útil del aislamiento. Someter un devanado a
un aumento de temperatura de 10 °C sobre el límite
máximo para su clase puede reducir a la mitad la
vida útil de su aislamiento.
No es correcto proporcionar baja carga al
motor, dado que disminuye el factor de potencia del
motor y su eficiencia, lo que deriva en un mayor
costo de energía.
Mantenimiento
Temperatura 4. Construcción de la fundación: La base, la
Los aparatos eléctricos que funcionan en lechada y los equipos asociados que soportan
condiciones normales se calientan bastante. Si bien las transmisiones deben estar en buenas
algunos puntos pueden parecer calientes al tacto, la condiciones. La vibración puede amplificarse
unidad puede estar dentro de los límites de debido a una construcción deficiente. La
calentamiento. Si controla la temperatura total vibración de la base que se encuentra justo
mediante la resistencia del devanado o un detector debajo de las patas del motor no debe superar el
interno (RTD), la temperatura total no debe superar 25 % de la vibración del motor.
los siguientes valores: 5. Historial: ¿Cuándo fue la primera vez que notó la
Cuando funciona a plena carga: vibración? ¿Hubo un cambio en la carga o la
utilización del equipo? ¿Ha cambiado la vibración
Clase de sistema de aislamiento del ambiente?
B F H El cambio de vibración durante un período es más
Temp. por Todos 120 °C 145 °C 165 °C importante que la vibración real.
resistencia los HP (248 °F) (293 °F) (329 °F)

1500 HP 130 °C 155 °C 180 °C Mantenimiento correctivo

o menos (266 °F) (311 °F) (356 °F)
Los dos factores que requieren mantenimiento
Más de correctivo son las fallas eléctricas y las fallas
Temp. por 1500 HP - 125 °C 150 °C 175 °C
detector Menos de (257 °F) (302 °F) (347 °F) mecánicas. Por lo general, el primer signo de una
interno 7000 V falla eléctrica es una baja resistencia del aislamiento.
Más de Las fallas mecánicas generalmente son precedidas
1500 HP 120 °C 145 °C 165 °C
- Más de (248 °F) (293 °F) (329 °F) por ruido o calentamiento excesivos de los cojinetes.
7000 V
Baja resistencia del aislamiento
Cuando funciona a una carga con un factor de
servicio de 1,15: Los factores que por lo general causan una lectura
baja del aislamiento son:
Clase de sistema de aislamiento 1. Devanados sucios (aceite, polvo, grasa, sal, etc.).
B F H 2. Humedad excesiva.
Temp. por Todos 130 °C 155 °C 175 °C 3. Aislamiento con daño mecánico.
resistencia los HP (266 °F) (311 °F) (347 °F)
4. Deterioro por calentamiento.
1500 HP 140 °C 165 °C 190 °C
o menos (284 °F) (329 °F) (373 °F) Los devanados sucios pueden limpiarse y los
devanados húmedos pueden secarse; sin embargo,
Más de
Temp. por 1500 HP - 135 °C 160 °C 185 °C los puntos 3 y 4 requieren reparaciones mayores en
detector Menos de (275 °F) (320 °F) (365 °F) un centro de servicio técnico certificado.
interno 7000 V
Más de
1500 HP 130 °C 155 °C 175 °C
- Más de
7000 V
(266 °F) (311 °F) (347 °F)
PRECAUCIÓN
Suciedad, polvo u otras partículas voladoras.
Estas temperaturas representan la temperatura Pueden causar lesiones oculares.
máxima para cada clase de aislamiento e incluyen
una temperatura ambiente de 40 °C. El Use anteojos de seguridad y máscara contra polvo
cuando trabaje con aire comprimido.
funcionamiento a temperaturas superiores a
éstas provocará la disminución de la vida útil
del aislamiento. Limpieza
Vibración Limpie el exterior del motor regularmente. Las
La mayoría de los problemas pueden detectarse condiciones reales que rodean el motor determinan
mediante inspecciones visuales. Controle lo la frecuencia de las operaciones de limpieza. Use los
siguiente: siguientes procedimientos según corresponda.
1. Piezas flojas o faltantes, como aspas del ventilador, 1. Quite el polvo, la suciedad, el aceite, el agua,
tuercas, tornillos, pernos, acoplamientos, etc. etc. de las superficies externas del motor.
2. Acumulación de suciedad en el ventilador o el rotor. 2. Retire la suciedad, el polvo u otros residuos de
3. Equipos asociados: Desconecte los equipos para las entradas y las salidas de aire de ventilación.
determinar dónde se genera la vibración. No opere el motor si los conductos de aire están
bloqueados o restringidos.

- 15 -
Mantenimiento
Limpieza del rotor
Retire el rotor. Insepcciónelo y límpielo.
Limpieza del estator
Las bobinas conformadas aisladas por VPI (vacuum
pressure impregnated, impregnado por presión de
vacío) MICLAD™ se pueden limpiar con un solvente
de secado rápido y paños sin pelusa, o pueden
limpiarse al vapor con vapor a baja presión. Luego,
se puede secar todo el estator en un horno a 93.3 °C
(200 °F) durante 12 horas y después a 110 °C
(230 °F) durante 12 horas.
Se debe medir la resistencia del aislamiento del
devanado del estator antes y después de la
operación de limpieza.
Los devanados se pueden limpiar con un solvente
compatible con el sistema de aislamiento y se
pueden secar en un horno. Se pueden utilizar agua y
detergente con un ciclo de secado en horno como
una alternativa a los sistemas de aislamiento por VPI
MICLAD™.
MICLAD™ es marca comercial de Siemens.
PELIGRO
Tensión peligrosa.
Puede causar la muerte, lesiones
graves, electrocución o daños a
los bienes.
Desconecte todas las fuentes de
energía antes de trabajar con
este equipo.
PRECAUCIÓN
Alta tensión.
Puede dañar semiconductores, transformadores
pequeños, reguladores de tensión y otros dispositivos.
Desconecte del circuito antes de comprobar la
resistencia del aislamiento.
Resistencia del aislamiento
Controle la resistencia del aislamiento en forma
periódica. Use un comprobador de resistencia del
aislamiento con manivela o de estado sólido y
pruébelo a 500 voltios como mínimo, pero sin
superar la tensión nominal del motor.
Para motores con sistemas de aislamiento más
nuevos como VPI MICLAD™, la resistencia del
aislamiento después de un minuto debe ser mayor
que 1000 megaohmios. (Son comunes los valores
superiores a 5000 megaohmios). Para motores más
antiguos, se puede utilizar el valor mínimo
recomendado en la Norma 43 del IEEE. El valor en
- 16 -
megaohmios, cuando se lo corrige a 40 °C, es igual a
la tensión nominal del motor en kilovoltios más 1. Por
ejemplo, para un motor con una tensión nominal de
2300 voltios, el valor límite sería:
2.3 + 1 = 3,3 (megaohmios).
Secado del aislamiento
Si la resistencia del aislamiento no es satisfactoria, y
se cree que la causa es humedad excesiva en los
devanados, seque los devanados aplicando el calor
de:
1. Un horno de aire caliente.
2. Calentadores eléctricos de banda.
3. Las corrientes de circulación que pasan por
las bobinas.
El calor debe aplicarse lentamente, de modo que
no se alcance la temperatura deseada en menos de
seis horas.
Temperatura de secado del aislamiento*
Clase “B” Clase “F” Clase “H”
200°F 245°F* 275°F*
94 °C 118 °C 135 °C
Las unidades aisladas *clase “F” y “H” deben secarse en
caliente al 70 % de la temperatura especificada (para evitar
que se genere vapor dentro de los devanados) durante
aproximadamente seis horas, antes de que la temperatura
alcance la temperatura de secado.
Se debe medir la resistencia del aislamiento antes de
aplicar calor, y posteriormente cada seis a ocho horas.
NOTA
La resistencia del aislamiento disminuirá a medida que
el motor se caliente; pero comenzará a aumentar a
medida que continúe el proceso de secado.
Se debe mantener una temperatura uniforme en
el motor para obtener lecturas de resistencia
constantes. Cuando las lecturas del megóhmetro
se mantienen constantes, significa que se completó
el proceso de secado y puede interrumpirse. Si
las lecturas siguen bajas, controle si existen
otras causas.
Secado en horno de aire caliente
1. Retire los alojamientos de cojinetes.
2. Retire el rotor.
Seque en el horno a las temperaturas especificadas
en la tabla de Temperatura de Secado del
Aislamiento, y siga los procedimientos descritos para
secar el aislamiento.
Mantenimiento
Secado en calentador eléctrico de banda
1. Retire los alojamientos de cojinetes.
2. Retire el rotor.
3. Oriente un ventilador hacia el estator para que
elimine la humedad.
4. Coloque indicadores de temperatura en el
devanado y aplique calor según se especifica en
la tabla de Temperatura de Secado del
Aislamiento y siga los procedimientos descritos
para secar el aislamiento.
5. No se recomienda utilizar los calentadores de
tipo radiante dado que algunas partes pueden
chamuscarse antes de que las partes más
alejadas alcancen la temperatura deseada.
Secado por corriente de circulación
1. Retire los alojamientos de cojinetes.
2. Centre el rotor en el núcleo del estator.
3. Introduzca tiras de fibra en la parte inferior del
entrehierro, de modo que el rotor no toque el
núcleo del estator, o retire el rotor.
4. Oriente un ventilador hacia la unidad para que
elimine el exceso de humedad.
5. Coloque indicadores de temperatura en los
devanados. No supere las temperaturas de
secado indicadas en la tabla de Temperatura de
Secado del Aislamiento.
6. Se puede utilizar una fuente de corriente externa
para hacer circular corriente directa por el
devanado de cualquier tipo de motor de corriente
alterna. Por lo general, se puede utilizar un grupo
motor-generador portátil de baja tensión, como el
que se utiliza para soldar.
Cuando se utiliza este método en el estator, las fases
del estator se pueden conectar en serie o en paralelo
para adecuarse al suministro de energía disponible si
los dos extremos de todas las fases son accesibles.
Si sólo se extraen tres conductores del motor, la
corriente puede hacerse circular entre un terminal y
los otros dos conectados juntos. En ese caso, se
debe controlar con frecuencia la temperatura de la
conexión de un solo conductor y es recomendable
cambiar los conductores de vez en cuando.
Generalmente, de 50 a 100 % de la corriente de
carga máxima generará la temperatura requerida. La
tensión de CC requerida para esta corriente será de
0,25 - 5,0 % de la tensión normal por fase, y la
potencia correspondiente será de 0,50 - 3,25 % de la
capacidad nominal.
- 17 -
Se puede usar corriente alterna en los estatores de
los motores de inducción de jaula de ardilla si se
extraen los rotores. Generalmente, la corriente
alterna no es tan fácil de controlar como el control de
tensión, y la CA requiere una fuente de tensión más
alta, aproximadamente entre 10 y 30 % de la tensión
nominal del devanado. Además, se debe tener
cuidado de que las diversas piezas adyacentes a los
devanados, como por ejemplo, los terminales, la
pieza de apoyo del núcleo, etc., no se sobrecalienten
debido a corrientes inducidas y a la falta de
ventilación normal.
PRECAUCIÓN
Altas temperaturas.
Pueden dañar el aislamiento.
Evite los puntos calientes y el calor radiante
Cojinetes
La mayor vida útil de los cojinetes está garantizada
por el correcto mantenimiento de la alineación, la
tensión de la correa y la lubricación en todo
momento. La alineación incorrecta de los
acoplamientos sólidos y flexibles puede producir una
carga excesiva sobre los cojinetes y, por ende,
vibración y empuje excesivos. La desalineación de
las transmisiones por correas puede generar empuje
o una oscilación perjudicial del eje. La alineación
incorrecta de las transmisiones por engranajes
producirá cargas de choque y puede doblar el eje.
Con frecuencia, la tensión excesiva de la correa
causa sobrecalentamiento y la falla de los cojinetes.
Los cojinetes tienden a sobrecalentarse cuando los
centros de las poleas están muy cerca, cuando los
diámetros de las poleas son demasiado pequeños o
cuando la velocidad de la correa es demasiado alta.
Construcción de los cojinetes
En los motores de inducción se emplean dos tipos
de cojinetes:
1. Cojinetes antifricción.
2. Cojinetes de manguito.
El tipo de estructura de montaje y soporte de los
cojinetes dependerá del tipo de cojinete utilizado.
La construcción del alojamiento de cojinete también
variará dependiendo del tipo de cojinete utilizado.
Los motores con cojinetes antifricción tienen una
construcción de soporte del cojinete de una sola
pieza. Los motores con cojinetes de manguito tienen
alojamientos de cojinetes separados.
Mantenimiento
Cojinetes aislados
Uno o ambos cojinetes pueden estar aislados para
prevenir que las corrientes del eje corroan las
superficies de los cojinetes. El aislamiento se
encuentra en la unión entre el alojamiento o el soporte
del cojinete y el cojinete. Los cojinetes aislados están
designados por una placa de instrucciones en el
alojamiento de cojinete.
Controle en forma periódica para asegurarse de que
el aislamiento no se haya debilitado o destruido.
El aislamiento de los cojinetes se puede controlar con
un ohmímetro o una luz de prueba de circuitos. Para
motores con cojinetes de manguito con un cojinete
aislado, el eje debe estar levantado unas pocas
milésimas de pulgada en el extremo del motor no
conectado a la transmisión de manera que no esté en
contacto con el cojinete, y el acoplamiento del eje
debe estar dividido de manera que el eje no esté
conectado a tierra a través del equipo accionado. Para
motores con ambos cojinetes aislados, desconecte la
banda de conexión a tierra de los cojinetes antes de
comprobar la integridad del aislamiento. Se deben
desconectar los dispositivos de temperatura de los
cojinetes, y los anillos de aceite no deben ponerse en
contacto con el eje ni con el cojinete.
Cojinetes antifricción
Los cojinetes antifricción se seleccionan de manera
que brinden una mayor vida útil cuando se les realiza
el mantenimiento adecuado. La falla de los cojinetes
puede ser causada por una lubricación deficiente o
excesiva, contaminación, carga portante excesiva,
instalación incorrecta, alineación o vibración.
Los síntomas de fallas en los cojinetes antifricción
son vibración excesiva, ruido y generación de calor
excesiva. Los anillos de rodadura y las bolas
se deben inspeccionar en forma periódica para
detectar daños. Ante cualquier daño, se debe
reemplazar el cojinete.
Cojinetes de manguito
Controle los cojinetes de manguito todos los días para
asegurarse de que los anillos de aceite giren
correctamente. Consulte el dibujo esquemático del motor
para determinar el nivel de aceite correcto. Agregue
aceite a través de la abertura de la mirilla del anillo de
aceite o del tubo de entrada de aceite, si están
instalados. Tenga cuidado de no llenarlo en exceso.
Drene el depósito de aceite retirando el tapón del
tubo. Limpie y enjuague con solvente, y vuélvalo a
llenar con aceite filtrado nuevo cada tres meses, hasta
un año, dependiendo de la intensidad de servicio. Use
aceite para turbinas de alto grado con viscosidad de
300-350 SSU a 37.8 °C (100 °F) para unidades de
1800 rpm o menos, y de 140-160 SSU a 37.8 °C
(100 °F) para máquinas con revoluciones superiores a
1800 rpm hasta 3600 rpm.
Además, se aconseja realizar cambios de aceite
estacionales si la unidad está sujeta a grandes
variaciones de temperatura.
Se deben investigar las causas de las temperaturas
babbit de los cojinetes que superen los 90 °C
(194 °F) o de un aumento brusco de la temperatura.
- 18 -
Las causas más comunes que producen el
calentamiento de los cojinetes son:
1. Falta de aceite.
2. Viscosidad incorrecta.
3. Aceite de mala calidad.
4. Anillo de aceite inutilizado.
5. Desalineación de acoplamientos o cojinetes.
6. Separación entre cojinetes insuficiente.
7. Fricción del sello de aceite sobre el eje.
8. Zonas ásperas en el eje o el casquillo.
9. Conductos de aceite obstruidos en los sistemas
de circulación de aceite. (Observe que los
sistemas de circulación de aceite incluyen un
filtro en la línea de aceite para filtrar el aceite una
vez que sale de la bomba. Controle y limpie o
reemplace el filtro cuando sea necesario).
10. Empuje final en la cara del cojinete.
Los cojinetes de manguito están taladrados hasta una
dimensión pareja y las chumaceras del eje son
ligeramente más pequeñas para dejar espacio de
funcionamiento. Se proporcionan válvulas de alivio
laterales para distribuir el aceite en sentido axial y
reducir la fricción. Durante el funcionamiento normal, el
eje se mantiene sobre una película de aceite de 0,0254
a 0,127 mm (0,001 a 0,005 pulgadas) de espesor,
dependiendo de la velocidad, la carga y la viscosidad. A
menos que se presenten condiciones adversas que
tiendan a degradar la película de aceite, el contacto
metálico sólo se produce durante el arranque y la
parada. En condiciones normales, el desgaste de los
cojinetes es mínimo.
Anillos de aceite
Inspeccione el nivel de aceite y el funcionamiento de
los anillos de aceite con frecuencia. El funcionamiento
de los anillos de aceite puede observarse a través de
la mirilla de aceite. Los anillos de aceite deben ser
perfectamente redondos, no tener rebabas ni bordes
ásperos, girar a velocidad constante y transportar una
cantidad importante de aceite hasta la parte superior
de la chumacera de los cojinetes. Si el anillo de aceite
no gira libremente, esto puede deberse a:
1. El anillo no es redondo; los anillos deben ser
redondos y estar dentro del límite de 1,5748 mm
(0,062 pulg.)
2. Suciedad en una proyección de los cojinetes,
casquillo o alojamiento.
3. El anillo no está balanceado (el lado pesado
tenderá a permanecer hacia abajo).
4. Adherencia a la ranura de la guía (la sección
trapezoidal reduce la adherencia).
5. El aceite está demasiado frío, demasiado viscoso
o el nivel de aceite está muy alto.
6. El eje no está nivelado; los anillos de aceite
tienden a unirse.
7. La vibración hace que el anillo de aceite rebote y
funcione más lentamente.
Mantenimiento
Al primer signo de alteración del color o
contaminación del aceite, reemplácelo por aceite
nuevo. La alteración del color rápida es provocada
por el desgaste de los cojinetes, a menudo, a causa
de la vibración o el empuje. Cambie el aceite según
sea necesario para mantenerlo limpio.
La separación entre la chumacera y el cojinete
permitirá que el centro de la chumacera esté apenas
por debajo del centro del cojinete. Con el motor en
funcionamiento, la presencia de la película de aceite
entre la chumacera y el cojinete hará que el eje se
levante ligeramente.

Cuando arme el cojinete, es posible que se

obstruyan los anillos y que no giren libremente.
NOTA
Controle el funcionamiento de los anillos rotando el Cuando un cojinete de manguito se desgasta y es
eje a mano después del armado. necesario reemplazarlo, también se debe reemplazar el
sello de aceite de laberinto.
Sellos de aceite
Los motores con bastidor 580 usan sello de aceite de Separación entre cojinetes demasiado grande
laberinto fijos para cerrar la cavidad del cojinete. Los Una separación entre cojinetes demasiado grande o
motores con bastidores 500, 708, 788 y 880 usan una obstrucción en los orificios de retorno de aceite
sellos de aceite de tipo flotante para cerrar la cavidad en el cojinete permitirán que el aceite excesivo se
del cojinete. Las funciones principales del sello de filtre por los extremos del cojinete. Esta filtración,
aceite son: combinada con la rotación del eje, creará una
1. Evitar la entrada de suciedad en la cavidad del pulverización de aceite dentro de la cavidad del
cojinete. cojinete que tenderá a producir fugas en los sellos de
2. Retener aceite en la cavidad del cojinete. aceite. La presión excesiva en un sistema de
3. Proporcionar regulación de presión en la cavidad lubricación a presión también puede causar la
del cojinete. acumulación de aceite pulverizado.
Para cumplir estas funciones, es necesario que haya Presiones de las cavidades
una separación diametral específica de los sellos de Los motores son sensibles a la cantidad de presión o
aceite al eje. Los ventiladores de refrigeración del vacío existente en la cavidad del cojinete. La tabla
motor tienden a crear succión o presión en la cavidad que figura a continuación indica la presión o el vacío
del cojinete que, si es suficientemente grande, máximo permisible de aceite en términos de más o
empujará o extraerá el aceite a lo largo del eje. El menos pulgadas de agua:
sello de aceite de ajuste estrecho brinda una
caída de presión a lo largo del sello y minimiza Extremo no
la presión diferencial. Extremo de la conectado a
Bastidor
transmisión la
Separaciones estándar de los sellos de aceite transmisión
Bastidor Separación diametral 500 ±0,12 +2,35, -0,12
0,2032 a 0,381 mm 580 ±0,12 ±0,12
500
(0,008 a 0,015 pulgadas) 708 ±0,12 ±0,50
0,3556 a 0,508 mm
580 788 ±0,12 ±0,50
(0,014 a 0,020 pulgadas)
880 ±0,12 ±0,50
0,0762 a 0,2032 mm
708
(0,003 a 0,008 pulgadas)
0,0762 a 0,2032 mm Para corregir una lectura alta o baja, es importante
788 tener en cuenta lo siguiente:
(0,003 a 0,008 pulgadas)
0,0762 a 0,2032 mm 1. Las piezas y uniones alrededor de la cavidad
880
(0,003 a 0,008 pulgadas) del cojinete y los sellos de aceite deben
estar selladas.
Además de usar separaciones pequeñas para 2. Los drenajes de condensación, las tuberías, las
corregir presiones diferenciales, algunos sellos de mirillas y los respiraderos deben funcionar
aceite cuentan con ventilación al exterior. Es correctamente.
importante mantener limpias las tuberías y la 3. Los equipos auxiliares que se extiendan dentro
ventilación de estos sellos de aceite. del motor deben estar sellados para prevenir
la transferencia de aire del interior al exterior
del motor.

- 19 -
Mantenimiento
Sellado de piezas
Si bien las uniones pueden aparentar coincidir
perfectamente, existen separaciones diminutas a
través de las cuales pueden producirse fugas de
aceite. Se debe aplicar sellador en las superficies de
unión de las piezas donde haya aceite para prevenir
la filtración de aceite.
El sellador se debe aplicar de la siguiente manera:
1. Las superficies deben estar libres de suciedad,
grasa y sellador de aceite. Si es necesario, use
un solvente que no sea a base de aceite.
2. Las superficies de unión deben ser planas y no
deben tener ninguna muesca ni rebaba que
sobresalga de la superficie. No debe quedar
ningún espacio cuando las superficies de unión
estén juntas. Retire toda la pintura excedente
de las superficies de las líneas de separación y
desengráselas bien. No bruña las superficies
de unión.
3a. Para los bastidores 500, 708, 788 y 880, aplique
un pequeño cordón de RTV (room temperature
vulcanization, vulcanización a temperatura
ambiente) de silicona en las superficies de
separación del alojamiento de cojinete. Se puede
usar Loctite 518 en lugar de RTV en entornos
donde se prohíba el uso de silicona. No aplique
demasiado sellador, ya que el excedente puede
escurrirse y entrar en los sellos de laberinto, los
cojinetes, las cavidades de aceite, etc. Aplique
una capa uniforme y delgada (aproximadamente
1.27 mm (0,05") de espesor) de Curil T* en las
superficies de los sellos de aceite flotantes que
se unen con el alojamiento de cojinete. Deje que
el Curil T se seque en los sellos durante 15
minutos antes de introducirlos en el alojamiento
de cojinete.
3b. Para los bastidores 580, aplique un pequeño
cordón de RTV de silicona en todas las
superficies de unión de las piezas donde haya
aceite, incluidos los sellos de aceite fijos y las
líneas de separación del alojamiento de cojinete.
4. Arme las piezas.
*Se puede pedir CURIL-T a través del Servicio de Atención al
Cliente de Siemens en Norwood, Ohio. Para hacer los pedidos, se
debe usar el número de pieza 53-688-487-001.
Lubricación de los cojinetes
Cojinetes antifricción lubricados con grasa
NOTA
Un error que se comete comúnmente es la
lubricación excesiva de los cojinetes. Cuando se
agrega grasa sin retirar el tapón de drenaje, la grasa
excedente puede ser forzada dentro de la tapa del
cojinete interno, atravesarla y esparcirse sobre los
devanados. Si se lubrican excesivamente
los cojinetes, es posible que al funcionar se calienten
y fallen.
- 20 -
Todos los motores con cojinetes antifricción tendrán
una placa que incluye las instrucciones de
lubricación. Se deben seguir las instrucciones de
esta placa para lograr una óptima vida útil de los
cojinetes y para evitar los daños consecuentes en las
piezas giratorias.
La frecuencia de lubricación de los cojinetes
depende de tres factores: la velocidad, el tipo de
cojinete y el servicio.
El entorno o la aplicación de funcionamiento puede
exigir una lubricación más frecuente.
Lubrique con el tipo de grasa especificado en la
placa de lubricación montada en el motor o con una
grasa compatible. La mezcla de grasas no
compatibles puede causar la falla de los cojinetes.
Las temperaturas más altas del estator pueden
provocar temperaturas más elevadas en
los cojinetes. Las temperaturas de los cojinetes no
deben superar los límites especificados en
los Parámetros típicos de control del motor.
Consulte en fábrica para obtener recomendaciones
específicas.
Procedimiento para la lubricación:
1. Pare el motor y bloquee el interruptor.
2. Limpie bien el accesorio o tapón de entrada de
grasa. Si el motor tiene tapón, retírelo y limpie
la entrada.
3. Retire el tapón de drenaje y limpie la grasa
endurecida.
4. Bombee lentamente la cantidad correcta de
grasa en la entrada de grasa, según la placa de
lubricación que está montada en el motor.
5. Arranque el motor y déjelo en funcionamiento
durante al menos una (1) hora para expulsar
toda grasa excedente de la abertura de drenaje,
antes de volver a colocar el tapón de drenaje.
6. Pare el motor y bloquee el interruptor.
7. Vuelva a colocar el tapón de drenaje.
8. Vuelva a poner el motor en funcionamiento.
La cantidad de grasa para los cojinetes puede
calcularse de la siguiente manera:
G = 0,1 x D x B
Donde: G = Cantidad de grasa en onzas fluidas
D = Diámetro externo del cojinete en
pulgadas
B = Ancho del cojinete en pulgadas
Mantenimiento
Cojinetes de manguito
PRECAUCIÓN
Mantener el nivel de aceite correcto.
De lo contrario, puede causar la lubricación indebida del
motor que podrá producir daños al equipo.
Siga cuidadosamente las instrucciones de lubricación.
Evite agregar aceite cuando la unidad esté en
funcionamiento.
Los motores con cojinetes de manguito se envían sin
aceite. En fábrica, se aplica una película que inhibe
la oxidación para proteger las superficies de los
cojinetes y las chumaceras durante el envío. Antes
de intentar poner en funcionamiento el motor con
cojinetes de manguito, se deben seguir los pasos
que se describen a continuación.
1. Inspeccionar visualmente el estado de los
cojinetes. Para este fin, generalmente se cuenta
con orificios de inspección de los anillos de aceite
y las aberturas de drenaje en el alojamiento.
2. Controle si hay acumulación de humedad. Si
descubre que hay oxidación, se deben eliminar
todos los rastros de oxidación antes de poner en
funcionamiento el motor, para lo cual deberá
desarmarlo.
3. Lave todas las tuberías de aceite. Llene los
depósitos de los cojinetes hasta el nivel normal.
Llene hasta la marca indicada en la mirilla o
hasta el centro de ésta. Consulte la tabla que
figura a continuación para obtener los grados de
aceite recomendados.
4. Rote el eje varias vueltas a mano para distribuir
el aceite sobre las piezas de los cojinetes.
Asegúrese de que los anillos de aceite
roten libremente.
Grados recomendados de aceite para turbinas
Velocidad del Viscosidad del aceite a Grado
motor 37.8 °C (100 °F) ISO
3600 o 3000 RPM 140 - 160 SSU 32
1800 y menos 300 - 350 SSU 68
NOTA
La viscosidad del aceite a temperatura de
funcionamiento es muy importante para seleccionar el
aceite correcto y puede variar para los distintos climas.
Es importante mantener el nivel de aceite correcto,
ya que la falta de lubricación suele ocasionar las
fallas de los cojinetes.
Inspeccione el nivel de aceite y el funcionamiento de
los anillos de aceite con frecuencia. Se debe
observar el funcionamiento de los anillos de aceite a
través de la mirilla montada en la parte superior de la
cápsula del cojinete. Los anillos de aceite deben ser
perfectamente redondos, no tener rebabas ni bordes
ásperos, girar a velocidad constante y transportar
una cantidad importante de aceite hasta la parte
superior de la chumacera. Si el anillo de aceite no
gira libremente, esto puede deberse a:
- 21 -
1. El anillo no es redondo (los anillos deben ser
redondos y ser de 1,5748 mm/0,062 pulg.)
2. Suciedad en una proyección del casquillo
del cojinete.
3. El anillo no está balanceado (el lado pesado
tenderá a permanecer hacia abajo).
4. Adherencia a la ranura de la guía (la sección
trapezoidal reduce la adherencia).
5. El aceite está demasiado frío o viscoso, o el nivel
de aceite está muy alto.
6. El eje no está nivelado; los anillos de aceite tienden
a unirse.
Al primer signo de alteración del color o contaminación
del aceite, reemplácelo por aceite nuevo. La alteración
del color rápida es provocada por el desgaste de los
cojinetes, a menudo, a causa de la vibración o el
empuje. Cambie el aceite según sea necesario para
mantenerlo limpio.
Lubricación a presión
El aceite se mide a través de un orificio en la línea de
entrada de aceite para permitir que entre la cantidad
correcta de aceite lubricante en el cojinete. Con el
motor también se proveen anillos de aceite
convencionales, para asegurar la lubricación temporal
de los cojinetes en caso de que falle el suministro de
aceite a presión. Es importante controlar el flujo de
aceite con frecuencia. La falta de lubricación puede
causar la falla de los cojinetes.
Control de la separación entre cojinetes de manguito
Una separación excesiva puede causar una rápida falla
de los cojinetes y que se reduzca el entrehierro entre el
estator y el rotor en la parte inferior del motor. Las
separaciones diametrales entre cojinetes de manguito
para los motores con bastidores 500 y 580 están dentro
del rango de 0,04318 a 0,06858 mm (1,7 a 2,7
milésimas por pulgada) de diámetro del cojinete. Las
separaciones diametrales entre cojinetes de manguito
para los motores con bastidores 708, 788 y 880 están
dentro del rango de 0,0254 a 0,0508 mm (1,0 a 2,0
milésimas por pulgada) de diámetro del cojinete.
Se puede obtener un control exacto de la separación
entre cojinetes a través de mediciones micrométricas de
la chumacera del eje y del diámetro interno del cojinete.
Reemplazo de los cojinetes
Cojinetes antifricción
Para una configuración típica de cojinetes antifricción,
vea las Figuras 3 y 4.
Los cojinetes de reemplazo pueden ser de un fabricante
distinto, pero deben ser iguales a los originales que se
usaron en el motor. Al hacer el pedido de cojinetes,
especifique lo siguiente:
1. Número de cojinete completo de la A.F.B.M.A. (Anti-
Friction Bearing Manufacturers’ Association,
Asociación de Fabricantes de Cojinetes Antifricción)
que figura en la placa de identificación del motor.
2. Números identificatorios y fabricante indicados
en el cojinete.
3. Clase de tolerancia del cojinete, es decir A.B.E.C.-1
(Annular Bearing Engineers’ Committee Tolerance
Class One, Tolerancia Clase 1 del Comité de
Ingenieros de Cojinetes Anulares).
4. Separación radial interna, es decir A.F.B.M.A.-3
(Separación clase tres).
5. Calidad del motor eléctrico.
Mantenimiento
Para reemplazar los cojinetes antifricción
1. Retire los tornillos que sujetan las tapas terminales
a los alojamientos.
2. Retire los tornillos que sujetan los alojamientos de
cojinetes a la culata.
3. Retire los alojamientos de cojinetes.
4. Retire el cojinete con un extractor. Vea la Figura 5.
5. Controle con un micrómetro el tamaño correcto del
diámetro del eje y de los alojamientos.
6. Caliente el nuevo cojinete en un horno 93.3 °C
(200 °F). Mientras esté caliente, deslice el
cojinete sobre el eje. Asegúrese de que el anillo
de rodadura interno tenga un contacto firme y
parejo con el hombro del eje. No someta el
cojinete a impacto.
7. Deje que el cojinete se enfríe. Llene las tapas de
los cojinetes con la grasa adecuada.
8. Vuelva a armar las tapas terminales y los Figura 4. Construcción de los cojinetes de bolas
alojamientos. - Bastidores 788 y 880
La cantidad de grasa que se debe usar para rellenar
un cojinete después de la limpieza o el reemplazo se NOTA
indica en la tabla que figura a continuación. 1. Para obtener un mejor resultado, el sello se
Cojinete Cantidad de grasa* debe colocar al ras de la superficie del
Tipo de en (tapas terminales) alojamiento de cojinete más externa (algunos
funciona tamaños de bastidor tienen un sello del eje
cojinete
miento Exterior Interior únicamente en un solo extremo del motor).
(eje) 2. Los motores que figuran en la lista de U.L.
De bolas de cumplen con requisitos especiales. Deben
2/3 1/3 estar armados por talleres certificados o
ranura Horizontal
completo completo inspeccionados por U.L.
profunda
1/3 1/3 Consulte en fábrica para obtener los motores que
De rodillos Horizontal
completo completo figuran en la lista de U.L.
*Llene completamente todos los cojinetes abiertos entre las
bolas o los rodillos, pero retire la grasa excedente del exterior de
Proteja el extremo del eje con una tapa. Si el cojinete se
los retenedores.
puede volver a utilizar, asegúrese de que el extractor
aplique presión únicamente contra el anillo de rodadura
Sello del eje interno del cojinete. Si el extractor no engancha el anillo
Vea la NOTA. de rodadura interno del cojinete, fabrique un
1) es para CGZ y CZ
casquillo partido e instálelo entre el cojinete y los
ganchos del extractor.
2) es para CGZZ

Ubicación del
hombro del eje
Anillo de rodadura
externo
Tapa del cojinete

Extractor
Anillo de rodadura
Figura 3. Construcción de los cojinetes de bolas interno
- Bastidores 500, 580 y 708 del cojinete

Figura 5. Extracción del cojinete con un extractor

- 22 -
Mantenimiento

Cojinete de manguito
Al reemplazar los cojinetes de manguito, siempre es
mejor controlar el encastre (patrón de contacto) del
cojinete en el eje. Al hacer el pedido de cojinetes de
manguito, asegúrese de proporcionar los
datos completos de la placa de identificación del
motor y del cojinete.
Siempre que reemplace un cojinete, debe realizar la
limpieza adecuada en cada paso de la operación.
Siempre inspeccione las superficies de las
chumaceras de los cojinetes. Deben estar lisas y
pulidas. Los rayones leves se pueden eliminar con un
paño con óxido de hierro. Si el eje del motor está muy
rayado, debe colocarse entre centros y volver a Figura 6. Construcción de cojinete de manguito con
bruñirse. Las chumaceras pueden bruñirse hasta sellos de aceite de tipo flotante - Bastidor 500
0,0254 mm (0,001 pulgadas) menos que su tamaño,
pero deben ser redondas y concéntricas con el centro Bastidor 580 (vea la Figura 7)
del eje. 1. Controle los cojinetes de reemplazo para detectar
si tienen muescas o se produjeron daños durante
Reemplazo de los cojinetes de manguito el envío. No los raye.
El reemplazo de los cojinetes de manguito, a menudo, 2. Afloje el sello de aceite externo y retírelo.
puede realizarse sin desacoplar la carga o alterar 3. Retire los dos tornillos largos (ubicados en la
la instalación. posición de las 2:00 y las 10:00 horas) que pasan
Bastidor 500 (vea la Figura 6) hasta el sello de aceite interno.
1. Controle los cojinetes de reemplazo para detectar 4. Retire la mitad superior de la cápsula del cojinete.
si tienen muescas o se produjeron daños durante 5. Retire la mitad superior del cojinete de manguito.
el envío. No los raye. 6. Retire las sondas de temperatura del cojinete, si
2. Retire la mitad superior del soporte del cojinete. están instaladas.
3. Retire cuidadosamente la mitad superior de la 7. Desplace los anillos de aceite en sentido axial,
cápsula del cojinete levantándola primero en línea alejándolos de la mitad inferior del cojinete
recta y luego tirando para extraerla del área de de manguito.
cojinetes. 8. Levante ligeramente el eje y proporciónele soporte
4. Retire la mitad superior del cojinete de manguito. en esa posición.
5. Retire las sondas de temperatura del cojinete, si 9. Rote 180° la mitad inferior del cojinete y retire la
están instaladas. mitad inferior del cojinete.
6. Desplace los anillos de aceite en sentido 10. Vuelva a armarlo siguiendo los pasos descritos
axial, alejándolos de la mitad inferior del cojinete anteriormente a la inversa. Aplique sellador de
de manguito. caucho de silicona de RTV o Permatex N° 2.
7. Levante ligeramente el eje y proporciónele 11. Lubrique. Gire el motor a mano para asegurarse
soporte. de que haya encastrado correctamente y
8. Rote 180° la mitad inferior del cojinete y retire la comprobar el buen funcionamiento de los anillos
mitad inferior del cojinete. de aceite.
9. Vuelva a armarlo siguiendo los pasos descritos 12. Arranque el motor sin carga y controle el
anteriormente a la inversa. Aplique sellador. Las funcionamiento de los anillos de aceite.
caras laterales de los sellos de laberinto deben
estar selladas con CURIL-T o un compuesto
sellador equivalente que no endurezca. Tenga
cuidado de no alterar ni atascar los sellos al
reemplazar la mitad superior de la cápsula del
cojinete.
10. Lubrique. Gire el motor a mano para asegurarse
de que haya encastrado correctamente y
comprobar el buen funcionamiento de los anillos
de aceite.
11. Arranque el motor sin carga y controle el
funcionamiento de los anillos de aceite.
Figura 7. Construcción de cojinete de manguito con
sellos de aceite de tipo laberinto - Bastidor 580

- 23 -
Mantenimiento
Bastidores 708, 788 y 880 (vea la Figura 8)
1. Controle los cojinetes de reemplazo para detectar
si tienen muescas o se produjeron daños durante
el envío. No los raye.
2. Retire cuidadosamente la tapa del alojamiento de
cojinete levantándola primero en línea recta y
luego tirando para extraerla del área de cojinetes.
3. Retire la mitad superior del revestimiento interior
del cojinete.
4. Retire los tornillos en la línea de separación del
anillo de aceite.
5. Retire las sondas de temperatura del cojinete, si
están instaladas.
6. Levante ligeramente el eje y proporciónele
soporte.
7. Rote 180° la mitad inferior del cojinete y retire la
mitad inferior del cojinete.
8. Vuelva a armarlo siguiendo los pasos descritos
anteriormente a la inversa. Aplique sellador. Las
caras laterales de los sellos de laberinto deben
estar selladas con CURIL-T o un compuesto
sellador equivalente que no endurece. Tenga
cuidado de no alterar ni atascar los sellos al
reemplazar la mitad superior de la cápsula del
cojinete.
9. Lubrique. Gire el motor a mano para asegurarse Figura 8. Construcción de cojinete de
de que haya encastrado correctamente y manguito - Bastidores 708, 788 y 880.
comprobar el buen funcionamiento de los anillos
de aceite.
10. Arranque el motor sin carga y controle el
funcionamiento de los anillos de aceite.

Holgura axial. Cojinetes de manguito

El control de la holgura axial del rotor en los motores
con cojinetes de manguito se mantiene en el cojinete
terminal de la transmisión. La holgura axial total es de
12,7 mm (0,5 pulgadas). En los bastidores 500 y 580,
los cojinetes se ubican en sentido axial con cuñas
entre el casquillo del cojinete y los hombros del
alojamiento en la mitad inferior del alojamiento. En los
bastidores 708, 788 y 880, las cuñas se ubican entre
la brida de montaje del alojamiento de cojinete y el
soporte del cojinete. Las cuñas permiten que el
cojinete se ajuste en sentido axial para mantener la
coincidencia del centro eléctrico y el centro mecánico.
Cualquier ajuste en la posición axial de un cojinete
debe ser acompañado por el mismo ajuste axial del
cojinete terminal opuesto.

El acoplamiento debe limitar la holgura axial del eje a

±4,572 mm (±0,18 pulgadas) del centro mecánico. El
acoplamiento de holgura axial limitada evita la fricción
del rotor contra los hombros de los cojinetes durante
el funcionamiento.

- 24 -
Repuestos

Identificación Es importante tener la mayor cantidad de datos

Todas las unidades tienen una placa de identificación
en el bastidor (Figura 9). Toda la información
necesaria correspondiente al motor se encuentra en
dicha placa, que incluye:
1. Número de serie
2. Tipo y tamaño de bastidor
3. Caballos de fuerza y velocidad
4. Designaciones de los cojinetes
posibles de esta placa al hacer el pedido de repuestos
o solicitar servicio técnico.
Identificación de las piezas
Las Figuras 10 a 18 son de diseño estándar. Es
posible que su motor sea ligeramente distinto.
Se encuentra disponible una lista de repuestos
recomendados, a solicitud.

SIEMENS
Motor De Induccion

SERIE NO. TIPO MODELO

FACTOR
CDEF (HP) ARMZN SUBRCGA
CLASE DE
AMPS VOLTIOS AISLAMTO
RENDIMTO
R.P.M. HERTZ NOMINA
NEMA
Letra DISENO
FUNCION C FASES 3 KVA NEMA
COJINETE COJINETE DIRECCIONES
DEL EJE OPUESTO PARA MANEJO M3115

ROTACION MIRANDO AL EJE CON ORDEN DE FASES A – B – C

CCW A–T B–T2 C–T • CW A–T B–T2 C–T

Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Norwood Ohio Hecho En EE. UU.

Figura 9. Placa de identificación

- 25 -
 Repuestos

Figura 10. Tipo CZ, bastidores 509 y 5011

Artículo Descripción Artículo Descripción Artículo Descripción

1 Núcleo del estator 7 Cojinete de bolas 14 Sello interno
2 Culata del estator 8 Sello del eje 15 Sello de aceite
3 Bobinas del estator 10 Cubierta de rejilla 16 Cápsula del cojinete
4 Alojamiento de 11 Núcleo del rotor 17 Casquillo del cojinete de manguito
cojinete
5 Eje del rotor 12 Ventilador externo 18 Cuñas (en la mitad inferior)
(4 polos y más lento)
6 Tapa terminal interna 13 Alojamiento del ventilador 19 Anillos de aceite

Artículo Descripción
1 Núcleo del estator
2 Culata del estator
3 Bobinas del estator
4 Alojamiento de
cojinete
5 Eje del rotor
6 Tapa terminal
interna
7 Cojinete de bolas
8 Sello del eje
9 Caja de terminales
principal
10 Cubierta de rejilla
11 Núcleo del rotor
12 Ventilador externo
(4 polos o más
lento)
13 Alojamiento del
ventilador
Figura 11. Tipo CGZZ, bastidores 507, 509 y 5011.
(EN LA LISTA DE U.L.)

- 26 -
Repuestos

Artículo Descripción
16 Cono de
ventilación
17 Ventilador
externo
(2 polos)
18 Sello de
aceite interno
19 Alojamiento
de la cáp. del
cojinete
20 Casquillo del
cojinete de
manguito
21 Cuñas
22 Sello de
aceite externo
23 Anillos de
aceite
24 Sello de la
máquina
Figura 12. Disposición de
los ventiladores externos para Figura 13. Disposición del cojinete
los tipos CZ, CGZ y CGZZ de manguito - Bastidor 580
de 2 polos.

Artículo Descripción Artículo Descripción

1 Núcleo del estator 8 Sello del eje
2 Culata del estator 10 Cubierta de rejilla
3 Bobinas del estator 11 Núcleo del rotor
4 Alojamiento de cojinete 12 Ventilador externo (4 polos o más lento)
5 Eje del rotor 13 Alojamiento del ventilador
6 Tapa terminal interna 14 Ventilador interno
7 Cojinete de bolas 15 Conducto de aire del rotor

Figura 14. Tipo CGZ, bastidores 588 y 5810

- 27 -
Repuestos
Artículo Descripción Artículo Descripción
1 Núcleo del 8 Sello del eje
estator
2 Culata del 10 Cubierta de rejilla
estator
3 Bobinas del 11 Núcleo del rotor
estator
4 Alojamiento de 12 Ventilador externo
cojinete (no direccional)
5 Eje del rotor 13 Alojamiento del ventilador
6 Tapa terminal 14 Ventilador interno
interna
7 Cojinete de 15 Conducto de aire del rotor
Figura 15. Disposición del bolas
cojinete de manguito para tipo
CGZ Bastidores 708, 788 y 880

Artículo Descripción
18 Sello de aceite
19 Alojamiento de la
cáp. del cojinete
20 Casquillo del
cojinete
de manguito
21 Cuñas
22 Sello de la
máquina
23 Anillo de aceite

Figura. 16. Tipo CGZ, bastidor 708

Artículo Descripción Artículo Descripción

1 Núcleo del estator 9 Tapa terminal externa
2 Culata del estator 10 Cubierta de rejilla
3 Bobinas del estator 11 Núcleo del rotor
4 Alojamiento de 12 Ventilador externo
cojinete (direccional)
5 Eje del rotor
6 Tapa terminal interna 13 Alojamiento del
ventilador
7 Cojinete de bolas 14 Ventilador interno
8 Sello del eje 15 Conducto de aire
del rotor

Figura. 17. Tipo CGZ, bastidores 788 y 880

- 28 -
Registro de servicio del motor

Caballos de
N° de serie ______________________ ______________ Tipo ___________
fuerza
Velocidad ________ Voltios _____________ Amperios _____________ Hertzios _______
Aumento de Tamaño del
Clase de aislamiento _______ _______ °C ____________
temperatura bastidor
N° de pedido del N° de
_________________ _____ Fecha de fabricación _________
propietario artículo

TIPO DE MÁQUINA COJINETES EXTENSIÓN DEL EJE

† Horizontal
† Vertical † De bola † De rodillos † De manguito Longitud __________________
† Abierta a prueba de goteo Tamaño: Diámetro __________________
† Totalmente cerrada Extremo de la transmisión (DE) _______________ Rosca interna ______________
† A prueba de explosiones Extremo opuesto a la transmisión (ODE) ________ Rosca externa ______________
† A prueba de intemperie Lubricación ________________________________
Chavetero _________________
Fecha de
Ubicación Aplicación
instalación

Fecha de
Reparaciones o piezas Reparado Costo
reparación o Falla
reemplazadas(1) por total
reemplazo

(1)
Nombre de la Cant. por Cant. Cant.
N° de Siemens Fecha Costo Fecha Costo
pieza motor reempl. reempl.
Rotor
Bobinas del estator
Cojinete, DE
Cojinete, ODE
Otro

Inspección
Fecha de control
Cojinetes
Lubricación
Calentamiento
excesivo
Ruido excesivo
Velocidad
Tensión
Amperios
Aislamiento
Limpieza
Alineación
Vibración
Temperatura

- 29 -
Hoja de análisis de vibración

Unidad
Motor acciona
d

Captación Sin filtro acoplado Con filtro acoplado

Desp. Frec.* Vel. Frec.* Vel. Frec. Vel. Frec. Vel. Frec. Vel. Frec.
Punto
Posición Mil. CPM Pulg./seg. CPM Mil. CPM Mil. CPM Mil. CPM Mil. CPM
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
*Frecuencia dominante

Antes de informar sobre dificultades de vibración, se deben tomar lecturas de vibración exactas y tener en cuenta lo siguiente:
1) ¿Cómo es el nivel de vibración en la línea central del 5) ¿El nivel de vibración cambia cuando se aflojan los tornillos de
motor en comparación con la de las patas del motor y montaje de a uno por vez? ¿Las patas se distorsionan cuando
de la fundación? se aflojan los tornillos?
2) ¿El motor está sobre una base torneada o está colocado 6) ¿El motor es para uso acoplado o de transmisión por correas?
en concreto con lechada? ¿Se usa un acoplamiento en un motor de eje largo? En ese
3) Cuando se corta la energía, ¿la vibración decae caso, ¿cuán larga es la chaveta y cuál es la longitud del
inmediatamente o desaparece en forma gradual? acoplamiento?
4) ¿Hay un conjunto de cuñas grande debajo de las patas 7) ¿Existe una condición resonante en el sistema que pueda
del motor? controlarse mediante una prueba de impacto de martillo?

- 30 -
Notas

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

- 31 -
Notas

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

- 32 -
 Siemens Energy & Automation

Industrial Products Division

Norwood Motor Plant
4620 Forest Avenue
Norwood, OH 45212-3396
(513) 841-3100

ANIM-03522-0402SPN
(Nueva edición)
©2002 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Todos los derechos reservados.
 Induction Motors/
Generators

Storage Recommendations

ANIM-03114 (03/02)
(Supersedes all previous issues)
©2002 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents

Page

Safety Procedures……………………………………………… 2

Introduction……………………………………………………… 3

Indoor Storage (Up to 5 Years)

Wholly Controlled Atmosphere………………………………... 4
Partially Controlled Atmosphere………………………………. 4

Outdoor Storage (Up to 5 Years)

Inland Dry Climate……………………………………………….. 5
Inland Humid Climate……………………………………………. 6
Salty and Industrial Atmosphere……………………………… 7

Preparation For Storage…………………………………………… 8

Maintenance During Storage……………………………………… 10

Preparation For Service…………………………………………… 12

Note - These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further
information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the user’s
purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens Sales Office. The contents of this instruction
manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The
sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The warranty contained in the contract between the
parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify
the existing warranty.

Siemens machines are built in accordance with the latest applicable revision of the National Electric Code,
Underwriters Laboratories Standards and Procedures, and NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association)
Standards. These publications and this instruction manual should be thoroughly read and understood prior to
beginning any work on this equipment.

The information contained within is intended to assist operating personnel by providing information on the general
characteristics of the purchased equipment. It does not relieve the user of the responsibility of using accepted
engineering practices in the installation, operation and maintenance of this equipment.

Should a conflict arise between the general information in this manual and the contents of the drawings and
supplementary material, the latter shall take precedence.

-1-
Safety Procedures
This equipment contains hazardous voltages. Death,
serious personal injury or property damage can result
if safety instructions are not followed.
The successful and safe operation of motors and
generators is dependent upon proper handling,
installation, operation and maintenance, as well as
upon proper design and manufacture. Failure to
follow certain fundamental installation and
maintenance requirements may lead to personal injury
and the failure and loss of the motor as well as
damage to other property.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around
this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with
all warnings, safety notices and maintenance
procedures contained herein. Only qualified
personnel should be involved in the inspection,
maintenance and repair procedure and all plant safety
procedures must be observed.
Qualified Person: For the purpose of this manual
and product labels, a Qualified person is one who is
familiar with the installation, construction and
operation of the equipment, and the hazards involved.
In addition, he or she has the following qualifications:
Do not operate this equipment in excess of the values
given on nameplate or contrary to the instructions
contained in this manual. The equipment (or a
prototype) has been factory tested and found
satisfactory for the condition for which it was sold.
Operating in excess of these conditions can cause
stresses and strains beyond design limitations.
Failure to heed this warning may result in equipment
damage and possible personal injury.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious injury,
electrocution or property damage.
Disconnect all power before working on
this equipment.
NOTE
Squirrel cage induction machines can be driven by
various types of prime movers. These will act as induction
generators. This instruction manual applies to both motors
and induction generators. However, for clarity reasons,
the machine will be referred to as a “motor”.

a. Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize,

clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in
accordance with established safety practices.
b. Is trained in the proper care and use of protective
equipment, such as rubber gloves, hard hat,
safety glasses, face shields, flash clothing, etc., in
accordance with established safety practices.
c. Is trained in rendering first aid.

Danger: For the purpose of this manual and product

labels, Danger indicates an imminently hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Warning: For the purpose of this manual and product

labels, Warning indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury.

Caution: For the purpose of this manual and product

labels, Caution indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury. It is also used to alert against unsafe
practices.

Motors should be installed and grounded per local and

national codes.

-2-
Introduction
The purpose of this booklet is to offer some short, easy
to follow recommendations to our customers, users NOTE
and distributors for the care of electric motors in
Recommended brand products have shown good
storage.
performance. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
however, cannot assume responsibility or be liable for
For practical purposes, such equipment is considered products other than those it warrants.
to be in storage not only when it is in the storeroom but
also when; Manufacturers or distributors of products are:
1. It has been delivered to the jobsite and is awaiting
installation, or Tectyl 502-C and 506 Valvoline Oil Co.
2. It has been installed but regular operation is Div. of Ashland Oil and Refining Co.
delayed pending completion of plant construction, 150 Fourth Avenue
or Freedom, PA 15042
3. There are long idle periods between operating
cycles, or P.D. George
4. The plant or department is shut down. Insulation Manufacturers Corp. 1231 Superior Avenue,
N.E. Cleveland OH 44114
NOTE
Squirrel cage induction machines can be driven by
various types of prime movers. These will act as induction
generators. This instruction manual applies to both motors
and induction generators. However, for clarity reasons,
the machine will be referred to as a “motor”.

-3-
Indoor Storage (Up to 5 Years)

NOTE
Rodents and other animals in search of warm
surroundings or food, like to house inside motors. Some
of them attack the insulation materials. Their access to the
motor should be prevented.

Wholly Controlled Atmosphere

Requirements
Uniform temperature between 40°F (4.5°C) and 140°F (60°C) throughout the room maintained at least 10°F
(5.5°C) above the dew point. Relative humidity of 50% or less. Dust accumulation should be minimal with no
harmful fumes and no ambient vibration.

Partially Controlled Atmosphere

Requirements
The room selected should be as clean and dry as possible with no ambient vibration.

If the ambient temperature exceeds 140 °F (60°C), the space or structure should be enclosed but ventilated. If the
ambient temperature is below 40 °F (4.5 °C), the space heaters, if the motor is so equipped, should be energized.
The enclosing structure should be designed to protect the motor from flying debris or other damage from high
winds.

If the motor can be moved, it is suggested that the entire motor be encased in a strong, transparent plastic bag.
Before sealing the bag, a moisture indicator should be attached to the side of the motor and several bags of silica
gel desiccant placed inside the bag around the motor. When the moisture indicator shows that the desiccant has
lost its effectiveness, as by a change in color, the bag should be opened and the desiccant replaced with fresh
material. Take care in placing the bags of desiccant so that none is in contact with the heater element.

When a motor cannot be sealed for effective use of a desiccant, and the relative humidity is greater than 50% or
where there are large daily swings in temperature, proper storage requires that the space heaters (anti-
condensation heaters) be energized. Heaters supplied in the motor are sized to raise the windings temperature
10°F to 15°F (5.5°C to 8°C). This prevents moisture from condensing on the windings. If the motors are not
equipped with space heaters, consult the factory for proper size of external heaters to be used.

-4-
Outdoor Storage (Up to 5 Years)

NOTE
Rodents and other animals in search of warm
surroundings or food, like to house inside motors. Some
of them attack the insulation materials. Their access to the
motor should be prevented.

Inland Dry Climate

Conditions Usually Encountered
Dust, sand, heat from the sun, and occasional rain or snow.

Requirements
If the ambient temperature exceeds 140°F (60°C), the space or structure should be enclosed but ventilated. If the
ambient temperature is below 40°F (4.5°C), the space heaters, if the motor is so equipped, should be energized.
Cover the motor completely to exclude dirt, dust, moisture and other foreign materials. At a bare minimum, a
heavy waterproof cover should be slipped over the motor.
After the motor is covered as described, a shed of some sort should be erected to protect it from direct rain, snow
and excessive direct sun heat. Proper wrapping will protect the motor from blown sand and dirt.

If the motor can be moved, it is suggested that the entire motor be encased in a strong, transparent plastic bag.
Before sealing the bag, a moisture indicator should be attached to the side of the motor and several bags of silica-
gel desiccant placed inside the bag around the motor. When the moisture indicator shows that the desiccant has
lost its effectiveness, as by a change in color, the bag should be opened and the desiccant replaced with fresh
material. Take care in placing the bags of desiccant so that none is in contact with the heater element.

When a motor cannot be sealed for effective use of a desiccant, and the relative humidity is greater than 50% or
where there are large daily swings in temperature the space heaters (anti-condensation heaters) should be
energized. Heaters supplied in the motor are sized to raise the temperature of the windings 10°F to 15°F (5.5 °C
to 8 °C). This prevents moisture from condensing on the windings.

If the motors are not equipped with space heaters, consult the factory for proper size of external heaters to be
used.

-5-
Outdoor Storage (Up to 5 Years)

NOTE
Rodents and other animals in search of warm
surroundings or food, like to house inside motors. Some
of them attack the insulation materials. Their access to the
motor should be prevented.

Inland Humid Climate: (Non Industrial Area)

Conditions Usually Encountered
Dust, rain, snow, organic growth (fungus).

Requirements
If the ambient temperature exceeds 140°F (60°C), the space or structure should be enclosed but ventilated. If the
ambient temperature is below 40 °F (4.5 °C), the space heaters, if the motor is so equipped, should be energized.

Cover the motor completely to exclude dirt, dust, moisture and other foreign materials. At a bare minimum, a
heavy waterproof cover should be slipped over the motor.
After the motor is covered as described, a shed of some sort should he erected to protect it from direct rain, snow
and excessive direct sun heat. Proper wrapping will protect the motor from blown sand and dirt.

If the motor can be moved, it is suggested that the entire motor be encased in a strong, transparent plastic bag.
Before sealing the bag, a moisture indicator should be attached to the side of the motor and several bags of silica
gel desiccant placed inside the bag around the motor. When the moisture indicator shows that the desiccant has
lost its effectiveness, as by a change in color, the bag should be opened and the desiccant replaced with fresh
material. Take care in placing the bags of desiccant so that none is in contact with the heater element.

When a motor cannot be sealed for effective use of a desiccant, and the relative humidity is greater than 50% or
where there are large daily swings in temperature the space heaters (anti-condensation heaters) should be
energized. Heaters supplied in the motor are sized to raise the temperature of the windings 10°F to 15°F (5.5°C to
8°C). This prevents moisture from condensing on the windings. If the motors are not equipped with space heaters,
consult the factory for proper size of external heater to use.

-6-
Outdoor Storage (Up to 5 Years)

NOTE
Rodents and other animals in search of warm
surroundings or food, like to house inside motors. Some
of them attack the insulation materials. Their access to the
motor should be prevented.

Salty and Industrial Atmospheres

Conditions Usually Encountered
Moisture impregnated with salts or other chemicals, salty dust rain, snow, fungus growth, fumes, coal and
chemical soot.

Requirements
If the ambient temperature exceeds 140°F (60°C), the space or structure should be enclosed but ventilated. If the
ambient temperature is below 40°F (45°C), the space heaters, if the motor is so equipped, should be energized.

Cover the motor completely to exclude dirt, dust, moisture and other foreign materials. At a bare minimum, a
heavy waterproof cover should be slipped over the motor.

After the motor is covered as described, a shed of some sort should be erected to protect it from direct rain, snow
and excessive direct sun heat. Proper wrapping will protect the motor from blown sand and dirt.

If the motor can be moved, it is suggested that the entire motor be encased in a strong transparent plastic bag.
Before sealing the tag, a moisture indicator should be attached to the sale of the motor and several bags of silica
gel desiccant placed inside the bag - around the motor.

When the moisture indicator shows that the desiccant has lost its effectiveness as by a change in color, the bag
should be opened and the desiccant replaced with fresh material. Take care in plating the bags of desiccant so
that none is in contact with the heater element.

When a motor cannot be sealed for effective use of a desiccant and the relative humidity is greater than 50% or
where there are large daily swings in temperature, the space heaters (anti-condensation heaters) should be
energized.

Heaters supplied in the motor are sized to raise the temperature of the windings 10°F to 15°F (5.5°C to 8°C). This
prevents moisture from condensing on the windings.

If the motors are not equipped with space heaters, consult the factory for proper size of external heater to be
used.

-7-
Preparation For Storage

CAUTION
Moisture.
Can damage windings.
Protect motor from moisture.

Sleeve and Tilting Pad Bearings

Motors with this type of bearing are shipped without lubricating oil. A film of rust-inhibiting oil from factory testing
protects the bearing and shaft journals during shipment, but this protection does not last long enough for
extended periods of storage. Therefore, before placing the motor in storage longer than one (1) month, fill the oil
wells (sumps) to running level with a good grade of rust inhibiting turbine oil of the proper viscosity.

Remove the shaft blocking on motors with sleeve bearings to permit turning of the shaft. Do not remove the
blocking on motors with tilting pad bearings unless an auxiliary oil flood lubricating system is available for use for
storage maintenance.

Oil Lubricated Antifriction and Kingsbury Type Bearings

No lubricating oil is shipped with any of these units.

Vertical motors with these types of bearings and for operation at 1800 rpm or slower are designed so the oil
completely covers the bearings when properly lubricated. To protect the motor for storage, fill the oil wells
(sumps) to the running level with a good grade of rust-inhibiting turbine oil of the proper viscosity.

Vertical motors with anti-friction bearings for operation at 3000 or 3600 rpm use oil sump lubrication requiring the
bearings to be located above the normal oil level. A film of rust-inhibiting oil from factory testing protects the motor
during shipment. If the motor will be run during storage, the motor should be prepared for future storage
maintenance by filling the oil wells as described above. If the motor will not be run, arrange motor so it can be
later disassembled for oil coating of internal parts.

Grease Lubricated Anti-Friction Bearings

Grease lubricated ball or roller bearing motors are shipped from the factory with bearings properly packed with
grease and if the elapsed time from the date of shipment is less than three (3) months, no further preparation is
required.

If the elapsed time is over three (3) months, add grease to each bearing. Refer to the lubrication plate on the
motor for the amount of grease and the identification of the grease installed at the factory. Use the same or
compatible grease.

Oil Mist Lubricated Anti-Friction Bearings

Motors with this type of lubrication system require special attention. Check for a tag attached to the motor and
read and follow the caution statements on the tag.

If the tag states the motor was shipped with grease in the bearings, the motor should be treated same as Grease
Lubricated Anti-Friction Bearings described above.

If the tag states that an oil mist lubrication system must be connected before the motor is started;
INDOOR STORAGE: The motor was shipped with no grease in the bearings and it cannot be stored for
longer than two weeks unless an auxiliary oil-mist system is available.
OUTDOOR STORAGE: The motor should not be stored outdoors.

-8-
Preparation For Storage
Shaft Extensions and Exposed Machined Surfaces
Surfaces should be coated with an easily removable rust preventive such as Tectyl No. 502-C.

If the storage period will be nine months or longer and the risk of exposure to moisture is present, take the
following precautions;
1. Before adding the lubricant described above, disassemble the motor taking care not to contaminate the
existing lubricant or the bearing or shaft journal.
2. If any exposed machined surfaces are unpainted, coat these with a non-hardening protective film, such as
Tectyl No. 506. This material can be later removed with petroleum solvents. Do not apply this material to
bearings, shaft journals or other parts within the bearing cavity.
3. FOR INLAND HUMID CLIMATE or SALTY AND INDUSTRIAL ATMOSPHERE: Before reassembly of the
motor, spray all internal surfaces of the stator (winding and iron) with one coat of an anti-fungus varnish such
as PD. George No. 1137 protective sealer.

-9-
Maintenance During Storage

DANGER DANGER
Hazardous voltage. Rotating machinery.
Can cause death, severe injury, or Can cause death or severe injury.
property damage. Follow all safety rules.
Follow all safety rules.

Sleeve Bearings
Per Chart 1, the motor shaft should be manually rotated by hand at about 30 rpm for 15 seconds or if power is
available, the motor can be electrically bumped for 5 seconds;

Chart 1
STORAGE ENVIRONMENT Shaft Rotation Frequency
INDOOR – WHOLLY CONTROLLED ATMOSPHERE Every two (2) months
INDOOR – PARTIALLY CONTROLLED ATMOSPHERE Once per month
OUTDOOR – INLAND DRY CLIMATE Once per month
OUTDOOR – INLAND HUMID CLIMATE Once per week
OUTDOOR – SALTY AND INDUSTRIAL ATMOSPHERE Once per week

Tilting Pad Bearings

INDOOR STORAGE: Do not turn the shaft on motors with this type of bearing unless an external flood
lubrication system is connected and in operation. If this system is not available, do not run the motor, but
every three months, disassemble the motor for access to the bearings and coat the bearings and the shaft
journal area with a rust-inhibiting turbine oil of the proper viscosity.
OUTDOOR STORAGE: The motor should not be stored outdoors.

Oil Lubricated Antifriction and Kingsbury Type Bearings

Every three (3) months, 3000-3600 RPM vertical motors with anti-friction bearings should be run for two minutes
to recoat the oil-lubricated bearings. If the motor cannot be run, it must be partially disassembled to reach the
bearings. Manually cover the bearing with a fresh coat of oil. The oil itself need not be renewed.

On 1800 rpm and slower speed vertical motors, the shaft should be rotated by hand every two (2) months. Turn it
by hand at about 30 rpm for 15 seconds or if power is available, the motor can be electrically bumped for 5
seconds.

Grease Lubricated Anti-Friction Bearings

Per Chart 2, the motor shaft should be manually rotated by hand at about 30 rpm for 15 seconds or if power is
available, the motor can be electrically bumped for 5 seconds;

Chart 2
STORAGE ENVIRONMENT Shaft Rotation Frequency
INDOOR – WHOLLY CONTROLLED ATMOSPHERE Every two (2) months
INDOOR – PARTIALLY CONTROLLED ATMOSPHERE Every two (2) months
OUTDOOR – INLAND DRY CLIMATE Once per month
OUTDOOR – INLAND HUMID CLIMATE Once per week
OUTDOOR – SALTY AND INDUSTRIAL ATMOSPHERE Once per week

Bearings should be regreased at one (1) year intervals while in storage. Refer to the lubrication plate on the motor
for the amount of grease and the identification of the grease installed at the factory. Use the same or compatible
grease.

- 10 -
Maintenance During Storage
Oil Mist Lubricated Anti-Friction Bearings
If motor was shipped with grease in the bearing, follow instructions for grease lubricated anti-friction bearings
described above.

If motor does not have grease in the bearing, start the oil mist system connected during the storage preparations,
start the motor, and run it for two minutes. Repeat this process every two weeks.

Shaft Extensions, Exposed Machined Surfaces and Flanges

Check the condition of the rust inhibitor used and recoat as recommended by the manufacturer. For example,
Tectyl No. 502-C, heavily applied, may last about 2 years.

Desiccant bags and plugs must be checked periodically, even weekly, if the moisture is high (above 50% relative
humidity) and the temperature drops often.

Other
If heaters are used, check that they are operating properly. Perform this check every time the bearings are
checked.

Check the condition of the desiccant weekly and replace as necessary.

Every two (2) years while in storage, the motor should be disassembled and prepared for storage again.

- 11 -
Preparation For Service
Cleaning
Both the interior and exterior of the motor should be
free of spilled oil, water, dust, and dirt. The exterior
should be wiped and the interior blown out with
compressed air at a reduced pressure.
CAUTION
Moisture.
Can damage windings.
Protect motor from moisture.
Wipe off removable rust preventatives with a clean
cloth soaked in petroleum solvent.
WARNING
Solvent may explode.
Have no flames or spark.
Dispose of rags in special container.
Make sure that the bearings and lubricant cavities are
free of dust and dirt and that the (oil) plugs in the
cavity are sealed and tight. Scratches or rust on the
shaft journals must be carefully removed.
Relubricate Bearings
Use the specified or compatible grease or the
specified viscosity turbine oil as applicable. Refer to
lubrication plates on the motor and to the instruction
book.
Remove Desiccant
Check Winding Insulation Resistance
Regardless of the method or location of storage, the
winding insulation should be measured prior to placing
the motor in service. A low winding insulation
resistance is an indication of excessive moisture in the
winding and it should be dried before being energized.
Check the insulation resistance using a hand cranked
or solid state insulation resistance tester and test with
at least 500 volts but not greater than machine rated
voltage. Use 500 volts on motors rated 600 volts or
lower.
- 12 -
For machines with newer insulation systems, such as
MiCLAD VPI, the insulation resistance after one (1)
minute should be greater than 1000 megohms.
(Values in excess of 5000 megohms are common.)
Refer to the instruction book.
If the insulation resistance is less than satisfactory
and the cause is excessive moisture in the winding,
dry the windings by applying heat from:
1. A warm air oven.
2. Electric strip heaters.
3. Circulating currents through the coils.
Do not use radiant type heaters.
The heat should be applied slowly so the desired
temperature will not be obtained in less than eight (8)
hours. Heating faster may damage the winding. The
insulation resistance should be measured before the
heat is applied and every six to eight hours thereafter.
For newer Class F insulation systems, such as
MiCLAD VPI, a temperature of 245°F (118° C) is
commonly used for this drying procedure.
Insulation resistance will decrease as the machine
warms up but will begin to increase shortly as the
dryout continues.
A uniform temperature must be maintained in the
machine to obtain meaningful readings. When the
insulation readings stop changing, the drying process
is complete and may be discontinued. If the insulation
resistance is still low, check for other causes.
To prevent damage to the bearings, the bearings and
the bearing housings should be removed before
starting any of the heating methods. The rotor should
also be removed to allow more uniform heating of the
winding. Temperature indicators or detectors should
be connected to the winding and monitored to see that
the recommended temperature is not exceeded. A fan
can be helpful in getting more uniform winding
temperatures and in carrying away the moisture when
strip heaters are used as the heat source.
MiCLAD is a Siemens trademark.
Notes

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

- 13 -
Notes

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

- 14 -
 Siemens Energy & Automation

Industrial Products Division

Norwood Motor Plant
4620 Forest Avenue
Norwood, OH 45212-3396
(513) 841-3100

ANIM-03114 (03/02)
(Supersedes all previous issues)
©2002 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Above NEMA Motors
Location
This Quality/Environmental Manual applies to the Siemens
Industry Drive Technologies Above NEMA motor facility
located at 4620 Forest Ave., Norwood, OH 45212
Quality Policy
Our quality policy is “Total Customer Satisfaction
Through Continuous Improvement”.
Environmental Policy
It is the policy of Siemens Industry (SI) to operate
in a manner which protects the environment
through the prevention of pollution as a result of
continual improvement including such activities
as the identification of significant environmental
aspects, objectives and targets, and the
implementation of EMS programs supported by
all persons working for, or on the behalf of SI,
while meeting all legal and other requirements,
particularly relating to environmental aspects. In
addition, this policy is available to the public.
An easy way to remember the important aspects of the
environmental policy is by remembering the word “COPS”
and the following:
• C = Continually Improve
• O = Obey Legal and Other Requirements
• P = Prevent Pollution
• S = Set Objectives and Targets
Quality Objectives
-95% Delivery Reliability
-Effective implementation of lean manufacturing
to drive process improvements plant-wide.
Environmental Objectives
ISO 9001:2000 4.2.2 and ISO 14001:2004
Quality/Environmental Manual
-Paper/Cardboard Recycling - 50% reduction over
baseline
-Gas Usage Reduction – 25% reduction over
baseline
-Electricity Usage Reduction – 10% reduction
over baseline
- Oil/Chemical Containment – 50% of sources
contained
Scope
The quality/environmental system defined in this manual
and its related documents is applicable to all work
performed at the above identified location for Design,
Manufacture, Repair and Sales of Large Electric Motors to
meet Standard and Special Applications, with the exception
of the supply of renewal parts for equipment not originally
manufactured at the Norwood Plant. Facility processes
include machining, assembly, metal forming, painting,
welding, sand blasting, parts washing, procurement,
maintenance, waste handling and disposal.
Management Commitment
A top priority of management is customer satisfaction
through exceeding the expectations of our customers in
everything we do, obeying legal and other requirements,
preventing pollution and continually improving. This is
achieved through motivated and engaged employees,
robust processes, and a continuous improvement cycle that
selects targets, analyzes results and institutes corrective
and preventative actions. The Quality/Environmental
Policy and Quality/Environmental Objectives are
communicated to all employees through employee
meetings and information boards located throughout the
facility.
Management Review
Once every twelve months, the quality/environmental
system is reviewed to ensure its continued suitability,
effectiveness, and as a basis for improvement of the
quality/environmental system. Other reviews may take
place as directed.
1 Rev. 32 8/17/2009
Siemens Industry, Inc. Quality/Environmental Manual
Above NEMA Motors

Norwood Plant Processes

Management Processes
Strategic Planning Financial Planning Enterprise
Internal Audit
& Controlling & Controlling Governance

Customer Relationship Management - CRM

Plan Understand Sell Care

Supply Chain Management - SCM

Plan Source Make Deliver Return

Product Lifecycle Management - PLM

Product Portfolio Commercialize /
Plan Define Realize Phase out
Management Operate

Support Processes
Environment Intellectual Process & Real Admin &
Quality Financial Procure- Commu- Operating
Health & Capital HR Information Estate Infra-
Mgmt Mgmt ment nication Rules
Safety Mgmt Mgmt Mgmt structure

Sequence and Interaction of Environmental Management System Processes

ISO 9001:2000 4.2.2 and ISO 14001:2004 2 Rev. 32 8/17/2009

Siemens Industry, Inc.
Above NEMA Motors
Environmental Aspects
Siemens, Norwood has established, implemented and
maintained a procedure to: identify environmental aspects
of its activities, products and services within the defined
scope of the EMS that it can control and influence taking
into account planned or new developments, or new or
modified activities, products and services; determine those
aspects that can have significant impact(s) on the
environment; document this information and keep it up to
date. Siemens, Norwood shall ensure that these significant
environmental aspects are taken into account in
establishing, implementing and maintaining its EMS.
Legal and Other Requirements
Siemens, Norwood has established, implemented and
maintained a procedure to: identify and has access to
applicable legal and other requirements related to its
environmental aspects; determine how these requirements
apply to its environmental aspects; periodically review
these requirements. Siemens, Norwood will ensure
applicable legal and other requirements are taken into
account in establishing, implementing and maintaining its
EMS.
Environmental Objectives, Targets and Programs
Quality and environmental objectives are established
throughout the site to implement the quality and
environmental policies which are used as a framework to
establish quality and environmental objectives, to meet
legal and other requirements for products, processes and
the environmental system, while continually improving
quality/environmental systems and quality/environmental
performances.
Responsibility and Authority
Top Management ensures that quality/environmental roles,
responsibilities and authorities are defined and
communicated in order to facilitate effective
quality/environmental management.
Training, Awareness and Competency
It is the policy of this site to identify competence needs and
provide for the training and/or other action needed to
satisfy those needs of personnel performing work affecting
product quality and/or the environment.
Communication
Top Management at each site ensures that the appropriate
communication processes takes place between its various
levels and functions regarding the processes of the
quality/environmental system and their effectiveness
Document Control
All of the documentation in the Quality/Environmental
Management System is controlled. There are systematic
procedures that are followed for the issue and revision of
documentation for the quality/environmental system as well
as documentation that is customer contract specific.
When an order is released for manufacturing, copies of all
relevant data are issued. Data includes, but may not be
limited to, work instructions, specifications, drawings, and
ISO 9001:2000 4.2.2 and ISO 14001:2004
Quality/Environmental Manual
all other necessary details required to ensure correct
manufacture and inspection in accordance with contract
requirements. Document approval is identified by a
signature on the face of the record or traceable to the
function authorized to issue the document or by other
suitable electronic means.
Departmental procedures are implemented to ensure that
pertinent issues of appropriate data are available to guide
personnel in the performance of their assigned tasks and to
ensure that obsolete documents are promptly removed
from all points of issue and use.
Changes to documents and data shall be reviewed,
approved, and reissued by the same function that
performed the original review and approval. Where
practical, the nature of the change shall be identified on the
document or on an appropriate attachment. Documents
shall be reissued after a practical number of changes have
been made. Interim changes made by memo shall be
incorporated at least annually.
Documents and data retained for legal or knowledge -
preservation purposes are suitably identified.
Operational Controls
Siemens, Norwood has identified and planned operations
associated with identified significant aspects consistent
with its environmental policy and objectives and targets to
ensure they are carried out under specified conditions by
establishing, implementing and maintaining a procedure to
control situations where their absence could lead to
deviation from the environmental policy, objectives and
targets, stipulating operating criteria in the procedures and
establishing, implementing and maintaining procedures
relating to significant environmental aspects of goods and
services used by Siemens, Norwood and communicating
these requirements to suppliers and contractors.
Emergency Preparedness and Response
Siemens, Norwood has established, implemented and
maintained a procedure to identify potential emergency
situations and accidents that can have an impact on the
environment and how it will respond to them. Siemens,
Norwood will respond to emergency situations and
accidents and prevent or mitigate associated adverse
environmental impacts. Siemens, Norwood will periodically
review and if necessary revise its emergency procedures,
in particular after the occurrence of accidents or emergency
situations. Siemens, Norwood shall periodically test such
procedures where practical.
Monitoring and Measurement
Siemens, Norwood has established, implemented and
maintained a procedure to monitor and measure on a
regular basis the key characteristics of its operations that
can have a significant environmental impact. This
procedure includes documenting information to monitor
performance, operational controls and conformity with
stated environmental objectives and targets. Siemens,
Norwood also ensures that calibrated or verified monitoring
3 Rev. 32 8/17/2009
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Above NEMA Motors
and measuring equipment is used and maintained and
associated records are maintained.
Evaluation of Compliance
Siemens, Norwood has established, implemented and
maintained a procedure for periodically reviewing and
evaluating compliance with applicable legal and other
requirements, and will keep records of the results of these
reviews and evaluations
Control of Records
Records that provide documentary evidence relating to
quality/environmental, whether specific to a contract or
general to quality/environmental, are controlled and
systematically collated, stored, and maintained. The
records are consistent with the quality/environmental
system and demonstrate conformance to specified
requirements and compliance with contractual
requirements. They are available for evaluation by the
customer or his authorized representative if required by
contractually agreed quality/environmental arrangements.
Records will be retained to meet contractual requirements.
Records are stored in various locations and those that are
relevant to quality/environmental are identified and have
their location defined. All records shall be legible and
identifiable to the product involved and be accessible for
use. All records are stored in a manner to prevent
deterioration or damage.
The Quality/Environmental Manager has the overall
responsibility for the control of quality/environmental
records. Departmental managers are responsible for the
secure maintenance of their own hardcopy departmental
records for the prescribed period. Electronic system
records are maintained by corporate Information
Technology or their delegates in accordance with Siemens
Industry policies.
Control of Nonconforming Product
Siemens requires that all materials, services, and work that
do not conform to specified requirements be clearly
identified and controlled, and that the functions concerned
be notified.
Nonconforming items identified during receiving inspection
and during the course of manufacture and test are suitably
identified and, where appropriate, segregated and placed
into a designated area pending disposition. No further
processing is permitted until disposition is made.
Review and Disposition of Nonconforming Product
Nonconforming product and materials are evaluated and
disposition authorized under controlled conditions,
including a Material Review Board. The functions
concerned are notified.
Applications for customer concession may be made
verbally or in writing. A written confirmation of the results is
placed in the order file. All applications are made through
the contract administrator or, where appropriate, the
Product Manager. When required by contract, all non-
ISO 9001:2000 4.2.2 and ISO 14001:2004
Quality/Environmental Manual
conformances proposing the use of material which does
not conform to specified requirements shall be submitted to
the customer for acceptance.
Where appropriate, proposed methods for re-work or repair
together with any relevant reinspection requirements are
controlled in accordance with documented procedures.
The “as repaired” condition shall be recorded and the
records retained. Nonconformances identified at receiving
inspection are returned to the supplier unless a decision is
made to rework in the plant or to use as received.
Records of all nonconforming materials and/or work are
maintained.
Quality System Documentation
SI employs a standardized process architecture that is
referenced in the diagram of the Reference Process
House. This structure contains all of the standardized
processes for Management Processes, Customer
Relationship Management, Supply Chain Management,
Product Lifecycle management, and other Support
Processes.
The process house is supplemented by the following
departmental procedure groups as well as work center
instructions and shop floor order documents (labor
packets):
ENGINEERING
ENVIRONMENTAL
HUMAN RESOURCES
INFORMATION SYSTEMS
MANUFACTURING
MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING
MARKETING
MATERIAL CONTROL
ORDER MANAGEMENT
PURCHASING
QUALITY
HEALTH & SAFETY
SHIPPING & RECEIVING
WARRANTY SERVICE
Internal Audit
A program of planned and systematic internal audits is
implemented to verify that individual quality/environmental
activities comply with the quality/environmental system
requirements. The results of these audits are documented
and reported to the appropriate management. Follow-up
action is taken as necessary to verify that the corrections
have been made.
Internal audits, performed by the Quality/Environmental
Manager, or by competent personnel as delegated by the
Quality/Environmental Manager against the requirements
of the quality/environmental manual or individual
procedures will provide information for subsequent
management reviews. Each review will take due
cognizance of any revisions to national and international
standards as they may affect Plant operations.
4 Rev. 32 8/17/2009
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Above NEMA Motors
Additional audits will be performed in addition to the system
audits; these may include process, workstation, storage,
part, manufacturing methods, and product audits. Internal
audit activities are carried out by personnel independent of
those having direct responsibility for the work being
performed.
Follow-up activities will verify and record the
implementation and effectiveness of corrective action.
Corrective and Preventive Action
Corrective action is action taken to prevent recurrence of a
defect or nonconformance, while preventive action is action
taken to prevent potential defects or nonconformances.
Identification of areas of nonconformance is an ongoing
task undertaken during all stages of the Plant’s operation.
Documented systems for recording details of
nonconformances, warranty reports, customer complaints
and customer satisfaction are established. These records
are evaluated periodically to determine the required areas
for corrective action.
Preventive action is achieved by evaluating various
sources of information and determining potential causes of
problems. Records of preventive actions taken shall be
maintained and periodically reviewed for effectiveness.
Nonconformances, warranty reports, customer satisfaction
(including customer complaints), audits, and statistical
measures are evaluated to determine the need for
corrective and preventive actions.
All Plant personnel are responsible for their own work and
are required to highlight the need for corrective and
preventive action.
The Quality/Environmental Manager, together with the
Operations Manager’s staff members, has the responsibility
to initiate necessary corrective and preventive actions and
to apply controls to ensure actions are implemented and
are effective.
As part of the internal audit responsibility, the Quality
Manager/Environmental is responsible to ensure all
aspects of corrective and preventive actions are monitored
and relevant information on the actions taken is submitted
for management review and verified.
Management Representative
Operations Manager
ISO 9001:2000 4.2.2 and ISO 14001:2004
Quality/Environmental Manual
The Quality/Environmental Manager is the
Quality/Environmental System management representative
and has full authority and responsibility for ensuring that
the requirements of the quality/environmental system are
implemented and maintained, and ensuring continual
improvement of its effectiveness.
The Quality/Environmental Manager has the authority,
responsibility, and organizational freedom to initiate,
recommend and/or provide solutions to all problems
involving quality/environmental and related matters. The
Quality/Environmental Manager, in conjunction with the
other management staff members, shall establish and
review quality/environmental objectives on a continuing
basis. The objectives shall address the areas of customer
focus, leadership, involvement of people, process
approach, system approach to management, continual
improvement, factual approach to decision making and
mutually beneficial supplier relationships.
Verification By Customers
Subject to reasonable notice, customers or their authorized
representatives have the right to undertake verification of
the Plant's and/or subcontractor's quality system.
These rights include:
- auditing the quality/environmental system;
- access to the quality/environmental system’s
documentation and records;
- where contractually agreed, verification of the product.
Verification by the customer shall not absolve Siemens of
the responsibility to provide acceptable product nor shall it
preclude subsequent rejection.
Verification Limits
Customers' rights to verification are limited to matters
pertaining to the order or contract in question and do not
include any confidential design or manufacturing matters
nor any process subject to patent right or application.
Siemens does not accept the right of any other
organization to demand changes to the Company's
quality/environmental system although requests for such
changes may be considered for inclusion within the system
during the succeeding review. Only requested changes
recognized by the Company to be of major importance, and
compatible with ISO 9001:2000 and ISO 14001:2004, will
be considered for earlier introduction.
Quality Manager
Environmental Management Representative
5 Rev. 32 8/17/2009
FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
OC No: 001125
TAG No: 324-FC001 @013
 INDUCTION MOTOR DATA
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc
Norwood, Ohio

Customer : SIEMENS CHILE

Order Number: 3002214798-000010 through 120

SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS FRAME DATA

Horsepower : 450 Frame : 5013Z

Service Factor : 1.00 Type : CZ
Voltage : 3300 Rotor Construction : Fabricated Copper Bar
Number of Phases : 3
Frequency, hertz : 50 Rotor Inertia (wk2), lb-ft2 : 222
Ambient, deg C : 40 Rotor Weight, lbs : 1470
Enclosure : TEFC Motor Weight, lbs : 6650
Synchronous Speed, RPM : 1500 Temp. Rise : 80 by RES @ 1SF
Percent Starting Voltage: 90 Sound Pressure Level : 83dBA @ 3ft, unloaded
Elevation (ft): 3300 Insulation Class: F-VPI

PERFORMANCE DATA

Full Load Speed, RPM : 1493 Full Load Torque, lb-ft : 1583
Current, Amps : 74.9 Starting Torque, %FLT : 77
Locked Rotor Current, % FLA : 637 Breakdown Torque, %FLT : 238
KVA/Hp : 6.06 NEMA Design : -
Code : G

0.25 0.50 0.75 Full No Locked

Load Load Load Load Load Rotor
Percent Efficiency : 90.1 93.7 94.6 94.6 N/A N/A
Percent Power Factor : 52.0 72.7 80.2 82.9 6.2 14.6
Current, Amps : 31.3 43.1 58.1 74.9 23.3 477

100 90 % Voltage RTD Settings (°C): Alarm Shutdown

Safe Stalled Time, Motor Hot : 63.0 79.0 Seconds Stator: 155 170
Safe Stalled Time, Motor Cold: 72.0 91.0 Seconds Bearings: 100 105

Time Constants : 1.869 Seconds Open Circuit

0.109 Seconds Short Circuit (AC)
X/R Ratio : 19.240

Prepared by DSB on 05/12/09

Please Note:
1. All values are typical.
2. Guaranteed values are indicated in (GUAR)
 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Norwood, Ohio
Induction Motor Data

Customer SIEMENS CHILE

Serial Number 3002214798-000010
Customer Order 4.44E+09

Equivalent Circuit Parameters

for Polyphase Induction Motors

Rated RPM Stalled

R1 0.20693 0.20693
X1 2.7728 2.7728
R2 0.13795 0.53038
X2 2.87644 2.10791
XM 79.0267
Rre 2188.02
X''d 4.0378

Note : Equivalent circuit parameters based on equivalent wye circuit.

Date: 5/20/2009
 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Induction Motor

Percent Full Load Current and Torque vs. Percent Speed

250 700

600
200
Percent Full Load Torque (Solid)

Percent Rated Current (Dashed)

500

150
400

300
100

200

50
100

0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Percent Synchronous Speed
SO Number: 3002214798-000010 through 120
HP: 450 HP
Rated Voltage: 3300 V
Rated Current: 74.9 A Curve groups from
Rated Speed: 1493 RPM Top to Bottom are
Date: 5/12/2009 1.00, 0.90 Rated Voltage
 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Induction Motor

Calculated Time vs. Percent Full Load Current

1000

100 Running
Cold Stalled
Hot Stalled
Time in Seconds

10

0.1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Percent Full Load Current

SO Number: 3002214798-000010 through 120

HP: 450 HP
Rated Voltage: 3300 V
Rated Current: 74.9 A
Rated Speed: 1493 RPM
Date: 5/12/2009
 INDUCTION MOTOR DATA
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc
Norwood, Ohio

Customer : SIEMENS CHILE

Order Number: 3002214798-000130 through 260

SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS FRAME DATA

Horsepower : 500 Frame : 5013

Service Factor : 1.00 Type : CZ
Voltage : 3300 Rotor Construction : Fabricated Copper Bar
Number of Phases : 3
Frequency, hertz : 50 Rotor Inertia (wk2), lb-ft2 : 222
Ambient, deg C : 40 Rotor Weight, lbs : 1470
Enclosure : TEFC Motor Weight, lbs : 6650
Synchronous Speed, RPM : 1500 Temp. Rise : 80 by RES @ 1SF
Percent Starting Voltage: 90 Sound Pressure Level : 83dBA @ 3ft, unloaded
Elevation (ft): 3300 Insulation Class: F-VPI

PERFORMANCE DATA

Full Load Speed, RPM : 1492 Full Load Torque, lb-ft : 1760
Current, Amps : 82.6 Starting Torque, %FLT : 69
Locked Rotor Current, % FLA : 577 Breakdown Torque, %FLT : 214
KVA/Hp : 5.45 NEMA Design : -
Code : F

0.25 0.50 0.75 Full No Locked

Load Load Load Load Load Rotor
Percent Efficiency : 90.9 94.1 94.8 94.7 N/A N/A
Percent Power Factor : 55.5 75.0 81.4 83.4 6.2 14.6
Current, Amps : 32.3 46.2 63.4 82.6 23.3 477

100 90 % Voltage RTD Settings (°C): Alarm Shutdown

Safe Stalled Time, Motor Hot : 63.0 79.0 Seconds Stator: 155 170
Safe Stalled Time, Motor Cold: 72.0 91.0 Seconds

Time Constants : 1.869 Seconds Open Circuit

0.109 Seconds Short Circuit (AC)
X/R Ratio : 19.240

Prepared by DSB on 05/07/09

Please Note:
1. All values are typical.
2. Guaranteed values are indicated in (GUAR)
 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Norwood, Ohio
Induction Motor Data

Customer SIEMENS CHILE

Serial Number 3002214798-000130
Customer Order 4.44E+09

Equivalent Circuit Parameters

for Polyphase Induction Motors

Rated RPM Stalled

R1 0.20693 0.20693
X1 2.7728 2.7728
R2 0.13796 0.53038
X2 2.87639 2.10791
XM 79.0267
Rre 2188.02
X''d 4.0404

Note : Equivalent circuit parameters based on equivalent wye circuit.

Date: 5/11/2009
 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Induction Motor

Percent Full Load Current and Torque vs. Percent Speed

250 700

600
200
Percent Full Load Torque (Solid)

Percent Rated Current (Dashed)

500

150
400

300
100

200

50
100

0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Percent Synchronous Speed
SO Number: 3002214798-000130/260
HP: 500 HP
Rated Voltage: 3300 V
Rated Current: 82.6 A Curve groups from
Rated Speed: 1492 RPM Top to Bottom are
Date: 5/7/2009 1.00, 0.90 Rated Voltage
 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Induction Motor

Calculated Time vs. Percent Full Load Current

1000

100 Running
Cold Stalled
Hot Stalled
Time in Seconds

10

0.1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Percent Full Load Current

SO Number: 3002214798-000130/260
HP: 500 HP
Rated Voltage: 3300 V
Rated Current: 82.6 A
Rated Speed: 1492 RPM
Date: 5/7/2009
H. - REDUCTORES
I. - ACTUADORES
INSTRUCTIVO DE DESEMBALAJE DE ACTUADORES CON POSICIONADOR

Figura N° 1
Figura N° 2
Figura N° 3
 Serial Number Equipos Instalados

PROYECTO 3104

TAG Equipo Marca MODELO N° Serie Observaciones

1 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 8040851 Fieldbus Foundation

2 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 8040870 Fieldbus Foundation
3 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040781 Fieldbus Foundation
4 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040805 Fieldbus Foundation
5 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 8040836 Fieldbus Foundation
6 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040812 Fieldbus Foundation
7 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040786 Fieldbus Foundation
8 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 8040868 Fieldbus Foundation
9 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040795 Fieldbus Foundation
10 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040718 Fieldbus Foundation
11 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 8040843 Fieldbus Foundation
12 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040803 Fieldbus Foundation
13 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 8040852 Fieldbus Foundation
14 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040701 Fieldbus Foundation
15 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040779 Fieldbus Foundation
16 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040800 Fieldbus Foundation
17 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040778 Fieldbus Foundation
18 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040711 Fieldbus Foundation
19 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040796 Fieldbus Foundation
20 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040695 Fieldbus Foundation
21 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040795 Fieldbus Foundation
22 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 8040873 Fieldbus Foundation
23 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040702 Fieldbus Foundation
24 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040694 Fieldbus Foundation
25 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040715 Fieldbus Foundation
26 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 8040853 Fieldbus Foundation
27 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040721 Fieldbus Foundation
28 POSICIONADOR SAMSON 3730-5 9040703 Fieldbus Foundation
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
 Air Cylinder

Series CS1
ø125, ø140, ø160, ø180, ø200, ø250, ø300

Series Variations CJ1

Standard variations Bore size
Basic Page
Series Action Type
With Copper- (mm) CJP
rod boot free
CJ2
Standard 125
Lube
Series CS1 140 CM2
160
180
Single rod 200 CG1
250
Series Non-lube 6-9-2
CS1 (ø125 to ø160 only)
300 MB

125 MB1
Air-hydro 140
Double acting

Series CS1 160 CA2

125 CS1
Lube 140
160 C76
180
Double rod 200
250 C85
Series Non-lube 6-9-21
300
CS1W
Series CS1W C95
125
Air-hydro 140 CP95
160
NCM
Low Friction NCA
Series CS1
Q
D-
Double acting

Single rod 125

Series Non-lube 140 6-9-31 -X
CS1
Q 160
20-
Data

6-9-1
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Dobule Acting, Single Rod

Series CS1
Lube, Non-lube: ø125, ø140, ø160, ø180, ø200, ø250, ø300 Air-hydro: ø125, ø140, ø160

How to Order

CS1 L 160 300 JR

Mounting style Suffix for cylinder
B Basic style Rod J Nylon tarpaulin
Foot style boot K Heat resistant tarpaulin
L
F Rod side flange style N Without cushion
G Head side flange style R With cushion in rod side

Cushion
C Single clevis style H With cushion in head side
D Double clevis style With cushion in both sides
Nil (Air-hydro type has no
T Center trunnion style
cushion.)
∗ If specifying more than one symbol,
Tubing material indicate them in alphabetically
Symbol Bore size (mm) Tubing material ∗∗ Air-hydro type has no cushion. No symbol
125 to 160 Aluminum tube indicates no cushion.
Nil
180 to 300 Steel tube
F 125 to 160 Steel tube
Cylinder stroke (mm)
(Refer to “Maximum Stroke ” on page 6-9-3.)
Type
Nil Lube Bore size
N Non-lube
Lube, Non-lube Air-hydro
H Air-hydro
125 125 mm 125 125 mm
140 140 mm 140 140 mm
160 160 mm 160 160 mm
180 180 mm
200 200 mm
250 250 mm
300 300 mm

Mounting Bracket Part No.

Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 180 200 250 300 For “How to Order” with auto switch, refer to
Foot style∗ CS1-L12 CS1-L14 CS1-L16 CS1-L18 CS1-L20 CS1-L25 CS1-L30 page 6-9-7.
Flange style CS1-F12 CS1-F14 CS1-F16 CS1-F18 CS1-F20 CS1-F25 CS1-F30
Single clevis style CS1-C12 CS1-C14 CS1-C16 CS1-C18 CS1-C20 CS1-C25 CS1-C30
Double clevis style∗∗ CS1-D12 CS1-D14 CS1-D16 CS1-D18 CS1-D20 CS1-D25 CS1-D30
∗ Order two foot brackets per cylinder.
∗∗ When ordering the double clevis, the clevis pin and the cotter pin (2 pcs.) are attached.

6-9-2
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Dobule Acting, Single Rod Series CS1
Specifications
Type Lube, Non-lube Air-hydro
Fluid Air Turbine oil
Proof pressure 1.57 MPa Note)
Maximum operating pressure 0.97 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa 0.06 MPa
Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s 0.5 to 200 mm/s
Cushion Interchangeable None
Ambient and fluid temperature 0 to 70°C (No freezing), Air-hydro type: 5 to 60°C CJ1
Thread tolerance JIS Class 2
250 or less st: +1.0
0 , 251 to 1,000 st: +1.4
0 , 1,001 to 1,500 st: +1.8
0
CJP
Stroke length tolerance (mm)
1501 to 2000 st
: +2.2
0 , 2001 to 2400 st
: +2.6
0

Basic style, Foot style, Rod side flange style,

CJ2
Mounting Head side flange style, Single clevis style,
Double clevis style, Center trunnion style CM2
Note) Item corresponding to Class 2 Pressure Vessel Act is 1.46 MPa.
CG1
Accessory MB
Rod side Head side Single Double Center
Basic Foot
Mounting
style style
flange flange clevis clevis trunnion MB1
style style style style style
Standard
equipment Clevis pin, Cotter pin — — — — —
— CA2
Rod end nut







Single knuckle joint






CS1
Option Double knuckle joint








(Clevis pin, Cotter pin) C76
Rod boot







In the case of using the rod end nut together with the single knuckle joint or double knuckle joint,
C85
refer to page 6-9-19.
C95
JIS Symbol
Maximum Stroke (mm)
CP95
Double acting
Tubing material Aluminum alloy Carbon steel tube
NCM
Mounting Basic style
bracket Basic style, Head side flange style Head side flange style
Single clevis style, Double clevis style Single clevis style Foot style NCA
Center trunnion style, Foot style Double clevis style Rod side flange style
Bore size Rod side flange style
Made to Order Specifications (mm) Center trunnion style D-
(For details, refer to page 6-17-1.) 125 1000 or less 1000 or less 1600 or less
140 1000 or less 1000 or less 1600 or less
-X
Symbol Specifications
160 1200 or less 1200 or less 1600 or less
-XA
Change of rod end shape 20-
-XB5 Oversized rod cylinder 180 — 1200 or less 2000 or less
-XC3 Special port location 200 — 1200 or less 2000 or less Data
-XC4 With heavy duty scraper 250 — 1200 or less 2400 or less
-XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110°C) 300 — 1200 or less 2400 or less
-XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel
-XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type
-XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type
-XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type Class 2 Pressure Vessel Rod Boot Material
-XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type In the case of exceeding the following strokes, the Maximum ambient
Symbol Material temperature
-XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position cylinder is subject to Class 2 Pressure Vessel Act.
-XC15
J Nylon tarpaulin 70°C
Change of tie-rod length
Bore size (mm) Cylinder stroke (mm)
-XC18 NPT finish piping port K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C ∗
180 1,569
-XC27
Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin made ∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod
of stainless steel 200 998 boot itself.
-XC30 Front trunnion 250 813
-XC35 With coil scraper 300 564

6-9-3
Series CS1
Principal Parts Material and Surface Treatment

Cover
Description Material
Rolled steel plate
Note
Black painted
Precautions
Aluminum alloy Hard anodized Be sure to read before handling.
ø125, ø140, ø160 For Safety Instructions and
Tube Carbon steel tube Inside: Hard chrome plated
Actuator Precautions, refer to
ø180, ø200, ø250, ø300 Carbon steel tube Inside: Hard chrome plated pages 6-20-3 to 6-20-6.
Lube NBR JIS B 2401 O-ring
Sliding part Non-lube NBR PNY, NLP
Warning
seal
Air-hydro NBR SKY, RPS
Do not use the cylinder as a shock
absorber.
Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated
• Using the cylinder as a shock absorber
Lube Cast iron may cause damage.
Aluminum alloy casted Chromated
Non-lube
Piston (Iron tube: Cast iron) (In the case of aluminum alloy casted)
Aluminum alloy casted Chromated
Caution
Air-hydro Do not open the cushion valve
(Iron tube: Cast iron) (In the case of aluminum alloy casted)
excessively.
• If the cushion valve is rotated excessively
Weight/Aluminum Tube: Lube (Non-lube, Air-hydro) (kg) in the opening direction could be damaged
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160
because the portion of the threads that is
engaged (counterclockwise), be aware that
14.85 17.98 24.77 the valve could slip out, or the threads
Basic style
(13.73) (16.57) (23.03) becomes too short.
16.48 20.50 27.57
Foot style Regarding the installation of a
(15.36) (19.09) (25.83)
knuckle joint
17.53 22.98 31.16 • Please contact SMC if a knuckle joint must
Rod side flange style
(16.41) (21.57) (29.42) be installed on the piston rod by using the
17.53 22.98 31.16 rod end nut.
Basic Head side flange style
weight (16.41) (21.57) (29.42)
17.92 22.27 30.26
Single clevis style
(16.80) (20.86) (28.52)
Double clevis style 18.38 23.02 31.11
(Clevis pin, Cotter pin) (17.26) (21.61) (29.37)
18.98 23.71 32.17
Trunnion style
(17.86) (22.30) (30.43)
Additional weight per
1.77 1.96 2.39
each 100 mm of stroke

Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56

Accessory Double knuckle 1.37 1.81 2.48

bracket (Knuckie pin, Cotter pin)

Rod end nut 0.16 0.16 0.23

∗ ( ): Denotes the non-lube and air-hydro type.

Calculation example: CS1L160-500

• Basic weight·················27.57 (Foot style, ø160)
• Additional weight··········2.39/100 stroke
• Cylinder stroke·············500 stroke
27.57 + 2.39 x 500/100 = 39.52 kg

Weight/Steel Tube (kg)

Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 180 200 250 300
Basic style 15.20 18.38 25.24 34.16 42.66 79.78 115.94
Foot style 16.83 20.90 28.04 38.36 47.54 89.28 133.22
Rod side flange style 17.88 23.38 31.63 43.99 54.57 101.62 146.14
Standard Head side flange style 17.88 23.38 31.63 43.99 54.57 101.62 146.14
weight Single clevis style 18.27 22.67 30.73 42.55 52.56 98.17 149.22
Double clevis 18.73 23.42 31.58 44.23 54.59 101.36 154.96
(Clevis pin, Cotter pin)

Trunnion style 19.33 24.11 32.64 44.78 56.65 107.62 156.37

Additional weight per
each 100 mm of stroke 2.66 3.01 3.58 4.95 5.75 9.08 12.15
Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56 3.07 2.90 5.38 10.82
Accessory Double knuckle
bracket (Knuckle pin, Cotter pin)
1.37 1.81 2.48 4.74 4.59 9.22 17.17
Rod end nut 0.16 0.16 0.23 0.32 0.85 1.26 1.43

6-9-4
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Dobule Acting, Single Rod Series CS1
Construction
Lube

CJ1
CJP
Non-lube
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
In the case of aluminum tube
MB1

Air-hydro
CA2
CS1
C76
C85
C95
In the case of aluminum tube
CP95
Component Parts Seal List NCM
No. Description Material Note Part no.
No. Description Material
q Rod cover Rolled steel plate Black painted ø125 ø140 ø160 ø180 ø200 ø250 ø300 NCA
w Head cover Rolled steel plate Black painted Lube
ø125 to ø160 Aluminum alloy Hard anodized @3 Wiper ring SDR-36 SDR-36 SDR-40 SDR-45 SDR-50 SDR-60 SDR-70 D-
e Cylinder
tube ø125 to ø300 Carbon steel tube Inside: Hard chrome plated ∗∗ PCS-85 (R)
@4 Cushion seal DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-60S DSM-60S DSM-75S
r Piston Cast iron∗∗ DSM-75S (H) -X
t Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated @5 Rod seal P36 P36 P40 P45 P50A P60 P70
y Retaining plate Cast iron Black painted @6 Piston seal P115 P130 P150 P165 P185 P235 P285 20-
NBR
u Bushing Lead-bronze casted @7 Valve seal P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7
i Valve guide Brass @8 Tube gasket C120 C135 C155 C175 C195 CS160-1618-G4 CS160-1618-G5 Data
∗∗
o Tie-rod Carbon steel Chromated @9 Piston gasket G25 G25 G25 G35 G35 G45 G45
!0 Tie-rod nut Rolled steel Black zinc chromated #0 Retaining plate gasket G55 G55 G55 G65 G65 G80 G90
∗∗
!1 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated #1 Guide gasket N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5
!2 Retaining plate bolt Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated Non-lube Seals except @5 and @6 are the same as for the lube-type.
!3 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated @5 Rod seal PNY-36 PNY-36 PNY-40 PNY-45 PNY-50 PNY-60 PNY-70
NBR
!4 Cushion ring A Rolled steel Zinc chromated @6 Piston seal NLP-125A NLP-140A NLP-160A NLP-180A NLP-200A NLP-250A NLP-300A
!5 Cushion ring B Rolled steel Zinc chromated Air-hydro Seals except @5 and @6 are the same as for the lube-type. (Except cushion seal)
!6 Cushion valve Rolled steel Electroless nickel plated Part no.
No. Description Material
!7 Spacer A Rolled steel Zinc chromated ø125 ø140 ø160
!8 Spacer B Rolled steel Zinc chromated @5 Rod seal SKY-36 SKY-36 SKY-40
NBR
!9 Air releasing B Rolled steel Zinc chromated @6 Piston seal RPS-125 RPS-140 RPS-160
@0 Air releasing A Chromium molybdenum steel
@1 Check ball Chrome bearing steel Replacement Parts (Seal kit)
@2 Tie-rod reinforcement ring∗ Rolled steel Black painted • For replacement parts no. (seal kit) for air cylinder standard type Series
CS1, refer to page 6-9-6.
#2 Wear ring Resin
∗∗ • Seal kits does not include cushion seal, piston seal and guide gasket
∗ In the case of long strokes because those are not replaceable parts.
∗∗ Aluminum tubing material of non-lube and air-hydro type
is material is an aluminum alloy casted.

6-9-5
Series CS1
Standard/Replacement Parts (Seal kit)
When ordering the replacement parts (seal kits) Standard (Lube)
for standard style Series CS1 air cylinders,
Bore size 23 25 26 27 28 30
indicate the order number listed in the table on Kit no. Retaining plate
the right. (mm) Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket gasket
Each set of replacement parts contains the 125 CS1-125A-PS SDR-36 P36 P115 P7 C120 G55
following: Wiper ring, rod seal, piston seal,
valve seal, tube gasket, and push plate gasket 140 CS1-140A-PS SDR-36 P36 P130 P7 C135 G55
(for 1 cylinder). 160 CS1-160A-PS SDR-40 P40 P150 P7 C155 G55
180 CS1-180A-PS SDR-45 P45 P165 P7 C175 G65
200 CS1-200A-PS SDR-50 P50A P185 P7 C195 G65
250 CS1-250A-PS SDR-60 P60 P235 P7 CS160-1618-G4 G80
300 CS1-300A-PS SDR-70 P70 P285 P7 CS160-1618-G5 G90

Standard (Non-lube)
Bore size 23 25 26 27 28 30
Kit no. Retaining plate
(mm) Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket gasket
125 CS1N125A-PS SDR-36 PNY-36 NLP-125A P7 C120 G55
140 CS1N140A-PS SDR-36 PNY-36 NLP-140A P7 C135 G55
160 CS1N160A-PS SDR-40 PNY-40 NLP-160A P7 C155 G55
180 CS1N180A-PS SDR-45 PNY-45 NLP-180A P7 C175 G65
200 CS1N200A-PS SDR-50 PNY-50 NLP-200A P7 C195 G65
250 CS1N250A-PS SDR-60 PNY-60 NLP-250A P7 CS160-1618-G4 G80
300 CS1N300A-PS SDR-70 PNY-70 NLP-300A P7 CS160-1618-G5 G90

Air-hydro
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket Retaining
gasket
plate

125 CS1H125A-PS SDR-36 SKY-36 RPS-125 P7 C120 G55

140 CS1H140A-PS SDR-36 SKY-36 RPS-140 P7 C135 G55
160 CS1H160A-PS SDR-40 SKY-40 RPS-160 P7 C155 G55

Low Friction
23 25 26 27 28 30
Bore size
(mm)
Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket Retaining
gasket
plate

125 CS1Q125A-PS SFR-36K PNY-36 NLP-125A P7 C120 G55

140 CS1Q140A-PS SFR-36K PNY-36 NLP-140A P7 C135 G55
160 CS1Q160A-PS SFR-40K PNY-40 NLP-160A P7 C155 G55

6-9-6
 Air Cylinder: With Auto Switch
Double Acting, Single Rod

Series CDS1
ø125, ø140, ø160, ø180, ø200

How to Order CJ1

CDS1 L 160 300 JR Y7BW CJP

Number of auto switches CJ2
Built-in magnet Nil 2 pcs.
3 3 pcs.
Mounting style S 1 pc.
CM2
B Basic style n “n” pcs.
Type
L Foot style
Nil Lube
CG1
F Rod side flange style Auto switch
N Non-lube
G Head side flange style
H Air-hydro
Nil Without auto switch MB
C Single clevis style ∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer
D Double clevis style to the table below.
T Center trunnion style
Bore size ∗ D-Z7
/Z80/Y59
/Y69
/Y7

types are MB1
Lube, Non-lube Air-hydro shipped together, (but not assembled).
125 125 mm 125 125 mm (But, only the mounting bracket for the
above models is assembled at the time of
CA2
140 140 mm 140 140 mm
shipment.)
160 160 mm 160 160 mm CS1
180 180 mm Suffix for cylinder
200 200 mm J Nylon tarpaulin
Cylinder stroke Rod boot
K Heat resistant tarpaulin C76
(Refer to “Minimum/Maximum Stroke” on page 6-9-8.) N Without cushion
R With cushon in rod side C85
H With cushon in head side
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model Cushion
With cushion in both sides
If a built-in magnet cylinder without auto switch is Nil (Air-hydro type has no cushion.)
C95
required, there is no need to enter the symbol for
∗ If specifying more than one symbol, indicate them
auto switch. Example) CDS1B125-200 alphabetically. CP95
∗∗ Air-hydro type has no cushion. No symbol indicates no
cushion. NCM
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to page 6-16-1 for further information on auto switches.
Auto switch model Lead wire length (m) ∗
Indicator light

Load voltage
Electrical Wiring NCA
Type Special function
entry (Output) Tie-rod Band 0.5 3 5 Pre-wire Applicable load
DC AC mounting mounting (Nil) (L) (Z) connector
3-wire
D-
IC
(NPN equivalent) — 5V — Z76 —

— — —
circuit
Grommet



-X
Reed switch

100 V Z73 — — Relay,

— 100 V, 200 V A54 —


— PLC
20-
Yes

Terminal 12 V — — A33 — — — — PLC

conduit 2-wire 24 V — A34 — — — — —
100 V, 200 V
DIN terminal — A44 — — — — Relay, Data
Diagnostic indication PLC
Grommet — — A59W —

— —
(2-color indication)
3-wire (NPN) Y59A —

  IC
24 V 5 V, 12 V —
3-wire (PNP) Y7P —

  circuit
Grommet
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 —

 —
— 2-wire —
12 V Y59B —

 
Solid state switch

Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39 — — — — IC circuit

conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39 — — — — —
Relay,
Yes

3-wire (NPN) Y7NW —

  IC

Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V PLC
3-wire (PNP) 24 V — Y7PW —

  circuit
(2-color indication)
Y7BW —

 
Water resistant Grommet 2-wire 12 V —
Y7BA — —
 
(2-color indication)
With diagnostic output 4-wire IC
(NPN)
5 V, 12 V F59F —

 
(2-color indication) circuit
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··········Nil (Example) A54 ∗ Solid state switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.
3 m·········· L (Example) A54L
5 m·········· Z (Example) A54Z
• Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 6-9-20 for details.
• For details about auto switches with pre-wire connector, refer to page 6-16-60.

6-9-7
Series CDS1
Specifications
Type Lube, Non-lube Air-hydro
Fluid Air Turbine oil
Bore size (mm) 125, 140, 160 180, 200 125, 140, 160
Proof pressure 1.57 MPa 1.2 MPa 1.57 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 0.97 MPa 0.7 MPa 0.97 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa 0.06 MPa
Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s 0.5 to 200 mm/s
Cushion Interchangeable None
Ambient and fluid temperature 0 to 60°C (No freezing), Air-hydro type: 5 to 60°C
Thread tolerance JIS Class 2
Stroke length tolerance (mm) 250 or less st: +1.0
0 , 251 to 1,000 st: +1.4
0 , 1,001 to 1,500 st: +1.8
0

Basic style, Foot style, Rod side flange style, Head side flange style,
Mounting
Single clevis style, Double clevis style, Center trunnion style

JIS Symbol Maximum Stroke

Double acting Maximum stroke
Bore size
(mm) Basic style, Head side flange style, Single clevis style,
Foot style, Rod side flange style
Double clevis style, Center trunnion style
125, 140 1000 or less 1400 or less
160 1200 or less 1400 or less
180 1200 or less 1500 or less
Made to Order Specifications
200 998 or less 998 or less
(For details, refer to page 6-17-1.)
ø200: Cylinders of the stroke range of 998 ø200: Cylinders of the stroke range of
Symbol Specifications Note
to 1200 are special products. 998 to 1500 are special products.
-XA
Change of rod end shape
-XB5 Oversized rod cylinder Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting n: Quantity
-XC3 Special port location Center trunnion
Auto switch No. of auto Mounting brackets
-XC4 With heavy duty scraper switches mounted other than center trunnion ø125 ø140 ø160 ø180 ø200
-XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110°C) D-A5
/A6
2 (Different sides,
D-A59W 25 125 135 135 150 150
Same side), 1
-XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel D-F5
/J5
(n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
D-F5
W/J59W 25 + 55 2 125 + 55 2 135 + 55 150 + 55 2
-XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type D-F5BAL/F59F n (Same side) n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16···
2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16···
-XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type 2 (Different sides,
35 145 155 170
-XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type Same side), 1
D-F5NTL (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
-XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type n (Same side) 35 + 55 2 145 + 55 2 155 + 55 2 170 + 55 2
n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16···
-XC14 Change of trunnio bracket mounting position
Different sides 35 110 150
-XC15 Change of tie-rod length 2
D-A3
Same side 100 110 150
-XC18 NPT finish piping port D-G39 Different sides 35 + 30 (n – 2) 110 + 30 (n – 2) n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· 150 + 100 (n – 2)
n = 2, 4, 6, 8···
Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin made D-K39 n
-XC27 Same side 100 + 100 (n – 2) 110 + 100 (n – 2) n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· 150 + 30 (n – 2)
of stainless steel n = 2, 4, 6, 8···
1 15 110 150
-XC30 Front trunnion
Different sides 35 110 150
-XC35 With coil scraper 2
Same side 55 110 150
150 + 30 (n – 2)
D-A44 Different sides 35 + 30 (n – 2) 110 + 30 (n – 2) n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 2, 4, 6, 8···
n
150 + 50 (n – 2)
Same side 55 + 55 (n – 2) 110 + 50 (n – 2) n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 2, 4, 6, 8···
1 15 110 150
2 (Different sides,
D-Z7
/Z80 Same side), 1
15 105 110 115
D-Y59
/Y7P (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
D-Y7
W n 15 + 40 2 105 + 40 2 110 + 40 2 115 + 40 2
n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16···
2 (Different sides,
10 90 95 100
D-Y69
/Y7PV Same side), 1
D-Y7
WV 10 + 30
(n – 2)
90 + 30
(n – 4)
95 + 30
(n – 4)
100 + 30 2
(n – 4)
n 2 2 2
n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16···
2 (Different sides,
20 115 120 125 130
Same side), 1
D-Y7BAL (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
n 20 + 45 2 115 + 45 2 120 + 45 125 + 45
2 2 130 + 45 2
n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16···

6-9-8
 Air Cylinder: With Auto Switch
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CDS1
Principal Parts Material and Surface Treatment
Description Material Note
Cover Rolled steel plate Black painted
ø125, ø140, ø160
Tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
ø180, ø200
Lube type NBR JIS B 2401 O-ring ∗
Sliding
part seal Non-lube type NBR PNY, NLP
Air-hydro type NBR SKY, RPS
Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated CJ1
Piston Aluminum alloy casted Chromated
∗ Foot style, Rod side flange style: In the case of bore size of ø125 and ø140, the stoke CJP
range is 1001 to 1400.
In the case of ø160, piston seals of the stroke range 1200 to 1400 are NLP.
∗ In the case of bore size ø180 and ø200, piston seals are NLP.
CJ2
CM2
Weight (kg)
CG1
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 180 200
Basic style 13.79 16.64 23.11 27.55 36.11 MB
Foot style 15.42 19.16 25.91 31.75 40.99
Basic Rod side flange style 16.47 21.64 29.50 37.38 48.02 MB1
weight Head side flange style 16.47 21.64 29.50 37.38 48.02
Single clevis style 16.86 20.93 28.60 35.94 46.01
CA2
Double clevis
17.32 21.68 29.45 37.62 48.04
(Clevis pin, Cotter pin)
CS1
Trunnion style 17.92 22.37 30.51 38.71 50.10
Additional weight per each 100 mm of stroke 1.77 1.96 2.39 2.85 3.42 C76
Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56 3.07 2.90
Accessory
bracket
Double knuckle
(Knuckle pin, Cotter pin) 1.37 1.81 2.48 4.74 4.59 C85
Rod end nut 0.16 0.16 0.23 0.32 0.85
C95
CP95
NCM
Weight (kg)

Type of Auto switch Lead wire Auto switch Switch + Switch mounting bracket NCA
auto switch model length unit ø125 ø140 ø160 ø180 ø200
D-A5
/A6
0.5 m 0.024 0.038 0.038 0.041 0.045 0.048 D-
D-A59W 3m 0.080 0.094 0.094 0.097 0.101 0.104
D-A3
— 0.116 0.156 0.160 0.165 0.168 0.173 -X
D-A44 — 0.114 0.154 0.158 0.163 0.166 0.171
Reed
2-wire 0.009 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.043 0.049
20-
switch
0.5 m
3-wire 0.010 0.037 0.037 0.039 0.044 0.050
D-Z7
/Z80 Data
2-wire 0.049 0.076 0.076 0.078 0.083 0.089
3m
3-wire 0.055 0.082 0.082 0.084 0.089 0.095
0.5 m 0.023 0.037 0.037 0.042 0.046 0.049
D-F5
/J5

3m 0.081 0.095 0.095 0.098 0.102 0.105
D-G39/K39 — 0.116 0.156 0.160 0.165 0.168 0.173
2-wire 0.009 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.043 0.049
0.5 m
D-Y59
/Y69
3-wire 0.010 0.037 0.037 0.039 0.044 0.050
Solid state
D-Y7P/Y7PV 2-wire 0.050 0.077 0.077 0.079 0.084 0.090
3m
switch 3-wire 0.053 0.080 0.080 0.082 0.087 0.093
2-wire 0.011
0.5 m 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.045 0.051
D-Y7
W 3-wire 0.011
D-Y7
WV 2-wire 0.054
3m
3-wire 0.054 0.081 0.081 0.083 0.088 0.094

D-Y7BAL 3m 2-wire 0.054

6-9-9
Series CDS1
Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 180 200
Foot style ∗ CS1-L12 CS1-L14 CS1-L16 CS1-L18 CS1-L20
Flange style CS1-F12 CS1-F14 CS1-F16 CS1-F18 CS1-F20
Single clevis style CS1-C12 CS1-C14 CS1-C16 CS1-C18 CS1-C20
Double clevis style ∗∗ CS1-D12 CS1-D14 CS1-D16 CS1-D18 CS1-D20
∗ Order two foot brackets per cylinder.
∗∗ When ordering the double clevis, the clevis pin and the cotter pin (2 pcs.) are attached.

Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.

Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model
160 125180 140
200
D-A5/A6/A59W/F5/J5/F5NTL
BT-12 BT-12 BT-16 BT-18A BT-20
D-F5W/J59W/F5BAL/F59F
D-A3/A44/G39/K39 BS1-125 BS1-140 BS1-160 BS1-180 BS1-200
D-Z7/Z80/Y59/Y69/Y7P
D-Y7PV/Y7W/Y7WV BS4-125 BS4-125 BS4-160 BS4-180 BS4-200
D-Y7BAL
∗ Mounting screws set made of stainless steel
The following set of mounting screws made of stainless steel is also available. Use it in
accordance with the operating environment.
(Please order the mounting band separately, since it is not included.)
BBA1: For D-A5/A6/F5/J5
“D-F5BAL” switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above when
shipped.

With Auto Switch/Replacement Parts (Seal kit)

When ordering the replacement parts (seal kits) Lube (1)
for Series CDS1 cylinder with auto switches,
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket Retaining plate gasket
indicate the order number listed in the table on
the right. 125 CS1-125A-PS SDR-36 P36 P115 P7 C120 G55
Each set of replacement parts contains the 140 CS1-140A-PS SDR-36 P36 P130 P7 C135 G55
following: wiper ring, rod seal, piston seal, valve 160 CS1-160A-PS SDR-40 P40 P150 P7 C155 G55
seal, tube gasket, and push plate gasket (for 1
180 CDS1-180A-PS SDR-45 P45 NLP-180A P7 C175 G65
cylinder).
200 CDS1-200A-PS SDR-50 P50A NLP-200A P7 C195 G65

Non-lube
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket Retaining plate gasket
125 CS1N125A-PS SDR-36 PNY-36 NLP-125A P7 C120 G55
140 CS1N140A-PS SDR-36 PNY-36 NLP-140A P7 C135 G55
160 CS1N160A-PS SDR-40 PNY-40 NLP-160A P7 C155 G55
180 CS1N180A-PS SDR-45 PNY-45 NLP-180A P7 C175 G65
200 CS1N200A-PS SDR-50 PNY-50 NLP-200A P7 C195 G65

Lube (2)∗
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket Retaining plate gasket
125 CDS1L125A-PS SDR-36 P36 NLP-125A P7 C120 G55
140 CDS1L140A-PS SDR-36 P36 NLP-140A P7 C135 G55
160 CDS1L160A-PS SDR-40 P40 NLP-160A P7 C155 G55
∗ Foot style, Rod side flange style: ø125, ø140—1001 to 1400 stroke, ø160—1201 to 1400 stroke

Air-hydro
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket Retaining plate gasket
125 CS1H125A-PS SDR-36 SKY-36 RPS-125 P7 C120 G55
140 CS1H140A-PS SDR-36 SKY-36 RPS-140 P7 C135 G55
160 CS1H160A-PS SDR-40 SKY-40 RPS-160 P7 C155 G55

6-9-10
 Air Cylinder: With Auto Switch
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CDS1
Construction
Lube

(1) Foot style: Rod side flange style

CJ1
In the case of ø150 to ø140
1001 to 1400 st CJP
In the case of ø160
1201 to 1400 st
Non-lube (2) In the case of ø180, ø200 CJ2
(1), (2): Non-lube type is used.
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
Air-hydro: ø125, ø140, ø160 only
CS1
C76
C85
C95
CP95
NCM
Component Parts Seal List NCA
No. Description Material Note Part no.
No. Description Material
q Rod cover Rolled steel plate Black painted ø125 ø140 ø160 ø180 ø200 D-
w Head cover Rolled steel plate Black painted Lube (1) (For lube-type 2, refer to page 6-9-5.)
e Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized @8 Wiper ring SDR-36 SDR-36 SDR-40 SDR-45 SDR-50 -X
r Piston Aluminum alloy casted Chromated @9∗ Cushion seal DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-60S DSM-60S
t Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated #0 Rod seal P36 P36 P40 P45 P50A
y Retaining plate Cast iron Black painted #1 Piston seal P115 P130 P150 NLP-180A NLP-200A
20-
u Bushing Lead-bronze casted #2 Valve seal NBR P7 P7 P7 P7 P7
i Valve guide Brass #3 Tube gasket C120 C135 C155 C175 C195 Data
o Tie-rod Carbon steel Chromated #4∗ Piston gasket G25 G25 G25 G35 G35
!0 Tie-rod nut Rolled steel Black zinc chromated #5 Retaining plate gasket G55 G55 G55 G65 G65
!1 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated #6∗ Guide gasket N-12.5-1.5
!2 Retaining plate bolt Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated Non-lube Seals except #0 and #1 are the same as lube type.
!3 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated #0 Rod seal PNY-36 PNY-36 PNY-40 PNY-45 PNY-50
!4 Cushion ring A Rolled steel Zinc chromated NBR
#1 Piston seal NLP-125A NLP-140A NLP-160A NLP-180A NLP-200A
!5 Cushion ring B Rolled steel Zinc chromated Air-hydro Seals except #0 and #1 are the same as lube type.
!6 Cushion valve Rolled steel Electroless nickel plated
Part no.
!7 Spacer A Rolled steel Zinc chromated No. Description Material
ø125 ø140 ø160
!8 Spacer B Rolled steel Zinc chromated
#0 Rod seal SKY-36 SKY-36 SKY-40
!9 Air releasing B Rolled steel Zinc chromated
#1 Piston seal
NBR
RPS-125 RPS-140 RPS-160
@0 Air releasing A Chromium molybdenum steel
@1 Check ball Chrome bearing steel Replacement Parts (Seal kit)
@2 Auto switch — • For replacement part no. (seal kits) of cylinder with auto switch Series CDS1,
@3 Set screw Chromium molybdenum steel Zinc chromated refer to page 6-9-10.
@4 Switch mounting bracket Aluminum alloy ∗ • Seal kits does not include cushion seal, piston seal and guide gasket because
@5 Switch mounting screw Copper wire Nickel plated those are not replaceable parts.
@6 Magnet —
@7 Wear ring Resin

6-9-11
Series C
S1
Basic Style: CS1B
Lube (CS1B), Non-lube type (CS1BN), Air-hydro type (CS1BH)

With rod boot

Width across flats KA

S + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke

With auto switch: CDS1B

With rod boot

Width across flats KA ~

=

~
=
~
=

ZZ1 + l + Stroke S + Stroke

ZZ + Stroke

Bore size Stroke range∗

Type
(mm) (mm) A AL
B
C D E EA F FA G J K KA M MM N P S
1
Lube 125 Up to 1000 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 27 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98
1
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 27 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 30.5 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4 106
3
180 Up to 1200 63 60 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 35 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 111
3
Lube 200 Up to 1200 63 60 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 35 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 111
Non-lube 250 Up to 1200 71 67 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 41.5 M56 x 2 49 1 141
300 Up to 1200 80 76 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 51.5 M64 x 2 49 1 146
With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only
Type Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot
Type Bore size Stroke range Without rod boot With rod boot
S
(mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ1 (mm) (mm) ZZ ZZ1
Lube 125 110 235 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 258 Lube 125 Up to 1000 98 235 258
Non-lube 140 110 235 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 258 Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 98 235 258
Air-hydro 160 120 256.5 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 277.5 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 106 256.5 277.5
180 135 281 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 299 Lube 180 Up to 1200 115 285 303
Lube 200 135 281 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 299 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 120 290 308
Non-lube 250 160 342.5 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 358.5 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as standard
300 175 372.5 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 387.5 type.
∗∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height,
∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. refer to page 6-9-20.
∗∗∗Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.

6-9-12
 Air Cylinder Series C
S1
Foot Style: CS1L
Lube (CS1L), Non-lube (CS1LN), Air-hydro (CS1LH)
Width across S + Stroke
With rod boot flats KA

CJ1
CJP
LS + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke
CJ2
CM2
Long stroke Width across S + Stroke
With rod boot flats KA CG1
MB
MB1
CA2

LS + Stroke
CS1
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke
C76
With auto switch: CDS1L
Width across S + Stroke ~
= C85
flats KA
With rod boot C95
CP95
~
=

NCM
~
=

NCA
LS + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke D-

Type Bore size Stroke range∗ Long stroke

A AL B
C D E EA F FA G J K KA LD LH LS LT LX LY MM N P RT
-X
(mm) (mm) range (mm)

Lube 125 Up to 1400 1401 to 1600 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 85 188 8 100 157.5 M30 x 1.5 35 1/2 36 20-
Non-lube 140 Up to 1400 1401 to 1600 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 100 188 9 112 180.5 M30 x 1.5 35 1/2 36
Air-hydro160 Up to 1400 1401 to 1600 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 19 106 206 9 118 197 M36 x 1.5 39 3/4 45 Data
180 Up to 1800 1801 to 2000 63 60 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 24 125 231 10 132 227 M40 x 1.5 39 3/4 45
Lube 200 Up to 1800 1801 to 2000 63 60 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 24 132 231 10 150 245 M45 x 1.5 39 3/4 45
Non-lube 250 Up to 2000 2001 to 2400 71 67 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 29 160 301 12 180 298.5 M56 x 2 49 1 55
300 Up to 2000 2001 to 2400 80 76 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 33 200 326 15 212 365 M64 x 2 49 1 55
With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only
Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot Bore size Stroke range Without rod boot With rod boot
Type RY S X Y Type S LS
(mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ1 (mm) (mm) ZZ ZZ1
Lube 125 164 98 45 20 110 273 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 296 Lube 125 Up to 1400 98 188 273 296
Non-lube 140 184 98 45 30 110 283 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 306 Non-lube 140 Up to 1400 98 188 283 306
Air-hydro160 204 106 50 25 120 301 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 322 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1400 106 206 301 322
180 228 111 60 30 135 336 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 354 Lube 180 Up to 1500 115 235 340 358
Lube 200 257 111 60 30 135 336 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 354 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 120 240 345 363
Non-lube 250 325 141 80 40 160 421 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 437 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as
300 390 146 90 40 175 451 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 466 standard type.
∗∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height,
∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. refer to page 6-9-20.
∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page
6-9-8.

6-9-13
Series C
S1
Rod Side Flange Style: CS1F
Lube (CS1F), Non-lube (CS1FN), Air-hydro (CS1FH)

Width across
flats KA
With rod boot

S + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke

Long stroke
Width across
flats KA
With rod boot

S + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke

With auto switch: CDS1F

~
=
Width across
With rod boot flats KA
~
=
~
=

S + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke

Stroke∗ Without rod boot With rod boot

Type Bore size range A AL B B
C
D E EA F FA FD FT FX FY FZ G J K KA M S N P MM
(mm) (mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ1
Lube 125 Up to 1400 50 47 145 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 19 14 190 100 230 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 30 98 35 1
/2 M30 x 1.5 110 238 75 40 133 261
Non-lube 140 Up to 1400 50 47 160 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 19 20 212 112 255 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 24 98 35 1
/2 M30 x 1.5 110 232 75 40 133 255
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1400 56 53 180 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 19 20 236 118 275 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 26 106 39 0.2 x
3
/4 M36 x 1.5 120 252 75 40 141 273
Stroke
180 Up to 1800 63 60 200 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 24 25 265 132 320 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 31 111 39 3
/4 M40 x 1.5 135 277 85 45 153 295
Lube 200 Up to 1800 63 60 225 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 24 25 280 150 335 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 31 111 39 3
/4 M45 x 1.5 135 277 90 45 153 295
Non-lube 250 Up to 2000 71 67 275 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 29 30 355 180 420 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 35 141 49 1 M56 x 2 160 336 105 55 176 0.17 x 352
300 Up to 2000 80 76 330 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 33 30 400 212 475 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 48 146 49 1 M64 x 2 175 369 115 55 190 Stroke 384
Long Stroke With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only
Bore size Long stroke Without rod boot With rod boot Bore size Stroke range Without rod boot With rod boot
Type M1 M2 RT RY Type S
(mm) range (mm) ZZ ZZ1 (mm) (mm) ZZ ZZ1
Lube 125 1401 to 1600 22 22 36 164 230 253 Lube 125 Up to 1400 98 238 261
Non-lube 140 1401 to 1600 19 19 36 184 227 250 Non-lube 140 Up to 1400 98 232 255
Air-hydro 160 1401 to 1600 22 22 45 204 248 269 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1400 106 252 273
180 1801 to 2000 26 26 45 228 272 290 Lube 180 Up to 1500 115 281
299
Lube 200 1801 to 2000 26 26 45 257 272 290 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 120 286 304
Non-lube 250 2001 to 2400 30 30 55 325 331 347 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as standard
300 2001 to 2400 36 36 55 390 357 372 type.
∗∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height,
∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. refer to page 6-9-20.
∗∗∗Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.

6-9-14
 Air Cylinder Series C
S1
Head Side Flange Style: CS1G
Lube (CS1G), Non-lube (CS1GN), Air-hydro (CS1GH)

Width across
With rod boot flats KA

CJ1
CJP
S + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke
CJ2
CM2
With auto switch: CDS1G CG1
Width across ~
=
flats KA MB
With rod boot
MB1

~
=
CA2

~
=
CS1

ZZ1 + l + Stroke
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
C76
C85
C95
CP95
NCM
NCA
Bore size Stroke range∗
Type
(mm) (mm) A AL B B
C
D E EA F FA FD FT FX FY FZ G J K KA MM N P D-
1
Lube 125 Up to 1000 50 47 145 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 19 14 190 100 230 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 M30 x 1.5 35 /2
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 50 47 160 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 19 20 212 112 255 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 M30 x 1.5 35 1
/2
-X
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 56 53 180 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 19 20 236 118 275 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4
180 Up to 1200 63 60 200 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 24 25 265 132 320 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 M40 x 1.5 39 3
/4
20-
3
Lube 200 Up to 1200 63 60 225 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 24 25 280 150 335 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 M45 x 1.5 39 /4
Non-lube 250 Up to 1200 71 67 275 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 29 30 355 180 420 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 M56 x 2 49 1
Data
300 Up to 1200 80 76 330 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 33 30 400 212 475 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 M64 x 2 49 1
With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only
Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot Bore size Stroke range Without rod boot With rod boot
Type S Type S
(mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ1 (mm) (mm) ZZ ZZ1
Lube 125 98 110 222 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 245 Lube 125 Up to 1000 98 222 245
Non-lube 140 98 110 228 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 251 Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 98 228 251
Air-hydro 160 106 120 246 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 267 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 106 246 267
180 111 135 271 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 289 Lube 180 Up to 1200 115 275 293
Lube 200 111 135 271 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 289 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 120 280 298
Non-lube 250 141 160 331 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 347 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as standard type.
300 ∗∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer to page 6-
146 175 351 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 366
9-20.
∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. ∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.

6-9-15
Series C
S1
Single Clevis Style: CS1C
Lube (CS1C), Non-lube (CS1CN), Air-hydro (CS1CH)

Width across
With rod boot flats KA

S + Stroke
Z1 + l + Stroke Z + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke

With auto switch: CDS1C

Width across ~
=
With rod boot flats KA

~
=
~
=
S + Stroke
Z1 + l + Stroke Z + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke

Bore size Stroke range∗

Type A AL
B
C CDH10 CT CX D E EA F FA G J K KA L MM N P RR
(mm) (mm)
1
Lube 125 Up to 1000 50 47 145 115 25 +0.084
0 17 32 –0.1
–0.3 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 65 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 29
1
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 50 47 161 128 28 +0.084
0 17 36 –0.1
–0.3 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 75 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 32
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 56 53 182 144 32 +0.100
0 20 40 –0.1
–0.3 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 80 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4 36
3
180 Up to 1200 63 60 204 162 40 +0.100
0 23 50 –0.1
–0.3 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 90 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 44
3
Lube 200 Up to 1200 63 60 226 182 40 +0.100
0 25 50 –0.1
–0.3 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 90 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 44
Non-lube 250 Up to 1200 71 67 277 225 50
+0.100
0 30 –0.1
63 –0.3 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 110 M56 x 2 49 1 55
+0.120 –0.1
300 Up to 1200 80 76 330 270 63 0 37 80 –0.3 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 130 M64 x 2 49 1 68
With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only
Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot Bore size Stroke range Without rod boot With rod boot
Type S U Type S
(mm) H Z ZZ e f h l Z1 ZZ1 (mm) (mm) Z ZZ Z1 ZZ1
Lube 125 98 35 110 273 302 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 296 325 Lube 125 UP to 1000 98 273 302 296 325
Non-lube 140 98 40 110 283 315 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 306 338 Non-lube 140 UP to 1000 98 283 315 306 338
Air-hydro 160 106 45 120 306 342 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 327 363 Air-hydro 160 UP to 1200 106 306 342 327 363
180 111 50 135 336 380 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 354 398 Lube 180 UP to 1200 115 340 384 358 402
Lube 200 111 50 135 336 380 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 354 398 Non-lube 200 UP to 998 120 345 389 363 407
Non-lube 250 141 65 160 411 466 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 427 482 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as standard type.
300 146 80 175 451 519 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 466 534 ∗∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer
to page 6-9-20.
∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. ∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.

6-9-16
 Air Cylinder Series C
S1
Double Clevis Style: CS1D
Lube (CS1D), Non-lube (CS1DN), Air-hydro (CS1DH)

Width across øCD hole H10

With rod boot flats KA Shaft d9

CJ1
CJP
S + Stroke
Z1 + l + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CJ2
CM2
With auto switch: CDS1D CG1

~
=
MB
Width across øCD hole H10
With rod boot flats KA Shaft d9
MB1
CA2

~
=
CS1

~
=
C76
S + Stroke
Z1 + l + Stroke Z + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke C85
Note) Clevis pin and cotter pin are shipped together.
C95
CP95
NCM
Bore size Stroke range∗
Type A AL
B
C CDH10 CT CX CZ D E EA F FA G J K KA L MM N P RR NCA
(mm) (mm)
1
Lube 125 Up to 1000 50 47 145 115 25 +0.084
0 17 32 +0.3
+0.1
0
64 –0.2 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 65 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 29
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 50 47 161 128 28 +0.084
0 17 36 +0.3
+0.1
0
72 –0.2 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 75 M30 x 1.5 35 1
/2 32 D-
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 56 53 182 144 32 +0.100
0 20 40 +0.3
+0.1
0
80 –0.2 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 80 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4 36
180 Up to 1200 63 60 204 162 40 +0.100
0 23 50 +0.3
+0.1 100 –0.1
–0.3 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 90 M40 x 1.5 39 3
/4 44 -X
+0.100 +0.3 –0.1 3
Lube 200 Up to 1200 63 60 226 182 40 0 25 50 +0.1 100 –0.3 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 90 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 44
Non-lube 250 +0.100
Up to 1200 71 67 277 225 50 0 30 +0.3
63 +0.1
–0.1
126 –0.3 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 110 M56 x 2 49 1 55 20-
+0.120 +0.3 –0.1
300 Up to 1200 80 76 330 270 63 0 37 80 +0.1 160 –0.3 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 130 M64 x 2 49 1 68
With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only
Data
Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot Bore size Stroke range Without rod boot With rod boot
Type S U Type S
(mm) H Z ZZ e f h l Z1 ZZ1 (mm) (mm) Z ZZ Z1 ZZ1
Lube 125 98 35 110 273 302 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 296 325 Lube 125 Up to 1000 98 273 302 296 325
Non-lube 140 98 40 110 283 315 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 306 338 Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 98 283 315 306 338
Air-hydro 160 106 45 120 306 342 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 327 363 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 106 306 342 327 363
180 111 50 135 336 380 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 354 398 Lube 180 Up to 1200 115 340 384 358 402
Lube 200 111 50 135 336 380 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 354 398 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 120 345 389 363 407
Non-lube 250 141 65 160 411 466 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 427 482 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as standard type.
300 146 80 175 451 519 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 466 534 ∗∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer
to page 6-9-20.
∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. ∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.

6-9-17
Series C
S1
Center Trunnion Style: CS1T
Lube (CS1T), Non-lube (CS1TN), Air-hydro (CS1TH)

With rod boot

Z1 + l + 1/2 stroke Z + 1/2 stroke

Width across
flats KA

S + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke

With auto switch: CDS1T

With rod boot

Z1 + l + 1/2 stroke Z + 1/2 stroke ~
=

Width across
flats KA

~
=~
=

S + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke

Bore size Stroke range∗

Type
(mm) A AL
B
C D E EA F FA G J K KA M MM N P R S TDe8 TT TX
(mm)
1
125 25 to 1000 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 1 98 32 –0.050
–0.089 50 170
Lube 1
Non-lube 140 30 to 1000 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 1.5 98 36 –0.050
–0.089 55 190
3
Air-hydro 160 35 to 1200 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 22 M36 x 1.5 39 /4 1.5 106 40 –0.050
–0.089 60 212
3
180 30 to 1200 63 60 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 26 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 2 111 45 –0.050
–0.089 59 236
3
Lube 200 30 to 1200 63 60 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 26 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 2 111 45 –0.050
–0.089 59 265
–0.060
Non-lube 250 30 to 1200 71 67 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 30 M56 x 2 49 1 3 141 56 –0.106 69 335
–0.060
300 35 to 1200 80 76 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 36 M64 x 2 49 1 4 146 67 –0.106 79 400
With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only
Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot Bore size Stroke range Without rod boot With rod boot
Type TY TZ Type S
(mm) H Z ZZ e f h l Z1 ZZ1 (mm) (mm) Z ZZ Z1 ZZ1
125 164 234 110 159 227 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 182 250 Lube 125 Up to 1000 98 159 227 182 250
Lube
Non-lube 140 184 262 110 159 227 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 182 250 Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 98 159 227 182 250
Air-hydro 160 204 292 120 173 248 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 194 269 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 106 173 248 194 269
180 228 326 135 190.5 272 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 208.5 290 Lube 180 Up to 1200 115 192.5 276 210.5 294
Lube 200 257 355 135 190.5 272 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 208.5 290 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 120 195 281 213 299
Non-lube 250 325 447 160 230.5 331 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 246.5 347 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as standard
300 390 534 175 248 357 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 263 372 type.
∗∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer
∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. to page 6-9-20.
(The minimum stroke with rod boot, but for bore size ø160 and ø300 is 35 ∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.
mm or more.)

6-9-18
 Series CS1
Accessory Bracket Dimensions

I Type Single Knuckle Joint∗ Knuckle Pin, Clevis Pin

l
ø CJ1
CJP

ø
Material: Cast iron
ø
ø

Applicable
Part no. bore size A1 A2 E1 L1 MM NDH10 NX RR1 U1
(mm) Material: Carbon steel CJ2
I-12 125 8 54 46 100 M30 x 1.5 25 +0.084
0 32 –0.1
–0.3 27 33 Part no. Applicable bore
size (mm) Dd9 L l m d Applicable
(Drill through) cotter pin
I-14 140 8 54 48 105 M30 x 1.5 28 +0.084
0
+0.1
36 –0.1
–0.3
–0.1
30 39 IY-12 125 25 –0.065
–0.117 79.5 69.5 5 4 ø4 x 40 CM2
I-16 160 8 60 55 110 M36 x 1.5 32 0 40 –0.3 34 39 IY-14 140 28 –0.065
–0.117 86.5 76.5 5 4 ø4 x 40
I-18 180 8 67 70 125 M40 x 1.5 40 +0.1
0
+0.1
50 –0.1
–0.3
–0.1
42.5 44 IY-16 160 32 –0.080
–0.142 94.5 84.5 5 4 ø4 x 40 CG1
I-20 200 8 67 70 125 M45 x 1.5 40 0 50 –0.3 42.5 44 IY-18 180, 200 40 –0.080
–0.142 115 105 5 4 ø4 x 55
I-25 250 9 75.5 86 160 M56 x 2 50
+0.1
0
+0.12
–0.1
63 –0.3
–0.1
53 66 IY-25 250 50 –0.080
–0.142 144
–0.100
132 6 5 ø5 x 65 MB
I-30 300 9 84.5 105 175 M64 x 2 63 0 80 –0.3 66 71 IY-30 300 63 –0.174 178 166 6 5 ø5 x 80
MB1
Y Type Double Knuckle Joint∗ Rod End Nut
CA2
øND hole H10
Shaft d9 CS1
Material: Cast iron
Applicable
Part no. bore size A1 E1 L1 MM NDH10 NX NZ RR1 U1
C76
ø

(mm) Material: Rolled steel

Y-12 125 8 46 100 M30 x 1.5 25 +0.084
0 32 +0.3
+0.1 64 –0.1
–0.3 27 42 Part no.
Applicable bore
size (mm) d H B C D C85
+0.084 +0.3 –0.1
Y-14 140 8 48 105 M30 x 1.5 28 0 36 +0.1 72 –0.3 30 47 NT-12 125, 140 M30 x 1.5 18 46 53.1 44
Y-16 160 8 55 110 M36 x 1.5 32 +0.1
0 40 +0.3
+0.1 80 –0.1
–0.3 34 46 NT-16 160 M36 x 1.5 21 55 63.5 53 C95
+0.1 +0.3
Y-18 180 8 70 125 M40 x 1.5 40 0 50 +0.1 100 –0.1
–0.3 42.5 54 NT-18 180 M40 x 1.5 23 60 69.3 57
Y-20 200 8 70 125 M45 x 1.5 40 +0.1
0 50 +0.3
+0.1 100 –0.1
–0.3 42.5 54 NT-20 200 M45 x 1.5 27 70 80.8 67 CP95
+0.1 +0.3 –0.1
Y-25 250 9 86 160 M56 x 2 50 0 63 +0.1 126 –0.3 53 81 NT-25 250 M56 x 2 34 85 98.1 82
Y-30 300 9 105 175 M64 x 2 63
+0.12
0
+0.3 –0.1
80 +0.1 160 –0.3 66 87 NT-30 300 M64 x 2 38 95 110.0 92 NCM
∗ Use a single knuckle joint or a double knuckle joint individually.
(Screw it entirely over the rod end threads and tighten it.)
∗ Extend the dimensions of A, H. when using a single/double knuckle joint together with a rod end nut.
NCA
(To extend dimensions A/H, refer to the table below, and specify the product as Made-to-order -XAO.)
∗ Pin and cotter pin are attached for double knuckle joint. D-

Single/Double Knuckle Joint -X

20-
Data

A, H Dimensions when Mounting

a Single/Double Knuckle Joint
together with a Rod End Nut
Symbol Applicable knuckle joint part number Bore size (mm) A H
H A 움 L1 H1
Bore size (mm) I type single knuckle Y type double knuckle 125 65 125
125 110 50 3.5 100 156.5 I-12 Y-12 140 65 125
140 110 50 3.5 105 161.5 I-14 Y-14 160 76 140
160 120 56 3.5 110 170.5 I-16 Y-16 180 83 155
180, 200 135 63 3.5 125 193.5 I-18, I-20 Y-18, Y-20 200 88 160
250 160 71 3.5 160 245.5 I-25 Y-25 250 106 195
300 175 80 3.5 175 266.5 I-30 Y-30 300 115 210

6-9-19
Series CDS1
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Its Mounting Height
<Band mounting style> <Tie-rod mounting style>
D-A3
/G3/K3 Applicable cable O.D.
ø6.8 to ø9.6
D-A5
/A6
Auto swtich ~
=

~
=
~
=
Auto swtich

D-F5
/J5
/F5NTL
D-A44 Applicable cable O.D.
~
D-F5BAL/F59F Auto swtich ~
=
ø6.8 to ø11.5 =
D-F5
W/J59W

~
=
~
=
Auto swtich

( ): Denotes the values of D-F5LF

Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position Auto Switch Mounting Height
Auto switch D-A5
D-F5
D-F5, D-J5
model D-A6
D-J5
D-F5W, D-J59W
D-A3
D-F5
W D-A3
D-A5

D-A44 D-A59W D-J59W D-F5NTL D-G39 D-A44 D-A6
D-F5BAL
D-G39 D-F5BAL D-K39 D-A59W D-F59F
D-K39 D-F59F D-F5NTL
Bore size (mm) A B A B A B B B Hs Hs Hs Ht Hs Ht
125 0 0 2 2 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 116 126 75.5 69.5 74.5 70
140 0 0 2 2 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 124 134 81 76.5 80 76.5
160 0 0 2 2 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 134.5 144.5 89 87.5 88 87.5
180 3.5 1.5 7.5 5.5 10 8 15 13 144 154 97 97.5 96 97.5
200 6 4 10 8 12.5 10.5 17.5 15.5 154 164 107 108 107.5 108

<Tie-rod mounting style> Operating Range

D-Z7
/Z80 Bore size (mm)
D-Y59
/Y69
/Y7P/Y7PV Auto switch model
125 140 160 180 200
D-Y7
W/Y7
WV D-Z7
/Z80 14 14.5 13 14 14.5
D-Y7BAL D-A3
/A44/A5
/A6
10 10 10 10 10
~ D-A59W 17 17 17 17 17
" Hs
=
A D-Y59
/Y69
/Y7P/Y7PV
12 13 7 7.5 8
D-Y7
W/Y7
WV
D-Y7BAL 6 6 7 7 7
=" Ht

D-F5
/J5
/F5
W/J59W 5 5 5.5 6 6
~

D-F5BAL/F5NTL/F59F
D-G39/K39 11 11 10 10 10
∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to
be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately 30% dispersion.)
There may be the case it will vary substantially depending
B on an ambient environment.
Proper Auto Switch
Mounting Position Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How
Auto Switch Mounting Height to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted.
Auto switch D-Z7
/Z80 For detailed specifications, refer to page 6-16-1.
model D-Y59
/Y69
D-Z7
/Z80
D-Y59
/Y69
Type Part no.
Electrical
Features
D-Y7P/Y7PV D-Y7P/Y7PV D-Y7BAL entry
D-Y7
W D-Y7
W —
D-A53/A56
D-Y7
WV D-Y7
WV Grommet
D-Y7BAL Reed D-A64/A67 Without indicator
switch D-Z80 (In-line)
light
Bore size (mm) A B Hs Ht Hs Ht
D-F59/F5P/J59 —
125 1.5 1.5 69 69.5 71 69.5
D-F59W/F5PW/J59W Grommet 2-color indication
140 1.5 1.5 76 76 77 76
Solid (In-line) 2-color indication,
160 1.5 1.5 85 85 88.5 85 state D-F5BAL Water resistant
180 7 5 95 95 97.5 95 switch
D-F5NTL With timer
200 9.5 7.5 106 106 108 106
D-Y69A/Y69B/Y7PV Grommet —
D-Y7NWV/Y7PWV/Y7BWV (Perpendicular) 2-color indication
∗ With pre-wire connector is available for solid state
switches, too. For details, refer to page 6-16-60.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state switch (D-
Y7G/Y7H type) are also available. For details, refer to
page 6-16-39.

6-9-20
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Double Rod

Series CS1W
Lube, Non-lube: ø125, ø140, ø160, ø180, ø200, ø250, ø300 Air-hydro: ø125, ø140, ø160

How to Order CJ1

Without auto switch CS1W L 125 100 JJ CJP
CJ2
With auto switch CDS1W L 125 100 JJ Y7BW
CM2
Number of
auto swithes
Built in magnet
Nil 2 pcs.
(ø125 to ø200)
3 3 pcs.
CG1
Double rod type S 1 pc.
Mounting style n “n” pcs. MB
Auto switch
B Basic style Tubing material
L Foot style Symbol Bore size (mm) Tubing material
Nil Without auto switch MB1
∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer to the
F Rod side flange style 125 to 160 Aluminum tube table below.
T Center trunnion style
Nil
180 to 300 Steel tube ∗ D-Z7
/Z80/Y59
/Y69
/Y7

types are shipped CA2
F 125 to 160 Steel tube together, (but not assembled).
Type
(But, only the mounting bracket for the above models CS1
is assembled at the time of shipment.)
Nil Lube Bore size Suffix for cylinder C76
N Non-lube Air-hydro
Lube, Non-lube Rod boot J Nylon tarpaulin
H Air-hydro
125 125 mm 125 125 mm in one side K Heat resistant tarpaulin
140 140 mm 140 140 mm Rod boot JJ Nylon tarpaulin
C85
Built-in magnet 160 160 mm 160 160 mm in both sides KK Heat resistant tarpaulin
cylinder model 180 180 mm N Without cushion C95
200 200 mm R With cushion in rod side
If a built-in magnet cylinder without Cylinder stroke (mm)
auto switch is required, there is no
250∗ 250 mm Cushion H With cushion in head side CP95
need to enter the symbol for auto 300∗ 300 mm With cushion in both sides
∗ It is not available with auto switch. Nil
switch. (Air-hydro type has no cushion.) NCM
(Example) CDS1WB125-100 ∗ If specifying more than one symbol,
indicate them in alphabetically.
∗∗ Air-hydro type has no cushion. No symbol NCA
indicates no cushion.
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to page 6-16-1 for further information on auto switches. D-
Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)∗
Indicator light

Load voltage
Type Special function Electrical Wiring
(Output) Tie-rod Band 0.5 3 5 Pre-wire Applicable load -X
entry DC AC mounting mounting (Nil) (L) (Z) connector
3-wire
(NPN equivalent) — 5V — Z76 —

— — IC — 20-
circuit
Grommet
Reed switch

100 V Z73 —


—
100 V, 200 V A54 —


—
Relay, PLC Data
—
Yes

Terminal 12 V — — A33 — — — — PLC

2-wire 24 V —
conduit — A34 — — — —
100 V, 200 V
DIN terminal — A44 — — — — Relay, PLC
Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet — — A59W —

— —
3-wire (NPN) Y59A —

  IC
24 V 5 V, 12 V —
3-wire (PNP) Y7P —

  circuit
Grommet
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 —

 —
— 2-wire —
12 V Y59B —

 
Solid state switch

Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39 — — — — IC circuit

Yes

conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39 — — — — — Relay, PLC

3-wire (NPN) Y7NW —

  IC
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V
(2-color indication) 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — Y7PW —

  circuit
Grommet Y7BW —

 
2-wire 12 V —
Water resistant (2-color indication) Y7BA — —
 
With diagnostic output
(2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V F59F —

  IC circuit
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·········· Nil (Example) A54 ∗ Solid state switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.
3 m ·········· L (Example) A54L
5 m ·········· Z (Example) A54Z
• Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 6-9-30 for details.
• For details about auto switches with pre-wire connector, refer to page 6-16-60.

6-9-21
Series CS1W
Specifications
Type Lube, Non-lube Air-hydro
Fluid Air Turbine oil
Proof pressure 1.57 MPa Note)
Max. operating pressure 0.97 MPa 0.97 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa 0.06 MPa
Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s 0.5 to 200 mm/s
Cushion Interchangeable None
Ambient and fluid Without switch 0 to 70°C (No freezing) Air-hydro
temperature With switch 0 to 60°C (No freezing) 5 to 60°C
JIS Symbol Thread tolerance JIS Class 2
Stroke length tolerance 250 st or less: +1.0 st +1.4 st +1.8
0 251 to 1,000 : 0 1,001 to 1,200 : 0
Basic style, Foot style, Rod side flange style,
Mounting Center trunnion style
Note) Item corresponding to Class 2 Pressure Vessel Act is 1.46 MPa.

Weight/Aluminum Tube: Lube Type

(Non-lube, Air-hydro) (kg)
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160
16.51 19.62 26.65
Basic style
(15.28) (18.12) (24.79)
Basic weight
18.14 22.14 29.45
Foot style
(16.91) (20.64) (27.59)
Made to Order Specifications
Rod side 19.19 24.62 33.04
(For details, refer to page 6-17-1.) flange style (17.96) (23.12) (31.18)
Symbol Specifications
20.64 25.35 34.05
-XC4 With heavy duty scraper Trunnion style
(19.41) (23.85) (32.19)
-XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110°C)
Add’l weight per each 100 mm stroke 2.57 2.76 3.38
-XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel
Accessory bracket

-XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56
-XC15 Change of tie-rod length
-XC30 Front trunnion Double knuckle
(Knuckle pin, Cotter pin)
1.37 1.81 2.48
-XC35 With coil scraper

Rod end nut 0.16 0.16 0.23

∗ ( ): Denotes the non-lube and air-hydro type.

Calculation: (Example) CS1WL125-500
• Basic weight ················18.14 (Foot style, ø125)
• Additional weight··········2.57/100 stroke
• Cylinder stroke·············500 stroke
18.14 + 2.57 x 500/100 = 30.99 kg

Class 2 Pressure Vessel

In the case of exceeding the following strokes, the cylinder is subject to
Class 2 Pressure Vessel Act.
Principal Parts Material and Surface Treatment
Bore size (mm) Cylinder stroke (mm)
Description Material Note
200 998
Cover Rolled steel plate Black painted 250 813
ø125, ø140, Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 300 564
Tube∗ ø160 Carbon steel tube Hard chrome plated Weight/Steel Tube (kg)
ø180, ø200, ø250, ø300 Carbon steel tube Hard chrome plated Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 180 200 250 300
Lube NBR JIS B 2401 O-ring ∗ Basic style 16.85 20.03 27.12 36.90 45.79 85.36 122.39
Sliding
Basic weight

Non-lube NBR PNY, NLP Foot style 18.48 22.55 29.92 41.10 50.67 94.86 139.67
seal
Air-hydro NBR SKY, RPS Rod side
Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated flange style 19.53 25.03 33.51 46.73 57.70 107.20 152.59
Cast iron Chromated
Lube (With auto switch:
Trunnion style 20.98 25.76 34.52 47.52 59.78 113.20 162.82
(In the case of aluminum alloy casted)
Aluminum alloy casted) Additional weight per
Piston Aluminum alloy casted Chromated 3.46 3.81 4.57 6.20 7.29 11.30 15.17
Non-lube each 100 mm stroke
(Iron tube: Cast iron) (In the case of aluminum alloy casted)
Accessory bracket

Aluminum alloy casted Chromated Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56 3.07 2.90 5.38 10.82
Air-hydro
(Iron tube: Cast iron) (In the case of aluminum alloy casted) Double knuckle
∗ In the case of an auto switch with bore sizes ø180 and ø200, (Knuckle pin, Cotter pin) 1.37 1.81 2.48 4.74 4.59 9.22 17.17
tubing material is aluminum alloy (hard anodized). Piston seal is
NLP. Rod end nut 0.16 0.16 0.23 0.32 0.85 1.26 1.43

6-9-22
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CS1W
Rod Boot Material Mounting Bracket Part No.
Symbol Material Maximum ambient temperature Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 180 200 250 300
J Nylon tarpaulin 70°C Foot style ∗ CS1W-L12 CS1W-L14 CS1W-L16 CS1W-L18 CS1W-L20 CS1W-L25 CS1W-L30
K
Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C ∗ Flange style CS1-F12 CS1-F12 CS1-F16 CS1-F18 CS1-F20 CS1-F25 CS1-F30
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot ∗ Order two foot brackets per cylinder.
itself.
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.
Accessory Bore size (mm)
Center Auto switch model
Mounting Basic Foot Rod side trunnion 160
125 180 140
200
style style flange style style
D-A5/A6/A59W/F5/J5/F5NTL
Rod end nut



D-F5W/J59W/F5BAL/F59F
BT-12 BT-12 BT-16 BT-18A BT-20 CJ1





Option

Single knuckle joint D-A3/A44/G39/K39 BS1-125 BS1-140 BS1-160 BS1-180 BS1-200

Double knuckle joint
(With knuckle pin/cotter pin)



D-Z7/Z80/Y59/Y69/Y7P
CJP
Rod boot



D-Y7PV/Y7W/Y7WV BS4-125 BS4-125 BS4-160 BS4-180 BS4-200
D-Y7BAL
CJ2
Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting
∗ Mounting screws set made of stainless steel
Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” The following set of mounting screws made of stainless steel is also available. Use it in CM2
on page 6-9-8. accordance with the operating environment.
(Please order the mounting band separately, since it is not included.)
BBA1: For D-A5/A6/F5/J5 CG1
“D-F5BA” switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above when
shipped.
When only a switch is shipped independently, “BBA1” screws are attached.
MB
Double Acting, Double Rod/Replacement Parts (Seal kit) MB1
When ordering the replacement parts (seal kits)
for Series CS1W double rod type cylinder,
Lube CA2
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket Retaining plate gasket
indicate the order number listed in the table at
right. 125 CS1W-125A-PS SDR-36 P36 P115 P7 C120 G55 CS1
Each set of replacement parts contains the 140 CS1W-140A-PS SDR-36 P36 P130 P7 C135 G55
following: wiper ring, rod seal, piston seal, valve
seal, tube gasket, and push plate gasket (for 1
160 CS1W-160A-PS SDR-40 P40 P150 P7 C155 G55 C76
cylinder). 180 CS1W-180A-PS SDR-45 P45 P165 P7 C175 G65
200 CS1W-200A-PS SDR-50 P50A P185 P7 C195 G65 C85
250 CS1W-250A-PS SDR-60 P60 P235 P7 CS160-1618-G4 G80
300 CS1W-300A-PS SDR-70 P70 P285 P7 CS160-1618-G5 G90 C95
Non-lube with Auto Switch
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket Retaining plate gasket
CP95
125 CS1WN125A-PS SDR-36 PNY-36 NLP-125A P7 C120 G55
NCM
140 CS1WN140A-PS SDR-36 PNY-36 NLP-140A P7 C135 G55
160 CS1WN160A-PS SDR-40 PNY-40 NLP-160A P7 C155 G55
NCA
180 CS1WN180A-PS SDR-45 PNY-45 NLP-180A P7 C175 G65
200 CS1WN200A-PS SDR-50 PNY-50 NLP-200A P7 C195 G65
D-
250∗ CS1WN250A-PS SDR-60 PNY-60 NLP-250A P7 CS160-1618-G4 G80
300∗ CS1WN300A-PS SDR-70 PNY-70 NLP-300A P7 CS160-1618-G5 G90
∗ It is not available with auto switch.
-X
Lube with Auto Switch 20-
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket Retaining plate gasket
125 CS1W125A-PS SDR-36 P36 P115 P7 C120 G55 Data
140 CS1W140A-PS SDR-36 P36 P130 P7 C135 G55
160 CS1W160A-PS SDR-40 P40 P150 P7 C155 G55
180 CDS1W180A-PS SDR-45 P45 NLP-180A P7 C175 G65
200 CDS1W200A-PS SDR-50 P50A NLP-200A P7 C195 G65

Air-hydro
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket Retaining plate gasket
125 CS1WH125A-PS SDR-36 SKY-36 RPS-125 P7 C120 G55
140 CS1WH140A-PS SDR-36 SKY-36 RPS-140 P7 C135 G55
160 CS1WH160A-PS SDR-40 SKY-40 RPS-160 P7 C155 G55

6-9-23
Series CS1W
Construction
Lube, Non-lube
With auto switch

Non-lube type With auto switch

Aluminum tube Steel tube ø125 to 160 ø180, ø200

Air-hydro

Aluminum tube Auto switch

Component Parts Seal List
No. Description Material Note Part no.
No. Description Material
q Rod cover Rolled steel Black painted ø125 ø140 ø160 ø180 ø200 ø250 ø300
ø125 to Aluminum Lube
alloy Hard anodized
ø160
w Cylinder tube @0 Wiper ring SDR-36 SDR-36 SDR-40 SDR-45 SDR-50 SDR-60 SDR-70
ø125 to Carbon steel
tube Inside: Hard chrome plated @1∗ Cushion seal DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-60S DSM-60S DSM-75S PCS-85
ø300 ∗
e Piston Cast iron∗ @2 Rod seal P36 P36 P40 P45 P50A P60 P70
r Piston rod A Carbon steel Hard chrome plated @3 Piston seal P115 P130 P150 P165 P185 P235 P285
t Piston rod B Carbon steel Hard chrome plated @4 Valve seal P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7
NBR CS160- CS160-
y Retaining plate Cast iron Black painted @5 Tube gasket C120 C135 C155 C175 C195 1618-G4 1618-G5

u Bushing Lead-bronze casted @6∗ Piston gasket G25 G25 G25 G35 G35 G45 G45
i Valve guide Brass @7 Retaining plate gasket G55 G55 G55 G65 G65 G80 G90
o Tie-rod Carbon steel Chromated @8∗ Guide gasket N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5
!0 Tie-rod nut Rolled steel Black zinc chromated Non-lube Seals except @2 and @3 are the same as lube type.
!1 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated @2 Rod seal PNY-36 PNY-36 PNY-40 PNY-45 PNY-50 PNY-60 PNY-70
NBR
!2 Retaining plate bolt Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated @3 Piston seal NLP-125A NLP-140A NLP-160A NLP-180A NLP-200A NLP-250A NLP-300A
!3 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated Air-hydro Seals except @2 and @3 are the same as lube type.
!4 Cushion ring A Rolled steel Zinc chromated Part no.
No. Description Material
!5 Cushion valve Rolled steel Electroless nickel plated ø125 ø140 ø160
!6 Spacer A Rolled steel @2 Rod seal SKY-36 SKY-36 SKY-40
NBR
!7 Air releasing B Rolled steel Zinc chromated @3 Piston seal RPS-125 RPS-140 RPS-160
!8 Air releasing A Chromium molybdenum steel Lube (With switch) Seals except #1 are the same as lube type.
@9 Check ball Chrome bearing steel Part no.
No. Description Material
#0 Magnet — ø180 ø200
∗ In the case of the aluminum tube of non-lube and air- #1 Piston seal NBR NLP-180A NLP-200A
hydro type, piston material is an aluminum alloy casted.
In the case of auto switch bore size ø180 and ø200, Replacement Parts (Seal kit)
piston material is aluminum alloy casted and tubing
material is aluminum alloy (hard anodized). • For replacement parts no. (seal kits) of double rod style cylinder for Series CS1W, refer to
page 6-9-23.
∗ • Seal kits does not include cushion seal, piston seal and guide gasket because those are not
replaceable parts.

6-9-24
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CS1W
Basic Style: CS1WB
Lube (CS1WB), Non-lube (CS1WBN), Air-hydro (CS1WBH)
Width across
flats KA
Width across
flats KA

ø
ø
ø

ø
ø
CJ1
CJP
S + Stroke H + Stroke
ZZ + 2 stroke CJ2
With rod boot (One side) CM2
ZZ + l + 2 stroke (With rod boot on one side)
CG1
MB
ø

MB1

l
CA2
l
CS1
C76
With rod boot (Both sides)
Width across
C85
flats KA Width across
flats KA
C95
CP95
øE
øe

ø
ø

ø
ø
ø
ø

NCM
l l + Stroke
l S + Stroke h + l + Stroke
NCA
ZZ + 2l + 2 stroke
D-

Bore size Stroke range (mm) -X

Type A AL B C D E EA F FA G J K KA M MM N P S
(mm) Without rod boot With rod boot

Lube 125 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 27 M30 x 1.5 35 1
/2 98 20-
1
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 27 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 30.5 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4 106 Data
3
180 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 35 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 111
3
Lube 200 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 35 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 111
Non-lube 250 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 71 67 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 41.5 M56 x 2 49 1 141
300 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 80 76 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 51.5 M64 x 2 49 1 146

With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only

Without With rod boot With rod boot
Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot (Single side) (Both sides) Bore size Stroke range (mm) rod boot (Single side) (Both sides)
Type Type S
(mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ ZZ (mm) Without rod boot With rod boot ZZ ZZ ZZ
Lube 125 110 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 341 364 Lube 125 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 98 318 341 364
Non-lube 140 110 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 341 364 Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 98 318 341 364
Air-hydro 160 120 346 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 367 388 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 106 346 388 367
180 135 381 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 399 417 Lube 180 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 115 385 403 421
Lube 200 135 381 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 399 417 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 30 to 998 120 390 408 426
Non-lube 250 160 461 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 477 493 ∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.
300 175 496 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 511 526

6-9-25
Series CS1W
Foot Style: CS1WL
Lube (CS1WL), Non-lube (CS1WLN), Air-hydro (CS1WLH)

ZZ + 2 stroke
S + Stroke H + Stroke
Width across
flats KA

ø
ø
ø
ø

ø
ø
Width across
ø flats KA

LS + Stroke

With rod boot

ZZ + l + 2 stroke
(With rod boot on one side)
l
l
ø

ZZ + 2l + 2 stroke
(With rod boot on both sides)

Bore size Stroke range (mm)

Type A AL B C D E EA F FA G J K KA LD LH LS LT
(mm) Without rod boot With rod boot
Lube 125 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 85 188 8
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 100 188 9
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 19 106 206 9
180 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 24 125 231 10
Lube 200 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 24 132 231 10
Non-lube 250 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 71 67 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 29 160 301 12
300 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 80 76 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 33 200 326 15

Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot (Single side) (Both sides)
Type LX LY MM N P S X Y
(mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ ZZ
1
Lube 125 100 157.5 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98 45 20 110 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 341 364
1
Non-lube 140 112 180.5 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98 45 30 110 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 341 364
Air-hydro 160 118 197 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4 106 50 25 120 346 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 367 388
3
180 132 227 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 111 60 30 135 381 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 399 417
3
Lube 200 150 245 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 111 60 30 135 381 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 399 417
Non-lube 250 180 298.5 M56 x 2 49 1 141 80 40 160 461 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 477 493
300 212 365 M64 x 2 49 1 146 90 40 175 496 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 511 526

With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only

Bore size Stroke range (mm) Without rod boot With rod boot (Single side) With rod boot (Both sides)
Type S LS
(mm) Without rod boot With rod boot ZZ ZZ ZZ
Lube 125 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 98 188 318 341 364
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 98 188 318 341 364
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 106 206 346 367 388
Lube 180 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 115 235 385 403 421
Non-lube 200 Up to 998 30 to 998 120 240 390 408 426
∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.

6-9-26
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CS1W
Rod Side Flange Style: CS1WF
Lube (CS1WF), Non-lube (CS1WFN), Air-hydro (CS1WFH)

Width across
ø flats KA Width across
flats KA

CJ1

ø
ø
ø

ø
ø
CJP

S + Stroke H + Stroke CJ2

ZZ + Stroke
CM2

With rod boot

CG1
MB
ZZ + l + 2 stroke (With rod boot on one side)
MB1
CA2
ø

CS1
l C76
l
ZZ + 2 l + 2 stroke
(With rod boot on both sides)
C85
C95
Bore size Stroke range (mm)
Type
(mm) Without rod boot With rod boot
A AL B B C D E EA F FA FD FT FX FY FZ G J CP95
Lube 125 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 145 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 19 14 190 100 230 16 M14 x 1.5
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 160 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 19 20 212 112 255 16 M14 x 1.5
NCM
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 56 53 180 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 19 20 236 118 275 18.5 M16 x 1.5
180 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 200 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 24 25 265 132 320 18.5 M18 x 1.5
NCA
Lube 200 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 225 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 24 25 280 150 335 18.5 M20 x 1.5
Non-lube 250 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 71 67 275 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 29 30 355 180 420 23 M24 x 1.5
D-
300 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 80 76 330 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 33 30 400 212 475 23 M30 x 1.5
-X
Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot (Single side) (Both sides)
Type K KA M MM N P S 20-
(mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ ZZ
1
125 15 31 30 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98 110 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 341 364
Lube
1
Data
Non-lube 140 15 31 24 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98 110 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 341 364
Air-hydro 3
160 17 36 26 M36 x 1.5 39 /4 106 120 346 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 367 388
3
180 20 41 31 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 111 135 381 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 399 417
3
Lube 200 20 46 31 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 111 135 381 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 399 417
Non-lube 250 25 56 35 M56 x 2 49 1 141 160 461 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 477 493
300 30 65 48 M64 x 2 49 1 146 175 496 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 511 526

With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only

Bore size Stroke range (mm) Without rod boot With rod boot (Single side) With rod boot (Both sides)
Type S
(mm) Without rod boot With rod boot ZZ ZZ ZZ
Lube 125 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 98 318 341 364
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 98 318 341 364
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 106 346 367 388
Lube 180 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 115 385 403 421
Non-lube 200 Up to 998 30 to 998 120 390 408 426
∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.

6-9-27
Series CS1W
Center Trunnion Style: CS1WT
Lube (CS1WT), Non-lube (CS1WTN), Air-hydro (CS1WTH)
Width across
flats KA Z + 1/2 stroke Z + 1/2 stroke

Width across
flats KA

ø
ø
ø
ø

ø
ø
ø

S + Stroke H + Stroke
ZZ + 2 Stroke

With rod boot

Z + l + 1/2 stroke
ø

l
l
ZZ + l + 2 stroke (With rod boot on one side)
ZZ + 2l + 2 stroke (With rod boot on both sides)

Bore size Stroke range (mm)

Type A AL B C D E EA F FA G J K KA M MM N P R S
(mm) Without rod boot With rod boot
1
Lube 125 25 to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 1 98
1
Non-lube 140 30 to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 1.5 98
Air-hydro 160 35 to 1200 35 to 1200 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 22 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4 1.5 106
3
180 30 to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 26 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 2 111
3
Lube 200 30 to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 26 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 2 111
Non-lube 250 30 to 1200 30 to 1200 71 67 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 30 M56 x 2 49 1 3 141
300 35 to 1200 35 to 1200 80 76 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 36 M64 x 2 49 1 4 146

Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot (Single side) (Both sides)
Type TDe8 TT TX TY TZ H
(mm) Z ZZ e f h l Z ZZ Z ZZ
Lube 125 32 –0.050
–0.089 50 170 164 234 110 159 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 182 341 182 364
Non-lube 140 36 –0.050
–0.089 55 190 184 262 110 159 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 182 341 182 364
Air-hydro 160 40 –0.050
–0.089 60 212 204 292 120 173 346 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 194 367 194 388
180 45 –0.050
–0.089 59 236 228 326 135 190.5 381 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 208.5 399 208.5 417
Lube 200 45 –0.050
–0.089 59 265 257 355 135 190.5 381 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 208.5 399 208.5 417
Non-lube 250 –0.060
56 –0.106 69 335 325 447 160 230.5 461 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 246.5 477 246.5 493
–0.060
300 67 –0.106 79 400 390 534 175 248 496 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 263 511 263 526

With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only

Bore size Stroke range (mm) Without rod boot With rod boot (Single side) With rod boot (Both sides)
Type S
(mm) Without rod boot With rod boot Z ZZ Z ZZ ZZ
Lube 125 25 to 1000 30 to 1000 98 159 318 182 341 364
Non-lube 140 30 to 1000 30 to 1000 98 159 318 182 341 364
Air-hydro 160 35 to 1200 35 to 1200 106 173 346 194 367 388
Lube 180 30 to 1200 30 to 1200 115 192.5 385 210.5 403 421
Non-lube 200 30 to 998 30 to 998 120 195 390 213 408 426
∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.

6-9-28
 Air Cylinder: With Auto Switch Series CDS1W
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Its Mounting Height
<Band mounting style>
D-A3
Applicable cable O.D.
D-G39/K39 G 1/2 ø6.8 to ø9.6
A 49 B ~
=

CJ1
CJP
Applicable cable O.D.
G 1/2 ø6.8 to ø11.5 CJ2
D-A44 ~
=
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
<Tie-rod mounting style>
~
= CA2
D-A5
/A6

CS1
~
=
C76
C85
~
=

C95
D-F5
/J5
/F5NTL ~
= CP95
D-F5BAL/F59F
D-F5
W/J59W
NCM
~
=

NCA
D-
~
=

-X
20-
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position Auto Switch Mounting Height
Auto switch D-A5
D-F5
D-F5

Data
model D-A6
D-J5
D-J5

D-A3
D-F5
W D-A3
D-A5
D-F5
W

D-A44 D-A59W D-J59W D-F5NTL D-G39 D-A44 D-A6
D-J59W

D-F5BAL
D-G39 D-F5BAL D-K39 D-A59W D-F59F
D-K39 D-F59F D-F5NTL
Bore size
(mm) A B A B A B A B Hs Hs Hs Ht Hs Ht
125 0 0 2 2 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 116 126 75.5 69.5 74.5 70
140 0 0 2 2 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 124 134 81 76.5 80 76.5
160 0 0 2 2 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 134.5 144.5 89 87.5 88 87.5
180 3.5 1.5 7.5 5.5 10 8 15 13 144 154 97 97.5 96 97.5
200 6 4 10 8 12.5 10.5 17.5 15.5 154 164 107 108 107.5 108

6-9-29
Series CDS1
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Its Mounting Height
~
= Hs
A

<Tie-rod mounting style>

= Ht
D-Z7
/Z80

~
D-Y59
/Y69
/Y7P/Y7PV
D-Y7
W/Y7
WV
D-Y7BAL

Proper Auto Switch

Mounting Position Auto Switch Mounting Height
Auto switch D-Z7
/Z80 D-Z7
/Z80
model D-Y59
/Y69
D-Y59
/Y69

D-Y7P/Y7PV D-Y7P/Y7PV D-Y7BAL
D-Y7
W D-Y7
W
D-Y7
WV D-Y7
WV
D-Y7BAL
Bore size (mm) A B Hs Ht Hs Ht
125 1.5 1.5 69 69.5 71 69.5
140 1.5 1.5 76 76 77 76
160 1.5 1.5 85 85 88.5 85
180 7 5 95 95 97.5 95
200 9.5 7.5 106 106 108 106

Operating Range
Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model
125 140 160 180 200
D-Z7
/Z80 14 14.5 13 14 14.5
D-A3
/A44/A5
/A6
10 10 10 10 10
D-A59W 17 17 17 17 17
D-Y59
/Y69
/Y7P/Y7PV
12 13 7 7.5 8
D-Y7
W/Y7
WV
D-Y7BAL 6 6 7 7 7
D-F5
/J5
/F5
W/J59W 6 6
5 5 5.5
D-F5BAL/F5NTL/F59F
D-G39/K39 11 11 10 10 10
∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to
be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.)
There may be the case it will vary substantially depending
on an ambient environment.

Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be
mounted. For detailed specifications, refer to page 6-16-1.

Type Part no. Electrical entry Features

D-A53/A56 —
Reed switch D-A64/A67 Grommet (In-line)
Without indicator light
D-Z80
D-F59/F5P/J59 —
D-F59W/F5PW/J59W 2-color indication
Grommet (In-line)
D-F5BAL Water resistant (2-color indication)
Solid state switch
D-F5NTL With timer
D-Y69A/Y69B/Y7PV —
D-Y7NWV/Y7PWV/Y7BWV Grommet (Perpendicular) 2-color indication
∗ With pre-wire connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to page 6-16-60.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state switch (D-Y7G/Y7H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 6-16-39.

6-9-30
 Air Cylinder: Low Friction Type
Double Acting, Single Rod

Series CS1
Non-lube: ø125, ø140, ø160

Q
How to Order CJ1
Without auto switch CS1 L Q 160 300 JR CJP
CJ2
With auto switch CDS1 L Q 160 300 JR Y7BW
CM2
Number of
auto switches
Built in magnet Nil 2 pcs. CG1
S 1 pc.
3 3 pcs. MB
Mounting style n “n” pcs.
B Basic style Auto switch MB1
L Foot style Nil Without auto switch
Low friction type
F Rod side flange style ∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer to the
table below.
CA2
G Head side flange style
Single clevis style ∗ D-Z7
/Z80/Y59
/Y69
/Y7

types are shipped
C
D Double clevis style
Bore size together, (but not assembled). CS1
125 125 mm (But, only the mounting bracket for the above
T Center trunnion style models is assembled at the time of shipment.)
140 140 mm C76
160 160 mm Suffix for cylinder
J Nylon tarpaulin
Rod boot
K Heat resistant tarpaulin
C85
A With cushion in both sides
Cylinder stroke (mm) R With cushion in rod side C95
Cushion
Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 6-9-32. H With cushion in head side
Nil Without cushion CP95
∗ If specifying more than one symbol, indicate them
alphabetically. NCM
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to page 6-16-1 for further information on auto switches.
NCA
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model. Lead wire length (m) ∗

Wiring
Type Special function Electrical Tie-rod Band 0.5 3 5 Pre-wire Applicable load
entry (Output) DC AC mounting mounting (Nil) (L) (Z) connector
D-
3-wire IC
— 5V — Z76 —

— — — -X
(NPN equivalent) circuit
Grommet
100 V Z73 —


— Relay,
Reed switch

— 100 V, 200 V A54 —


— PLC 20-

Yes

Terminal 12 V — — A33 — — — — PLC

conduit 2-wire 24 V
100 V, 200 V
— A34 — — — — — Data
DIN terminal — A44 — — — — Relay,
Diagnostic indication PLC
Grommet — — A59W —

— —
(2-color indication)
3-wire (NPN) Y59A —

  IC
24 V 5 V, 12 V —
3-wire (PNP) Y7P —

  circuit
Grommet
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 —

 —
— 2-wire —
12 V Y59B —

 
Solid state switch

Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39 — — — — IC circuit

conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39 — — — — —
Yes

Relay,
3-wire (NPN) Y7NW —

  IC
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V PLC
3-wire (PNP) Y7PW —

  circuit
(2-color indication) 24 V —
Y7BW —

 
Water resistant Grommet 2-wire 12 V —
Y7BA — —
 
(2-color indication)
With diagnostic output 4-wire IC
5 V, 12 V F59F —

 
(2-color indication) (NPN) circuit
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·········· Nil (Example) A54 ∗ Solid state switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.
3 m ·········· L (Example) A54L
5 m ·········· Z (Example) A54Z
• Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 6-9-33 for details.
• For details about auto switches with pre-wire connector, refer to page 6-16-60.

6-9-31
Series CS1
Q
Application Example
Designed with a low sliding Low friction cylinder is used in combination with precision regulator (Series IR).
resistance of the piston, this
air cylinder is ideal for
applications such as contact Driving roller Widing roller

pressure control, which Precision regulator

Precision regulator
requires smooth movements
at low pressures.
(Moving object)

Low sliding resistance

Min. operating pressure –0.005 MPa

Specifications
Auto switch mounting Action Double acting, Single rod
is possible. Direction of low friction Both directions
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.05 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.005 MPa ∗
Without auto switch: 0 to 70°C (No freezing)
Ambient and fluid temperature
With auto switch: 0 to 60°C (No freezing)

Allowable leakage 0.5 l/min (ANR) or less

Cushion None (With cushion is available.)
Thread tolerance JIS Class 2
Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
Bore size (mm) 125, 140, 160
Basic style, Foot style, Rod side flange style, Head side flange style,
Mounting
Single clevis style, Double clevis style, Center trunnion style
∗ In the case of w/ cushion, pressure inside cushion stroke is not included.

Maximum Stroke
JIS Symbol
Tubing material Aluminum alloy Carbon steel tube
Double acting
Mounting Basic style, Head side flange style Basic style, Head side flange style
bracket Single clevis style, Double clevis style Single clevis style Foot style
Bore size Center trunnion style Double clevis style Rod side flange style
(mm) Rod side flange style Center trunnion style
125 1000 or less 1000 or less 1600 or less
140 1000 or less 1000 or less 1600 or less
160 1200 or less 1200 or less 1600 or less

Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.

Made to Order Specifications
Bore size (mm)
(For details, refer to page 6-17-1.) Auto switch model
125 140 160
Symbol Specifications D-A5/A6/A59W/F5/J5/F5NTL
BT-12 BT-12 BT-16
-XA
Change of rod end shape D-F5W/J59W/F5BAL/F59F
-XC3 Special port location D-A3/A44/G39/K39 BS1-125 BS1-140 BS1-160
Tie-rod, cushion valve, and tie-rod D-Z7/Z80/Y59/Y69/Y7P
-XC7 nut and similar parts made of stainless steel
D-Y7PV/Y7W/Y7WV BS4-125 BS4-125 BS4-160
-XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position D-Y7BAL
-XC15 Change of tie-rod length ∗ Mounting screws set made of stainless steel
The following set of mounting screws made of stainless steel is also available. Use it in
accordance with the operating environment.
(Please order the mounting band separately, since it is not included.)
BBA1: For D-A5/A6/F5/J5
“D-F5BAL” switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above when
shipped.

6-9-32
 Air Cylinder: Low Friction Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CS1
Q
Mounting Bracket Part No. Rod Boot Material
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 Symbol Material Max. ambient temperature
Foot style ∗ CS1-L12 CS1-L14 CS1-L16 J Nylon tarpaulin 70°C
Flange style CS1-F12 CS1-F14 CS1-F16 K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C ∗
Single clevis style CS1-C12 CS1-C14 CS1-C16
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot
Double clevis style CS1-D12 CS1-D14 CS1-D16 itself.
∗ Order two foot brackets per cylinder.
Cylinder with Auto Switch
Accessory For auto switch specifications of low friction
Basic Foot Rod side model Single Double Center style, refer to the standard double acting
Mounting style
style style flange style flange style clevis style clevis style trunnion style single rod series rod (Series CS1) on page 6- CJ1
9-8.
— — — — —
—
Standard equipment Clevis pin CJP
Rod end nut







Other than the applicable auto switches
Single knuckle joint







listed in “How to Order”, following auto CJ2
Option Double knuckle joint switches can be mounted. For details,








(Knuckle pin, Cotter pin) refer to page 6-16-1. CM2
Rod boot







Type Model Electrical
entry
Features CG1
Principal Parts Material and Surface Treatment
Description Material Note D-A53/A56
Reed D-A64/A67 Grommet
—
MB
Without
Cover Rolled steel plate Black painted switch (In-line) indicator light
D-Z80
Aluminum alloy ∗ Hard anodized D-F59/F5P/
MB1
Tube —
Carbon steel tube Inside: Hard chrome plated J59
Sliding part seal NBR PNY, NLP D-F59W/ 2-color indication
CA2
F5PW/J59W Grommet
Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated
D-F5BAL
(In-line) 2-color indication, CS1
Piston Aluminum alloy casted Chromated Solid Water resistant
state D-F5NTL With timer
∗ With auto switch switch
D-Y69A/
C76
Weight/Steel Tube (For aluminum tube [with auto switch], refer to page 6-9-4.) (kg) —
Y69B/Y7PV Grommet
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 D-Y7NWV/ (Perpendicular) C85
2-color
Basic style 15.20 18.38 25.24 Y7PWV/ indication
Foot style 16.83 20.90 28.04 Y7BWV C95
∗ With pre-wire connector is available for solid
Rod side flange style 17.88 23.38 31.63 state switches, too.
Basic
For specifications, refer to page 6-16-60.
CP95
weight Head side flange style 17.88 23.38 31.63
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state
Single clevis style 18.27 22.67 30.73 switch (D-Y7G/Y7H type) are also available. NCM
Double clevis style 18.73 23.42 31.58 For details, refer to page 6-16-39.
Trunnion style 19.33 24.11 32.64 NCA
Additional weight per each 100 mm of stroke 2.66 3.01 3.58

Accessory Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56 D-

bracket Double knuckle (With pin) 1.37 1.81 2.48
Calculation: (Example) CS1LQ160, 500 (Foot style, ø160)
-X
• Basic weight················· 28.04
• Additional weight·········· 3.58/100 stroke 20-
• Cylinder stroke············· 500 stroke, 28.04 + 3.58 x 500/100 = 45.94 kg

Sliding Resistance Data

(Converted into cylinder operating pressure)

ø125
ø140
0.010
Sliding resistance (MPa)

ø160

0.005

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7

Pressure (MPa)

6-9-33
Series CS1
Q
Construction
Non-lube

Component Parts Seal List

Part no.
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material
ø125 ø140 ø160
q Rod cover Rolled steel plate Black painted !8 Wiper ring SFR-36K SFR-36K SFR-40K
w Head cover Rolled steel plate Black painted !9 Cushion seal ∗ DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-50S
Aluminum alloy ∗ Hard anodized @00 Rod seal PNY-36 PNY-36 PNY-40
e Cylinder tube
Carbon steel tube Hard chrome plated @1 Piston seal NLP-125A NLP-140A NLP-160A
r Piston Aluminum alloy casted Chromated @2 Valve seal NBR P7 P7 P7
t Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated @33 Tube gasket C120 C135 C155
y Retaining plate Cast iron Black painted @4 Piston gasket G25
u Bushing Lead-bronze casted @5 Retaining plate gasket G55
i Valve guide Brass @6 Guide gasket N-12.5-1.5
o Tie-rod Carbon steel Chromated ∗ 7 It is used only in the case of w/ cushion type.
!0 Tie-rod nut Rolled steel Black zinc chromated
!1 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated
!2 Retaining plate bolt Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated Dimensions: According to Mounting Brackets
!3 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated External dimensions for each mounting bracket other than basic style
!4 Cushion ring A Rolled steel Zinc chromated are the same as standard type. Refer to pages 6-9-12 to 6-9-18.
!5 Cushion ring B Rolled steel Zinc chromated
!6 Cushion valve Rolled steel Electroless nickel plated
!7 Wear ring Resin
∗ With auto switch

Basic Style: CS1BQ

Width across
flats KA
øEA

ø
ø

S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

Bore size Stroke range

(mm) (mm) A AL B C D E EA F G J K KA M MM N P S H ZZ
1
125 Up to 1000 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 27 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98 110 235
1
140 Up to 1000 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 27 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98 110 235
3
160 Up to 1200 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 30.5 M36 x 1.5 39 /4 106 120 256.5

6-9-34
Best Pneumatics Vol. 14

Air Line Equipment

앬 Modular F.R.L. Unit
F.R.L.
Air Filter + Regulator + Lubricator: AC10 to 60 ······················ P. 14-2-5
Filter Regulator + Lubricator: AC10A to 40A ·························· P. 14-2-16 AV
Air Filter + Regulator: AC10B to 60B ····································· P. 14-2-18 AU
Air Filter + Mist Seperator + Regulator: AC20C to 40C ·········· P. 14-2-20 AF
Filter Regulator + Mist Seperator: AC20D to 40D ·················· P. 14-2-22 AR
Attachment Specifications ······················································· P. 14-2-24
IR
Accessory ················································································ P. 14-2-29
VEX
Made to Order Specifications ·················································· P. 14-2-31
AMR
ITV
IC
VBA
VE

VY1
G
PPA
AL

Soft Start-up Valve: AV2000/3000/4000/5000 ························ P. 14-3-1

Lube Unit: AU ········································································· P. 14-3-11
Large Flow Air Filter: AF800/900 ············································ P. 14-3-13

14-2-1
 F.R.L. (Filter/Regulator/Lubricator)
Precautions 1
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for Safety
Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this
catalog, and refer to main text for more detailed precautions on every series.
Design
Warning
1. The standard bowl for the air filter, filter regulator, and
lubricator, as well as the sight dome for the lubricator are made
of polycarbonate. Do not use in an environment where they are
exposed to or come in contact with organic solvents, chemicals,
cutting oil, synthetic oil, alkali, and thread lock solutions.
2. Avoid applications where pressurized air is frequently
introduced to and released from the standard bowl of an air
filter, filter regulator, or lubricator. It may cause the bowl to be
damaged. Use of a metal bowl is recommended for such
applications.
3. Please consult with SMC if the intended application calls for
absolutely zero leakage due to special atmospheric
requirements, or if the use of a fluid other than air is required.
4. Regulator and filter regulator
Be sure to install a safety device to prevent damage or
malfunction of the outlet side components when the output
pressure exceeds the set pressure value.
Caution
1. Select a model that is suitable for the desired purity by referring
to the SMC’s Best Pneumatics catalog.
2. Components cannot be used for applications that are outside
the range of specifications. Please consult with SMC when you
anticipate using the component outside the range of its
specifications (such as temperature and pressure).
3. Mist separator and micro-mist separator
Design the system so that the mist separator and micro-mist
separator are installed where there is less pulsation. A pressure
difference between internal and external pressure inside the
element should be kept within 0.1 MPa, as exceeding this value
can cause damage.
4. Regulator and filter regulator
Air consumption is 0.1 L/min (ANR) or less under standard
specifications. Please consult with SMC, if this value is not
allowable.
5. F.R.L.
1) When using a 2-unit combination such as AC0A, AC0B,
and AC0D, secure the top and bottom of the bracket. For
3-unit, securing the bottom side of the bracket is
recommended.
2) The bracket position varies depending on the attachment (T-
interface or pressure switch) mounting.
3) The standard mounting position for bracket is OUT side of
each component (AF, AR, AL, AW, AFM, and AKM). Refer to
the table on page 14-2-30 for pitches and dimensions of the
bracket when mounting the attachment.
4) Brackets cannot be mounted on both sides of a T-interface or
pressure switch.
5) Please contact SMC if your wish to change the bracket
mounting position.
14-2-2
Selection
Warning
1. The mineral grease used on internal sliding parts and seals
may run down to outlet side components. Please consult with
SMC if this is not desirable.
2. Regulator and filter regulator
1) Residual pressure release (outlet pressure release) is not
complete by releasing the inlet pressure. To release residual
pressure, select a model with a back flow mechanism. Using
a model without a back flow mechanism makes for
inconsistent residual pressure release (i.e., residual pressure
may or may not be released) depending upon the operating
conditions.
2) Please contact SMC if air will not be consumed in the system
for a long period of time, or if the outlet side will be used with
a sealed circuit and a balanced circuit, as this may cause the
set pressure of the outlet side to fluctuate.
3) Set the regulating pressure range for the outlet pressure of
the regulator in a range that is 85% or less of the inlet
pressure. If set to above 85%, the outlet pressure will be
easily affected by fluctuations in the flow rate and inlet
pressure, and become unstable.
4) A safety margin is calculated into the maximum regulating
pressure range appearing in the catalog's specification table.
However, the outlet pressure may exceed the set pressure
due to a delay in the valve’s closing.
5) Please contact SMC when a circuit requires the use of a
regulator having relief sensitivity with high precision and
setting accuracy.
3. Lubricator
1) Please contact SMC when the lubricator is used in high
frequency operations, such as in a press.
2) Lubrication cannot be properly performed if the operating
flow rate is too low. Select proper size lubricator by referring
the minimum dripping flow rate provided in this catalog.
3) Avoid the use of a lubricator that causes back flow as this
may cause damage to internal parts.
4) Use a check valve (Series AKM) to prevent the lubricant
from back flowing when redirecting the piping on the inlet
side.
4. Float-type auto drain
Use auto drain under the following conditions to avoid
malfunction.
<N.O. type>
• Operating compressor: 0.75 kW (100 L/min (ANR)) or more
When using 2 or more auto drains, multiply the above value
by the number of auto drains to find the capacity of the
compressors you will need.
For example, when using 2 auto drains, 1.5 kW (200 L/min
(ANR)) of the compressor capacity is required.
• Operating pressure: 0.1 MPa or more
<N.C. type>
• Operating pressure for AD17, AD27: 0.1 MPa or more
• Operating pressure for AD37, AD47: 0.15 MPa or more
 F.R.L. (Filter/Regulator/Lubricator)
Precautions 2
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for Safety
Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this
catalog, and refer to main text for more detailed precautions on every series.

Mounting Piping F.R.L.

Caution Warning AV
1. To avoid reversed connections of the air inlet/outlet, make 1. To screw piping materials into components, tighten with a
connections after confirming the “IN/OUT” mark or arrows that recommended tightening torque while holding the female
indicate the direction of air flow. Reversed connections can thread side. If the minimum tightening torque is not observed,
AU
cause malfunction. this can cause a looseness and seal failure. On the other
2. Components with a bowl, e.g., air filter, filter regulator, lubricator, hand, excess tightening torque can cause damage to the AF
threads. Furthermore, tightening without holding the female
must be installed vertically with the bowl downward so that
faulty drain discharge and dripping can be verified.
thread side can cause damage due to the excess force that is AR
applied directly to the piping bracket.
3. Ensure sufficient top, bottom, and front clearance for
maintenance and operation of each component. Refer to the Recommended Tightening Torque (N⋅m)
IR
dimensions section for the minimum clearance for each Connection
M5 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
component.
thread
VEX
Torque ∗ 7 to 9 12 to 14 22 to 24 28 to 30 28 to 30 36 to 38
4. Regulator and filter regulator
∗ After tightening by hand, tighten further approximately 1/6 turn AMR
Be sure to unlock the knob before adjusting the pressure and to
using a tightening tool.
lock it after the pressure is set.
ITV
Adjustment IC
Warning VBA
1. Regulator and filter regulator
1) Set the regulator while verifying the displayed values of the VE

inlet and outlet pressure gauges. Turning the knob excessively
can cause damage to the internal parts. VY1
2) Do not use a tool on the pressure regulator knob as this can
cause damage. It must be operated manually.
G
2. Avoid excessive torsional moment or bending moment other
Caution than those caused by the equipment’s own weight as this can PPA
1. Regulator and filter regulator cause damage. Support external piping separately.
1) Be sure to check the inlet pressure before setting the outlet AL
pressure.
2) The pressure gauge included with regulators for 0.02 to 0.2
MPa setting is for up to 0.2 MPa only. Do not apply pressure
exceeding 0.2 MPa. It can damage the pressure gauge.
3) To set the pressure using the knob, turn the knob in the
direction that increases pressure and lock the knob after the
pressure is set. If this is done in the direction that decreases
pressure, the pressure may drop from the original set pressure.
Turning the knob clockwise increases the outlet pressure, and
turning it counterclockwise reduces the pressure.

3. Piping materials without flexibility such as steel tube piping are

prone to be affected by excess moment load and vibration
from the piping side. Use flexible tubing in between to avoid
such an effect.

14-2-3
 F.R.L. (Filter/Regulator/Lubricator)
Precautions 3
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for Safety
Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this
catalog, and refer to main text for more detailed precautions on every series.

Piping Maintenance
Caution Warning
1. Lubricator 5. Mist separator, Micro mist separator
Try to avoid riser piping and branch lines as much as possible 1) Replace the element every 2 years or when the pressure
on the outlet side, otherwise proper lubrication will be drop becomes 0.1 MPa, whichever comes first, to prevent
compromised. damage to the element.
2. Float type auto-drain 2) Release accumulated condensate periodically before it
Drain piping should be performed under the following reaches the maximum capacity. Condensate that flows out
conditions to avoid malfunction. to the outlet side can cause malfunctions.
<N.O. type>
• Use piping whose I.D. is ø6.5 or larger, and whose length is 5
6. Lubricator
m or less. Avoid riser piping. 1) Use class 1 turbine oil (without additives) ISO VG32. Using
<N.C. type> other lubricant can cause damage to devices and result in
• AD17/27: Use piping whose I.D. is ø2.5 or larger malfunctions.
AD37/47: Use piping whose I.D. is ø4 or larger 2) For AL10 and AL20 type, replenish the lubricant after
Length is 5 m or less. Avoid riser piping. releasing the inlet pressure as lubricant cannot be properly
applied in a pressurized condition.

Caution
Air Supply 1. Perform periodical inspections of the filter element and replace
it as necessary. Check the element whenever the outlet
pressure drops below normal or air does not flow smoothly
Caution during operation.
1. When there is excessive condensate, install a device that
2. Regulator and filter regulator
eliminates water such as a dryer or water separator (Drain
Check the sliding part or seat of the internal valve when a
Catch) on the inlet side of the air filter.
setting malfunction or relief leakage occur and temporary or
emergency repairs need to be made.
3. Lubricator
Check the dripping amount once a day. Drip failure can cause
Maintenance damage to the components being lubricated.

Warning 4. Float type auto drain

1) Turn the knob counterclockwise to release the drain
1. When disassembly or installation is required during the
manually. Avoid applying excessive torque to the knob, such
maintenance, repair, or replacement of a device, be sure to
as by using a tool, as this can damage an auto drain.
follow the instructions provided in the instruction manual or
After releasing the condensate, turn the knob clockwise until
safety instructions in this catalog.
it stops.
2. Perform periodical inspections to detect any cracks, scratches,
or other deterioration of the transparent resin bowl of the air 2) Air leakage or other performance malfunctions can occur if
filter, filter regulator, and lubricator or the sight dome of the premature clogging of the element or pressure drop causes
lubricator. the pressure inside the bowl to get outside the specified
Replace with a new bowl, sight dome, or metal bowl when any pressure range parameters. Check the pressure whenever
kind of deterioration is found, otherwise this can cause such an irregularity occurs.
damage.
3. Perform periodical inspections to detect dirt on the transparent
resin bowl of the air filter, filter regulator, and lubricator or the
sight dome of the lubricator. When you find dirt on any of the
above devices, clean with a mild household cleanser. Do not
use other cleaning agents, otherwise this can cause damage.
4. Air filter
1) Replace the element every 2 years or when the pressure
drop becomes 0.1 MPa, whichever comes first, to prevent
damage to the element.
2) Release accumulated condensate periodically before it
reaches the maximum capacity. Condensate that flows out
to the outlet side can cause malfunctions.

14-2-4
Modular F.R.L. Unit

Series AC
F.R.L.
AV
AU
AF
AR
IR
VEX
AMR
ITV
IC
VBA
VE

VY1
G
PPA
AL

Introducing our latest F.R.L. units

14-2-5
Space-saving design Reduction

The use of compact spacer with bracket

New
reduces the total assembling space.
Model Reduction
New Old (mm)
AC10 AC1000 4 Improved visibility
AC20 AC2000 14 for lubricant drip
AC25 AC2500 14 with graduation for lubricant
control
AC30 AC3000 14
Old

AC40 AC4000 18 Graduation

AC40-06 AC4000-06 18
AC50 AC5000 18
5
6

AC55 AC5500 18
4

SMC
8

2
AC60 AC6000 18 Spacer with
9 1

bracket

Embedded pressure gauge

is a standard feature.
Ozone resistant rubber material (HNBR)
Improved relief sensitivity

Float type auto-drain with excellent

operability is used for compact
models (AF10/20).
Drain cock is easy-to-use rotary type. Improved installation
Bracket with spacer
Retainer

Knob cover
Prevents careless knob operation.

Lock cover
Lever pin

Keyhole dia.: ø8 1. Attach the component into the fitting of the spacer with
bracket.
2. Lock the lever pin into the retainer. (Temporary installation)

Lock Bolt
(provided by customers)
Part no. Model
AC20, AR20, AR20K, AW20,
AR20P-580AS
AW20K, AWM20, AWD20
AR25P-580AS AC25, AR25, AR25K
AC30, AR30, AR30K, AW30,
AR30P-580AS
AW30K, AWM30, AWD30
AC40(-06), AR40(-06),
AR40P-580AS AR40K(-06), AW40(-06),
AW40K(-06), AWM40, AWD40 3. Tighten the bolt.

14-2-6
Standard Combination
Component
Combination Model Port
size Air filter Regulator Lubricator Filter regulator Mist separator
AF AR AL AW AFM

AF + AR + AL AC10 M5 x 0.8 AF10 AR10 AL10

AC20 1/8, 1/4 AF20 AR20 AL20
AC25 1/4, 3/8 AF30 AR25 AL30
F.R.L.
AC30 1/4, 3/8 AF30 AR30 AL30
AC40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 AF40 AR40 AL40 AV
AC40-06 3/4 AF40-06 AR40-06 AL40-06
AU
AC50 3/4, 1 AF50 AR50 AL50
AC55 1 AF60 AR50 AL60 AF
AC60 1 AF60 AR60 AL60
AR
AW + AL AC10A M5 x 0.8 AL10 AW10
AC20A 1/8, 1/4 AL20 AW20 IR
AC30A 1/4, 3/8 AL30 AW30
VEX
AC40A 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 AL40 AW40
AC40A-06 3/4 AL40-06 AW40-06 AMR
AF + AR AC10B M5 x 0.8 AF10 AR10
ITV
AC20B 1/8, 1/4 AF20 AR20
AC25B 1/4, 3/8 AF30 AR25 IC
AC30B 1/4, 3/8 AF30 AR30
VBA
AC40B 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 AF40 AR40
AC40B-06 3/4 AF40-06 AR40-06 VE

AC50B 3/4, 1 AF50 AR50
VY1
AC55B 1 AF60 AR50
AC60B 1 AF60 AR60 G
AF + AFM + AR AC20C 1/8, 1/4 AF20 AR20 AFM20
PPA
AC25C 1/4, 3/8 AF30 AR25 AFM30
AC30C 1/4, 3/8 AF30 AR30 AFM30 AL
AC40C 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 AF40 AR40 AFM40
AC40C-06 3/4 AF40-06 AR40-06 AFM40-06
AW + AFM AC20D 1/8, 1/4 AW20 AFM20
AC30D 1/4, 3/8 AW30 AFM30
AC40D 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 AW40 AFM40
AC40D-06 3/4 AW40-06 AFM40-06

Table of Contents
 F.R.L. Unit
Air Filter + Regulator + Lubricator
AC10 to 60·································· Page 14-2-5
Filter Regulator + Lubricator
AC10A to 40A····························· Page 14-2-16
Air Filter + Regulator
AC10B to 60B····························· Page 14-2-18
Air Filter + Mist Separator + Regulator
AC20C to 40C····························· Page 14-2-20
Filter Regulator + Mist separator
AC20D to 40D····························· Page 14-2-22
Attachment Specifications············· Page 14-2-24
Spacers and Brackets:
Accessory··································· Page 14-2-29
Made to Order Specifications········ Page 14-2-31
 Modular Style Air Filter
Air Filter
AF10 to 60·································· Page 14-2-34
Made to Order Specifications········ Page 14-2-39
Mist Separator
AFM20 to 40······························· Page 14-2-40
Micro Mist Separator
AFD20 to 40································ Page 14-2-43
 Modular Style Regulator
Regulator
AR10 to 60·································· Page 14-2-47
Made to Order Specifications········ Page 14-2-53
Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism
AR20K to 60K····························· Page 14-2-54
 Modular Style Lubricator
Lubricator
AL10 to 60·································· Page 14-2-61
 Modular Style Filter Regulator
Filter Regulator
AW10 to 40································· Page 14-2-67
Made to Order Specifications········ Page 14-2-72
Filter Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism
AW20K to 40K···························· Page 14-2-74
Mist Separator Regulator
AWM20 to 40······························ Page 14-2-78
Micro Mist Separator Regulator
AWD20 to 40······························ Page 14-2-82

14-2-7
Simple Specials System
A system designed to respond quickly and
easily to your special ordering needs.

Simple Specials Order Specifications

1. Modular/Attachment combination & Combination order
Attachment symbols:
Piping adapter: E0
Pressure switch: IS1000
Check valve: AKM
Cross interface: Y4
Residual pressure relief 3 port valve: VHS
2. Modular products, Combination of special order
numbers & Combination order
Special orders for AF, AR, AL, AW, AF, AW

Short lead times

This system enables us to respond
to your special needs, such as
additional machining, accessory
assembly, or modular unit, and
deliver such special products as
quickly as standard products.

Repeat orders
As soon as we receive a Simple Special part
number from your previous order, we will
process the order, manufacture the product, and
deliver it to you.

Please contact SMC for further details on the Simple Specials System.

14-2-8
 F.R.L. Unit Series AC
How to Order

AC 30 A F 03 DE KV 12R
Option
F.R.L. unit Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (11) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AC10 to 60
Body size
2 Metal bowl AC10 to 60
10 20 25 30 40 50 55 60
3 Lubricator with drain cock AC10 to 60
6 Nylon bowl AC10 to 60
F.R.L.
8 Metal bowl with level gauge AC25 to 60
C With bowl guard AC25 to 60
AV
J (12) Drain guide 1/4 AC10 to 60
Model combination
N Non-relieving type AC10 to 60
Combination AU
Symbol Filter Mist R Flow direction: Right
Left AC10 to 60
Air filter Regulator Lubricator regulator separator
Nil (1) (2) (3) — — W Drain cock with barb fitting:
ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing
AC25 to 60 AF
A — — (2) (1) —
(13)
B (1) (2) — — — Z
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and
pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F)
AC10 to 60 AR
C (1) (3) — — (2)
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate
D — — — (1) (2) in ascending alphanumeric order.
IR
Note 1) The number inside ( ) indicates the Note 11) The only difference from the standard
combination order counted from the specifications is the adjusting spring for VEX
inlet side. the regulator. It does not restrict the
setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
Note 12) Without a valve function. AMR
Note 13) For thread types M5 and NPT.
This product is for overseas use only
Thread type according to the new Measurement Law.
ITV
(The SI unit type is provided for use in
Metric system thread (M5)
Nil Japan.) IC
Rc Pressure switch comes with a dual unit
N (2) NPT scale in SI (MPa) and imperial (PSI)
units. VBA
F (3) G Attachment
Note 2) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 (applicable to AC25 Port size for
to 60), and the exhaust port for auto-drain Symbol Description Attachment
mounting position
Applicable
model
intermediate
air release
VE

comes with ø3/8" One-touch fitting Nil None — — —
(applicable to AC25 to 60).
AF + AR + [K] + AL AC20 to 40 AC20: 1/8 VY1
Note 3) Drain guide is G 1/4 (applicable to AC25 to AC25: 1/4
60). K Check valve
AC30: 1/4
AW + [K] + AL AC20A to 40A AC40: 3/8 G
AF + AR + [S] + AL AC20 to 60
Port size
AW + [S] + AL AC20A to 40A PPA
Port Body size Pressure
Symbol size S AF + [S] + AR AC20B to 60B —
switch
10 20 25 30 40 50 55 60
AF + AFM + [S] + AR AC20C to 40C AL
M5 M5 ● — — — — — — —
AW + [S] + AFM AC20D to 40D
01 1/8 — ● — — — — — —
AC10: M5 x 0.8
02 1/4 — ● ● ● ● — — — AF + [T] + AR + AL AC10 to 60AC20: 1/8
03 3/8 — — ● ● ● — — — AC25: 1/4
T T-interface AC30: 1/4
04 — — — — ● — — — AF + [T] + AR AC10B to 60B AC40: 3/8
1/2
AC50: 3/8
06 3/4 — — — — ● ● — —
AF + AFM + [T] + AR AC20C to 40C AC55: 1/2
10 1 — — — — — ● ● ● AC60: 1/2
AF + AR + AL + [V] AC20 to 50
AW + AL + [V] AC20A to 40A
Residual
V pressure relief AF + AR + [V] AC20B to 50B —
3 port valve
Accessory AF + AFM + AR + [V] AC20C to 40C
Symbol Description Applicable model AW + AFM + [V] AC20D to 40D
Nil — — [V] + AF + AR
K AC20B to 50B
Residual
C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) (4) AC10 to 60 V1 pressure relief [V] + AF + AFM + AR
K AC20C to 40C —
3 port valve
D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) (4) AC25 to 60 [V] + AW
K + AFM AC20D to 40D
E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AC20 to 60 Note 6) When more than one attachment is required, order in
With round pressure gauge (Without limit indicator)
alphabetical order.
(5) AC10
G Note 7) Piping adapter, pressure switch with piping adapter,
With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AC20 to 60 and cross interface need to be ordered separately.
Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto-drain connection should be Note 8) Please contact SMC when using a pressure switch
ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is chosen. and T-interface together for ACB.
Note 5) Mounting thread for pressure gauge: Note 9) The bracket position varies depending on the T-
1/16 for AC10; 1/8 for AC20 to 30; 1/4 for AC40 to 60 interface or pressure switch mounting. Refer to the
Pressure gauge is not mounted and is supplied loose at the table on page 14-2-30 for standard bracket position.
time of shipment. Note 10) With this combination, regulators and filter regulators
will be “with back flow function” type.
For safety, check that the outlet pressure is exhausted
and is atmospheric pressure by pressure gauge.
14-2-9
Series AC
Accessory/Optional Specifications Combination
: Combination available : Combination not available : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
F.R.L. unit applicable model

Symbol
Combination Accessory Optional specifications
Accessory/ AC10 AC20 AC20B AC25B AC30 AC30A AC30B AC30C AC30D
AC10B AC20C AC25 to to
Optional specifications C D E G 1 2 3 6 8 C J N R WZ AC10A AC20A AC20D AC25C AC60 AC40A AC60B AC40C AC40D

Float type auto-drain (N.C.) C

Accessory

Float type auto-drain (N.O.) D

Square embedded type
pressure gauge E
Round pressure gauge G
0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting -1
Metal bowl -2
Lubricator with drain cock -3
Optional specifications

Nylon bowl -6
Metal bowl with level gauge -8

With bowl guard -C

Drain guide 1/4 -J
Non-relieving type -N
Flow direction: Right
Left -R
Drain cock with barb fitting:
ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing -W
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and
pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z

Attachment
Port size Function

M5 x 0.8 Allows installation/removal of the component P. 14-2-24

Piping adapter 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1 without removing the piping.

M5 x 0.8 P. 14-2-24
T-interface 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Redirects the air flow.

Pressure switch 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4

Compact switch and piping adapter P. 14-2-25
with piping adapter integrated into one piece.

Check valve 1/8, 1/4, 3/8 Prevents back flow from lubricator. P. 14-2-26

Pressure switch — Compact switch P. 14-2-27

M5 x 0.8 P. 14-2-27
Cross interface 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Allows piping in all 4 directions.

Residual pressure relief 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1 Releases residual pressure in lines. P. 14-2-28
3 port valve

Attachment Accessory Made to Order Specifications

Refer to pages 14-2-29 to 30 for interfaces and brackets. Refer to page 14-2-31 for details.

14-2-10
 F.R.L.
AV
AU
AF
AR
IR
VEX
AMR
ITV
IC
VBA
VE

VY1
G
PPA
AL

14-2-11
 F.R.L. Unit Air Filter + Regulator + Lubricator

Series AC10 to 60
P. 14-2-31

JIS Symbol

AC20 AC40 Air filter Regulator Lubricator

Standard Specifications
Model AC10 AC20 AC25 AC30 AC40 AC40-06 AC50 AC55 AC60
Air filter AF10 AF20 AF30 AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60 AF60
Component Regulator AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR50 AR60
Lubricator AL10 AL20 AL30 AL30 AL40 AL40-06 AL50 AL60 AL60
1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/4
Port size M5 x 0.8 3/8 3/4 1 1
1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1
(1)
Pressure gauge port size 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.7 MPa 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (2) (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l /min (ANR))
Ambient and –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
fluid temperature
Nominal filtration rating 5 µm
Recommended lubricant Class 1 turbine oil (ISO VG32)
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard — Option Standard
Regulator construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.27 0.73 0.91 1.00 1.74 1.95 4.17 4.25 4.34
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for F.R.L. unit with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AC20 to AC60).
Note 2) Not applicable to AC10.

Attachment/Accessory Part No.

Part no.
Description Model
AC10 AC20 AC25 AC30 AC40 AC40-06 AC50 AC55 AC60
(1)

G-27-10-R1 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02

Pressure gauge

Round type
1.0 MPa Square (2)
embedded type — GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
Accessory

(3)
Round type G-27-10-R1 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2 MPa Square (2)
embedded type — GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
(4)
Float type N.O. — — AD38 AD38N (7) AD38 AD38N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7)
auto-drain N.C. AD17 AD27 AD37 AD37N (7) AD37 AD37N ( 7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7)
Spacer Y100 Y200 Y300 Y300 Y400 Y500 Y600 Y600 Y600
Check valve (5) (6) — AKM2000-(0201) AKM3000-(0102) AKM3000-(0102) AKM4000-(0203) — — — —
Pressure switch (6) — IS1000M-20 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-40 IS1000M-50 IS1000M-60 IS1000M-60 IS1000M-60
01 03
T-interface (5) Y110-M5 Y210- (02) Y310- (01) Y310-(01) Y410-(02) Y510-(02) Y610-(04) Y610-(03) Y610-(03)
Attachment

(6) 02 02 03 03 04 04

02
06
Residual pressure (6)
relief 3 port valve — VHS20- 01 02
02 VHS30- 03 VHS30- 03
02
VHS40- VHS40-06 VHS50-(10)
03
04 — —
(6) 01 02 02 02
Piping adapter E100-M5 E200- 02
03
E300- 03
04
E300- 03
04
E400- 03
04 E500-06 E600- 06
10 E600- 06
10 E600- 06
10
06
(6)
01 02 02 02
Pressure switch 03
with piping adapter — IS1000E-20 02 IS1000E-30 03 IS1000E-3003 IS1000E-40 04 — — — —
03 04 04
06
(6)
Cross interface Y14-M5 Y24- 01
02 Y34- 01
02 Y34- 01
02 Y44- 02
03 Y54- 03
04 — — —
Note 1)  in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N
for NPT.
Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.
Note 2) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
Note 3) For 1.0 MPa.
Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.15 MPa (AD17/27).
Note 5) For F.R.L. units, port sizes not in ( ) are for standard application.
Note 6) Separate interfaces are required for modular unit.
Note 7) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be ø3/8".

14-2-12
 F.R.L. Unit Series AC10 to 60
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) Condition: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa

AC10 M5 x 0.8 AC40-06 Rc 3/4 Selection

0.6 0.6
Warning
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.5 0.5 1. Float type auto-drain
0.4 0.4 Operate under the following conditions to
avoid malfunction.
0.3 0.3
<N.O. type>
0.2 0.2 • Operating compressor: 0.75 kW (100 l/min
(ANR)) or more. F.R.L.
0.1 0.1
When using 2 or more auto drains, multiply
the value above by the number of auto-
00 25 50 75 100 125 150 00 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
drains to find the capacity of the
AV
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
compressors you will need.
AC20 Rc 1/4 AC50 Rc 1 For example, when using 2 auto-drains, AU
0.6 0.6 1.5 kW (200 l/min (ANR)) of the
compressor capacity is required. AF
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.5 0.5
• Operating pressure: 0.1 MPa or more.
0.4 0.4 <N.C. type> AR
0.3 0.3
• Operating pressure for AD17, AD27:
0.1 MPa or more.
0.2 0.2
IR
• Operating pressure for AD37, AD47:
0.15 MPa or more.
0.1 0.1
2. Use a regulator or filter regulator with a
VEX
0 0
0 200 400 600 800 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 back flow mechanism when mounting a 3
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) port valve for residual pressure release on AMR
AC25 Rc 3/8 AC55 Rc 1 the IN side to ensure the release of the
0.6 0.6
residual pressure. Otherwise, residual ITV
pressure will not be fully released.
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.5 0.5
Caution IC
0.4 0.4
1. When releasing air at the intermediate
0.3 0.3 position using a T-interface on the inlet side
VBA
0.2 of the lubricator, lubricant may back flow.
0.2
Therefore, releasing air that does not VE

0.1 0.1 contain traces of lubricant is not possible.
0 0
To release air that does not contain traces VY1
0 500 1000 1500 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 of lubricant, use a check valve (Series
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) AKM) on the inlet side of the lubricator to
prevent a back flow of the lubricant.
G
AC30 Rc 3/8 AC60 Rc 1
2. Mounting a 3 port valve for residual
0.6 0.6
pressure release on the IN side of the PPA
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.5 0.5 lubricator can cause lubricant to back flow.

0.4 0.4
Take measures to prevent lubricant from AL
splashing by installing a filter on the EXH
0.3 0.3 port.
0.2
3. An F.R.L. unit shipped from the plant has
0.2
its model number labeled. However,
0.1 0.1 components that are combined together
during the distribution process do not have
0 0
0 500 1000 1500 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 a label on them.
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
4. Please contact SMC when mounting a
AC40 Rc 1/2 pressure switch, T-interface, or filter
regulator on the OUT side of the 3 port
0.6
Precautions valve for residual pressure release.
Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.5

0.4
Mounting and Adjustment Air Supply
0.3 Caution Caution
0.2 1. A knob cover is available to prevent 1. Use an air filter with 5 µm or less filtration
careless operation of the knob. Refer to rating on the inlet side of the valve to avoid
0.1 page 14-2-6 for details. any damage to the seat caused by dust
0
0 1000 2000 3000 Piping when mounting a 3 port valve for residual
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) pressure release on the inlet side.
Warning
1. When mounting a check valve, make
sure the arrow (IN side) points in the
correct direction of air flow.

14-2-13
Series AC10 to 60
Conditions:
Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa
Outlet pressure 0.2 MPa
Pressure Characteristics (Representative values) Flow rate 20 l/min (ANR)

AC10 AC40-06
0.3
0.25
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point
0.25
Set point
0.2

0.2

0.15
0.15
0 0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)

AC20 AC50
0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point

0.2 0.2

0.15 0.15

0 0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)

AC25 AC55
0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point

0.2 0.2

0.15 0.15

0 0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)

AC30 AC60
0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point

0.2 0.2

0.15 0.15

0 0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)

AC40
0.25
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point

0.2

0.15

0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Inlet pressure (MPa)

14-2-14
 F.R.L. Unit Series AC10 to 60
Dimensions
Pressure gauge port size
AC10/20 A P G
E F Q
øL

H
IN OUT

H
L

J
OUT

Pressure gauge

B
(Option)
K Square embedded type M F.R.L.
pressure gauge
(Option)
AV
Drain
Port size N
Air filter Regulator Lubricator Min. clearance AU

D
for maintenance
AC25/30/40/50/55/60 Pressure gauge port size
A P G AF
E F Q
øL
AR

H
C
IN OUT
IR

H
L

OUT

B Pressure gauge
VEX
(Option)
K M
Square embedded type
AMR
pressure gauge
(Option) ITV
Port size

Drain N IC
Min. clearance

D
Air filter Regulator Lubricator for maintenance
VBA
Applicable model AC10, AC20 AC25, AC30, AC40, AC40-06, AC50, AC55, AC60
With auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl With auto-drain (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge With drain guide Drain cock with barb fitting
VE

Optional VY1
B

B
B

B
B

specifications
B

N.O.: Black
G
B

O S N.C.: Gray O
S
M5 x 0.8 ø10 One-touch 1/4 Barb fitting
fitting Width across flats 17 Applicable tubing: T0604
PPA
(mm)
Standard specifications Accessory specifications
AL
Model Port size Bracket mounting size With pressure gauge With auto-drain
A B C D
E F G H J K L øL M N P Q T B
AC10 M5 x 0.8 87 85 26 35 28 31 25 20 27 7 4.5 4.5 2.8 40 26 — 0 104
AC20 1/8, 1/4 126 123 36 60 41.5 43 30 24 33 12 5.5 5.5 3.2 50 65 29.5 2 (1) 141
AC25 1/4, 3/8 167 153 38 80 55 57 41 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 64 28.5 0 194
AC30 1/4, 3/8 167 153 38 80 55 57 41 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 66 30.5 3.5 194
AC40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 220 187 40 110 72.5 75 50 40 — 18 9 9 4 88 74 35 3.5 226
AC40-06 3/4 235 187 38 110 77.5 80 50 40 — 18 9 9 4.6 88 74 35 3 226
AC50 3/4, 1 282 264 43 110 93 96 70 50 — 20 11 11 6.4 115 84 44.5 3.3 303
AC55 1 292 279 45 110 98 96 70 50 — 20 11 11 6.4 117.5 84 44.5 3.3 318
AC60 1 297 280 46 110 98 101 70 50 — 20 11 11 6.4 117.5 84 44.5 3.3 318

Optional specifications (2) Note 1) For AC20 only, the position of the pressure
gauge is above the center of the piping.
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge Note 2) For optional specifications (with barb fitting,
B B B B with drain guide, with metal bowl, or with level
AC10 gauge), the total length (dimension for B) will
— — 85 —
vary.
AC20 — — 123 —
AC25 161 160 166 186
AC30 161 160 166 186
AC40 195 194 200 220
AC40-06 195 194 200 220
AC50 272 271 276 296
AC55 287 286 292 312
AC60 288 287 293 313

14-2-15
 F.R.L. Unit Filter Regulator + Lubricator

Series AC10A to 40A

P. 14-2-31

JIS Symbol

AC20A Filter regulator Lubricator

Standard Specifications AC40A
Model AC10A AC20A AC30A AC40A AC40A-06
Filter regulator AW10 AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06
Component
Lubricator AL10 AL20 AL30 AL40 AL40-06
1/4
1/8 1/4
Port size M5 x 0.8 3/8 3/4
1/4 3/8 1/2
Pressure gauge port size (1) 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.7 MPa 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (2) (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Nominal filtration rating 5 µm
Recommended lubricant Class 1 turbine oil (ISO VG32)
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard — Option Standard
Filter regulator construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.20 0.59 0.75 1.41 1.46
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for F.R.L. unit with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AC20A to AC40A).
Note 2) Not applicable to AC10A.
Attachment/Accessory Part No.
Part no.
Description Model AC10A AC20A AC30A AC40A AC40A-06
Round type G27-10-R1 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
(1) 1.0 MPa (2)

Pressure
Square embedded type — GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
Accessory

(3)
gauge Round type G27-10-R1 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2 MPa (2)
Square embedded type — GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
(4) N.O. — — AD38 AD38N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7)
Float type auto-drain
N.C. AD17 AD27 AD37 AD37N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7)
Spacer Y100 Y200 Y300 Y400 Y500
(5) 01
Check valve (6) — AKM2000- (02) AKM3000- (01)
02 AKM4000- (02)
03
—
(6)
Pressure switch — IS1000M-20 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-40 IS1000M-50
(5) 01 (01) (02)
T-interface Y110-M5 Y210- Y310- Y410- Y510- (02)
Attachment

(6) (02) 02 03 03

(6) 02
Residual pressure relief 3 port valve — VHS20- 01
02 VHS30- 02
03 VHS40- 03
04
VHS40-06
01 02 02
(6) 03
Piping adapter E100-M5 E200- 02
03
E300- 03
04
E400- 04 E500-06
06
(6) 02 02
01
Pressure switch with piping adapter — IS1000E-20 02 IS1000E-30 03
04
IS1000E-40 03
04 —
03 06

Cross interface (6)

Y14-M5 Y24- 01
02 Y34- 01
02 Y44- 02
03 Y54- 03
04

Note 1)  in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N
for NPT.
Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.
Note 2) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
Note 3) For 1.0 MPa.
Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa (AD17/27); N.C. type–0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
Note 5) For F.R.L. units, port sizes not in ( ) are for standard application.
Note 6) Separate interfaces are required for modular unit.
Note 7) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be ø3/8".

14-2-16
 F.R.L. Unit Series AC10A to 40A
Dimensions
AC10A/20A
A N F
E P

øK

G
IN OUT

Q
F.R.L.
B

G
K
Pressure gauge

H
OUT

(Option)
Pressure gauge port size
J
Square embedded type AV
pressure gauge L
(Option)

Port size
AU
Lubricator
Drain Min. clearance M AF
Filter regulator for maintenance

D
AR
AC30A/40A A N F
E P IR
VEX
øK
C

AMR

G
IN OUT
Q

ITV
B

G
K

Pressure gauge OUT

Pressure gauge port size

(Option) IC
J Square embedded type L
pressure gauge VBA
(Option)

Port size VE

Drain
Lubricator
Min. clearance M VY1
for maintenance
D

Filter regulator
G
Applicable model AC10A, AC20A AC30A, AC40A, AC40A-06
With auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl With auto-drain (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge With drain guide Drain cock with barb fitting PPA
AL
Optional
B

B
B

specifications
B

N.O.: Black
B

O S N.C.: Gray O
S
M5 x 0.8 ø10 One-touch 1/4 Barb fitting
fitting Width across flats 17 Applicable tubing: T0604

(mm)
Standard specifications Accessory specifications
Model Port size Bracket mounting size With pressure gauge With auto-drain
A B C D
E F G H J K øK L M N P Q B
AC10A M5 x 0.8 56 108 48 35 28 25 20 27 7 4.5 4.5 2.8 40 26 — 0 126
AC20A 1/8, 1/4 83 160 73 60 41.5 30 24 33 12 5.5 5.5 3.2 50 63 27 5 177
AC30A 1/4, 3/8 110 201 86 80 55 41 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 66 30.5 3.5 242
AC40A 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 145 239 92 110 72.5 50 40 — 18 9 9 4 88 76 38.5 1.5 278
AC40A-06 3/4 155 242 93 110 77.5 50 40 — 18 9 9 4.6 88 76 38.5 1.2 278

Optional specifications Note) Note) For optional specifications (with barb fitting, with drain
guide, with metal bowl, or with level gauge), the total
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge length (dimension for B) will vary.
B B B B
AC10A — — 107 —
AC20A — — 160 —
AC30A 209 208 214 234
AC40A 247 246 251 272
AC40A-06 250 249 255 275

14-2-17
 F.R.L. Unit Air Filter + Regulator

Series AC10B to 60B

P. 14-2-31

JIS Symbol

AC20B AC40B
Air filter Regulator
Standard Specifications
Model AC10B AC20B AC25B AC30B AC40B AC40B-06 AC50B AC55B AC60B
Air filter AF10 AF20 AF30 AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60 AF60
Component
Regulator AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR50 AR60
1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/4
Port size M5 x 0.8 3/8 3/4 1 1
1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1
(1)
Pressure gauge port size 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.7 MPa 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (2) (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
Ambient and –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
fluid temperature
Nominal filtration rating 5 µm
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard — Option Standard
Regulator construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.16 0.51 0.55 0.63 1.12 1.16 2.44 2.45 2.54
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for F.R.L. unit with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AC20B to AC60B).
Note 2) Not applicable to AC10B.

Attachment/Accessory Part No.

Part no.
Description Model
AC10B AC20B AC25B AC30B AC40B AC40B-06 AC50B AC55B AC60B
(1)
Pressure gauge

Round type G27-10-R1 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
1.0 MPa Square (2)
embedded type — GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
Accessory

Round type G27-10-R1 (3) G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2 MPa Square (2)
— GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
embedded type
(4)
Float type N.O. — — AD38 AD38N (7) AD38 AD38N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7)
auto-drain N.C. AD17 AD27 AD37 AD37N (7) AD37 AD37N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7)
Spacer Y100 Y200 Y300 Y300 Y400 Y500 Y600 Y600 Y600
Pressure switch (6) — IS1000M-20 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-40 IS1000M-50 IS1000M-60 IS1000M-60 IS1000M-60
(5) 01 03
T-interface (6) Y110-M5 Y210- (02) Y310-(01)
02 Y310- (01)
02 Y410- (02)
03 Y510- (02)
03 Y610- (04) Y610- (03)
04 Y610- (03)
04
Attachment

(6) 02
02 02
Residual pressure
relief 3 port valve
— VHS20- 01 06
02 VHS30- 03 VHS30- 03 VHS40- 03 VHS40-06 VHS50- 10 — —
04
02
(6) 01 02 02
Piping adapter E100-M5 E200- 02 E300- 03 E300- 03 E400- 03
04 E500-06 E600- 06
10 E600- 06
10 E600- 06
10
03 04 04 06
02
Pressure switch (6) 01 02 02 03
— IS1000E-20 02 IS1000E-30 03 IS1000E-30 03 IS1000E-40 04 — — — —
with piping adapter 03 04 04 06

(6)
Cross interface Y14-M5 Y24- 01
02 Y34- 01
02 Y34- 01
02 Y44- 02
03 Y54- 03
04 — — —
Note 1)  in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N
for NPT.
Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.
Note 2) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
Note 3) For 1.0 MPa.
Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD17/27), 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
Note 5) For F.R.L. units, port sizes not in ( ) are for standard application.
Note 6) Separate interfaces are required for modular unit.
Note 7) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be ø3/8".

14-2-18
 F.R.L. Unit Series AC10B to 60B
Dimensions
AC10B/20B A Pressure gauge port size
F P E
øK

N
Q

G
IN OUT

T
K

G
H
Pressure gauge

B
(Option)
J Square embedded type L
pressure gauge F.R.L.
(Option)
Port size AV
Min. clearance M
Drain

D
Air filter Regulator for maintenance AU
AC25B/30B/40B/50B/55B/60B
F ø
A
Pressure gauge port size AF
P E
K
N

Q
AR

G
C

IN OUT IR

T
VEX

G
K

Pressure gauge
B

(Option)
J L AMR
Square embedded type
pressure gauge
(Option) ITV
Port size
IC
Drain Min. clearance
M
D

Air filter Regulator for maintenance

VBA
Applicable model AC10B, AC20B AC25B, AC30B, AC40B, AC40B-06, AC50B, AC55B, AC60B
With auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl With auto-drain (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge With drain guide Drain cock with barb fitting VE

Optional VY1
B

B
B
B

specifications
B

N.O.: Black
G
B

O S N.C.: Gray O
S
M5 x 0.8 ø10 One-touch 1/4 Barb fitting
fitting Width across flats 17 Applicable tubing: T0604
PPA
(mm)
Standard specifications Accessory specifications AL
Model Port size Bracket mounting size With pressure gauge With auto-drain
A B C D
E F G H J K ØK L M N P Q T B
AC10B M5 x 0.8 56 71 11 25 25 28 20 27 7 4.5 4.5 2.8 40 13.5 26 — 0 89
AC20B 1/8, 1/4 83 114 26.5 40 30 41.5 24 33 12 5.5 5.5 3.2 50 2.5 65 29.5 2 (1) 132
AC25B 1/4, 3/8 110 143 28 50 41 55 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 13 64 28.5 0 184
AC30B 1/4, 3/8 110 146 31 50 41 55 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 10 66 30.5 3.5 187
AC40B 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 145 183 36 75 50 72.5 40 — 18 9 9 4 88 12 74 35 3.5 222
AC40B-06 3/4 155 185 36 75 50 77.5 40 — 18 9 9 4.6 88 12 74 35 3 224
AC50B 3/4, 1 186 264 43 20 70 93 50 — 20 11 11 6.4 115 16 84 44.5 3.3 303
AC55B 1 191 277 43 20 70 98 50 — 20 11 11 6.4 117.5 16 84 44.5 3.3 316
AC60B 1 196 280 46 20 70 98 50 — 20 11 11 6.4 117.5 13 84 44.5 3.3 319
Optional specifications (2) Note 1) For AC20 only, the position of the pressure gauge is above the
center of the piping.
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge
Note 2) For optional specifications (with barb fitting, with drain guide,
B B B B with metal bowl, or with level gauge), the total length
AC10B — — 70 — (dimension for B) will vary.
AC20B — — 114 —
AC25B 151 150 156 176
AC30B 154 153 159 179
AC40B 191 190 196 216
AC40B-06 193 192 198 218
AC50B 272 271 277 297
AC55B 285 284 290 310
AC60B 288 287 293 313

14-2-19
 F.R.L. Unit Air Filter + Mist Separator + Regulator

Series AC20C to 40C

P. 14-2-31

JIS Symbol

Standard Specifications AC20C AC40C

Model AC20C AC25C AC30C AC40C AC40C-06

Air filter AF20 AF30 AF30 AF40 AF40-06
Component Mist separator AFM20 AFM30 AFM30 AFM40 AFM40-06
Regulator AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06
1/8 1/4 1/4
1/4
Port size 3/8 3/4
1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2
(1) 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
Pressure gauge port size
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Rated flow (l/min (ANR)) (2) 200 450 450 1100 1100
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Nominal filtration rating AF: 5 µm; AFM: 0.3 µm (95% filtered particle size)
Outlet side oil mist concentration Maximum 1.0 mg/m3 (ANR) (approx. 0.8 ppm) (3)
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard Option Standard
Filter regulator construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.74 0.88 0.95 1.76 1.83
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for F.R.L. unit with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AC20C to AC40C).
Note 2) Conditions: Inlet pressure: 0.7 MPa; Set pressure: 0.5 MPa. The rated flow varies depending on the inlet pressure.
Note 3) At compressor discharge 30 mg/Nm3.
Attachment/Accessory Part No.
Part no.
Description Model AC20C AC25C AC30C AC40C AC40C-06
Round type G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
(1) 1.0 MPa Square (2)
Pressure embedded type GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
Accessory

gauge Round type G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02

0.2 MPa Square (2)
embedded type GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
Float type
(3) N.O. — AD38 AD38N (6) AD38 AD38N (6) AD48 AD48N (6) AD48 AD48N (6)
auto-drain N.C. AD27 AD37 AD37N (6) AD37 AD37N (6) AD47 AD47N (6) AD47 AD47N (6)
Spacer Y200 Y300 Y300 Y400 Y500
Pressure switch (5) IS1000M-20 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-40 IS1000M-50
(4) 01
T-interface (5) Y210- (02) Y310-(01)
02 Y310- (01)
02 Y410- (02)
03 Y510-(02)
03
Attachment

(5) 02
Residual pressure relief 3 port valve VHS20- 01
02 VHS30- 02
03 VHS30- 02
03 VHS40- 03
04
VHS40-06
02
01 02 02 03
(5)
Piping adapter E200- 02
03
E300- 03
04
E300- 03
04
E400- 04 E500-06
06
(5) 02
01 02 02 03
Pressure switch with piping adapter IS1000E-20 02 IS1000E-30 03 IS1000E-30 03 IS1000E-40 04 —
03 04 04 06
01 01 01 02
Cross interface (5)
Y24- 02 Y34- 02 Y34- 02 Y44- 03 Y54- 03
04
Note 1)
in part number for the round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N
for NPT.
Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.
Note 2) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
Note 3) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD27), 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
Note 4) For F.R.L. units, port sizes not in ( ) are for standard application.
Note 5) Separate interfaces are required for modular unit.
Note 6) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be ø3/8".
14-2-20
 F.R.L. Unit Series AC20C to 40C
Dimensions
AC20C A Pressure gauge port size
Q G
E F
Ø
L T

P
C

H
IN OUT

H
L

J
Pressure gauge

B
(Option)
F.R.L.
K Square embedded type M
pressure gauge (Option)
Port size
AV

Min. clearance N AU
Drain Drain

D
for maintenance
Air filter Mist separator Regulator AF
AC25C/30C/40C AR
A Q G
E F Ø
L
Pressure gauge port size T IR
P
VEX

H
C

IN OUT
AMR

H
L

Pressure gauge ITV

B

(Option)
K
Square embedded type
M IC
pressure gauge (Option)
VBA
Port size

VE

N
Drain Drain Min. clearance
VY1
D

for maintenance
Air filter Mist separator Regulator
G
Applicable model AC20C AC25C, AC30C, AC40C, AC40C-06
With auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl With auto-drain (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge With drain guide Drain cock with barb fitting PPA
AL
Optional
B

B
B

B
B

specifications
B

N.O.: Black
B

O S N.C.: Gray O
S
M5 x 0.8 ø10 One-touch 1/4 Barb fitting
fitting Width across flats 17 Applicable tubing: T0604

(mm)
Standard specifications Accessory specifications
Bracket mounting size With
Model Port size With pressure gauge auto drain
A B C D
E F G H J K L ØL M N P Q T U B
AC20C 1/8, 1/4 126 114 26.5 45 41.5 43 30 24 33 12 5.5 5.5 3.2 50 2.5 65 29.5 2 (1) 132
AC25C 1/4, 3/8 167 143 28 50 55 57 41 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 13 64 28.5 0 184
AC30C 1/4, 3/8 167 146 31 50 55 57 41 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 10 66 30.5 3.5 187
AC40C 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 220 183 36 75 72.5 75 50 40 — 18 9 9 4 88 12 74 35 3.5 222
AC40C-06 3/4 235 185 36 75 77.5 80 50 40 — 18 9 9 4.6 88 12 74 35 3 224

Optional specifications ( 2) Note 1) For AC20 only, the position of the pressure gauge is
above the center of the piping.
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge Note 2) For optional specifications (with barb fitting, with drain
B B B B guide, with metal bowl, or with level gauge), the total
length (dimension for B) will vary.
AC20C — — 114 —
AC25C 151 150 156 176
AC30C 154 153 159 179
AC40C 191 190 196 216
AC40C-06 193 192 198 218

14-2-21
 F.R.L. Unit Filter Regulator + Mist Separator

Series AC20D to 40D

P. 14-2-31

JIS Symbol

AC20D AC40D
Standard Specifications
Model AC20D AC30D AC40D AC40D-06

Filter regulator AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06

Component
Mist separator AFM20 AFM30 AFM40 AFM40-06
1/8 1/4 1/4
Port size 3/8 3/4
1/4 3/8 1/2
Pressure gauge port size (1) 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Rated flow (l/min (ANR)) (2) 150 330 800 800
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Nominal filtration rating AW: 5 µm; AFM: 0.3 µm (95% filtered particle size)
Outlet side oil mist concentration Maximum 1.0 mg/m3 (ANR) (approx. 0.8 ppm) (3)
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard Option Standard
Filter regulator construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.57 0.74 1.38 1.43
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for F.R.L. unit with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AC20D to AC40D).
Note 2) Conditions: Inlet pressure: 0.7 MPa; Set pressure: 0.5 MPa. The rated flow varies depending on the inlet pressure.
Note 3) At compressor discharge of 30 mg/Nm3.

Attachment/Accessory Part No.

Part no.
Description Model AC20D AC30D AC40D AC40D-06
Round type G36-10-
01 G36-10-
01 G46-10-
02 G46-10-
02
(1) 1.0 MPa Square (2)
Pressure embedded type GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
Accessory

gauge Round type G36-2-
01 G36-2-
01 G46-2-
02 G46-2-
02

0.2 MPa Square (2)
embedded type GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
(3) N.O. — AD38 AD38N (6) AD48 AD48N (6) AD48 AD48N (6)
Float type
auto-drain N.C. AD27 AD37 AD37N (6) AD47 AD47N (6) AD47 AD47N (6)
Spacer Y200 Y300 Y400 Y500
Pressure switch (5) IS1000M-20 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-40 IS1000M-50
(4)
01
T-Interface (5) Y210-(
02) Y310-(
01)

02 Y410-(
02)

03 Y510-(
02)

03
Attachment

02
Residual pressure relief 3 port valve (5) VHS20-
01

02 VHS30-
02

03 VHS40-
03

04
VHS40-
06

02

01
02
Piping adapter (5)
E200-
02

03
E300-
03

04
E400-
03

04 E500-
06

06

02
(5)
01
02
03
Pressure switch with piping adapter IS1000E-20
02 IS1000E-30
03 IS1000E-40
04 —

03
04
06

01
01
02
Cross interface (5)
Y24-
02 Y34-
02 Y44-
03 Y54-
03

04
Note 1)  in part number for the round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N
for NPT.
Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.
Note 2) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
Note 3) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD27), 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
Note 4) For F.R.L. units, port sizes not in ( ) are for standard application.
Note 5) Separate interfaces are required for modular unit.
Note 6) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be ø3/8".

14-2-22
 F.R.L. Unit Series AC20D to 40D
Dimensions
AC20D A N F
E P

øK

G
IN OUT

Q
B
F.R.L.

G
H
OUT
Pressure gauge
Pressure gauge (Option)
port size
J Square embedded type L AV
pressure gauge (Option)

Port size
AU
Drain Drain M
Min. clearance AF

D
Filter Mist for maintenance
regulator separator
AR
A N F IR
AC30D/40D E P
VEX
AMR
øK
C

ITV

G
IN OUT Q

IC
B

G
Pressure gauge
K

OUT

Pressure gauge (Option)

port size
VBA
J Square embedded type L
pressure gauge (Option)
VE

Port size
VY1
Min. clearance M
Drain Drain G
D

for maintenance
Filter Mist
regulator separator
PPA
Applicable model AC20D AC30D, AC40D, AC40D-06
With auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl With auto-drain (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge With drain guide Drain cock with barb fitting AL

Optional
B

B
B
B

specifications
B

N.O.: Black
B

O S N.C.: Gray O
S
M5 x 0.8 ø10 One-touch 1/4 Barb fitting
fitting Width across flats 17 Applicable tubing: T0604

(mm)
Standard specifications Accessory specifications
With
Model Port size Bracket mounting size With pressure gauge auto-drain
A B C D
E F G H J K øK L M N P Q B
AC20D 1/8, 1/4 83 160 73 45 41.5 30 24 33 12 5.5 5.5 3.2 50 63 27 5 177
AC30D 1/4, 3/8 110 201 86 55 55 41 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 66 30.5 3.5 242
AC40D 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 145 239 92 80 72.5 50 40 — 18 9 9 4 88 76 38.5 1.5 278
AC40D-06 3/4 155 242 93 80 77.5 50 40 — 18 9 9 4.6 88 76 38.5 1.2 278

Optional specifications Note) Note) For optional specifications (with barb fitting, with drain guide, with
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge metal bowl, or with level gauge), the total length (dimension for
B) will vary.
B B B B
AC20D — — 160 —
AC30D 209 208 214 234
AC40D 247 246 251 272
AC40D-06 250 249 255 275

14-2-23
 F.R.L. Unit Series AC
Attachment Specifications
Piping Adapter (E): M5 x 0.8, 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1
A piping adapter allows installation/removal of the component Port size
without removing the piping and thus makes maintenance easier.

B
Center of
F.R.L. body
A D

(mm)
Model Note) Port size A B D Applicable model
E100-M5 M5 x 0.8 10 14 14 AC10, AW10, AF10, AR10, AL10
E200-01 1/8 AC20
E200-02 1/4 30 23.5 28 AF20, AR20, AW20
E200-03 3/8 AL20, AFM20, AFD20, AWM20, AWD20
Piping adapter E300-02 1/4 AC25, AC30
E300-03 3/8 32 30 30 AF30, AR30, AW30
E300-04 1/2 AL30, AFM30, AFD30, AWM30, AWD30
E400-02 1/4 AC40
E400-03 3/8 AF40, AR40, AW40
32 36 36 AL40, AFM40, AFD40
E400-04 1/2
AWM40, AWD40
E400-06 3/4
AC40-06, AF40-06, AR40-06, AW40-06
E500-06 3/4 32 40 44
AL40-06, AFM40-06, AFD40-06
E600-06 3/4 AC50, AC55, AC60, AC50B, AC55B, AC60B
35 48 53
E600-10 1 AF50, AR50, AL50, AF60, AR60, AL60
Note) •
in model numbers indicates a thread type. No indication is
necessary for Rc; however, indicate N for NPT, and F for G.
• Separate interfaces are required for modular unit.
∗ Factory mounting of a piping adapter on the AC models is available as a
special order.

T-interface (T): M5 x 0.8, 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2

Using a T-interface facilitates the redirection of air flow. E
Octagon Port size
C
B

T-interface

Center of
F.R.L. body
A D
(mm)
Model Port size A B C D E Applicable model
Y110-M5 M5 x 0.8 11 19 12 14 8 AC10, AC10B
Y210-01 1/8 AC20, AC20B
15 42 32 28 19
Y210-02 1/4 AC20C
Y310-01 1/8 AC25, AC25B
15 53 39 30 19 AC25C, AC30
Y310-02 1/4 AC30B, AC30C
Y410-02 1/4 AC40, AC40B
19 62 44 36 24
Y410-03 3/8 AC40C
Y510-02 1/4 AC40-06, AC40B-06
19 66 46 44 24
Y510-03 3/8 AC40C-06
Caution on Mounting AC50, AC55
Y610-03 3/8
• If a T-interface is used on the IN side of the lubricator, lubricant 22 81 57 53 30
AC60, AC50B
Y610-04 1/2 AC55B, AC60B
may be mixed. Use the Series AKM check valve to avoid such
possibility. Note) •
in model numbers indicates a thread type. No indication is
necessary for Rc; however, indicate N for NPT, and F for G.
• Separate interfaces are required for modular unit.
∗ Refer to the attachment table on “Front matter 2” for standard port sizes
when using with AC.

14-2-24
 Attachment Specifications Series AC
Pressure Switch with Piping Adapter (P)

Approx. 500
Pressure switch with piping adapter
A D
E 23

JIS Symbol

Port size F.R.L.

C
AV

B
AU
Specifications
Fluid Air AF
Proof pressure 1.0 MPa Center of
F.R.L. body
Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa AR
Set pressure range (mm)
(When OFF) 0.1 to 0.4 MPa
Differential 0.08 MPa
Model (1) Port size A B C D E Applicable model IR
IS1000E-2001 1/8 AC20
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
IS1000E-2002 1/4 30 68 57 28 16 AR20, AW20 VEX
IS1000E-2003 3/8 AWM20, AWD20
Switch characteristics
Contact point configuration 1a
IS1000E-3002 1/4 AC25, AC30 AMR
IS1000E-3003 3/8 32 74.5 60.5 30 13 AR25, AR30, AW30
Maximum contact point capacity 2 VA(AC), 2 W(DC)
Operating voltage: AC, DC 100 V or less
IS1000E-3004 1/2 AWM30, AWD30 ITV
IS1000E-4002 1/4
12 V to 24 VAC, DC: 50 mA
Maximum operating current 48 VAC, DC: 40 mA IS1000E-4003 3/8
32 80.5 62.5 37 12.5
AC40 (2) IC
100 VAC, DC: 20 mA IS1000E-4004 1/2 AR40, AW40
AWM40, AWD40
IS1000E-4006 3/4 VBA
Note 1)
in the model numbers indicates a thread type. No indication
is necessary for Rc; however, indicate N for NPT, and F for G.
Note 2) A pressure switch cannot be mounted on AC40
-06 and VE

AW40
-06.
∗ Separate interfaces are required for modular unit. VY1
∗∗ The pressure switch on AC40
-06 and above and AW40
-06 can
be mounted by screwing IS1000-01 into the piping adapter E500-

06-X501 or E600-
06-X501 to E600-
06 to 10-X501 (with top- G
face thread Rc 1/8). Products with a premounted switch are
available as a special order. Please contact SMC regarding their
availability.
PPA
How to Order AL

IS1000E 30 03
Option
Pressure switch X201 Lead wire length: 3 m
with piping X202 Regulating pressure range: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa
adapter X207 MPa/PSI Dual scale

Body size X215 Lead wire length: 3 m; Regulating pressure range: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa

20 For AC20 X250 Opposite-side mounting (Left-side mounting style)

30 For AC25, AC30 X251 Lead wire length: 3 m; Opposite-side mounting (Left-side mounting style)
Set pressure range: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa; Opposite-side mounting
40 For AC40-02 to 04 X252 (Left-side mounting style)
Lead wire length: 3 m; Regulating pressure range: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa;
Thread type X253
Opposite-side mounting (Left-side mounting style)
Nil Rc
This product is for overseas use only according to the new Measurement Law.
N NPT (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
F G
Piping adapter port size
Port Body size
Symbol
size 20 30 40
01 1/8 ● — —
02 1/4 ● ● ●
03 3/8 ● ● ●
04 1/2 — ● ●
06 3/4 — — ●

14-2-25
Series AC
Check Valve (K): Rc1/8, 1/4, 3/8
A check valve with intermediate air release port can be easily A
installed to prevent a back flow of lubricant when redirecting the
air flow and releasing the air on the outlet side of the regulator.

B
Check valve

Bypass port size for

E redirecting air flow
JIS Symbol

C
IN OUT

Specifications

D
Model Effective area (mm2)
AKM2000 28
(mm)
AKM3000 55
Bypass
AKM4000 111 Model port size A B C D E Applicable model
Be sure to use above check valves
AKM2000 1/8, 1/4 40 40 28 11 11 AC20, AC20A
when redirecting the air flow on the
inlet side of the lubricator. Threads for AC25, AC25A
AKM3000 1/8, 1/4 53 48 34 14 13
IN and OUT ports are not machined. AC30, AC30A
AKM4000 1/4, 3/8 70 54 42 18 15 AC40, AC40A Note)
How to Order Note) Not applicable to AC40
-06.
∗ Refer to the attachment table on page 14-2-12 or 14-2-16 for standard
bypass port sizes applicable to AC.
AKM 30 00 01
Check valve
Bypass port size for
Body size redirecting air flow
20 30 40 Port Body size
Symbol
size 20 30 40
01 1/8 앬 앬 —
02 1/4 앬 앬 앬
03 3/8 — — 앬

Thread type
Nil Rc
N NPT
F G

14-2-26
 Attachment Specifications Series AC
Pressure Switch (S)

Approx. 500
A compact integrated pressure switch can be easily installed and
facilitates the pressure detection of the line.
15 23
Pressure switch

F.R.L.

C
B
JIS Symbol
AV
AU
Center of
F.R.L. body AF
A D
Specifications (mm) AR
Fluid Air Model A B C D Applicable model
Proof pressure 1.0 MPa IS1000M-20 11 76 66 28 AC20 IR
Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa IS1000M-30 13 86 72 30 AC25, AC30
Set pressure range (Off) 0.1 to 0.4 MPa IS1000M-40 15 95 77 36 AC40 VEX
Differential 0.08 MPa IS1000M-50 17 99 79 44 AC40-06
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing) IS1000M-60 22 92.5 68.5 53 AC50, AC55B, AC60 AMR
Note) Separate interfaces are required for modular unit.
ITV
Switch Characteristics How to Order
Contact point configuration 1a IC
Maximum contact point capacity
Operating voltage: AC, DC
2 VA(AC), 2 W(DC)
100 V or less
IS1000M 30 VBA
12 V to 24 VAC, DC : 50 mA
Pressure switch Accessory
Maximum operating current 48 VAC, DC : 40 mA X201 Lead wire length: 3 m VE

100 VAC, DC : 20 mA
Body size
Regulating pressure
20 For AC20 X202 range: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa
30 For AC25, AC30 VY1
X207 MPa/PSI dual scale
40 For AC40-02 to 04 Lead wire length: 3 m;
50 For AC40-06 X215 Regulating pressure
G
60 For AC50, AC55, AC60 range: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa
This product is for overseas use PPA
only according to the new
Measurement Law. (The SI unit
type is provided for use in Japan.)
AL
Cross Interface (C): M5 x 0.8, 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Center of
Pipings are possible in all 4 directions. F.R.L. body Port size
E
IN/OUT ports are not machined for threads. Please
contact SMC if threaded (machined) ports are required.
F
B
C

F E E
Cross interface

E: 4-Rc
A E
F: Without thread D
(mm)
Model Port size A B C D Applicable model
Y14-M5 M5 23 16 14 25 AC10
Y24-01 1/8
40 40 22 40 AC20
Y24-02 1/4
Y34-01 1/8
49 43 28 48 AC25, AC30
Y34-02 1/4
Y44-02 1/4
Caution on Mounting 60 48 36 54 AC40
Y44-03 3/8
• When mounting a cross interface directly on the IN side of the Y54-03 3/8
lubricator, be sure to use a Series AKM check valve between the 72 62 40 62 AC40-06
Y54-04 1/2
lubricator and cross interface.
Note) •
in the model numbers indicates a thread type. No indication is
• Factory mounting of a cross interface on the AC model is necessary for Rc; however, indicate N for NPT, and F for G.
available as a special order. • If threaded ports are required, they are available as a special order.
Please contact SMC.

14-2-27
 Series AC
Residual Pressure Relief 3 Port Valve (V)
With the use of a 3 port valve for residual pressure release,

0
pressure left in the line can be easily exhausted.

ø1
øI
2-
3 port valve for
residual pressure release

G
H

F
E Lockable at the time of exhaust
JIS Symbol
(A) C
2
D

1 3
Specifications (P) (R)
Port size Effective area (mm2) ( ): Effective Area mm2 (Cv)
Model SUP
IN, OUT EXH IN to OUT OUT to EXH
1/8 10 (0.54) 11 (0.60)

A
VHS20 1/8
1/4 14 (0.76) 16 (0.87) IN OUT
1/4 16 (0.87) 14 (0.76)
VHS30 1/4
3/8 31 (1.68) 29 (1.57)

B
1/4 27 (1.46) 36 (1.95)
VHS40 3/8 3/8 38 (2.06) 40 (2.17)
1/2 55 (2.98) 42 (2.28) EXH
VHS40-06 3/4 1/2 77 (1.73) 49 (2.66)
3/4 82 (4.44) 50 (2.71)
VHS50 1/2 (mm)
1 125 (6.78) 53 (2.87)
∗ Paint color (Standard) Handle: Red, Body: Platinum silver Model A B C D E F G H I
∗∗ Use an air filter on the IN side for operating protection.
VHS20 59 20 40 34 — 45 33 28 45
How to Order VHS30 78 29 53 46 — 55 42 30 55
VHS40 107 39 70 63 22 58 44 36 63

VHS 30 F 03 RZ VHS40-06
VHS50
110
134
42
53
75
90
67
78
21
26
65
76
50
61
44
54
69
81
Residual pressure Caution
relief 3 port valve
1. Pleae consult with SMC when a pressure switch and T type
spacer are installed on the outlet of pressure release valve.
Body size 2. If a stop valve or a silencer is connected to the exhaust port of
Symbol Applicable model VHS20/30, the effective sectional area should be larger than
20 AC20 the figure indicated in the following table, to prevent
30 AC25/30 malfunction caused by back pressure. (This is not applicable to
40 AC40 VHS40 and VHS50)
50 AC50, AC60 Note) Model Effective area (mm2)
Note) When the valve is mounted VHS20 5
on AC60, the flow rate may 5
VHS30
decrease depending upon
the mounting position.

Thread type
Nil Rc
N NPT
Option
F G
Code Description
Port size R Flow direction: Right
Left
Body size Note)
Z Name plate in imperial units (PSI, °F)
Symbol Port size
20 30 40 50 Note) This product is for overseas use only
01 1/8 앬 — — — according to the new Measurement
Law. (The SI unit type is provided for
02 1/4 앬 앬 앬 — use in Japan.)
03 3/8 — 앬 앬 —
04 1/2 — — 앬 —
06 3/4 — — 앬 앬
10 1 — — — 앬

14-2-28
 Spacers and Brackets Series AC
Accessory Dimensions
Spacer (X)
D
Center of
F.R.L. body
F.R.L.

C
1
X-X AV

B
RELEASE
X
2
Y200 Y400 AU
(mm)
X
Model A B C D Applicable model
AF
Seal
Y100 6 27 15 33 AC10, AC10A, AC10B
Y200 3 35.5 18.5 48 AC20 AR
Y300 4 47 26 59 AC25, AC30
Y400 5 57 31 65 AC40 A IR
Y500 5 61 33 70 AC40-06 Spacer width

Y600 6 75.5 41 86
AC50, AC55, AC60 VEX
AC50B, AC55B, AC60B

Replacement Parts AMR

Part no.
Description Material
Y100 Y200 Y300 Y400 Y500 Y600
ITV
Seal HNBR (2)
Y100P-060AS (1) Y200P-060S Y300P-060S Y400P-060S Y500P-060S Y600P-060S
Note 1) Y-100 comes with 2 O-rings.
IC
Note 2) NBR seal is used for Y100 spacer because of no direct contact with fluid.
VBA
Spacer with Bracket (Z)
VE

øG

VY1
Center of
F.R.L. body
G
C

BB (Y100T, Y200T only)

E

1
X-X PPA
EE (Y100T, Y200T only)

RELEASE

X
2
AL
E

X
G

Seal

Y200T Y400T
F J
A
H K
Spacer width
D
(mm)
Model A B BB C D E EE F G øG H J K Applicable model
Y100T 6 — 56 24.5 40.5 20 27 6.8 4.5 4.5 14 2.8 25 AC10
Y200T 3 — 67 29 53 24 33 12 5.5 5.5 19 3.2 30 AC20
Y300T 4 82 — 41 68 35 — 14 7 7 21 4 41 AC25, AC30
Y400T 5 96 — 48 81.5 40 — 18 9 9 26 4 50 AC40
Y500T 5 96 — 48 86 40 — 18 9 9 27 4.6 50 AC40-06
Y600T 6 120 — 60 112 50 — 20 11 11 31 6.4 70 AC50, AC55, AC60, AC50B, AC55B, AC60B

Replacement Parts
Part no.
Description Material
Y100T Y200T Y300T Y400T Y500T Y600T
Seal HNBR (2) Y100P-060AS (1) Y200P-060S Y300P-060S Y400P-060S Y500P-060S Y600P-060S
Note 1) Y-100T comes with 2 O-rings.
Note 2) NBR seal is used for Y100T spacer because of no direct contact with fluid.

14-2-29
Series AC
Mounting Position for Spacer with Bracket

Bracket
Pressure switch: S Residual pressure
T-interface: T Check valve: K relief 3 port valve: V

SUP.
SUP

A
A
IN OUT IN OUT

A
A
Bracket

L1 L2 L3 L4 L1

(mm)
Attachment K S T V KS KT KV KST
Model L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3
AC10 — — — — — 28 48 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
AC20 41.5 43 43 41.5 43 41.5 61 41.5 43 43 41.5 43 57 41.5 61 43 41.5 43 43 43 41.5 61 57
AC25 55 57 57 55 57 55 76 55 57 57 55 57 74 55 76 57 55 57 57 57 55 76 74
AC30 55 57 57 55 57 55 76 55 57 57 55 57 74 55 76 57 55 57 57 57 55 76 74
AC40 72.5 75 75 72.5 75 72.5 99 72.5 75 75 72.5 75 95 72.5 99 75 72.5 75 75 75 72.5 99 95
AC40-06 — — — 77.5 80 77.5 104 77.5 80 80 — — — — — — — — — — — — —
AC50 — — — 93 96 93 124 93 96 96 — — — — — — — — — — — — —
AC55 — — — 98 96 98 124 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
AC60 — — — 98 101 98 129 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Attachment KSV KTV KSTV ST SV STV TV
Model L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
AC10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
AC20 41.5 43 57 43 41.5 61 43 43 41.5 61 57 43 41.5 61 41.5 43 57 41.5 61 57 41.5 61 43
AC25 55 57 74 57 55 76 57 57 55 76 74 57 55 76 55 57 74 55 76 74 55 76 57
AC30 55 57 74 57 55 76 57 57 55 76 74 57 55 76 55 57 74 55 76 74 55 76 57
AC40 72.5 75 95 75 72.5 99 75 75 72.5 99 95 75 72.5 99 72.5 75 95 72.5 99 95 72.5 99 75
AC40-06 — — — — — — — — — — — — 77.5 104 77.5 80 102 77.5 104 102 77.5 104 80
AC50 — — — — — — — — — — — — 93 124 93 96 124 93 124 124 93 124 96
AC55 — — — — — — — — — — — — 98 124 — — — — — — — — —
AC60 — — — — — — — — — — — — 98 129 — — — — — — — — —
Attachment
K S V KS KV KSV SV
Model L1 L2 L1 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2
AC20A 41.5 43 41.5 41.5 43 41.5 57 41.5 43 43 41.5 57 43 41.5 57
AC30A 55 57 55 55 57 55 74 55 57 57 55 74 57 55 74
AC40A 72.5 75 72.5 72.5 75 72.5 95 72.5 75 75 72.5 95 75 72.5 95
AC40A-06 — — 77.5 77.5 80 — — — — — — — — 77.5 102
Attachment
S T V SV TV
Model L1 L1 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
AC10B — 28 — — — — — —
AC20B 41.5 41.5 41.5 43 41.5 57 41.5 61
AC25B 55 55 55 57 55 74 55 76
AC30B 55 55 55 57 55 74 55 76
AC40B 72.5 72.5 72.5 75 72.5 95 72.5 99
AC40B-06 77.5 77.5 77.5 80 77.5 102 77.5 104
AC50B 93 93 93 96 93 124 93 124
AC55B 98 98 — — — — — —
AC60B 98 98 — — — — — —
Attachment
S T V SV TV
Model L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
AC20C 41.5 43 41.5 43 41.5 43 43 41.5 43 57 41.5 43 61
AC25C 55 57 55 57 55 57 57 55 57 74 55 57 76
AC30C 55 57 55 57 55 57 57 55 57 74 55 57 76
AC40C 72.5 75 72.5 75 72.5 75 75 72.5 75 95 72.5 75 99
AC40C-06 77.5 80 77.5 80 77.5 80 80 77.5 80 102 77.5 80 104
Attachment
S V SV L1: Dimensions from the end of the IN side to the center of the mounting hole for the first bracket.
Model L1 L1 L2 L1 L2 L2: Mounting hole pitch between the first and the second bracket.
AC20D 41.5 41.5 43 41.5 57 L3: Mounting hole pitch between the second and the third bracket.
AC30D 55 55 57 55 74 L4: Mounting hole pitch between the third and the fourth bracket.
AC40D 72.5 72.5 75 72.5 95 Refer to dimensions pages for dimension A from the center of the piping and the mounting hole.
AC40D-06 77.5 77.5 80 77.5 102

14-2-30
 F.R.L. Unit Series AC20 to 60
Made to Order Specifications:
Please contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications, and lead times.

With Digital Pressure Switch

AC20 to 60 with a digital pressure switch (Model: ISE30---L) can be ordered. A digital pressure switch is mounted on the
connection threads for the pressure gauge of the regulator or the filter regulator.

F.R.L.
AV
AU
AF
AR
IR
Specifications VEX
Part no. -X465
Model ISE30---L AMR
Set pressure range –0.1 to 1 MPa
Pressure
Set/Display resolution 0.001 MPa ITV
switch
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC ±10%, Ripple (p-p) 10% or less (With reverse connection protection)
Current consumption 45 mA or less (70 mA or less during current output)
IC
∗ Pressure gauge port size: Rc 1/8
VBA
Applicable Model VE

Model AC20 AC25 AC30 AC40 AC40-06 AC50 AC55 AC60

1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/4

VY1
Port size 3/8 3/4 1 1
1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1 G
PPA
How to Order Refer to the next page.
AL

14-2-31
Series AC
How to Order

AC 30 A F 03 D KV 12R X465 A
Switch specifications
F.R.L. unit
Symbol Output specifications
Body size A NPN output
20 25 30 40 50 55 60 B PNP output
C 1 to 5 V output
Model combination D 4 to 20 mA output
Combination With digital pressure switch
Symbol Filter Mist
Air filter Regulator Lubricator Regulator Separator (Series ISE30) (12)
Nil (1) (2) (3) — — Note 12) Digital pressure switch is not
A — — (2) (1) — mounted and is supplied
loose at the time of
B (1) (2) — — — Description shipment.
C (1) (3) — — (2) Symbol Description Applicable model
D — — — (1) (2) 1 (9) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AC20 to 60
Note 1) The circled numbers indicate the 2 Metal bowl AC20 to 60
order in which the units are
assembled. 3 Lubricator with drain cock AC20 to 60
6 Nylon bowl (Including sight dome) AC20 to 60
Thread type
8 Metal bowl with level gauge AC25 to 60
Nil Rc C With bowl guard AC20
N (2) NPT J (10) Drain guide 1/4 AC25 to 60
F (3) G N Non-relieving type AC20 to 60
Note 2) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 (applicable R Flow direction: Right
Left AC20 to 60
to AC25 to 60), and the exhaust
port for auto-drain comes with ø3/8" Drain cock with barb fitting:
W AC25 to 60
One-touch fitting (applicable to ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing
AC25 to 60).
Name plate and caution plate for
Note 3) Drain guide is G 1/4 (applicable to Z (11) bowl in imperial units (PSI, °F) AC20 to 60
AC25 to 60).
Port size ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate
Port Body size in ascending alphanumeric order.
Symbol
size 20 25 30 40 50 55 60 Note 9) The only difference from the standard
01 1/8 ● — — — — — — specifications is the adjusting spring for
the regulator. It does not restrict the
02 1/4 ● ● ● ● — — —
setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
03 3/8 — ● ● ● — — — Note 10) Without a valve function.
04 1/2 — — — ● — — — Note 11) For thread type NPT.
06 3/4 — — — ● ● — — This product is for overseas use only
10 1 — — — — ● ● ● according to the new Measurement Law.
(The SI unit type is provided for use in
Japan.)
Accessory Attachment
Symbol Description Applicable model Attachment Port size for
Symbol Description Applicable model intermediate
Nil — — mounting position air release
C With float type auto-drain (N.C.) (4) AC20 to 60 Nil None — — —
D With float type auto-drain (N.O.) (4) AC25 to 60 AF + AR + [K] + AL AC20: 1/8
AC20 to 40
K Check valve AC25: 1/4
Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto drain connection should be AW + [K] + AL AC20A to 40A AC30: 1/4
AC40: 3/8
ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is chosen.
AC20: 1/8
AF + [T] + AR + AL AC20 to 60 AC25: 1/4
AC30: 1/4
T T-interface AF + [T] + AR AC20B to 60B AC40: 3/8
AC50: 3/8
AF + AFM + [T] + AR AC20C to 40C AC55: 1/2
AC60: 1/2
AF + AR + AL + [V] AC20 to 50
Note 13) Please consult with SMC for detailed AW + AL + [V] AC20A to 40A
dimensions and available attachments and Residual
V pressure relief
AF + AR + [V] AC20B to 50B —
options.
Note 14) Refer to SMC catalog CAT.ES100-42 for 3 port valve AF + AFM + AR + [V] AC20C to 40C
detailed specifications and instructions of AW + AFM + [V] AC20D to 40D
digital pressure switch. [V] + AF + ARK AC20B to 50B
Residual
V1 (8) pressure relief [V] + AF + AFM + ARK AC20C to 40C —
3 port valve
[V] + AWK+ AFM AC20D to 40D
Note 5) When more than one attachment is required, order in alphabetical order.
Note 6) Piping adapter, pressure switch with piping adapter, and cross interface need to be
ordered separately.
Note 7) The bracket position varies depending on the T-interface mounting.
Refer to the table on page 14-2-30 for standard bracket position.
Note 8) With this combination, requlators and filter requlators will be “With back flow function” type.
For safety, check that the ezhausted and is atmospheric pressure by pressure gauge.

14-2-32
 Modular Style
Air Filter

Series AF
Air filter Model Port size Filtration Accessory F.R.L.
(µm)
Series AF
AF10 M5 x 0.8 AV
AF20 1/8, 1/4 AU
AF30 1/4, 3/8 AF
Bracket
AF40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 5 AR
Float type auto-drain
AF40-06 3/4 IR
AF50 3/4, 1 VEX

Pages 14-2-34 to 14-2-39 AF60 1 AMR

Mist separator AFM20 1/8, 1/4
ITV
Series AFM
IC
AFM30 1/4, 3/8 Bracket
0.3 VBA
AFM40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 Float type auto-drain
VE

Pages 14-2-40 to 14-2-42
AFM40-06 3/4 VY1
Micro mist separator
AFD20 G
Series AFD 1/8, 1/4
PPA
AFD30 1/4, 3/8 Bracket
0.01 AL
AFD40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 Float type auto-drain

Pages 14-2-43 to 14-2-45

AFD40-06 3/4

14-2-33
 Air Filter

Series AF10 to 60
How to Order
Option
AF 30 F 03 BD 2R Symbol Description Applicable
model
Air filter Accessory 2 Metal bowl AF10 to 60
Body size
Applicable 6 Nylon bowl AF10 to 60
10 20 30 40 50 60 Symbol Description model
8 Metal bowl with level gauge AF30 to 60
Nil — —
Thread type C With bowl guard AF20
Port size B ( 3) With bracket AF20 to 60
Metric thread (M5) J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AF30 to 60
Nil Float type (4)
Rc Symbol
Port Body size C auto-drain (N.C.) AF10 to 60 R Flow direction: Right
Left AF10 to 60
size 10 20 30 40 50 60
N (1) NPT Drain cock with barb fitting:
Float type (4) W
M5 M5 앬 — — — — — D AF30 to 60
F (2) G auto-drain (N.O.) AF30 to 60 ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing
01 1/8 — 앬 — — — —
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 Note 3) Bracket is not assembled Name plate and caution plate for
02 1/4 — 앬 앬 앬 — — Z (6) bowl in imperial units (PSI, °F) AF10 to 60
(applicable to AF30 to and is supplied loose at the
60), and the exhaust 03 3/8 — — 앬 앬 — — time of shipment. ∗ When more than one specification is
port for auto-drain 04 1/2 — — — 앬 — — Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for required, indicate in ascending
comes with ø3/8" One- 06 3/4 — — — 앬 앬 — auto-drain connection alphanumeric order.
touch fitting (applicable should be ø3/8" in case Note 5) Without a valve function.
10 1 — — — — 앬 앬
to AF30 to 60). NPT thread port is chosen. Note 6) This product is for overseas use only
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 according to the new Measurement
(applicable to AF30 to Law. (The SI unit type is provided for
60). use in Japan.)

: Combination available : Combination not available

Accessory/Optional Specifications Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
Symbol

Combination Accessory Optional specifications Applicable filter

Accessory/Optional specifications B C D 2 6 8 C J R W Z AF10 AF20 AF30 to 60
Optional specifications Accessory

AF10 With bracket B

Float type auto-drain (N.C.) C
AF20 Float type auto-drain (N.O.) D
Metal bowl -2
Nylon bowl -6
Metal bowl with level gauge -8
With bowl guard -C
AF30 Drain guide 1/4 -J
Flow direction: Right
Left -R
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing -W
AF40 Name plate and caution plate for bowl in
imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z
JIS Symbol
Standard Specifications
Model AF10 AF20 AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60

Port size M5 x 0.8 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1

Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Nominal filtration rating 5 µm
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard — Option Standard
Drain capacity (cm3) 2.5 8 25 45 45 45 45
Weight (kg) 0.06 0.18 0.22 0.45 0.49 0.99 1.05
Accessory Part No.
With auto-drain Applicable model
AF10 AF20 AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60
Accessory
JIS Symbol
Bracket assembly (1) — AF20P-050AS AF30P-050AS AF40P-050AS AF40P-070AS AF50P-050AS AF50P-050AS
Float type (2) N.O. — — AD38 AD38N(3) AD48 AD48N(3) AD48 AD48N(3) AD48 AD48N(3) AD48 AD48N(3)
auto-drain N.C. AD17 AD27 AD37 AD37N(3) AD47 AD47N(3) AD47 AD47N(3) AD47 AD47N(3) AD47 AD47N(3)
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
Note 2) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD17/27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
Note 3) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be ø3/8".
P. 14-2-39

14-2-34
 Air Filter Series AF10 to 60
Flow Characteristics (Representative values)
AF10
0.10
M5 AF40-06
0.10
Rc 3/4 Precautions
Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for

a
0.08 0.08

a
Pressure drop (MPa)

Pressure drop (MPa)

MP

= 0 Pa
MP
a
Safety Instructions and Common

MP
MPa

M
0.7

.7
P1 a Precautions.

.5
.3
0.06 0.06
MP
Pa

=0
=0
0.1
a
M

MP

P1
0.5

P1
P1
Maintenance

P1 =
0.1

0.04
=
.3

0.04
F.R.L.
P1
=0
P1 =

Warning
P1

0.02 0.02
1. Replace the element every 2 years or when AV
the pressure drop becomes 0.1 MPa,
00 00
50 100 150 200 2000 4000 6000 whichever comes first, to prevent damage AU
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) to the element.
AF
AF20 Rc 1/4 AF50 Rc 1
0.10 0.10
AR
Pa

= 0 MPa
M

a
a

0.08 0.08
IR
MP
MP
Pressure drop (MPa)

Pressure drop (MPa)

Pa

.7
=0

a
5
.7
.3 M
a

.5

MP

.
MP

=0
=0

VEX
P1

0.06 0.06
=0

.3
a

P1
P1
0.1

MP
P1

=0
P1

AMR
P1 =

0.1

0.04 0.04
P1
P1 =

0.02 0.02
ITV
0
0 500 1000 1500
0
0 5000 10000 15000 IC
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
VBA
AF30 Rc 3/8 AF60 Rc 1
0.10 0.10 VE

a
MP
Pa

VY1
Pa

.7
.5 M

0.08 0.08
a
Pressure drop (MPa)

Pressure drop (MPa)

a
=0
MP
0.1 M

MP
= 0 Pa
=0
P1

M
.7
0.3

G
Pa

.5

0.06 0.06
P1
P1 =

=0
a
.3 M
P1 =

MP

P1
P1

PPA
=0

0.04 0.04
0.1
P1
P1 =

0.02 0.02 AL
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 5000 10000 15000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

AF40 Rc 1/2
0.10
a
MP
P1 MPa
Pa

.7

0.08
Pressure drop (MPa)

=0
.3 M

.5
Pa

=0
0.1 M

=0

0.06
P1
P1
P1 =

0.04

0.02

0
0 2000 4000 6000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

14-2-35
Series AF10 to 60
Working Principle: Float Type Auto Drain
N.O. type: AD38/48
q Bowl
r Valve
e Lever
w Float
t Valve seat
i Chamber
y Spring
u Piston
o Housing
!0 Seal
!1 Drain cock
Drain
• When the pressure inside the bowl
is released:
When pressure is released from the bowl
q, piston u is lowered by spring y.
The sealing action of seal !0 is interrupted,
and the outside air flows inside the bowl
q, through housing hole o and drain
cock !1.
Therefore, if there is an accumulation of
condensate in the bowl q, it will drain out
through the drain cock.
• When pressure is applied inside
the bowl:
When the pressure exceeds 0.1 MPa, the
force of piston u surpasses the force of
spring y, and the piston goes up.
This pushes seal !0 up so that the it
creates a seal and the inside of the bowl
q, is shut off from the outside air.
If there is no accumulation of condensate
in the bowl q, at this time float w will be
pulled down by its own weight, causing
valve r, which is connected to lever e, to
seal valve seat t.
• When there is an accumulation of
condensate in the bowl:
Float w rises due to its own buoyancy and
pushes open the seal created by the valve
seat, t.
This allows the pressure inside the bowl
q, to enter the chamber i. The result is
that the combined pressure inside
chamber i and the force of the spring y,
lower the piston u.
This causes the sealing action of seal !0 to
be interrupted, and the accumulated
condensate in the bowl q, drains out
through the drain cock !1.
Turning drain cock !1 manually
counterclockwise lowers piston u, which
pushes open the seal created by seal !0,
thus allowing the condensate to drain out.
14-2-36
N.C. type: AD37/47 Compact auto-drain
N.C. type: AD17/27
q Bowl
r Valve
e Lever q Bowl
w Float
w Float
t Valve seat
e Lever
i Chamber
u Piston r Valve
y Spring t Valve seat
o Housing y Knob
!0 Seal
!1 Drain cock Drain
Drain
• When the pressure inside the bowl is • When the pressure inside the bowl
released: is released:
Even when pressure inside the bowl q, is Even when pressure inside the bowl q, is
released, spring y keeps piston u in its released, the weight of the float w causes
upward position. valve r, which is connected to lever e, to
This keeps the seal created by the seal !0, seal valve seat t. As a result, the inside of
in place, thus shutting the outside air from the bowl q, is shut off from the outside air.
inside the bowl q.
Therefore, even if there is an accumulation
Therefore, even if there should be some of condensate in the bowl q, it will not drain
condensate accumulation inside the bowl q, out.
it will not drain out.
• When pressure is applied inside the
• When pressure is applied inside the
bowl: bowl:
Even when pressure is applied inside the
Even when pressure is applied inside the
bowl q, the combined force of spring y and bowl q, the weight of the float w, and the
differential pressure that is applied to valve
the pressure inside the bowl q, keeps
piston u in its upward position. r cause valve r to seal valve seat t, and
This maintains the seal created by the seal the outside air is shut off from the inside of
!0, in place, thus shutting the outside air the bowl q.
from inside the bowl q. • When the drain is accumulated in
If there is no accumulation of condensate in the bowl:
the bowl q, at this time float w will be
Float w rises due to its own buoyancy and
pulled down by its own weight, causing valve
the seal at valve seat t is interrupted.
r, which is connected to lever e, to seal
valve seat t. The condensate inside the bowl q drains
out through the knob, y.
• When there is an accumulation of
Turning knob y manually counterclockwise
condensate in the bowl: lowers it and causes the sealing action of
Float w rises due to its own buoyancy and valve seat t to be interrupted, thus allowing
pushes open the seal created by the valve the condensate to drain out.
seat t. Pressure passes from the bowl to
chamber i.
The result is that the pressure inside
chamber i surpasses the force of the
spring y, and pushes piston u
downwards.
This causes the sealing action of seal !0 to
be interrupted and the accumulated
condensate in the bowl q, drains out
through the drain cock !1.
Turning drain cock !1 manually
counterclockwise lowers piston u, which
pushes open the seal created by seal !0,
thus allowing the condensate to drain out.
 Air Filter Series AF10 to 60
Construction
AF10/20 AF30/40 AF50/60

IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT

q q F.R.L.
r r q
AV
w w
e e y AU
t t AF
w
AR
r
IR
e
Drain VEX
t AMR
Drain ITV
IC
VBA
VE

VY1
G
PPA
Drain AL
Component Parts
Material
No. Description Color
AF10/20 AF30/40/40-06 AF50/60
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver
y Housing — Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver

Air Filter Replacement Parts

Part no.
No. Description Material
AF10 AF20 AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60
w Filter element Non-woven fabric AF10P-060S AF20P-060S AF30P-060S AF40P-060S AF40P-060S AF50P-060S AF60P-060S
e Baffle PBT AF10P-040S (1) AF20P-040S AF30P-040S AF40P-040S AF40P-040S AF50P-040S AF60P-040S
r Bowl O-ring NBR C1SFP-260S C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S
t Bowl assembly (2) PC C1SF C2SF C3SF (3) C4SF (3) C4SF (3) C4SF (3) C4SF (3)
Note 1) The material of the baffle for AF10 (AF10P-040S) only is POM.
Note 2) Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F unit specifications.
Note 3) Bowl assembly for AF30 to 60 models comes with a bowl guard (steel band material).

14-2-37
Series AF10 to 60
Dimensions
L
AF10/20 L Bracket
AF50/60 A Bracket
(Option)
D
(Option) D G F
G F K M

J
K M

E
E

H
IN OUT

C
H IN OUT
C

OUT
B Port size OUT

Port size

o s
AF10: 25
AF20: 40

Drain

B
A P
Min. clearance
for maintenance
AF30/40/40-06
L
A Bracket
(Option) D
G F
K M
J

Drain Min. clearance

H

20
C

IN OUT for maintenance

OUT
Port size
B
AF30: 50
AF40: 75

Min. clearance
Drain P
for maintenance

Applicable model AF10, AF20 AF30, AF40, AF40-06, AF50, AF60

With auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl With auto-drain (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge With drain guide Drain cock with barb fitting

Optional
B

B
B

B
B

specifications
B

N.O.: Black
B

O S N.C.: Gray O
S
M5 x 0.8 ø10 One-touch 1/4 Barb fitting
fitting Width across flats 17 Applicable tubing: T0604

(mm)
Accessory specifications
Standard specifications With
Model Port size Bracket mounting size auto-drain
A B C D P E F G H J K L M B
AF10 M5 x 0.8 25 67 7 25 28 — — — — — — — — 85
AF20 1/8, 1/4 40 97 10 40 — 18 30 27 22 5.4 8.4 40 2.3 115
AF30 1/4, 3/8 53 129 14 53 57 16 41 40 23 6.5 8 53 2.3 170
AF40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 165 18 70 73 17 50 54 26 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 204
AF40-06 3/4 75 169 20 70 73 14 50 54 25 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 208
AF50 3/4, 1 90 245 24 90 — 23 70 66 35 11 13 90 3.2 284
AF60 1 95 258 24 95 — 23 70 66 35 11 13 90 3.2 297

Optional specifications
Model With drain guide With barb fitting Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge
B B B B
AF10 — — 66 —
AF20 — — 97 —
AF30 136 137 142 162
AF40 172 173 178 198
AF40-06 176 177 182 202
AF50 252 253 258 278
AF60 265 266 271 291

14-2-38
 Air Filter Series AF20 to 60
Made to Order Specifications:
Please contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications, and lead times.

1. Special Temperature Environment 2. High Pressure

Special materials are used in the manufacturing of seals and Strong materials are used in the manufacturing of air filters
resin parts to allow them to withstand various temperature intended for high pressure operation.
conditions in cold or tropical (hot) climates.
Specifications Specifications F.R.L.
Part no. -X430 -X440 Part no. -X425
AV
Environment Low temperature High temperature Proof pressure 3.0 MPa
Ambient temperature –30 to 60°C –5 to 80°C Maximum operating pressure 2.0 MPa AU
Fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing) Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)

Material
Rubber parts Special NBR FPM AF
Main parts Metal (Aluminum die-casted)
AR
Applicable Model Applicable Model
Model AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60 Model AF20 AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60 IR
1/4 1/4 3/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/4
Port size Port sizes
3/8
3/8 3/4
1
1
1/4 3/8
3/8 3/4
1
1 VEX
1/2 1/2

AMR
How to Order How to Order ITV
AF 30 F 03 B 2 R X430 AF 30 F 03 B 2 R X425 IC
Air filter For high/low Air filter
temperature For high VBA
Body size Body size pressure
X430 Low temperature Optional
30 40 50 60 20 30 40 50 60
X440 High temperature Symbol Description Applicable model VE

Thread type Option Thread type J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AF30 to 60
Nil Rc Symbol Description Applicable model
AF30 to 60
Nil Rc R
Flow direction:
Right
Left
AF20 to 60 VY1
N (2) NPT J (5) Drain guide 1/4 N (1) NPT Name plate and
F (3) G Flow direction:
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT
R Rightt
Left
AF30 to 60 F (2) G Z (6) caution plate for
bowl in imperial
AF20 to 60 G
Name plate and Note 1) Drain guide is NPT units (PSI, °F)
1/4 (applicable to caution plate for AF30 to 60 1/4 (applicable to
AC30 to 60) Z (6)
bowl in imperial
∗ When more than one PPA
AF30 to 60)
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 units (PSI, °F) specification is required,
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4
(applicable to AF30 indicate in ascending
∗ When more than one (applicable to AF30 to
to 60). specification is required, 60).
alphanumeric order. AL
Note 5) Without a valve function.
indicate in ascending
Note 6) For thread type NPT.
alphanumeric order.
This product is for overseas
Note 5) Without a valve function.
use only according to the new
Note 6) For thread type NPT.
Measurement Law. (The SI
This product is for overseas
unit type is provided for use in
use only according to the
Japan.)
new Measurement Law.
Port size (The SI unit type is provided
Port size
Port Body size for use in Japan.) Port Body size
Symbol
size 30 40 50 60
Symbol
size 20 30 40 50 60
Bowl
02 1/4   — — Bowl 01 1/8  — — — — Symbol Description Applicable model
03 3/8   — — Symbol Description Applicable model 02 1/4    — — 2 (4) Metal bowl AF20 to 60
04 1/2   — — 2 (4) Metal bowl AF30 to 60 03 3/8 —   — — Metal bowl
AF30 to 60
8 (3)
06 3/4 —   — Note 4) Only metal bowl available. 04 1/2 — —  — — with level gauge
10 1 — —   06 3/4 — —   — Note 4) Only metal bowl or metal bowl
Option 10 1 — — —   with level gauge available.
Symbol Description Applicable model
Nil — —
Option
Symbol Description Applicable model
B (3) With bracket AF30 to 60
Nil — —
Note 3) Bracket is not assembled and
is supplied loose at the time B (3) With bracket AF20 to 60
of shipment. Note 3) Bracket is not assembled and is
supplied loose at the time of
shipment.

Note) Please contact SMC regarding the detailed dimensions and optional availability.

14-2-39
 Mist Separator

Series AFM20/30/40
How to Order
Option
AFM 30 F 03 BD 2R Symbol Description Applicable model
Mist separator Accessory 2 Metal bowl AFM20 to 40
Body size Symbol Description Applicable model 6 Nylon bowl AFM20 to 40
20 30 40 Port size Nil — — 8 Metal bowl with level gauge AFM30/40
(3)
Port Body size B With bracket AFM20 to 40 C With bowl guard AFM20
Thread type Symbol
size 20 30 40
Float type (4) J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AFM30/40
Nil Rc 1/8  — —
01 C auto-drain (N.C.) AFM20 to 40 R Flow direction: Right
Left AFM20 to 40
N (1) NPT 02 1/4   
F (2) G 03 3/8 —   Float type (4) W
Drain cock with barb fitting:
AFM30/40
D AFM30/40 ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing
04 1/2 — —  auto-drain (N.O.)
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4
(applicable to AFM30
06 3/4 — —  Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto- Name plate and caution plate
Z (6) for bowl in imperial units (PSI, °F) AFM20 to 40
and 40), and the exhaust Note 3) Bracket is not drain connection should be
port for auto-drain assembled and ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is ∗ When more than one specification is required,
comes with ø3/8" One- is supplied loose chosen. indicate in ascending alphanumeric order.
touch fitting (applicable at the time of Note 5) Without a valve function.
to AFM30 and 40). shipment. Note 6) For NPT thread type. This product is for
overseas use only according to the new
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4
Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is
(applicable to AFM30
provided for use in Japan.)
and 40).
: Combination available : Combination not available
Accessory/Optional Specifications Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
Applicable mist separator
Symbol

Combination Accessory Optional specifications

AFM20 AFM30 to 40
Accessory/Optional specifications B C D 2 6 8 C J R W Z
Optional specifications Accessory

With bracket B
Float type auto-drain (N.C.) C
Float type auto-drain (N.O.) D
Metal bowl -2
Nylon bowl -6
Metal bowl with level gauge -8
With bowl guard -C
Drain guide 1/4 -J
Flow direction: Right
Left -R
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing -W
Name plate and caution plate for bowl in
imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z

Standard Specifications
Model AFM20 AFM30 AFM40 AFM40-06
1/4
1/8 1/4
Port size 3/8 3/4
1/4 3/8
1/2
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
AFM20 Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Rated flow (l/min (ANR)) (1) 200 450 1100 1100
Nominal filtration rating 0.3 µm (95% filtered particle size)
Outlet side oil mist concentration Maximum 1.0 mg/m3 (ANR) (approx. 0.8 ppm) (2)
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard Option Standard
AFM30
Drain capacity (cm3) 8 25 45 45
Weight (kg) 0.18 0.22 0.44 0.49
Note 1) When the inlet pressure is 0.7 MPa. Flow rate varies depending on the inlet pressure.
Note 2) When the compressor oil mist discharge concentration is 30 mgf/m3 (ANR).

Accessory Part No.

AFM40 Applicable model
AFM20 AFM30 AFM40 AFM40-06
Accessory
JIS Symbol Bracket assembly (1) AF20P-050AS AF30P-050AS AF40P-050AS AF40P-070AS
Float type (2) N.O. — AD38 AD38N(3) AD48 AD48N(3) AD48 AD48N(3)
auto-drain N.C. AD27 AD37 AD37N(3) AD47 AD47N(3) AD47 AD47N(3)
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
Note 2) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD17/27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
Note 3) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubeing O.D should be ø3/8".

14-2-40
 Mist Separator Series AFM20/30/40
: When saturated with oil
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) : Initial state

AFM20 AFM30 AFM40

Pressure drop (MPa)

Pressure drop (MPa)

Pressure drop (MPa)
F.R.L.
AV
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) AU
AF
Construction
AFM20 Precautions AR
IN OUT Float type auto-drain (N.C.)
Be sure to read before handling. IR
q Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4
for Safety Instructions and VEX
e Common Precautions.
w AMR
Air Supply
r
ITV
Caution
1. Install an air filter (Series AF) as a IC
preliminary filter on the inlet side of the
mist separator to prevent premature
Drain clogging. VBA
M5 x 0.8 2. Do not install on the inlet side of the
AFM30/40 dryer as this can cause premature VE

clogging of the element.
IN OUT Float type auto-drain
N.C. N.O. Maintenance VY1
q
e
Warning G
1. Replace the element every 2 years or
w when the pressure drop becomes 0.1 PPA
MPa, whichever comes first, to prevent
r damage to the element.
AL
Design
Caution
1. Design the system so that the mist
separator is installed in a pulsation-free
location. The difference between
internal and external pressure inside
Drain the element should be kept within 0.1
MPa, as exceeding this value could
cause damage.

ø10 One-touch fitting ø10 One-touch fitting Selection

Component Parts Caution
Material 1. Do not allow air flow that exceeds the
No. Description Note
AFM20 AFM30, AFM40, AFM40-06 rated flow. If the air flow is allowed
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver outside the range of the rated flow even
momentarily, drainage and lubricant
Replacement Parts may splash at the outlet side or cause
damage to the component.
Part no.
No. Description Material 2. Do not use in a low pressure
AFM20 AFM30 AFM40 AFM40-06 application (such as a blower). F.R.L.
w Element assembly — AFM20P-060AS AFM30P-060AS AFM40P-060AS AFM40P-060AS unit has its own minimum operating
e Bowl O-ring NBR C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S pressure depending on the equipment
and is designed specifically to function
r Bowl assembly (1) PC C2SF C3SF (2) C4SF (2) C4SF (2) with compressed air. If used below the
Note 1) Including O-Ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F unit specifications. minimum operating pressure, a loss of
Note 2) Bowl assembly for AFM30 to AFM40-06 includes a bowl guard (steel band material). performance and malfunction can
occur. Please contact SMC if an
application under such conditions
cannot be avoided.
14-2-41
Series AFM20/30/40
Dimensions
AFM20 Bracket
L (Option) D
G
F
K M

E
H
IN OUT

C
OUT
Port size

B
o s

Min. clearance
Drain

45
for maintenance
A

L
AFM30/40/40-06 A Bracket
D
(Option)
G F
K M
J

E
H

IN OUT
C

OUT

Port size
B

Min. clearance
AFM30: 50
AFM40: 75

Drain for maintenance

P

Applicable model AFM20 AFM30, AFM40, AFM40-06

With auto-drain With auto-drain Metal bowl with Drain cock with
(N.C.) Metal bowl (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl level gauge With drain guide barb fitting

Optional
B

B
specifications
B
B

N.O.: Black
B

O S N.C.: Gray O
S
M5 x 0.8 ø10 1/4 Barb fitting
One-touch Width across Applicable tubing:
fitting flats 17 T0604

(mm)
Accessory specifications
Standard specifications
Model Port size With bracket With auto-drain
A B C D P E F G H J K L M B
AFM20 1/8, 1/4 40 97 10 40 — 18 30 27 22 5.4 8.4 40 2.3 115
AFM30 1/4, 3/8 53 129 14 53 57 16 41 40 23 6.5 8 53 2.3 170
AFM40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 165 18 70 73 17 50 54 26 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 204
AFM40-06 3/4 75 169 20 70 73 14 50 54 25 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 208

Optional specifications
Model With drain guide With barb fitting Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge
B B B B
AFM20 — — 97 —
AFM30 136 137 142 162
AFM40 172 173 178 198
AFM40-06 176 177 182 202

14-2-42
 Micro Mist Separator

Series AFD20/30/40
How to Order

AFD 30 F 03 BD 2R Option
Symbol Description Applicable model
Micro mist
separator Accessory 2 Metal bowl AFD20 to 40
Port size
Body size Port Body size
Symbol Description Applicable model 6 Nylon bowl AFD20 to 40 F.R.L.
Symbol Nil — — 8 Metal bowl with level gauge AFD30/40
size 20 30 40
20 30 40 Thread type 01 1/8  — — B (3) With bracket AFD20 to 40 C With bowl guard AFD20 AV
02 1/4    C Float type (4) AFD20 to 40
Nil Rc auto-drain (N.C.) J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AFD30/40
03 3/8 —  
N (1) NPT
04 1/2 — —  D Float type (4) AFD30/40
R Flow direction: Right
Left AFD20 to 40 AU
auto-drain (N.O.) Drain cock with barb fitting:
F (2) G 06 3/4 — —  W
Note 3) Bracket is not assembled and is ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AFD30/40
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 (applicable to AFD30 and
supplied loose at the time of shipment.
Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto-drain Name plate and caution plate
AF
40), and the exhaust port for auto drain comes with connection should be ø3/8" in case Z (6) for bowl in imperial units AFD20 to 40
NPT thread port is chosen. (PSI, °F)
ø3/8" One-touch fitting (applicable to AFD30 and
40). ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending alphanumerical order.
AR
Note 5) Without a valve function. Note 6) For NPT thread type.
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 (applicable to AFD30 and 40).
: Combination available : Combination not available IR
Accessory/Optional Specifications Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
Applicable micro mist separator VEX
Symbol

Combination Accessory Optional specifications

AFD20 AFD30 to 40
Accessory/Optional specifications B C D 2 6 8 C J R W Z AMR
Optional specifications Accessory

With bracket B
Float type auto-drain (N.C.) C ITV
Float type auto-drain (N.O.) D
Metal bowl -2 IC
Nylon bowl -6
Metal bowl with level gauge -8 VBA
With bowl guard -C
Drain guide 1/4 -J VE

Flow direction: Right
Left -R
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing -W VY1
Name plate and caution plate for bowl in imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z
G
Standard Specifications
Model AFD20 AFD30 AFD40 AFD40-06 PPA
1/4
1/8 1/4
Port size
1/4 3/8
3/8 3/4 AL
1/2
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
AFD20 Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Rated flow (l/min (ANR)) (1) 120 240 600 600
Nominal filtration rating 0.01 µm (95% filtered particle size)
Outlet side oil mist concentration Max. 0.1 mg/m3 (ANR) (Before saturated with oil: 0.01 mg/m3 (ANR) or less, approx. 0.008 ppm) (2)
AFD30 Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard Option Standard
Drain capacity (cm3) 8 25 45 45
Weight (kg) 0.18 0.22 0.44 0.49
Note 1) When the inlet pressure is 0.7 MPa. The flow rate varies depending on the inlet pressure.
Note 2) When the compressor oil mist discharge concentration is 30 mg/m3 (ANR).

Accessory Part No.

Applicable model
AFD40 AFD20 AFD30 AFD40 AFD40-06
Accessory
JIS Symbol Bracket assembly (1) AF20P-050AS AF30P-050AS AF40P-050AS AF40P-070AS
N.O. — AD38 AD38N(3) AD48 AD48N(3) AD48 AD48N(3)
Float type auto-drain (2)
N.C. AD27 AD37 AD37N(3) AD47 AD47N(3) AD47 AD47N(3)
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
Note 2) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
Note 3) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be ø3/8".

14-2-43
Series AFD20/30/40
: When saturated with oil
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) : Initial state

AFD20 AFD30 AFD40

Pressure drop (MPa)

Pressure drop (MPa)

Pressure drop (MPa)

Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

Construction
AFD20 Precautions
Float type auto drain (N.C.)
IN OUT Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for
q Safety Instructions and Common
Precautions.
r
w Air Supply
e Caution
1. Install a mist separator (Series AFM) as a
preliminary filter on the inlet side of the micro
mist separator to prevent premature clogging.
2. Do not install on the inlet side of the dryer as
Drain M5 x 0.8 this can cause premature clogging of the
element.
AFD30/40
Maintenance
Float type auto-drain
IN OUT N.C. N.O. Warning
q 1. Replace the element every 2 years or when the
pressure drops becomes 0.1 MPa, whichever
r comes first, to prevent damage to the element.
w Design
e
Caution
1. Design the system so that the mist separator is
installed in a pulsation-free location. The
difference between internal and external
pressure inside the element should be kept
within 0.1 MPa, as exceeding this value could
cause damage.
Drain Selection

ø10 One-touch fitting ø10 One-touch fitting

Caution
Component Parts 1. Do not allow air flow that exceeds the rated
Material
flow. If the air flow is allowed outside the range
No. Description Note of the rated flow even momentarily, drainage
AFD20 AFD30, AFD40, AFD40-06 and lubricant may splash at the outlet side or
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver cause damage to the component.
Replacement Parts 2. Do not use in a low pressure application (such
Part no. as a blower). F.R.L. unit has its own minimum
No. Description Material operating pressure depending on the
AFD20 AFD30 AFD40 AFD40-06
equipment and is designed specifically to
w Element assembly AFD20P-060AS AFD30P-060AS AFD40P-060AS AFD40P-060AS function with compressed air. If used below the
e Bowl assembly (1) PC C2SF C3SF (2) C4SF (2) C4SF (2) minimum operating pressure, a loss of
r Bowl O-ring NBR C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S performance and malfunction can occur.
Note 1) Including O-ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for Please contact SMC if an application under
PSI and °F unit specifications. such conditions cannot be avoided.
Note 2) Bowl assembly for AFD30 to AFD40-06 includes a bowl guard (steel band material).

14-2-44
 Micro Mist Separator Series AFD20/30/40
Dimensions
AFD20 Bracket
L (Option) D
G F
K
M

E
H
IN OUT

C
OUT

Port size F.R.L.

B
AV
o s

Min. clearance
AU
Drain

45
for maintenance
A AF
AFD30/40/40-06 L
Bracket
AR
A (Option) D
G
K
F IR
M
J

VEX
E

IN OUT
AMR
C
H

OUT

Port size
ITV
B

IC
VBA
Min. clearance P
AFD30: 50
AFD40: 75

Drain for maintenance VE

VY1
G
Applicable model AFD20 AFD30, AFD40, AFD40-06
With compact With auto-drain Metal bowl with Drain cock with
PPA
auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl level gauge With drain guide barb fitting
AL
Optional
B

specifications B
B

B
B

N.O.: Black
B
B

O S N.C.: Gray O

M5 x 0.8 ø10
S
1/4 Barb fitting
One-touch Width across Applicable tubing:
fitting flats 17 T0604

(mm)
Accessory specifications
Standard specifications
Model Port size With bracket With auto-drain
A B C D P E F G H J K L M B
AFD20 1/8, 1/4 40 97 10 40 — 18 30 27 22 5.4 8.4 40 2.3 115
AFD30 1/4, 3/8 53 129 14 53 57 16 41 40 23 6.5 8 53 2.3 170
AFD40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 165 18 70 73 17 50 54 26 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 204
AFD40-06 3/4 75 169 20 70 73 14 50 54 25 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 208

Optional specifications
Model With drain guide With barb fitting Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge
B B B B
AFD20 — — 97 —
AFD30 136 137 142 162
AFD40 172 173 178 198
AFD40-06 176 177 182 202

14-2-45
 Modular Style
Regulator
Series AR
Regulator Model Port size Accessory
Series AR
AR10 M5 x 0.8

AR20 1/8, 1/4

AR25 1/4, 3/8

AR30 1/4, 3/8

AR40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2

AR40-06 3/4 Bracket

Square
AR50 3/4, 1 embedded type
pressure gauge
Pages 14-2-47 to 14-2-53 AR60 1 (Except AR10)
Round pressure
Regulator with back flow mechanism AR20K 1/8, 1/4 gauge
Series ARK
Panel mount
AR25K 1/4, 3/8

AR30K 1/4, 3/8

AR40K 1/4, 3/8, 1/2

AR40K-06 3/4

AR50K 3/4, 1

Pages 14-2-54 to 14-2-59 AR60K 1

14-2-46
 Regulator

Series AR10 How to Order

to 60
AR 30 F 03 BE 1N
Option
Regulator Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (2) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AR10 to 60
Body size N Non-relieving AR10 to 60
R Flow direction: Right
Left AR10 to 60
10 20 25 30 40 50 60 Y Upward handle AR10 to 60 F.R.L.
AR20 Thread type Z (3) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F)
AR10 to 60

Metric thread (M5)

∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending
alphanumeric order.
AV
Nil
Rc Note 1) This product is for overseas use only according to the new
N NPT Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in AU
F G Japan.)
Port size Note 2) The only difference from the standard specifications is the
Port Body size adjusting spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting AF
Symbol
size 10 20 25 30 40 50 60 Accessory of 0.2 MPa or more.
M5 M5  — — — — — — Symbol Description Applicable model AR
01 1/8 —  — — — — — Nil — —
02 1/4 —     — —
03 3/8 — —    — —
B With bracket AR10 to 60 IR
04 1/2 — — — —  — —
E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR20 to 60
With round pressure gauge (Without limit indicator) AR10
06 3/4 — — — —   — G With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR20 to 60
VEX
AR40 10 1 — — — — —  
H With set nut (For panel mount) AR10 to 40
Note) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of AMR
shipment (except option E).
: Combination available : Combination not available ITV
JIS Symbol Accessory/Optional Specifications Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
Combination
Symbol
Accessory Optional specifications Applicable regulator IC
Accessory/Optional specifications B E G H 1 N R Y Z AR10 AR20 to 40 AR50 to 60
With bracket (With set nut) B VBA
Accessory

Square embedded type pressure gauge E

Round pressure gauge G VE

With set nut (For panel mount) H
P. 14-2-52/53
0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting -1 VY1
specifications

-N
Optional

Non-relieving type
Flow direction: Right
Left -R G
Upward handle -Y
Name plate and pressure gauge
in imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z PPA
Standard Specifications
Model AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60 AL
Port size M5 x 0.8 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.7 MPa 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Pressure gauge port size (1) Rc 1/16 (2) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (3) (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.06 0.26 0.21 0.29 0.44 0.47 1.17 1.22
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulator with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AR20 to AR60).
Note 2) Use a bushing (part no: 131368) when connecting the R 1/8 pressure gauge to the R 1/16 gauge port.
Note 3) Except AR10.
Accessory Part No.
Applicable model
AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60
Accessory
Bracket assembly (1) AR10P-270AS AR20P-270AS AR25P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR50P-270AS (5) AR50P-270AS (5)
Set nut AR10P-260S AR20P-260S AR25P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S AR40P-260S — (6) — (6)
Round type G27-10-R1 G36-10-
01 G36-10-
01 G36-10-
01 G46-10-
02 G46-10-
02 G46-10-
02 G46-10-
02
(2) 1 MPa Square (4)
Pressure embedded type — GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
gauge Round type G27-10-R1 (3) G36-2-
01 G36-2-
01 G36-2-
01 G46-2-
02 G46-2-
02 G46-2-
02 G46-2-
02
0.2 MPa Square (4)
embedded type — GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set nuts. Note 3) For 1.0 MPa.
Note 2)  in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of Note 4) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, Note 5) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
indicate N for NPT. Note 6) Please contact SMC regarding the set nuts for AR50 and AR60.
Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and
pressure gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.

14-2-47
Series AR10 to 60
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) Condition: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa

Precautions AR10 M5 AR40 Rc 1/2

0.6 0.6
Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 0.5 0.5
for Safety Instructions and Com-

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

mon Precautions. 0.4 0.4

Mounting & Adjustment 0.3 0.3

Warning 0.2 0.2

1. Set the regulator while verifying the
displayed values of the inlet and outlet 0.1 0.1
pressure gauges. Turning the knob
excessively can cause damage to the 00 00
25 50 75 100 125 150 1000 2000 3000
internal parts.
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
2. The pressure gauge included with
regulators for 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting is for AR20 Rc 1/4 AR40-06 Rc 3/8
up to 0.2 MPa use only. Exceeding 0.2
0.6 0.6
MPa of pressure can damage the gauge.
Nevertheless, the gauge for the AR10 0.5
0.5
regulator with 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting is
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

for up to 1.0 MPa use.
0.4 0.4
3. Do not use tools on the pressure regulator
knob as this may cause damage. It must 0.3 0.3
be operated manually.
0.2 0.2

Caution 0.1 0.1

1. Be sure to unlock the knob before
adjusting the pressure and lock it after
0 0
setting the pressure. 0 200 400 600 800 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000

Failure to follow this procedure can cause Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
damage to the knob and the outlet AR25 Rc 3/8 AR50 Rc 1
pressure may fluctuate.
0.6 0.6
• Pull the pressure regulator knob to
unlock. (You can visually verify this with
0.5 0.5
the “orange mark” that appears in the
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

gap.)
0.4 0.4
• Push the pressure regulator knob to lock.
When the knob is not easily locked, turn it
0.3 0.3
left and right a little and then push it
(when the knob is locked, the “orange
mark”, i.e., the gap will disappear). 0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0 0
0 500 1000 1500 0 5000 10000
Orange mark Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

AR30 Rc 3/8 AR60 Rc 1

0.6 0.6

0.5 0.5
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

2. A knob cover is available to prevent 0.4 0.4

careless operation of the knob. Refer to
page 14-2-6 for details. 0.3 0.3
3. Please contact SMC when using the
regulator between a solenoid valve and an 0.2 0.2
actuator.
0.1 0.1

0 0 5000 10000
0 500 1000 1500 0
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

14-2-48
 Regulator Series AR10 to 60
Conditions:
Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa
Outlet pressure 0.2 MPa
Pressure Characteristics (Representative values) Flow rate 20 l/min (ANR)

AR10 AR40
0.3
0.25

0.25 Set point

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point

0.2
0.2

F.R.L.
0.15

AV
0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
AU
1 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)
AF
AR20 AR40-06
AR
0.25 0.25
IR
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point

VEX
0.2 0.2 AMR
ITV

0.15 0.15
IC
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa) VBA

AR25 AR50 VE

0.25 0.25 VY1
G
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point

PPA
0.2 0.2

AL

0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)

AR30 AR60
0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point

0.2 0.2

0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)

14-2-49
Series AR10 to 60
Construction
AR10 AR20/25

t
t
q
IN OUT
e
IN OUT
e q
r r
w
w

AR30/40 AR50/60

t t q
q
e e
IN OUT IN OUT

r w
w
r

Component Parts
Material
No. Description Note
AR10/20 AR25 to 40(-60) AR50/60
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver
w Bonnet Polyacetal Aluminum die-casted Black

Replacement Parts
Part no.
No. Description Materials
AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
Stainless steel
e Valve assembly AR10P-090S AR20P-410AS AR25P-410AS AR30P-410AS AR40P-410AS AR40P-410AS AR50P-410AS AR60P-410AS
Brass, HNBR
r Diaphragm assembly Weatherability NBR AR10P-150AS (1) AR20P-150AS AR25P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR50P-150AS AR50P-150AS
t Valve guide assembly POM 131329 AR20P-050AS AR25P-050AS AR30P-050AS AR40P-050AS AR40P-050AS AR50P-050AS AR60P-050AS
Note 1) AR10 is a piston and gasket (KSYP-13) type assembly.
Note 2) Assembly includes valve, valve spring and stem assembly.

14-2-50
 Regulator Series AR10 to 60
Dimensions
AR10 to 40
Square embedded type Port size Panel fitting dimension
A pressure gauge (Option) D U

C
IN T OUT
IN OUT V

S
Plate thickness F.R.L.

L
Pressure gauge AR10 to AR30: Max. 3.5

B
(Option)
AR40: Max. 5
Pressure gauge AV
M

port
N Q
AU
K F J AF
P E Bracket
(Option)
AR
IR
AR50/60
Square embedded type Port size VEX
A pressure gauge (Option) D
AMR
ITV

C
IN OUT IC
G

Pressure gauge VBA

(Option)

L
VE

B
Pressure gauge
port
VY1
M

N
Bracket
G
(Option)
Q
PPA
K F AL
P E J

(mm)
Accessory specifications
Standard specifications
Model Port size With pressure gauge Bracket mounting size Panel mount
A C B D E F G J K L M N P Q S T U V
AR10 M5 x 0.8 25 11 58 25 26 — 0 25 28 30 4.5 6.5 40 2 18 18.5 — —
AR20 1/8, 1/4 40 26.5 94 57 65 29.5 2 Note) 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 25 28.5 14 6
AR25 1/4, 3/8 53 28 101 55 64 28.5 0 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 26 32.5 16 6
AR30 1/4, 3/8 53 31 116 59 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7
AR40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 36 128 68 74 35 3.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7
AR40-06 3/4 75 36 129 68 74 35 3 50 54 56 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 37 42.5 21 7
AR50 3/4, 1 90 43 169 87 84 44.5 3.3 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 — — — —
AR60 1 95 46 176 87 84 44.5 3.3 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 — — — —
Note) For AR20 only, the position of the pressure gauge is above the center of the piping.

14-2-51
 Regulator Series AR20 to 60
Made to Order Specifications:
Please contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications, and lead times.

1. Special Temperature Environment 2. High Pressure

Special materials are used in the manufacturing of seals and Strong materials are used in the manufacturing of air filters
resin parts to allow them to withstand various temperature intended for high pressure operation. Also construction
conditions in cold or tropical (hot) regions. modification allows a wider regulating pressure range.

Specifications Specifications
Part no. -X430 -X440 Part no. -X425
Environment Low temperature High temperature Proof pressure 3.0 MPa
Ambient temperature –30 to 60°C –5 to 80°C Max. operating pressure 2.0 MPa
Fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing) Set pressure range 0.1 to 1.6 MPa
Rubber parts Special NBR FPM Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Material
Main metal parts Metal (Aluminum die-casted)

Applicable Model Applicable Model

Model AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60 Model AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60
Port size 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1 Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1

How to Order How to Order

AR 30 F 03 BG 1N X430 AR 30 F 03 BG N X425
Regulator Regulator
For high/low
Body size temperature Body size For high
25 30 40 50 60 X430 Low temperature 20 25 30 40 50 60 pressure
X440 High temperature
Thread type Thread type
Nil Rc Nil Rc
N NPT N NPT
F G F G
Port size Port size
Port Body size Body size
Symbol Port
size 25 30 40 50 60 Symbol
size 20 25 30 40 50 60
02 1/4    — — 01 1/8  — — — — —
03 3/8    — — 02 1/4     — —
04 1/2 — —  — — 03 3/8 —    — —
06 3/4 — —   — 04 1/2 — — —  — —
10 1 — — —   06 3/4 — — —   —
Option (1) 10 1 — — — —  
Symbol Description Applicable model Option (1)
Nil — — Symbol Description Applicable model
B With bracket AR25 to 60 Nil — —
G (2) With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR25 to 60 B With bracket AR20 to 60
H With set nut (For panel mount) AR25 to 40 G (2) With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR20 to 60
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are H With set nut (For panel mount) AR20 to 40
supplied loose at the time of shipment.
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are
Note 2) Mounting thread for pressure gauge: 1/8 for
supplied loose at the time of shipment.
AR25 to 30; 1/4 for AR40 to 60
Note 2) Mounting thread for pressure gauge: 1/8 for
Pressure gauge type: G43
Option AR20 to 30; 1/4 for AR40 to 60
Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (3) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AR25 to 60 Option
N Non-relieving type AR25 to 60 Symbol Description Applicable model
R Flow direction: Right
Left AR25 to 60 N Non-relieving AR20 to 60
Y Upward handle AR25 to 60 R Flow direction: Right
Left AR20 to 60
Z (4) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AR25 to 60 Y Upward handle AR20 to 60
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending Z (3) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AR20 to 60
alphanumeric order.
Note 3) The only difference from the standard specifications is the
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in
adjusting spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the ascending alphanumeric order.
setting of 0.2 MPa or more. Note 3) For thread type NPT.
Note 4) For thread type NPT. This product is for overseas use only according to the
This product is for overseas use only according to the new new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for
Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in use in Japan.)
Japan.)
Note 5) Please consult with SMC for detailed dimensions and available attachments and options.
Note 6) Comes with type T handle.

14-2-52
 Regulator Series AR20(K) to AR60(K)
Made to Order Specifications:
Please contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications, and lead times.

3. With Digital Pressure Switch

Digital pressure switch (ISE30---L) is supplied loose for mounting on pressure gauge connection port.

Specifications Applicable Model F.R.L.

Part no. -X465 Model AR20(K) AR25(K) AR30(K) AR40(K) AR40(K)-06 AR50(K) AR60(K)
Model ISE30---L Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1 AV
Set pressure range (MPa) –0.1 to 1
Pressure Set and display resolution (MPa) 0.001
AU
switch 12 to 24 VDC ± 10%, Ripple (p-p) 10%
Power supply voltage
or less (With power supply polarity protection)
Power consumption 45 mA or less (70 mA or less for current output) AF
∗ Pressure gauge port size: 1/8
AR
IR
VEX
AMR
ITV
How to Order IC
AR 30 K F 03 B 1N X465 A VBA
Regulator Switch specifications
Symbol Output specifications
VE

Body size With digital pressure switch
(4)
A NPN output
20 25 30 40 50 60 (Series ISE30) B PNP output
VY1
Note 4) Digital pressure switch is not assembled C 1 to 5 V output
and are supplied loose at the time of D 4 to 20 mA output G
Back flow mechanism shipment.
Note 5) Please consult with SMC for detailed
Nil Without back flow mechanism PPA
dimensions and available attachments
K With back flow mechanism and options.
Note 6) Refer to SMC catalog CAT.ES100-42 for
detailed specifications and instructions AL
Thread type
of digital pressure switch.
Nil Rc
N NPT Option
F G Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (2) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AR20(K) to 60(K)
N Non-relieving type AR20(K) to 60(K)
Port size
R Flow direction: Right
Left AR20(K) to 60(K)
Port Body size Y Upward handle AR20(K) to 60(K)
Symbol size
20 25 30 40 50 60 Z (3) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AR20(K) to 60(K)
01 1/8  — — — — — ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending
02 1/4     — — alphanumeric order.
Note 2) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting
03 3/8 —    — — spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or
04 1/2 — — —  — — more.
06 3/4 — — —   — Note 3) For thread type NPT.
This product is for overseas use only according to the new
10 1 — — — —   Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)

Option (1)
Symbol Description Applicable model
Nil — —
B With bracket AR20(K) to 60(K)
H With set nut (For panel mount) AR20(K) to 40(K)
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of
shipment.

14-2-53
 Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism

Series AR20K to 60K

How to Order
Regulator with a built-in
mechanism that ensures a
quick release of the outlet air
AR 30 K F 03 BE 1N
pressure (built-in check valve Regulator Option
with back flow mechanism). Body size Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (2) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AR20K to 60K
20 25 30 40 50 60
N Non-relieving AR20K to 60K
With back flow mechanism R Flow direction: Right
Left AR20K to 60K
Note) AR10 comes with a back flow Y Upward handle AR20K to 60K
mechanism as a standard feature. Name plate and pressure
If the set pressure is below 0.15 Z (3) gauge in imperial units AR20K to 60K
MPa, back flow may not occur. (PSI, °F)
When a backflow mechanism is
∗ When more than one specification is
required with a set pressure of less
required, indicate in alphanumeric
than 0.15 MPa, please ccontact
order.
AR20K SMC.
Note 2) The only difference from the
AR40K Thread type standard specifications is the
Example 1) adjusting spring for the
When the pressure in the rear and Nil Rc regulator. It does not restrict
the front of the cylinder differs: N NPT the setting of 0.2 MPa or
Circuit diagram F G more.
Port size Note 3) For NPT thread type.
Port Body size This product is for overseas
Symbol use only according to the new
size 20 25 30 40 50 60
Measurement Law. (The SI
01 1/8  — — — — —
unit type is provided for use in
Example 2) 02 1/4     — — Japan.)
When the air supply is cut off and 03 3/8 —    — — Accessory (1)
releasing the inlet pressure to the 04 1/2 — — —  — —
atmosphere, the residual pressure Symbol Description Applicable model
06 3/4 — — —   —
release of the outlet side can be Nil — —
ensured for a safety purpose. 10 1 — — — —  
B With bracket AR20K to 60K
With square embedded type
Circuit diagram JIS Symbol E pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR20K to 60K
G With round pressure gauge AR20K to 60K
(With limit indicator)
H With set nut (For panel mount) AR20K to 40K

Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are

supplied loose at the time of shipment (except
option E).
Standard Specifications
Model AR20K AR25K AR30K AR40K AR40K-06 AR50K AR60K
Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Set pressure range (1) 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Pressure gauge port size (2) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
Ambient and fluid temperature –5° to 60°C (With no freezing)
Construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.26 0.21 0.30 0.45 0.48 1.17 1.22
∗ AR10 comes with a back flow mechanism as a standard feature. Note 1) Set the inlet pressure 0.05 MPa or higher than the set pressure.
Note 2) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulators with a
square embedded type pressure gauge (AR20K to AR60K).
Accessory Part No.
Accessory Applicable model AR20K AR25K AR30K AR40K AR40K-06 AR50K AR60K
Bracket assembly (1) AR20P-270AS AR25P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR50P-270AS (3) AR50P-270AS (3)
Set nut AR20P-260S AR25P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S AR40P-260S — (5) — (5)
Round type G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
(2) 1.0 MPa Square (4)
Pressure embedded type GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
gauge Round type G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2 MPa Square (4)
embedded type GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set nuts. Note 3) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
Note 2)  in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection Note 4) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N for NPT. Note 5) Please contact SMC regarding the set nut for AR50K and 60K.
Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure
gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.

14-2-54
 Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism Series AR20K to 60K
Working Principle
Precautions
A-A
A
w Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4
for Safety Instructions and
OUT
Common Precautions.
1

Mounting & Adjustment

IN

F.R.L.
2

SMC Warning
1. Set the regulator while verifying the AV
displayed values of the inlet and outlet
pressure gauges. Turning the regulator AU
A
knob excessively can cause damage to
the internal parts.
2. Do not use tools on the pressure regulator AF
knob as this may cause damage. It must
be operated manually. AR
r Caution IR
1. Be sure to unlock the knob before
adjusting the pressure and lock it after VEX
IN OUT
Figure 1
setting the pressure.
(Inlet pressure) (Outlet pressure)
w Normal Failure to follow this procedure can cause
damage to the knob and the outlet AMR
pressure may fluctuate.
q ITV
e Inlet pressure Pressure in
(IN) diaphragm chamber IC
Figure 3 VBA
Orange mark
Figure 2 VE

Back flow
VY1
IN OUT • Pull the pressure regulator knob to
unlock. (You can visually verify this with
G
Inlet pressure Pressure in the “orange mark” that appears in the
(IN) diaphragm chamber
gap.) PPA
• Push the pressure regulator knob to lock.
When the knob is not easily locked, turn it AL
left and right a little and then push it
(when the knob is locked, the “orange
mark”, i.e., the gap will disappear).
2. A knob cover is available to prevent
careless operation of the knob. Refer to
When the inlet pressure (P1) is higher than the regulating pressure, the check valve
page 14-2-6 for details.
w closes and operates as a normal regulator (Figure 1).
When the inlet pressure (P1) is shut off and released, the check valve w opens and
the pressure in the diaphragm chamber q is released into the inlet side (Figure 2). Maintenance
This lowers the pressure in the diaphragm chamber q and the force generated by the
pressure regulator spring e lifts the diaphragm. Valve r opens through the stem, Warning
and the outlet pressure is released to the inlet side (Figure 3). 1. When using the regulator between a
solenoid valve and an actuator, check the
pressure gauge periodically.
Sudden pressure fluctuations may shorten
the durability of the pressure gauge. A
digital pressure gauge is recommended
for such situation or as deemed
necessary.

14-2-55
Series AR20K to 60K
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) Condition: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa

AR20K Rc 1/4 AR40K-06 Rc 3/8

0.6 0.6

0.5 0.5
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0 0
0 200 400 600 800 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

AR25K Rc 3/8 AR50K Rc 1

0.6 0.6

0.5 0.5
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0 0
0 500 1000 1500 0 5000 10000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

AR30K Rc 3/8 AR60K Rc 1

0.6 0.6

0.5 0.5
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0 0 5000 10000
0 500 1000 1500 0
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

AR40K Rc 1/2
0.6

0.5
Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

00
1000 2000 3000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

14-2-56
 Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism Series AR20K to 60K
Conditions:
Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa
Outlet pressure 0.2 MPa
Pressure Characteristics (Representative values) Flow rate 20 l/min (ANR)

AR20K AR40K-06
0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point

0.2 0.2

F.R.L.
AV
0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
AU
1 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)
AF
AR25K AR50K
AR
0.25 0.25
IR
Outlet pressure (MPa)
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point

VEX
0.2 0.2 AMR
ITV

0.15 0.15
IC
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
Inlet pressure (MPa)
1
Inlet pressure (MPa)
1
VBA

AR30K AR60K VE

0.25 0.25 VY1
G
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point

PPA
0.2 0.2

AL

0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)

AR40K
0.25
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point

0.2

0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure (MPa)

14-2-57
Series AR20K to 60K
Construction
AR20K to 60K

A-A
A

OUT
1
IN

SMC

e t

IN OUT

r
q

Component Parts
Material
No. Description Note
AR20K AR25K to 40K(-06) AR50K/60K
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver
w Bonnet Polyacetal Aluminum die-casted Black

Replacement Parts
Part no.
No. Description Material
AR20K AR25K AR30K AR40K AR40K-06 AR50K AR60K
Stainless steel (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
e Valve assembly AR20P-410AS AR25P-410AS AR30P-410AS AR40P-410AS AR40P-410AS AR50P-410AS AR60P-410AS
Brass, HNBR
Weatherability
r Diaphragm assembly AR20P-150AS AR25P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR50P-150AS AR50P-150AS
NBR
t Valve guide assembly POM AR20P-050AS AR25P-050AS AR30P-050AS AR40P-050AS AR40P-050AS AR50P-050AS AR60P-050AS
(1) —
y Check valve assembly AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS
Note 1) Check valve construction includes a check valve cover and 2 screws.
Note 2) Assembly includes valve, valve spring and stem assembly.

14-2-58
 Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism Series AR20K to 60K
Dimensions
AR20K to 40K
Square embedded type Port size Panel fitting dimension
A pressure gauge (Option) D U

C
IN OUT IN T OUT
V

G
F.R.L.

S
Plate thickness

L
Pressure gauge

B
(Option) AR20K to AR30K: Max. 3.5
AR40K: Max. 5 AV
M

Pressure gauge
port size
Bracket
N Q
(Option) AU

K F J AF
P E
AR
IR

AR50K/60K
VEX
Square embedded type
A pressure gauge (Option) D
AMR
ITV

C
IN OUT IC
G

VBA
Pressure gauge

L
(Option)
VE

B
Pressure gauge
VY1
M

port size

N Port size Bracket

(Option)
G
Q
PPA
K F J AL
P E

(mm)
Accessory specifications
Standard specifications
Model Port size With pressure gauge Bracket mounting size Panel mount
A B C D E F G J K L M N P Q S T U V
AR20K 1/8, 1/4 40 94 26.5 57 65 29.5 2 Note) 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 25 28.5 14 6
AR25K 1/4, 3/8 53 101 28 55 64 28.5 0 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 26 32.5 16 6
AR30K 1/4, 3/8 53 116 31 59 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7
AR40K 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 128 36 68 74 35 3.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7
AR40K-06 3/4 75 129 36 68 74 35 3 50 54 56 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 37 42.5 21 7
AR50K 3/4, 1 90 169 43 87 84 44.5 3.3 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 — — — —
AR60K 1 95 176 46 87 84 44.5 3.3 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 — — — —
Note) For AR20K only, the position of the pressure gauge is above the center of the piping.

14-2-59
 Modular Style
Lubricator

Series AL
Lubricator Model Port size Accessory
Series AL
AL10 M5 x 0.8

AL20 1/8, 1/4

AL30 1/4, 3/8

AL40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 Bracket

AL40-06 3/4

AL50 3/4, 1

Pages 14-2-61 to 14-2-65 AL60 1

14-2-60
 Lubricator

Series AL10 to 60
How to Order

AL 30 F 03 B 2R
Lubricator Option
Symbol Description Applicable model
Body size
1 1000 cm3 tank AL30 to 60
F.R.L.
10 20 30 40 50 60 10 1000 cm3 tank with level switch (Lowest limit ON) AL30 to 60
Thread type 11 1000 cm3 tank with level switch (Lowest limit OFF) AL30 to 60 AV
2 Metal bowl AL10 to 60
Metric thread
Nil (M5)
3 With drain cock AL10 to 60 AU
Rc
6 Nylon bowl (Including sight dome) AL10 to 60
8 Metal bowl with level gauge AL30 to 60
N NPT
C With bowl guard AL20
AF
AL20 F G
Port size R Flow direction: Right
Left AL10 to 60
Port Body size 3W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AL30 to 60 AR
Symbol
size 10 20 30 40 50 60 Z (2) Name plate and caution plate for bowl in imperial units (PSI, °F) AL10 to 60
M5 M5  — — — — — ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order. IR
Accessory
01 1/8 —  — — — — Note 2) For M5 and NPT thread types.
02 1/4 —    — — Symbol Description Applicable model This product is for overseas use only
03 3/8 — —   — — Nil — — according to the new Measurement
Law. (The SI unit type is provided for
VEX
04 1/2 — — — — — — B (1) With bracket AL20 to AL 60 use in Japan.)
06 3/4 — — — —  — Note 1) Bracket is not assembled and is
supplied loose at the time of shipment.
AMR
10 1 — — — —  
: Combination available : Combination not available
Accessory/Optional Specifications Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread ITV
Symbol

Combination Accessory Optional specifications Applicable lubricator

Accessory/Optional specifications B 1 10 11 2 3 6 8 C R 3W Z AL10 AL20 AL30 to 60 IC
Accessory With bracket B
AL40 1000 cm3 tank -1 VBA
1000 cm3 tank with level switch (Lowest limit ON) -10
Optional specifications

1000 cm3 tank with level switch (Lowest limit OFF) -11
Metal bowl -2 VE

JIS Symbol
With drain cock -3
Nylon bowl (Including sight dome) -6 VY1
Metal bowl with level gauge -8
With bowl guard -C G
Flow direction: Right
Left -R
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing -3W
Name plate and caution plate for bowl in imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z
PPA
Note) -1, -10, -11 are for a metal bowl with level gauge that comes with drain cock.
AL
Standard Specifications
Model AL10 AL20 AL30 AL40 AL40-06 AL50 AL60
Port size M5 x 0.8 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Note)
1/4: 30 1/4: 30
Minimum dripping flow rate (l/min (ANR)) 4 15 3/8: 40 50 190 220
3/8: 40 1/2: 50
Oil capacity (cm3) 7 25 55 135 135 135 135
Recommended lubricant Class 1 turbine oil (ISO VG32)
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard — Option Standard
Weight (kg) 0.07 0.20 0.24 0.47 0.52 1.06 1.13
Note 1) • The flow rate is 5 drips/min under the following conditions: Inlet pressure of 0.5 MPa; Class 1
turbine oil (ISO VG32); Temperature at 20°C; Oil adjustment valve fully open.
• Use air consumption flow rate for minimum dripping flow rate.
Accessory Part No.
Accessory Applicable model AL10 AL20 AL30 AL40 AL40-06 AL50 AL60
Bracket assembly Note) — AF20P-050AS AF30P-050AS AF40P-050AS AF40P-070AS AF50P-050AS AF50P-050AS
∗ The part number for bracket assembly for 1000 cm3 is AF50P-050AS (applicable to AL30 to AL60).
Note) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.

14-2-61
Series AL10 to 60
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) Condition: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa Working Principle: Type AL10
AL10 M5 AL40-06 Rc 3/4
0.1
0.1
turn
open

turn

r ns

turns

Pa
Pa

a
MP
5 tu

0.5 M
0.5

0.3 M
n 1.0
Needle fully

n 2.0
Pressure drop (MPa)

Pressure drop (MPa)

0.08

.7
0.08 n 1.
Open

=0
Ope

MPa
Ope

P1 =
Ope

P1 =

P1
P1 = 0.1
0.06 0.06

0.04 0.04

0.02 0.02
Conditions: P1 = 0.5 MPa
Needle: One side fully open
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 0 2000 4000 6000 8000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

AL20 Rc 1/4 AL50 Rc 1

0.1 0.1

Pa

Pa

Pa
Pa

M A portion of the air introduced from the IN

Pa

M
.7 M

.3
side pressurizes the lubricant inside the
5

7
.5 M

0.

0.
=0
Pressure drop (MPa)

Pressure drop (MPa)

0.08 0.08
=0

bowl. The remainder of the air passes

=

=
P1
=0

P1
P1
a
Pa

through the needles o, and flows to the

MP

P1
0.1 M

P1

OUT side. The pressure differential between

a

0.06
0.3

0.06
MP

the inside of the bowl and the inside of the

P1 =
P1 =

.1

sight dome w, causes the lubricant inside

=0

0.04 0.04
the bowl into the oil passage !0 . The
P1

lubricant drips from the dripping tube !1, and

0.02 0.02 lubricate the OUT side. The amount of
lubricant is adjusted by the needle o, on the
0
front face. Turning the needle clockwise
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 5000 10000 15000 increases the amount of the lubricant, and
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) turning it counterclockwise until fully opened
shuts off the lubricant. The needle on the
side that is not used should be left fully
AL30 Rc 3/8 AL60 Rc 1
opened.
0.1 0.1
Note) The operating principle for AL20 to 60
types is different from that of AL10
Pressure drop (MPa)

Pressure drop (MPa)

0.08 0.08 Pa
Pa

M
Precautions
Pa
a

M
Pa

Pa

7
0.
MP
Pa

5
M

0.

=
3
0.1 M

7
5
.3

0.

P1
=

0.06 0.06
0.
0.
=0

P1
=

Be sure to read before handling.

=

Pa
=

P1
P1
P1
P1

M
P1 =

Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4

.1

0.04 0.04
=0

for Safety Instructions and

P1

Common Precautions.
0.02 0.02

Selection
0 0
0 2000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
4000 6000 0 5000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
10000 15000
Warning
Piping
1. Do not introduce air from the outlet side
as this can damage the damper.
AL40 Rc 1/2
0.1 Caution
1. Use a check valve (Series AKM) to
prevent back flow of the lubricant when
Pressure drop (MPa)

0.08
redirecting the air flow before the
a
MPa
MPa

MP
MP

lubricator.
.7
0.5
P1 = 0.1

0.06
0.3

Maintenance
=0
P1 =
P1 =

P1

0.04 Warning
1. For AL 10 and AC20 type, replenish the
0.02 lubricant after releasing the inlet pressure.
Lubrication cannot take place under a
0
pressurized condition.
0 2000 4000 6000 8000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Caution
1. Check the dripping amount once a day.
Drip failure can cause damage to the
components that need lubrication.

14-2-62
 Lubricator Series AL10 to 60
Construction
AL10 AL20
JIS Symbol
w
w q e
q t
IN OUT IN OUT
F.R.L.
y y
u r AV
u AU
AF

AL30/40 AL50/60 AR
IR
w w
qe qe VEX
t t AMR
IN OUT IN OUT

ITV
y r
r i IC
u
VBA
VE

VY1
y
u
G
PPA
AL

Component Parts
Material
No. Description Note
AL10/20 AL30/40/40-06 AL50/60
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver
i Housing — Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver

Replacement Parts
Part no.
No. Description Material
AL10 AL20 AL30 AL40 AL40-06 AL50 AL60
w Sight dome assembly PC AL10P-080AS AL20P-080AS AL20P-080AS AL20P-080AS AL20P-080AS AL20P-080AS AL20P-080AS
e Lubrication plug assembly — — AL20P-060AS AL30P-060AS AL40P-060AS AL40P-060AS AL40P-060AS AL40P-060AS
r Damper retainer assembly (1) — — AL20P-030AS AL30P-030AS AL40P-030AS AL40P-030AS AL50P-030AS AL60P-030AS
t Damper assembly Synthetic resin — AL20P-040S AL30P-040S AL40P-040S AL40P-040S AL50P-040AS AL60P-040AS
y Bowl O-ring NBR C1SFP-260S C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S
u Bowl assembly (2) PC C1SL C2SL C3SL (3) C4SL (3) C4SL (3) C4SL (3) C4SL (3)
Note 1) Add “-1” at the end of the part number when ordering a damper retainer assembly for 1000 cm3.
Example) AL30P-030AS-1
Note 2) Including O-ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F unit specifications.
Note 3) Bowl assembly for AL30 to AL60 comes with a bowl guard (steel band material).

14-2-63
Series AL10 to 60
Dimensions
AL10 L AL20
D
G Bracket
(Option) F
K Port size M
A Port size

C
C

J
H
IN OUT IN
OUT
OUT
B
OUT

B
P Min. clearance
R

for maintenance Min. clearance

A for maintenance

R
AL30/40 AL50/60
L D
L Bracket D Port size
G Bracket F
G (Option) Port size F M
K (Option)
K M

E
J

C
C

H
J
H

IN OUT IN OUT

OUT OUT
B

A P B
R

Min. clearance
for maintenance

A Min. clearance
R

for maintenance

Applicable model AL10, AL20 AL30, AL40, AL40-06, AL50, AL60

Metal bowl with Metal bowl with Metal bowl with Metal bowl with drain Drain cock with
With drain cock drain cock Metal bowl With drain cock level gauge drain cock cock & level gauge barb fitting

Optional
specifications B
B
B

B
B

B
B

Barb fitting
Applicable tubing: T0604

(mm)
Accessory specifications
Standard specifications
Model Port size Bracket mounting size
A B C D P R E F G H J K L M
AL10 M5 x 0.8 25 77 26 25 28 35 — — — — — — — —
AL20 1/8, 1/4 40 115 36 40 — 60 — 30 27 22 5.4 8.4 40 2.3
AL30 1/4, 3/8 53 142 38 53 57 80 — 41 40 23 6.5 8 53 2.3
AL40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 176 40 70 73 110 — 50 54 26 8.5 10.5 70 2.3
AL40-06 3/4 75 176 38 70 73 110 — 50 54 25 8.5 10.5 70 2.3
AL50 3/4, 1 90 250 41 90 — 110 47 70 66 35 11 13 90 3.2
AL60 1 95 268 45 95 — 110 47 70 66 35 11 13 90 3.2
Optional specifications
Model With drain cock With barb fitting Metal bowl Metal bowl with drain cock Metal bowl with level gauge Metal bowl with drain cock & level gauge
B B B B B B
AL10 85 — 82 85 — —
AL20 123 — 121 124 — —
AL30 153 161 142 166 162 186
AL40 187 195 176 200 196 220
AL40-06 187 195 176 200 196 220
AL50 261 269 250 274 270 294
AL60 279 287 268 292 288 312

14-2-64
 Lubricator Series AL10 to 60
Dimensions
Option: 1000 cm3 tank

106
90
E Bracket Port size 106
66 (Option) 70
13 3.2

F.R.L.
11

P
H
IN OUT AV
OUT AU
AF
AR
IR
With float switch
VEX
B

Specifications

Contact capacity: 15 VA(AC)

15 W(DC)
Contact point: 1a, 1b
AMR
ITV
IC
VBA
B

VE

VY1
for maintenance
Min. clearance
210

Float switch
PPA
G 1/2 Part no: IS400-1 to 2
AL
210

for maintenance
Min. clearance

(mm)
With bracket With float switch
Model Port size B C E
H P B
AL30 1/4, 3/8 324 38 53 25 — 374
AL40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 333 40 70 18 — 383
AL40-06 3/4 333 38 75 16 — 383
AL50 3/4, 1 332 41 90 35 47 382
AL60 1 335 45 95 35 47 385

14-2-65
 Modular Style
Filter Regulator

Series AW
Filter regulator Model Port size Filtration Accessory
Series AW
AW10 M5 x 0.8

AW20 1/8, 1/4

AW30 1/4, 3/8

AW40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2

Pages 14-2-67 to 14-2-73 AW40-06 3/4

Filter regulator with 5 µm

back flow mechanism AW20K 1/8, 1/4
Series AWK

AW30K 1/4, 3/8

AW40K 1/4, 3/8, 1/2

Bracket
Square embedded
AW40K-06 3/4 type pressure gauge
Pages 14-2-74 to 14-2-77 (Except AR10)
Mist separator Round pressure
regulator gauge
Series AWM AWM20 1/8, 1/4 Panel mount

AWM30 1/4, 3/8

0.3 µm
(95% filtered
particle size)

AWM40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2

Pages 14-2-78 to 14-2-81

Micro mist separator
regulator
Series AWD AWD20 1/8, 1/4

AWD30 1/4, 3/8

0.01 µm
(95% filtered
particle size)

AWD40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2

Pages 14-2-82 to 14-2-85

14-2-66
 Filter Regulator

Series AW10 to 40
Integrated filter and regulator units save
space and require less piping.
Direct operated, relieving type

JIS Symbol F.R.L.

AV
P. 14-2-72 AW20 AU
How to Order AW40
AF
AR
AW 30 F 03 BE 1N
Filter Option IR
regulator Symbol Description Applicable model
Body size 1 (5) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AW10 to 40 VEX
10 20 30 40 2 Metal bowl AW10 to 40
6 Nylon bowl AW10 to 40 AMR
Thread type 8 Metal bowl with level gauge AW30/40
C With bowl guard AW20
Nil
Metric thread (M5)
J (6) Drain guide 1/4 AW30/40
ITV
Rc
N (1) NPT N Non-relieving AW10 to 40

F (2) G R Flow direction: Right
Left AW10 to 40 IC

Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4
(applicable to AW30 and
40), and the exhaust
port for auto- drain
comes with ø3/8" One-
touch fitting (applicable
to AW30 and AW40).
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4
(applicable to AW30 and
W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AW30/40
Z (7) Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AW10 to 40 VBA
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
Note 5) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring for
the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more. VE

Note 6) Without a valve function.
Note 7) For M5 and NPT thread types. This product is for overseas use only according to
the new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
VY1
Accessory (3)

AW40). Symbol Description Applicable model G

Nil — —
Port size
B With bracket AW10 to 40 PPA
Port Body size
Symbol C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) (4) AW10 to 40
size 10 20 30 40
D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) (4) AW30/40
M5 M5  — — — E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20 to 40
AL
01 1/8 —  — — With round pressure gauge (Without limit indicator) AW10
02 1/4 —    G
With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20 to 40
03 3/8 — —   H With set nut (For panel mount) AW10 to 40
04 1/2 — — —  Note 3) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of shipment (except
06 3/4 — — —  options C, D and E).
Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto drain connection should be ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is
chosen.
: Combination available : Combination not available
Accessory/Optional Specifications Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
Symbol

Combination Accessory Optional specifications Applicable filter regulator

Accessory/Optional specifications B C D E G H 1 2 6 8 C J N R W Z AW10 AW20 AW30 to 40
With bracket (With set nut) B
Float type auto-drain (N.C.) C
Accessory

Float type auto-drain (N.O.) D

Square embedded type pressure gauge E
Round pressure gauge G
With set nut (For panel mount) H
0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting -1
Metal bowl -2
Optional specifications

Nylon bowl -6
Metal bowl with level gauge -8
With bowl guard -C
Drain guide 1/4 -J
Non-relieving type -N
Flow direction: Right
Left -R
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing -W
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure
gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z

14-2-67
Series AW10 to 40
Standard Specifications
Model AW10 AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06
Port sizes M5 x 0.8 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.7 MPa 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Pressure gauge port size (1) Rc 1/16 (2) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (3) (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Nominal filtration rating 5 µm
Drain capacity (cm3) 2.5 8 25 45 45
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard — Option Standard
Construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.09 0.32 0.40 0.72 0.75
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulators with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AW20 to AW40).
Note 2) Use a bushing (part no: 131368) when connecting R 1/8 pressure gauge to R 1/16 gauge port.
Note 3) Not applicable to AW10.
Accessory Part No.
Applicable model
AW10 AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06
Accessory
Bracket assembly (1) AR10P-270AS AW20P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR40P-270AS
Set nut AR10P-260S AR20P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S AR40P-260S
Round Type G27-10-R1 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
(2) 1.0 MPa (4)
Pressure Square embedded type — GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
gauge Round Type G27-10-R1 (3) G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2 MPa (4)
Square embedded type — GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
(5)
Float type N.O. — — AD38 AD38N (6)
AD48 AD48N (6)
AD48 AD48N(6)
auto-drain N.C. AD17 AD27 AD37 AD37N (6)
AD47 AD47N (6)
AD47 AD47N(6)
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set nuts.
Note 2)  in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N for
NPT. Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and supply of the pressure gauge for PSI unit specifications.
Note 3) For 1 MPa.
Note 4) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
Note 5) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD17/27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47). Please contact SMC regarding the
specifications for PSI unit and °F.
Note 6) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be ø3/8".

Precautions
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions.

Selection Mounting & Adjustment

Warning Warning • Pull the pressure regulator knob to

1. Residual pressure release (outlet
pressure release) is not completed by
releasing inlet pressure. To release
residual pressure, use a filter regulator
with a back flow mechanism.
Maintenance
Warning
1. Set the regulator while checking the
displayed values of the inlet and outlet
pressure gauges. Turning the knob
excessively can cause damage to the
internal parts.
2. The pressure gauge indicated with
regulators for 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting is
for 0.2 MPa use only. Exceeding 0.2
MPa of pressure can damage the
gauge.
3. Do not use tools on the pressure
unlock. (You can visually verify this
with the “orange mark” that appears in
the gap.)
• Push the pressure regulator knob to
lock. When the knob is not easily
locked, turn it left and right a little and
then push it (when the knob is locked,
the “orange mark” will disappear).
Orange mark

1. Replace the element every 2 years or
when the pressure drop becomes 0.1
MPa, whichever comes first, to prevent
damage to the element.
1. Be sure to unlock the knob before
regulator knob as this may cause
damage. It must be operated manually.
Caution
adjusting the pressure and lock it after
setting the pressure. 2. A knob cover is available to prevent
Failure to follow this procedure can careless operation of the knob. Refer to
cause damage to the knob and the page 14-2-6 for details.
outlet pressure may fluctuate.

14-2-68
 Filter Regulator Series AW10 to 40
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) Condition: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa

AW10 M5 AW30 Rc 3/8 AW40-06 Rc 3/4

0.6 0.6 0.6

0.5 0.5 0.5

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.4 0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3 0.3

F.R.L.
0.2 0.2 0.2

AV
0.1 0.1 0.1

0 0 0
AU
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 0 500 1000 1500 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
AF
AW20 Rc 1/4 AW40 Rc 1/2
0.6 0.6
AR
0.5 0.5
IR
Outlet pressure (MPa)
Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.4 0.4
VEX
0.3 0.3
AMR
0.2 0.2

ITV
0.1 0.1

0 0
IC
0 200 400 600 800 0 1000 2000 3000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
VBA

Pressure Characteristics (Representative value) Conditions: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa; Outlet pressure 0.2 MPa; Flow rate 20 l/min (ANR)
VE

AW10 AW30 AW40-06 VY1
0.25 0.25 G
0.25
PPA
Outlet pressure (MPa)
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point Set point

AL
0.2 0.2 0.2

0.15

0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)

AW20 AW40
0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point

0.2 0.2

0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)

14-2-69
Series AW10 to 40
Construction
JIS Symbol

AW10 AW20 AW30/40

w
w w
t
t t
q
e q q

IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT

y y y

r e e

u r r

u u
Drain

Drain

Drain
Component Parts
Material
No. Description Note
AW10/20 AW30 AW40/40-06
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver
w Bonnet Polyacetal Black

Replacement Parts
Part no.
No. Description Material
AW10 AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06
Stainless steel (4) (4) (4) (4)
e Valve assembly AR10P-090S AW20P-360AS AW30P-360AS AW40P-360AS AW40P-380AS
Brass, HNBR
r Filter element Non-woven fabric AF10P-060S AF20P-060S AF30P-060S AF40P-060S AF40P-060S
t Diaphragm assembly Weatherability NBR AR10P-150AS (1) AR20P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR40P-150AS
y Bowl O-ring NBR C1SFP-260S C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S
u Bowl assembly (2) PC C1SF C2SF C3SF (3) C4SF (3) C4SF (3)
Note 1) AW10 is a piston and a gasket (KSYP-13) type assembly.
Note 2) Including O-ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F unit specifications.
Note 3) Bowl assembly includes a bowl guard (steel band material).
Note 4) Assembly includes valve assembly, valve spring and stem assembly.

14-2-70
 Filter Regulator Series AW10 to 40
Dimensions
AW10/20 T H M
N D Panel fitting dimension
J Bracket
S Y
U (Option)
W

C
IN OUT
Z

P
V
IN OUT

K
Plate thickness

B
Pressure gauge
port size AW10, AW20: Max. 3.5 F.R.L.
Pressure gauge OUT

(Option)

Square embedded type

AV
pressure gauge (Option)
O S AU
Port size
Drain
E
A Min. clearance AF

G
for maintenance
H M Panel fitting dimension AR
AW30/40 T D Y
N J
Bracket IR

W
S U (Option) IN OUT
Z
VEX
C
Q

P
Plate thickness
AMR

V
AW30: Max. 3.5
IN OUT
K

AW40: 5
ITV
B

Pressure gauge OUT

Pressure gauge (Option)
port size
IC
Square embedded type
pressure gauge (Option)
VBA
Port size
VE

Drain Min. clearance E
G

for maintenance
A VY1
G
Applicable model AW10, AW20 AW30, AW40, AW40-06
With auto-drain With auto-drain Metal bowl with Drain cock with
(N.C.) Metal bowl (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl level gauge With drain guide barb fitting PPA
AL
Optional
B

B
B

B
B

specifications N.O.: Black

B
B

O S N.C.: Gray O

M5 x 0.8 ø10
S
1/4
One-touch Width across Barb fitting
fitting flats 17 Applicable tubing: T0604

(mm)
Accessory specifications
Standard specifications With
Model Port size With pressure gauge Bracket mounting size Panel mount auto-drain
A B C D E G H J K M N P Q S T U V W Y Z B
AW10 M5 x 0.8 25 108 48 25 28 25 26 — 0 25 28 30 4.5 6.5 40 2 18 18.5 — — 125
AW20 1/8, 1/4 40 160 73 52 40 40 63 27 5 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 30 28.5 14 6 177
AW30 1/4, 3/8 53 201 86 59 57 55 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7 242
AW40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 239 92 75 73 80 76 38.5 1.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7 278
AW40-06 3/4 75 242 93 75 73 80 76 38.5 1.2 50 54 56 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 37 42.5 21 7 281

Optional specifications
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge
B B B B
AW10 — — 107 —
AW20 — — 160 —
AW30 209 208 214 234
AW40 247 246 252 272
AW40-06 250 249 255 275

14-2-71
 Filter Regulator Series AR20 to 40
Made to Order Specifications:
Please contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications, and lead times.

1. Special Temperature Environment 2. High Pressure

Special materials are used in the manufacturing of seals and Strong materials are used in the manufacturing of air filters
resin parts to allow them to withstand various temperature intended for high pressure operation.
conditions in cold or tropical (hot) regions.
Specifications Specifications
Part no. -X430 -X440 Part no. -X425
Environment Low temperature High temperature Proof pressure 3.0 MPa
Ambient temperature –30 to 60°C –5 to 80C° Max. operating pressure 2.0 MPa
Fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing) Set pressure range 0.1 to 1.6 MPa
Rubber parts Special NBR FPM Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Material
Main parts Aluminum die-casted
Applicable Model
Applicable Model Model AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06
Model AW30 AW40 AW40-06 Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4
Port size 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4

How to Order How to Order

AW 30 F 03 BG 2 N X430 AW 30 F 03 BG 2 N X425
Filter Filter
regulator For high/low regulator For high
temperature pressure
Body size
X430 Low temperature Body size
30 40
X440 High temperature 20 30 40
Port size
Thread type
Nil Rc Thread type Port Body size
Symbol size
N (1) NPT
Port size Nil Rc 20 30 40
F (2) G Port Body size N (1) NPT 01 1/8  — —
Symbol size
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 30 40 F (2) G 02 1/4   
1/4 (applicable to 02 1/4   Note 1) Drain guide is 03 3/8 —  
AW30 to 40) NPT 1/4
Note 2) Drain guide is G 03 3/8   04 1/2 — — 
(applicable to
1/4 (applicable to 04 1/2 —  AW30 to 40) 06 3/4 — — 
AW30 to 40). Note 2) Drain guide is G
06 3/4 — 
1/4 (applicable
Option (3) to AW30 to 40). Option (3)
Symbol Description Applicable model Symbol Description Applicable model
Nil — — Nil — —
B With bracket AW30/40 B With bracket AW20/40
G (4) With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW30/40 G (4) With round pressure gauge (With limit AW20/40
H With set nut (For panel mount) AW30/40 H indicator) AW20/40
Note 3) Bracket is not assembled and is supplied loose at the time Note 3) Bracket is not assembled and is supplied loose at the
of shipment. time of shipment.
Note 4) Mounting thread for pressure gauge: 1/8 for AW30; 1/4 for Note 4) Mounting thread for pressure gauge: 1/8 for AW20 to
AW40 30; 1/4 for AW40
Pressure gauge type: G43 Pressure gauge type: G46
Bowl Bowl
Symbol Description Applicable model Symbol Description Applicable model
Nil (5) Metal bowl AW30/40 2 (5) Metal bowl AW20 to 40
Note 5) Only metal bowl available 8 (5) Metal bowl with level gauge AW30/40
Note 5) Only metal bowl or metal bowl with level
Option gauge available.
Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (6) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AW30/40
J (7) Drain guide 1/4 AW30/40 Optional specifications
N Non-relieving type AW30/40 Symbol Description Applicable model
R Flow direction: Right
Left AW30/40 J (6) Drain guide 1/4 AW30/40
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure N Non-relieving type AW20 to 40
Z (8) AW30/40
gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) R Flow direction: Right
Left AW20 to 40
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending Z (7) Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure AW20 to 40
alphanumeric order. gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F)
Note 6) The only difference from the standard specifications is the ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending
adjusting spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of alphanumeric order.
0.2 MPa or more. Note 6) Without a valve function.
Note 7) Without a valve function. Note 7) For thread type NPT.
Note 8) For thread type NPT. This product is for overseas use only This product is for overseas use only according to the new
according to the new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
provided for use in Japan.)
Note 9) Please consult with SMC for detailed dimensions and available attachments and options.
Note 10) Comes with type T handle.
14-2-72
 Filter Regulator Series AW20(K) to AW40(K)
Made to Order Specifications:
Please contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications, and lead times.

3. With Digital Pressure Switch

Digital pressure switch (ISE30---L) is supplied loose for mounting on pressure gauge connection port.

Specifications Applicable Model F.R.L.

Part no. suffix -X465 Model AW20(K) AW30(K) AW40(K) AW40(K)-06
Model ISE30---L Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 AV
Set pressure range (MPa) –0.1 to 1
Pressure Set and display resolution (MPa) 0.001 AU
switch 12 to 24 VDC ± 10%, Ripple (p-p) 10%
Power supply voltage
or less (With power supply polarity protection)
Power consumption 45 mA or less (70 mA or less for current output)
AF
∗ Pressure gauge port size: 1/8
AR
How to Order IR
VEX
AW 30 K F 03 B 1N X465 A
Filter AMR
regulator
Switch specifications ITV
Body size Symbol Output specifications
A NPN output
20 30 40
B PNP output
IC
C 1 to 5 V output
With back flow mechanism D 4 to 20 mA output VBA
Nil ––
K With back flow machanism With digital pressure switch VE

(Series ISE30) (7)
Thread type Note 7) Optional parts are not assembled
Nil Rc and are supplied loose at the VY1
N (1) NPT time of shipment.
Option
F (2) G
Symbol Description Applicable model
G
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 1 (4) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AW20(K) to 40(K)
(applicable to AW30 to 40),
2 Metal bowl AW20(K) to 40(K) PPA
and the exhaust port for auto-
drain comes with ø3/8" One- 6 Nylon bowl AW20(K) to 40(K)
touch fitting (applicable to 8 Metal bowl with level gauge AW30(K)/40(K) AL
AW30 to 40). C With bowl guard AW20(K)
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AW30(K)/40(K)
(applicable to AW30 to 40). Non-relieving type AW20(K) to 40(K)
N
R Flow direction: Right
Left AW20(K) to 40(K)
W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AW30(K)/40(K)
Port size Name plate and caution plate for bowl in imperial units
Z (6) AW20(K) to 40(K)
Port Body size (PSI, °F)
Symbol size
20 30 40 ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending
01 1/8   — alphanumeric order.
02 1/4   
Note 4) The only difference from the standard specifications is the
adjusting spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of
03 3/8 —   0.2 MPa or more.
04 1/2 — —  Note 5) Without a valve function.
06 3/4 — —  Note 6) For thread type NPT. This product is for overseas use only
according to the new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is
Option (3) provided for use in Japan.)
Symbol Description Applicable model
Nil — —
B With bracket AW20(K) to 40(K)
C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) (4) AW20(K) to 40(K)
D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) (4) AW30(K)/40(K)
H With set nut (For panel mount) AW20(K) to 40(K)
Note 3) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at
the time of shipment (except options C and D).
Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto drain connection should be
ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is chosen.
Note 8) Please consult with SMC for detailed dimensions and available attachments and options.
Note 9) Refer to SMC catalog CAT.ES100-42 for detailed specifications and instructions of digital pressure switch.

14-2-73
 Filter Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism

Series AW20K/30K/40K
How to Order
AW 30 K F 03 BE 1N
Filter regulator Option
Body size Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (4) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AW20K to 40K
20 30 40 2 Metal bowl AW20K to 40K
6 Nylon bowl AW20K to 40K
With back flow mechanism 8 Metal bowl with level gauge AW30K/40K
Note) AW10 comes with a back flow With bowl guard
mechanism as a standard feature.
C AW20K
J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AW30K/40K
If the set pressure is not exceeding
0.15 MPa, back flow may not occur. N Non-relieving type AW20K to 40K
When a back flow mechanism is R Flow direction: Right
Left AW20K to 40K
required with a set pressure of less W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AW30K/40K
AW40K than 0.15 MPa, please contact SMC. Z (6) Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AW20K to 40K
Thread type ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
Note 4) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring for
Nil Rc Port size the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
Note 5) Without a valve function.
N (1) NPT Port Body size
Symbol Note 6) For NPT thread type. This product is for overseas use only according to the new
size 20 30 40
F (2) G Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
01 1/8  — —
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT Accessory (3)
1/4 (applicable to 02 1/4   
AW30K and 40K), 03 3/8 —   Symbol Description Applicable model
and the exhaust port 04 1/2 — —  Nil — —
for auto-drain comes B With bracket AW20K to 40K
06 3/4 — — 
with ø3/8" One-touch C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) (2) AW20K to 40K
fitting (applicable to
D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) (2) AW30K/40K
AW30K and AW40K).
AW20K Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20K to 40K
(applicable to AW30K G With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20K to 40K
and AW40K). H With set nut (For panel mount) AW20K to 40K
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time
of shipment (except options C, D and E).
Note 2) Applicable tubing O.D for auto drain connection should be ø3/8" in
case NPT thread port is chosen.
Standard Specifications
Model AW20K AW30K AW40K AW40K-06
Port sizes 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Set pressure range (1) 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Pressure gauge port size (2) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (at relief flow rate of 0.1l/min (ANR))
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Nominal filtration rating 5 µm
JIS Symbol Drain capacity (cm3) 8 25 45 45
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard Option Standard
Construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.32 0.40 0.72 0.75
Note 1) Set the inlet pressure 0.05 MPa or higher than the set pressure.
Note 2) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulators with a square embedded type
pressure gauge (AW20K to AW40K).
Accessory Part No.
Applicable model
Circuit Diagram AW20K AW30K AW40K AW40K-06
Accessory
When the air supply is cut off and
releasing the inlet pressure to the Bracket assembly (1) AW20P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR40P-270AS
atmosphere, the residual pressure Set nut AR20P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S AR40P-260S
release of the outlet side can be ensured Round type G36-10-
01 G36-10-
01 G46-10-
02 G46-10-
02
for a safety purpose. (2) 1.0 MPa Square (3)
Pressure embedded type GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
JIS Symbol gauge Round type G36-2-
01 G36-2-
01 G46-2-
02 G46-2-
02
0.2 MPa Square (3)
GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
embedded type
(4)
Float type N.O. — AD38 AD38N(5) AD48 AD48N(5) AD48 AD48N(5)
With back flow auto-drain N.C. AD27 AD37 AD37N(5) AD47 AD47N(5) AD47 AD47N(5)
mechanism Filter regulator Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set nuts. Note 3) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
Note 2)  in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa;
type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD27) and 0.15 MPa
however, indicate N for NPT. Please contact SMC (AD37/47). Please contact SMC regarding the
regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge specifications for PSI unit and °F.
supply for PSI unit specifications. Note 5) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of
auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be ø3/8".
14-2-74
 Filter Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism Series AW20K/30K/40K
Condition:
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa

AW20K Rc 1/4 AW30K Rc 3/8 Precautions

0.6 0.6
Be sure to read before handling.
0.5 0.5 Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4

Outlet pressure (MPa)

for Safety Instructions and Com-
Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.4 0.4 mon Precautions.

0.3 0.3 Mounting & Adjustment

F.R.L.
0.2 0.2 Warning
1. Set the regulator while checking the AV
0.1 0.1 displayed values of the inlet and outlet
pressure gauges. Turning the knob
0 0 excessively can cause damage to the AU
0 200 400 600 800 0 500 1000 1500
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) internal parts.
2. The pressure gauge included with AF
AW40K Rc 1/2 AW40K-06 Rc 3/4 regulators for 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting is for
0.6 0.6 up to 0.2 MPa use. Exceeding 0.2 MPa of AR
pressure can damage the gauge.
0.5 0.5 3. Do not use tools on the pressure regulator IR
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

knob as this may cause damage. It must

0.4 0.4 be operated manually.
VEX
0.3 0.3
Caution AMR
0.2 0.2 1. Be sure to unlock the knob before
adjusting the pressure and lock it after ITV
0.1 0.1 setting the pressure.
Failure to follow this procedure can cause IC
0
0 1000 2000 3000
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
damage to the knob and the outlet
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) pressure may fluctuate.
• Pull the pressure regulator knob to unlock. VBA
Conditions:
Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa
(You can visually verify this with the “orange
Outlet pressure 0.2 MPa mark” that appears in the gap.) VE

Pressure Characteristics (Representative values) Flow rate 20 l/min (ANR) • Push the pressure regulator knob to lock.
AW20K AW40K When the knob is not easily locked, turn it VY1
left and right a little and then push it (when
0.25 0.25 the knob is locked, the “orange mark”, i.e.,
the gap will disappear).
G
Set point Set point
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

PPA
0.2 0.2
Orange mark AL

0.15 0.15

0 0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)

AW30K AW40K-06
0.25 0.25
2. A knob cover is available to prevent
Set point Set point careless operation of the knob. Refer to
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

page 14-2-6 for details.

0.2 0.2

Maintenance
Warning
0.15 0.15 1. Replace the element every 2 years or
when the pressure drop becomes 0.1
0 0 MPa, whichever comes first to prevent
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa) damage to the element.

14-2-75
Series AW20K/30K/40K
Working Principle

A-A w
A

Figure 1
Normal
SMC
K

U
P

SH OC
t o L

Pressure in Inlet pressure

diaphragm (IN)
chamber

A Figure 2
Figure 3 Back flow
e

q
Pressure in Inlet pressure
diaphragm (IN)
chamber

IN OUT IN OUT
(Inlet pressure) (Outlet pressure) (Inlet pressure) (Outlet pressure)

When the inlet pressure (P1) is higher than the set pressure, the check valve w closes and operates as a normal regulator (Figure 1).
When the inlet pressure (P1) is shut off and released, the check valve w, opens and the pressure in the diaphragm chamber q is released into
the inlet side (Figure 2).
This lowers the pressure in the diaphragm chamber q, and the force generated by pressure regulator spring e lifts the diaphragm. Valve r
opens through the stem, and the outlet pressure is released to the inlet side (Figure 3).

Construction
AW20K to 40K
A-A i
A

w
SMC
t
q
K

U
P

SH O C
t o L

IN OUT
A (Inlet pressure) (Outlet pressure)
Component Parts
Material y
No. Description Note
AW20K AW30K AW40K AW40K-06 e
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver
w Bonnet Polyacetal Black
r

Part no.
u
No. Description Material
AW20K AW30K AW40K AW40K-06
Stainless steel (4) (4) (4) (4)
e Valve assembly Brass, HNBR AW20P-360AS AW30P-360AS AW40P-360AS AW40P-380AS

Non-woven
r Filter element fabric AF20P-060S AF30P-060S AF40P-060S AF40P-060S

t Diaphragm assembly Weatherability NBR AR20P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR40P-150AS

y Bowl O-ring NBR C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S
u Bowl assembly (1) PC C2SF C3SF (2) C4SF (2) C4SF (2)
i Check valve assembly (3) POM, PBT AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS
Note 1) Including O-ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F unit
specifications.
Note 2) Bowl assembly includes a bowl guard (steel band material).
Note 3) Check valve assembly includes check valve cover, check valve body assembly and screws (2 pcs.).
Note 4) Assembly includes valve assembly, valve spring and stem assembly.
14-2-76
 Filter Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism Series AW20K/30K/40K
Dimensions
AW20K/30K/40K

T H M
Panel fitting dimension
N D
Y J
S U
IN OUT Bracket
W

Q
(Option)
F.R.L.

C
Z
Plate thickness AV

P
AW20K, 30K: Max. 3.5

V
AW40K: Max. 5 IN OUT
AU

K
AF

B
Pressure gauge OUT
(Option)
Pressure gauge
port size
AR
Square embedded type
pressure gauge (Option) IR

Port size
VEX
Drain E AMR
Min. clearance

G
A for maintenance
ITV
IC
Applicable model AW20K AW30K, AW40K, AC40K-06
With auto-drain
Metal bowl
With auto-drain
Metal bowl
Metal bowl with
With drain guide
Drain cock with VBA
(N.C.) (N.O./N.C.) level gauge barb fitting

VE

Optional

B
VY1
B

B
B

specifications N.O.: Black

B
B

O S N.C.: Gray O
ø10
S
1/4
M5 x 0.8
One-touch Width across
Barb fitting
Applicable tubing:
G
fitting flats 17 T0604
PPA
AL
(mm)
Accessory specifications
Standard specifications
Model Port size With pressure gauge Bracket mounting size Panel mount With auto-drain
A B C D E G H J K M N P Q S T U V W Y Z B
AW20K 1/8, 1/4 40 160 73 52 40 40 63 27 5 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 30 28.5 14 6 177
AW30K 1/4, 3/8 53 201 86 59 57 55 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7 242
AW40K 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 239 92 75 73 80 76 38.5 1.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7 278
AW40K-06 3/4 75 242 93 75 73 80 76 38.5 1.2 50 54 56 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 37 42.5 21 7 281

Optional specifications
Model Port size With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge
B B B B
AW20K 1/8, 1/4 — — 160 —
AW30K 1/4, 3/8 209 208 214 234
AW40K 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 247 246 252 272
AW40K-06 3/4 250 249 255 275

14-2-77
 Mist Separator Regulator

AWM20/30/40
Series AWM is a component
made up of a regulator and a
mist separator that are
integrated to provide optimum
results in applications such as
clean-air blow operations.
JIS Symbol

AWM20
Filtration: 0.3 µm
How to Order AWM40

Option
AWM 30 F 03 BE 1N Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (4) 0.05 to 0.2 MPa setting AWM20 to 40
Mist separator 2 Metal bowl AWM20 to 40
regulator 6 Nylon bowl AWM20 to 40
Body size
8 Metal bowl with level gauge AWM30/40
20 30 40 C With bowl guard AWM20
Thread type J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AWM30/40
N Non-relieving AWM20 to 40
Nil Rc
R Flow direction: Right
Left AWM20 to 40
N (1) NPT W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AWM30/40
F (2) G Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and
Z (6) AWM20 to 40
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F)
(applicable to AWM30
and 40), and the ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
exhaust port for auto- Note 4) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring
drain comes with ø3/8" for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
One-touch fitting Note 5) Without a valve function.
(applicable to AWM30 Note 6) For NPT thread type. This product is for overseas use only according to the
and AWM40). new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
Accessory (3)
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4
(applicable to AWM30 Symbol Description Applicable model
and AWM40). Nil — —
B With bracket AWM20 to 40
Port size C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) (2) AWM20 to 40
Port Body size D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) (2) AWM30/40
Symbol
size 20 30 40 E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AWM20 to 40
01 1/8  — — G With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AWM20 to 40
02 1/4    H With set nut (For panel mount) AWM20 to 40
03 3/8 —   Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of shipment (except options C,
D and E).
04 1/2 — — 
Note 2) Applicable tubing O.D for auto-drain connection should be ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is chosen.
: Combination available : Combination not available
Accessory/Optional Specifications Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
Applicable mist separator regulator
Symbol

Combination Accessory Optional specifications

AWM20 AWM30 to 40
Accessory/Optional specifications B C D E G H 1 2 6 8 C J N R W Z
With bracket (With set nut) B
Float type auto-drain (N.C.) C
Accessory

Float type auto-drain (N.O.) D

Square embedded type pressure gauge E
Round pressure gauge G
With set nut (For panel mount) H
0.05 to 0.2 MPa setting -1
Metal bowl -2
Optional specifications

Nylon bowl -6
Metal bowl with level gauge -8
With bowl guard -C
Drain guide 1/4 -J
Non-relieving type -N
Flow direction: Right
Left -R
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing -W
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure
gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z

14-2-78
 Mist Separator Regulator Series AWM20/30/40
Standard Specifications
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads
Model AWM20 AWM30 AWM40 are not required for the regulator
Port sizes 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 with a square embedded type
Fluid Air pressure gauge (AWM20 to 40).
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Note 2) When the compressor oil mist
discharge concentration is 30
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa mg/Nm3 (ANR).
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.85 MPa Note 3) Bowl O-ring and other O-rings are
Pressure gauge port size (1) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 slightly lubricated.
Note 4) When the outlet pressure is 0.5
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
MPa. (The rated flow varies
Nominal filtration rating 0.3 µm (95% filtered particle size) depending on the set pressure.) F.R.L.
Outlet side oil mist concentration Max. 1.0 mg/m3 (ANR) (approx. 0.8 ppm) (2) (3) Keep the air flow within the rated
Rated flow (l/min (ANR)) (4) flow to prevent and outflow of a
150 330 820
lubricant to the outlet side. AV
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard Option Standard AU
Drain capacity (cm3) 8 25 45
Construction Relieving type AF
Weight (kg) 0.44 0.59 1.25
Note) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto drain, applicable tubing O.D should be
ø3/8". AR
Accessory Part No. IR
Applicable model Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and
Accessory
AWM20 AWM30 AWM40 set nuts. VEX
Note 2)  in part numbers for a round
Bracket assembly (1) AW20P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS pressure gauge indicates a type of
Set nut AR20P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S connection thread. No indication is AMR
necessary for R; however, indicate
(2)
Round type G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02
1.0 MPa Square embedded type (3) N for NPT. Please contact SMC
Pressure GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS regarding the NPT connection
ITV
gauge Round type G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 thread and pressure gauge supply
0.2 MPa Square embedded type (3) for PSI unit specifications. IC
GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
Note 3) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting
Float type (4) N.O. — AD38 AD38NNote) AD48 AD48NNote) screws.
auto-drain N.C. AD27 AD37 AD37NNote) AD47 AD47NNote) Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. VBA
Note) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa
(AD27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
ø3/8".
Set the pressure to allow a pressure VE

drop when the fluid flows. Please
contact SMC regarding the VY1
specifications for PSI unit and °F.

Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions.
Selection
Warning
1. Residual pressure release (outlet
pressure release) is not complete by
releasing inlet pressure. Please contact
SMC regarding residual pressure
release.
Air Supply
Caution
1. Install an air filter (Series AF) as a pre-
liminary filter on the inlet side of the
mist separator regulator to prevent pre-
mature clogging.
Precautions
Mounting & Adjustment
Warning
1. Set the regulator while checking the
displayed values of the inlet and outlet
pressure gauges. Turning the knob
excessively can cause damage to the
internal parts.
2. The pressure gauge included with mist
separator regulators for 0.05 to 0.2
MPa setting is for up to 0.2 MPa only.
Exceeding 0.2 MPa of pressure can
damage the gauge.
3. Do not use tools on the pressure regu-
lator knob as this may cause damage.
It must be operated manually.
G
PPA
AL
• Pull the pressure regulator knob to
unlock. (You can visually verify this with
the “orange mark” that appears in the
gap.)
• Push the pressure regulator knob to
lock. When the knob is not easily locked,
turn it left and right a little and then push
it (when the knob is locked, the “orange
mark” i.e., the gap, will disappear).
Orange mark

Maintenance Caution
1. Be sure to unlock the knob before
Warning adjusting the pressure and lock it after
1. Replace the element every 2 years or setting the pressure.
when the pressure drop becomes 0.1 Failure to follow this procedure can
MPa, whichever comes first, to prevent cause damage to the knob and the
damage to the element. outlet pressure may fluctuate. 2. A knob cover is available to prevent
careless operation of the knob. Refer to
page 14-2-6 for details.

14-2-79
Series AWM20/30/40
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) Condition: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa

AWM20 Rc 1/4 AWM30 Rc 3/8 AWM40 Rc 1/2

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

Pressure Characteristics Conditions: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa; Outlet pressure 0.2 MPa; Flow rate: 20 l/min (ANR)

AWM20 AWM30 AWM40

0.25 0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point Set point

0.20 0.20 0.20

0.15 0.15 0.15

0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)

Construction
JIS Symbol AWM20 AWM30/40

w
t w
q t
IN OUT q
IN OUT
e
y y
r e
u r
Component Parts
u
Material
No. Description Note
AWM20 AWM30 AWM40
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver
Drain
w Bonnet Polyacetal Black

Drain
Replacement Parts
Part no.
No. Description Material
AWM20 AWM30 AWM40
e Valve assembly Brass, HNBR AWM20P-090AS AWM30P-090AS AWM40P-090AS
r Element assembly — AFM20P-060AS AFM30P-060AS AF40P-060AS
t Diaphragm assembly Weatherability NBR AR20P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS
y Bowl O-ring NBR C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S
u Bowl assembly (1) PC C2SF C3SF (2) C4SF (2)
Note 1) Including O-ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F
unit specifications.
Note 2) Bowl assembly for AWM30 and AWM40 comes with a bowl guard (steel band material).

14-2-80
 Mist Separator Regulator Series AWM20/30/40
Dimensions
H M
AWM20 T D
N J U Panel fitting dimension
Bracket
S (Option)
Y
W
IN OUT
Z
C

P
V
Plate thickness
IN OUT AWM20: Max. 3.5

K
F.R.L.
B

OUT

Pressure gauge
Pressure gauge (Option)
port size AV
Square embedded type
pressure gauge (Option) AU
Port size
O S
AF
Drain Min. clearance E

G
A for maintenance AR

AWM30/40 H M
IR
T D
N J U Panel fitting dimension VEX
Bracket Y
S (Option)
IN
W
OUT
AMR
Z
ITV
C

Plate thickness

P
V
IN OUT AWM30: Max. 3.5 IC
K

AWM40: Max. 5
B

Pressure gauge
Pressure gauge OUT VBA
(Option)
port size
Square embedded type VE

pressure gauge (Option)
VY1
Port size
G
Drain E
Min. clearance
G

A for maintenance PPA

Applicable model AWM20 AWM30, AWM40 AL
With auto-drain With auto-drain Metal bowl with Drain cock with
(N.C.) Metal bowl (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl level gauge With drain guide barb fitting

Optional
B

B
B

B
B

specifications N.O.: Black

B
B

O S N.C.: Gray O

M5 x 0.8 ø10
S
1/4
One-touch Width across Barb fitting
fitting flats 17 Applicable tubing: T0604

(mm)
Accessory specifications
Standard specifications With
Model Port size With pressure gauge Bracket mounting size Panel mount auto-drain
A B C D E G H J K M N P Q S T U V W Y Z B
AWM20 1/8, 1/4 40 173 73 52 40 45 63 27 5 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 30 28.5 14 6 190
AWM30 1/4, 3/8 53 201 86 59 57 50 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7 242
AWM40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 239 92 75 73 70 76 38.5 1.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7 278

Optional specifications
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge
B B B B
AWM20 — — 173 —
AWM30 209 208 214 234
AWM40 247 246 252 272

14-2-81
 Micro Mist Separator Regulator

Series AWD20/30/40
Series AWD is a component
made up of a regulator and a
micro-mist separator that are
integrated to provide optimum JIS Symbol
results in applications such as
ultraclean air blow operations.

AWD20
Filtration: 0.01 µm AWD40
How to Order
Option
AWD 30 F 03 BE 1N Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (4) 0.05 to 0.2 MPa setting AWD20 to 40

Micro mist 2 Metal bowl AWD20 to 40

separator 6 Nylon bowl AWD20 to 40
regulator 8 Metal bowl with level gauge AWD30/40
C With bowl guard AWD20
J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AWD30/40
Body size N Non-relieving AWD20 to 40
20 30 40 R Flow direction: Right
Left AWD20 to 40
W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AWD30/40
Thread type Z (6) Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AWD20 to 40
Nil Rc ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
N (1) NPT Note 4) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring for
the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
F (2) G Note 5) Without a valve function.
Note 1) Drain guide is for NPT 1/4 Note 6) For NPT thread type. This product is for overseas use only according to the
(applicable to AWD30 and AWD40), new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
and the exhaust port for auto-drain
comes with ø3/8" One-touch fitting Accessory (3)
(applicable to AWD30 and AWD40). Symbol Description Applicable model
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 (applicable to Nil — —
AWD30 and AWD40).
B With bracket AWD20 to 40
Port size C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) (4) AWD20 to 40
Port Body size D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) (4) AWD30/40
Symbol size E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AWD20 to 40
20 30 40
01 1/8  — — G With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AWD20 to 40

02 1/4    H With set nut (For panel mount) AWD20 to 40

Note 3) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of shipment (except
03 3/8 —   options C, D and E).
04 2/1 — —  Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto-drain connection should be ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is
chosen.

: Combination available : Combination not available

Accessory/Optional Specification Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
Applicable micro mist
Symbol

Combination Accessory Optional specifications separator regulator

Accessory/Optional specifications B C D E G H 1 2 6 8 C J N R W Z AWD20 AWD30 to 40

With bracket (With set nut) B
Float type auto-drain (N.C.) C
Accessory

Float type auto-drain (N.O.) D

Square embedded type pressure gauge E
Round pressure gauge G
Panel mount (With set nut) H
0.05 to 0.2 MPa setting -1
Metal bowl -2
Optional specifications

Nylon bowl -6
Metal bowl with level gauge -8
With bowl guard -C
Drain guide 1/4 -J
Non-relieving type -N
Flow direction: Right
Left -R
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing -W
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure
gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z

14-2-82
 Micro Mist Separator Regulator Series AWD20/30/40
Standard Specifications
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads
Model AWD20 AWD30 AWD40
are not required for the regulator
Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 with a square embedded type
Fluid Air pressure gauge (AWD20 to 40).
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Note 2) When the compressor oil mist
discharge concentration is 30 mg/m3
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa (ANR).
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.85 MPa Note 3) Bowl O-ring and other O-rings are
Pressure gauge port size (1) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 slightly lubricated.
Ambient and fluid temperature Note 4) When the outlet pressure is 0.5
–5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
MPa. (The rated flow varies
Nominal filtration rating 0.01µm (95% filtered particle size) depending on the set pressure.) F.R.L.
Outlet side Max. 0.1 mg/m3 (ANR) (2) (3) Keep the air flow within the rated
oil mist concentration (Before saturated with hydraulic fluid: 0.01 mg/m3 (ANR) or less, approx. 0.008 ppm ) flow to prevent an outflow of
(4) lubricant to the outlet side. AV
Rated flow (l/min (ANR)) 90 180 450
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard
AU
Option Standard
Drain capacity (cm3) 8 25 45
Construction Relieving type
AF
Weight (kg) 0.44 0.59 1.25
AR

Accessory part no. IR

Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set
Applicable model
AWD20 AWD30 AWD40 nuts. VEX
Accessory Note 2)  in part numbers for a round
Bracket assembly (1) pressure gauge indicates a type of
AW20P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AMR
connection thread. No indication is
Set nut AR20P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S necessary for R; however, indicate N
for NPT. Please contact SMC
(2) 1.0 MPa
Round
(3)
G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02
regarding the NPT connection thread ITV
Pressure Square embedded type GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS and pressure gauge supply for PSI
gauge Round G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 unit specifications. IC
0.2 MPa (3)
GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
Note 3) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting
Square embedded type screws.
Float type (4) N.O. — AD38 AD38N Note) AD48 AD48N Note) Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. VBA
auto-drain AD27 AD37 AD37N Note) AD47 AD47N Note) type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa
N.C.
(AD27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47). Set
Note) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto drain, applicable tubing O.D should be the pressure to allow a pressure drop VE

ø3/8". when the fluid flows. Please contact
SMC regarding the specifications for VY1
PSI unit and °F.

Precautions
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions.
Selection Mounting & Adjustment
Warning Warning
1. Residual pressure release (outlet 1. Set the regulator while checking the
pressure release) is not complete by displayed values of the inlet and outlet
releasing inlet pressure. Please contact pressure gauges. Turning the knob
SMC regarding the residual pressure excessively can cause damage to the
release. internal parts.
2. The pressure gauge included with micro
Air Supply mist separator regulator for 0.05 to 0.2
G
PPA
AL
• Pull the pressure regulator knob to unlock.
(You can visually verify this with the
“orange mark” that appears in the gap.)
• Push the pressure regulator knob to lock.
When the knob is not easily locked, turn it
left and right a little and then push it (when
the knob is locked, the “orange mark” will
disappear).

Caution MPa setting is for up to 0.2 MPa only.

Exceeding 0.2 MPa of pressure can
1. Install an air filter (Series AFM) as a damage the gauge.
preliminary filter on the inlet side of the Orange mark
3. Do not use tools on the pressure regulator
micro-mist separator to prevent
knob as this may cause damage. It must
premature clogging.
be operated manually.

Maintenance Caution
1. Be sure to unlock the knob before
Warning adjusting the pressure and lock it after
1. Replace the element every 2 years or setting the pressure.
when the pressure drop becomes 0.1 Failure to follow this procedure can
MPa, whichever comes first, to prevent cause damage to the knob and the 2. A knob cover is available to prevent
damage to the element. outlet pressure may fluctuate. careless operation of the knob. Refer to
page 14-2-6 details.

14-2-83
Series AWD20/30/40
Flow Characteristics (Representative value) Condition: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa

AWD20 Rc 1/4 AWD30 Rc 3/8 AWD40 Rc 1/2

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))

Pressure Characteristics (Representative value) Conditions: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa; Outlet pressure 0.2 MPa; Flow rate: 20 l/min (ANR)

AWD20 AWD30 AWD40

0.25 0.25 0.25

Outlet pressure (MPa)

Outlet pressure (MPa)
Outlet pressure (MPa)

Set point Set point Set point

0.20 0.20 0.20

0.15 0.15 0.15

0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)

Construction
AWD20 AWD30/40
JIS Symbol
w w
t t
q q
IN OUT IN OUT
e
y y
r e
u r
u

Component Parts Drain

Material
No. Description Note
AWD20 AWD30 AWD40
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver Drain
w Bonnet Polyacetal Black

Replacement Parts
Part no.
No. Description Material
AWD20 AWD30 AWD40
e Valve assembly Brass, HNBR AWM20P-090AS AWM30P-090AS AWM40P-090AS
r Element assembly — AFD20P-060AS AFD30P-060AS AFD40P-060AS
t Diaphragm assembly Weatherability NBR AR20P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS
y Bowl O-ring NBR C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S
u Bowl assembly (1) PC C2SF C3SF (2) C4SF (2)
Note 1) Including O-ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F unit
specifications.
Note 2) Bowl assembly for AWD30 and AWD40 comes with a bowl guard (steel band material).

14-2-84
 Micro Mist Separator Regulator Series AWD20/30/40
Dimensions
AWD20
H M
T D
N J U
Panel fitting dimension
Bracket
S (Option) Y
W
IN OUT
Z
C

P
V
Plate thickness
IN OUT F.R.L.

K
AWD20: Max. 3.5
B

AV
OUT

Pressure gauge Pressure gauge

port size (Option)

Square embedded type

pressure gauge (Option)
AU

O S
Port size AF
Drain Min. clearance E
AR

G
A for maintenance

IR
H M
AWD30/40 T D
N J
U Panel fitting dimension VEX
Bracket
Y
S (Option)
IN
W
OUT
AMR
Z
ITV
C

Plate thickness

P
V
IN OUT AWD30: Max. 3.5 IC
K

AWD40: Max. 5
B

Pressure gauge
(Option)
OUT
VBA
Pressure gauge
port size
Square embedded type
pressure gauge (Option) VE

Port size VY1
Drain Min. clearance E G
G

A for maintenance
PPA
Applicable model AFD20 AWD30, AWD40
With auto-drain With auto-drain Metal bowl with Drain cock with
AL
(N.C.) Metal bowl (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl level gauge With drain guide barb fitting

Optional
B

B
B

B
B

specifications N.O.: Black

B
B

O S N.C.: Gray O

M5 x 0.8 ø10
S
1/4
One-touch Width across Barb fitting
fitting flats 17 Applicable tubing: T0604

(mm)
Standard specifications Accessory specifications
With pressure gauge With
Model Port size Bracket mounting size Panel mount auto-drain
A B C D E G
H J K M N P Q S T U V W Y Z B
AWD20 1/8, 1/4 40 173 73 52 40 45 63 27 5 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 30 28.5 14 6 190
AWD30 1/4, 3/8 53 201 86 59 57 50 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7 242
AWD40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 239 92 75 73 70 76 38.5 1.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7 278

Optional specifications
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge
B B B B
AWD20 — — 173 —
AWD30 209 208 214 234
AWD40 247 246 252 272

14-2-85
14-2-86
Series 3730
Electropneumatic Positioner
Type 3730-5

with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus communication

Fig. 1 · Type 3730-5

Mounting and
Operating Instructions

EB 8384-5 EN
Firmware version K 1.25/ R 1.45
Edition August 2008
Definitions of the signal words used in these instructions

DANGER! NOTICE
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation NOTICE indicates a property damage
which, if not avoided, will result in death or message.
serious injury.

Note: Supplementary explanations,

WARNING! information and tips
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

2 EB 8384-5 EN
 Contents

Contents Page
1 Important safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2 Article code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3 Design and principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1 Additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories . . . 18
4.1 Direct attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.1.1 Type 3277-5 Actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.1.2 Type 3277 Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.2 Attachment according to IEC 60534-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.3 Attachment to Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.4 Attachment to rotary actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.5 Reversing amplifier for double-acting actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.5.1 Pressure gauge attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.6 Attaching an external position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.6.1 Mounting the position sensor with direct attachment. . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.6.2 Mounting the position sensor with attachment according to IEC 60534-6 34
4.6.3 Mounting the position sensor to Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve . . . . . . 35
4.6.4 Mounting the position sensor to rotary actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.7 Attaching positioners with stainless steel housings. . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.8 Air purging function for single-acting actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.9 Required mounting parts and accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.1 Pneumatic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.1.1 Signal pressure gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.1.2 Supply pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.1.3 Signal pressure (output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.2 Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.2.1 Establishing communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
6 Operator controls and readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7 Start-up – Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.1 Determining the fail-safe position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.2 Setting the volume restriction Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.3 Adapting the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.4 Limiting the signal pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

EB 8384-5 EN 3
 Contents

7.5 Checking the operating range of the positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

7.6 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.6.1 MAX – Initialization based on maximum range . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.6.2 NOM – Initialization based on nominal range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.6.3 MAN – Initialization based on a manually selected range . . . . . . . 57
7.6.4 SUb substitute calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.7 Zero calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.8 Reset to default values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.9 Start-up via local interface (SSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.1 Enabling and selecting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.2 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.2.1 Automatic and manual modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.2.2 SAFE – Fail-safe position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.3 Malfunction/maintenance alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.3.1 Confirming error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9 Status and diagnostic alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9.1 Standard EXPERT diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9.2 Extended EXPERT+ diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
10 Adjusting the limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
11 Retrofitting an inductive limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
12 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
13 Servicing explosion-protected devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
14 Fieldbus specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
14.1 Device description (DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
14.2 FOUNDATION™ fieldbus block model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
14.3 Resetting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
14.4 Status classification and condensed state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
15 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
15.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
15.1.1 System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
15.2 Installing TROVIS-VIEW software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
15.3 Starting TROVIS-VIEW and performing basic settings . . . . . . . . . 77
15.4 Data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
15.4.1 Offline operation (indirect data transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
15.4.2 Online operation (direct data transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
15.4.3 Setting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

4 EB 8384-5 EN
 Contents

15.5 Initializing the positioner and performing an operational test . . . . . . 83

15.6 Status classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
16 Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
16.1 Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
16.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
16.2.1 Resource Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
16.2.2 Analog Output Transducer Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
16.2.3 Discrete Input Transducer Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
16.2.4 Analog Output Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
16.2.5 Discrete Input Function Block DI1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
16.2.6 Discrete Input Function Block DI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
16.2.7 PID Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
16.3 Other parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
16.3.1 Stale Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
16.3.2 Link Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
16.3.3 LAS Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
16.4 Parameter lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
17 Dimensions in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
18 Valve characteristic selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Test certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

EB 8384-5 EN 5
 Modifications of positioner firmware
Modifications of positioner firmware in comparison to previous versions
Previous
Communication K 1.11
Leakage sensor at binary input 2
Diagnostic alarm
“Device not initialized“
Display of the working range
FINAL_VALUE_RANGE
Inactivated internal solenoid valve
SOLENOID_SELECT parameter
TOT_VALVE_TRAV_LIM parameter
Working range
FINAL_VALUE_RANGE
VALVE_TYPE parameter
FINAL_VALUE parameter
Display of O/S mode in
AO Transducer Block
6 EB 8384-5 EN
New
K 1.21
The connection of a leakage sensor at binary input 2 (by selecting
LEAKAGE SENSOR in CONFIG_BINARY_INPUT2 parameter of
the AO Transducer Block) causes:
4 Information specified in XD_ERROR_EXT parameter in the AO
Transducer Block and the generation of a diagnostic alarm
which is logged
4 The state of the binary input is reported in BINARY_INPUT2
parameter in the Transducer Block
The diagnostic alarm “Device not initialized” is generated when
the positioner is not initialized and the condensed status is set to
“Maintenance alarm”.
The correction of the working range FINAL_VALUE_RANGE over
on-site operation of the positioner (Code 8/9) is also transferred
over fieldbus in firmware version K 1.21 and higher.
A masking allows to be set whether an inactivated internal sole-
noid valve generates an AO block error and a resulting block
alarm.
The SOLENOID_SELECT parameter in firmware K 1.21 and
higher allows to be set whether a “Maintenance now“ block error
of the AO Transducer Block results in an output error in the AO
Block.
New range: 1000 … 990 000 000
K 1.22
The working range FINAL_VALUE_RANGE of the AO Transducer
Block is compared on entering it with TRANSM_PIN_POS.
If the TRANSM_PIN_POS parameter is changed, the positioner
checks whether the setting and unit match the current working
range FINAL_VALUE_RANGE. If this is not the case, the
FINAL_VALUE_RANGE parameter is set to 0 to 100 %.
The parameter of the AO Transducer Block is set depending on
the selected PIN_POS. The last setting is kept when VALVE_TYPE
is set to OFF.
The manipulated variable is scaled with FINAL_VALUE_ RANGE
in firmware K 1.22 and higher, and not with XD_SCALE.
If the AO Transducer Block is set to O/S mode, this is indicated in
the positioner display by MAN/AUTO.
 Modifications of positioner firmware

Modifications of positioner firmware in comparison to previous versions

Previous New
K 1.23
Internal modifications
K 1.24
BUS_ADDRESS parameter The bus address has the default setting of 248.
Device type In the delivery state, the device is configured as a basic device.
K 1.25
Internal modifications

Control R 1.43 R 1.44

Internal modifications
R 1.45
Internal modifications

EB 8384-5 EN 7
8 EB 8384-5 EN
 Important safety instructions

1 Important safety instructions

For your own safety, follow these instructions concerning the mounting, start-up and opera-
tion of the positioner:
4 The positioner may only be mounted, started up or operated by trained and
experienced personnel familiar with the product.
According to these Mounting and Operating Instructions, trained personnel refers to
individuals who are able to judge the work they are assigned to and recognize
possible dangers due to their specialized training, their knowledge and experience as
well as their knowledge of the relevant standards.
4 Explosion-protected versions of this positioner may only be operated by personnel
who have undergone special training or instructions or who are authorized to work
on explosion-protected devices in hazardous areas. Refer to section 13.
4 Any hazards that could be caused by the process medium, the operating pressure,
the signal pressure or by moving parts of the control valve are to be prevented by
means of the appropriate measures.
4 If inadmissible motions or forces are produced in the actuator as a result of the supply
pressure, the supply pressure must be restricted by means of a suitable supply
pressure reducing station.

To avoid damage to any equipment, the following also applies:

4 Do not operate the positioner with the back of the positioner/vent opening facing
upwards.
The vent opening must not be sealed when the positioner is installed on site.

Vent opening

4 Proper shipping and appropriate storage are assumed.

Note: The device with a CE marking fulfills the requirements of the Directives 94/9/EC
(ATEX) and 89/336/EEC (EMC).
The Declaration of Conformity is available on request.

EB 8384-5 EN 9
 Article code

2 Article code
Positioner Type 3730-5 x x x 0 x 0 x x 0 x 0 0 x 0 x x
With LCD and autotune, FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

Explosion protection
Without 0
II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 and II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C (ATEX) 1
CSA/FM intrinsically safe / non incendive 3
II 3 G EEx nA II T6, II 3 G EEx nL IIC T6 and 8
II 3 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX
Additional equipment
Inductive Without 0
limit switch 1 x Type SJ2-SN 1
Solenoid valve Without 0
With, 24 V DC 4
External position sensor Without 0
With 0 1 0 0
Binary input Without 0
Floating contact 0 1
Diagnostics
EXPERT (standard) 1
EXPERT+ (extended diagnositics) 2
Housing material
Aluminum (standard) 0
Stainless steel 1.4581 0 1
Special applications
None 0
Positioner compatible with paint 1
Vent connection with ¼-18 NPT thread 0 0 0 0 2
Special version
None 0 0 0
NEPSI Ex ia 1 0 0 9
NEPSI Ex nL/nA 8 0 1 0
IECEx 1 0 1 2

10 EB 8384-5 EN
 Design and principle of operation

3 Design and principle of When a deviation occurs, the actuator is

operation
The electropneumatic positioner is attached
to pneumatic control valves. It is used to as-
sign the valve stem position (controlled vari-
able x) to the control signal (reference vari-
able w). The input signal received from a
control system is compared to the travel or
rotational angle of the control valve, and a
pneumatic signal pressure (output variable
y) is produced.
The positioner consists of a travel sensor sys-
tem proportional to resistance, an analog
i/p converter with a downstream booster
and the electronics unit with microcontroller.
pressurized or vented. If required, the
changes in the signal pressure can be
slowed down by a connectable Q restric-
tion. The signal pressure supplied to the ac-
tuator can be limited by software or on site
to 1.4, 2.4 or 3.7 bar.
A constant air stream to the atmosphere is
created by the flow regulator (9) with a
fixed set point. The air stream is used to
purge the inside of the case as well as to op-
timize the air capacity booster. The i/p
module (6) is supplied with a constant up-
stream pressure by the pressure regulator
(8) to make it independent of the supply air
pressure.

1 Control valve
2 Travel sensor
20 Serial
16 3 PD controller
Interface
13 4 A/D converter
mm
% 5 Microcontroller
FOUNDATION S 15 BE2
fieldbus
6 i/p converter
IEC 61158-2
4 5 7 Air capacity booster
19
14 BE1
8 Pressure regulator
9 Flow regulator
10 Volume restriction
24V DC w
PD 11* Inductive limit switch
x 2 11 12* Solenoid valve
17 18 3
13 IEC 61158-2
G G
interface module
12 14 Binary input, passive
15* Binary input, active
6
9 16 Display
17* Solenoid valve control
18* Galvanic isolation
8 1 19 D/A converter
y
Q 10 x
20 Communication interface
7
* Optional

Fig. 2 · Functional diagram

EB 8384-5 EN 11
 Design and principle of operation
The positioner communicates and is pow-
ered using IEC 61158-2 transmission tech-
nology conforming to FOUNDATION™
fieldbus specification.
As a standard feature, the positioner comes
with a binary input for DC voltage signals to
signalize process information over the
FOUNDATION™ fieldbus.
3.1 Additional equipment
Version with solenoid valve
If the operating voltage for the solenoid
valve (12) fails, the supply pressure for the
i/p module is vented to the atmosphere. The
positioner can no longer operate and the
control valve moves to the fail-safe position
determined by the actuator, independent of
the reference variable.
NOTICE
In manual mode (MAN), the manual set
point is also reset to 0 %. A different manual
set point must be entered again (Code 1).
Version with inductive limit switch
The rotary shaft of the positioner carries an
adjustable tag which actuates the installed
proximity switch.
Version with binary contact
All positioners are fitted with a binary input
for DC voltage signals over which process
information can be issued over the
FOUNDATION™ fieldbus network.
Another optional binary input is an active
input powered by the positioner to connect
a floating contact. Its switching condition
12 EB 8384-5 EN
can also be issued over the FOUNDATION™
fieldbus network.
Version with external position sensor
In this version, only the sensor is mounted to
the control valve. The positioner is located
separately from the valve.
The connection of x and y signals to the
valve is established by cable and piping for
air (only without inductive limit switch).
+
EXPERT extended valve diagnostics
See Table 5 on page 40 for order numbers.
EXPERT+ upgrades the standard EXPERT di-
agnostics firmware incorporated in the
positioner. The upgraded version provides
extended functions to pinpoint valve param-
eters that have worsened, allowing the user
to plan predictive maintenance and service
work before malfunctions can affect the pro-
cess and may cause unscheduled plant shut-
downs.
The extended EXPERT+ diagnostics can be
activated later at the positioner when
EXPERT+ is not already activated on delivery
of the positioner. The required activation
code or an EXPERT+ USB dongle can be
purchased to activate EXPERT+.
3.2 Communication
The positioner is completely controlled over
the digital signal transmission implemented
according to FOUNDATION™ fieldbus spec-
ification.
Data are transmitted as bit-synchronous
current modulation at a rate of 31.25 kbit/s
 Design and principle of operation

over twisted-pair cables conforming to

IEC 61158-2.

Note: In the case, complex functions are

started in the positioner, which require a
long calculation time or lead to a large
quantity of data being stored in the volatile
memory of the positioner, the alert “busy” is
issued over DD.
This alert is not a fault alarm and can sim-
ply be confirmed.

Configuration using TROVIS-VIEW software

The positioner can be configured using
TROVIS-VIEW Configuration and Operator
Interface software.
The positioner is equipped with an addi-
tional digital SERIAL INTERFACE to connect
the RS-232 or USB port of the computer to
the positioner over an adapter cable.
The TROVIS-VIEW software enables the user
to easily set parameters in the positioner
and view process parameters online.
Configuration using the NI-FBUS™
Configurator
The NI-FBUS™ Configurator from National
Instruments can also be used to configure
the positioner. For this purpose, an interface
card must be installed in a computer to con-
nect it to the FOUNDATION™ fieldbus.
The integrated function blocks are linked
using the NI-FBUS™ Configurator.

EB 8384-5 EN 13
 Design and principle of operation

3.3 Technical data

TM
Type 3730-5 Positioner with FOUNDATION fieldbus communication
Direct attachment to Type 3277: 3.6 to 30 mm
Rated travel,
Attachment acc. to IEC 60534-6: 3.6 to 200 mm
adjustable
Attachment to rotary actuators (VDI/VDE 3845): 24° to 100°
Travel range, Adjustable within the initialized travel/angle of rotation;
adjustable travel can be restricted to 15 at the maximum
Fieldbus interface acc. to IEC 61158-2 bus-powered
Bus connection Physical Layer Class: 113 (without explosion protection) und 111 (with ex. protection)
Field device acc. to FM 3610 Entity, FISCO and FNICO
Communication
Data transmission as per FOUNDATION™ fieldbus specification,
Fieldbus Communication Profile Class: 31 PS, 32 L;
Interoperability tested according to Interoperability Test System (ITK) Revision 4.6
Local Over SAMSON SSP interface and serial interface adapter
Software requirements
SAMSON TROVIS-VIEW with database module 3730-5
(SSP)
Permissible operating 9 to 32 V DC, power supply over bus line · The limits specified in the EC Type
voltage Examination Certificate additionally apply for explosion-protected devices
Max. operating current 15 mA
Add. current in case of fault 0 mA
Supply pressure from 1.4 to 7 bar (20 to 105 psi),
Air quality acc. to ISO 8573-1 Edition 2001: Max. particle size and density: Class 4
Supply air
Oil content: Class 3; Moisture and water: Class 3; Pressure dew point: At least 10 K
beneath the lowest ambient temperature to be expected
0 bar up to supply pressure,
Signal pressure (output)
limitable to 1.4/2.4/3.7 bar ±0.2 bar via software
Linear/equal percentage/reverse equal percentage · User-defined (over operating
software and communication) · Butterfly valve linear/equal percentage · Rotary plug
Characteristic
valve linear/equal percentage · Segmented ball valve linear/equal percentage
Deviation from terminal-based conformity ≤ 1 %
Hysteresis ≤ 0.3 %
Sensitivity ≤ 0.1 %
Direction of action Reversible
Air consumption Independent from supply pressure approx. 110 ln/h
Air output capacity
At Δp = 6 bar: 8.5 mn /h, at Δp = 1.4 bar: 3.0 mn /h KVmax (20 °C) = 0.09
3 3
Actuator pressurized
Actuator vented at Δp = 6 bar: 14.0 mn3/h, at Δp = 1.4 bar: 4.5 mn3/h KVmax (20 °C) = 0.15

14 EB 8384-5 EN
 Design and principle of operation

TM
Type 3730-5 Positioner with FOUNDATION fieldbus communication
–45 to +80 °C
Permissible ambient
The limits specified in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply for
temperature
explosion-protected devices
Temperature: ≤ 0.15 %/10 K
Influences Supply air: None
Vibration: ≤ 0.25 % up to 2000 Hz and 4 g acc. to IEC 770
Electromagn. compatibility Complying with EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21
Explosion protection II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 / II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C
II 3 G EEx nA/nL II T6 / II 3 D IP 65 T 80 °C
FM approval: Intrinsically safe; Class I, II, III, Div. 1, Groups A-G; Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T6;
Non incendive; Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, III, Div. 2, Groups F, G;
NEMA Type 4X, Type 3730-53
CSA approval: Ex ia IIC T6; Class I, Zone 0; Class II, Div. I, Groups E, F, G; Type 4 Enclosure
Ex nA IIC T6; Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Type 4
Enclosure; Type 3730-53
IECEx: Ex ia IIC T6
One M20 x 1.5 cable gland, for 6 to 12 mm clamping range · Second additional
Electrical connection
threaded M20 x 1.5 hole · Screw terminals for 0.2 to 2.5 mm² wire cross-section
Degree of protection IP 66 / NEMA 4X
Probability of failure on demand of safety functions PFD < 2.8 x 10–7 for a confidence
Implementation in level of 95 %.
safety-related systems in The safe failure fraction (SFF) according to Table A1 in IEC 61508-2 is greater or
compliance with equal to 0.99.
IEC 61508/SIL The valves are therefore suitable for implementation in safety-related systems with a
hardware fault tolerance of 1 or 2 up to and including SIL 4.
Binary contact 1
0 to 30 V DC reverse polarity protection, static destruction limit 40 V / 5.8 mA,
Input
current consumption 3.5 mA at 24 V, galvanically isolated
Signal Signal “1” at Ue > 5 V Signal “0” at Ue < 3 V
Materials
Die-cast aluminum EN AC-AlSi12(Fe) (EN AC-44300) acc. to DIN EN 1706;
Housing
chromated and powder paint coated · Special version: stainless steel 1.4581
External parts Stainless steel 1.4571 and 1.4301
Cable gland Nickel-plated brass, M20x1.5
Weight Approx. 1 kg

EB 8384-5 EN 15
Design and principle of operation

Options for Type 3730-5

Binary contact 2 for floating contact

R < 100 Ω, contact loadability 100 mA, static destruction limit 20 V / 5.8 mA,
Switching input
galvanically isolated
Solenoid valve Approval acc. to IEC 61508/SIL
24 V DC, reverse polarity protection, static destruction limit 40 V

Input U − 5.7 V
Current consumption I = (corresponding to 4.8 mA at 24 V/114 mW)
3840 Ω

Signal "0" no pick-up ≤ 15 V

Signal "1" safe pick-up >19 V
6
Service life >5 x 10 switching cycles
KV coefficient 0.15
Implementation in
safety-related systems in
Same as positioner pneumatics
compliance with
IEC 61508/SIL
Inductive limit switch
Type SJ 2SN Proximity
For connection to switching amplifier acc. to EN 60947-5-6
Switch
External position sensor
Travel Same as positioner
10 m with M12x1 connector, designed for continuous flexing, flame retardant acc. to
Cable
VDE 0472, resistant to oils, lubricants, coolants as well as other corrosive media
Perm. ambient temperature –60 to +105 °C
Vibration immunity Up to 10 g in the range between 10 and 2000 Hz
Degree of protection IP 67

16 EB 8384-5 EN
Design and principle of operation

EB 8384-5 EN 17
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

4 Attachment to the control Lever and pin position

valve – Mounting parts and The positioner is adapted to the actuator
accessories and to the rated travel by the lever on the
back of the positioner and the pin inserted
WARNING! into the lever.
Attach the positioner, keeping the following The travel tables on page 19 show the maxi-
sequence: mum adjustment range at the positioner. The
1. Mount the positioner on the control valve travel that can be implemented at the valve
2. Connect the supply air is additionally restricted by the selected
3. Connect the electrical power fail-safe position and the required compres-
4. Perform the start-up settings sion of the actuator springs.
The positioner is standard equipped with the
The positioner is suitable for the following lever M (pin position 35).
types of attachment:
4 Direct attachment to SAMSON
Type 3277 Actuator
4 Attachment to actuators according to
IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR)
4 Attachment to Type 3510 Micro-flow
Valve
4 Attachment to rotary actuators
NOTICE
Attach the positioner to the control valve,
Fig. 3 · Lever M with pin position 35
observing the following instructions to avoid
damaging the positioner.
– Use only the mounting parts/accessories
listed in the Tables 1 to 5 (pages 38 to
Note: If the standard mounted lever M (pin
40) to mount the positioner. Observe the
position 35) is replaced, the newly mounted
type of attachment!
lever must be moved once all the way as far
– Observe the assignment between lever
as it will go in both directions to adapt it to
and pin position (see travel tables on
the internal measuring lever.
page 19)!

18 EB 8384-5 EN
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

Travel tables

Note: The lever M is included in the scope of delivery.

Levers S, L, XL for attachment according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR) are available as acces-
sories (see Table 3 on page 39).

Direct attachment to Type 3277-5 and Type 3277 Actuators

Actuator size Rated travel Adjustment range at positioner Required Assigned
[cm²] [mm] Min. Travel Max. lever pin position

120 7.5 5.0 to 25.0 M 25

120/240/350 15 7.0 to 35.0 M 35
700 30 10.0 to 50.0 M 50

Attachment according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR)

SAMSON valves/Type 3271 Actuator Other valves/actuators
Required Assigned
Actuator size Rated travel
lever pin position
[cm²] [mm] min. Travel max.
60 and 120 with
7.5 3.6 to 18.0 S 17
Type 3510 Valve
120 7.5 5.0 to 25.0 M 25
120/240/350 15
7.0 to 35.0 M 35
700 7.5
700 15 and 30 10.0 to 50.0 M 50
1400/2800 30 14.0 to 70.0 L 70
1400/2800 60 20.0 to 100.0 L 100
1400/2800 120 40.0 to 200.0 XL 200

Attachment to rotary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845

Rotary actuators Required Assigned
Min. Opening angle Max. lever pin position

24 to 100° M 90°

EB 8384-5 EN 19
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

4.1 Direct attachment ing towards the signal pressure connec-

tion. Make sure that the bonded gasket
4.1.1 Type 3277-5 Actuator (14) points towards the actuator yoke.
5. 15 mm travel: Keep the follower pin (2)
Refer to Table 1 on page 38 for the required at lever M (1) on the back of the
mounting parts as well as the accessories positioner in the pin position 35 (deliv-
with their order numbers.
ered state).
Note the travel table on page 19!
7.5 mm travel: Remove the follower pin
Actuator with 120 cm² (2) from the pin position 35, reposition it
Depending on the type of positioner attach- in the bore for pin position 25 and
ment, the signal pressure is routed either left screw tight.
or right of the yoke through a bore to the 6. Insert formed seal (15) in the groove of
actuator diaphragm. Depending on the the positioner casing.
fail-safe action of the actuator "Actuator 7. Place positioner on the cover plate (10)
stem extends" or "Actuator stem retracts" in such a manner that the follower pin
(valve closes or opens if the supply air fails), (2) rests on the top of the follower clamp
the switchover plate (9) must first be at-
(3). Adjust the lever (1) correspondingly
tached to the actuator yoke. Align the
and open the positioner cover to hold
switchover plate with the corresponding
symbol for left or right attachment according the positioner shaft in position at the cap
to the marking (view looking onto the or the switch (Fig. 18).
switchover plate). The lever (1) must rest on the follower
clamp with spring force.
1. Mount connecting plate (6) or pressure
Mount the positioner on the cover plate
gauge bracket (7) with pressure gauges
(10) using the two fixing screws. During
onto the positioner, making sure both
the installation make sure that the seal
seal rings (6.1) are seated properly.
ring (10.1) is inserted in the bore of the
2. Remove vent plug (4) on the back of the
cover plate.
positioner and close the signal pressure
8. Mount cover (11) on the other side.
output "Output 38" on the connecting
Make sure that the vent plug points
plate (6) or on the pressure gauge
downwards when the control valve is in-
bracket (7) with the stopper (5) included
stalled to allow any condensed water
in the accessories.
that collects to drain off.
3. Place follower clamp (3) on the actuator
stem, align and screw tight so that the
mounting screw is located in the groove
of the actuator stem.
4. Mount cover plate (10) with narrow side
of the cut-out opening (Fig. 4, left) point-

20 EB 8384-5 EN
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

Symbols Switchover plate (9) 1 Lever

1.1 Nut
Actuator stem 1.2 Disk spring
extends 2 Follower pin
3 Follower clamp
Attachment left Attachment right 4 Vent plug
5 Stopper
Actuator stem 6 Connecting plate
retracts 6.1 Seal rings
7 Pressure gauge bracket
8 Press. gauge mounting kit
Signal pressure
9 Switchover plate
input for left Signal pressure for actuator
attachment Marking input for right 10 Cover plate
attachment
10.1Seal ring
11 Cover
15
14 Gasket
14 15 Formed seal

Lever M
1

1.1
1.2
Cut-out of cover
plate

10.1
9 11
6.1 10
6
6 Note:
5 Always use the connecting plate (6)
Supply 9 Output 38 included in the accessories to connect
supply and output.
7 Never screw threaded parts directly
into the housing.
8

Fig. 4 · Direct attachment - Signal pressure connection for Type 3277-5 Actuator with 120 cm²

EB 8384-5 EN 21
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories
4.1.2 Type 3277 Actuator
Refer to Table 2 on page 39 or the required
mounting parts as well as the accessories
with their order numbers.
Note the travel table on page 19!
Actuators with 240 to 700 cm²
The positioner can be mounted either on the
left or on the right side of the yoke. The sig-
nal pressure is routed to the actuator over
the connection block (12), for actuators with
fail-safe action "Actuator stem extends" in-
ternally through a bore in the valve yoke
and for "Actuator stem retracts" through ex-
ternal piping.
1. Place follower clamp (3) on the actuator
stem, align and screw tight so that the
mounting screw is located in the groove
of the actuator stem.
2. Mount cover plate (10) with narrow side
of the cut-out opening (Fig. 5, on the
left) pointing towards the signal pressure
connection. Make sure that the bonded
gasket (14) points towards the actuator
yoke.
3. For actuators with 700 cm², remove the
follower pin (2) at lever M (1) on the
back of the positioner from pin position
35, reposition it in the bore for pin posi-
tion 50 and screw tight.
For actuators 240 and 350 cm² with
15 mm travel, the follower pin (2) re-
mains in pin position 35.
4. Insert formed seal (15) in the groove of
the positioner casing.
5. Place positioner on the cover plate in
such a manner that the follower pin (2)
22 EB 8384-5 EN
rests on the top of the follower clamp
(3). Adjust the lever (1) correspondingly
and open the positioner cover to hold
the positioner shaft in position at the cap
or the switch (Fig. 18). The lever (1) must
rest on the follower clamp with spring
force. Mount the positioner on the cover
plate (10) using the two fixing screws.
6. Make sure that the tip of the gasket (16)
projecting from the side of the connec-
tion block (12) is positioned above the
actuator symbol that corresponds with
the actuator with fail-safe action "Actua-
tor stem extends" or "Actuator stem re-
tracts." If necessary, remove the three
fixing screws and the cover. Then repo-
sition the gasket (16) turned by 180°.
The previous version of the connection
block (Fig. 5, bottom) requires the switch
plate (13) to be turned such that the cor-
responding actuator symbol points to the
marking.
7. Place the connection block (12) with the
associated seal rings against the
positioner and the actuator yoke. Screw
it tight using the fixing screw (12.1). For
actuators with fail-safe action "Actuator
stem retracts", additionally remove the
stopper (12.2) and fit on the external
signal pressure piping.
8. Mount cover (11) on the other side.
Make sure that the vent plug points
downwards when the control valve is in-
stalled to allow any condensed water
that collects to drain off.
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

1 Lever 12.1 Screw

1.1 Nut 12.2 Stopper or connection for
1.2 Disk spring external piping
2 Follower pin 13 Switch plate
15 10 14
3 Follower clamp 14 Gasket
10 Cover plate 15 Formed seal
11 Cover 16 Gasket 1 2 3 11
12 Connection block

Lever M
1.1
1.2

Cut-out of
cover plate (10)

A
16

SUPPLY
Actuator stem 16 12 12.1 12.2
retracts extends

Connection block (old)

with switch plate (13)
13
12
SUPPLY Stem retracts B

Stem extends
Marking 12

12.1 12.2

Fig. 5 · Direct attachment – Signal pressure connection for Type 3277 Actuator with 240, 350 and 700 cm²

EB 8384-5 EN 23
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories
4.2 Attachment according to
IEC 60534-6
Refer to Table 3 on page 39 for the required
mounting parts as well as the accessories
with their order numbers.
Note the travel table on page 19!
The positioner is attached to the control
valve with a NAMUR bracket (10).
1. Screw the two bolts (14) to the bracket
(9.1) of the stem connector (9), place the
follower plate (3) on top and use the
screws (14.1) to tighten.
Actuator size 2800 cm²:
For a travel of 60 mm or smaller, screw the
longer follower plate (3.1) directly to the
stem connector (9). For a travel exceeding
60 mm, mount the bracket (16) first and
then the follower plate (3) to the bracket to-
gether with the bolts (14) and screws (14.1).
2. Mount NAMUR bracket (10) to the con-
trol valve as follows:
For attachment to the NAMUR rib, use
an M8 screw (11), washer, and toothed
lock washer directly in the yoke bore.
For attachment to valves with rod-type
yokes, use two U-bolts (15) around the
yoke.
Align the NAMUR bracket (10) in such a
way that the slot of the follower plate (3)
is centrally aligned with the NAMUR
bracket at mid valve travel.
3. Mount connecting plate (6) or pressure
gauge bracket (7) with pressure gauges
(8) on the positioner, making sure both
seal rings (6.1) are seated properly.
24 EB 8384-5 EN
4. Select required lever size (1) M, L or XL
and pin position according to the actua-
tor size and valve travels listed in the ta-
ble on page 19.
Should you require a pin position other
than position 35 with the standard in-
stalled lever M, or require a lever size L
or XL, proceed as follows:
5. Screw the follower pin (2) in the as-
signed lever bore (pin position) as listed
in the table. Only use the longer follower
pin (2) included in the mounting kit.
6. Place lever (1) on the positioner shaft
and screw tight using the disk spring
(1.2) and nut (1.1).
Note: If you have mounted a new lever (1),
you must move it once all the way as far as
it will go in both directions.
7. Place positioner on the NAMUR bracket
in such a manner that the follower pin
(2) rests in the slot of the follower plate
(3, 3.1). Adjust the lever (1) correspond-
ingly.
Screw the positioner to the NAMUR
bracket using both its fixing screws.
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

Attachment to rod-type yoke

Rod diameter 20 to 35 mm

15
11

10
Attachment to
9 NAMUR rib
9.1

3.1

16
Additional bracket for
actuators with 2800 cm2
and travel ≥ 60 mm
14

1 3
1 Lever Lever XL and L
1.1 Nut
1 14.1
1.2 Disk spring
2 Follower pin
3 Follower plate
3.1 Follower plate 2
6 Connecting plate 1.1
6.1 6 7 8
6.1 Seal rings 1.2
7 Pressure gauge bracket 1
8 Pressure gauge
mounting kit
9 Stem connector
9.1 Bracket
10 NAMUR bracket
11 Screw
14 Bolt
14.1 Screw
15 U-bolt
16 Bracket
Note: Always use the connecting plate (6) included in the accessories to
connect supply and output. Never screw threaded parts directly into the housing.
Fig. 6 · Attachment according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR)

EB 8384-5 EN 25
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

4.3 Attachment to Type 3510

Micro-flow Valve
Refer to Table 3 on page 39 for the required
mounting parts as well as the accessories
with their order numbers.
Note the travel table on page 19!
The positioner is attached to the valve yoke
using a bracket.
1. Place clamp (3) on the valve stem con-
nector, align at a right angle and screw
tight.
2. Screw bracket (10) to the valve yoke us-
ing two screws (11).
3. Mount connecting plate (6) or pressure
gauge bracket (7) with pressure gauges
to the positioner, making sure both seal
rings (6.1) are seated properly.
4. Unscrew the standard installed lever M
(1) including follower pin (2) from the
positioner shaft.
5. Take lever S (1) and screw follower pin
(2) in the bore for pin position 17.
6. Place lever S on the positioner shaft and
screw tight using the disk spring (1.2)
and nut (1.1).
Move lever once all the way as far as it
will go in both directions.
7. Place positioner on the bracket (10) in
such a manner that the follower pin
slides into the groove of the clamp (3).
Adjust the lever (1) correspondingly.
Screw the positioner to the bracket (10)
using both its screws.

26 EB 8384-5 EN
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

1 Lever
1.1 Nut
1.2 Disk spring
2 Follower pin
3 Clamp
6 Connecting clamp
6.1 Seal rings
7 Pressure gauge bracket
8 Pressure gauge
mounting kit
10 Bracket
11 Screw 3

10

Note: Always use the connecting plate 11

(6) included in the accessories to connect
supply and output.
Never screw threaded parts directly into
the housing.
11

1.2 1.1 2 1

6 6.1

Lever S

8 7

Fig. 7 · Attachment to Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve

EB 8384-5 EN 27
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories
4.4 Attachment to rotary
actuators
Refer to Table 4 on page 40 for the required
mounting parts as well as the accessories
with their order numbers.
The positioner is mounted to the rotary actu-
ator using two pairs of double brackets.
Prior to attaching the positioner to the
SAMSON Type 3278 Rotary Actuator,
mount the associated adapter (5) to the free
end of the rotary actuator shaft.
Note: On attaching the positioner as de-
scribed below, it is imperative that the actu-
ator's direction of rotation is observed.
1. Place follower clamp (3) on the slotted
actuator shaft or the adapter (5).
2. Place coupling wheel (4) with flat side
facing the actuator on the follower
clamp (3). Refer to Fig. 9 to align slot so
that it matches the direction of rotation
when the valve is in its closed position.
3. Screw coupling wheel and follower
clamp tightly onto the actuator shaft us-
ing screw (4.1) and disk spring (4.2).
4. Screw the bottom pair of brackets (10.1)
with the bends pointing either to the in-
side or to the outside (depending on the
actuator size) to the actuator case. Posi-
tion top pair of brackets (10) and screw
tight.
5. Mount connecting plate (6) or pressure
gauge bracket (7) with pressure gauges
to the positioner, making sure both
O-rings are seated properly.
28 EB 8384-5 EN
For double-acting, springless rotary ac-
tuators, a reversing amplifier is required
to attach the positioner to the actuator,
see section 4.5.
6. Unscrew the standard follower pin (2)
from the positioner's lever M (1). Use the
metal follower pin (Ø5) included in the
mounting kit and screw tight into the
bore for pin position 90°.
7. Place positioner on the top pair of
brackets (10) and screw tight. Con-
sidering the actuator's direction of rota-
tion, adjust lever (1) so that it engages in
the slot of the coupling wheel (4) with its
follower pin (see Fig. 9). It must be guar-
anteed that the lever (1) is parallel to the
long side of the positioner when the ac-
tuator is at half its angle of rotation.
8. Stick scale plate (4.3) on the coupling
wheel so that the arrow tip indicates the
closed position, and it can be easily
read when the valve is installed.
1.2
1
1.1
4.1
2 4.2
3 5
Mounting flange
Fig. 8 · Mounting the coupling wheel with Type 3278
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

6.1
6
(7, 8)
10 1
1.2
1.1
2
10.1 4.3
4
5

Note:
Always use the connecting
plate (6) included in the
accessories to connect
supply and output. Control valve opens clockwise
Never screw threaded
parts directly into the Slot
housing.

Legends Figs. 8 + 9
1 Lever
1.1 Nut
1.2 Disk spring
2 Follower pin
3 Follower clamp (Fig. 8)
4 Coupling wheel Control valve opens counterclockwise
4.1 Screw
4.2 Disk spring
4.3 Scale plate
4.3 Scale plate
5 Actuator shaft
Adapter for Type 3278
6.1 Seal rings
7 Pressure gauge bracket
8 Pressure gauge
mounting kit
10 Top pair of brackets
10.1 Bottom pair of brackets Slot

Fig. 9 · Attachment to rotary actuators

EB 8384-5 EN 29
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

4.5 Reversing amplifier for NOTICE

double-acting actuators Do not unscrew the sealing plug (1.5) out of
the reversing amplifier.
For the use with double-acting actuators, the The rubber seal (1.4) is not required and
positioner must be fitted with a reversing can be removed when the sealing plug is
amplifier. The reversing amplifier is listed as used.
an accessory in the Table 5 on page 40.
The output signal pressure of the positioner
is supplied at the output A1 of the reversing Signal pressure connections
amplifier. An opposing pressure, which A1: Output A1 leading to the signal pressure
equals the required supply pressure when connection at the actuator which opens the
added to the pressure at A1, is applied at valve when the pressure increases
output A2.
The rule A1 + A2 = Z applies. A2: Output A2 leading to the signal pressure
connection at the actuator which closes the
Mounting valve when the pressure increases
1. Mount the connecting plate (6) from the
accessories in Table 5 to the positioner.
Make sure that both O-rings (6.1) are
4 Set slide switch on positioner to
AIR TO OPEN.
seated correctly.
2. Thread the special nuts (1.3) from the
6. After the initialization is completed, set
accessories of the reversing amplifier
Code 16 (Pressure limit) to OFF.
into the boreholes of the connecting
plate.
4.5.1 Pressure gauge attachment
3. Insert the gasket (1.2) into the recess of
the reversing amplifier and push both The mounting sequence shown in Fig. 10 re-
the hollowed special screws (1.1) into mains unchanged. Screw a pressure gauge
the connecting boreholes A1 and Z. bracket onto the connections A1 and Z.
4. Place the reversing amplifier onto the Pressure gauge G¼ 1400-7106
connecting plate (6) and screw tight us- bracket: ¼ NPT 1400-7107
ing both the special screws (1.1).
Pressure gauges for supply air Z and output
5. Use a screwdriver (8 mm wide) to screw
A1 as listed in Tables 1 to 4.
the enclosed filters (1.6) into the con-
necting boreholes A1 and Z.

30 EB 8384-5 EN
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

From the positioner

Output 38 Supply 9

A1 Z

A2

Control signals to 1.3 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.6

A1 the actuator A2
1 Reversing amplifier 6 Connecting plate
1.1 Special screws 6.1 O-rings
1.2 Gasket 6.2 Screws
1.3 Special nuts
1.4 Rubber seal
6.1 6 6.2 1.5 Sealing plug
1.6 Filter
Supply 9

Z
Output 38

A1

1.3 1.2 1.1 1 1.6

Fig. 10 · Mounting a reversing amplifier

EB 8384-5 EN 31
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories
4.6 Attaching an external
position sensor
Refer to Table 6 on p. 41 for the mounting
parts as well as the accessories required.
In the positioner version with an external
position sensor, the sensor placed in a sepa-
rate housing is attached over a plate or
bracket to the control valve. The travel
pick-off corresponds to that of a standard
device.
The positioner unit can be mounted as re-
quired to a wall or a pipe.
For the pneumatic connection either a con-
necting plate (6) or a pressure gauge
bracket (7) must be fixed to the housing, de-
pending on the accessory chosen. Make
sure the seal rings (6.1) are correctly in-
serted (see Fig. 6, bottom right).
For the electrical connection a 10 meter
connecting lead with M12x1 connectors is
included in the scope of delivery.
Note: In addition, the instructions in sections
5.1 and 5.2 apply for the pneumatic and
electrical connection.
Operation and setting are described in sec-
tions 6 and 7.
Fig. 11 · Positioner unit with sensor mounted on a
micro-flow valve
32 EB 8384-5 EN
4.6.1 Mounting the position
sensor with direct
attachment
Type 3277-5 Actuator with 120 cm²
The signal pressure from the positioner is
routed over the signal pressure connection
of the connecting plate (9, Fig. 12 left) to the
actuator diaphragm chamber. To proceed,
first screw the connecting plate (9) included
in the accessories onto the actuator yoke.
4 Turn the connecting plate (9) so that the
correct symbol for the fail-safe position
"Actuator stem extends" or "Actuator
stem retracts" is aligned with the mark-
ing (Fig. 12, below).
4 Make sure that the gasket for the con-
necting plate (9) is correctly inserted.
4 The connecting plate has boreholes with
NPT and G threads.
Seal the threaded connection that is not
used with the rubber seal and square
plug.
Type 3277 Actuator with 240 to 700 cm²:
The signal pressure is routed to the connec-
tion at the side of the actuator yoke for the
version "Actuator stem extends".
For the fail-safe position "Actuator stem re-
tracts" the connection on the top diaphragm
case is used. The connection at the side of
the yoke must be fitted with a venting plug
(accessories).
Mounting the position sensor
1. Place the lever (1) on the sensor in
mid-position and hold it in place.
Unthread the nut (1.1) and remove the
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

lever together with the disk spring (1.2)
from the sensor shaft.
2. Screw the position sensor (20) onto the
mounting plate (21).
3. Depending on the actuator size and
rated valve travel, determine the re-
quired lever and position of the follower
pin (2) from the travel table on page 19.
The positioner is delivered with lever M
in pin position 35 on the sensor. If nec-
essary, remove the follower pin (2) from
its pin position and move it to the bore-
hole for the recommended pin position
and screw tight.
4. Place the lever (1) and disk spring (1.2)
on the sensor shaft.
Place the lever (1) in mid-position and
hold it in place. Screw on the nut (1.1).
5. Place the follower clamp (3) on the actu-
ator stem, align and fasten it, making
sure that the fastening screw rests in the
groove of the actuator stem.
6. Place the mounting plate (21) together
with the sensor onto the actuator yoke so
that the follower pin (2) rests on the top
of the follower clamp (3). It must rest on
it with spring force.
Screw tight the mounting plate (21) onto
the actuator yoke using both fixing
screws.
7. Mount cover (11) on the other side.
Make sure that the vent plug points
downwards when the control valve is in-
stalled to allow any condensed water
that collects to drain off.

2
3

11
1.1
1.2
20
21 Signal pressure
9 1 Lever
Vent plug 1.1 Nut
1.2 Disk spring
Signal pressure
2 Follower pin
3 Follower clamp
Actuator stem
Symbol 9 Connecting plate
extends retracts
11 Cover
20 Position sensor
Marking 21 Mounting plate

Fig. 12 · Mounting for Type 3277-5 Actuator (left) and Type 3277 Actuator (right)

EB 8384-5 EN 33
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

4.6.2 Mounting the position
sensor with attachment
according to IEC 60534-6
For the required mounting parts and the ac-
cessories, refer to Table 6 on page 41.
1. Place the lever (1) on the sensor in
mid-position and hold it in place.
Unthread the nut (1.1) and remove the
lever together with the disk spring (1.2)
from the sensor shaft.
2. Screw the position sensor (20) onto the
bracket (21).
The standard attached lever M with the fol-
lower pin (2) at position 35 is designed for
120, 240 and 350 cm² actuators with
15 mm rated travel.
For other actuator sizes or travels, select the
lever and pin position from the travel table
on page 19. Lever L and XL are included in
the mounting kit.
3. Place the lever (1) and disk spring (1.2)
on the sensor shaft.
Place the lever (1) in mid-position and
hold it in place. Screw on the nut (1.1).
4. Screw both bolts (14) to the bracket
(9.1) of the stem connector (9). Attach
the follower plate (3) and fix with the
screws (14.1).
5. Place the bracket with the sensor at the
NAMUR rib in such a manner that the
follower pin (2) rests in the slot of the fol-
lower plate (3), then screw the bracket
using its fixing screws onto the valve.

20 21 1.1, 1.2 14.1 3 14 9.1 9

1 Lever
1.1 Nut
1.2 Disk spring
2 Follower pin
3 Follower plate
9 Stem connector
9.1 Bracket
14 Bolt
14.1 Screws
20 Position sensor
21 Bracket

Fig. 13 · Mounting according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR)

34 EB 8384-5 EN
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

4.6.3 Mounting the position Place the lever (1) in mid-position and
sensor to Type 3510 hold it in place. Screw on the nut (1.1).
Micro-flow Valve 4. Place the follower clamp (3) on the stem
connector, align it at a right angle and
For the required mounting parts and the ac- screw tight.
cessories, refer to Table 6 on page 41. 5. Position the bracket (21) with the positi-
1. Place the lever (1) in mid-position and on sensor on the valve yoke and screw
hold it in place. Unscrew the nut (1.1) tight, making sure the follower pin (2)
and remove the standard attached lever slides into the groove of the follower
M (1) together with the disk spring (1.2) clamp (3).
from the sensor shaft.
2. Screw the position sensor (20) onto the
bracket (21).
3. Select the lever S (1) from the accesso-
ries and screw the follower pin (2) into
the hole for pin position 17.
Place the lever (1) and disk spring (1.2)
on the sensor shaft.

1.1
20 21 1.2
1 Lever
1.1 Nut
1.2 Disk spring
2 Follower pin
3 Follower clamp
1 20 Position sensor
21 Bracket
2

Fig. 14 · Mounting on a micro-flow valve

EB 8384-5 EN 35
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

4.6.4 Mounting the position 4. Place the lever (1) and disk spring (1.2)
sensor to rotary actuators on the sensor shaft.
Place the lever (1) in mid-position and
For the required mounting parts and the ac- hold it in place. Screw on the nut (1.1).
cessories, refer to Table 6 on page 41.
1. Place the lever (1) in mid-position and Follow the instructions describing attachment
hold it in place. Unscrew the nut (1.1) to the standard positioner in section 4.4
and remove the standard attached lever Instead of the positioner, attach the position
M (1) together with the disk spring (1.2) sensor (20) with its mounting plate (21).
from the sensor shaft.
2. Screw the position sensor (20) onto the
mounting plate (21).
3. Replace the follower pin (2) normally at-
tached to the lever (1) with the metal fol-
lower pin (Ø 5) from the accessories
and screw it into the hole for pin posi-
tion 90°.

20
21

1 Lever
1.1 Nut
1.2 Disk spring
2 Follower pin
20 Position sensor
2 1 1.1, 1.2 21 Mounting plate

Fig. 15 · Positioner unit with sensor mounted on rotary actuators

36 EB 8384-5 EN
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories
4.7 Attaching positioners with
stainless steel housings
Positioners with stainless steel housings re-
quire mounting parts that are completely
made of stainless steel or free of aluminum.
Note: The pneumatic connecting plate and a
pressure gauge bracket made of stainless
steel are available (order numbers listed be-
low). The pneumatic reversing amplifiers in
stainless steel is not available.
Connecting plate G¼ 1400-7476
(stainless steel): ¼ NPT 1400-7477
Pressure gauge Only in
bracket (st. steel): ¼ NPT 1400-7108
The Tables 1 to 5 (pages 38 and 40) apply
for attaching positioners with stainless steel
housings with the following restrictions:
Direct attachment
All mounting kits from Tables 1 and 2 can
be used. The connection block is not re-
quired. The stainless steel version of the
pneumatic connecting plate routes the air in-
ternally to the actuator.
Attachment according to IEC 60534-6
(NAMUR rib or attachment to rod-type
yokes)
All mounting kits from Table 3 can be used.
Connecting plate in stainless steel.
Attachment to rotary actuators
All mounting kits from Table 4 can be used
except for the heavy-duty version. Con-
necting plate in stainless steel.
4.8 Air purging function for
single-acting actuators
The exhaust air from the positioner is di-
verted to the actuator spring chamber to
provide corrosion protection inside the actu-
ator. The following must be observed:
Direct attachment to Type 3277-5 (stem ex-
tends FA/stem retracts FE)
The air purging function is automatically
provided.
Direct attachment to Type 3277, 240 to
2
700 cm
FA: Remove the stopper 12.2 (Fig. 5 on
page 23) at the connection block and
make a pneumatic connection to the
spring chamber on the vented side.
FE: The air purging function is automati-
cally provided.
Attachment acc. to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR
rib or attachment to rod-type yokes) and to
rotary actuators
The positioner requires an additional port
for the exhaust air that can be connected
over piping. An adapter available as an ac-
cessory is used for this purpose:
Threaded bushing G ¼ 0310-2619
(M20 x 1.5): ¼ NPT 0310-2550
NOTICE
The adapter uses one of the M20 x 1.5 con-
nections in the housing which means just
one cable gland can be installed.
EB 8384-5 EN 37
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

Should other valve accessories be used

which vent the actuator (e.g. solenoid valve,
volume booster, quick exhaust valve), this
exhaust air must also be included in the
purging function. The connection over the
adapter at the positioner must be protected
with a check valve (e.g. check valve G ¼,
order no. 8502-0597) mounted in the pip-
ing. Otherwise the pressure in the positioner
housing would rise above the ambient pres-
sure and damage the positioner when the
exhausting components respond suddenly.

4.9 Required mounting parts and

accessories
Table 1 · Direct attachment to Type 3277-5 Actuator (Fig. 4) Order no.

Mounting Mounting parts for actuators 120 cm² or smaller 1400-7452

parts
Switchover plate (old) for Actuator Type 3277-5xxxxxx.00 (old) 1400-6819
Switchover plate new for Actuator Type 3277-5xxxxxx.01 (new) 1) 1400-6822
Accessories
1
for the Connecting plate for additional attachment of a solenoid valve: G 8 1400-6820
actuator 1
Connecting plate (old) for Actuator Type 3277-5xxxxxx.00 (old): 8 NPT 1400-6821
Connecting plate new for Actuator Type 3277-5xxxxxx.01 (new) 1) 1400-6823
1
G 4 1400-7461
Connecting plate (6) 1
4 NPT 1400-7462
Accessories G 1
4 1400-7458
for the Pressure gauge bracket (7) 1
positioner 4 NPT 1400-7459
St. steel/brass 1400-6950
Pressure gauge mounting kit (8) up to max. 6 bar (output/supply)
St. steel/St. st. 1400-6951
1)
Only new switchover and connecting plates can be used with new actuators (Index 01).
Old and new plates are not interchangeable.

38 EB 8384-5 EN
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

Table 2 · Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator (Fig. 5) Order no.

Mounting Attachment to actuators with 240, 350, 700 cm2 1400-7453

parts
Steel 1400-6444
240 cm2
Stainless steel 1400-6445
Required piping with screw fittings Steel 1400-6446
– for "Actuator stem retracts" 350 cm2
– when the top diaphragm chamber is filled with air Stainless steel 1400-6447
Steel 1400-6448
Accessories 700 cm2
Stainless steel 1400-6449
1
G 4 1400-8811
Connection block with seals and screw 1
4 NPT 1400-8812
St. steel/brass 1400-6950
Pressure gauge mounting kit up to max. 6 bar (output and supply)
St. steel/st. steel 1400-6951

Table 3 · Attachment to NAMUR ribs or control valves with rod-type yokes

(20 to 35 mm rod diameter) according to IEC 60534-6 (Figs. 6 and 7)
Travel in mm Lever For actuators Order no.
7.5 S Type 3271-5 with 60/120 cm² on Type 3510 Valve (Fig. 7) 1400-7457
5 to 50 M 1) Actuators from other manufacturers and Type 3271 with 120 to 700 cm² 1400-7454
14 to 100 L Actuators from other manufacturers and Type 3271, 1400-60 version 1400-7455
Actuators from other manufacturers and Type 3271, versions 1400-120 and
40 to 200 XL 1400-7456
2800 cm² with 120 mm travel
Type 3271, versions 1400-120 and 2800 cm2 with 30/60 mm travel 1400-7466
Mounting bracket for Emerson and Masoneilan linear actuators
30 or 60 L In addition, a mounting kit acc. to IEC 60534-6 is required depending on the 1400-6771
travel. See row above.
Valtek Type 25/50 1400-9554
1
G 4 1400-7461
Connecting plate (6) 1
4 NPT 1400-7462
1
G 4 1400-7458
Accessories Pressure gauge bracket (7) 1
4 NPT 1400-7459
St. steel/brass 1400-6950
Pressure gauge mounting kit up to max. 6 bar (output/supply)
St. steel/st. st. 1400-6951
1)
Lever M is mounted on basic device (included in the scope of delivery)

EB 8384-5 EN 39
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

Table 4 · Attachment to rotary actuators (Figs. 8 and 9) Order no.

Attachment acc. to VDI/VDE 3845, fixing level 2 1400-7448

Attachment for SAMSON Type 3278 with 160/320 cm2 1400-7614
Attachment for Camflex II 1400-9120
Mounting Attachment acc. to VDI/VDE 3845, fixing level 2, heavy-duty version 1400-9244
parts
Attachment acc. to VDI/VDE 3845, fixing level 1, heavy-duty version 1400-9526
Attachment for SAMSON Type 3278 with 160 cm2 and
1400-9245
also for VETEC Types S160, R and M, heavy-duty version
Attachment for AIR TORQUE 10 000, heavy-duty version 1400-9542
1
G 4 1400-7461
Connecting plate (6) 1
4 NPT 1400-7462
1
G 4 1400-7458
Accessories Pressure gauge bracket (7) 1
4 NPT 1400-7459
St. steel/brass 1400-6950
Pressure gauge mounting kit up to max. 6 bar (output/supply)
St. steel/st. s. 1400-6951

Table 5 General accessories

Pneumatic reversing amplifier for double-acting G¼ 1079-1118
actuators ¼ NPT 1079-1119
Cable gland M20 x 1.5, nickel-plated brass 1890-4875
Adapter M 20 x 1.5 to ½ NPT, aluminum 0310-2149
Retrofit kit for inductive limit switch 1x SJ 2-SN 1400-7460
Cover plate with list of parameters
German/English (standard) 1990-5328
Accessories and operating instructions
EXPERT+ activation code for Type 3730-5 Positioner 1400-9318
USB dongle for EXPERT+ (specify the number of positioners to be activated)
1400-9555
Can only be used in combination with TROVIS-VIEW 6661-1058
TROVIS-VIEW with device module 3730-5 (order no. 6661-1058) 1262295
Serial interface adapter (SAMSON SSP interface - RS-232 port on computer) 1400-7700
Isolated USB interface adapter (SAMSON SSP interface - USB port on computer) 1400-9740

40 EB 8384-5 EN
 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories

Table 6 · Attachment of external position sensor Order no.

Mounting parts for actuators with 120 cm² see Fig. 12 left 1400-7472
1
Connecting plate (9, old) for Actuator G 8 1400-6820
Direct attachment Type 3277-5xxxxxx.00 1
8 NPT 1400-6821
Connecting plate (new) for Actuator Type 3277-5xxxxxx.01 (new) 1) 1400-6823
Mounting parts for actuators with 240, 350 and 700 cm², see Fig. 12 right 1400-7471
NAMUR attachmt. Mounting parts for attachment to NAMUR rib w. lever L and XL, see Fig. 13 1400-7468
Micro-flow valve Mounting parts for Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve, see Fig. 14 1400-7469
VDI/VDE 3845 for all sizes of fixing level 2, with follower clamp and coupling
1400-7473
wheel, version with CrNiMo steel bracket, see Fig. 15
Attachment to
VDI/VDE 3845 for all sizes of fixing level 2, heavy-duty version 1400-9384
rotary actuators
SAMSON Type 3278 with 160 cm2 (also for VETEC Type S160 and Type R),
1400-9385
heavy-duty version
1
G 4 1400-7461
Connecting plate (6) 1
4 NPT 1400-7462
1
G 4 1400-7458
Pressure gauge bracket (7) 1
4 NPT 1400-7459
Accessories for
positioner Pressure gauge mounting kit up to max. 6 bar St. steel/brass 1400-6950
(output/supply) St. steel/st. steel 1400-6951
Bracket to mount the positioner on a wall 0309-0111
Note: The other fastening parts are to be provided at the site of installation as
wall foundations vary from site to site.
1)
Only new switchover and connecting plates can be used with new actuators (Index 01).
Old and new plates are not interchangeable.

EB 8384-5 EN 41
 Connections
5 Connections
WARNING!
Mount the positioner, keeping the following
sequence:
1. Mount the positioner on the control valve
2. Connect the supply air
3. Connect the electrical power
4. Perform the start-up settings
The connection of the electrical auxiliary
power may cause the actuator stem to move,
depending on the operating mode.
Do not touch the actuator stem or obstruct it
to avoid risk of injury to hands or fingers.
5.1 Pneumatic connections
NOTICE
Follow the instructions below to avoid dam-
aging the positioner.
– The threaded connections in the
positioner housing are not designed di-
rect air connection!
– The screw glands must be screwed into
the connecting plate, the pressure gauge
mounting block or the connection block
from the accessories.
The air connections are optionally de-
signed as a bore with ¼ NPT or G ¼
thread.
The customary fittings for metal and cop-
per pipes or plastic hoses can be used.
– The supply air must be dry and free from
oil and dust.
The maintenance instructions for upstre-
am pressure reducing stations must be
observed.
42 EB 8384-5 EN
Blow through all air pipes and hoses tho-
roughly prior to connecting them.
If the positioner is attached directly to the
Type 3277 Actuator, the connection of the
positioner's output pressure to the actuator
is fixed. For attachment according to
IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR), the signal pressure
can be routed to either the top or bottom di-
aphragm chamber of the actuator, depend-
ing on the actuator's fail-safe action "Actua-
tor stem extends" or "Actuator stem re-
tracts".
For rotary actuators, the manufacturer's
specifications for connection apply.
5.1.1 Signal pressure gauges
To monitor the supply air (Supply) and sig-
nal pressure (Output), we recommend that
pressure gauges be attached (see accesso-
ries in Tables 1 to 5).
5.1.2 Supply pressure
The required supply air pressure depends
on the bench range and the actuator's oper-
ating direction (fail-safe action).
The bench range is registered on the name-
plate either as spring range or signal pres-
sure range depending on the actuator. The
direction of action is marked FA or FE, or by
a symbol.
Actuator stem extends FA (AIR TO OPEN)
Fail-safe position "Valve Closed"
(for globe and angle valves):
Required supply pressure = Upper bench
range value + 0.2 bar, minimum 1.4 bar.

Actuator stem retracts FE (AIR TO CLOSE)
Fail-safe position "Valve Open"
(for globe and angle valves):
For tight-closing valves, the maximum signal
pressure pstmax is roughly estimated as fol-
lows:
d2 ⋅ π ⋅ Δp
pstmax = F + [bar]
4⋅A
d = Seat diameter [cm]
Δp = Differential pressure across the valve
[bar]
A = Actuator diaphragm area [cm²]
If there are no specifications, calculate as
follows:
Required supply pressure =
Upper bench range value + 1 bar.
5.1.3 Signal pressure (output)
The signal pressure at the output (Out-
put 38) of the positioner can be limited to
1.4, 2.4 or 3.7 bar in Code 16.
The limitation is not activated [OFF] by de-
fault.
Connections
5.2 Electrical connections
DANGER!
Risk of electric shock and/or
the formation of an explosive
atmosphere!
– For electrical installation, you are re-
quired to observe the relevant
electrotechnical regulations and the acci-
dent prevention regulations that apply in
the country of use. In Germany, these
are the VDE regulations and the accident
prevention regulations of the employers'
liability insurance association.
– The following standards apply for assem-
bly and installation in hazardous areas:
EN 60079-14: 2003 (VDE 0165 Part 1/
8.98) "Electrical apparatus for explosive
gas atmospheres" and EN 50281-1-2:
1999 (VDE 0165 Part 2/11.99) "Electri-
cal apparatus for use in the presence of
combustible dust".
– For the interconnection of intrinsically
safe electrical equipment, the permissible
maximum values specified in the EC type
examination certificate apply (Ui or Uo, Ii
or Io, Pi or Po, Ci or Co, and Li or Lo).
– The following applies for equipment with
type of protection EEx nA (non-sparking
apparatus) according to the standard
EN 50021 (1999): Connecting, interrupt-
ing, or switching circuits while energized
is only allowed during installation, main-
tenance or repair work.
– The following applies for equipment con-
nected to energy-limited circuits with
type of protection EEx nL (energy-limited
apparatus) according to the standard
EN 50021 (1999): This type of equip-
EB 8384-5 EN 43
 Connections
ment may be switched under normal op-
erating conditions.
– For the interconnection of equipment to
energy-limited circuits with type of pro-
tection EEx nL IIC, the permissible maxi-
mum values specified in the statement of
conformity or the addenda to the state-
ment of conformity apply.
– The terminal assignment specified in the
certificate must be adhered to. Reversing
the assignment of the electrical terminals
may cause the explosion protection to
become ineffective!
Do not tamper with enameled screws in-
side or on the housing.
Note on the selection of cables and wires:
– To install intrinsically safe circuits, obser-
ve Paragraph 12 of the standard
EN 60079-14: 2003 (VDE 0165 Part 1).
To run multi-core cables or lines with
more than one intrinsically safe circuit,
Paragraph 12.2.2.7 of this standard ap-
plies.
An additional cable gland can be instal-
led when connecting the device over two
separate cables. Cable entries left un-
used must be sealed with blanking plugs.
Devices used at ambient temperatures
down to –20 °C must have metal cable
entries.
44 EB 8384-5 EN
Cable entries
The cable entry with M20 x 1.5 cable
gland, 6 to 12 mm clamping range.
There is a second M20 x 1.5 threaded bore
in the housing that can be used for addi-
tional connection, when required.
The screw terminals are designed for wire
cross-sections of 0.2 to 2.5 mm². Tighten by
at least 0.5 Nm.
Note: The power supply for the positioner
can be supplied either over the connection
to the fieldbus segment or over a DC voltage
source (9 to 32 V) connected to the bus ter-
minals in the positioner.
You are required to observe the relevant
regulations for use in hazardous areas.
Bus line
The shielded fieldbus connecting cable is to
be routed over the electromagnetic-compati-
ble brass cable gland (standard) in the
positioner to the terminals. The shield, which
is placed over the clamping insert, is con-
nected over a large area to the gland and
housing.
1. To connect the bus line, loosen the gland
nut and the clamping insert from the
positioner and remove the dust cap.
2. Slide the gland nut and clamping insert
over the connecting cable.
3. Strip the insulation off the end of the bus
line to the required connecting length
and cut the wire shield off up to a length
of approx. 13 mm. If necessary, cut off
any cable core filling as well.
 Connections

4. Disentangle the braided shield and pull

it over the clamping insert.
5. Press the clamping insert into the con-
necting screw gland and screw tight the
gland nut until the connecting cable is
clamped tightly.
6. Route the two-wire bus line to the screw
terminals marked "IEC 1158-2",
whereby no polarity has to be observed.
NOTICE
To connect the limit switch, binary inputs,
and forced venting, an additional cable
gland that needs to be fitted in place of the
existing blanking plug is necessary.
Open cable glands are not permissible as
the degree of protection IP 66 only applies
when the positioner housing is sealed.

Brass cable gland Shielding Clamping insert Gland nut

G
u
Option

+81 -82 IEC 1158-2 +87 -88 +85 -86 +41 -42 A B

In preparation

Switch. amplifier
24 V DC BE1 BE2
(optional) EN 60947-5-6
Solenoid valve
Forced venting Bus line Binary contacts Inductive limit
(optional) switch (optional)

Fig. 16 · Electrical connections

EB 8384-5 EN 45
 Connections

Limit switch 5.2.1 Establishing communication

For operation of the limit switches, switching
amplifiers have to be connected in the out-
put circuit. Their function is to control the
limit values of the control circuit according
to EN 60947-5-6, thus ensuring operational
reliability of the positioner. If the positioner
is installed in hazardous areas, the relevant
regulations must be observed.
The communication structure between the
controller, logic solvers (PLC) or automation
system, or between a PC or work station
and the positioner(s) is implemented to con-
form with IEC 61158-2.

Binary input 1
An active contact can be operated at binary
input 1. The positioner can report the
switching state over the bus protocol.

Binary input 2
A passive, floating contact can be operated
at binary input 2.
The positioner can report the switching state
over the bus protocol.

Solenoid valve (forced venting function)

For positioners fitted with the optional sole-
noid valve for the forced venting function, a
voltage of 24 V DC must be connected to
the relevant terminals +81 and –82.

NOTICE
If there is no voltage connected for the sole-
noid valve at terminals +81 and –82 or
when the voltage signal is interrupted, the
positioner vents the actuator and does not
respond to the reference variable.
Observe the switching thresholds specified
in the technical data.

46 EB 8384-5 EN
 Connections

PowerConditioner
Power conditioner

Power supply unit

Speisegerät
Control system
Leitsystem
FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus EN 61158-2

Bus termination
Terminierung FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus EN 61158-2

3730-50 3730-50 3730-50 3730-50

PowerConditioner
Power conditioner

Control system Power supply unit

Speisegerät
Leitsystem
FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus
EN 61158-2 Ex fieldbus barrier/isolator
Ex-Feldbusbarriere/Trenner

Ex-Bereich
Bus termination Hazardous area
Terminierung FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus EN 61158-2

3730-51 3730-51 3730-51 3730-51

Fig. 17 · Connection acc. to FOUNDATION™ fieldbus, without (top) and with explosion protection (bottom)

EB 8384-5 EN 47
 Operator controls and readings
6 Operator controls and
readings
Rotary pushbutton
The rotary pushbutton is located underneath
the front protective cover.
The positioner is operated on site using the
rotary pushbutton:
Turn to select codes and values.
Press to confirm setting.
Slide switch AIR TO OPEN or AIR TO CLOSE
4 AIR TO OPEN applies when the increas-
ing signal pressure opens the valve
4 AIR TO CLOSE applies when the increas-
ing signal pressure closes the valve
The signal pressure is the air pressure at the
output of the positioner which is transferred
to the actuator.
For positioners with an attached reversing
amplifier for double-acting rotary actuators
(section 4.5): switch position AIR TO OPEN.
Volume restriction Q
The volume restriction is used to adapt the
air delivery to the actuator size. Two fixed
settings are possible depending on how the
air is routed at the actuator:
4 For actuators smaller than 240 cm² with
a loading pressure connection at the side
(Type 3271-5), set restriction to MIN
SIDE.
4 For a connection at the back (Type
3277-5), set restriction to MIN BACK.
4 For actuators 240 cm² and larger, set to
MAX SIDE for a side connection and to
MAX BACK for a connection at the back.
48 EB 8384-5 EN
Readings on display
Icons appear on the display that are as-
signed to parameters, codes and functions.
Operating modes:
Manual mode (MAN), section 8.2.1
Automatic mode (AUTO), section 8.2.1
S Fail-safe position (SAFE), section 8.2.2
4 Bar elements:
In manual and automatic modes,
the bars indicate the system deviation
that depends on the sign (+/–) and the
value. One bar element appears per 1 %
system deviation.
If the device has not yet been initialized,
the icon blinks on the display and the
lever position in degrees in relation to
the longitudinal axis is indicated. One
bar element corresponds to approxi-
mately a 5° angle of rotation.
If the fifth bar element blinks (reading
> 30°), the permissible angle of rotation
has been exceeded. Lever and pin posi-
tion must be checked.
4 Status alarms
: Maintenance alarm
: Maintenance required/Maintenance
demanded
These icons indicate that an error has oc-
curred.
A classified status can be assigned to
each error. Classifications include “No
message”, “Maintenance required”,
“Maintenance demanded” and “Mainte-
nance alarm“ (see section 8.3).
4 Configuration enabled
This indicates that the codes marked with
an asterisk (*) in the code list (section
16.1) are enabled for configuration (see
section 8.1).
 Operator controls and readings

Displays and their meaning

AUtO Automatic mode RES Reset and together

CL Clockwise RUN Start AO Transducer Block is in the MAN
CCL Counterclockwise SAFE Fail-safe position mode, see page 138
Err Error SUb Substitute calibration
ESC Escape TunE Initialization in progress blinking Emergency mode
(see error code 62 on p. 101)
LOW w too small YES Available
MAN Manual mode ZP Zero calibration blinking Not initialized
MAX Maximum range tEStinG Test function active
NO Not available S blinking Valve in mechanical fail-safe
NOM Nominal travel ää Increasing/increasing position (see SET_FAIL_ SAFE_POS
ON ON äæ Increasing/decreasing parameter in the AO Transducer Block,
page 142)
OFF OFF

Maintenance alarm/fault Manual mode Closed-loop operation Code

Bar graph for

Designation
system deviation
Position
or lever position
Parameter %
mm mm Units
%
Binary contact 1
S Binary contact 2

Configuration Maintenance required Fail-safe position

enabled Maintenance demanded active

Initialization key Cap or rotary switch Metal tag of proximity switch

SSP interface
INTERFACE
SERIAL

Switch for
INIT

fail-safe action
VALVE

AIR TO
CAUTION
ACTUATES

of the actuator
CLOSE

OPEN

%
mm mm
%
S
Volume restriction
MAX SIDE
MIN BACK
MIN SIDE
MAX BACK

Rotary pushbutton
Q

Fig. 18 · Display and operator controls

EB 8384-5 EN 49
 Start-up – Settings
7 Start-up – Settings
WARNING!
Attach the positioner, keeping the following
sequence:
1. Mount the positioner on the control valve
2. Connect the supply air
3. Connect the electrical power
4. Perform the start-up settings
Reading on display after connecting the
electrical auxiliary power:
4 tEStinG runs across the display and then
the fault alarm icon appears and
blinks on the display when the positioner
has not yet been initialized. The reading
indicates the lever position in degrees in
relation to the longitudinal axis.
Reading when the
positioner has not yet been
initialized
4 If Code 0 appears on the display when a
positioner has been initialized. The
positioner is in the last active operating
mode.
WARNING!
The actuator stem moves while the start-up
settings are being performed.
Do not touch the actuator stem or obstruct it
to avoid risk of injury to hands or fingers.
50 EB 8384-5 EN
NOTICE
Perform the start-up settings in the same se-
quence as listed (section 7.1 to section 7.6).
Note: The positioner performs a test in the
start-up phase while following its automa-
tion task at the same time. During the
start-up phase, operation on site is unre-
stricted, yet write access is limited.
7.1 Determining the fail-safe
position
To adapt the positioner to the operating di-
rection of the actuator, set slide switch to
AIR TO OPEN or AIR TO CLOSE .
4 AIR TO OPEN = Signal pressure opens
the valve, for fail-safe position: actuator
stem extends/valve closed
4 AIR TO CLOSE = Signal pressure closes
the valve, for fail-safe position: actuator
stem retracts/valve open.
NOTICE
The AIR TO OPEN setting always applies to
double-acting actuators.
For checking purposes:
After successfully completing initialization,
the positioner display should read 0 % when
the valve is closed and 100 % when the
valve is open. If this is not the case, change
the slide switch position and re-initialize the
positioner.
 Start-up – Settings

Note: The switch position is prompted prior

4 The “BACK“ position applies for actua-
tors with a loading pressure connection
to an initialization. After an initialization
at the back, e.g. in Type 3277-5.
has been completed, changing the switch
position does not have any effect on the op- 4 The “SIDE”restriction position always ap-
eration of the positioner. plies for actuators from other manufac-
The positioner only needs to be initialized turers.
again after the fail-safe action of the actua- Overview · Position of volume restriction Q*
tor has been changed.
Transit
Signal time <1s ≥1s
pressure
7.2 Setting the volume restriction
Connection at the side MIN SIDE MAX SIDE
Q
Connection at the back MIN BACK MAX BACK

* Intermediate positions are not permitted.

MAX BACK
MIN SIDE
Q NOTICE
MIN BACK
MAX SIDE
The positioner needs to be initialized again
after the position of the restriction has been
Fig. 19 · Volume restriction Q
changed.
MAX BACK/MIN SIDE setting

The volume restriction Q is used to adapt the 7.3 Adapting the display
air delivery to the size of the actuator:
The data representation on the positioner
4 Actuators with a transit time < 1 s, e.g. display can be turned by 180° to adapt it to
linear actuators with an effective area how the positioner is mounted.
smaller than 240 cm², require a re-
stricted air flow rate (MIN).
4 Actuators with a transit time ≥ 1 s do not Reading direction for right
attachment of pneumatic
require the air flow rate to be restricted connections
(MAX).
The position of volume restriction Q also de-
pends on how the signal pressure is routed
Reading direction for left
at the actuator in SAMSON actuators: attachment of pneumatic
4 The “SIDE“ position applies for actuators connections
with a loading pressure connection at the
side, e.g. Type 3271-5.
If the displayed data appear upside down,
proceed as follows:

EB 8384-5 EN 51
 Start-up – Settings

Limiting the signal pressure:

Turn → Code 2
Press → Code 2 blinks. Pressure limit
Default: OFF
Turn → Required direction
Press to confirm reading direction.
Turn → Code 16
7.4 Limiting the signal pressure Press → Code 16 blinks.
If the maximum actuator force may cause Turn until the required pressure limit
damage to the valve, the signal pressure (1.4/2.4/3.7 bar) appears.
must be limited. Press to confirm the pressure limit set-
ting.
NOTICE
Do not activate the pressure limit function in 7.5 Checking the operating
double-acting actuators (with fail-safe action range of the positioner
AIR TO OPEN (OFF = default).
To check the mechanical attachment and the
proper functioning, the valve should be
Enable configuration at the positioner be-
moved through the operating range of the
fore activating the pressure limit function:
positioner in the manual operating mode
with the manual reference variable.
Note: If no settings are entered within
120 seconds, the enabled configuration Selecting manual operating mode:
function becomes invalid.

Operating mode
Default MAN
Configuration enabled
Default: OFF

Turn → Code 0

Turn → Code 3, display: OFF Press → Code 0 blinks.

Press → Code 3 blinks. Turn → MAN

Turn → ON Press . The positioner changes to the

manual operating mode.
Press → display

52 EB 8384-5 EN

Checking the operating range:
Manual reference variable
w (current angle of rotation
is indicated)
Turn → Code 1
Press → Code 1 and blink.
Turn until the pressure in the positioner
builds up, and the control valve moves to its
final positions so that the travel/angle of ro-
tation can be checked.
The angle of rotation on the back of the
positioner is indicated. A horizontal lever
(mid position) is equal to 0°.
To ensure the positioner is working prop-
erly, the outer bar elements may not blink
while the valve is moving through the oper-
ating range.
Exit Code 1 by pressing the rotary
pushbutton ( ).
The permissible range has been exceeded
when the displayed angle is greater than
30°, and the outer right or left bar element
blinks.
The positioner changes to the fail-safe posi-
tion (SAFE).
After canceling the fail-safe position (SAFE)
(see section 8.2.2) it is absolutely necessary
to check the lever and pin position as de-
scribed in section 4.
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury or property dam-
age caused by the supply air or electrical
auxiliary power, disconnect the supply air
and electrical auxiliary power (bus line) be-
4 MAX maximum range (standard range)
Start-up – Settings
fore exchanging the lever or changing the
pin position.
7.6 Initialization
WARNING!
During initialization, the control valve moves
through its entire travel/angle of rotation
range. Therefore, do not start the initializa-
tion procedure while a process is running,
but only during start-up when all shut-off
valves are closed.
Before starting initialization, check the maxi-
mum permissible signal pressure of the con-
trol valve. During initialization, the
positioner issues an output signal pressure
up to the maximum supply pressure sup-
plied. If necessary, limit the signal pressure
by connecting an upstream pressure reduc-
ing valve.
NOTICE
After the positioner has been mounted on to
another actuator or its mounting location
has been changed and prior to
re-initializing the positioner, the positioner
needs to be reset to its basic setting (default
values). Refer to section 7.8.
During initialization the positioner adapts it-
self optimally to the friction conditions and
the signal pressure demand of the control
valve. The type and extent of self-adaptation
depends on the set initialization mode:
Initialization mode for simple start-up of
EB 8384-5 EN 53
 Start-up – Settings
valves with two clearly defined mechani-
cal end positions, e.g. three-way valves
(see section 7.6.1)
4 NOM nominal range
Initialization mode for all globe valves
(see section 7.6.2)
4 MAN manually selected range
Initialization mode for globe valves with
an unknown nominal range (see section
7.6.3)
4 SUB substitute calibration (emergency
mode)
This mode allows a positioner to be re-
placed while the plant is running, with
the least amount of disruption to the
plant (see section 7.6.4)
Note: For normal operation, simply start ini-
tialization by pressing the INIT key after
mounting the positioner on the valve and
setting the fail-safe position and volume re-
striction. The positioner only needs to work
with its default settings. If necessary, per-
form a reset (see section 7.8).
Alternating displays
Initialization running
Symbol depending on ini-
tialization mode selected
Bar graph display
indicating the progress of
the initialization
54 EB 8384-5 EN
Initialization successful,
positioner in automatic
% operating mode
The time required for an initialization pro-
cess depends on the transit time of the actu-
ator and take several minutes.
After a successful initialization, the
positioner runs in closed-loop operation in-
dicated by .
A malfunctioning leads to the process being
canceled. The initialization error appears on
the display according to how it has been
classified by the condensed state. See sec-
tion 8.3.
Note: Positioner with extended EXPERT+ di-
agnostics automatically start to plot the ref-
erence graphs (drive signal steady-state d1
and hysteresis d2) after initialization has
been completed. tESt d1 or tESt d2 appear
on the display in an alternating sequence.
An error during the plotting of the reference
graphs is indicated on the display by Code
81.
The positioner still works properly, even
though the reference graph plotting has not
been completed successfully.
Fail-safe position AIR TO CLOSE
If the slide switch is set to AIR TO CLOSE,
the positioner automatically switches to the
direction of action increasing/decreasing
(äæ) on successful completion of initializa-
tion.
This results in the following assignment be-
tween reference variable and valve position:
 Start-up – Settings

Fail-safe Direction of Valve

position action Closed at Open at

Actuator stem Default OFF

extends FA ää 0% 100 %
AIR TO OPEN

Actuator stem
retracts FE äæ 100 % 0% Turn → Code 3, display: OFF
AIR TO CLOSE
Press → Code 3 blinks
The tight-closing function is activated. Turn → ON
Press , display
NOTICE
Set Code 15 (final position w>) to 99 % for Select the initialization mode:
three-way valves.

Initialization mode
Canceling an initalization process Default MAX

The initialization procedure can be canceled

while running by pressing the rotary
pushbutton ( ). StOP appears three sec- Turn → Code 6
onds long and the positioner then changes Press
to the fail-safe position (SAFE).
Turn → MAX
Exit the fail-safe position again over Code 0
(see section 8.2.2). Press to confirm the MAX as the initial-
ization mode.
7.6.1 MAX – Initialization based
Start initialization:
on maximum range
4 Press INIT key to start initialization!
The positioner determines travel/angle of
rotation of the closing member from the The nominal travel/angle of rotation is indi-
CLOSED position to the opposite side and cated in % after initialization. Code 5 (nomi-
adopts this travel/angle of rotation as the nal range) remains locked. The parameters
operating range from 0 to 100 %. for travel/angle range start (Code 8) and
travel/angle range end (Code 9) can also
Enable configuration: only be displayed and modified in %.
For a reading in mm/°, enter the pin posi-
Note: If no settings are entered within tion (Code 4).
120 seconds, the enabled configuration
function becomes invalid.

EB 8384-5 EN 55
 Start-up – Settings

Enter the pin position: Enable configuration:

Note: If no settings are entered within

Pin position 120 seconds, the enabled configuration
mm Default OFF
function becomes invalid.

Turn → Code 4
Press , Code 4 blinks
Default OFF
Turn → Pin position on lever (see rele-
vant section on attachment)
Press . The reading of the nominal range Turn → Code 3, display: OFF
appears in mm/°.
Press , Code 3 blinks
7.6.2 NOM – Initialization based Turn → ON
on nominal range Press , display

The calibrated sensor allows the effective Enter the pin position and nominal range:
valve travel to be set very accurately. During
the initialization process, the positioner
checks whether the control valve can move
Pin position
through the indicated nominal range (travel mm Default OFF
or angle) without collision.
If this is the case, the indicated nominal
range is adopted with the limits of
travel/angle range start (Code 8) and
travel/angle range end (Code 9) as the op- Nominal range
mm (locked with Code 4 = No)
erating range.

Note: The maximum possible travel must al- Turn → Code 4

ways be greater than the nominal travel en-
tered. If this is not the case, initialization is Press , Code 4 blinks
interrupted (error alarm Code 52) because Turn → Pin position on lever (see rele-
the nominal travel is not achieved. vant section on attachment)
Press .
Turn → Code 5
Press , Code 5 blinks

56 EB 8384-5 EN
 Start-up – Settings

Turn → Nominal travel/angle Enable configuration:

Press .
Note: If no settings are entered within
Select the initialization mode: 120 seconds, the enabled configuration
function becomes invalid.

Initialization mode
Default MAX

Default OFF

Turn → Code 6
Press , Code 6 blinks
Turn → Code 3
Turn → NOM
Press , Code 3 blinks
Press to confirm the NOM as the initial-
Turn → ON
ization mode.
Press , display
Start initialization:
Enter the pin position:
4 Press INIT key to start initialization!
Note: After initialization, check the direction Pin position
of action and, if necessary, change it mm Default OFF
(Code 7).

Turn → Code 4
7.6.3 MAN – Initialization based
Press , Code 4 blinks
on a manually selected
range Turn → Pin position on lever (see rele-
vant section on attachment)
Before starting initialization, move the con-
Press . The reading of the nominal range
trol valve manually to the OPEN position.
appears in mm/°.
The positioner calculates the differential
travel/angle using the OPEN and CLOSED
positions and adopts it as the operating
range with limits of travel/angle range start
(Code 8) and travel/angle range end
(Code 9).

EB 8384-5 EN 57
 Start-up – Settings

Select the initialization mode: 7.6.4 SUb substitute calibration

A complete initialization procedure takes
Initialization mode several minutes and requires the valve to
Default MAX move through its entire travel range several
times. This initialization mode, however, is
an emergency mode, in which the control
Turn → Code 6 parameters are estimated and not deter-
mined by an initialization procedure. As a
Press , Code 6 blinks result, a high level of accuracy cannot be
Turn → MAN expected. You should always select a differ-
ent initialization mode if the plant allows it.
Press to confirm the MAN as the initial-
ization mode. The SUb initialization mode is used to re-
place a positioner while the process is run-
Enter OPEN position: ning. For this purpose, the control valve is
usually fixed mechanically in a certain posi-
tion, or pneumatically by means of a pres-
Manual reference variable sure signal which is routed to the actuator
(the current angle of rota- externally. The blocking position ensures
tion is displayed)
that the plant continues to operate with this
valve position.
Turn → Code 0 By entering the blocking position (Code 35),
Press , Code 0 blinks closing direction (Code 34), pin position
(Code 4), nominal range (Code 5) and di-
Turn → MAN rection of action (Code 7), the positioner
Press can calculate the positioner configuration.

Turn → Code 1
NOTICE
Press , Code 1 blinks Perform a reset before re-initializing the
Turn until the valve reaches its OPEN po- positioner if the substitute positioner has al-
sition. ready been initialized. Refer to section .
Press to confirm the OPEN position.
Enable configuration:
Start initialization:

4 Press INIT key to start initialization! Note: If no settings are entered within
120 seconds, the enabled configuration
function becomes invalid.

58 EB 8384-5 EN
 Start-up – Settings

Select the initialization mode:

Default OFF
Initialization mode
Default MAX

Turn → Code 3
Press , Code 3 blinks Turn → Code 6
Turn → ON Press , Code 6 blinks
Press , display Turn → SUb

Enter the pin position and nominal range: Press to confirm the SUb as the initializa-
tion mode.

Enter the direction of action:

mm
Default OFF

Default ää

Nominal range
mm (locked with Code 4 = No)
Turn → Code 7
Press , Code 7 blinks
Turn → Code 4 Turn → Direction of action (ää or äæ)
Press , Code 4 blinks Press .
Turn → Pin position on lever (see rele-
vant section on attachment) Deactivate travel limit:

Press .
Turn → Code 5
Default 100.0
Press , Code 5 blinks
Turn → Nominal travel/angle
Press . Turn → Code 11
Press , Code 11 blinks
Turn → OFF
Press .

EB 8384-5 EN 59
 Start-up – Settings

Change pressure limit and control parame-
ters:
Note: Do not change the pressure limit
(Code 16). Only change the control param-
eters KP (Code 17) and TV (Code 18) if the
settings of the the replaced positioner are
known.
Enter closing direction and blocking posi-
tion:
Closing direction
Direction of rotation caus-
ing the valve to move to the
CLOSED position (view
onto positioner display)
Default: CCL (counterclock-
wise)

Blocking position
mm Default: 0
Pressure limit
Default OFF

Turn → Code 34
Press , Code 34 blinks
KP Turn → Closing direction (CCL counter-
Default 7
clockwise/CL clockwise)
Press .
Turn → Code 35
TV Press , Code 35 blinks
Default 2
Turn → Blocking position, e.g. 5 mm
(read off at travel indicator scale of the
Turn → Code 16/17/18 blocked valve or measure with a ruler).

Press , Code 16/17/18 blinks Press to confirm the setting.

Turn to set the control parameter se- Set the fail-safe position:
lected.
Press to confirm the setting.
4 Set switch for fail-safe position AIR TO
OPEN or AIR TO CLOSE as described in
section 7.1 on page 50.
4 Set volume restriction as described in
section 7.2 on page 51.

60 EB 8384-5 EN
 Start-up – Settings

Start initialization:
parameters KP and TV must be slightly cor-
4 Press INIT key! rected. Proceed as follows:
The positioner switches to manual oper- Set TV to 4 (Code 18).
ating mode. If the positioner still oscillates, the gain KP
The blocking position is indicated. (Code 17) must be decreased until the
positioner shows a stable behavior.
Note: As initialization has not been carried
out completely, the error code 76 (no emer- Zero point calibration
gency mode) and possibly also error code
57 (control loop) may appear on the dis- Finally, if process operations allow it, the
play. zero point must be adjusted according to
These alarms do not influence the section 7.7.
positioner’s readiness for operation.
7.7 Zero calibration
Cancel the blocking position and change to In case of discrepancies with the closing po-
automatic operating mode sition of the valve, e.g. with soft-sealed
plugs, it may become necessary to
For the positioner to follow its reference recalibrate the zero point.
variable again, the blocking position must
be canceled and the positioner must be set We recommend re-initializing the positioner
to automatic operating mode as follows: in case of deviations in the zero point over
5 %.
Turn → Code 1
Press , Code 1 and blink NOTICE
Turn in order to move the valve slightly The valve briefly moves from the current
past the blocking position. travel/angle of rotation position to the
closed position.
Press to cancel mechanical blocking.
Turn → Code 0
Note: The positioner must be connected to
Press , Code 0 blinks. the supply air to perform the zero calibra-
Turn → AUtO tion.

Press . The positioner switches to auto-

matic operating mode. The current valve po- Enable configuration:
sition is indicated in %.
Turn → Code 3

Note: If the positioner shows a tendency to Press , Code 3 blinks

oscillate in automatic operating mode, the Turn → ON

EB 8384-5 EN 61
 Start-up – Settings

Press , display Reset start-up parameters:

Perform zero calibration:

Reset
Default OFF
Initialization mode
Default MAX
Turn → Code 36
Press , Code 36 blinks
Turn → Code 6
Turn → RUN
Press , Code 6 blinks
Press . All start-up parameters are reset
Turn → ZP
to their default values.
Press .
4 Press INIT key! 7.9 Start-up via local interface
(SSP)
Zero calibration is started, the positioner
moves the control valve to the CLOSED posi- The positioner can either be commissioned,
tion and readjusts the internal electrical zero configured and operated on site or by using
point. the fieldbus configuration or operating sys-
tem over the fieldbus. Alternatively, the
TROVIS-VIEW operator interface can be
7.8 Reset to default values
used.
This function resets all parameters to the fac- The positioner has an digital serial interface,
tory default values (see code list in sec- which is connected to the RS-232 or USB
tion 16.1). port of a computer using an adapter cable
(see Table 5 on page 40).
Enable configuration:
The positioner can be supplied with power
Turn → Code 3 by connecting it to a fieldbus segment or
over a DC voltage source (9 to 32 V) con-
Press , Code 3 blinks
nected to the bus terminals in the positioner.
Turn → ON The simultaneous operation of
Press , display TROVIS-VIEW and the fieldbus system is
possible without any restrictions when con-
nected to a FOUNDATION™ fieldbus bus
segment.

62 EB 8384-5 EN
 Operation

8 Operation You can now configure codes one after the

other:
WARNING! Turn and select the required code.
The actuator stem moves while the positioner Press to access the selected code. The
is being operated. code number starts to blink.
Do not touch the actuator stem or obstruct it
to avoid risk of injury to hands or fingers. Turn and select the setting.
Press to confirm the selected setting.

8.1 Enabling and selecting

Note: If no settings are entered within 120
parameters
seconds, the enabled configuration function
The codes which are marked with an aster- becomes invalid and the display changes to
isk (*) in section 16.1 on page 88 onwards Code 0.
must be enabled with Code 3 before the as-
sociated parameters can be configured as
Cancel the setting:
described below.

Code 3
Canceling the setting
Configuration
not enabled

To cancel a value before it is confirmed (by

pressing ) proceed as follows:
Configuration
enabled Turn → ESC
Press . The entered value is not adopted.

Turn → Code 3, display: OFF 8.2 Operating modes

Press , Code 3 blinks.
Change the setting of Code 3. 8.2.1 Automatic and manual
Turn → ON modes
Press , display: After initialization has been completed suc-
The configuration is enabled. cessfully, the positioner is in automatic
mode.

EB 8384-5 EN 63
 Operation

Note: The positioner automatically returns to

automatic mode
manual mode with Code 0 if no settings
%
are made within 120 seconds.

Switch to automatic operating mode

Turn → Code 0
Switch to manual operating mode
Press , Code 0 blinks.
Turn → AUtO
Press . The positioner changes to au-
tomatic operating mode

Turn → Code 0 8.2.2 SAFE – Fail-safe position

Press , display: AUtO, If you want to move the valve to fail-safe po-
Code 0 blinks. sition determined during start-up (see sec-
Turn → MAN tion 7.1), proceed as follows:

Press to switchover to manual mode.

The switchover is smooth since the manual
mode starts up with the set point last used
during automatic mode. The current position
is displayed in %.
Turn → Code 0
Adjust the manual reference variable
Press , display: current operating mode
(AUtO or MAN), Code 0 blinks.
Turn → SAFE
% % Press , display: S.
The valve moves to the fail-safe position.
Once the positioner is initialized, the current
Turn → Code 1
valve position is indicated on the digital dis-
Press , Code 1 blinks. play in %.
Turn until sufficient pressure has been
Exit the fail-safe position
built up in the positioner and the control
valve moves to the required position. Turn → Code 0
Press , Code 0 blinks.

64 EB 8384-5 EN

Turn and select the required operating
mode AUtO or MAN.
Press . The positioner switches to the op-
erating mode selected.
8.3 Malfunction/maintenance
alarm
All status and fault alarms are assigned to a
classified status in the positioner. The default
settings of the status classification are listed
in the code list.
Note: The status classification can be
changed in TROVIS-VIEW and over the pa-
rameters in the DD file (section 15.6) or over
the FF parameter (section 14.4).
To provide a better overview, the classified
alarms are summarized in a condensed
state. The following status alarms are avail-
able:
4 Maintenance alarm
The positioner cannot perform its control
task due to a functional fault in the de-
vice or in one of its peripherals or an ini-
tialization has not yet been successfully
completed.
4 Maintenance required
The positioner still performs its control
task (with restrictions). A maintenance
requirement or above average wear has
been determined. The wear tolerance
will soon be exhausted or is reducing at
a faster rate than expected. Mainte-
nance is necessary in the medium term.
4 Maintenance demanded
The positioner still performs its control
task (with restrictions). A maintenance
Operation
demand or above average wear has
been determined. The wear tolerance
will soon be exhausted or is reducing at
a faster rate than expected. Mainte-
nance is necessary in the short term.
4 Function check
Test or calibration procedures are being
performed. The positioner is temporarily
unable to perform its control task until
this procedure is completed.
Note: If an event is assigned to the “No
message” status, this event does not have
any effect on the condensed state.
The condensed state appears on the display
with the following icons:
Positioner
Condensed state
display
Maintenance alarm
Maintenance required/
Maintenance demanded
Function check
tESting, TunE or
tESt
If the positioner has not been initialized, the
maintenance alarm icon ( ) appears on
the display as the positioner cannot follow
its reference variable.
If fault alarms exist, the possible source of
error is displayed in Code 49 onwards. In
this case, Err appears on the display.
The cause and recommended action are
listed in the code list (section 16.1).
EB 8384-5 EN 65
 Status and diagnostic alarms

9 Status and diagnostic alarms

Example
Error caused by pin
position
S tus and diagnostic alarms.
Note: The optional EXPERT+ diagnostics
generates additional diagnostic alarms
which are included in the condensed status
with their corresponding status classification.
When a diagnostic alarm is issued by
EXPERT+, this is displayed by Code 79.
The Type 3730-5 Positioner contains inte-
grated diagnostics to generate classified sta-
There are two different types of on-board di-
agnostics available: the standard integrated
diagnostics (EXPERT) and the optional ex-
tended EXPERT+ diagnostics.
Due to the numerous diagnostic functions
provided, the positioner generates classified
status alarms and diagnostic alarms.

9.1 Standard EXPERT diagnostics

8.3.1 Confirming error messages
The standard EXPERT diagnostics provides
Enable configuration: information about positioner states such as
operating hours counter, process monitor-
Note: If no settings are entered within ing, number of zero calibrations and
120 seconds, the enabled configuration initializations, total valve travel, tempera-
function becomes invalid. ture, initialization diagnostics, zero/control
loop errors, logging of the last 30 alarms,
etc.
Turn → Code 3
In addition, the standard EXPERT diagnostics
Press , Code 3 blinks generates diagnostic and status alarms
Turn → ON which allow faults to be pinpointed quickly
when a fault occurs. Besides being dis-
Press , display: played on the positioner display, the classi-
fied alarms are also available over the de-
Confirm error messages: vice description (DD).
Turn → Error code which you want to Alarms are classified in the following main
confirm. groups:
Press to confirm the error message. 4 Status
4 Operation
4 Hardware
4 Initialization
4 Data memory
4 Temperature

66 EB 8384-5 EN
 Status and diagnostic alarms

+ by EXPERT+ can be selected when ordering

9.2 Extended EXPERT
diagnostics the positioner. Additionally, it is possible to
activate EXPERT+ at a later point in time in
In addition to the standard EXPERT diagnos- an existing positioner.
tic features, the optional EXPERT+ extended For this purpose, an activation code can be
diagnostics provides the following online ordered, requiring the serial number of the
and offline test functions which enable sig- positioner to be specified.
nificant statements on the condition of the
entire control valve. Note: Details on extended EXPERT+ diagnos-
tics can be found in the Operating Instruc-
Online test functions (monitoring functions) tions EB 8388-5 EN available on the
4 Data logger Internet at http://www.samson.de.
4 Histograms
4 Cycle counter
4 Valve end position trend
4 y = f (x) diagram (drive signal)
4 Hysteresis test
Offline test functions (manual functions)

4 y = f (x) diagram over the entire valve

travel range
4 Hysteresis test over the entire valve travel
range
4 Static characteristic
4 Step response test
The diagnostic tests are completely inte-
grated in the positioner. The DD allows pa-
rameters to be entered and test results to be
read. The graph format depends on the con-
trol system used.
Further status alarms are generated from the
extensive information gained in the diagnos-
tic tests of EXPERT+ which provide the user
with information covering the whole control
valve.
The required reference graphs are automati-
cally plotted after initialization and saved in
the positioner if EXPERT+ is activated.
The optional diagnostic functions provided

EB 8384-5 EN 67
 Adjusting the limit switch
10 Adjusting the limit switch
The positioner version with an inductive limit
switch has one adjustable tag (1) mounted
on the shaft which operates the proximity
switch (3).
For operation of the inductive limit switch,
the corresponding switching amplifier (see
section 5.2.1) must be connected to the out-
put.
If the tag (1) is inside the field of the switch,
the switch assumes a high resistance. If the
tag is outside of the field, the switch assumes
a low resistance.
Normally, the limit switch is adjusted such
that it will provide a signal in both end posi-
tions of the valve. The switch, however, can
also be adjusted to indicate intermediate
valve positions.
Adjustment screw (2)
Fig. 20 · Adjustment of the limit switch
68 EB 8384-5 EN
The desired switching function, i.e. whether
the output relay shall be picked up or re-
leased when the tag has entered the field,
has to be determined, if necessary, at the
switching amplifier.
Setting the switching point:
NOTICE
During adjustment or testing, the switching
point must always be approached from
mid-position (50 %).
To ensure safe switching under any ambient
conditions, the switching point should be
adjusted to a value of approx. 5 % before
the mechanical stop (OPEN – CLOSED).
Tag (1) Proximity switch (3)
 Adjusting the limit switch

For CLOSED position:

1. Initialize positioner.
2. Use the MAN function to move the
positioner to 5 % (see LC display).
3. Adjust the tag using the yellow adjust-
ment screw (2) until the tag enters or
leaves the field and the switching ampli-
fier responds. You can measure the
switching voltage as an indicator.

Contact function:
Tag leaving the field > contact is made.
Tag entering the field > contact is opened.

For OPEN position:

1. Initialize positioner.
2. Use the MAN function to move the
positioner to 95 % (see LC display).
3. Adjust the tag (1) using the yellow ad-
justment screw (2) until the tag enters or
leaves the field of the proximity switch
(3).
You can measure the switching voltage
as an indicator.

Contact function:
Tag leaving the field > Contact is made.
Tag entering the field > Contact is opened.

EB 8384-5 EN 69
 Retrofitting an inductive limit switch

11 Retrofitting an inductive limit

switch
1
Required retrofit kit:
2
Limit switch Order no. 1400-7460
4
Note! For explosion-protected devices, the
requirements in section 13 need to be kept.
3

1. Take off the rotary pushbutton (3) and

cap (1), unthread the five fixing screws 5
(2) and lift off the plastic cover (9).
2. Use a knife to cut an opening at the
marked location (4). 8
3. Push the connector (11) with cable 7
through the opening and secure the
6
proximity switch (7) on the cover with a
dot of glue.
4. Remove the jumper (item no. 9 7
8801-2267) at the socket X7 of the top
board and insert the cable connector
(11).
5. Guide the cable in such a manner that
the plastic cover can be placed back
onto the positioner. Insert the fixing
screws (2) and screw tight. Attach the
clamping plate (8) onto the proximity
switch.
6. Attach the rotary switch (5). Make sure
the flattened side of the positioner shaft
is turned so that the rotary switch (5) can Socket X7 (11)
be attached with the metal tag next to 6 Metal tag
1 Cap 7 Proximity
the proximity switch. 2 Screws switch
7. Important! 3 Rotary pushbutton 8 Clamping plate
On start-up of the positioner, set the op- 4 Marking 9 Plastic cover
5 Rotary switch 11 Connector
tion "inductive alarm" under Code 38
from NO to YES. Fig. 21 · Retrofitting an inductive limit switch

70 EB 8384-5 EN

12 Maintenance
The positioner does not require any mainte-
nance.
There are filters with a 100 μm mesh size in
the pneumatic connections for supply and
output which can be removed and cleaned,
if required.
The maintenance instructions of any up-
stream supply air pressure reducing stations
must be observed.
Maintenance
13 Servicing explosion-protected
devices
If a part of the positioner on which the ex-
plosion protection is based needs to be ser-
viced, the positioner must not be put back
into operation until an expert has inspected
the device according to explosion protection
requirements, has issued a certificate stating
this or given the device a mark of confor-
mity.
Inspection by an expert is not required if the
manufacturer performs a routine test on the
device prior to putting it back into opera-
tion. The passing of the routine test must be
documented by attaching a mark of confor-
mity to the device.
Explosion-protected components may only
be replaced by original, checked compo-
nents from the manufacturer.
Devices that have already been used outside
of hazardous areas and are intended for
use in hazardous areas in future must com-
ply with the safety demands placed on re-
paired devices. Prior to operation, they must
be tested according to the specifications
stipulated for "Repairing explosion-pro-
tected devices".
EB 8384-5 EN 71
 Fieldbus specification

14 Fieldbus specification
These instructions are based on the following:
4 Fieldbus Foundation Specification "Function Block Application Process Part 1 to 3"
Revision 1.5.
4 Fieldbus Foundation Specification "Transducer Block Application Process Part 1 to 2"
Revision PS 3.0.

14.1 Device description (DD)

The following device description files are needed to integrate the device described into the
host system:
Device Description: < 0101.ffo >, < 0101.sym > Capabilities File: < 010101.cff >
These device description files can be downloaded from the Internet, for example, at
www.fieldbus.org or www.samson.de.

14.2 FOUNDATION™ fieldbus block model

FOUNDATION™ fieldbus assigns all the functions and data of a device to three different
types of blocks. Each type of block has a different range of tasks to fulfill in the block model.
The following types of blocks are implemented in the SAMSON Type 3730-5 Positioner:
4 One Resource Block
The Resource Block contains all the specific characteristics associated with a device on the
Fieldbus, for example, device name, manufacturer number and serial number.
A device can only have one Resource Block.
4 One AO Transducer Block
Each AI or AO Function Block has a Transducer Block which contains all data and de-
vice-specific parameters to connect the device to the process value (sensor or actuator).
The positioner output signal can be directly influenced over the AO Transducer Block.
4 Two DI Transducer Blocks
The DI Transducer Blocks connect binary input signals for transmission and processing
over the fieldbus.
4 One Analog Output Function Block
Function blocks are responsible for the control behavior of a FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
device. A FOUNDATION™ fieldbus application can be configured by connecting the in-
puts and outputs of function blocks.

72 EB 8384-5 EN
 Fieldbus specification

The AO Function Block converts the output value from an upstream function block into a
control value for the valve.
Execution time: 20 ms
4 Two Discrete Input Function Blocks
The DI Function Blocks are used as inputs to control binary signals. They support the se-
lection of binary switching conditions of various functions.
Execution time: 40 ms
4 One PID Function Block
The PID controller has a flexible proportional-integral-differential control algorithm which
can be configured as required to match the application.
Execution time: 60 ms

14.3 Resetting the device

The positioner can be reset in various ways in accordance with the FF specification.

RESTART (16) parameter in the Resource Block:

4 DEFAULTS:
The device data and the link are reset to the values as defined in the FF specification.
4 PROCESSOR:
Warm start of the positioner, restart of the processor.

14.4 Status classification and condensed state

The status alarms are classified in the positioner, i.e. when an alarm is issued, it is assigned
a status. The classification of the states can be changed over the following FF parameters in
the AO Transducer Block:
4 ERROR_OPTION_INIT_FAILURE (36):
Masking of the initialization error
4 ERROR_OPTION_OPERATION_FAILURE (37):
Masking of the operational error
4 ERROR_OPTION_HW_FAILURE (38):
Masking of the hardware error
4 ERROR_OPTION_DATA_FAILURE (39):
Masking of the data error
4 ERROR_OPTION_ENH_DIAGNOSTIC (40 bis 44):
Masking of the status and fault alarms generated by the diagnostics

EB 8384-5 EN 73
 Fieldbus specification

To provide a better overview, the classified alarms are summarized in a condensed state
(CONDENSED_STATE (59) in RES Block). Besides the CONDENSED_STATE parameter, the
condensed state can be issued to the discrete output OUT_D of the DI Function Blocks.
Possible states of the condensed state include:
0 ok

1 Maintenance The positioner still performs its control task (with restrictions). A maintenance re-
required quirement or above average wear has been determined. The wear tolerance will
soon be exhausted or is reducing at a faster rate than expected. Maintenance is
necessary in the medium term.

2 Maintenance The positioner still performs its control task (with restrictions). A maintenance de-
demanded mand or above average wear has been determined. The wear tolerance will soon
be exhausted or is reducing at a faster rate than expected. Maintenance is neces-
sary in the short term.

3 Maintenance The positioner cannot perform its control task due to a functional fault in the device
alarm or in one of its peripherals or an initialization has not yet been successfully com-
pleted.

7 Function check Test or calibration procedures are being performed. The positioner is temporarily
unable to perform its control task until this procedure is completed.

In addition to the condensed status, the block error alarms (BLOCK_ERR) from the Resource
Block and Transducer Block can also be assigned to the events.
In this case, the individual alarms must be classified in the ERROR_OPTION_… (Index 36 to
44) parameter with another status for block errors.
The following classifications are possible:
4 No message
4 Maintenance soon
4 Maintenance now
The block error (BLOCK_ERR) results from the summary of classified alarms that are active.

74 EB 8384-5 EN
 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

15 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

15.1 General
The TROVIS-VIEW software allows various smart SAMSON devices to be configured over a
common operator interface. It consists of the operator interface, communication server, and
the device-specific module. The software has a Windows Explorer® look and feel.
The entire configuration of the positioner can be performed over the TROVIS-VIEW Configu-
ration and Operator Interface. It is not possible to link function blocks of other devices with
the TROVIS-VIEW software. The TROVIS-VIEW software containing online help and the da-
tabase module for Type 3730-5 Positioner is delivered on a CD-ROM (order number
6661-1058). Software updates are available in Internet (http://www.samson.de) in Products
> Support and downloads.

Note: The following instructions include a description on the key functions of the
TROVIS-VIEW software in conjunction with Type 3730-5 Positioner. Refer to the online help
in the ? menu for a detailed description.

15.1.1 System requirements

Hardware requirements
4 PC with Pentium II processor or equivalent (300 MHz or higher), 500 MHz recommended
4 Serial interface and USB/RS-232 adapter
4 Min. 96 MB RAM, 192 MB RAM recommended
4 Min. 150 MB free hard disk space plus approx. 10 to 15 MB additional hard disk space
per SAMSON module
4 SVGA graphic card (min. 800 x 600)
4 CD-ROM drive
Software requirements
4 Operating system: Windows® 2000 (min.SP2), Windows® XP
4 Microsoft.NET Framework Version 2.0 or higher (included on the installation CD-ROM)
4 Internet browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 6.0 or higher
Accessories
4 Serial interface adapter, order no. 1400-7700
(SAMSON SSP interface/ RS-232 port of computer)
4 Isolated USB interface adapter, order no. 1400-9740
(SAMSON SSP interface/ USB port of computer)

EB 8384-5 EN 75
 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

15.2 Installing TROVIS-VIEW software

1. Insert the installation CD-ROM to start the installation program.
Once inserted, the CD-ROM usually starts the installation program automatically, de-
pending on the configuration of the operating system. If the program does not start auto-
matically, double-click setup.exe in the root directory of the CD-ROM in order to install
TROVIS-VIEW.
2. Follow the on-screen prompts and instructions of the installation program.

The TROVIS-VIEW Operator Interface can be used for different SAMSON devices. Note that
the installation program also offers you the option of installing a demo module. To use the
software without restrictions, the software needs to be activated by entering a CD key as fol-
lows:
3. After installation, a dialog box will appear, prompting you to enter the CD key, which
you will find on the cover of the original CD-ROM.
Once you have entered the correct CD key, an activation is necessary. The software can
be activated automatically or manually. Internet access on the computer on which
TROVIS-VIEW is installed is required for automatic activation.
Manual activation:
Once you have entered the correct CD key, a request code will be automatically generated
and displayed which contains computer identification details.
4 Enter request code in SAMSON’s product activation server over the Internet.
(http://support.samson-ag.com:8082/activate_eng.html)
An activation code is generated which allows TROVIS-VIEW to be used without any
restrictions in the purchased scope.
4 Enter this activation code in TROVIS-VIEW.
The TROVIS-VIEW software is now ready for use.
Automatic activation:
A request code containing the computer identification details is transferred to the SAMSON
product activation server when an Internet connection is active and an activation code is au-
tomatically entered into TROVIS-VIEW.
The TROVIS-VIEW software is now ready for use.

Note: Refer to the readme.txt file in the root directory of the CD-ROM for further information
on installation, software updates and current system requirements.

76 EB 8384-5 EN
 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

15.3 Starting TROVIS-VIEW and performing basic settings

You can perform the settings in TROVIS-VIEW either when the positioner is connected (on-
line) to the computer or not connected (offline).

Note: When the positioner is not connected, the default settings appear on the operator in-
terface or, alternatively, a stored TROVIS-VIEW file (*.tro) can be loaded and overwritten by
selecting Open in the File menu.

1. Start TROVIS-VIEW. The operator interface appears with menubar and toolbar as well as
various folders.

2. In Options menu, select Language to

change the interface language.

3. Select Customer data in, Edit menu to

enter data relevant to the plant, e. g.
project name, plant location, operator.

4. Select Load Factory Defaults in Edit

menu if you want to load default settings
(see code list in section 16.1) onto the
operator interface.

EB 8384-5 EN 77
 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

5. Set the communications port for data

communication. Proceed as follows:
4 Connect the port (RS-232 or USB) of
the computer using the
corresponding adapter to the
SAMSON SSP interface of the
positioner.
4 Select Communications in Options
menu to open the server settings win-
dow. Click Server settings button.
4 Check Local connection and Auto-
matically local connect boxes and
click OK button to confirm server set-
tings.
The Communication window reap-
pears.
4 Click Port settings button.
4 The settings window opens and
State: not yet searched appears in
the Automatic detection field.
Click Start button.
TROVIS-VIEW has found the
positioner when State: Device found
on COM .... appears.
4 Click on OK button twice to confirm
settings.

6. If required, add a new TROVIS-VIEW

module by selecting Add module in the
Options menu. Enter the CD key (written
on the installation CD-ROM) in the open
window.
7. If required, enter the type, date and se-
lectable parameters which are used to automatically create the TROVIS-VIEW file name.
The file name created in this way appears on saving a TROVIS-VIEW file (e.g.
VIEW3_3730_5.tro) and can be adopted or altered.

78 EB 8384-5 EN
 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

Converting the software version

The TROVIS-VIEW software version must match the firmware of the positioner.
On exchanging data between the positioner and TROVIS-VIEW, the software automatically
checks whether the versions are compatible and, if necessary, converts the data.
If you want to adapt the firmware version without exchanging any data, proceed as follows:
1. Select Convert in the File menu.
A window with a drop-down list of all
the available firmware versions appears.
2. Select the corresponding version.
3. Click on OK button to confirm the se-
lected version.

Note: The TROVIS-VIEW software version for communication with EXPERT+ applies for all
positioners in which the extended valve diagnostics option has been activated.
The EXPERT+ extended valve diagnostics is an optional diagnostic software integrated in the
positioner which allows predictive, status-oriented maintenance of pneumatic control valves.
An activation code is required which needs to be ordered to activate this option.

15.4 Data transmission

Settings performed in the operator interface can be made both when the positioner is con-
nected or not connected. When the positioner is connected, data uploaded from the
positioner can be overwritten.
The default setting appear on the operator interface when no positioner is connected. A
stored TROVIS-VIEW file (*.tro) can be loaded and overwritten by selecting Open in the File
menu.
Connection to the positioner can also be made by clicking the icons on the top right in the
device toolbar:

EB 8384-5 EN 79
 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

Data from the positioner are uploaded and shown in the operator interface.
The complete set of data is downloaded to the positioner from the operator interface.
To transfer individual parameters, open the corresponding context-sensitive menu. Select
Write to just download the selected parameter, refer to section 15.4.3.
The positioner is in the online mode, indicated by the TROVIS-VIEW 3 logo on the top
right in blue.
The positioner is in the offline mode.
The listed functions can be activated in the Device menu.

Note: Perform the electrical connection as described in section 5.2 first before downloading
any data to the positioner.

15.4.1 Offline operation (indirect data transmission)

In offline mode, there is no constant data communication between the computer and
positioner. Communication must first be established to upload data from the positioner and
download data to the positioner.
4 Downloading data to the positioner: Select Download to the device in Device menu to
transfer data to the positioner. The control task is implemented after data are down-
loaded from TROVIS-VIEW.
4 Uploading data from the positioner: Select Upload from device in Device menu to trans-
fer all the data from the positioner. Uploaded data are indicated in TROVIS-VIEW by the
icon.

Note:
Data transmission can also be performed by clicking the icons in the device toolbar:
click to download data from TROVIS-VIEW to the positioner and, click to upload data
from the positioner and to display them in TROVIS-VIEW.

15.4.2 Online operation (direct data transmission)

The positioner and TROVIS-VIEW are constantly connected in online operation. Current con-
figuration and operating data are uploaded from the positioner cyclically and displayed in
TROVIS-VIEW. Likewise, any settings performed in TROVIS-VIEW are directly transferred to
the positioner.

80 EB 8384-5 EN
 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

4 Activate online operation: Select Online in Device menu to activate online mode.
In online mode, on the device toolbar is animated.
4 Deactivate online operation: Select Online in Device menu while the online mode is acti-
vated. The online mode is canceled.

Note!
Alternatively, click on the device toolbar to activate and deactivate online operation.

Operational data graphs (Trend Viewer)

In online mode, process data (positioning value TRD, actual valve position and set point
deviation [e]) are plotted in a graph over time. Select Trend Viewer in the View menu. You
can modify the graphs, for example, by adding data points that should be recorded, or even
remove data points. Right-click on the graph to save the analysis in a file.

Note: Drag and drop other data points in the Trend Viewer to add them.

15.4.3 Setting parameters

Properties of data points are indicated by icons on clicking on a folder:
Icon Meaning
Data cannot be changed

Data can be changed

Data point can be executed

Data point is user-defined

Mark to indicate status/error

Value has exceeded maximum limit

Value has fallen below minimum limit

Source of data:
Value has been modified manually
Value has been uploaded from the positioner.
In online mode, X in the icon indicates a value has been updated.
Value originates from a stored file

EB 8384-5 EN 81
 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

Parameters are data points whose settings can be changed. They are marked by the
icon. Their settings can be made either in online or offline mode.
1. Click on one of the folders in the left tree directory to view the parameter settings on the
right. Place the cursor over a data point to open a tool tip providing more information on
the parameter.
2. Double-click the required parameter to open a pop-up window to modify parameter set-
ting.

Right-click the required parameter to open pop-up window to modify parameter settings:
Modify Opens pop-up window to modify parameter settings.
Read Uploads parameter value from device.
Write Downloads parameter value to device.
Default: ... Resets parameter to default setting (setting in gray to indicate that the
parameter value is the same as the default setting)
Min … Set parameter to the displayed minimum value.
Max … Set parameter to the displayed maximum value

Note: Refer to the code list (section 16.1 on page 88 onwards) for descriptions of each pa-
rameter. The code number assigned to a FF parameter is listed in the Comment column in
TROVIS-VIEW.

82 EB 8384-5 EN
 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

15.5 Initializing the positioner and performing an operational test

Initializing the positioner and performing an operational test are only possible in
TROVIS-VIEW when the positioner has been attached properly to the control valve and has
been connected (see sections 4 and 5). The positioner must be connected to the computer
over the serial interface adapter.
The positioner does not need to be connected to a FOUNDATION fieldbus segment. It just
needs to be supplied over the bus terminals with an electrical power supply (9 to 32 V DC).

Initialization

NOTICE
During the initialization, the control valve moves through its entire travel/angle of rotation
range. Therefore, do not start initialization while a process is running, but only during
start-up, when all shut-off valves are closed.

1. Change parameter settings in Start-up folder in Positioner (AO, TRD).

2. Select the initialization type under Initialization (maximum range, nominal range, man-
ual adjustment, substitute) in the Positioner (AO, TRD) folder in the Start-up subfolder.

EB 8384-5 EN 83
 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

3. Start initialization by right-clicking

Initialization and selecting Execute.
How long the initialization procedure lasts
depends on the actuator transit time and may
take a few minutes.

Operational test

1. Start the test mode by clicking icon.

If the positioner is not connected (online), TROVIS-VIEW establishes the connection auto-
matically.
A warning appears that the operating mode will be changed into the manual mode
(MAN).
2. Confirm the warning message.
The Modify Final Value window appears.
3. Enter required final value.
4. Confirm the final value by clicking the Write button.
The final value is download onto the positioner and the valve is positioned using this new
value.
The positioner exits the manual mode (MAN) and changes back to the operating mode
originally selected.

84 EB 8384-5 EN
 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

15.6 Status classification

Alarms are classified in the positioner with a status when an error occurs. States include
“Maintenance alarm“, “Maintenance required“, “Maintenance demanded “, “Function
check“ and “No message“.
4 Maintenance alarm
The positioner cannot perform its control task due to a functional fault in the device or in
one of its peripherals or an initialization has not yet been successfully completed.
4 Maintenance required
The positioner still performs its control task (with restrictions). A maintenance demand or
above average wear has been determined. The wear tolerance will soon be exhausted or
is reducing at a faster rate than expected. Maintenance is necessary in the medium term.
4 Maintenance demanded
The positioner still performs its control task (with restrictions). A maintenance demand or
above average wear has been determined. The wear tolerance will soon be exhausted or
is reducing at a faster rate than expected. Maintenance is necessary in the short term.
4 Function check
Test or calibration procedures are being performed. The positioner is temporarily unable
to perform its control task until this procedure is completed.
4 No message
When this classification is active, it does not have any affect on the condensed state.
You can change the status classification in the Positioner folder (> Error control > Classifica-
tion report).

Status classification of a single alarm TROVIS-VIEW3/DD

Maintenance alarm red

Maintenance required/demanded blue

Function check orange

No message white

EB 8384-5 EN 85
 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

To provide a better overview, the classified alarms are summarized in a condensed state
which is made up from a summary of all classified positioner alarms.
The condensed state appears in TROVIS-VIEW3 on the right-hand side of the info bar and in
the Diagnosis folder (> Status messages). The Diagnosis folder (> Status messages) indicates
which errors are responsible for setting the condensed state.

Note: Condensed state and status alarms are marked with in TROVIS-VIEW3 until they
are read out.

The reading of the condensed state is as follows:

Condensed state TROVIS-VIEW3/DD Positioner display

Maintenance alarm red

Maintenance required/
blue
Maintenance demanded

Text, e.g.
Function check orange
tESting, TunE or tESt

No message green

86 EB 8384-5 EN
Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software

EB 8384-5 EN 87
 Appendix

16 Appendix

16.1 Code list

Code Parameter – Display, values
Description
no. [default setting]
Note: Codes with marked with an asterisk (*) must be enabled with Code 3 prior to configuration.

0 Operating mode Switchover from automatic to manual mode is smooth.

[MAN] Manual mode In fail-safe mode, the symbol S appears on the display.
AUtO Automatic In MAN and AUtO mode, the system deviation is represented by
mode the bar graph elements.
SAFE Fail-safe When the positioner is initialized, the numerical display indicates
position the valve position or the angle of rotation in %, otherwise the po-
ESC Escape sition of the lever in relation to the central axis is displayed in de-
grees °.

1 Manual w
0 to 100 [0] %
of the nominal range
Adjust the manual set point with the rotary pushbutton, the
current travel/angle is displayed in % when the positioner is ini-
tialized, otherwise the position of the lever in relation to the cen-
tral axis is indicated in degrees °.
Note: Can only be selected when Code 0 = MAN

2 Reading direction The reading direction of the display is turned by 180°.

[Normal] or upside down
ESC

3 Enable configuration
[OFF] ON ESC
Enables the option to modify data (automatically deactivated when
the rotary pushbutton has not been operated for 120 s.)
FF blinks on the display when the on-site operation is locked.
Codes marked with an asterisk (*) can only be read and not
overwritten.
Likewise, codes can only read over the SSP interface.

88 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

Code Parameter – Display, values

Description
no. [default setting]
Note: Codes with marked with an asterisk (*) must be enabled with Code 3 prior to configuration.

4* Pin position The follower pin must be inserted into the correct pin position ac-
17, 25, 35, 50, 70, 100, cording to the valve travel/angle of rotation.
200 mm For initialization using NOM or SUb, this pin position must be
entered.
90° with rotary actuators
Pin position Standard Adjustment range
[OFF], ESC
Code 4 Code 5 Code 5
17 7.5 3.6 to 17.7
25 7.5 5.0 to 25.0
Note! If you select a pin 35 15.0 7.0 to 35.4
position in Code 4 that is too 50 30.0 10.0 to 50.0
small, the positioner switches 70 40.0 14.0 to 70.7
to SAFE mode for reasons of 100 60.0 20.0 to 100.0
safety 200 120.0 40.0 to 200.0
90° 90.0 24.0 to 100.0

5* Nominal range For initialization using NOM or SUb, the nominal travel/angle of
mm or angle ° rotation of the valve must be entered.
The permissible adjustment range depends on the pin position
ESC
according to the table for Code 4.
Code 5 is generally locked until Code 4 is set to OFF, i.e. after a
pin position has been entered, Code 5 can be configured.
After initialization has been successfully completed, the maximum
nominal travel/angle reached on initialization is displayed.

6* Init mode Select the initialization mode

[MAX] MAX: Travel/angle of the closure member from the CLOSED
NOM position to the opposite stop in the actuator.
MAN NOM: Travel/angle of the closure member measured from the
SUb CLOSED position to the indicated OPEN position.
ZP
MAN: Manually selected range
ESC
SUb: Substitute calibration (without initialization)
ZP: Zero calibration

EB 8384-5 EN 89
 Appendix

Code Parameter – Display, values

Description
no. [default setting]
Note: Codes with marked with an asterisk (*) must be enabled with Code 3 prior to configuration.

7* w/x Direction of action of the reference variable w in relation to the

[ää] increasing/increasing travel/angle of rotation x
äæ increasing/decreasing Automatic adaptation:
ESC AIR TO OPEN:
On completing initialization, the direction of action remains in-
creasing/increasing (ää), a globe valve opens as the mA signal
increases.
AIR TO CLOSE:
On completing initialization, the direction of action changes to
increasing/decreasing (äæ), a globe valve closes as the mA
signal increases.

8* Travel/angle range start
(lower x-range value)
0.0 to 80.0 [0.0] % of the
nominal range
ESC
Note! Specified in mm or
angle ° provided Code 4 is
set
Lower range value for the travel/angle of rotation in the nominal
or operating range.
The operating range is the actual travel/angle of the control
valve and is limited by the lower x-range value (Code 8) and the
upper x-range value (Code 9).
Usually, the operating range and the nominal range are identi-
cal. The nominal range can be limited to the operating range by
the lower and upper x-range values.
Value is displayed or must be entered.
The characteristic is adapted. See also the example in Code 9!

9* Travel/angle range end
(upper x-range value)
20.0 to 100.0 [100.0] % of
the nominal range
ESC
Note! Specified in mm or
angle ° provided Code 4 is
set
Upper range value for the travel/angle of rotation in the nominal
or operating range.
Value is displayed or must be entered.
The characteristic is adapted.
Example: The operating range is modified, for example, to limit
the range of a control valve which has been sized too large. For
this function, the entire resolution range of the reference variable
is converted to the new limits. 0 % on the display corresponds to
the adjusted lower limit and 100 % to the adjusted upper limit.

10* Travel/angle lower limit Limitation of the travel/angle of rotation downwards to the en-
(lower x-limit) tered value, the characteristic is not adapted.
0.0 to 49.9 % of the
operating range The characteristic is not adapted to the reduced range. See also
[OFF], ESC example in Code 11.

90 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

Code Parameter – Display, values

Description
no. [default setting]
Note: Codes with marked with an asterisk (*) must be enabled with Code 3 prior to configuration.

11* Travel/angle upper limit
(upper x-limit)
50.0 to 120.0 [100] % of
the operating range
OFF, ESC
Limitation of the travel/angle of rotation upwards to the entered
value, the characteristic is not adapted.
Example: In some applications, it is better to limit the valve
travel, e.g. if a certain minimum medium flow is required or a
maximum flow must not be reached.
The lower limit must be adjusted with Code 10, and the upper
limit with Code 11.
If a tight-closing function has been set up, it has priority over the
travel limitation!
When set to OFF, the valve can be opened past the nominal tra-
vel with a reference variable outside of the 0 to 100 % range.

14* Reference variable range If w approaches the percentage adjusted at the final value that
start (w-start) causes the valve to close, the actuator is immediately completely
0.0 to 49.9 [1.0] % vented (with AIR TO OPEN) or filled with air (with AIR TO
of the span adjusted via CLOSE). This action always lead to maximum tight-closing of the
Code 12/13 valve.
OFF, ESC Codes 14/15 have priority over Codes 8/9/10/11.
Codes 21/22 have priority over Codes 14/15.

15* Reference variable range If w approaches the percentage adjusted at the final value that
end (w-end) causes the valve to open, the actuator is immediately completely
50.0 to 100.0 % filled with air (with AIR TO OPEN) or vented (with AIR TO
of the span adjusted via CLOSE). This action always lead to the valve being completely
Code 12/13 opened.
Codes 14/15 have priority over Codes 8/9/10/11.
[OFF], ESC
Codes 21/22 have priority over Codes 14/15.
Example: Set the final position w > to 99 % for three-way valves.

16* Pressure limit The signal pressure to the actuator can be limited in stages.
1.4 2.4 3.7 bar After changing a pressure limit already set, the actuator must be
[OFF], ESC vented once (e.g. by selecting the fail-safe position (SAFE) over
Code 0).
NOTICE
Do not activate the pressure limit for double-acting actuators with
fail-safe position AIR TO OPEN (AtO).

EB 8384-5 EN 91
 Appendix

Code Parameter – Display, values

Description
no. [default setting]
Note: Codes with marked with an asterisk (*) must be enabled with Code 3 prior to configuration.

17* Proportional-action Displaying or changing KP

coefficient KP (step) Note on changing the KP and TV steps:
0 to 17 [7] During the initialization of the positioner, the KP and TV values are
ESC optimized.
Should the positioner show a tendency for impermissibly high
post-pulse oscillation due to additional interference, the KP and
TV steps can be adapted after the initialization.
For this, either the TV step can be increased in increments until
the desired response behavior is reached or, when the maximum
value of 4 is reached, the KP step can be decreased in incre-
ments.

NOTICE
Changing the KP step influences the system deviation.

18* Rate time TV (step) Displaying or changing TV,

1 [2] 3 4 OFF see note under KP step
OFF, ESC A change of the TV step has no effect on the system deviation.

19* Tolerance band Used for error monitoring

0.1 to 10.0 [5] % of the Determination of the tolerance band in relation to the operating
operating range range.
ESC Associated lag time [30] s is a reset criterion.
If a transit time is determined during initialization which is
six times > 30 s, the six-fold transit time is accepted as the lag
time.

92 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

Code Parameter – Display, values

Description
no. [default setting]
Note: Codes with marked with an asterisk (*) must be enabled with Code 3 prior to configuration.

20* Characteristic Select the characteristic:

0 to 9 [0] 0 Linear
ESC 1 Equal percentage
2 Reverse equal percentage
3 SAMSON butterfly valve linear
4 SAMSON butterfly valve equal percentage
5 VETEC rotary plug valve linear
6 VETEC rotary plug valve equal percentage
7 Segmented ball valve linear
8 Segmented ball valve equal percentage
9 User-defined (defined over operating software)
Note: The various characteristics are listed in the Appendix
(section 18).

21* Required transit time OPEN The time required to pass through the operating range when the
(w ramp open) valve opens.
0 to 240 s [0] Limitation of the transit time (Code 21 and 22):
For some applications it is recommendable to limit the transit time
ESC
of the actuator to prevent it from engaging too fast in the running
process.
Code 21 has priority over Code 15.
NOTICE
The function is not activated when the fail-safe function or sole-
noid valve is triggered nor upon failure of the auxiliary power.

22* Required transit time The time required to pass through the operating range when the
CLOSED (w ramp closed) valve closes.
[0] to 240 s Code 22 has priority over Code 14.
ESC NOTICE
The function is not activated when the fail-safe function or sole-
noid valve is triggered nor upon failure of the auxiliary power.

23* Total valve travel Totaled double valve travel.

0 to 99 · 107 [0] Can be reset to 0 via RES.
Exponential reading from 9999 travel Note: The total valve travel is saved in a non-volatile memory
cycles onwards
after every 1000 double travel.
RES, ESC

EB 8384-5 EN 93
 Appendix

Code Parameter – Display, values

Description
no. [default setting]
Note: Codes with marked with an asterisk (*) must be enabled with Code 3 prior to configuration.

24* LV total valve travel Limit value of total valve travel. If the limit is exceeded, the fault
1000 to 99 · 107 symbol and the wrench symbol corresponding with the collective
[1 000 000] status appear.
Exponential reading from 9999 travel
cycles onwards
ESC

34* Closing direction Turning direction in which the valve is moved to the CLOSED po-
CL Clockwise sition (view onto the rotary switch motion when the positioner
cover is open).
[CCL] Counterclockwise
Needs only be entered in initialization mode SUb (Code 6).
ESC

35* Blocking position Entering the blocking position.

[0] mm/° /% Distance up to the CLOSED position.
Only necessary in initialization mode SUb.
ESC

36* Reset Resets all start-up parameters to default (factory setting). Does not
[OFF], RUN, ESC apply to block configuration.
Note: After setting RUN, the positioner must be re-initialized.

38* Inductive alarm Indicates whether the inductive limit switch option is installed or
[NO], YES, ESC not.

39 System deviation e info Display only,

–99.9 to 999.9 % indicates the deviation from the position required.

40 Transit time Open info Display only,

0 to 240 s [0] minimum opening time determined during initialization.

41 Transit time Closed info Display only,

0 to 240 s [0] minimum closing time determined during initialization.

42 Auto-w/manual-w info Display only,

0.0 to 100.0 % of the span Auto mode: indicates the supplied automatic reference variable
Man mode: indicates the supplied manual reference variable

43 Firmware info control Display only,

indicates the positioner type and current firmware version in
alternating sequence.

94 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

Code Parameter – Display, values

Description
no. [default setting]
Note: Codes with marked with an asterisk (*) must be enabled with Code 3 prior to configuration.

44 y info Display only.

[0] to 100 % Indicates the control signal y in % based on the travel range de-
0P, MAX, – – – termined on initialization
MAX: The positioner builds up its maximum output pressure, see
description in Code 14 and 15.
0P: The positioner vents completely, see description in Code 14
and 15.
– – –: The positioner is not initialized.

45 Solenoid valve info Display only,

YES, HIGH/LOW, NO
indicates whether a solenoid valve is installed or not.
If a voltage supply is connected at the terminals of the installed
solenoid valve, YES and HIGH appear on the display in alternat-
ing sequence. If a voltage supply is not connected (actuator
vented, fail-safe position indicated on the display by the S icon),
YES and LOW appear on the display in alternating sequence.

46* Bus address Select bus address

ESC

47* Write protection FF When the write protection function is activated, device data can
YES, [NO], ESC only be read, but not overwritten over FF communication.

48* Diagnostic parameters d

d0 Current temperature Operating temperature [°C] inside the positioner

–55 to 125

d1 Minimum temperature The lowest temperature below 20 °C that has ever occurred.
[20]

d2 Maximum temperature The highest temperature above 20 °C that has ever occurred.
[20]

d3 Number of zero The number of zero calibrations since the last initialization.
calibrations

d4 Number of initializations The number of initializations that have been performed.

d5 Zero point limit Limit for the zero point monitoring.

0.0 to 100.0 % [5 %]

EB 8384-5 EN 95
 Appendix

Code Parameter – Display, values

Description
no. [default setting]
Note: Codes with marked with an asterisk (*) must be enabled with Code 3 prior to configuration.

48* d6 Condensed status
d7 Start reference run
[OFF], ON, ESC, 1
Condensed status, made up from the individual states.
0 OK: Okay
1 C: Maintenance required
2 CR: Maintenance demanded
3 B: Maintenance alarm
7 I: Function check
Triggering of a reference run for the functions: Drive signal y
steady-state and drive signal y hysteresis.
The reference run can only be activated in manual operating
mode as the valve moves through its entire travel range.
If EXPERT+ is activated at later point in time, the reference graphs
must be plotted in order to activate the diagnostic functions.

d8 EXPERT+ activation Enter the activation code for EXPERT+.

After the activation procedure has been successfully completed,
YES appears under d8.

FF parameters FF-P
F0 Firmware Rev.
Communication
F1 Binary input 1 1 Active 0 Inactive
F2 Binary input 2 1 Active 0 Inactive
F3 Simulate Activation of simulation mode
F4 to F7 Unassigned
AO Function Block A
A0 Target Mode Required operating mode

A1 Actual Mode Actual operating mode

A2 CAS_IN Value Display of the analog reference variable adopted from an

upstream function block

A3 CAS_IN Status and its status

A4 SP Value Displays the set point (reference variable)

A5 SP Status and its status

A6 Out Value Displays the manipulated variable (output value)

96 EB 8384-5 EN

Code Parameter – Display, values
no. [default setting]
Note: Codes with marked with an asterisk (*) must be enabled with Code 3 prior to configuration.
48* A7 Out Status
A8 Block Error
PID Function Block P
P0 Target Mode
P1 Actual Mode
P2 CAS_IN Value
P3 CAS_IN Status
P4 SP Value
P5 SP Status
P6 Out Value
P7 Out Status
P8 Block Error
Transducer Blocks A0, DI1, DI2 t
t0 Target Mode AO TRD
t1 Actual Mode AO TRD
t2 Transducer State
t3 Block Error AO TRD
t4 Target Mode DI1
t5 Actual Mode DI1 TRD
t6 Block Error DI1 TRD
t7 Target Mode DI2 TRD
t8 Actual Mode DI2
t9 Block Error DI2
Resource Block S
S0 Resource Target Mode
Appendix
Description
and its status
Displays the current block error
Required operating mode
Actual operating mode
Display of the analog reference variable adopted from an
upstream function block
and its status
Displays the set point (reference variable)
and its status
Displays the manipulated variable (output value)
und its status
Displays the current block error
Required operating mode
Actual operating mode
State of the Transducer Block
Displays the current block error
Required operating mode
Actual operating mode
Displays the current block error
Required operating mode
Actual operating mode
Displays the current block error
Required operating mode
EB 8384-5 EN 97
 Appendix

Code Parameter – Display, values

Description
no. [default setting]
Note: Codes with marked with an asterisk (*) must be enabled with Code 3 prior to configuration.

48* S1 Resource Actual Mode Actual operating mode

S2 Resource Block Error
DI1Function Block I
I0 Target Mode DI1
I1 Actual Mode DI1
I2 Field_Val_D.Value
I3 Field_Val_D.Status
I4 OUT_D.Value
I5 OUT_D.Status
I6 Block Error
D2 Function Block L
L0 Target Mode DI2
L1 Actual Mode DI2
L2 Field_Val_D.Value
L3 Field_Val_D.Status
L4 OUT_D.Value
L5 OUT_D.Status
L6 Block Error
Displays the current block error
Required operating mode
Actual operating mode
Displays the discrete input variable
and its status
Displays the discrete output variable
and its status
Displays the current block error
Required operating mode
Actual operating mode
Displays the discrete input variable
and its status
Displays the discrete output variable
and its status
Displays the current block error

Note: The error codes listed in following appear in the display corresponding to their status
classification set over the condensed state (Maintenance required/Maintenance demanded:
, Maintenance alarm: ). If “No message” is assigned to the error code as the status
classification, the error is not included in the condensed state.
A status classification is assigned to every error code in the default setting. The status classifi-
cation of error codes can also be changed as required using an operating software (e.g.
TROVIS-VIEW).

98 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

Initialization errors

Error codes – Recommended action Condensed state alarm active, when prompted, Err appears.
When fault alarms exist, they are displayed here.

50 x > range The value supplied by the measuring signal is either too high or
too low, the measuring sensor is close to its mechanical limit.
• Pin positioned incorrectly.
• Bracket slipped in case of NAMUR attachment or positioner is
not central.
• Follower plate incorrectly attached.

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Check attachment and pin position, set operating mode from
SAFE to MAN and re-initialize the positioner.

51 Δx < range The measuring span of the sensor is too low.

• Pin positioned incorrectly.
• Wrong lever.
A rotational angle smaller than 11° at the positioner shaft creates
just an alarm. An angle below 6° leads to the initialization being
canceled.

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Check attachment and re-initialize the positioner.

52 Attachment • Positioner attachment incorrect.

• Nominal travel/angle (Code 5) could not be achieved during
initialization under NOM (no tolerance downwards
permissible).
• Mechanical or pneumatic fault, e.g. wrong lever selected or
supply pressure too low to move to the required position.

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Check attachment and supply pressure. Re-initialize the

positioner.
Under certain circumstances, it may be possible to check the
maximum travel/angle by entering the actual pin position and
then performing an initialization under MAX.
After initialization has been completed, the Code 5 indicates the
maximum achieved travel or angle.

EB 8384-5 EN 99
 Appendix

Error codes – Recommended action Condensed state alarm active, when prompted, Err appears.
When fault alarms exist, they are displayed here.

53 Initialization time exceeded The initialization routine lasts too long.

(Init time >) • No pressure on the supply line or there is a leak.
• Supply air failure during initialization.

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Check attachment and supply pressure.

Re-initialize the positioner.

54 Initialization - solenoid 1) A solenoid valve is installed (Code 45 = YES) and was

valve not or not properly connected so that an actuator pressure
could not be built up. The alarm is generated when you
attempt to initialize the positioner.
2) If you attempt to initialize the device from the fail-safe
position (SAFE).
Status classification [Maintenance required]
Recommended action Re. 1) Check connection and supply voltage of the forced venting
Code 45 HIGH/LOW
Re. 2) Set the MAN operating mode over Code 0. Then initialize
the positioner.

55 Transit time too short The actuator positioning rates determined during the initialization
(transit time <) are so short that the positioner cannot adapt itself optimally.

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Check the volume restriction setting as described in section 7.2,
re-initialize the positioner.

56 Pin position Initialization was canceled because you are required to enter the
pin position for the selected initialization modes NOM and SUb.

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Enter pin position over Code 4 and nominal travel/angle over
Code 5. Re-initialize the positioner.

100 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

Operational errors

Error codes – Recommended action Condensed state alarm active, when prompted, Err appears.
When fault alarms exist, they are displayed here.

57 Control loop Control loop error, the control valve does not react within the tol-
erable times of the controlled variable (tolerance band alarm
Code 19).
• Actuator mechanically blocked.
• Attachment of the positioner subsequently shifted.
• Supply pressure not sufficient.

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Check attachment.

58 Zero point Zero point incorrect.

Error may arise when the mounting position/linkage of the posi-
tioner moves or when the valve seat trim is worn, especially with
soft-sealed plugs.

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Check valve and mounting of the positioner. If OK, perform a
zero calibration over Code 6 (see section 7.7 on page 61).
If the lever position on the back of the positioner has been
changed (e.g. while exchanging the lever), move the lever as far
as it will go in both directions to adapt it to the internal mea-
suring lever.

59 Autocorrection Should an error occur in the data range of the positioner, the
self-monitoring function recognizes it and automatically corrects
it.

Status classification [No message]

Recommended action Automatic

60 Fatal error An error was detected in the data relevant for safety,
autocorrection is not possible. This may be due to EMC
disturbances.
The positioner changes to the fail-safe position (SAFE).

Status classification Maintenance alarm (cannot be classified)

Recommended action Reset over Code 36.

Re-initialize the positioner.

EB 8384-5 EN 101
 Appendix

Hardware errors

Error codes – Recommended action Condensed state alarm active, when prompted, Err appears.
When fault alarms exist, they are displayed here.

62 x signal Determination of the measured data for the actuator has failed.
Conductive plastic element is defective.
The positioner continues to run in emergency mode, but should
be replaced as soon as possible.
The emergency mode on the display is indicated by a blinking
closed-loop operation icon and 4 dashes instead of the position
indication.

Note on the closed-loop operation:

If the measuring system has failed, the positioner is still in a reli-
able state. The positioner switches to emergency mode where the
position cannot be accurately controlled anymore. However, the
positioner continues operation according to its reference variable
signal so that the process remains in a safe state.

Status classification [Maintenance demanded]

Recommended action Return the positioner to SAMSON AG for repair.

64 i/p converter The circuit of the i/p converter has been interrupted.

Status classification Maintenance alarm (cannot be classified)

Recommended action Cannot be remedied.

Return the positioner to SAMSON AG for repair.

65 Hardware A hardware error has occurred, the positioner changes to the

fail-safe position (SAFE).

Status classification Maintenance alarm (cannot be classified)

Recommended action Confirm error and return to the automatic operating mode, or
perform a reset and re-initialize the device. If this is not success-
ful, return device to SAMSON AG for repair.

66 Data memory The writing of data to the data memory does not work anymore,
e.g. when the written data deviate from the read data.
Valve moves to the fail-safe position.

Status classification Maintenance alarm (cannot be classified)

Recommended action Return the positioner to SAMSON AG for repair.

102 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

Error codes – Recommended action Condensed state alarm active, when prompted, Err appears.
When fault alarms exist, they are displayed here.

67 Test calculation The hardware controller is monitored by means of a test

calculation.

Status classification Maintenance alarm (cannot be classified)

Recommended action Confirm error. If this is not possible, return the positioner to
SAMSON AG for repair.

EB 8384-5 EN 103
 Appendix

Data errors

Error codes – Recommended action Condensed state alarm active, when prompted, Err appears.
When fault alarms exist, they are displayed here.

68 Control parameter Control parameter error

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Confirm error, perform reset and re-initialize the positioner.

69 Poti parameter Parameter error of the digital potentiometer.

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Confirm error, perform reset and re-initialize the positioner.

70 Calibration parameter Error in the production calibration data. Subsequently, the device
runs on default values.

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Return the positioner to SAMSON AG for repair.

71 General parameters Parameter errors that are not critical for the control.

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Confirm error.

Check and, if necessary, reset required parameters.

73 Internal device error 1 Internal device error

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Return the positioner to SAMSON AG for repair.

74 FF parameters Parameter errors that are not critical for the control.

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Confirm error and perform reset.

104 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

Error codes – Recommended action Condensed state alarm active, when prompted, Err appears.
When fault alarms exist, they are displayed here.

76 No emergency mode The travel measuring system of the positioner has a

self-monitoring function (see Code 62).
An emergency mode (open-loop control) is not available for
certain actuators, such as double-acting actuators. In this case,
the positioner changes to the fail-safe position (SAFE) when a
measuring error occurs. During the initialization, the positioner
checks whether the actuator has such a function or not.

Status classification [No message]

Recommended action Merely information, confirm, if necessary.

No further action necessary.

77 Program loading error When the positioner starts operation for the first time after the in-
put signal has been applied, it carries out a self-test (tEStinG runs
across the display).
If the positioner loads the wrong program, the valve moves to the
fail-safe position. It is not possible to make the valve leave this
fail-safe position again.

Status classification Maintenance alarm (cannot be classified)

Recommended action Interrupt current and restart positioner.

Otherwise, return the positioner to SAMSON AG for repair.

78 Options parameter Errors in options parameters

Status classification [Maintenance required]

Recommended action Return the positioner to SAMSON AG for repair.

EB 8384-5 EN 105
 Appendix

Diagnosis errors

Error codes – Recommended action Condensed state alarm active, when prompted, Err appears.
When fault alarms exist, they are displayed here.

79 Diagnostic alarms Alarms are generated by the extended EXPERT+ diagnostics if

EXPERT+ has been activated under Code 48

Status classification Maintenance required (cannot be classified)

80 Diagnostic parameters Errors that are not critical for control.

Status classification Maintenance required (cannot be classified)

81 Reference graphs An error occurred during plotting the reference graphs for drive
signal y steady-state or drive signal y hysteresis.
• Reference test was interrupted
• Reference line for drive signal y steady-state or drive signal y
hysteresis was not adopted.

Status classification [No message]

Recommended action Check and, if necessary, perform a new reference test

106 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

16.2 Parameters
Several parameters can only be modified in certain modes (see Read/write capability in the
parameter description). In this case, not the actual mode is decisive, but the target mode.

16.2.1 Resource Block

The Resource Block contains all the data that identify the device. It is similar to an electronic
device tag.
Resource Block parameters include device type, device name, manufacturer ID, serial num-
ber as well as parameters which affect the behavior of all other blocks of the device.

Refer to page 118 for the list of parameters.

All time specifications in the Resource Block are specified in the unit of 1/32 ms according to
the Fieldbus Specification Version 1.5.
In the Device Description Library supplied by Fieldbus Foundation upon which the device
description of 3730-5 is also based, these parameters are incorrectly specified as the unit of
ms. The specified values supplied by the device are, however, always to be interpreted as the
unit of 1/32 ms.

16.2.2 Analog Output Transducer Block

The Transducer Block allows the input and output variables of a function block to be influ-
enced. In this way, process data can be used to calibrate measured and control data,
linearize characteristics, or convert engineering units. Transducer Block parameters include
information on the type of actuator, attachment, engineering units, commissioning, diagnos-
tics as well as device-specific parameters.
The Standard Advanced Positioner Valve Transducer Block receives an output value from an
upstream Analog Output Function Block. This value is used to position a control valve. The
block contains parameters to adapt the positioner to the actuator and valve as well as for
valve commissioning and diagnostics.

Refer to page 128 for the list of parameters.

EB 8384-5 EN 107
 Appendix

16.2.3 Discrete Input Transducer Blocks

Discrete Input Transducer Blocks directly connect the physical inputs of the field device to the
assigned function blocks.
The CHANNEL parameter is used to assign the Transducer Blocks to the function blocks.
The Type 3730-5 Positioner has two binary inputs that work independently from one an-
other. A Discrete Input Function Block exists for each input.
The DI Transducer Blocks are implemented according to the FF Specification and do not con-
tain any manufacturer-specific parameters.

108 EB 8384-5 EN
 Fig. 22 · Analog Output Transducer Block
FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_HI
FINAL_VALUE from AO Block OUT FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_LO

Upper
final position

AUTO AUTO
MOVING_DIRECTION
MAN TRAVEL_UPPER_LIMIT
MAN LIN_TYPE FINAL_VALUE_RANGE
O/S TRAVEL_LOWER_LIMIT
LO SET_FAIL_SAFE_POS SAFE
Lower
final position

MODE_BLK

PD controller

Capacity booster
D KP_STEP i
PRESSURE_LIMIT
A TV_STEP p

Supply air Vented air

To AO Block
EB 8384-5 EN

D U
MOVING_DIRECTION FINAL_VALUE_RANGE
READBACK A

Appendix
FINAL_POSITION_VALUE
109
 Appendix

16.2.4 Analog Output Function Block

The Analog Output Function Block processes an analog signal from an upstream function
block (e.g. PID Block) into an output value intended for the downstream Transducer Block
(e.g. valve positioner). It contains scaling functions and ramp functions as well as other func-
tions.
The AO Block receives its set point depending on the mode (MODE_BLK) from one of the in-
put variables CAS_IN, RCAS_IN or SP. An internal working set point is created from it, tak-
ing into account the PV_SCALE, SP_HI_LIM and SP_LO_LIM, SP_RATE_UP and
SP_RATE_DN.
Depending on the IO_OPTS and XD_SCALE parameters, an output value OUT is generated
which is passed on to the downstream Transducer Block over the CHANNEL parameter.
A Fault State is included in the AO Block which is activated when a fault condition (of the
valid set point) last longer than the time determined in FSTATE_TIME or when SET_FSTATE is
activated in the Resource Block.
The Fault State is determined over FSTATE_TIME, FSTATE_VAL and IO_OPTS parameters.

In the Device Description Library supplied by Fieldbus Foundation upon which the device
description of 3730-5 is also based, "Fault state to value" is indicated as "Fault state type" in
the IO_OPTS parameter of the AO Function Block.

Refer to page 152 for the list of parameters.

110 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

XD_SCALE

100 %

READBACK

OUT

0% PV_SCALE
0 °C

SP PV

SP_LO_LIM<=SP<=SP_HI_LIM
RCAS_IN

Set point Set point PV, XD Output

limitation SP ramps scaling action
OUT
SP
SP_HI_LIM SP_RATE_DN XD_SCALE IO_OPTS
CAS_IN

SP_LO_LIM SP_RATE_UP PV_SCALE

MODE_BLK OUT
MODE_BLK
PV, XD scaling PV (manual)
READBACK XD_SCALE, PV_SCALE

Fig. 23 · Analog Output Function Block

EB 8384-5 EN 111
 Appendix

16.2.5 Discrete Input Function Block DI1

The Type 3730-5 Positioner is fitted with a standard contact input to process binary voltage
signals.
The Discrete Input DI1 Function Block is used for processing the contact input (terminals 87
und 88) and to integrate a FOUNDATION™ fieldbus application.
The connected hardware is assigned to the function block by CHANNEL = 1. The OUT_D
parameter is used to link the state of the contact to other function blocks.
Alternatively, an integrated solenoid valve MGV, a discrete valve position with three states
POS_D as well as the Condensed State (NAMUR status) can be processed.
The binary signal to be linked can be selected over the SELECT_BINARY_INPUT_1 parameter
in the Resource Block.

Refer to page 160 for the list of parameters.

SELECT_BINARY_INPUT_1

PV_D
Bin1
Simulate Optional Filter
MGV CHANNEL
SIMULATE_D Invert PV_FTIME
POS_D Output Out_D
FIELD_VAL_D
Condensed State

MODE Alarms
DISC

Fig. 24 · Discrete Input Function Block 1

112 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

16.2.6 Discrete Input Function Block DI2

The Type 3730-5 Positioner is optionally fitted with a binary input to process a floating con-
tact. The Discrete Input DI2 Function Block is used for processing the contact input (terminals
85 und 86) and to integrate a FOUNDATION™ fieldbus application.
The connected hardware is assigned to the function block by CHANNEL = 2.
The OUT_D parameter is used to link the state of the contact to other function blocks.
Alternatively, an integrated solenoid valve MGV, a discrete valve position with three states
POS_D as well as the Condensed State (NAMUR status) can be processed.
The binary signal to be linked can be selected over the SELECT_BINARY_INPUT_2 parameter
in the Resource Block.
When a pressure sensor (leakage sensor) is connected, its switching state can be issued as a
diagnostic alarm in the XD_ERROR_EXT parameter of the AO Transducer Block and logged.
In this case, the option LEAKAGE SENSOR must be activated in CONFIG_BINARY_INPUT2.
Alternatively, the switching state of the binary input can be issued in the BINARY_INPUT2
parameter of the AO Transducer Block.

Parameters of the Discrete Input Function Block 2

The parameters of the DI Function Block 2 are the same as the parameters of DI Function
Block 1.

SELECT_BINARY_INPUT_2

PV_D
Bin2
Simulate Optional Filter
MGV CHANNEL
SIMULATE_D Invert PV_FTIME
POS_D Output Out_D
FIELD_VAL_D
Condensed State

MODE Alarms
DISC

AO Transducer

BINARY_INPUT_2

CONFIG_BINARY_INPUT_2

Fig. 25 · Discrete Input Function Block 2

EB 8384-5 EN 113
 Appendix

16.2.7 PID Function Block

A PID Function Block contains the input channel processing, the proportional-integral-deriva-
tive (PID) control loop and the analog output channel processing.
The configuration of the PID Block (PID controller) depends on the automation task.
Simple control loops, control loops with manipulate variable feedforwarding, cascade con-
trol and cascade controls with limitation in combination with another controller function
block can be implemented.
The following options are available for processing the measured variable within the PID
Function Block (PID controller): Signal scaling and limiting, mode control, feedforward con-
trol, limit control, alarm limit detection and signal status propagation.
The PID Block (PID controller) can be used for various automation strategies. The block has a
flexible control algorithm that can be configured to match the application.
The PID Block receives its set point depending on the mode (MODE_BLK) from the input vari-
ables CAS_IN, RCAS_IN or SP. PV_SCALE, SP_HI_LIM, SP_LO_LIM, SP_RATE_UP and
SP_RATE_DN are used to generate an internal operating set point.
The block receives the actual value over the IN input variable which is used to generate the
process variable PV, taking into account the PV_SCALE and the filter of the first order
PV_FTIME.
These values are fed to the internal PID algorithm. This algorithm consists of a proportional,
an integral and a derivative component. The manipulated variable is calculated from the set
point value SP and the process variable PV (actual value) resulting from the system deviation.
The individual PID components are included in the calculation of the manipulated variable as
follows:
4 Proportional component:
The proportional component reacts immediately and directly when the set point SP or the
process variable PV (actual value). The manipulated variable is changed by the propor-
tional factor GAIN. This change corresponds to the system deviation multiplied by the
gain factor. If a controller works only with a proportional component, the control loop
has a permanent system deviation.
4 Integral component:
The system deviation resulting from the calculation of the manipulated variable using the
proportional component is integrated over the integral component of the controller until it
is negligible. The integral function corrects the manipulated variable depending on the
size and duration of the system deviation. If the value for the integration time RESET is set
to zero, the controller works as a P or PD controller. The influence of the integral compo-
nent on the control loop increases when the value of the integration time is reduced.

114 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

4 Derivative component:
In controlled systems with long delay times, e.g. in temperature control loops, it is better
to use the derivative component RATE of the controller. Using the derivative component
RATE, the manipulated variable is calculated depending on the rate of change of the sys-
tem deviation.
An output value OUT is formed from the calculated manipulated variable corresponding to
the OUT_SCALE, OUT_HI_LIM and OUT_LO_LIM parameters. This output value can be
passed on to a downstream connected function block.
The status of the output value OUT can be influenced by the STATUS_OPTS parameter de-
pending on the status of the input variable of the PID Block. This allows, for example, the
fault state of a downstream connected output block to be activated.
The BYPASS parameter allows the internal set point to be directly transferred to the correc-
tion value. Feedforward is possible over the FF_VAL input variable. TRK_IN_D and TRK_VAL
allow the output value to be directly tracked.

Refer to page 164 for the list of parameters.

RCAS_IN

Set point Set point ON

PV scaling
limitation SP ramps PID
SP TRK_IN_D
SP_HI_LIMSP_ Sp_RATE_DN PV_SCALE OFF algo-
LO_LIM Sp_RATE_UP Bypass rithm
CAS_IN

Output
Scaling OUT
GAIN limitation
RATE OUT_SCALE OUT_HI_LIMO
Filter RESET + – UP_LO_LIM
PV Scaling
IN
PV_TIME PV_SCALE

Gain
FF_GAIN

Scaling Scaling
FF_SCALE TRK_SCALE

FF_VAL TRK_VAL

Feedforward Tracking

Fig. 26 · PID Function Block

EB 8384-5 EN 115
 Appendix

16.3 Other parameters

16.3.1 Stale Counter

The Stale Counter serves to judge the “quality” of a process variable received over a config-
ured cyclic connection (publisher/subscriber connection).
These connections are used to transfer the process variable linked amongst the various func-
tion blocks. For this purpose, the upstream block (publisher) sends the process variable over
the bus at scheduled times. The downstream block(s) (subscriber) responds at the scheduled
times. The blocks that are to receive data monitor whether a valid value exists at the sched-
uled time. A value is valid if it exists with the status “Good” at the scheduled time.
The Stale Counter defines how many “Bad” (stale) values can be accepted in sequence be-
fore the Fault State of the block is activated.
This monitoring function is deactivated by setting the Stale Counter to zero.

16.3.2 Link Objects

Link Objects are used to link the inputs and outputs of the function blocks (configurable cyclic
connections).
A maximum of 22 Link Objects can be configured for each positioner.

16.3.3 LAS Functionality

The number of links and schedules that can be used is matched to the requirements of stan-
dard process control systems available on the market.
The positioner functioning as an LAS can support the following:
4 1 schedule
4 1 subschedule
4 25 sequences per subschedule
4 25 elements per sequence
In the delivered state, the positioner is configured as a basic device.

116 EB 8384-5 EN
 Appendix

16.4 Parameter lists

Legend

SK (class of memory): S Static parameter

D Dynamic parameter
N Non-volatile parameter

Read/write r Read capability

capability:
w Write capability
(access)

Supported modes: O O/S (out of service) mode

M MAN mode
A AUTO mode
CAS Cascade mode
RCAS Remote cascade mode

ALL O/M/A/CAS/RCAS
NA Not analyzed

Other modes: LO Local override mode

ROUT Remote output mode

EB 8384-5 EN 117
 Appendix Resource Block

Resource Block
Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]
ACK_OPTION 38 S r/w O/A [Undefined] . . . No selection
DISC ALM . . . Write lock changed
BLOCK ALM . . Block alarm
ALARM_SUM 37 S r/w O/A DISC ALM . . . Write lock changed
BLOCK ALM . . Block alarm
ALERT_KEY 4 S r/w O/A 1 to 255, [0]
“0” is not a permissible value and will be rejected
when transferring data to the device (alarm).
BLOCK_ALARM 36 D r
BLOCK_ERR 6 D r

SIMULATE ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUT OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOST STATIC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEVICE NEEDS MAINTENANCE SOON . . . . . .
DEVICE NEEDS MAINTENANCE NOW. . . . . . .
BUS_ADDRESS 55 D r 1 to 255, [248]
CLR_FSTATE 30 D r/w O/A
CONDENSED_STATE 59 D r 0. . OK
1. . Maintenance required
2. . Maintenance demanded
3 . Maintenance alarm
7 . Function check

CONFIRM_TIME 33 S r/w O/A [640000 1/32 ms]

CYCLE_SEL 20 S r/w O/A [SCHEDULED]
COMPLETION OF BLOCK EXECUTION
CYCLE_TYPE 19 S r SCHEDULED
COMPLETION OF BLOCK EXECUTION
DD_RESOURCE 9 S r

118 EB 8384-5 EN
 Resource Block Appendix

Description
Determines whether an alarm is to be automatically acknowledged in the positioner, i.e. without intervention of
the fieldbus host system.
Note: The alarm is broadcast to the fieldbus host system, but not acknowledged by it.

Determines the current state of the process alarms in the Resource Block.

Used to specify the identification number of the plant section.

This information can be used by the fieldbus host system to group alert and events.

Indicates the current block state with details on all configuration, hardware or system problems in the block.
Indicates active block error
Note: The assignment of error or diagnostic alarms to the desired function block is determined using the
ERROR_OPTION parameter in the Transducer Block.
. . Simulation jumper active, simulation possible
. . Block mode is out of service
. . Data in EEPROM lost
. . Maintenance required soon. Block Alarm (BLOCK_ALM) in Resource Block is triggered.
. . Maintenance required immediately. Block Alarm (BLOCK_ALM) in Resource Block is triggered.
Bus address
Used to manually clear the Fault State of the AO Function Block.
Indicates the condensed state of the device.
Each possible event or error is classified. This assignment can be modified in the Transducer Block. The con-
densed state provides a summary of all classified status alarms.
The state is also indicated on the LCD of the positioner. “Maintenance required” and “Maintenance demanded”
are indicated by a wrench symbol, “Maintenance alarm” by the fault symbol.
“Function check” is indicated as a text alert.
Specifies the time the device waits for confirmation that an alert report was received before trying again.
Specifies the block execution method determined by the fieldbus host system.
Note: The block execution method is selected directly in the fieldbus host system.
Indicates the block execution method supported by the device.

Specifies the resource that contains the Device Description file in the device.
Note: If the device contains no Device Description, “zero” appears on the display.

EB 8384-5 EN 119
 Appendix Resource Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

DD_REV 13 S r
DESCRIPTOR 46 S r/w A/O
DEV_REV 12 S r
DEV_TYPE 11 S r 2 for Type 3730-5
DEVICE_CERTIFICATION 45 N r

DEVICE_PRODUCT_ NUM 48 N r
DEVICE_SER_NUM 44 N r

DEVICE_MESSAGE 47 N r/w A/O

FAULT_STATE 28 N r
FEATURES 17 S r
FEATURES_SEL 18 S r/w A/O
REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARD W LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAULTSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUT READBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FREE_SPACE 24 D r

FREE_TIME 25 D r

GRANT_DENY 14 D r/w NA

HARD_TYPES 15 S r SCALAR OUTPUT

(scalable analog output variable)
HW_REVISION 43 S r
ITK_VER 41 S

LIM_NOTIFY 32 S r/w A/O 0 to [8]

120 EB 8384-5 EN
 Resource Block Appendix

Description
Specifies the revision number of the Device Description file.
Any desired text to describe the application; the text is saved in the field device.
Indicates the manufacturer’s revision number associated with the device.
Indicates the manufacturer’s model number associated with the device in decimal format.
Specifies the type of protection of the device, i.e. whether explosion protection certificates are available for the
field device.
Specifies the positioner’s product number
Specifies the positioner’s serial number; allows the field device to be clearly identified in conjunction with the
MANUFAC_ID and DEV_TYPE parameters.
Any desired text; the text is saved in the field device.
Indicates the current status of the Fault State of the Analog Output Function Block
Specifies the additionally supported Resource Block options, see FEATURES_SEL.
Enables selection of additionally supported Resource Block options.
. . Fieldbus host system needs to acknowledge receipt of an alert report.
. . Hardware write lock switch is evaluated
. . Fault State can be triggered (see SET_FSTATE /CLR_FSTATE).
. . Current valve position issued in the PV parameter of the Analog Function Block (otherwise SP).
Note: If the AO Block should not move to the MAN mode when the solenoid valve fails, deactivate this option.
Indicates the memory in percent available for implementation of additional function blocks.
Note: This parameter is not supported as no further function blocks may be added to the Type 3730-5.
Indicates the block processing time in percent that is free to process additional blocks.
Note: This parameter is not supported as no further function blocks may be added to the Type 3730-5.
Grants or denies access of a fieldbus host system to the field device.
Note: This parameter is not supported by Type 3730-5.
Indicates the types of output signal (hardware) available for the Analog Output Function Block.

Specifies the hardware revision number of the electronic/mechanical components.

Specifies the version of the Interoperability Tester used by the Fieldbus Foundation on certifying the device as
interoperable.
Specifies the number of alert reports that the device can send without getting a confirmation.

EB 8384-5 EN 121
 Appendix Resource Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

LOCAL_OP_ENA 56 N r/w A/O
MANUFAC_ID 10 S r 0 x 00E099 = SAMSON AG
MAX_NOTIFY 31 S r 8
MEMORY_SIZE 22 S r

MIN_CYCLE_T 21 S r 640 1/32 ms

MODE_BLK 5 N r/w A/O

AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NV_CYCLE_T 23 S r

READING_DIRECTION 54 D r/w A/O

RESTART 16 D r/w A/O
RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESOURCE (not supported)
DEFAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS_STATE 7 D r
ONLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STANDBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ONLINE LINKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECT_BINARY_ INPUT1 57 N r/w A/O
SELECT_BINARY_ INPUT2 58 N r/w A/O DI1/2 contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DI1/2 internal solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DI1/2 discrete final valve position . . . . . . . . . . .

Continued on next page

122 EB 8384-5 EN
 Resource Block Appendix

Description
Locks/enables local operation.
Indicates the manufacturer’s identification number.
Specifies the maximum number of alert reports that the device can send without getting a confirmation.
Indicates the memory in kilobytes available for additional function blocks.
Note: This parameter is not supported as no further function blocks may be added to the Type 3730-5.
Indicates the shortest cycle interval that the device can perform
(execution time of AO function block 20 ms).
Indicates the actual operating mode of the Resource Block, the permitted modes supported by the Resource Block,
and the normal mode.
. . The Function Blocks (AO and PID Function Block) are enabled in this mode.
. . In this mode, the processing of the Function Blocks (AO and PID Function Block) is stopped. The blocks are set
to O/S mode.
Specifies the minimum time interval in which device data are stored to the non-volatile memory.
Note: The Type 3730-5 saves non-volatile data immediately after transmission.
Rotates the display contents by 180°.
Enables the positioner to be reset in various ways.
. . Normal operating state

. . Device data and function block linkings are reset to the default settings listed in the specification.

. . Warm start of device, processor restarted.

Indicates the current operating state of the Resource Block.
. . Standard operating state; the function block is in AUTO mode.
. . The Resource Block is in O/S mode.
. . The configured links between the function blocks have not been established yet.
Used to select the data to be processed in Discrete Input Block 1/2.
. . Switching state of binary input 1/2
. . Switching state of internal solenoid valve
. . Current valve position as discrete information:
1 Current valve position < x %
2 Current valve position > x %;
3 Intermediate position
The limits for < x % or > x % are set using FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_LIMITS parameter [0.5, 99.5]

EB 8384-5 EN 123
 Appendix Resource Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

Continued DI1/2 condensed state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECT_BINARY_ INPUT1
SELECT_BINARY_ INPUT2

SET_FSTATE 29 D r/w A/O

SHED_RCAS 26 S r/w A/O

SHED_ROUT 27 S r/w A/O [640000 1/32 ms]

ST_REV 1 N r

STRATEGY 3 S r/w A/O [0]

SW_REVISION 42 N r
TAG_DESC 2 S r/w A/O [No text], max. 32 characters
TEST_RW 8 D r/w A/O
TEXT_INPUT_1 49 N r/w A/O
TEXT_INPUT_2 50 N r/w A/O
TEXT_INPUT_3 51 N r/w A/O
TEXT_INPUT_4 52 N r/w A/O
TEXT_INPUT_5 53 N r/w A/O
UPDATE_EVT 35 D r
WRITE_ALM 40 D r/w A/O

WRITE_LOCK 34 S r/w A/O LOCKED

NOT LOCKED

124 EB 8384-5 EN
 Resource Block Appendix

Description
..0 OK
1 Maintenance required
2 Maintenance demanded
3 Maintenance alarm
7 Function check
Enables manual activation of the Fault State of the Analog Output Function Block.
Determines how long function blocks are supposed to check that the connection between the fieldbus host system
and the PID Block exists in RCAS mode.
When the time has elapsed, the PID Block switches from RCAS mode to the operating mode selected in the
SHED_OPT parameter.
Determines how long function blocks are supposed to check that the connection between the fieldbus host system
and the PID Block exists in ROUT mode.
When the time has elapsed, the PID Block switches from ROUT mode to the operating mode selected in the
SHED_OPT parameter.
Indicates the revision number of static data.
Note: The revision state is incremented by one each time a static parameter in the block is written.
Permits strategic grouping and thus faster processing of blocks.
Blocks are grouped by entering the same number in the STRATEGY parameter of each block.
Note: These data are neither checked nor processed by the Resource Block.
Indicates the firmware version (communication/control).
Assigns a unique description to each block for clear identification.
Note: This parameter is required for conformity tests only and is not used in normal operation.
Any desired text

Indicates that static data were changed, including date and time stamp.
Indicates the state of the write-lock alarm.
Note: The alarm is triggered when the WRITE_LOCK parameter is unlocked.
Indicates the state of the write-lock alarm.
The write-lock can be activated by setting Code 47 to ON.
If setting data are to be changed by remote transmission, set Code 47 to OFF.

EB 8384-5 EN 125
 Appendix Resource Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

WRITE_PRI 39 S r/w A/O
[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameter index

Index Parameter Index Parameter Index Parameter

0 – 10 MANUFAC_ID 20 CYCLE_SEL
1 ST_REV 11 DEV_TYPE 21 MIN_CYCLE_T
2 TAG_DESC 12 DEV_REV 22 MEMORY_SIZE
3 STRATEGY 13 DD_REV 23 NV_CYCLE_T
4 ALERT_KEY 14 GRANT_DENY 24 FREE_SPACE
5 MODE_BLK 15 HARD_TYPES 25 FREE_TIME
6 BLOCK_ERR 16 RESTART 26 SHED_RCAS
7 RS_STATE 17 FEATURES 27 SHED_ROUT
8 TEST_RW 18 FEATURES_SEL 28 FAULT_STATE
9 DD_RESOURCE 19 CYCLE_TYPE 29 SET_FSTATE

126 EB 8384-5 EN
 Resource Block Appendix

Description
Used to set the priority for the WRITE_ALM parameter.
. . The write-lock alarm is not processed.
. . The write-lock alarm is not broadcast to fieldbus host system.
. . Reserved for block alarms
. . The write-lock alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . The write-lock alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).

Index Parameter Index Parameter Index Parameter

30 CLR_FSTATE 40 WRITE_ALM 50 TEXT_INPUT_2
31 MAX_NOTIFY 41 ITK_VER 51 TEXT_INPUT_3
32 LIM_NOTIFY 42 SW_REVISION 52 TEXT_INPUT_4
33 CONFIRM_TIME 43 HW_REVISION 53 TEXT_INPUT_5
34 WRITE_LOCK 44 DEVICE_SER_NUM 54 READING_DIRECTION
35 UPDATE_EVT 45 DEVICE_CERTIFICATION 55 BUS_ADDRESS
36 BLOCK_ALARM 46 DESCRIPTOR 56 LOCAL_OP_ENA
37 ALARM_SUM 47 DEVICE_MESSAGE 57 SELECT_BINARY_INPUT1
38 ACK_OPTION 48 DEVICE_PRODUCT_NUM 58 SELECT_BINARY_INPUT2
39 WRITE_PRI 49 TEXT_INPUT_1 59 CONDENSED_STATE

EB 8384-5 EN 127
 Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block

Analog Output Transducer Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]
ACT_FAIL_ACTION 21 D r UNINITIALIZED. . . . Undefined
CLOSING. . . . . . . . (in 0 % position)
OPENING . . . . . . . (in 100 % position)
INDETERMINATE . . None
ACT_MAN_ID 22 D r/w O/M/A

ACT_MODEL_NUM 23 S r/w O/M/A

ACT_SN 24 S r/w O/M/A
ACT_STROKE_TIME_ DEC 67 D r

ACT_STROKE_TIME_ INC 68 D r

ADVANCED_PV_BASIC 0 D r
BLOCK_TAG . . . . . Name of block
DD_MEMBER . . . . . 0 (0x0)
DD_ITEM . . . . . . . . Start index of AO
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transducer Block
DD_REVIS . . . . . . . Revision index of DD
PROFILE . . . . . . . . . 33037 (0x810d)
ALERT_KEY 4 S r/w O/M/A 1 to 255, [0]
“0” is not a permissible value and will be rejected
when transferring data to the device (error
alarm).
AUTOSTART 111 D r/w O/M/A

BINARY_INPUT 2 53 D r

BLOCK_ALARM 8 D r

128 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix

Description
Sets the fail-safe action to be performed by the actuator in case of a supply air failure, determined automatically
during initialization.

Specifies the actuator manufacturer’s identification number.

Clearly identifies the manufacturer of the actuator used with the positioner.
Specifies the type/model number of the actuator used with the positioner.
Specifies the serial number of the actuator used with the positioner.
Specifies the minimum transit time to reach CLOSED position
The minimum transit time to reach CLOSED (0 % position) position is the actual time in seconds that the system
(consisting of positioner, actuator and valve) needs to move through the rated travel range/angle of rotation to
close the valve (measured during initialization).
Specifies the minimum transit time to reach OPEN position
The minimum transit time to reach OPEN (100 % position) position is the actual time in seconds that the system
(consisting of positioner, actuator and valve) needs to move through the rated travel range/angle of rotation to
open the valve (measured during initialization).
Indicates block-specific and device-specific data.
PROFILE_REVISION. . . . 1 (0x1) NEXT_FB_TO_EXECUTE. Next function block to be exe-
EXECUTION_TIME . . . . Execution time of block cuted
EXECUTION_PERIOD . . Repetition interval VIEWS_INDEX . . . . . . . Initial address of View objects
NUM_OF_PARAMS . . . No. of block parameters NUMBER_VIEW_3 . . . . Number of View-3 objects
NUMBER_VIEW_4 . . . . Number of View-4 objects

Used to specify the identification number of the plant section.

This information can be used by the fieldbus host system to group alert and events.

Indicates the interval at which the step response function is repeated.

Note: Available in versions with ESD diagnostics and higher.
Indicates the state of DI2.
The value of the output depends on CONFIG_BINARY_INPUT2.
Indicates the current block state with details on all configuration, hardware or system problems in the block.

EB 8384-5 EN 129
 Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

BLOCK_ERR 6 D r
OUT OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEVICE NEEDS MAINTENANCE NOW. . . . . . .
DEVICE NEEDS MAINTENANCE SOON . . . . . .
LOCAL OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INPUT FAILURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUTPUT FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEMORY FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOST STATIC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCKING_POSITION 76 D r/w O/M/A
CLOSING_DIRECTION 66 S r/w O/M/A
COLLECTION_ 12 D r
DIRECTORY
CONFIG_BINARY_ 56 D r/w O/M/A [NOT EVALUATED]
INPUT2 ACTIVELY OPEN
ACTIVELY CLOSED
ACTIVELY OPEN – LEAKAGE SENSOR
ACTIVELY CLOSED – LEAKAGE SENSOR
COUNTER_INIT_START 85 D r
DATALOGGER_ 95 D r 1. . Trigger select
PROGRESS 2. . Trigger not select
3. . Trigger start by travel condition
4. . Trigger start by solenoid condition
5. . End measuring, memory full
DATALOGGER_SELECT 88 D r/w O/M/A 1. . Permanent
2. . Trigger
DEAD_TIME_FALLING 115 D r

DEAD_TIME_RISING 114 D r

130 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix

Description
Reflects the active errors associated with a block.
. . Block mode is out of service.
. . Maintenance required immediately (error in the electronics).
. . Maintenance required soon (zero error, positioner fault, or total valve travel exceeded).
. . Output value set to “local operation” using TROVIS-VIEW, or forced venting function/zero calibration or
initialization currently in process.
. . Position feedback error or device not initialized
. . Device not initialized
. . Memory error
. . Check sum error
Indicates and modifies the blocking position (see Code 35).
Indicates and modifies the closing direction (see Code 34).
This parameter is not processed by Type 3730-5.

Sets the logic state of DI2.

The parameter is processed by the BINARY_INPUT2 parameter. The parameter settings do not depend on
Transducer Block DI2.

Specifies the number of initialization cycles that have been performed since the last reset.
Indicates the state of the data logger.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.

Permits selection of data logger recording method.

Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher
Specifies the time that has elapsed until a change in the valve position x occurs after a falling step change of the
reference variable w (during diagnostic test).
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Specifies the time that has elapsed until a change in the valve position x occurs after a rising step change of the
reference variable w (during diagnostic test).
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.

EB 8384-5 EN 131
 Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

DELAY_TIME 46 S r/w O/M/A 1 to 240 s, [10 s]

DEVIATION_MAX 98 D r

DEVIATION_MIN 97 D r

DEVICE_ 32 S r/w O/M/A

CHARACTERISTICS ACTUATOR_SIZE
ACTUATOR_VERSION
ATTACHMENT
PRESSURE_RANGE_START
PRESSURE_RANGE_END
SUPPLY_PRESSURE
DEVICE_INIT_STATE 64 D r
DIAG_LEVEL 101 D r EXPERT . . . Standard valve diagnostics
EXPERT+ . . . Extended valve diagnostics
ESD . . . . . . Emergency shutdown
ELAPSED_HOURS_ 82 D r
METERS ELAPSED_HOURS_TOTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELAPSED_HOURS_IN_CLOSED_LOOP. . . . . . . .
ELAPSED_HOURS_SWITCHED_ON_SINCE_ INIT
ELAPSED_HOURS_IN_CLOSED_LOOP_SINCE_INIT
ENHANCED_DIAG_ 81 D r/w O/M/A
CMD 1. . No function
2. . Start data logger
3. . Abort data logger
ERROR_OPTION_ 39 S r/w O/M/A
DATA_FAILURE 1. . Control parameter
2. . Potentiometer parameter
3. . Adjusted parameter

132 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix

Description
Specifies the delay time (reset criterion when control loop monitoring is in progress).
If the entered DELAY_TIME is exceeded and the system deviation is outside the specified TOLERANCE_BAND, a
control loop error is issued.
Determined from the minimum transit time during initialization.
Specifies the positioner’s maximum system deviation that has occurred.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Specifies the positioner’s minimum system deviation.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Reflects positioner-specific data.
BOOSTER NOM_DIAMETER
STUFFING_BOX NOM_DIAMETER_DN
SEALING_EDGE (plug/seat facing) KVS_UNIT
PRESSURE_BALANCING KVS_VALUE
FLOW_CHARACTERISTIC SEAT_DIAM_VALVE
FLOW_DIRECTION
Indicates whether the device has been initialized.
Indicates the currently installed diagnostic version.

Indicates the hours the device has been in operation.

. . Total hours the device has been switched on
. . Device in closed loop
. . Hours the device has been switched on since last initialization
. . Hours in closed loop control since last initialization
Indicates an extended diagnostic test.
4. . Hysteresis online test 7. . Abort step response
5. . Abort hysteresis online test 8. . Start tests in turn
6. . Start step response
Indicates the masking of data errors.
4. . General parameter 7. . Info parameter
5. . Internal device error 1 8. . Check sum program code
6. . Valve dimension parameter

EB 8384-5 EN 133
 Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

ERROR_OPTION_ENH_ 40 S r/w O/M/A
DIAGNOSTIC_1
to to
ERROR_OPTION_ENH_ 44 S r/w O/M/A
DIAGNOSTIC_5
ERROR_OPTION_HW_ 38 S r/w O/M/A
FAILURE 1. . x signal
2. . i/p converter
ERROR_OPTION_INIT_ 36 S r/w O/M/A
FAILURE 1. . x > range
2. . Delta x < range
3. . Mechanics/pneumatics
ERROR_OPTION_ 37 S r/w O/M/A
OPERATION_FAILURE 1. . Control loop
2. . Zero point
ERRORBYTE 106 D r

EVENT_LOGGING_1 86 D r
EVENT_LOGGING_2 87 D r
FINAL_POSITION_ 20 D r
VALUE
FINAL_POSITION_ 52 D r/w
VALUE_DISC
FINAL_POSITION_ 51 D r/w O/M/A FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_LIMITS
VALUE_LIMITS FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_HIGH_LIMIT
FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_LOW_LIMIT
FINAL_VALUE 13 N r/w O/M Scaling over FINAL_VALUE_RANGE
FINAL_VALUE_ 15 S r/w O/M/A 0 to 125 %, [99 %]
CUTOFF_HI

134 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix

Description
Specifies the masking of diagnostic status or error alarms.

Specifies the masking of hardware errors.

3. . Hardware 5. . Control calculation
4. . Data memory 6. . Program loading error
Specifies the masking of initialization errors.
4. . Init. time exceeded 7. . Pin position
5. . Init./solenoid valve 8. . No emergency mode
6. . Travel time too short
Specifies the masking of operating errors.
3. . Autocorrection 5. . w too small
4. . Fatal error 6. . Total valve travel exceeded
Specifies the cancellation flag of the step response (criterion for cancelation).
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Indicates the logs 0 – 14 with the time they were recorded.
Indicates the logs 15 – 29 with the time they were recorded.
Specifies the current valve position in % in relation to the operating range FINAL_VALUE_RANGE.

Specifies FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_LIMITS, e.g. limit values reached or status of the value.

Indicates the limit of FINAL_POSITION_VALUE.

This actual value is sent to the AO Transducer Block directly from the valve.

Contains the output value received from the upstream AO Function Block.
Final position if set point exceeds the adjusted value (see Code 15).
If the set point exceeds the adjusted value, the valve is moved to the final position that corresponds to 100 % of
the manipulated variable. This causes the actuator to either be vented completely or fully filled with air
(corresponding to the fail-safe action).
Note: The function is deactivated by entering –2.5 %.
As this function causes the actuator to be fully vented or filled with air, the valve moves to its absolute final
position. Restrictions set by the travel range or travel limitation functions do not apply. In the case that this creates
excessive positioning forces, this function must be deactivated.

EB 8384-5 EN 135
 Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

FINAL_VALUE_ 75 S r/w O/M/A
CUTOFF_HI_ON
FINAL_VALUE_ 16 S r/w O/M/A –2.5 to 100 %, [1 %]
CUTOFF_LO

FINAL_VALUE_ 74 S r/w O/M/A

CUTOFF_LO_ON
FINAL_VALUE_RANGE 14 S r/w O FINAL VALUE RANGE EU_100 (see Code 9)
FINAL VALUE RANGE EU_0 (see Code 8)
FINAL VALUE RANGE UNITS_INDEX
FINAL VALUE RANGE DECIMAL

HIS_TEMPERATURE 100 D r
T_CURRENT_TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T_MAX_TEMPERATURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIS_T_ZEIT_MAX_TEMPERATUR . . . . . . . . . . . .
T_MIN_TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIS_T_ZEIT_MIN_TEMPERATUR . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMP_PERIOD_TIME_HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMP_PERIOD_TIME_LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HISTOGRAMM_X 96 D r

HISTOGRAMM_Z 99 D r

HYS_STELL_Y 102 D r/w O/M/A

136 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix

Description
Enables the final position w > (see Code 15).

Final position if set point falls below adjusted value (see Code 14).
If the set point falls below the adjusted value, the valve is moved to the final position that corresponds to 0 % of
the manipulated variable. This causes the actuator to either be vented completely or fully filled with air
(corresponding to the fail-safe action).
Note: The function is deactivated by entering –2.5 %.
As this function causes the actuator to be fully vented or filled with air, the valve moves to its absolute final
positions. Restrictions set by the travel range or travel limitation functions do not apply. In the case that this
creates excessive positioning forces, this function must be deactivated.
Enables final position w< (see Code 14).

Sets the travel range/angle of rotation.

The set point FINAL_VALUE is sent to the AO Transducer Block directly from an upstream AO Function Block.
Note: The working range FINAL_VALUE_RANGE is compared with the TRANSM_PIN_POS. If the TRANSM_
PIN_POS is changed, the positioner checks whether the setting and unit matches the current working range
FINAL_VALUE_ RANGE. If this is not the case, the working range FINAL_VALUE_RANGE is set to 0-100 %.
Indicates temperature-specific data.
. . Current temperature
. . Max. temperature
. . Duration of max. temperature
. . Min. temperature
. . Duration of min. temperature
. . Time the temperature below 80 °C
. . Time the temperature below –40 °C
Reflects the valve position x. The valve position histogram provides a static evaluation of the recorded travel
positions. The histogram indicates, for example the travel range in which the valve has mainly been operating
and whether a recent trend can be recognized, indicating a change of the main operating range.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
The cycle counter records the number of spans and the associated heights of the spans, which are categorized in
fixed intervals (classes). The cycle counter histogram provides a static evaluation of the cycle spans, thus furnish-
ing data on the dynamic stress that a bellows or an installed packing are exposed to.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Specifies the minimum interval at which hysteresis tests are performed.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.

EB 8384-5 EN 137
 Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

IDENT_LIMIT_SWITCHES 55 D r/w O/M/A NOT IMPLEMENTED
IMPLEMENTED
[depending on hardware upgrade]
IDENT_OPTIONS 54 D r 1. . Not implemented
2. . Binary input 2
3. . Solenoid valve
4. . Limit switch
INIT_METHOD 60 S r/w O/M/A 0. . Maximum range
1. . Nominal range
2. . Manual adjustment
3. . Substitute
4. . Zero point
KP_STEP 17 S r

LATENCY_AFTER_STEP 109 S r/w O/M/A 0 to 120 s, [1 s]

LIN_TYPE 69 S r/w O/M/A

1. . Linear
2. . Equal percentage
3. . Equal percentage reverse
4. . SAMSON butterfly linear
LOGGING_LIMIT 92 D r/w O/M/A 1. . Lower limit
2. . Upper limit
MODE_BLK 5 S r/w O/M/A

AUTO Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

O/S Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO Local Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVING_DIRECTION 65 S r/w O/M/A

138 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix

Description
Specifies whether optional inductive limit switches are installed. Limit switches are not detected automatically; they
need to be entered manually (see Code 38).

Indicates which optional components are installed.

Indicates the selected initialization mode (see Code 6).

Specifies KP (see Code 17).

This parameter can only be read over FOUNDATION fieldbus. The value is detected during initialization.
This parameter sets the waiting time required to jump back from the final value of the first step change to the
initial value of the second step change (reverse step change).
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Sets the characteristic (see Code 20)
5. . SAMSON butterfly equal percentage 9. Segmented ball valve equal percentage
6. . VETEC rotary linear 10. User defined
7. . VETEC rotary equal percentage
8. . Segmented ball valve linear
Indicates the initial value of an event that triggers logging.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Used to indicate/select the actual mode of the Resource Block, the permitted modes supported by the Transducer
Block, and the normal mode.
. . In this operating mode, a positioning value is calculated from the output value from the AO Function Block
and the control valve is positioned accordingly.
. . In this operating mode, the output value from the AO Function Block is not used. The control valve is moved to
its mechanical fail-safe position set by ACT_FAIL_ACTION. The mode is also changed to O/S when the
forced venting function is triggered.
. . In this operating mode, FINAL_VALUE can be entered manually (display: ).
. . If the device is locally set to the MAN mode, the Analog Output Transducer Block is set to LO.
Specifies the direction of action of the reference variable w in relation to the controlled variable x (see Code 7).

EB 8384-5 EN 139
 Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

NO_OF_ZERO_ 83 D r
POINT_ADJ
OVERSHOOT_FALLING 113 D r

OVERSHOOT_RISING 112 D r

PRESSURE_LIMIT 80 S r/w O/M/A 1. . Off . . . . . . . . . 3. . 2.4 bar

2. . 3.7 bar . . . . . . 4. . 1.4 bar
PRESSURE_Y 50 D r
PRETRIGGER_TIME 93 D r/w O/M/A

RAMP_DOWN 108 D r/w O/M/A [0]

RAMP_UP 107 D r/w O/M/A [0]

RATED_TRAVEL 58 S r/w O/M/A 0 to 255.9 mm, [15.0 mm]

SAMPLE_RATE 90 D r/w O/M/A

140 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix

Description
Specifies the number of zero calibrations performed since the last initialization.

Evaluation parameter for step response test. Overshooting of falling reference variable step change.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Evaluation parameter for step response test. Overshooting of rising reference variable step change.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Used to set the pressure limit (see Code 16).

Specifies the actuator pressure in percent after initialization (see Code 44).
The data logger can be triggered as soon as a certain event occurs. The pretrigger function can be used to display
data recorded before this event. This is made possible by a ring buffer in which all events are saved continuously.
For example, if the pretrigger time is set to 1 s, all events that occurred in the second before the data logger was
triggered are displayed.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
The dynamic control response of the control valve can be tested by recording step responses. Sets the time in
which the reverse step change is expected to fall.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
The dynamic control response of the control valve can be examined by recording step responses. Sets the time in
which the reverse step change is expected to rise.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Specifies the rated travel [mm] or rotational angle [degrees] of the valve (see Code 5).
Note: The unit [mm] or [degrees] depends on the VALVE_TYPE parameter.
Used to set the sampling rate of the data logger in ms.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.

EB 8384-5 EN 141
 Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

SELF_CALIB_CMD 61 D r/w O/M/A
1 . . No test, normal operation
2 . . Start with default values
3 . . Start initialization
4 . . Abort initialization
5 . . Start zero point adjustment
6 . . Abort zero point adjustment
7 . . Search device
8 . . Reset “Total valve travel”
/*xd_error_ext_1*/
9 . . Reset “Solenoid valve active“
10 . . Reset “Total valve travel limit exceeded“
11 . . Reset “Control loop“
12 . . Reset “Zero point“

SELF_CALIB_STATUS 63 D r
1 . . Not active
2 . . Running
3 . . Test aborted
4 . . Zero point adjustment
SERVO_RESET 18 S r
SET_FAIL_SAFE_POS 57 S r/w O/M/A 1 . . Not active
2 . . Set fail-safe position
3 . . Clear fail-safe position
SETP_DEVITATION 45 D r
SIGNAL_PRESSURE_ 77 D r
ACTION
SOLENOID_SELECT 94 D r/w O/M/A

ST_REV 1 S r

START_VALUE 91 D r/w O/M/A

142 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix

Description
Starts the calibration sequences in the field device and the resetting of error alarms.
13 . . Reset “Autocorrection“ 25 . . Reset “Hardware“
14 . . Reset “Fatal error“ 26 . . Reset “Control parameter“
15 . . Reset “Extended diagnosis“ 27 . . Reset “Poti parameter“
16 . . Reset “x > range“ 28 . . Reset “Adjustment parameter“
17 . . Reset “Delta x < range“ 29 . . Reset “General parameter“
18 . . Reset “Attachment“ 30 . . Reset “Internal device error 1“
19 . . Reset “Initialization time exceeded“ 31 . . Reset “No emergency mode“
20 . . Reset “Initialization/solenoid valve“ 32 . . Reset “Program load error“
21 . . Reset “Travel time too short“ 33 . . Reset “Options parameter“
22 . . Reset “Pin position“ 34 . . Reset “Info parameter“
/*xd_error_ext_2*/ 35 . . Reset “Data memory“
23 . . Reset “x signal“ 36 . . Reset “Control calculation“
24 . . Reset “i/p converter“ 37 . . Reference_Test_Aborted
Indicates the state of the calibration sequence started with SELF_CALIB_CMD.
5 . . Maximum point adjustment 9 . . Step 1 (step response)
6 . . Detection of mech. steps 10 . . Step 2 (step response)
7 . . Controller optimization 11 . . Terminated
8 . . Fine adjustment
This parameter is not processed by Type 3730-5.
Allows the valve to be moved to its actual fail-safe position. Fail-safe position is indicated by an S blinking on the
display.

Indicates the system deviation e (see Code 39).

This parameter is determined during initialization and indicates the position of the slide switch (AIR TO
OPEN/CLOSE). The positioner needs to be re-initialized when the switch position is changed.
Indicates the status of the solenoid valve (see Code 45).
Note: By selecting “1“ (Close) the “Maintenance now“ Block of the AO Transducer Block is entered in the AO
Block as an “Output Error“ block error.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
The revision state of static data is displayed.
Note: The revision state is incremented by one each time a static parameter in the block is written.
The start value is specified for a triggered start condition of the data logger (valve position in %).
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.

EB 8384-5 EN 143
 Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

STEP_PROGRESS 120 D r

STEP_SAMPLE_RATE 105 D r/w O/M/A [0.1] to 120 s

STEP_SELECTION 110 D r/w O/M/A 1. . One step

2. . Two steps

STEPEND 104 D r/w O/M/A 0 to [100 %]

STEPSTART 103 D r/w O/M/A [0] to 100 %

STRATEGY 3 S r/w O/M/A [0]

SUB_MODE_INIT 62 D r
TAG_DESC 2 S r/w O/M/A Max. 32 characters
TIME_63_FALLING 117 D r

TIME_63_RISING 116 D r

TIME_98_FALLING 119 D r

TIME_98_RISING 118 D r

TOLERANCE_BAND 47 S r/w O/M/A 0.1 to 10 %, [5 %]

TOT_VALVE_TRAV_LIM 49 S r/w O/M/A 1000 to 990 000 000, [1 000 000]
TOTAL_VALVE_TRAVEL 48 D r

144 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix

Description
The progress of the step response test is indicated.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Used to set the sampling rate of the step response logging
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
The dynamic control behavior of the valve can be tested by recording the step responses. Two reference variable
steps are performed by default and the course of the valve position x and the manipulated variable y are plotted
until they reach a steady state. The first step starts at an intial value defined beforehand and finishes at the
determined final value. After the entered waiting time, the second step is performed in reverse starting with the
final value back to the initial value.
This parameter is used to select whether just one step is to be performed or whether also the reverse step is to be
performed after the first step.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Used to set the final value to perform the step response.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Used to set the initial value to perform the step response.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Permits strategic grouping and thus faster processing of blocks. Blocks are grouped by entering the same number
in the STRATEGY parameter of each block.
Note: These data are neither checked nor processed by the Transducer Block.
Indicates whether an initialization has been performed in the SUB mode.
Assigns a unique description to each block for clear identification
Determined from the step response test T63 for the falling step.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Determined from the step response test T63 for the rising step.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Determined from the step response test T98 for the falling step.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Determined from the step response test T98 for the rising step.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Tolerance band (see Code 19)
Indicates limit of absolute total valve travel (see Code 24).
Absolute total valve travel: Sum of the nominal travel cycles (double strokes), total number of valve strokes (see
Code 23).

EB 8384-5 EN 145
 Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

TRANSDUCER_ 9 D r
DIRECTORY
TRANSDUCER_STATE 34 D r
1. . See operating mode
2. . Solenoid valve active
3. . Lower travel limit active
TRANSDUCER_TYPE 10 N r
TRANSM_PIN_POS 59 S r/w O/M/A

TRAVEL_LOWER_LIMIT 71 S r/w O/M/A

TRAVEL_LOWER_LIMIT_ 70 S r/w O/M/A

ON
TRAVEL_RATE_DEC 79 S r/w O/M/A
TRAVEL_RATE_INC 78 S r/w O/M/A
TRAVEL_UPPER_LIMIT 73 S r/w O/M/A

TRAVEL_UPPER_LIMIT_ ON 72 S r/w O/M/A

TRIGGER_SELECT 89 S r/w O/M/A 1. . Valve position
2. . Solenoid condition
3. . Valve position or solenoid condition
TV_STEP 19 S r

UPDATE_EVT 7 D r
USER_ CHARACTERISTIC 33 S r/w O/M/A

VALVE_MAN_ID 25 S r/w O/M/A

VALVE_MODEL_NUM 26 S r/w O/M/A
VALVE_SN 27 S r/w O/M/A

146 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix

Description
This parameter is not processed in Type 3730-5.

Indicates the state of the Transducer Block.

4. . Upper travel limit active 7. . Fail-safe position active
5. . End position < active 8. . Normal operation
6. . End position > active
Indicates the type of transducer. Standard Advanced Positioner Valve in this case.
The pin position must be entered for initialization in NOM or SUB modes.
The follower pin must be placed in the correct pin position depending on the valve travel/angle of rotation (see
Code 4).
Limits the travel/angle of rotation downwards. The characteristic is not adapted compared to the
FINAL_VALUE_RANGE (see Code 10).
Enables the lower x-limit (see Code 10).

Indicates the time required by the valve to move through the operating range when the valve closes (see Code 22).
Indicates the time required by the valve to move through the operating range when the valve opens (see Code 21).
Limits the travel/angle of rotation upwards. The characteristic is not adapted compared to
FINAL_VALUE_RANGE (see Code 11)
Enables the upper x-limit (see Code 11)
On selecting TRIGGER in DATALOGGER_SELECT parameter, the user can select which events are to trigger the
event logger.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.

Indicates Tv (see Code 19)

Note: This parameter can only be read over FOUNDATION fieldbus. The value is recorded during initialization.
Indicates that static data were changed, including date and time stamp.
Allows the user-defined characteristic to be entered.
The characteristic to be used is selected over the LIN_TYPE parameter (user-defined in this case).
The following condition must be fulfilled in this case: x (t–1) < x (t), i.e. the values for x must continually rise.
Clear identification of the manufacturer of the valve that the positioner is mounted on.
Indicates the model version of the valve that the positioner is mounted on.
Indicates the serial number of the valve that the positioner is mounted on.

EB 8384-5 EN 147
 Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

VALVE_TYPE 28 S r/w O/M/A
UNINITIALIZED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[LINEAR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OTHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XD_CAL_DATE 30 S r/w O/M/A
XD_CAL_LOC 29 S r/w O/M/A
XD_CAL_WHO 31 S r/w O/M/A
XD_ERROR 11 D r
NONE (0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNSPECIFIED ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALIBRATION ERROR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFIGURATION ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRONICS FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MECHANICAL FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA INTEGRITY ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALGORITHM ERROR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XD_ERROR_EXT 35 D r
1. . xd_error_ext_1
“Device not initialized“
“Solenoid valve active“ or
“SET_FAIL_SAFE_POS active“
“Total valve travel limit exceeded“
“Control loop“ (see Code 57)
“Zero point“ (see Code 58)
“Autocorrection“ (see Code 59)
“Fatal error“ (see Code 60)
“Extended diagnosis“
“x > range“ (see Code 50)
“Delta x < range“ (see Code 51)
“Attachment“ (see Code 52)
“Initialization time exceeded“ (see Code 53)
“Initialization/solenoid valve“ (see Code 54)
“Travel time too short“ (see Code 55)
“Pin position“ (see Code 56)
“Test or calibration running“

148 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix

Description
Type of valve Note! The Type 3730-5 differentiates merely between linear and rotary valves
. . (Type 3730-5: Treated like a globe valve)
. . (Control valves with straight moving plug, e.g. globe valves)
. . (Control valves with rotating closure members)
. . (Type 3730-5: Treated like a globe valve)
. . The last setting is kept.
Indicates the time when the last calibration was performed.
Indicates the location where the last calibration was performed.
Indicates the person who performed the last calibration.
Errors listed in the Transducer Block
. . No error
. . Unspecified (device not initialized, initialization or zero calibration in progress or total valve travel exceeded)
. . General device error
. . Zero point, internal control loop, or initialization error, reference test canceled (Code 81, only with EXPERT+)
. . Parameter or characteristic faulty
. . i/p converter (Code 64), hardware (Code 65), bus connection
. . Fault in the mechanics
. . Check sum error
. . Dynamic values outside of the range
Extended errors listed in the Transducer Block
2. . xd_error_ext_2 4 . . Air supply (EXPERT+ function)
“x signal“ (see Code 62) 5 . . Actuator spring (EXPERT+ function)
“i/p converter“ (see Code 64)
6 . . Shifting working range (EXPERT+ function)
“Hardware“ (see Code 65)
“Control parameter“ (see Code 68) 7 . . Friction (EXPERT+ function)
“Poti parameter“ (see Code 69) 8 . . Leakage pneumatic (EXPERT+ function)
“Adjustment parameter“ (see Code 70) 9 . . Limit working range (EXPERT+ function)
“General parameter“ (see Code 71)
10 . . Dynamic stress factor ( EXPERT+ function)
“Internal device error 1“ (see Code 73)
“No emergency mode“ (see Code 76) 11 . . Inner leakage (EXPERT+ function)
“Program load error“ (see Code 77) 12 . . External leakage (EXPERT+ function)
“Options parameters“ (see Code 78) 13 . . Observing end position (EXPERT+ function)
“Info parameters“ (see Code 75)
14 . . Connection positioner valve (EXPERT+ function)
“Data memory“ (see Code 66)
“Control calculation“ (see Code 67) 15 . . Working range (EXPERT+ function)
“Reference test aborted“ (see Code 81) 16 . . Emergency shutdown (EXPERT+ function)
3. . xd_error_txt_3 (EXPERT+ function) 17 . . Temperature error (EXPERT+ function)

EB 8384-5 EN 149
 Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

ZERO_POINT_LIMIT 84 D r/w O/M/A

Parameter index

Index Parameter Index Parameter Index Parameter

0 ADVANCED_PV_BASIC 22 ACT_MAN_ID 41 ERROR_OPTION_ENH_
DIAGNOSTIC_2
1 ST_REV 23 ACT_MODEL_NUM
42 ERROR_OPTION_ENH_
2 TAG_DESC 24 ACT_SN
DIAGNOSTIC_3
3 STRATEGY 25 VALUE_MAN_ID
43 ERROR_OPTION_ENH_
4 ALERT_KEY 26 VALUE_MODEL_NUM DIAGNOSTIC_4
5 MODE_BLK 27 VALVE_SN 44 ERROR_OPTION_ENH_
DIAGNOSTIC_5
6 BLOCK_ERR 28 VALVE_TYPE
45 SETP_DEVIATION
7 UPDATE_EVT 29 XD_CAL_LOC
46 DELAY_TIME
8 BLOCK_ALARM 30 XD_CAL_DATE
47 TOLERANCE_BAND
9 TRANSDUCER_ 31 XD_CAL_WHO
DIRECTORY 48 TOTAL_VALVE_TRAVEL
32 DEVICE_CHARACTERISTICS
10 TRANSDUCER_TYPE 49 TOT_VALVE_TRAV_LIM
33 USER_CHARACTERISTIC
11 XD_ERROR 50 PRESSURE_Y
34 TRANSDUCER_STATE
12 COLLECTION_DIRECTORY 51 FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_
35 XD_ERROR_EXT LIMITS
13 FINAL_VALUE
36 ERROR_OPTION_INIT_ 52 FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_
14 FINAL_VALUE_RANGE FAILURE DISC
15 FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_HI 37 ERROR_OPTION_ 53 BINARY_INPUT2
OPERATION_FAILURE
16 FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_LO 54 IDENT_OPTIONS
38 ERROR_OPTION_HW_
17 KP_STEP 55 IDENT_LIMIT_SWITCHES
FAILURE
18 SERVO_RESET 56 CONFIG_BINARY_INPUT2
39 ERROR_OPTION_DATA_
19 TV_STEP FAILURE
57 SET_FAIL_SAFE_POS
20 FINAL_POSITION_VALUE 40 ERROR_OPTION_ENH_
58 RATED_TRAVEL
DIAGNOSTIC_1
21 ACT_FAIL_ACTION

150 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix

Description
Indicates the zero point limit [%]

Index Parameter Index Parameter Index Parameter

59 TRANSM_PIN_POS 79 TRAVEL_RATE_DEC 101 DIAG_LEVEL
60 INIT_METHOD 80 PRESSURE_LIMIT 102 HYS_STELL_Y
61 SELF_CALIB_CMD 81 ENHANCED_DIAG_CMD 103 STEPSTART
62 SUB_MODE_INIT 82 ELAPSED_HOURS_METERS 104 STEPEND
63 SELF_CALIB_STATUS 83 NO_OF_ZERO_POINT_ 105 STEP_SAMPLE_RATE
ADJ
64 DEVICE_INIT_STATE 106 ERRORBYTE
84 ZERO_POINT_LIMIT
65 MOVING_DIRECTION 107 RAMP_UP
85 COUNTER_INIT_START
66 CLOSING_DIRECTION 108 RAMP_DOWN
86 EVENT_LOGGING_1
67 ACT_STROKE_TIME_DEC 109 LATENCY_AFTER_STEP
87 EVENT_LOGGING_2
68 ACT_STROKE_TIME_INC 110 STEP_SELECTION
88 DATALOGGER_SELECT
69 LIN_TYPE 111 AUTOSTART
89 TRIGGER_SELECT
70 TRAVEL_LOWER_LIMIT_ 112 OVERSHOOT_RISING
ON 90 SAMPLE_RATE
113 OVERSHOOT_FALLING
71 TRAVEL_LOWER_LIMIT 91 START_VALUE
114 DEAD_TIME_RISING
72 TRAVEL_UPPER_LIMIT_ON 92 LOGGING_LIMIT
115 DEAD_TIME_FALLING
73 TRAVEL_UPPER_LIMIT 93 PRETRIGGER_TIME
116 TIME_63_RISING
74 FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_ 94 SOLENOID_SELECT
117 TIME_63_FALLING
LO_ON
95 DATALOGGER_PROGRESS
118 TIME_98_RISING
75 FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_
96 HISTOGRAMM_X
HI_ON 119 TIME_98_FALLING
97 DEVIATION_MIN
76 BLOCKING_POSITION 120 STEP_PROGRESS
98 DEVIATION_MAX
77 SIGNAL_PRESSURE_
ACTION 99 HISTOGRAMM_Z
78 TRAVEL_RATE_INC 100 HIS_TEMPERATURE

EB 8384-5 EN 151
 Appendix Analog Output Function Block

Analog Output Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]
ALERT_KEYS 4 S r/w ALL 1 to 255, [0]
“0” is not a permissible value and will be rejected
when transferring data to the device (error
alarm).
BKCAL_OUT 25 D r

BLOCK_ALM 30 D r

BLOCK_ERR 6 D r
OUT OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFIGURATION_ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT FAILURE PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUTPUT FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAS_IN 17 N r/w ALL
CHANNEL 22 S r/w O [3]

FSTATE_TIME 23 S r/w ALL [0]

FSTATE_VAL 24 S r/w ALL Value and range of PV_SCALE ±10 %, [0]

GRANT_DENY 13 D r/w NA

152 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Function Block Appendix

Description
Used to specify the identification number of the plant section.
This information can be used by the fieldbus host system to group alert and events.

Reflects the analog output value and its status required by the BKCAL_IN parameter of the upstream Function
Block for cascade control.
This value provides windup protection in the upstream block and a bumpless transfer on mode changes.
Indicates the current block state with details on all configuration, hardware or system problems in the block in-
cluding date and time stamp.
Reflects the active errors associated with a block.
. . Block mode is out of service.
. . A configuration error exists in the block.
. . Position feedback has bad status, e.g. because the Transducer Block is in O/S mode.
. . OUT cannot be issued, e.g. because the Transducer Block is not initialized or is in LO mode.
Reflects/defines the analog reference variable and its status from an upstream function block.
Assignment between the output of each Analog Output Function Block and the logical hardware channels (Trans-
ducer Block)
Note: In order to be able to put the AO Function Block into operation, CHANNEL must be set to a valid value.
The valid value is 3 in this case as there are three Transducer Blocks (Standard Advanced Positioner Valve) in the
Type 3730-5.
The length of time, in seconds, that the AO Function Block will wait to set Fault State after the recognition of an
error of the valid set point.
The Fault State is triggered when the fault still exists after the time interval has elapsed.
Note: The Fault State of the AO Function Block is set in the IO_OPTS parameter of this block.
Determines the set point for the AO Function Block when the Fault State is triggered.
Note: This value is used when the option “Fault State to value” is set in the IO_OPTS parameter.
Grants or denies access of a fieldbus host system to the field device.
Note: This parameter is not used by Type 3730-5.

EB 8384-5 EN 153
 Appendix Analog Output Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

IO_OPTS 14 S r/w O
SP-PV Track in MAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track in LO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP Track retained target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Increase to close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault State to value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Fault State Value on restart . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target to MAN if Fault State activated . . . . . . . .

Use PV for BKCAL_OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MODE_BLK 5 N r/w ALL

O/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RCAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OUT 9 N r/w M/O Range of OUT_SCALE ±10 %

Unit from XD_SCALE parameter group
PV 7 D r Unit from XD_SCALE parameter group

PV_SCALE 11 S r/w O 0 to 100 %

RCAS_IN 26 N r/w ALL

154 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Function Block Appendix

Description
Used to select how the input/output is processed in the AO Block
. . The set point tracks the process variable in MAN mode (ACTUAL_MODE) SP-PV
. . The set point tracks the process variable in LO mode (ACTUAL_MODE)
. . The set point tracks RCAS_IN or CAS_IN depending on the set TARGET_MODE in LO or MAN mode
(ACTUAL_MODE). This option has priority over SP_PV Track in MAN/LO mode.
. . The output value to the Transducer Block is inverted (same as direction of action).
. . FSTATE_VAL is used as the set point when the Fault State is triggered (see FSTATE_VAL, FSTATE_TIME).
. . FSTATE_VAL is used for the set point until there is a valid value on restarting the device.
. . On triggering the Fault State, the TARGET_MODE is set to MAN. The original target mode is lost as a result.
After leaving the Fault State, the block remains in MAN and must be set to the required target mode by the
user.
. . The process variable is used instead of the working set point in BKCAL_OUT. If OUT READBACK is set in the
FEATURES_SEL parameter in the Resource Block, the current valve position is reported back over
BKCAL_OUT.
Indicates the actual mode of the AO Block as well as the target and permitted modes supported by the AO Block
and the normal mode.
. . The AO algorithm of the block is not processed. The last value is issued at OUT or the determined value when
the Fault State is activated.
. . The user can directly determine the output value of the AO Block.
. . The set point determined by the user is used over the SP parameter on implementation of the AO Block.
. . The AO Function Block receives the reference variable directly from an upstream function block over the
CAS_IN parameter to calculate the manipulated variable internally. The AO Block is implemented.
. . The AO Function Block receives the reference variable directly from the host system over the RCAS_IN
parameter to calculate the manipulated variable internally. The AO Block is implemented.
Indicates the manipulated variable, value, limit, and status of the AO Function Block.
Note: The output value OUT can be set manually if the MAN mode is selected in MODE_BLK..
Indicates the process variables including their status used for implementation of the function block.
Note: If OUT READBACK is set in the FEATURES_SEL parameter in the Resource Block, PV contains the current
valve position (same as FINAL_POSITION_VALUE).
Definition of the range (initial and final values), the engineering unit and the number of decimal places used for
the process variables (PV).
Input and display of the analog reference variable (value and status) provided by the fieldbus host system for in-
ternal calculation of the manipulated variable.
Note: This parameter is only active in the RCAS mode.

EB 8384-5 EN 155
 Appendix Analog Output Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

RCAS_OUT 28 D r

READBACK 16 D r Value determined from FINAL_POSITION_

VALUE parameter of the associated Transducer
Block.
Unit from XD_SCALE parameter group
SHED_OPT 27 S r/w ALL

[Uninitialized] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NormalShed_NormalReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NormalShed_NoReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToAuto_NormalReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToAuto_NoReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ShedToManual_NormalReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToManual_NoReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ShedToRetainedTarget_NormalReturn . . . . . . . .

ShedToRetainedTarget_NoReturn. . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMULATE 10 D r/w ALL

SP 8 N r/w O/M/A Value and range from PV_SCALE ±10 %

Unit from PV_SCALE
SP_HI_LIM 20 S r/w ALL Value and range from PV_SCALE ±10 %, [100]

SP_LO_LIM 21 S r/w ALL Value and range from PV_SCALE ±10 %, [0]

156 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Function Block Appendix

Description
Display of analog reference variable (value and status) after ramping.
This value is provided to the fieldbus host system for back calculation to allow action to be taken under mode
changes or limited signals.
Note: This parameter is only active in the RCAS mode.
Reflects current valve position.

Determines what action is to be taken when the monitoring time is exceeded (see SHED_RCAS parameter in the
Resource Block) while the connection between the fieldbus host system and the AO Block in RCAS mode is being
checked. When the time has elapsed, the AO Block switches from RCAS mode to the mode selected in
SHED_OPT. The action to be taken after the Fault State ends is also determined.
Note: This parameter is only active in RCAS mode in the AO Block. The AO Block cannot be set to the RCAS
mode when the value is set to Uninitialized.
. . Not inititialized
. . On failure of remote connection, change to next possible mode until RCAS mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to next possible mode. The block remains in this mode.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to AUTO mode until RCAS mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to AUTO mode. No attempt is made to restore the mode and the
block remains in AUTO mode.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to MAN mode until RCAS mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to MAN mode. No attempt is made to restore the mode and the
block remains in MAN mode.
. . On failure of remote connection, the block attempts to attain the retained target mode until RCAS mode is
restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, the block sets the target mode to the retained target mode.
The value and status of process variable PV of the block are simulated.
Note: During the simulation, the OUT value is not passed on to the Transducer Block. It keeps the last value valid
prior to activating the simulation. The simulation can only be activated if the Simulation Enable hardware switch
is set in the device (see also Resource Block).
Used to enter the set point (reference variable) in AUTO mode.

Used to enter the upper limit of the set point (reference variable).
Note: This value must be adapted correspondingly if the scale end setting is changed in PV_SCALE parameter.
Used to enter the lower limit of the set point (reference variable).
Note: This value must be adapted correspondingly if the scale end setting is changed in PV_SCALE parameter.

EB 8384-5 EN 157
 Appendix Analog Output Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

SP_RATE_DN 18 S r/w ALL [3402823466 x 1038]

SP_RATE_UP 19 S r/w ALL [3402823466 x 1038]

ST_REV 1 N r

STATUS_OPTS 15 S r/w O
[Uninitialized] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Propagate Fault Backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRATEGY 3 S r/w ALL [0]

TAG_DESC 2 S r/w ALL [No text], max. 32 characters

UPDATE_EVT 29 D r
XD_SCALE 12 S r/w O 0.0 to 100.0 %
Specified in [%], [mm] or [degrees]

Parameter index

Index Parameter Index Parameter Index Parameter

0 – 6 BLOCK_ERR 12 XD_SCALE
1 ST_REV 7 PV 13 GRANT_DENY
2 TAG_DESC 8 SP 14 IO_OPTS
3 STRATEGY 9 OUT 15 STATUS_OPTS
4 ALERT_KEYS 10 SIMULATE 16 READBACK
5 MODE_BLK 11 PV_SCALE 17 CAS_IN

158 EB 8384-5 EN
 Analog Output Function Block Appendix

Description
Used to enter the ramp rate for downward set point changes in AUTO mode.
Note: The set point is used immediately when the ramp rate is set to zero. The rate limit is active for output blocks
in the AUTO and CAS modes.
Used to enter the ramp rate for upward set point changes in AUTO mode.
Note: The set point is used immediately when the ramp rate is set to zero.
Indicates the revision state of static data.
Note: The revision state is incremented by one each time a static parameter in the block is written.
Allows the selection of status options available to determine the handling and processing of the status.
. . Not initialized
. . Status of the Transducer Block is passed on to the upstream block over the status of BKCAL_OUT.
Permits strategic grouping and thus faster processing of blocks. Blocks are grouped by entering the same number
in the STRATEGY parameter of each block.
Note: These data are neither checked nor processed by the AO Function Block.
Assigns a unique description to each block for clear identification.
Indicates that static data were changed, including date and time stamp.
Definition of the range (initial and final values), the engineering unit and the number of decimal places used to
display the manipulated variable (OUT).
Note: When [%] is used, the OUT value is based on a scale of 100 %. In case of [mm] (with globe valves) or
[degrees] (with rotary valves), the OUT value corresponds to the value set in the RATED_TRAVEL parameter in the
Transducer Block which is scaled as 100 %.

Index Parameter Index Parameter Index Parameter

18 SP_RATE_DN 24 FSTATE_VAL 30 BLOCK_ALM
19 SP_RATE_UP 25 BKCAL_OUT
20 SP_HI_LIM 26 RCAS_IN
21 SP_LO_LIM 27 SHED_OPT
22 CHANNEL 28 RCAS_OUT
23 FSTATE_TIME 29 UPDATE_EVT

EB 8384-5 EN 159
 Appendix Discrete Input Function Block

Discrete Input Function Block 1

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

ACK_OPTION 21 S r/w O/M/A [0] . . . . . . . . . . No selection
BLOCK_ALM . . Block alarm
DISC_ALM . . . . Discrete alarm
ALARM_SUM 20 S/D r/w O/M/A BLOCK_ALM . . Block alarm
DISC_ALM . . . . Discrete alarm
ALERT_KEY 4 S r/w O/M/A 1 to 255, [0]
“0” is not a permissible value and will be rejected
when transferring data to the device (error
alarm).
BLOCK_ALM 19 D r

BLOCK_ERR 6 D r
OUT OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFIGURATION_ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANNEL 15 S r/w O [1] to 3
DISC_ALM 24 D r

DISC_LIM 23 S r/w O/M/A [0], 1

DISC_PRI 22 S r/w O/M/A
[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IELD_VAL_D 17 N r
GRANT_DENY 12 D r/w NA

IO_OPTS 13 S r/w O
INVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

160 EB 8384-5 EN
 Discrete Input Function Block Appendix

Description
Determines whether an alarm is to be automatically acknowledged in the positioner, i.e. without intervention of
the fieldbus host system.
Note: The alarm is broadcast to the fieldbus host system, but not acknowledged by it.

Determines the current status of the process alarms in the DI1 Function Block
Note: The process alarms can also be deactivated in this parameter group.
Used to specify the identification number of the plant section.
This information can be used by the Fieldbus host system to group alert and events.

Indicates the current block state with details on all configuration, hardware or system problems in the block
including date and time stamp.
Reflects the active errors associated with a block.
. . Block mode is out of service.
. . A configuration error exists in the block.
Determines which Transducer Block is assigned to the DI1 Function Block.
Indicates the status of the discrete alarm including details on the time of the alarm (time and date stamp) and on
the value which triggered the alarm.
The value entered in DISC_LIM is exceeded.
Note: In addition, an active block alarm can be acknowledged manually in this parameter group.
The state of the discrete input that causes the alarm.
Determines the action to be taken when the value entered in DISC_LIM is reached.
. . The limit violation is not processed.
. . Alarm is not broadcast to fieldbus host system.
. . Reserved for block alarms
. . Low limit alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . High limit alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).
Indicates the discrete input value of the DI1 Function Block with details on the status.
Grants or denies access of a fieldbus host system to the field device.
Note: This parameter is not processed by Type 3730-5.
Used to select how the input/output is processed in the DI1 Block.
. . Used to logically invert the value of FIELD_VAL_D before it is stored as OUT_D.

EB 8384-5 EN 161
 Appendix Discrete Input Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

MODE_BLK 5 N r/w O/M/A
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUT_D 8 N r/w O/M
PV_D 7 D r

PV_FTIME 16 S r/w O/M/A [0]

SIMULATE_D 9 S r/w O/M/A

STATUS_OPTS 14 S r/w O [Uninitialized]

Propagate Fail Fwd
STRATEGY 3 S r/w O/M/A [0]

ST_REV 1 N r

TAG_DESC 2 S r/w O/M/A [No text], max. 32 characters

UPDATE_EVT 18 D r

Parameter index

Index Parameter Index Parameter Index Parameter

0 – 5 MODE_BLK 10 –
1 ST_REV 6 BLOCK_ERR 11 –
2 TAG_DESC 7 PV_D 12 GRANT_DENY
3 STRATEGY 8 OUT_D 13 IO_OPTS
4 ALERT_KEY 9 SIMULATE_D 14 STATUS_OPTS

162 EB 8384-5 EN
 Discrete Input Function Block Appendix

Description
Indicates the actual mode of the DI1 Block, the permitted modes supported by the DI1 Block, and the normal mode.
. . The binary input value FIELD_VAL_D is processed by the Function Block and issued as OUT_D.
. . The user can directly enter the output value of the Function Block over OUT_D.
. . The DI algorithm of the block is not processed. The last value is issued at OUT_D.
Indicates/defines the discrete output value of the DI1 Block with the associated status.
Indicates the discrete state used for the Function Block with status. The parameter is identical to the OUT_D in
AUTO mode.
Used to enter the filter time constant (in seconds) of the digital filter until a binary state at the input of the function
block is adopted in the PV_D parameter.
A discrete input value FIELD_VAL_D can be simulated with status.
Note: The simulation can only be activated when this has been enabled at the field device (Code 48/FF-P/F03)
as well as in the Function Block.
Allows the selection of status options available to determine the handling and processing of the status.

Permits strategic grouping and thus faster processing of blocks. Blocks are grouped by entering the same number
in the STRATEGY parameter of each block.
Note: These data are neither checked nor processed by the DI Function Block.
The revision state of static data is displayed.
Note: The revision state will be incremented each time a static parameter in the block is changed.
Assigns a unique description to each block for clear identification.
Indicates whether static block data have been changed, including date and time stamp.

Index Parameter Index Parameter

15 CHANNEL 20 ALARM_SUM
16 PV_FTIME 21 ACK_OPTION
17 FIELD_VAL_D 22 DISC_PRI
18 UPDATE_EVT 23 DISC_LIM
19 BLOCK_ALM 24 DISC_ALM

EB 8384-5 EN 163
 Appendix PID Function Block

PID Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]
ACK_OPTION 46 S r/w ALL

[Undefined] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HI_HI_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HI_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO_LO_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DV_HI_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DV_LO_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCK ALM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM_HYS 47 S r/w ALL 0 to 50 %, [0.5 %]

ALARM_SUM 45 S/D r/w ALL

HI_HI_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HI_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO_LO_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DV_HI_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DV_LO_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCK ALM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALERT_KEY 4 S r/w ALL 1 to 255, [0]
“0” is not a permissible value and will be rejected
when transferring data to the device (error alarm)

BAL_TIME 25 S r/w ALL [0]

164 EB 8384-5 EN
 PID Function Block Appendix

Description
Used to select whether an alarm is to be automatically acknowledged in the positioner, i.e. without intervention of
the Fieldbus host system.
Note: The alarm is broadcast to the fieldbus host system, but not acknowledged by it.
. . . No selection
. . . High high alarm
. . . High alarm
. . . Low low alarm
. . . Low alarm
. . . Deviation high alarm
. . . Deviation low alarm
. . . Block alarm
Used to specify the amount the alarm value must return to within the alarm limit before the associated active
alarm condition clears. The hysteresis value affects the following alarms of the PID Function Block:
HI_HI_LIM; HI_LIM; LO_LO_LIM; LO_LIM; DV_HI_LIM; DV_LO_LIM
Note: The hysteresis value is based upon the percent of the range of the PV_SCALE parameter group in the PID
Function Block.
Indicates the current status of the process alarm in the PID Function Block.
Note: The process alarms can also be deactivated in this parameter group.
. . High high alarm
. . High alarm
. . Low low alarm
. . Low alarm
. . Deviation high alarm
. . Deviation low alarm
. . Block alarm
Used to specify the identification number of the plant section.
This information can be used by the fieldbus host system to group alert and events.

Used to specify the time constant at which the integral term will move to obtain balance (calculated manipulated
variable > OUT_HI_LIM or < OUT_LO_LIM)
Note: Balance is immediately obtained when the value 0 (initial value) is set.

EB 8384-5 EN 165
 Appendix PID Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

BKCAL_HYS 30 S r/w ALL 0 to 50 %, [0.5 %]

BKCAL_IN 27 N r/w ALL

BKCAL_OUT 31 D r

BLOCK_ALM 44 D r/w ALL

BLOCK_ERR 6 D r
OUT OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFIGURATION_ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BYPASS 17 S r/w M/O

Uninitialized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[OFF]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAS_IN 18 N r/w ALL
CONTROL_OPTS 13 S r/w O
[None]
Bypass Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Acting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track in Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PV for BKCAL_OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No OUT Limits in Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

166 EB 8384-5 EN
 PID Function Block Appendix

Description
Used to specify the amount the manipulated variable must change away from its range limits OUT_HI_LIM and
OUT_LO_LIM before the limit status is turned off.
If the manipulated variable moves off a limit, in percent of scale, the limit status is indicated in the OUT
parameter and passed on to the following blocks.
The range limit status remains active as long as the value of the manipulated variable does not move off the limits
again.
Indicates the analog input value and status from the BKCAL_OUT parameter of a downstream function for a cas-
cade control.
This value provides a bumpless transfer on mode changes by backward output tracking.
Reflects the analog output value and status required by the BKCAL_IN parameter of the upstream function block
for a cascade control.
This value provides windup protection in the upstream block and a bumpless transfer on mode changes.
Indicates the current block state with information about configuration, hardware, or system failure including de-
tails on the time of the alarm (time and date stamp).
Reflects the active errors associated with a block.
. . The block mode is out of service.
. . A configuration error exists in the block.
Used to activate or deactivate the calculation of the manipulated variable using the PID control algorithm.
Note: When “Uninitialized” is set, the block remains in O/S mode. To activate the bypass (set to ON), the
bypass must be enabled in the options (CONTROL_OPTS parameters).
. . Same as ON
. . Bypass deactivated: The manipulated variable determined using the PID control algorithm is issued over the
OUT parameter.
. . BYPASS activated: The value of the reference variable SP is issued directly over the OUT parameter.
Used to indicate/define the analog reference variable and its status from an upstream function block.
Allows selection of controller options available to determine the automation strategy.

. . Enable BYPASS parameter

. . Direct action
. . Enable tracking
. . Tracking in MAN mode
. . Value and status of PV parameter used for BKCAL_OUT parameter
. . No output limits in MAN mode

EB 8384-5 EN 167
 Appendix PID Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

DV_HI_ALM 64 D r/w ALL

DV_HI_LIM 57 S r/w ALL [3402823466 x 1038]

DV_HI_PRI 56 S r/w ALL

[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DV_LO_ALM 65 D r

DV_LO_LIM 59 S r/w ALL [-3402823466 x 1038]

DV_LO_PRI 58 S r/w ALL

[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FF_GAIN 42 S r/w M/O [0]

FF_SCALE 41 S r/w M/O [0 to 100 %]

FF_VAL 40 N r/w ALL Range and unit from FF_SCALE

GAIN 23 S r/w ALL [1.0]

168 EB 8384-5 EN
 PID Function Block Appendix

Description
Indicates deviation high alarm status including details of time of alarm (date and time stamp) as well as the value
that triggered the alarm.
The controlled variable exceeds the reference variable by more than the value determined in DV_HI_LIM parameter.
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the deviation high alarm condition.
If the controlled variable exceeds the reference variable by this value, the DV_HI_ALM is issued.
Determines the action to be taken when the value for the deviation high alarm is exceeded (DV_HI_LIM).
. . The limit for deviation high alarm is not processed.
. . Alarm is not broadcast to fieldbus host system.
. . Reserved for block alarms
. . Deviation high alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . Deviation high alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).
Indicates deviation low alarm status including details of time of alarm (date and time stamp) as well as the value
that triggered the alarm.
The controlled variable does not reach the reference variable by more than the value determined in DV_LO_LIM
parameter.
Note: In addition, an active alarm can be acknowledged manually in this parameter group.
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the deviation low alarm condition.
If the controlled variable does not reach the reference variable by this value, the DV_LO_ALM is issued.
Determines the action to be taken when the value for the deviation low alarm is not reached (DV_LO_LIM).
. . The limit for deviation low alarm is not processed.
. . Alarm is not broadcast to fieldbus host system
. . Reserved for block alarms.
. . Deviation low alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . Deviation low alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high)
Used to input the gain of the manipulated variable.
Note: The gain is multiplied with the feedforward input (FF_VAL) and the result added to the OUT value.
Defines the measuring range (upper and lower limits), the engineering unit and the number of decimal places
used for the feedforward input (FF_VAL).
Indicates/specifies the value and status of the feedforward input.
Note: The feedforward input is multiplied with the gain (FF_GAIN) and the result added to the OUT value.
Specifies the proportional gain (factor).
Note: The parameter must be set to a value other than 0, otherwise a configuration error will be set in the
BLOCK_ERR parameter and the block will go to O/S mode.

EB 8384-5 EN 169
 Appendix PID Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

GRANT_DENY 12 D r/w NA

HL_ALM 61 D r Unit from PV_SCALE

HI_HI_ALM 60 D r/w Unit from PV_SCALE

HI_HI_LIM 49 S r/w ALL Range and unit from PV_SCALE,

[3402823466 x 1038]

HI_HI_PRI 48 S r/w ALL

[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HI_LIM 51 S r/w ALL Range and unit from PV_SCALE,
[3402823466 x 1038]

HI_PRI 50 S r/w ALL

0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IN 15 N r/w ALL
LO_ALM 62 D r Unit from PV_SCALE

LO_LIM 53 S r/w Range and unit from PV_SCALE,

[-3402823466 x 1038]

LO_LO_ALM 63 D r Unit from PV_SCALE

LO_LO_LIM 55 S r/w ALL Range and unit from PV_SCALE,

[-3402823466 x 1038]

170 EB 8384-5 EN
 PID Function Block Appendix

Description
Grants or denies access of a fieldbus host system to the field device.
Note: This parameter is not used by Type 3730-5.
Indicates high alarm status (HI_LIM) including details of time of alarm (date and time stamp) as well as the value
that triggered the alarm.
Indicates high high alarm status (HI_HI_LIM) including details of time of alarm (date and time stamp) as well as
the value that triggered the alarm.
Note: The active alarm can also be acknowledged manually in this parameter group.
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the high high alarm (HI_HI_ALM) condition.
If the PV value exceeds this limit, the HI_HI_ALM is issued.
Determines the action to be taken when the value for the high high alarm is exceeded (HI_HI_LIM).
. . The limit for high high alarm is not processed.
. . Alarm is not broadcast to fieldbus host system.
. . Reserved for block alarms
. . High high alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . High high alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the high alarm (HI_ALM) condition.
If the PV value exceeds this limit, the HI_ALM is issued.
Determines the action to be taken when the value for the high alarm is exceeded (HI_LIM).
. . The limit for high alarm is not processed.
. . Alarm is not broadcast to fieldbus host system.
. . Reserved for block alarms
. . High alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . High alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).
Indicates/specifies the analog input variable with details on state and value.
Indicates low alarm status (LO_LIM) including details of time of alarm (date and time stamp) as well as the value
that triggered the alarm.
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the low alarm (LO_ALM) condition.
If the PV value exceeds this limit, the LO_ALM is issued.
Indicates low low alarm status (LO_LO_LIM) including details of time of alarm (date and time stamp) as well as
the value that triggered the alarm.
Note: The active alarm can also be acknowledged manually in this parameter group.
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the low low alarm (LO_LO_ALM) condition.
If the PV value falls below this limit, the LO_LO_ALM is issued.

EB 8384-5 EN 171
 Appendix PID Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

LO_LO_PRI 54 S r/w ALL
[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO_PRI 52 S r/w ALL
[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODE_BLK 5 S r/w ALL

O/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RCAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ROUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OUT 9 N r/w O/M Range OUT_SCALE ±10 %,

Unit from XD_SCALE

OUT_HI_LIM 28 S r/w ALL Range OUT_SCALE ±10 %,

Unit from OUT_SCALE, [100]
OUT_LO_LIM 29 S r/w ALL Range OUT_SCALE ±10 %,
Unit from OUT_SCALE, [0]
OUT_SCALE 11 S r/w O [0 to 100 %]

PV 7 D r Unit from PV_SCALE

172 EB 8384-5 EN
 PID Function Block Appendix

Description
Determines the action to be taken when the value for the low low alarm is not reached (LO_LO_LIM).
. . The limit for low low alarm is not processed.
. . Alarm is not broadcast to fieldbus host system.
. . Reserved for block alarms.
. . Low low alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . Low low alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).
Determines the action to be taken when the value for the low alarm is not reached (LO_LIM).
. . The limit for low alarm is not processed.
. . Alarm is not broadcast to fieldbus host system.
. . Reserved for block alarms.
. . Low alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . Low alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).
Indicates the actual mode of the PID Block, the target and permitted modes supported by the PID Block, and the
normal mode.
. . The PID algorithm of the block is not implemented. The last value or the value determined when the Fault State
is activated is issued at OUT parameter.
. . The output value of the block can directly be entered by the user over the OUT parameter.
. . The set point determined by the user is used to implement the PID Block over the SP parameter.
. . The PID Function Block receives the reference variable directly from an upstream function block over the
CAS_IN parameter for internal calculation of the manipulated variable. The AO Block is implemented.
. . The AO Function block receives the reference variable directly from the fieldbus host system for internal
calculation of the manipulated variable. The AO Block is implemented.
. . The PID Function Block receives the manipulated variable directly from the fieldbus host system over the
ROUT_IN parameter. The manipulated variable is issued again over OUT without the internal PID algorithm
being implemented.
Indicates the manipulated variable, the value, limit, and status of the AO Function Block.
Note: If the MAN mode is selected in the MODE_BLK parameter, the output value OUT can be entered manually.
Specifies the upper limit of the analog manipulated variable (OUT).

Specifies the lower limit of the analog manipulated variable (OUT).

Definition of the range (initial and final values), the engineering unit and the number of decimal places used for
the manipulated variable (OUT).
Indicates the process variables used to implement the block including their status.

EB 8384-5 EN 173
 Appendix PID Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

PV_FTIME 16 S r/w ALL [0 s]

PV_SCALE 10 S r/w O [0 to 100 %]

RATE 26 S r/w ALL [0 s]

RCAS_IN 32 N r/w ALL

RCAS_OUT 35 D r

RESET 24 S r/w [3402823466 x 1038 (max. possible value])

ROUT_IN 33 N r/w ALL

ROUT_OUT 36 D r

174 EB 8384-5 EN
 PID Function Block Appendix

Description
Used to enter the filter time constant (in seconds) of the first-order digital filter.
This time is needed to allow a 63 % change of the input IN in the value of PV to become effective.
Definition of the range (initial and final values), the engineering unit and the number of decimal places used for
the process variable (PV).
Specifies the time constant for the differential function.
Input and display of the analog reference variable (value and status) provided by the fieldbus host system for in-
ternal calculation of the manipulated variable.
Note: This parameter is only active in the RCAS mode.
Display of analog reference variable (value and status) after ramping.
This value is provided to the fieldbus host system for back calculation to allow action to be taken under mode
changes or limited signals.
Note: This parameter is only active in the RCAS mode.
Specifies the time constant for the integral-action function.
Note: The initial value or 0 deactivates the integral-action function.
Input and display of the manipulated variable (value and status) provided by the fieldbus host system.
Note: This parameter is only active in the ROUT mode.
Indicates the analog reference variable (value and status) that has been written to the ROUT_IN parameter.
This value is provided by the fieldbus host system over this parameter to perform back calculation to allow action
to be taken under mode changes or limited signals.
Note: This parameter is only active in the ROUT mode.

EB 8384-5 EN 175
 Appendix PID Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

SHED_OPT 34 S r/w ALL

[Uninitialized] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NormalShed_NormalReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NormalShed_NoReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToAuto_NormalReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToAuto_NoReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ShedToManual_NormalReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToManual_NoReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ShedToRetainedTarget_NormalReturn . . . . . . . .

ShedToRetainedTarget_NoReturn. . . . . . . . . . . .
SP 8 N r/w O/M/A Value and range from PV_SCALE ±10 %
SP_HI_LIM 21 S r/w ALL Value and range from PV_SCALE ±10 %, [100]

SP_LO_LIM 22 S r/w ALL Value and range from PV_SCALE ±10 %, [0]

SP_RATE_DN 19 S r/w ALL [3402823466 x 1038]

SP_RATE_UP 20 S r/w ALL [3402823466 x 1038]

ST_REV 1 S r

176 EB 8384-5 EN
 PID Function Block Appendix

Description
Determines what action is to be taken when the monitoring time is exceeded (see SHED_RCAS parameter in the
Resource Block) while the connection between the fieldbus host system and the PID Block in RCAS or ROUT mode
is being checked. When the time has elapsed, the PID Block switches from RCAS or ROUT mode to the mode
selected in SHED_OPT. The action to be taken after the Fault State ends is also determined.
Note! This parameter is only active in RCAS or ROUT mode in the PID Block. The PID Block cannot be set to the
RCAS or ROUT mode when the value is set to Uninitialized.

. . On failure of remote connection, change to next possible mode until RCAS or ROUT mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to next possible mode the block remains in this mode.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to AUTO mode until RCAS or ROUT mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to AUTO mode. No attempt is made to restore the mode and the
block remains in AUTO mode.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to MAN mode until RCAS or ROUT mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to MAN mode. No attempt is made to restore the mode and the
block remains in MAN mode.
. . On failure of remote connection, the block attempts to attain the retained target mode until RCAS or ROUT
mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, the block sets the target mode to the retained target mode.
Used to enter the set point (reference variable) in AUTO mode.
Used to enter the high limit of the set point (reference variable).
Note: This value must be adapted correspondingly if the scale end setting is changed in PV_SCALE parameter.
Used to enter the low limit of the set point (reference variable).
Note: This value must be adapted correspondingly if the scale end setting is changed in PV_SCALE parameter.
Used to enter the ramp rate for downward set point changes in AUTO mode.
Note: The set point is used immediately when the ramp rate is set to zero. The rate limit is active for output blocks
in the AUTO mode.
Used to enter the ramp rate for upward set point changes in AUTO mode.
Note: The set point is used immediately when the ramp rate is set to zero. The rate limit is active for output blocks
in the AUTO mode.
Indicates the revision number of static data.
Note: The revision state is incremented by one each time a static parameter in the block is written.

EB 8384-5 EN 177
 Appendix PID Function Block

Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]

STATUS_OPT 14 S r/w O
[Uninitialized] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IFS if Bad IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IFS if Bad CAS_IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Uncertain as Good . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target In Manual if Bad IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRATEGY 3 S r/w ALL [0]

TAG_DESC 2 S r/w ALL max. 32 characters, [no text]

TRK_IN_D 38 N r/w ALL

TRK_SCALE 37 S r/w O/M [0...100 %]

TRK_VAL 39 N r/w ALL

UPDATE_EVT 43 D r

Parameter index

Index Parameter Index Parameter Index Parameter

0 – 11 OUT_SCALE 22 SP_LO_LIM
1 ST_REV 12 GRANT_DENY 23 GAIN
2 TAG_DESC 13 CONTROL_OPTS 24 RESET
3 STRATEGY 14 STATUS_OPT 25 BAL_TIME
4 ALERT_KEY 15 IN 26 RATE
5 MODE_BLK 16 PV_FTIME 27 BKCAL_IN
6 BLOCK_ERR 17 BYPASS 28 OUT_HI_LIM
7 PV 18 CAS_IN 29 OUT_LO_LIM
8 SP 19 SP_RATE_DN 30 BKCAL_HYS
9 OUT 20 SP_RATE_UP 31 BKCAL_OUT
10 PV_SCALE 21 SP_HI_LIM 32 RCAS_IN

178 EB 8384-5 EN
 PID Function Block Appendix

Description
Allows the selection of status options available to determine the handling and processing of the status:

. . Trigger IFS substate of downstream AO Function Block, of the input value (IN) changes the status to BAD.
. . Trigger IFS substate if the external reference variable (CAS_IN) changes the status to BAD.
. . The status UNCERTAIN is used as GOOD.
. . Reverts to MAN mode if the input value changes the status to BAD.
Permits strategic grouping and thus faster processing of blocks. Blocks are grouped by entering the same number
in the STRATEGY parameter of each block.
Note: These data are neither checked nor processed by the PID Function Block.
Assigns a unique description to each block for clear identification.
Indicates/specifies the discrete input (value and status) which activates the external or output tracking.
On activating tracking, the block changes to LO mode. The manipulated variable at OUT adopts the value
defined over the input TRK_VAL.
Definition of the range (initial and final values), the engineering unit and the number of decimal places used for
external tracking value (TRK_VAL).
Indicates/specifies the analog input value and status from another function block for external tracking function.
Indicates that static data were changed, including date and time stamp.

Index Parameter Index Parameter Index Parameter

33 ROUT_IN 44 BLOCK_ALM 55 LO_LO_LIM
34 SHED_OPT 45 ALARM_SUM 56 DV_HI_PRI
35 RCAS_OUT 46 ACK_OPTION 57 DV_HI_LIM
36 ROUT_OUT 47 ALARM_HYS 58 DV_LO_PRI
37 TRK_SCALE 48 HI_HI_PRI 59 DV_LO_LIM
38 TRK_IN_D 49 HI_HI_LIM 60 HI_HI_ALM
39 TRK_VAL 50 HI_PRI 61 HI_ALM
40 FF_VAL 51 HI_LIM 62 LO_ALM
41 FF_SCALE 52 LO_PRI 63 LO_LO_ALM
42 FF_GAIN 53 LO_LIM 64 DV_HI_ALM
43 UPDAT_EVT 54 LO_LO_PRI 65 DV_LO_ALM

EB 8384-5 EN 179
 Dimensions in mm

17 Dimensions in mm
Pressure gauge or connecting plate Attachment acc. to IEC 60534-6
bracket External position
sensor
Lever mm
S = 17
M = 50 Schild

28
L = 100
XL = 200
15
70

46 58

70
34 70

Direct attachment
210

M20 x 1.5

80
34

14
40 28
58
164 Output (38) Supply (9)

Attachment to rotary actuators

86

VDI/VDE 3845
for all sizes of fixing level 2
Output A1
50 Supply (9)

A1 Z
76

A2

Connecting
49
59

plate G ¼ 58
79

or ¼ NPT
Output A2
Reversing amplifier
50 80
(option)
130
150

180 EB 8384-5 EN
 Valve characteristic selection

18 Valve characteristic selection

The characteristics that can be selected in Code 20 are shown in following in graph form.

Note: A characteristic can only be defined (user-defined characteristic) using a workstation/

operating software (e.g. TROVIS-VIEW).

Linear (select characteristic: 0)

Travel/ angle of rotation [%]

100

50

Reference variable [%]

0
0 50 100

Equal percentage (select characteristic: 1) Rev. equal percentage (select characteristic: 2)

Travel/ angle of rotation [%]

Travel/ angle of rotation [%]
100
100

50
50

Reference variable [%]

Reference variable [%]
0
0 50 100 0
0 50 100

EB 8384-5 EN 181
SAMSON butterfly valve linear SAMSON butterfly valve equal percentage
(select characteristic: 3) (select characteristic: 4)

Travel/ angle of rotation [%]

Travel/ angle of rotation [%] 100
100

50
50

Reference variable [%]

Reference variable [%] 0
0 0 50 100
0 50 100

VETEC rotary plug valve linear VETEC rotary plug valve equal percentage
(select characteristic: 5) (select characteristic: 6)

Travel/ angle of rotation [%] Travel/ angle of rotation [%]

100 100

50 50

Reference variable [%] Reference variable [%]

0 0
0 50 100 0 50 100

Segmented valve ball linear Segmented ball valve equal percentage

(select characteristic: 7) (select characteristic: 7)

Travel/ angle of rotation [%]

Travel/ angle of rotation [%]
100
100

50
50

Reference variable [%]

Reference variable [%]
0
0 50 100 0
0 50 100
EB 8384-5 EN 183
184 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 185
186 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 187
188 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 189
190 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 191
192 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 193
194 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 195
196
EB 8384-5 EN
Addendum Page 1 Addendum Page 2

Installation Manual for apparatus certified by CSA for use in hazardous locations. Intrinsically safe if installed as specified in manufacturer’s installation manual.
TM
Communication is optionally either according to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Specification or CSA- certified for hazardous locations Type 4 Enclosure
according to PROFIBUS PA in compliance FISCO-Concept
Ex ia IIC T6
The FISCO Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus not specifically examined in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F + G; Class III.
such combination. The criteria for interconnection is that the voltage (Vmax) the current (Imax) and the power (Pmax) which
intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically safe, considering faults, must be equal or greater than the voltage CSA-certified associated
Serial interface, for connection apparatus suitable
(V0C) the current (ISC) and the power (P0) levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus, considering faults and to CSA certified intrinsically for Profibus PA or FOUNDATION FF
safe circuit FIELDBUS
applicable factors. In addition, the maximum unprotected capacitance (Ci) and inductance (Li) of each apparatus (other than the
termination) connected to the fieldbus must be less than or equal to 5 nF and 10 µH respectively. Fieldbus
11+
Isolating amplifier 1 or 2
In each segment only one active device, normally the associated apparatus, is allowed to provide the necessary energy for the . 12- channels
circuit 1 CSA- certified
fieldbus system The allowed voltage (V0C) of the associated apparatus is limited to the range of

Model 3730-43/3730-53
14V DC. to 24V DC. All other equipment connected to the bus cable has to be passive, meaning that they are not allowed to

Positioners
provide energy to the system, except to a leakage current of 50mA for each connected device. Separately powered equipment 41+ Limit switch circuit 2
needs a galvanic isolation to assure that the intrinsically safe fieldbus circuit remains passive. 42-
81+ Forced venting function
82- circuit 3
The cable used to interconnect the devices need to have the parameters in the following range:
87+ Binary contact 1
Loop resistance R‘: 15 ... 150 Ohm/km
88- circuit 4
Inductance per unit length L‘: 0,4 ... 1 mH/km
85+
Capacitance per unit length C‘: 80 ... 200 nF/km supply barrier
86-
C‘ = C‘ line/line + 0,5 C‘ line/screen, if both lines are floating or, C‘ = C‘ line/line + C’line/screen, if the screen is Binary contact 2
connected to one line circuit 5
Length of spur cable: ≤ 30 m Terminal No. evaluation barrier
Length of trunk cable: ≤ 1 km External position sensor
supply barrier
(optionally)
At each end of the trunk cable an approved infallible line termination with the following parameters is suitable:
R = 90 ... 100 Ohm C = 0 ... 2,2 µF evaluation barrier
One of the allowed terminations might already be integrated in the associated apparatus.
I.S.Ground
The number of passive devices connected to the bus segment is not limited due to I.S. reasons. If the above rules are respected,
the inductance and capacitance of the cable will not impair the intrinsic safety of the installation. CSA- certified barrier
CSA-certified
Notes: intrinsically safe
apparatus suitable
1. Approved associated apparatus must be installed in accordance with manufacturer instructions for FIELDBUS
2. Approved associated apparatus must meet the following requirements:
Hazardous Safe
Voc ≤ Vmax, Isc ≤ Imax, Po ≤ Pmax
3. The maximum non-hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. Location Location
4. The installation must be in accordance with the Canadian Electrical code Part 1.
5. Each set of wires must be provided with grounded shield. The shield must extend as close to the terminal(s) as possible CSA-certified
intrinsically safe Installation shall be in accordance with the C.E.C. Part 1
and it must be grounded shield at I. S. Barrier ground. apparatus suitable
6. Caution: Use only supply wires suitable for 5 °C above surrounding. for FIELDBUS

7. Warning: Substitution of components may impair intrinsic safety. PE = I. S. Ground CSA-certified

termination with
8. The polarity for connecting 11 and 12 is of no importance due to an internal rectifier. R = 90 . . .100Ω,
C = 0 . . .2,2µF
9. FISCO concept applies to fieldbus / circuit only.
10. Entity parameters apply to circuit 2, 3 and 4 and further required to meet the following conditions:
Co ≥ Ci + Ccable; Lo ≥ Li + Lcable

Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN
 Addendum Page 3 Addendum Page 4
Table 1: Intrinsic Safety Parameters Table 2: CSA – certified barrier parameters of circuit 4

Fieldbus Limit- Forced Binary- input Serial-Interface Supply barrier Evaluation barrier
switches venting- Barrier
Foundation Profibus inductive function 1 2 Active Passive V0C Rmin V0C Rmin

Circuit No. 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 circuit 3 ≤28V ≥245Ω ≤28V Diode

Terminal 11 / 12 11 / 12
41 / 42 81 / 82 87 / 87 85 / 86 plug circuit 4 ≤30V ≥300Ω ≤30V Diode
No. (IEC 1148-2) (IEC 1148-2)

Groups IIC IIB IIC IIB #/# #/# #/# #/# #/# #/# The correlation between temperature classification and permissible ambient
temperature ranges is shown in the table 3 below:
Vmax 28 28
24 17,5 16 ### ### 16
[V] 30 30 Table 3:

U0 or V0C ############################################## 5,88V 8,61V ### Permissble ambient

Temperature class
temperature range
Imax 25 115 115
360 380 380 ### ### 25
[ mA ] 52 100 100 T6 +60°C

I0 or ISC ############################################## 1mA 55mA ### T5 -40°C ≤ Ta ≤+70°C

Pmax 64mW 250 64 T4 +80°C

1,04 2,58 5,32 ## ## 7,2 mW
[W] 169mW mW mW

Ci [ nF ] 2 60 5,3 0 ### ### 0 Table 4: Energy-Limited (Non- Incendive) Parameters

Limit- Forced

Maximum values for serial-interface and binary input 2 see

C0 or Ca ############################################## 2µF 0,61µF ### Foundation Fieldbus or Profibus PA Binary-
switches venting
(Non incendive Equipment) (inductive) Input 1
Li [ µH ] 10 100 0 0 ### ### 0 function

L0 or La ############################################## 10mH 9mH ### Terminal 11 / 12 (IEC 1148-2) 41 / 42 81 / 82 87 / 88

Groups A, B and IIC C, D and IIB #/# #/# #/#

Binary- input 1: For connection of an active signal circuit
Ui or Vmax 28V 28V
Binary- input 2: For connection of an passive contact circuit directly on the control valve, e.g. 20V 24V 30V 32V 20V 24V 30V 32V 20V 30V 30V

table 1
[VDC]
passive pressure switch for leakage monitoring 32V 32V

Notes: Ii or Imax 1,117 25mA 115mA 115mA

464 261 152 130 650 379 324 100mA 100mA
[mA] A 52mA
90mA 90mA
1. Entity parameters must meet the following requirements:
Pi or Pmax 64mW
V0C ≤ Vmax , ISC ≤ Imax, P0 ≤ Pmax 2,32 1,56 1,14 1,14 5,88 3,89 3,85 2,77 ## ##
[W] 169mW
C0 or Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable and L0 or La ≥ Li + Lcable
Ci 2nF 30 5,3 0
2. Install in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code Part I
Li 10µH 100 0 0
3. Cable entry M 20 x1,5 or metal conduit acc. to dwg. No. 1050-0540

* Circuit 3 can be connected to a CSA Certified zener barrier that is rated as follows:
- Supply channel (connect to Terminal 81): Voc ≤ 28V max. and Rmin ≥ 245 Ω
EB 8384-5 EN

- Return channel (connect to Terminal 82): ≤ 28V max with diodes Return (zero current)

** Circuit 4 can be connected to a CSA Certified zener barrier that is rated as follows:
- Supply channel (connect to Terminal 87): Voc ≤ 30V and Rmin ≥ 300 Ω
- Return channel (connect to Terminal 88): Voc ≤ 30V max with diodes Return (zero current)

Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN
197
198
EB 8384-5 EN
Addendum Page 5 Addendum Page 6
CSA certified for hazardous locations: Installation drawing Control Relay KHA5-OTI/Ex2, KHA6-OTI/Ex1 or
KHA6-OTI/Ex2 with Model SJ-b-N Proximity Sensors
Ex nA II T6 / Ex nL IIC T6
Class I, Div. 2; Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Div. 2 Groups E, F + G; Class III
HAZARDOUS SAFE
Type 4 Enclosure
LOCATION LOCATION

CSA-certified associated
Serial interface, apparatus suitable
CSA certified for Profibus PA or FOUNDATION FF intrinsically output
FIELDBUS 1+ 12+
to sensor or contact
87+ 2+ 11+
Fieldbus to intrinsically channel 1
11+ Isolating amplifier 1 or 2 safe output

Model 3730-43
. 88- 3- 10-
12- channels

or 3730-53
circuit 1 to one common
Switch-Isolators
Model 3730-43/3730-53

line possible
Type KHA5 – OTI/Ex2
or KHA6 - OTI/Ex.
intrinsically output
41+ Proximity sensor 4+ 9+
Positioners

41+ Limit switch circuit 2

42- software limit switch to sensor or contact 5+ 8+
42-
81+ Forced venting function terminal No. channel 2
6- 7-
82- circuit 3

UNSPECIFIED APPARATUS
e.g. transmitter relay
87+ Binary contact 1 Model designation code Type KHab – cExde

88- circuit 4 External a= Supply Voltage type A or D

position sensor a=AC, d=DC
85+ b= Supply Level
2=24V DC±15%; 5=120V AC +10%-15%;
86- 6=230V AC+10%-15%;
Binary contact 2 c= Output type RTA/; RW1/; SS1/; SS2/; RS1/;
circuit 5 SR/; ST-or SOT
Terminal No. d= Number of channels 1 or 2
e= Power rail designation, P, 2S.P or GS.P
(includes Model KHD2-EB-PB Power Feed Module) or
External position sensor
Blank
(optionally)

GROUND The total series inductance and shunt capacitance of shield wiring shall maximum capacitance of each inductive sensor 30nF
be restricted to the following maximum values maximum inductance of each inductive sensor 100µH

CSA-certified
apparatus suitable System parameters
for FIELDBUS
Control Relay L C V0C ISC Vmax Rmin
Terminal No. Groups
Hazardous Safe [ mH ] [ µF ] [V] [ mA ] [V] [Ω]

Location A+B 192 2,66

Location 1-3; 2-3
4-6; 5-6
C+E 671 7,9 10,5 13 10,5 811

CSA-certified
apparatus suitable D, F, G 1000 21,3
for FIELDBUS
Division 2 wiring method must be in accordance to
CSA-certified the Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 Division 2 wiring method shall be in accordance to the
termination with Canadian Electrical Code Part 1.
R = 90 . . .100Ω,
C = 0 . . .2,2µF

Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN
 Addendum Page 7 Addendum Page 8

Installation Manual for apparatus approved by FM for use in hazardous locations.

TM Intrinsically safe if installed as specified in manufacturer’s installation manual.
Communication is optionally either according to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Specification or
according to PROFIBUS PA in compliance FISCO-Concept FM- approved for hazardous locations
The FISCO Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus not specifically examined in Class I, Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T6:
such combination. The criteria for interconnection is that the voltage (Vmax/Ui) the current (Imax/Ii) and the power (Pi) which Class I, II, III Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F + G. Field enclosure NEMA 4X
intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically safe, considering faults, must be equal or greater than the voltage
FM-approved associated
(V0C/U0) the current (ISC/I0) and the power (P0) levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus, considering faults Serial interface, for connection apparatus suitable
to FM approved intrinsically for Profibus PA or FOUNDATION FF
and applicable factors. In addition, the maximum unprotected capacitance (Ci) and inductance (Li) of each apparatus (other than safe circuit FIELDBUS
the termination) connected to the fieldbus must be less than or equal to 5 nF and 10 µH respectively.
Fieldbus
In each segment only one active device, normally the associated apparatus, is allowed to provide the necessary energy for the 11+
Isolating amplifier 1 or 2
fieldbus system The allowed voltage (V0C /Uo) of the associated apparatus is limited to the range of 14V DC. to 24V DC. All
. 12- Channels FM-approved
circuit 1

Model 3730-43/3730-53
other equipment connected to the bus cable has to be passive, meaning that they are not allowed to provide energy to the system,
except to a leakage current of 50mA for each connected device. Separately powered equipment needs a galvanic isolation to

Positioners
assure that the intrinsically safe fieldbus circuit remains passive. 41+ Limit switch circuit 2
42-
81+ Forced venting function
The cable used to interconnect the devices need to have the parameters in the following range: 82- circuit 3
Loop resistance R‘: 15 ... 150 Ohm/km
87+ Binary contact 1
Inductance per unit length L‘: 0,4 ... 1 mH/km
88- circuit 4
Capacitance per unit length C‘: 80 ... 200 nF/km
85+
C‘ = C‘ line/line + 0,5 C‘ line/screen, if both lines are floating or, C‘ = C‘ line/line + C’line/screen, if the screen is supply barrier
86-
connected to one line
Binary contact 2
Length of spur cable: ≤ 30 m circuit 5
Terminal No. evaluation barrier
Length of trunk cable: ≤ 1 km
supply barrier
At each end of the trunk cable an approved infallible line termination with the following parameters is suitable: External position sensor
(optionally)
R = 90 ... 100 Ohm C = 0 ... 2,2 µF
One of the allowed terminations might already be integrated in the associated apparatus. evaluation barrier

The number of passive devices connected to the bus segment is not limited due to I.S. reasons. If the above rules are respected, I.S.Ground
the inductance and capacitance of the cable will not impair the intrinsic safety of the installation.
FM-approved barrier
Notes: FM-approved
1. Approved associated apparatus must be installed in accordance with manufacturer instructions intrinsically safe
apparatus suitable
2. Approved associated apparatus must meet the following requirements: for FIELDBUS

Uo or Voc ≤ Ui or Vmax, Io or Isc ≤ Ii or Imax, Po ≤ Pi or Pmax

Hazardous Safe
3. The maximum non-hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.
4. The installation must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and Location Location
ANSI/ISA RP 12.06.01
FM-approved
5. Each set of wires must be provided with grounded shield. The shield must extend as close to the terminal(s) as possible intrinsically safe The installation must be in accordance with the National Electrical
and it must be grounded shield at I. S. Barrier ground. apparatus suitable
Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.06.01
for FIELDBUS
6. Caution: Use only supply wires suitable for 5 °C above surrounding.
FM-approved
7. Warning: Substitution of components may impair intrinsic safety. PE = I. S. Ground termination with
8. The polarity for connecting 11 and 12 is of no importance due to an internal rectifier. R = 90 . . .100Ω,
EB 8384-5 EN

C = 0 . . .2,2µF
9. FISCO concept applies to fieldbus / circuit only.
10. Entity parameters apply to circuit 2, 3 and 4 and further required to meet the following conditions:
Co ≥ Ci + Ccable; Lo ≥ Li + Lcable

Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN
199
200
EB 8384-5 EN
Addendum Page 9 Addendum Page 10

Table 2: FM – approved barrier parameters of circuit 4

Table 1: Maximum values
Supply barrier Evaluation barrier
Fieldbus Limit- Forced Binary- input Serial-Interface Barrier
switches venting- V0C Rmin I0C Pmax V0C Rmin
Foundation Profibus inductive function 1 2 active passive
circuit 3 ≤28V ≥245Ω ≤115mA ## ≤28V Diode
Circuit No. 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 6
circuit 4 ≤30V ≥300Ω ≤100mA ## ≤30V Diode

Terminal 11 / 12 11 / 12 41 / 42 81 / 82 87 / 88 85 / 86 plug
No. The correlation between temperature classification and permissible ambient
temperature ranges is shown in the table 3 below:
A, B C, D A, B, C, D
Groups IIC IIB IIC / IIB #/# #/# #/# #/# #/# #/#
Table 3:
Ui or Vmax 24 17,5 16 28 30
V0C V0C Vmax
[V] 5,88 8,61 16 Permissble ambient
Temperature class
temperature range
Ii or Imax 360 380 380 25 115 100
ISC ISC Imax
[ mA ] 1 55 25 T6 +60°C

Pi or Pmax 64 250 64 T5 -40°C ≤ Ta ≤+70°C

1,04 2,58 5,32 ## ## 7,2 mW
[W] mW mW mW
T4 +80°C
Ci [ nF ] 5 60 5,3 0 2µF 0,61µF 0
Table 4:
Li [ µH ] 10 100 0 0 10mH 9mH 0
Limit- Forced

Maximum values for serial-interface and binary input 2

Foundation Fieldbus or Profibus PA Binary-
switches venting
(Non incendive Field wiring) (inductive) Input 1
Binary- input 1: For connection of an active signal circuit function

Binary- input 2: For connection of an passive contact circuit directly on the control valve, e.g. Terminal 11 / 12 41 / 42 81 / 82 87 / 88
passive pressure switch for leakage monitoring
Groups A, B and IIC C, D and IIB #/# #/# #/#
Notes:
Ui or Vmax

see table 1
1. Entity parameters must meet the following requirements: 20V 24V 30V 32V 20V 24V 30V 32V 20V 30V 30V
[VDC]
U0 ≤ Ui or Vmax , I0 ≤ Ii or Imax, P0 ≤ Pi or Pmax Ii or Imax
C0 or Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable and L0 or La ≥ Li + Lcable 464 261 152 130 1,117 650 379 324 25mA 100mA 100mA
[mA] A

Pi or Pmax 2,32 1,56 1,14 1,14 5,88 3,89 3,85 2,77 64mW ## ##
2. The installation must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code [W]
ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.06.01
Ci 5nF 60 5,3 0
3. Cable entry M 20 x1,5 or metal conduit acc. to dwg. No. 1050-0540
Li 10µH 100 0 0

Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN
 Addendum Page 11 Addendum Page 12

FM approved for hazardous locations: Installation drawing Control Relay KHA5-OTI/Ex2, KHA6-OTI/Ex1 or
Ex nA II T6; Ex nL IIC T6 Zone 2. KHA6-OTI/Ex2 with Model SJ-b-N Proximity Sensor
Class I, II, Div. 2 Groups A, B, C, D, E+F. Field enclosure NEMA 4X
HAZARDOUS SAFE
FM-approved associated LOCATION LOCATION
Serial interface, apparatus suitable
FM-approved Ex nA II T6; Ex nL IIC T6 Zone 2.
for Profibus PA or FOUNDATION FF Class I, II, Div. 2 Groups A, B, C, D, E+F.
FIELDBUS intrinsically output
1+ 12+
Fieldbus to sensor or contact
11+ Isolating amplifier 1 or 2 87+ to intrinsically 2+ 11+
. channel 1

Model 3730-43
12- channels safe output
circuit 1 88- 3- 10-

or 3730-53
Model 3730-43/3730-53

to one common
line possible Switch-Isolators
Type KHA5 – OTI/Ex2
or KHA6 - OTI/Ex1
Positioners

41+ 41+ Proximity sensor intrinsically output

Limit switch circuit 2 4+ 9+
42- 42- software limit switch to sensor or contact
5+ 8+
81+ Forced venting function
terminal No. channel 2
82- circuit 3 6- 7-

UNSPECIFIED APPARATUS
e.g. transmitter relay
87+ Binary contact 1
88- circuit 4 External position sensor
(optionally)
85+ Model designation code Type KHab – cExde
86- a= Supply Voltage type A or D
Binary contact 2 a=AC, d=DC
circuit 5 b= Supply Level
2=24V DC±15%; 5=120V AC +10%-15%;
Terminal No.
6=230V AC+10%-15%;
c= Output type RTA/; RW1/; SS1/; SS2/; RS1/;
External position sensor maximum capacitance of each inductive sensor 30nF SR/; ST-or SOT
(optionally) maximum inductance of each inductive sensor 100µH d= Number of channels 1 or 2
e= Power rail designation, P, 2S.P or GS.P
(includes Model KHD2-EB-PB Power Feed
Module) or Blank

Each pair of I.S. wires must be protected by a shield that is grounded at the I.S. Ground. The shield must be extend as close
to the terminals as possible installation shall be in accordance with the National
GROUND Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.06.01.
FM-approved The total series inductance and shunt capacitance of shield wiring shall be restricted to the following maximum values
apparatus suitable
for FIELDBUS

Hazardous Safe System parameters

Control Relay L C V0C ISC Vmax Rmin

Location Location Terminal No. Groups
[ mH ] [ µF ] [V] [ mA ] [V] [Ω]
10,5 811
1-3; 2-3 A+B 192 2,66
FM-approved
apparatus suitable 4-6; 5-6
for FIELDBUS C+E 671 7,9 10,5 13
The installation must be in accordance with the National Electrical
FM-approved
Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.06.01
D, F, G 1000 21,3
termination with
R = 90 . . .100Ω,
C = 0 . . .2,2µF
EB 8384-5 EN

Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN
201
202 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 203
 S/Z 2009-05

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK

Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany
Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507
Internet: http://www.samson.de EB 8384-5 EN
J. – MEDIDORES DE NIVEL
Operating Instructions
Prosonic M FMU40/41/42/43
Ultrasonic Level Measurement

BA239F/00/en/04.05
52010988
Valid as of software version:
V 01.02.00 (amplifier)
V 1.0 (communication)
Short instructions Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

Short instructions

KA 183F/00/a2/02.02
52010993 Prosonic M - Quick Setup
000
measured value Contrast: + or +
008
- + E E dist./
Group E
meas value
- + E
selection
00 002 003 004 005 059 006 008 051 052 053
basic setup tank shape medium process empty blocking full dist./ check range of start
property cond. calibr. distance calibr. meas value distance mapping mapping
+
01 - dome - unknown - standard input E BD is input F D and L are - ok confirm
safety settings ceiling - liquid - calm (s. sketch) displayed (s. sketch) displayed - too small suggestion
- horizontal - > 4 mm surface (s. sketch) (s. sketch) - too big or specify
0E
temperature cyl. - < 4 mm - add. - unknown range
- bypass agitator - manual
04 … …
linearisation
05
extended calibr.
06
output (HART, FF)
profibus param.(PA) BD
100%
0E 0E1 0E2
Envelope curve plot settings recording D
curve
09 092 … … E
display language
F
-
0A 0A0 0A1 0A3 0A4
diagnostics present previous … … reset unlock … … L
error error parameter
0C 0C0 333 (HART) 100 (HART)
system tag no. … … 33333 (PA,FF) 2457 (PA,FF) 0%
parameter
BD: blocking distance

52010993
L00-FMU4xxx-05-00-00-en-001

Contents of the operating instructions

This operating instructions describes the installation and commissioning of the Prosonic M
ultrasonic level transmitter. It contains all the functions required for a normal measuring operation.
Also, the Prosonic M provides additional functions for optimising the measuring point and for
converting the measured value. These functions are not included in this operating instructions.

You can find an overview of all the device functions in the Appendix.

You can find a detailed description of all the device functions in the operating instructions BA
240F/00/en "Prosonic M - Description of Instrument Functions". This is located on the supplied
documentation CD-ROM.

2
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Table of contents

Table of contents
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8 Maintenance and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.1 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.2 Installation, commissioning, operation . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8.2 Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.3 Hazardous area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8.3 Repairs to Ex-approved devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.4 Notes on safety conventions and symbols . . . . . . . . . 5 8.4 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.5 Spare parts (housing type F12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 8.6 Spare parts (housing type T12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.7 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.1 Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 8.8 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.2 Product structure FMU 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 8.9 Software history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.3 Product structure FMU 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8.10 Contact addresses of Endress+Hauser . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.4 Product structure FMU 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.5 Product structure FMU 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.6 Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
9 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.7 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 9.1 Weather protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.8 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 9.2 Installation bracket for FMU 40/41 . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
9.3 Adapter flange for FMU 40 / FMU 41 . . . . . . . . . . 70
3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 9.4 Cantilever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
9.5 Mounting Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 9.6 Wall Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.2 Installation variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 9.7 Mounting bracket for FMU 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.3 Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 9.8 Service Interface FXA193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.4 Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 9.9 Remote display FHX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.5 Installation hint for FMU 40/41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.6 Turn housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.7 Installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
10 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
10.1 Technical data at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.1 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
11 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.2 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 11.1 Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.3 Cable specifications Foundation Fieldbus . . . . . . . . 23 11.2 Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.4 Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.5 Recommended connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.6 Checking the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.1 Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.2 Function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.3 Foundation Fieldbus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.4 Operation using the on-site display VU 331 . . . . . . 44
5.5 Lock/unlock configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.6 Resetting the customer parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.7 Resetting an interference echo suppression (tank map)
46

6 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.1 Power up instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.2 Basic calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.3 Envelope curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.1 System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.2 Application errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

3
Safety instructions Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

1 Safety instructions

1.1 Designated use

The Prosonic M is a compact measuring device for continuous, non-contact level measurement.
Depending on the sensor, the measuring range is up to 15m in fluids and up to 7m in bulk solids.
By using the linearisation function, the Prosonic M can also be used for flow measurements in open
channels and measuring weirs.

1.2 Installation, commissioning, operation

The Prosonic M is fail-safe and is constructed to the state-of-the-art. It meets the appropriate
standards and EC directives. However, if you use it improperly or other than for its designated use,
it may pose application-specific hazards, e.g. product overflow due to incorrect installation or
configuration. Installation, electrical connection, start-up, operation and maintenance of the
measuring device must therefore be carried out exclusively by trained specialists authorised by the
system operator. Technical personnel must have read and understood these operating instructions
and must adhere to them. You may only undertake modifications or repair work to the device when
it is expressly permitted by the operating instructions.

1.3 Hazardous area

Measuring systems for use in hazardous environments are accompanied by separate "Ex
documentation", which is an integral part of this Operating Manual. Strict compliance with the
installation instructions and ratings as stated in this supplementary documentation is mandatory.
• Ensure that all personnel are suitably qualified.
• Observe the specifications in the certificate as well as national and local standards and regulations.

4
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Safety instructions

1.4 Notes on safety conventions and symbols

In order to highlight safety-relevant or alternative operating procedures in the manual, the following
conventions have been used, each indicated by a corresponding symbol in the margin.

Safety conventions

#
Warning!
A warning highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, will lead to personal
injury, a safety hazard or destruction of the instrument

"
Caution!
Caution highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may lead to personal
injury or incorrect functioning of the instrument

!
Note!
A note highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may indirectly affect
operation or may lead to an instrument response which is not planned

Explosion protection

0
Device certified for use in explosion hazardous area
If the device has this symbol embossed on its name plate it can be installed in an explosion hazardous
area

Explosion hazardous area

- Symbol used in drawings to indicate explosion hazardous areas. Devices located in and wiring
entering areas with the designation “explosion hazardous areas” must conform with the stated type
of protection.

.
Safe area (non-explosion hazardous area)
Symbol used in drawings to indicate, if necessary, non-explosion hazardous areas. Devices located in
safe areas still require a certificate if their outputs run into explosion hazardous areas

Electrical symbols

% Direct voltage
A terminal to which or from which a direct current or voltage may be applied or supplied

&
Alternating voltage
A terminal to which or from which an alternating (sine-wave) current or voltage may be applied or
supplied

)
Grounded terminal
A grounded terminal, which as far as the operator is concerned, is already grounded by means of an
earth grounding system

*
Protective grounding (earth) terminal
A terminal which must be connected to earth ground prior to making any other connection to the
equipment

+
Equipotential connection (earth bonding)
A connection made to the plant grounding system which may be of type e.g. neutral star or
equipotential line according to national or company practice

Temperature resistance of the connection cables

t >85°C
States, that the connection cables must be resistant to a temperature of at least 85 °C.

5
Identification Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

2 Identification

2.1 Nameplate

ENDRESS+HAUSER Made in Germany

PROSONIC-M D-79689 Maulburg

Order Code: 1
Ser.-No.: 2 IP68 / NEMA 6P
Profibus PA
Foundation Fieldbus
90 … 253 V AC 4VA 3
5
10,5 …32 V DC 1W
14 … 36 V DC 0,8W
4 … 20 mA HART 2-wire
4-wire 4
TA > 70°C : t >85°C
if modification Patents
X = see sep. label
Dat./Insp.: D01345-B

L00-FMU4xxxx-18-00-00-yy-001

1: Order Code; 2: Serial number; 3: Designation according to Directive 94/9/EC and designation of the type of protection
(only for certified device variants); 4: Reference to additional safety-relevant documentation (only for certified device
variants); 5: Communication variant and supply voltage (the appropriate option is highlighted)

6
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Identification

2.2 Product structure FMU 40

Certificates
A Variant for non-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX ia IIC T6
4 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX d [ia] IIC T6
G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6
2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover
5 ATEX II 1/3D
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
N CSA General Purpose
K TIIS Ex ia II C T6
Y Special certificate

Process connection
R G 1½“ threadISO 228
N NPT 1½“ - 11,5 thread
Y Special version

Power supply/communication
B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version

Display / on-site operation

1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version

Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment;
with overvoltage protection
9 Special version

Screw union/entry
2 M20x1.5 screw union
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version

FMU 40 - Product designation

7
Identification Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

2.3 Product structure FMU 41

Certificates
A Variant for non-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX ia IIC T6
4 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX d [ia] IIC T6
G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6
2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover
5 ATEX II 1/3D
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
N CSA General Purpose
K TIIS Ex ia II C T6
Y Special certificate

Process connection
R G 2“ threadISO 228
N NPT 2“ - 11,5 thread
Y Special version

Power supply/communication
B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version

Display / on-site operation

1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version

Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68 with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment;
with overvoltage protection
9 Special version

Screw union/entry
2 M20x1.5 screw union
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version

FMU 41 - Product designation

8
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Identification

2.4 Product structure FMU 42

Certificates
A Variant for non-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 1/2 G EEX ia IIC T6
4 ATEX II 1/2 G EEX d [ia] IIC T6
G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 (in preparation)
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
N CSA General Purpose
K TIIS Ex ia II C T6 (in preparation)
Y Special certificate

Process connection
M mounting bracket FAU20
P DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS10K80, PP, Universal flange
Q DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS10K80, PVDF, Universal flange
S DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS10K80, 316L, Universal flange
T DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS16K100, PP, Universal flange
U DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS16K100, PVDF, Universal flange
V DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS16K100, 316L, Universal flange
Y Special version

Power supply/communication
B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version

Display / on-site operation

1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version

Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68, with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminium T 12 housing coated to IP 68, with separate terminal compartment; with
overvoltage protection
Y Special version

Gland/Entry
2 M20x1.5 gland
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version

Sealing Sensor/Flange
2 VITON flat sealing
3 EPDM flat sealing
9 special version

Additional options
A Additional options not selected

FMU 42 - Product designation

9
Identification Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

2.5 Product structure FMU 43

Certificates
A Variant for non-hazardous area
2 ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D, Aluminium Deckel
5 ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D, Sichtdeckel
M FM DIP Class II, III, Div. 1, Gr. E,F,G NI
N CSA General Purpose
P CSA DIP, Class II, III, Div. 1, Gr. E,F,G NI
Y Special version

Process connection/material
P Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, PP (universal slip-on flange included)
S Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, SS 316TI (universal slip-on flange included)
K Without slip-on flange/without mounting bracket (customer mounting equipment)
M With mounting bracket
Y Special version

Power supply/communication
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version

Display / on-site operation

1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version

Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
9 Special version

Screw union/entry
2 M20x1.5 screw union
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version

FMU 43 - Product designation

10
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Identification

2.6 Scope of delivery

2.6.1 Instrument and accessories

• Instrument according to the version ordered
• "ToF Tool - FieldTool Package" (2 CD-ROMs)
• for FMU 40/41 in the versions FMU 40 *R**** and FMU 41 *R****: counter nut (PC)
• for FMU 40/41: sealing ring (EPDM)
• for gland M20x1.5:
– 1 cable gland for 2-wire instruments
– 2 cable glands for 4-wire instruments
The cable glands are mounted on delivery.

2.6.2 Supplied documentation

Short instructions (KA 183F, in the instrument)

intended as a memory jogger for users who are familiar with the operating concept of
Endress+Hauser Time-of-Flight instruments.

Operating instructions (BA 239F, this booklet)

This describes the installation and commissioning of the Prosonic M. The operating menu includes
all the functions which are required for standard measurement tasks. Any additional functions are
not included.

Description of Instrument Functions (BA 240F)

contains a detailed description of all the functions of the Prosonic M. You can find this document
as a pdf file on the supplied ToF Tool - FieldTool CD-ROM 1.

Safety instructions
Additional safety instructions (XA, ZE, ZD) are supplied with certified device versions. Refer to the
nameplate for the names of the safety instructions that apply to your device version.

2.7 Certificates and approvals

CE mark, declaration of conformity
The device is designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested and left the
factory in a condition in which it is safe to operate. The device complies with the applicable
standards and regulations as listed in the EC declaration of conformity and thus complies with the
statutory requirements of the EG directives. Endress+Hauser confirms the successful testing of the
device by affixing to it the CE mark.

2.8 Registered trademarks

ToF®
Registered trademark of the company Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. KG, Maulburg, Germany
PulseMaster®
Registered trademark of the company Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. KG, Maulburg, Germany
Foundation™ Fieldbus
Registered trademark of Fieldbus Foundation Austin, Texas, USA

11
Installation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

3 Installation

3.1 Dimensions

F12 housing T12 housing

ca. 86 65 78 65 78
68 94
32

Ø 129
ENDRESS+HAUSER

Ø 129
Prosonic M ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M

162
150

85 85

FMU 40 FMU 41 FMU 42 with universal flange

60 AF
60 AF Flange:
DN80/ANSI3"/JIS10K80

~ 110
~ 85
G1½” DN100/ANSI4"/JIS16K100
~148
22

G2”
~148
22

1½ NPT 2 NPT suitable for PN16

acc. to DIN/EN 1092 part1
~87

~83

Ø 70
Ø 39
Ø 50

FMU 42 with mounting bracket FMU 43 with mounting bracket

ER
F12
ENDRESS+HAUSER HAUS
Prosonic M ESS+
ENDR ic M

F12/ Proson

T12

30 M8
75
105

89
75 119 158

FMU 43 with slip-on flange Mounting bracket for FMU 42/43

~86 65 78 25
119
Ø 129

ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
150

~123
120
~248

2 x M8
85

2 25
40 40
Ø 230
ANSI 4” DN 100
Alternatively, a separate flange can be used.
11
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-en-003

12
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Installation

3.2 Installation variants

3.2.1 Installation variants FMU 40, FMU 41

Installation with counter nut Installation with sleeve

Sealing ring
(EPDM)
supplied

counter nut (PC)

supplied
for G 1½” and
G 2” instruments

Installation with installation bracket Installation with adapter flange

ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M

Sealing ring
(EPDM)
adapter flange supplied

sensor nozzle
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-002

For installation bracket or adapter flange s. chapter "Accessories".

13
Installation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

3.2.2 Installation variants FMU 42

Installation with universal flange Installation with mounting bracket

ER
HAUS
ESS+
ENDR ic M

Flange: Proson

DN80/ANSI3"/JIS10K80
DN100/ANSI4"/JIS16K100

L00-FMU42xxxx-17-00-00-en-001

3.2.3 Installation variants FMU 43

Installation with Installation with

universal slip-on flange (option) mounting bracket

ER
HAUS
ESS+
ENDR ic M
Proson

slip-on flange

nozzle -
e.g.Zone 20
sensor .
Zone 20
L00-FMU43xxxx-17-00-00-en-001

14
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Installation

3.3 Installation conditions

3.3.1 Installation conditions for level measurements

2 3 4

7
1
5

1/6D

D
6 L
α

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-de-005

• Do not install the sensor in the middle of the tank (3). We recommend leaving a distance between
the sensor and the tank wall (1) measuring 1/6 of the tank diameter.
• Use a protective cover, in order to protect the device from direct sun or rain (2).
• Avoid measurements through the filling curtain (4).
• Make sure that equipment (5) such as limit switches, temperature sensors, etc. are not located
within the emitting angle α. In particular, symmetrical equipment (6) such as heating coils, baffles
etc. can influence measurement.
• Align the sensor so that it is vertical to the product surface (7).
• Never install two ultrasonic measuring devices in a tank, as the two signals may affect each other.
• To estimate the detection range, use the 3 dB emitting angle α.

Sensor α Lmax rmax

FMU 40 11° 5m 0,48 m

FMU 41 11° 8m 0,77 m

FMU 42 9° 10 m 0,96 m

FMU 43 6° 15 m 0,79 m

3.3.2 Installation in narrow shafts

In narrow shafts with strong interference ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M

echoes, we recommend using an ultrasound

guide pipe (e.g. PE or PVC wastewater pipe)
with a minimum diameter of 100 mm. venting
hole
Make sure that the pipe is not soiled by accumu-
lated dirt. If necessary, clean the pipe at regular
intervals.

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-010

15
Installation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

3.3.3 Installation conditions for flow measurements

• Install the Prosonic M at the inflow side, as close above the maximum water level Hmax as possible
(take into account the blocking distance BD).
• Position the Prosonic M in the middle of the channel or weir.
• Align the sensor membrane parallel to the water surface.
• Keep to the installation distance of the channel or weir.
• You can enter the "Flow to Level" linearisation curve ("Q/h curve") using ToF Tool or manually
via the on-site display.

Example: Khafagi-Venturi flume

inflow outflow
empty calibr.

BD

Khafagi - Venturi - flume

Hmax direction of flow

1 x b0

b0

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-003

16
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Installation

Example: Triangular weir

min. 2 Hmax
α

Hmax (= full calibr.)

min. 2 Hmax

min. 3 H max
BD
empty calibr.

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-012

17
Installation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

3.4 Measuring range

3.4.1 Blocking distance, Nozzle mounting

Install the Prosonic M at a height so that the blocking distance BD is not undershot, even at
maximum fill level. Use a pipe nozzle if you cannot maintain the blocking distance in any other way.
The interior of the nozzle must be smooth and may not contain any edges or welded joints. In
particular, there should be no burr on the inside of the tank side nozzle end. Note the specified limits
for nozzle diameter and length. To minimise disturbing factors, we recommend an angled socket
edge (ideally 45°).

FMU 43
FMU 40/41 FMU 42

BD
SD

E F
L L
L

D D
D

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-004

BD: blocking distance; SD: safety distance; E: empty calibration; F: full calibration (span); D: nozzle diameter; L: nozzle
length

Max. range Max. range

Sensor BD nozzle diameter max. nozzle length
liquids bulk materials

50 mm ca. 80 mm

FMU 40 0.25 m 5m 2m 80 mm ca. 240 mm

100 mm ca. 300 mm

80 mm ca. 240 mm
FMU 41 0.35 m 8m 3.5 m
100 mm ca. 300 mm

80 mm ca. 250 mm
FMU 42 0.4 m 10 m 5m
100 mm ca. 300 mm

FMU 43 0.6 m 15 m 7m min. 100 mm ca. 300 mm

" Caution!
If the blocking distance is undershot, it may cause device malfunction.

18
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Installation

3.4.2 Safety distance

If the level rises to the safety distance SD, the device switches to warning or alarm status.
The size of SD can be set freely in the "Safety distance" (015) function.The "in safety distance"
(016) function defines how the device reacts if the level enters the safety distance.
There are three options:
• Warning: The device outputs an error message but continues measurement.
• Alarm: The device outputs an error message. The output signal assumes the value defined in the
"Output on alarm" (011) function (MAX, MIN, user-specific value or holds the last value). As
soon as the level drops below the safety distance, the device recommences measurement.
• Self holding: The device reacts in the same way as for an alarm. However, the alarm condition
continues after the level drops below the safety distance. The device only recommences
measurement when you cancel the alarm using the "Ackn. alarm" (017) function.

3.4.3 Range
The sensor range is dependent on the measuring conditions. Refer to Technical Information TI
365F/00/en for an estimation. The maximum range is shown in the above diagram (valid for good
conditions).

Sensor maximum range

FMU 40 5m
FMU 41 8m

FMU 42 10 m

FMU 43 15 m

19
Installation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

3.5 Installation hint for FMU 40/41

Screw the Prosonic M at the screw-in piece F12 or T12 housing
using an 60 AF spanner.
Maximum torque: 20 Nm.

Caution!
Use only the screw-in
piece to screw in
the Prosonic M

AF 60

60
max torque
20 Nm
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-009

3.6 Turn housing

After mounting, the housing can be turned 350° in order to simplify access to the display and the
terminal compartment. Proceed as follows to turn the housing to the required position:
• Undo the fixing screws (1)
• Turn the housing (2) in the required direction
• Tighten up the fixing screws (1). Maximum torque 0.5 Nm.
• Loctite can be used for securing the screw.

F12 housing T12 housing

2 2

1 1

allen key
4 mm/0.1”
max. torque 0.5 Nm

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-013

3.7 Installation check

After installing the device, carry out the following checks:
• Is the device damaged (visual inspection)?
• Does the device correspond to the measuring point specifications for process temperature, process
pressure, ambient temperature, measuring range etc.
• If available: Are the measuring point number and labelling correct (visual inspection)?
• Is the measuring device sufficiently protected against precipitation and direct sunlight?
• Are the cable glands tightened correctly?
• After aligning the housing, check the process seal at the nozzle or flange.

20
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Wiring

4 Wiring

4.1 Electrical connection

" Caution!
Before connection please note the following:
• The power supply must be identical to the data on the nameplate.
• Switch off power supply before connecting up the instrument.
• Connect equipotential bonding to transmitter ground terminal before connecting up the
instrument (s. section "Potential matching")

# Warning!
When you use the measuring system in hazardous areas, make sure to comply with national
standards and the specifications in the safety instructions (XA’s). Make sure you use the specified
cable gland.

4.1.1 Wiring in the housing F12

1. Unscrew housing cover (1). 1
2. Remove display (2) if fitted.
3. Remove cover plate (3) from terminal
compartment.
4. Pull out terminal module (4) slightly using
pulling loop.
5. Insert cable (5) through gland (6).
"
2
Caution!
If possible, insert the cable from above and
let a draining loop in order to avoid EN
DR
ES
S+
HA
US
ER

intrusion of humidity.
6. Connect cable screen to the grounding
terminal (7) within the terminal
compartment. 6
3
7. Make connection according to terminal
assignment (see below).
8. Re-insert terminal module (4).
9. Tighten cable gland (6). 5

10. Tighten screws on cover plate (3).

11. Insert display (2) if fitted. 4
7

12. Screw on housing cover (1).

13. Switch on power supply.
1 2 3 4

L00-FMU4xxxx-04-00-00-yy-008

21
Wiring Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

4.1.2 Wiring in the housing T12

1. Unscrew the cover (1) of the separate 1
connection room.
2. Insert cable (2) through gland (3).
" Caution!
If possible, insert the cable from above and
let a draining loop in order to avoid
intrusion of humidity.
3. Connect cable screen to the grounding
terminal (4) within the connection room.
4. Make connection according to the terminal
assignment (see below). 3

5. Tighten cable gland (3).

6. Screw on housing cover (1).
7. Switch on power supply.
2

1 2 3 4

L00-FMU4xxxx-04-00-00-yy-009

4.1.3 Wiring with Foundation Fieldbus plug

1. Insert plug (1) into bushing (2).
2 1
2. Screw firmly.
3. Ground instrument according to the
desired safety concept.

L00-FMU4xxxx-04-00-00-yy-011

Pin assignment of the 7/8" plug connector (FOUNDATION Fieldbus plug)

Pin Meaning

1 FF -
1 – 3 nc
2 FF +

2 + 4 3 not connected

4 ground

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-017

22
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Wiring

4.2 Terminal assignment

plant
1 2 3 4 ground
– +
L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-013

4.3 Cable specifications Foundation Fieldbus

Twisted, shielded pairs must be used. The cable specifications can be taken from the FF specification
or IEC 61158-2. The following have been found suitable:
Non-Ex-area:
• Siemens 6XV1 830-5BH10,
• Belden 3076F,
• Kerpen CEL-PE/OSCR/PVC/FRLA FB-02YS(ST)YFL.
Ex-area:
• Siemens 6XV1 830-5AH10,
• Belden 3076F,
• Kerpen CEL-PE/OSCR/PVC/FRLA FB-02YS(ST)YFL.

4.4 Supply voltage

The following values are the voltages across the terminals directly at the instrument:

Type minimum terminal maximum terminal

voltage voltage

standard 9V 32 V

EEx ia (FISCO model 9V 17,5 V

EEx ia (Entity concept) 9V 24 V

The current consumption is approx. 13 mA for the range of voltages given above.

23
Wiring Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

4.5 Recommended connection

1 1

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-yy-014

1: external ground terminal of the transmitter

For maximum EMC protection please observe the following points:

• As the metal housing of the Prosonic M is isolated from the tank by the plastic sensor, a low-
impedance connection between the housing and tank/bracket/flange should be installed in order
to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
For optimum EMC the connection should be as short as possible. Ideally, a ground strap should
be used.
• The continuity of the cable screening between tapping points must be ensured.
• If potential equalisation is present between the individual grounding points, ground the screening
at each cable end or connect it to the device housing (as short as possible).
• If there are large differences in potential between grounding points, the grounding should run via
a capacitor that is suitable for high frequency use (e.g. ceramic 10 nF/250 V&).

" Caution!
Applications, which are subject to the explosion prevention, permit only under special conditions
the repeated grounding of the protective screen , see to EN 60 079-14..

4.6 Checking the connection

After wiring the device, carry out the following checks:
• Are the terminals correctly assigned?
• Is the cable gland tight?
• Is the Foundation Fieldbus connector screwed tight?
• Is the housing cover fully screwed on?
• If power supply available: Does a display appear on the display module?

24
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Operation

5 Operation

5.1 Display and operating elements

5.1.1 On-site display VU 331

The LCD module VU 331 for display and operation is located beneath the housing cover. The
measured value is legible through the glass in the cover. Open the cover to operate the device.

LCD
Messbe
Measuri
ENDR
Order MICR ESS+
Code:
Ser.-No.
:

reich
ng

4...20
OPIL HAUS

range
U 16...36
OT

max.
20
II ER
(liquid crystal display)
Maulburg

mA V DC m
IP
65
T
Made in Germany

A >70°C
: t
>85°C

Symbols
ENDRESS + HAUSER

– + E

3 keys

snap-fit

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-en-001

25
Operation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

5.1.2 Display appearance

position in menu

label
measured value
* display

symbol value bargraph unit

group selection
selection list

position in menu

label
function with
free parameter
help texts

envelope envelope curve

curve display

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-en-002

In the measured value display, the bargraph corresponds to the output.

The bargraph is segmented in 10 bars. Each completely filled bar represents a change of 10% of the
adjusted span.

5.1.3 Display symbols

The following table describes the symbols that appear on the liquid crystal display:

Sybmol Meaning

ALARM_SYMBOL
This alarm symbol appears when the instrument is in an alarm state. If the symbol flashes, this indicates a
warning.

LOCK_SYMBOL
This lock symbol appears when the instrument is locked,i.e. if no input is possible.

COM_SYMBOL
This communication symbol appears when a data transmission via e.g. HART, PROFIBUS PA or
FOUNDATION Fieldbus is in progress.

SIMULATION_SWITCH_ENABLE
This communication symbol appears when simulation in FOUNDATION Fieldbus is enabled via the DIP
switch.

26
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Operation

5.1.4 Function of the keys

Key(s) Meaning

O or V Navigate upwards in the selection list

Edit numeric value within a function

S or W Navigate downwards in the selection list

Edit numeric value within a function

X or Z Navigate to the left within a function group

F Navigate to the right within a function group, confirmation.

O and F
or Contrast settings of the LCD
S and F
Hardware lock / unlock
After a hardware lock, an operation of the instrument via display or
O and S and F communication is not possible!
The hardware can only be unlocked via the display. An unlock parameter must
be entered to do so.

5.2 Function codes

For easy orientation within the function menus, for each function a position is shown on the display.

005
Function
Function group
L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-en-001

The first two digits identify the function group:

• basic setup 00
• safety settings 01
• linearisation 04
...
The third digit numbers the individual functions within the function group:

• basic setup 00 → • tank shape 002

• medium property 003
• process cond. 004
...
Hereafter the position is always given in brackets (e.g. "tank shape" (002)) after the described
function.

27
Operation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

5.3 Foundation Fieldbus interface

5.3.1 Synopsis
There are two possibilities of connecting up a Foundation Fieldbus:

Direct connection to a FF/H1 card

CO: Controller
H1: H1 interface
AI: Analog input
AO: Analog output
DI: Digital input

CO H1 AI AO DI CO H1 AI AO DI

FF/H1

Field devices (e.g. Micropilot M,

Levelflex M, Prosonic M)
L00-FMR2xxxx-14-00-06-en-025

Indirect connection via a linking device

CO: Controller
CN: ControlNet Interface
AI: Analog input
CO CN AI AO DI
AO: Analog output
DI: Digital input

ControlNet or HSE

I/O FC LD Linking device

Input/ Frequency FF/H1

output converter

Field devices (e.g. Micropilot M,

Levelflex M, Prosonic M)

L00-FMR2xxxx-14-00-06-en-026

28
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Operation

5.3.2 Hardware settings

A DIP-switch in the connection compartment of the instrument allows the write protection and
simulation functions to be set via hardware.
• If "SIM" is switched off, the simulation function is not accesible in the configuration tool.
• If "WP" is switched on, parameter access is disabled

END
RES
Order MICR
S+HA
OPIL
Ser.-NoCode:
.: OT USE
II R
Messbe
Measur reich
ing
range
U 16...36 max.
4...20 20

Maulburg
mAV DC
m
IP
65
T

Made in Germany
A >70°C
: t
>85°C

default settings:
write protection OFF
simulation ON (i.e. simulation is
allowed in the configuration tool)

on
off
SIM WP

write protection

on
off
SIM WP

simulation

L00-FMxxxxxx-19-00-00-en-002

Device identification
Foundation Fieldbus identifies the device by its identification code and automatically allocates an
appropriate field address. There is no separate hardware switch for this purpose.

29
Operation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

5.3.3 Network configuration

During the configuration of the FF network the device description (DD) of the Prosonic M must be
downloaded into the directory foreseen for it.
• Start the interface configuration tool.
• Configure the interface.
• Call the DD download routine
• Download the device descriptions (.ffo and .sym files) to the directory offered.
• When the configuration is complete, close the tool and the FF stack (if open).
The Prosonic M device descriptions can be ordered direct from Endress+Hauser or downloaded
from our website www.endress.com. They contain all data necessary to operate Endress+Hauser
Foundation Fieldbus devices.

Example: Start-up using the NI-Fieldbus configurator

Start the bus configuration tool. After start-up, the tool shows the network configuration in the form
of an expandable tree. If the Prosonic M has been connected correctly, it can now be identified:

E+H_PROSONIC_M_XXXXXXXX

A double click on the name reveals the device data.

PD_TAG the physical name of the device

DEVICE_ID the unique device identifier

NODE_ADDRESS device address (is automatically allocated by the Configurator; can be changed by the user)

The device ID is made up of the following components:

Device_ID = 452B48100F-XXXXXXXX

whereby:

452B48 ID code for Endress+Hauser

1011 ID code for Prosonic M

XXXXXXXX Device serial number, as printed on the nameplate

A right-hand mouse click on the name opens up a menu from which the PD_TAG and
NODE_ADDRESS can be changed.
A click on the name expands the device tree to show the function blocks available for it:

E+H_PROSONIC_M_XXXXXXXX
RESOURCE_XXXXXX (RB2)
TRANSDUCER_XXXXXX (TBRL)
ANALOG_INPUT_1_XXXXXX (AI)
ANALOG_INPUT_2_XXXXXX (AI)
PID_XXXXXX(PID)
AR_XXXXXX (AR)
IS_XXXXXX (IS)
SC_XXXXXX (SC)
IT_XXXXXX (IT)

30
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Operation

5.3.4 Block model of the Prosonic M

The Prosonic M contains the follwoing blocks:
• Resource Block (RB2)
s. Operating Instructions BA 013S: "Foundation Fieldbus - Overview"
• Transducer Block (TB)
contains the parameters relevant to the measurement
• Analog-Input-Block 1 bzw. 2 (AI)
scale the signal of the Transducer Block and transmit them to the PLCS
• PID Block (PID)
s. Operating Instructions BA 013S: "Foundation Fieldbus - Overview"
• Arithmetic Block (AR)
s. Operating Instructions BA 013S: "Foundation Fieldbus - Overview"
• Input Selector Block (IS)
s. Operating Instructions BA 013S: "Foundation Fieldbus - Overview"
• Signal Characterizer Block (SC)
s. Operating Instructions BA 013S: "Foundation Fieldbus - Overview"
• Integrator Block (IT)
s. Operating Instructions BA 013S: "Foundation Fieldbus - Overview"

Default Block configuration

The input and output variables of the blocks can be interconnected by a network configuration tool
(e.g. NI-Fieldbus configurator). The figure below shows, how these connections are set by default.

Sensor Display Physical Block PID Block

signal evaluation parameters of the Automation
physical unit, e.g. functions
tag No.

Analog Input Function Block 1

Transducer Block OUT
parameters that are important to
Parameters that
Primary value the process control system,
describe the
e.g. scaling, status
device (calibration, (main value)
linearisation etc.)

Secondary value
(distance)
Analog Input Function Block 2
parameters that are important to OUT
Third value the process control system,
(temperature) e.g. scaling, status

L00-FMU4XXXX-02-00-00-en-003

31
Operation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

5.3.5 Resource Block

E+H_PROSONIC_M_XXXXXXXX
RESOURCE_XXXXXX (RB2)
TRANSDUCER_XXXXXX (TBUL)
ANALOG_INPUT_1_XXXXXX (AI)

Operation
The resource block contains the parameters used to describe physical resources of the device. It has
no linkable inputs or outputs.
The resource block is opened by a click on the resource line.
If the NI-FBUS Configurator is being used, a series of file tabs appears on the screen. The files can
be opened to view and/or edit the parameters in the following table. A short description of the
parameter function appears on the side of the screen. A change in the parameter is stored by pressing
the WRITE CHANGES button when the block is out of service. Press the READ ALL button to check
the values stored in the device.

Parameters

Parameter Description

TAG_DESC User description of the intended application of the block.

MODE_BLK Lists the actual, target, permitted and normal operating modes of the block.
– Target: changes the operating mode of the block
– Actual: indicates the current operating mode of the block
– Permitted: states which operating modes are allowed
– Normal: indicates the normal operating mode of the block
The possible operating modes of the resources block are:
– AUTO: the block is operating as normal
– OOS: the block is out of service.
If the resource block is out of service, then all blocks within the device (resource) are
forced into the same status.

RS_STATE Indicates the state of the resource block application state machine
– On-line: block in AUTO mode
– Standby: block in OOS mode

WRITE_LOCK Indicates the status of DIP-switch WP

– LOCKED: device data can be modified
– NOT LOCKED: device data can be modified

RESTART Allows a manual restart:

– UNINITIALISED: no status
– RUN: normal operational status
– RESOURCE: resets the resource block parameters
– DEFAULTS: Resets all Foundation Fieldbus parameters within the device, but
not the manufacturer specific parameters.
– PROCESSOR: make a warm start of the processor

BLOCK_ERROR Shows error status of software and hardware components

– Out-of-Service: the block is in OOS mode
– Simulation active: shows the setting of DIP-switch SIM

BLOCK_ALM Shows any configuration, hardware, connection and system problems in the block. The
cause of the alert is to be seen in the subcode field.

The function of the resource block parameters not described here can can be taken from the
Foundation Fieldbus specification, see www.fieldbus.org.

32
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Operation

5.3.6 Transducer Block

E+H_PROSONIC_M_XXXXXXXX
RESOURCE_XXXXXX (RB2)
TRANSDUCER_XXXXXX (TBUL)
ANALOG_INPUT_1_XXXXXX (AI)

Operation
The transducer block contains the parameters required to calibrate the device. These parameters can
also be addressed by using the VU 331 display module.
The transducer block is opened by clicking on the transducer line.
Parameter changes from the tool are made off-line while the device is operating. The changes are
downloaded by first setting MODE_BLK = OOS then pressing the WRITE CHANGES button. Press
the READ ALL button to check the values stored in the device. In order to resume operation, change
MODE_BLK to AUTO1.

Block administration parameters

Parameter Description

MODE_BLK See description in Resource block. The possible operating modes of the transducer block
are:
– AUTO: the block is operating as normal.
– OOS: the block is out of service.

TAG_DESC User description of the intended application of the block.

BLOCK_ERROR Shows the error status associated with the block components
– Out-of-Service: the block is in OOS mode.

Output values

Parameter Description

PRIMARY_VALUE Main value (level, volume or flow)

SECONDARY_VALUE Measured distance

THIRD_VALUE Measured temperature

Configuration parameters
The transducer block also contains the configuration parameters, which are used to commission and
calibrate the instrument. They are identical to the functions of the operating menu, except for the
service parameters which are not accessible on the bus. Thus, the calibration procedure via the
display module (chapter "Commissioning") is equally valid for a calibration via a network
configuration tool.
A complete list of the configuration parameters can be found in the "Description of Instrument
Functions", BA 240F/00/en.

1) If MODE_BLK refuses to be changed to AUTO, an error is present. Control all parameters, perform the required changes and try again to change MODE_BLK
to AUTO.

33
Operation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

Methods
The Foundation Fieldbus specification provides for the use of so-called methods to simplify the
operation of the device. A method is an interactive sequence of steps that must be followed in order
to obtain a particular function from the device.
The Prosonic M has got the following methods:
• Set to customer default
• Basic setup
• Safety settings
• Acknowledge alarm
• temperature
• Linearisation
• Extended calibration
• Output
• Display
• Diagnostics
• System parameters
• Lock TB Manufacturer parameters
Most of these methods are identical to the respective function group in the operating menu. A
detailed description of them can be found in the "Description of Instrument functions", BA 240F.

34
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Operation

Profile code of Transducer Block

The current profile code of the Prosonic M Transducer Block is 0x8010

Parameter list of the Prosonic M Transducer Block

Parameter Position rel. Variable Name Size Type Read Write Storage
Indicator Index [bytes] Class

0 EH_USONICLEVEL_CAL_BASIC

Standard Parameter

ST_REV 1 ST_REV 2 UNSIGNED16 X non-vol.

TAG_DESC 2 TAG_DESC 32 OCTET_STRING X X static

STRATEGY 3 STRATEGY 2 UNSIGNED16 X X static

ALERT_KEY 4 ALERT_KEY 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

MODE_BLK 5 MODE_BLK 4 DS-69 X X static

BLOCK_ERROR 6 BLOCK_ERROR 2 BIT_STRING X dynamic

UPDATE_EVT 7 UPDATE_EVT 16 DS-73 X X dynamic

BLOCK_ALM 8 BLOCK_ALM 18 DS-72 X X dynamic

Transducer Directory Entry 9 TRANSDUCER_DIRECTORY 2 UNSIGNED16 X non-vol.

Transducer Type 10 TRANSDUCER_TYPE 2 UNSIGNED16 X non-vol.

Transducer Error 11 XD_ERROR 1 UNSIGNED8 X dynamic

Collection Directory 12 COLLECTION_DIRECTORY 4 UNSIGNED32 X non-vol.

Primary Value Type 13 PRIMARY_VALUE_TYPE 2 UNSIGNED16 X static

Primary Value 14 PRIMARY_VALUE 5 DS-65 X dynamic

Primary Value Range 15 PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE 11 DS-68 X non-vol.

Secondary Value 15 SECONDARY_VALUE 5 DS-65 X dynamic

Secondary Value Unit 17 SECONDARY_VALUE_UNIT 2 UNSIGNED16 X X static

Third Value 18 THIRD_VALUE 5 DS-65 X dynamic

Third Value Unit 19 THIRD_VALUE_UNIT 2 UNSIGNED16 X X static

E+H Parameter

measured value 000 20 PARMEASUREDVALUE 4 FLOAT X dynamic

tank shape 002 21 PARTANKSHAPE 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

medium property 003 22 PARMEDIUMCONDITION 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

process cond. 004 23 PARPROCESSCONDITION 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

empry calibration 005 24 PAREMPTYCALIBRATION 4 FLOAT X X static

full calibration 006 25 PARFULLCALIBRATION 4 FLOAT X X static

echo quality 056 26 PARECHOQUALITY 1 UNSIGNED8 X dynamic

check distance 051 27 PARCHECKDISTANCE 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

range of mapping 052 28 PARSUPPRESIONDISTANCE 4 FLOAT X X static

start mapping 053 29 PARSTARTMAPPINGRECORD 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

dist./meas. value 054 30 PARPRESMAPRANGE 4 FLOAT X X dynamic

cust. tank map 055 31 PARCUSTTANKMAP 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

offset 057 32 PAROFFSETOFMEASUREDDISTANCE 4 FLOAT X X static

output damping 058 33 PAROUTPUTDAMPING 4 FLOAT X X static

blocking distance 059 34 PARHIGHBLOCKINGDISTANCE 4 FLOAT X X static

output on alarm 010 35 PAROUTPUTONALARM 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

35
Operation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

Parameter Position rel. Variable Name Size Type Read Write Storage
Indicator Index [bytes] Class

outp. echo loss 012 36 PARREACTIONLOSTECHO 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

ramp %span/min 013 37 PARRAMPINPERCENTPERMIN 4 FLOAT X X static

delay time 014 38 PARDELAYTIMEONLOSTECHO 2 UNSIGNED16 X X static

safety distance 015 39 PARLEVELWITHINSAFETYDISTANCE 4 FLOAT X X static

in safety distance 016 40 PARINSAFETYDISTANCE 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

acknowledge alarm 017 41 PARACKNOWLEDGEALARM 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

measured temp. 030 42 PARMEASUERDTEMERATURE 4 FLOAT X dynamic

max temp limit 031 43 PARMAXTEMPLIMIT 4 FLOAT X dynamic

max. meas. temp. 032 44 PARMAXMEASUREDTEMPERATURE 4 FLOAT X dynamic

react high temp. 033 45 PARONHIGHTEMPERATURE 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

def. temp. sensor 034 46 PARDEFECTTEMPERATURESENSOR 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

level/ullage 040 47 PARLEVELULLAGEMODE 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

linearisation 041 48 PARLINEARISATION 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

customer unit 042 49 PARCUSTOMERUNIT 2 UNSIGNED16 X X static

tab No. 043 50 PARTABLENUMBER 1 UNSIGNED8 X X non-vol.

level (half-automatic) 044 51 PARINPUTLEVELHALFAUTOMATIC 4 FLOAT X dynamic

level 044 52 PARINPUTLEVELMANUAL 4 FLOAT X X static

volume 045 53 PARINPUTVOLUME 4 FLOAT X X static

max. scale 046 54 PARMAXVOLUME 4 FLOAT X X static

diameter vessel 047 55 PARCYLINDERVESSEL 4 FLOAT X X static

simulation 065 56 PARSIMULATION 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

simulation value level 066 57 PARSIMULATIONVALUELEVEL 4 FLOAT X X non-vol.

simulation value volume 066 58 PARSIMULATIONVALUEVOLUME 4 FLOAT X X non-vol.

language 092 59 PARALANGUAGE 1 UNSIGNED8 X X non-vol.

back to home 093 60 PARBACKTOHOME 2 UNSIGNED16 X X non-vol.

Anzeigeformat 094 61 PARFORMATDISPLAYFT 1 UNSIGNED8 X X non-vol.

no. of decimals 095 62 PARNOOFDECIMALS 1 UNSIGNED8 X X non-vol.

sep. character 096 63 PARSEPARATIONCHARACTER 1 UNSIGNED8 X X non-vol.

present error 0A0 64 PARACTUALERROR 2 UNSIGNED16 X dynamic

previous error 0A1 65 PARLASTERROR 2 UNSIGNED16 X dynamic

clear last error 0A2 66 PARCLEARLASTERROR 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

reset 0A3 67 PARRESET 2 UNSIGNED16 X X static

unlock parameter 0A4 68 PAROPERATIONCODE 2 UNSIGNED16 X X static

measured dist. 0A5 69 PARMEASUREDDISTANCE 4 FLOAT X dynamic

measured level 0A6 70 PARMEASUREDLEVEL 4 FLOAT X dynamic

application par. 0A8 71 PARAPPLICATIONPARAMETER 1 UNSIGNED8 X dynamic

protocol + sw-no 0C2 72 PARPROTSOFTVERSIONSTRING 16 OCTET_STRING X dynamic

distance unit 0C5 73 PARDISTANCEUNIT 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

temperature unit 0C6 74 PARTEMPERATUREUNIT 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

download mode 0C8 75 PARDOWNLOADMODE 1 UNSIGNED8 X X static

max. meas. dist. 0D84 76 PARABSMAXMESSDIST 4 FLOAT X dynamic

max sample dist. 0D88 71 PAREDITRANGEMAXSAMPLEDIST 4 FLOAT X dynamic

36
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Operation

5.3.7 Analog input block

E+H_MICROPILOT_M_XXXXXXXX
RESOURCE_XXXXXX (RB2)
TRANSDUCER_XXXXXX (TBRL)
ANALOG_INPUT_1_XXXXXX (AI)
The analog input block condito ns the signal output by the transducer block andoutputs signal to
the PCL or other function blocks.

L00-FMR2xxxx-05-00-00-en-008

Operation
The resource block is opened by a click on the resource line.
Parameter changes from the tool are made off-line while the device is operating. The changes are
downloaded by first setting MODE_BLK = OOS then pressing the WRITE CHANGES button. Press
the READ ALL button to check the values stored in the device. Normally operation is resumed as
soon as MODE-BLK is set to AUTO.

Block administration parameters

Parameter Description
MODE_BLK See description in Resource block. The possible operating modes of the transducer block
are:
– AUTO: the block is operating as normal
– MAN: the block is operated with a manually entered primary value.
– OOS: the block is out of service.

TAG_DESC User description of the intended application of the block.

BLOCK_ERROR Shows error status of software and hardware components

– Out-of-Service: the block is in OOS mode
– Simulation active: shows the setting of DIP-switch SIM. Input failure/process variable
has BAD status.
– configuration error

37
Operation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

Output values

Parameter Description

PV Either the primary/secondary transducer block value used to execute the block or a pro-
cess value associated with it. Comprises value and status.

OUT The primary value output as a result of executing the analog input block. Comprises
value and status.

FIELD_VALUE Raw value of field device in % of PV range with a status reflecting the transducer condi-
tion before signal characterisation L_Type or filtering V_TIME. Comprises value and sta-
tus.

Scaling parameters

Parameter Description

CHANNEL Selects the measured value to be input to the analogue input block
– 0 = no channel defined
– 1 = primary value: measured level/volume
– 2 = secondary value: measured distance

XD_SCALE Scales the transducer block value in the required engineering units (EU).

OUT_SCALE Scales the output value in the required engineering units (EU).

L_TYPE Sets the linearization type:

– DIRECT: the transducer block value bypasses the scaling functions
– INDIRECT:the transducer block value is fed through the linear scaling functions
– INDIRECT SQRT: the transducer block value is fed through the square root scaling
functions

The relationship between the output values and scaling paramaters is as follows:

CHANNEL _ VALUE − XD _ SCALE _ MIN

FIELD _ VAL = 100 ×
XD _ SCALE _ MAX − XD _ SCALE _ MIN

The L_TYPE parameter influences the signal conversion:

• Direct:

PV = CHANNEL_VALUE

• Indirect:

FIELD _ VALUE
PV = × (OUT _ SCALE _ MAX − OUT _ SCALE _ MIN)+ OUT _ SCALE _ MIN
100

• Indirect square root:

FIELD _ VALUE
PV = × (OUT _ SCALE _ MAX − OUT _ SCALE _ MIN)+ OUT _ SCALE _ MIN
100

38
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Operation

Output response parameters

Parameter Description

LOW_CUT Not relevant to level measurement!

Determines a threshold for square root linearization below which the output value is set
to zero.

PV_FTIME Sets the time constant for the output value.

Alarm parameters

Parameter Description

ACK_OPTION Sets the way in which alarms and warnings are to be acknowledged.

ALARM_HYS Sets the hysteresis (in output engineering units) for all configured alarms.
A hysteresis of e.g. 2% on a HI_HI_LIMIT of 95% would cause the alarm to activate
when the level reaches 95% and to deactivate when the level drops below 93%.
A hysteresis of e.g. 2% on a LO_LO_LIMIT of 5% would cause the alarm to activate
when the level drops below 5% and to deactivate when the level rises to 7%.

HI_HI_PRI The priority (1 – 15) of the HI_HI alarm

HI_HI_LIM Sets the HI_HI alarm limit in output engineering units

HI_PRI The priority (1 – 15) of the HI alarm

HI_LIM Sets the HI warning limit in output engineering units

LO_PRI The priority (1 – 15) of the LO alarm

LO_LIM Sets the LO warning limit in output engineering units

LO_LO_PRI The priority (1 – 15) of the LO_LO alarm

LO_LO_LIM Sets the LO_LO alarm limit in output engineering units

Alarm priorities

Parameter Description

0 Alarm is suppressed

1 Recognised by the system but not reported

2 Reported to the operator, but does not require his attention

3-7 Advisroy alarms of increasing priority

8 - 15 Critical alarms of increasing priority

Alarm status

Parameter Description
HI_HI_ALM The status of the HI_HI alarm

HI_ALM The status of the HI alarm

LO_ALM The status of the LO alarm

LO_LO_ALM The status of the LO_LO alarm

39
Operation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

Simulation
The SIMULATE parameter allows the transducer block output value to be simulated, provided
simulation has also been enabled at the device DIP switch. The simulation must be enabled, a value
and/or status entered and the block must be in AUTO mode. During simulation the transducer
output value is substituted by the simulated value.
A simulation is also possible by switching MODE_BLK to "MAN" and entering a value for OUT.

Parameter Description

SIMULATE Enables, sets and displays a simulated value, options:

– enable/disable
– simulated value
– output value

5.3.8 Checklist for commissioning

The following checklist refers to the configuration via the NI-Fieldbus configurator. In general, the
operation is rather similar for other network design tools.
1. Configure the network and integrate the device.
– Identify the device by means of the device ID and serial number.
– If appropriate, assign a new PD_TAG.
2. Configure the resource block.
– Check the position of the hardware switch in WRITE_LOCK
– If "locked" is displayed, change the position of the DIP-switch.
– If appropriate, change the block tag (right-hand click on tree).
– Set MODE_BLK_TARGET to Out-of-Service.
– Reset the device to factory values by using the function RESTART => Defaults
(this function may also be available with a right-hand click on the device name)
– If appropriate, assign a tag description (TAG_DESC).
– Set MODE_BLK_TARGET to Auto.
3. Configure the transducer block.
– If appropriate, change the block tag (right-hand click on tree).
– Set MODE_BLK_TARGET to Out-of-Service.
– If appropriate, assign a tag description (TAG_DESC)
– Configure the device as described in Chapter 6.4.
– Set MODE_BLK_TARGET to Auto.
4. Configure the analog input block.
– If appropriate, change the block tag (right-hand click on tree).
– Set MODE_BLK_TARGET to Out-of-Service.
– If appropriate, assign a tag description (TAG_DESC).
– Set Channel to measured value or distance.
– Set L_TYPE to "DIRECT" if the OUT value is to be in technical units e.g. ft to "INDIRECT"
if the OUT value is to be scaled.
– Set the desired output damping in PV_TIME.
– If appropriate, set the advisory and critical alarms.
– Set MODE_BLK_TARGET to Auto.
5. Link the function blocks in the function block editor.
6. Download the configuration (menu configure).
7. If appropriate, check the configuration by using the SIMULATE function.

5.3.9 List of start indices

The following list indicates the start indices for all blocks and objects:

Object Start Index

Object Dictionary 298

40
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Operation

Object Start Index

Resource Block 300

Analog Input 1 Function Block 350

Analog Input 2 Function Block 390

PID Function Block 430

Arithmetic Function Block 500

Input Selector Function Block 550

Signal Characterizer Function Block 600

Integrator Function Block 650

Transducer Block 700

Object Start Index

Link Objects 1000

Alert Objects 1030

Trend Objects 1040

Object Start Index

View Objects Resource Block 1500

View Objects Analog Input 1 Function Block 1505

View Objects Analog Input 2 Function Block 1510

View Objects PID Function Block 1515

View Objects Arithmetic Function Block 1520

View Objects Input Selector Function Block 1525

View Objects Signal Characterizer Function Block 1530

View Objects Integrator Function Block 1535

View Objects Transducer Block 1540

41
Operation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

5.3.10 Parameter access via ToF Tool

The ToF Tool is a graphical operation software for instruments from Endress+Hauser. It is used to
support commissioning, securing of data, signal analysis and documentation of the instruments. It
is compatible with the following operating systems: WinNT4.0, Win2000 and WinXP.
The ToF Tool supports the following functions:
• Online configuration of transmitters
• Signal analysis via envelope curve
• Linearisation table (graphically supported creation, editing, importing and exporting)
• Loading and saving of instrument data (Upload/Download)
• Documentation of measuring point

! Note!
Further information you may find on the CD-ROM, which is enclosed to the instrument.

! Note!
The parameters of the Analog-Input block are presently not accessible via ToF Tool.

! Note!
ToF-Tool operation of the Prosonic M is not possible via Foundation Fieldbus. Instead, the PC or
Laptop must be connected via the interface FXA 193 to the service adapter, to which normally the
display is connected.

Menu-guided commissioning

L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-003

• You can find the function groups and functions of the device in the navigation bar.
• You can find the input fields for the parameters in the main window.
• If you click on a parameter name, the Help pages open with precise explanations of the required
input.

Signal analysis via envelope curve

The ToF Tool offers easy analysis of the envelope curve via the "Envelope" menu:

42
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Operation

L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-004

Connection
• Service-Interface with adapter FXA 193

43
Operation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

5.4 Operation using the on-site display VU 331

ENDRESS + HAUSER

– + E
X

F 2x X
X X >3 s

basic setup F tank shape F medium property

... Return to

O Group Selection
safety settings
O dome ceiling
horizontal cyl
O unknown
liquid
temperature bypass solid<4mm
stilling well solid>4mm
linearisation

...
S flat ceiling
sphere
S
no ceiling
S ...

L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-018

1. Change from Measured Value Display to Group Selection by pressing F.

2. Press S or O to select the required Function Group and confirm by pressing F.
The active selection is marked by a 3 in front of the menu text.
3. Activate Edit mode with O or S .

Selection menus
a. Select the required Parameter in selected function with S oder O .
b. F confirms selection; 3appears in front of the selected parameter.
c. F confirms the edited value; system quits edit mode.
d. O and S (= Q) interrupts selection; system quits edit mode.

Typing in numerals and text

a. Press O or S to edit the first character of the numeral / text.
b. F positions the cursor at the next character; continue with a. until you have completed
your input.
c. If a ↵ symbol appears at the cursor, press F to accept the value entered; system quits edit
mode.
d. If a ← symbol appears at the cursor, press F to return to the previous character (e.g. for
correction of entries).
e. O and S (= Q) interrupts selection; system quits edit mode.
4. Press F to select the next function.
5. Press O and S (= Q) once; return to previous function.
Press O and S (= Q) twice; return to Group Selection.
6. Press O and S (= Q) to return to Measured value display.

44
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Operation

5.5 Lock/unlock configuration

5.5.1 Software security locking

Enter a number ≠ 2457 in the "unlock parameter" (0A4) function in the "diagnostics" (0A)
function group.
The symbol appears on the display. Inputs are no longer possible.

If you try to change a parameter, the device jumps to the "unlock parameter" (0A4) function.
Enter "2457"
Now change the parameters.

5.5.2 Hardware security locking

Press S, O and F simultaneously.
Inputs are no longer possible.

If you try to change a parameter, the following appears:

L00-fmrxf0a4-20-00-00-de-001

Press S, O and F simultaneously. The "unlock parameter" (0A4) function appears.

Enter "2457"
Now change the parameters.

! Note!
A hardware locking can only be unlocked again via the display by pressing the O, S and F keys at
the same time again. It is not possible to unlock the hardware by communication.

5.6 Resetting the customer parameters

It is advisable to reset the customer parameters if you want to use a device with an unknown history.
Effects of resetting:
• All customer parameters are reset to their default values.
• Customer interference echo suppression is not deleted.
• Linearisation is switched to "linear", but the table values are kept. The table can be switched
back on in the "linearisation" (04) function group in the "linearisation" (041) function.

In order to carry out the reset, enter the number "33333" in the "reset" (0A3) function in the
"diagnostics" (0A) function group.

" Caution!
A reset may lead to impairment of the measurement. As a rule, a basic calibration is required after
a reset.

! Note!
The default values of each parameter are shown in bold in the menu overview in the appendix.

45
Operation Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

5.7 Resetting an interference echo suppression (tank map)

It is always advisable to reset the interference echo suppression (tank mapping) when:
• a device with an unknown history is used
• an incorrect suppression was input.

Proceed as follows:
1. Switch to the "extended calibr." (05) function group and to the "selection" (050)
function.
2. Select "extended map."
3. Then proceed to the "cust. tank map" (055) function.
4. Select
– "reset", to delete (reset) the existing interference echo suppression.
– "inactive" to deactivate an existing interference echo suppression. The suppression remains
saved.
– "active" to reactivate an existing interference echo suppression.

46
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Commissioning

6 Commissioning
Commission the Prosonic M in the following stages:
• Installation check
• Power-up device
• Basic calibration
• Measuring signal check using the envelope curve

The chapter describes the commissioning process using the on-site display. Commissioning using
ToF Tool is identical. Access to the device functions using ToF Tool is described on Page 21. You
can find detailed information in the Tof Tool operating instructions (BA 224F/00/en) on the
supplied CD-ROM.

6.1 Power up instrument

After switching on the supply voltage, the
instrument is first initialised.

L00-fmp-fxxx-20-00-00-en-003

Then the following appear for approximately

five seconds:
• Device type
• Software version
• Type of digital communication signal L00-fmuxfxxx-20-00-00-de-002

Press F to exit this display.

On first power-up, you are requested to select

the language for the display texts.

L00-fmrxf092-20-00-00-en-001

Then you are requested to select the unit of

length for your measurements.

L00-fmrxf0c5-20-00-00-en-001

A measured value is displayed. This is NOT

equivalent to the level in your tank. Firstly carry
out a basic calibration.

L00-fmrxf000-20-00-00-en-001

Press F to switch to the group selection.

Press F again to start the basic calibration.

L00-fmrxfg00-20-00-00-en-001

47
Commissioning Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

6.2 Basic calibration

The "Basic setup" (00) function group lists all the functions which are required for a standard
measurement task to commission the Prosonic M. When you have completed your input for a
function, the next function appears automatically. In this way, you are guided through the complete
calibration.

6.2.1 Measuring point settings

Function "tank shape" (002)

In this function, select one of the following options:

dome ceiling horizontal cyl

ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
bypass stilling well
(ultrasonic guide pipe)

no ceiling sphere flat ceiling

e.g. dumps, open levels
chanels, weirs
L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-06-en-001

Function "medium property" (003)

Set the medium type in this function.
You have the following options:
• unknown (e.g. pasty media such as greases, creams, gels etc.)
• liquid
• solid, grain size < 4mm (fine)
• solid, grain size > 4mm (coarse)

48
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Commissioning

Function "process conditions" (004)

For this function, you have the following options:

standard liquids calm surface turb. surface

For all fluid applications which do not Storage tanks with immersion tube or Storage / accumulation tanks with
fit in any of the following groups. bottom filling uneven surface due to free filling,
mixing nozzles or small bottom stirrers

L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-001 L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-002

The filters and output damping are set The averaging filters and output Special filters for stabilising the input
to average values. damping are set to large values. signal are activated.
-> Stable measured value -> Stable measured value
-> Accurate measurement -> Medium reaction time
-> Slow reaction time

add. agitator fast change standard solid

Moving surfaces (poss. with vortex Rapid level change, particularly in For all bulk solids applications which
formation) due to agitators small tanks do not fit in any of the following
groups.

L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-003 L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-004 L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-006

Special filters for stabilising the input The averaging filters are set to small The filter and output damping are set
signal are set to large values. values. to average values.
-> Stable measured value -> Rapid reaction time
-> Medium reaction time -> Possibly unstable measured value

49
Commissioning Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

solid dusty conveyor belt Test: no filter

Dusty bulk solids Bulk solids with rapid level change All the filters can be switched off for
purposes of service and diagnosis.

ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M

L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-007 L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-005

The filters are set to detect even The averaging filters are set to small All filters off
relatively weak signals. values.
-> Rapid reaction time
Possibly unstable measured value

50
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Commissioning

6.2.2 Empty and full calibration

BD
20 mA
SD 100%

E F

4 mA
0%

L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-yy-019

Function "empty calibration" (005)

In this function, enter the distance E from the sensor membrane to the minimum level (zero point).

" Caution!
With dished boiler heads or conical outflows, the zero point should not be deeper than the point at
which the ultrasonic wave impinges on the tank bottom.

Function "blocking distance" (059)

In this function the blocking distance (BD) of the sensor is displayed.

" Caution!
When entering the full calibration (span), please take into account, that the maximum level may not
project into the blocking distance (BD)

! Note!
After basic calibration, enter a safety distance (SD) in the "safety distance" (015) function. If the
level is within this safety distance, the Prosonic M signals a warning or an alarm, depending on your
selection in the "in safety distance" (016) function.

Function "full calibration" (006)

In this function, enter the span F, i.e. the distance from the minimum level to the maximum level.

51
Commissioning Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

6.2.3 Interference echo suppression (tank mapping)

Function "dist./measured value" (008)

In the "dist./meas.value" (008) function, the measured distance D from the sensor membrane
to the product surface is displayed together with level L. Check these values.

Function "check distance" (051)

The mapping is initialized by this function.

L00-FMR2xxxx-14-00-06-en-010

Select
• "distance=ok" if the correct distance is displayed. Any echoes closer to the sensor will be
suppressed by the following interference echo suppression.
• "dist. too small" if the displayed distance is too small. In this case, the signal comes from an
interference echo which will be suppressed.
• "dist. too big" if the displayed distance is too large. This error cannot be cancelled by suppressing
the interference echo. This means that the following two functions are skipped. Check the
application parameters "tank shape" (002), "medium proerty" (003) and "process
cond." (004) and the "empty calibr."(005) in the "basic setup" (00) function group.
• "dist. unknown" if you do not know the actual distance. This means that the following two
functions are skipped.
• "manual" if you want to specify the suppression area yourself in the following function.

Function "range of mapping" (052)

The suggested suppression area is displayed in this function. The reference point is always the sensor
membrane. You can still edit the value. With manual suppression, the default value is 0 m.

" Caution!
The suppression range must end 0.5 m in front of the echo of the actual level. With an empty tank,
do not enter E but E – 0.5 m.

52
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Commissioning

Function "start mapping" (053)

You have the following options for this function:
• off: Nothing is suppressed.
• on: Starts suppression.

! Note!
If a mapping already exists, it will be overwritten up to the distance specified in the "range of
mapping" (052) function. Beyond this distance the existing mapping remains unchanged.

Function dist./measured value (008)

After suppression, the measured distance D from the sensor membrane to the product surface is
displayed together with the level. Check that the values correspond to the actual level and/or the
actual distance.
The following cases may occur:
• Distance correct – Level correct -> End of basic calibration
• Distance incorrect – Level incorrect -> An additional interference echo suppression must be
carried out. Go back to the "check distance" (051) function.
• Distance correct – Level incorrect -> Check the value of the "empty calibr." (005) function.

Rücksprung zur Gruppenauswahl

Nach der Störechoausblendung ist der Grundabgleich beendet und das Gerät springt automatisch
in die Gruppenauswahl zurück.

53
Commissioning Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

6.3 Envelope curve

After the basic setup, an evaluation of the measurement with the aid of the envelope curve
("envelope curve" (0E) function group) is recommended.

6.3.1 Funxtion "plot settings" (0E1)

In this function, select whether you want to display
• just the envelope curve
• The envelope curve and the echo evaluation line FAC
• The envelope curve and interference echo suppression (map)

! Note!
The FAC and the interference echo suppression (map) are explained in BA 240F "Prosonic M -
Description of Instrument Functions"

6.3.2 Function "recording curve" (0E2)

In this function, specify whether you want to display
• an individual envelope curve
• The current envelope curve, with cyclical refreshment.

6.3.3 Function "envelope curve display" (0E3)

The envelope curve is displayed in this function. You can use it to obtain the following information:

quality of evaluated echo

full calibr. evaluated echo is marked

envelope curve empty calibr.

only

minimum distance distance of maximum distance

of the plot evaluated echo of the plot

map interference echo level echo

envelope curve and

interference echo
suppression (map)

L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-en-003

Check that the following conditions are fulfilled:

• The echo quality at the end of measuring range should be at least 10dB.
• There should be practically no interference echoes in front of the level signal.
• If interference echoes cannot be avoided, they must be below the suppression curve.

! Note!
If the cyclical envelope curve display is still active on the display, the measured value is updated at
a slower cycle time. We therefore advise you to exit the envelope curve display after optimising the
measuring point. To do this, press F. (The instrument does not leave the envelope curve display
automatically.)

54
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Commissioning

6.3.4 Navigation in the envelope curve display

Using navigation, the envelope curve can be scaled horizontally and vertically and shifted to the left
or the right. The active navigation mode is indicated by a symbol in the top left hand corner of the
display.

Horizontal Zoom mode:

- horizontal zoom in
OE3
- horizontal zoom out

Move mode:

- moved to the left

- moved to the right

Vertical Zoom mode:

… - vertical zoom (4 steps)

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-en-004

Horizontal Zoom mode

Firstly, go into the envelope curve display. Then press O or S to switch to the envelope curve
navigation. You are then in Horizontal Zoom mode. Either or is displayed.
• O increases the horizontal scale.
• S reduces the horizontal scale.

S O

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-yy-007

Move mode
Then press F to switch to Move mode. Either or is displayed.
• O shifts the curve to the right.
• S shifts the curve to the left.

S O

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-yy-008

Vertical Zoom mode

Press F once more to switch to Vertical Zoom mode. is displayed. You now have the following
options.
• O increases the vertical scale.
• S reduces the vertical scale.
The display icon shows the current zoom factor ( to ).

S O

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-yy-009

55
Commissioning Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

Exiting the navigation

• Press F again to run through the different modes of the envelope curve navigation.
• Press O and S to exit the navigation. The set increases and shifts are retained. Only when you
reactivate the "recording curve" (0E2) function the display settings return to their standard
values.

56
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Troubleshooting

7 Troubleshooting

7.1 System error messages

7.1.1 Current error

Errors which the Prosonic M detects during commissioning or operation are displayed:
• In the "measured value" (000) function
• In the "diagnostics" (0A) function group in the "present error" (0A0) function
Only the highest priority error is displayed; in the case of multiple errors, you can scroll between
the different error messages by pressing O or S.
• by the status of the main value

7.1.2 Last error

The last error is displayed in the "diagnostics" (0A) function group in the "previous error"
(0A1) function. This display can be deleted in the "clear last error" (0A2) function.

7.1.3 Types of error

Type of error Symbol Meaning

The output signal assumes a value which can be set using the "output
on alarm" (010) function:

Alarm (A) • MAX: 110%

• MIN: -10%
continuous • Hold: last value is on hold
• User-specific value

Warning (W) The device continues measurement. An error message is displayed.

flashing

Alarm/Warning (E) You can define whether the error should behave as an alarm or as a warning.

7.1.4 Error codes

Code Error description Action

A102 checksum error Reset;

A110 If alarm still present after reset, replace electronics
A152
A160
W103 initialising If the message does not disappear after several seconds, replace the electronics

A106 downloading Wait; Message disappears after load sequence

A111 electronics defect Reset;

A113 Check system for EMC, improve as necessary
A114 If alarm still present after reset, replace electronics
A115
A121
A125
A155
A164
A171

A116 download error Check connection; Restart download

W153 initialising Wait a few seconds; if error is still displayed, switch the power off and on again

A231 sensor defect Check connection, if necessary replace HF module or electronics

57
Troubleshooting Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

Code Error description Action

A281 interruption temperature Exchange sensor

sensor

A502 Sensor type not detected Exchange sensor and/or electronics

A512 recording of mapping Alarm disappears after a few seconds

A521 new sensor type detected Reset

W601 linearisation curve not Correct table (enter monotonously increasing table)
monotone

W611 less than 2 linea-risation Enter additional value pairs

points

W621 simulation on Switch simulation mode off ["output" (06) function group, "simulation"
(065) function]]

E641 no usable echo Check basic calibration

E651 level in safety distance - Error disappears when the level leaves the safety distance. Possibly reset the
risk of overspill lock. ["safety settings" (01) function group, "ackn. alarm" (017) function]]

A661 Sensor overtemperature

A671 Linearisation incomplete Activate linearisation table

W681 current out of range Carry out basic calibration;

check linearisation
W691 Filling noise detected, level ramp is active

58
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Troubleshooting

7.2 Application errors

Error Example Elimination

Measured value (00) is 1. Check empty calibration (005) and

incorrect but measured full calibration (006).
distance (008) is correct F m/ft 100% 2. Check linearisation
D m/ft (008) – level/ullage (040)
– max. scale(046)
expected
– diameter vessel(047)
– linearisation table

Measured value (000) and actual 1. For measurements in bypass or stilling well:
measured distance (008) Select the according option in the "tank shape" (002) function.
E m/ft
are incorrect
0% t→ 2. Carry out interference echo suppression.

L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-019

No change in 1. Carry out interference echo suppression.

measured value on filling/
2. Clean sensor if necessary
emptying 100%
3. If necessary, select better installation position

actual

expected

0% t→
L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-014

With an uneven surface 1. Carry out interference echo suppression

(e.g. filling, emptying,
100%
2. Set the process cond. (004) to "calm surface" or "add. agitator"
running agitator) the
measured value actual 3. Increase output damping (058).
may jump sporadically to 4. If necessary, select a different installation position and/or a larger sensor
higher expected
levels

0% t→

L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-015

100%

actual

expected

0% t→
L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-016

On filling/emptying the 1. Check tank shape (002), e.g. "dome ceiling" or "horizontal cyl."
measured value drops
2. If possible, do not select a central installation position
100%
3. Possible user stilling well/echo guide pipe
expected

actual

0% t→
L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-017

59
Troubleshooting Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

Error Example Elimination

E 641 (echo loss) 1. Check application parameters (002), (003) and (004)
2. If necessary, select a different installation position and/or a larger sensor
100%
3. Align the sensor parallel to the product surface (particularly for bulk solids
eingetreten applications)

E 641
erwartet

0% t→
L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-018

60
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Maintenance and repairs

8 Maintenance and repairs

8.1 Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior, always use cleaning agents that do not attack the surface of the housing
and the seals.

8.2 Repairs
The Endress+Hauser repair concept assumes that the measuring devices have a modular design and
that customers are able to undertake repairs themselves.
Spare parts are contained in suitable kits. They contain the related replacement instructions.
All the spare parts kits which you can order from Endress+Hauser for repairs are listed with their
order numbers in the section "Spare parts".
For more information on service and spare parts, contact the Service Department at
Endress+Hauser.

8.3 Repairs to Ex-approved devices

When carrying out repairs to Ex-approved devices, please note the following:
• Repairs to Ex-approved devices may only be carried out by trained personnel or by the
Endress+Hauser Service.
• Comply with the prevailing standards, national Ex-area regulations, safety instructions (XA) and
certificates.
• Only use original spare parts from Endress+Hauser.
• When ordering a spare part, please note the device designation on the nameplate. Only replace
parts with identical parts.
• Carry out repairs according to the instructions. On completion of repairs, carry our the specified
routine test on the device.
• Only Endress+Hauser Service may convert a certified device into a different certified variant.
• Document all repair work and conversions.

8.4 Replacement
After a complete instrument or electronic module has been replaced, the parameters can be
downloaded into the instrument again via the communication interface. Prerequisite to this is that
the data were uploaded to the PC beforehand using the ToF Tool / Commuwin II. Measurement
can continue without having to carry out a new setup. Only a linearisation and a tank map
(interference echo suppression) have to be recorded again.

61
Maintenance and repairs Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

8.5 Spare parts (housing type F12)

10 65

65

11
35
EN
DR
Ord PR ES
er OS S+
Se Cod
r.-N e
ON HA
o.: : IC US
M E R
Me
Messbere l
asu ic
ring h ina
rm
U1
ran
ge
ma
Te
4...26...36 x. 2
Maulburg

0m
0m VD
A C
IP
65
T
Made in Germany

A >7
0°C
: t
>8 5°C

4
3
2
1

12 30 65 20
12

R
SE
AU
+H
SS
DRE
EN

65

40

65

65

55
50 58
65 65
65
FMU 40 58
50
FMU 41

FMU 42

FMU 43
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-007

62
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Maintenance and repairs

10 Housing
543120-0022 Housing F12, aluminium, G1/2
543120-0023 Housing F12, aluminium, NPT1/2
543120-0024 Housing F12, aluminium, M20
52001992 Housing F12, aluminium, M20, PA connector
52008556 Housing F12, aluminium, M20, FF connector
52013350 Housing F12, aluminium, coated, M20, 4-wire
52013351 Housing F12, aluminium, coated, M20, metal
52013348 Housing F12, aluminium, coated, G1/2, 4-wire
52013349 Housing F12, aluminium, coated, NPT1/2, 4-wire

11 Hood for terminal compartment

52006026 Cover for the connection compartment F12
52019062 Cover for the connection compartment F12, FHX40

12 Set of screws
535720-9020 Set of screws for housing F12/T12

20 Cover
52005936 Cover F12/T12 aluminium, inspection glass, seal
517391-0011 Cover F12/T12 aluminium, coated, seal

30 Electronics
52023756 Electronics Prosonic M, Ex, 2-wire, HART
52023757 Electronics Prosonic M, Ex, 4-wire, HART
52023758 Electronics Prosonic M, Ex, PA, V2.04
52023759 Electronics Prosonic M, Ex, FF, V2.04

35 Terminal module / power unit

52006197 Terminal module 4-pin, HART, 2-wire with connecting cable
52012156 Terminal module 4-pin, PROFIBUS PA, Foundation Fieldbus
52013304 Power unit, 10.5...32V DC (housing F12) for electronics, 4-wire
52013305 Power unit, 90 ...250V AC (housing F12) for electronics, 4-wire
52015585 Power unit, CSA, 10.5...32V DC (housing F12) for electronics, 4-wire
52015586 Power unit, CSA, 90...250V AC (housing F12) for electronics, 4-wire

40 Display
52005585 Display/operating module VU331

50 Probe with process connection

52010509 Sensor FMU40 G1-1/2
52010507 Sensor FMU40 NPT1-1/2
52010510 Sensor FMU41 G2
52010508 Sensor FMU41 NPT2
52023965 Sensor FMU42
52013543 Sensor FMU43 4", gasket

63
Maintenance and repairs Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

55 Flanges
52023919 Flange, Uni-DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS 80A, PP
52023920 Flange, Uni-DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS 80A, PVDF
52023921 Flange, Uni-DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS 80A, 316L
52023922 Flange, Uni-DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS 100A, PP
52023923 Flange, Uni-DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS 100A, PVDF

58 Hexagon nut
52000599 Hexagon nut (SW60) G1-1/2, bk, PC
52000598 Hexagon nut (SW70) G2, bk, PC

65 Sealing kit
52010526 Sealing kit FMU4x

Miscellaneous
52010545 Nameplate Prosonic M, modification

Spare parts for FHX40

52018204 Adaption kit housing F12, 2-wire, FHX40
52018205 Adaption kit housing F12, 4-wire, FHX40
52016334 Cable FHX40, 20m

64
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Maintenance and repairs

8.6 Spare parts (housing type T12)

25

65
35

10

65

11
EN
D
Ord PR RES
er OS S+
Se Cod ON HA
r.-N e
o.: : IC US
FM ER
Me U
Messbere
asu ic
ring h

30
ran
U1 ge
ma
4...26...36 x. 2
Maulburg

0m
0m VD
A C
IP
65
T
Made in Germany

A >7
0°C
: t
>8 5°C

12 65 20
12
SER
AU
+H
SS
DRE
EN

65 40

65

65
50
55
65
58 65
58
FMU 40

FMU 41 50

FMU 42
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-008

65
Maintenance and repairs Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

10 Housing
543180-1023 Housing T12, aluminium, NPT1/2, PEL
52006204 Housing T12, aluminium, G1/2, PEL, cover
52006205 Housing T12, aluminium, M20, PEL, cover

11 Hood for terminal compartment

52005643 Hood T12

12 Set of screws
535720-9020 Set of screws for housing F12/T12

20 Cover
517391-0011 Cover F12/T12 aluminium, coated, seal
52005936 Cover F12/T12 aluminium, inspection glass, seal

25 Cover for the connection compartment

518710-0020 Cover T3/T12, aluminium, coated, seal

30 Electronics
52023756 Electronics Prosonic M, Ex, 2-wire, HART
52023758 Electronics Prosonic M, Ex, PA, V2.04
52023759 Electronics Prosonic M, Ex, FF, V2.04

35 Terminal module / power unit

52013302 Terminal module Ex d, 4-pin, 2-wire, HART, T12
52013303 Terminal module Ex d, 2-pin, 2-wire, PROFIBUS PA, Foundation Fieldbus, T12
52018949 Terminal module EEx ia, 4-pin, HART, T12, OVP
52018950 Terminal module EEx ia, 4-pin, PROFIBUS PA, Foundation Fieldbus, T12, OVP

40 Display
52005585 Display/operating module VU331

50 Probe with process connection

52010509 Sensor FMU40 G1-1/2
52010507 Sensor FMU40 NPT1-1/2
52010510 Sensor FMU41 G2
52010508 Sensor FMU41 NPT2
52023965 Sensor FMU42

55 Flanges
52023919 Flange, Uni-DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS 80A, PP
52023920 Flange, Uni-DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS 80A, PVDF
52023921 Flange, Uni-DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS 80A, 316L
52023922 Flange, Uni-DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS 100A, PP
52023923 Flange, Uni-DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS 100A, PVDF
52023924 Flange, Uni-DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS 100A, 316L

66
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Maintenance and repairs

58 Hexagon nut
52000598 Hexagon nut (SW70) G2, bk, PC
52000599 Hexagon nut (SW60) G1-1/2, bk, PC

65 Sealing kit
52010526 Sealing kit FMU4x

Miscellaneous
52010545 Nameplate Prosonic M, modification

67
Maintenance and repairs Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

8.7 Return
The following procedures must be carried out before a transmitter is sent to Endress+Hauser e.g.
for repair or calibration:
• Remove all residue which may be present. Pay special attention to the gasket grooves and crevices
where fluid may be present. This is especially important if the fluid is dangerous to health, e.g.
corrosive, poisonous, carcinogenic, radioactive, etc.
• Always enclose a duly completed "Declaration of contamination" form (a copy of the “Declaration
of contamination” is included at the end of this operating manual). Only then can Endress
+Hauser transport, examine and repair a returned device.
• Enclose special handling instructions if necessary, for example a safety data sheet as per EN 91/
155/EEC.
Additionally specify:
• An exact description of the application.
• The chemical and physical characteristics of the product.
• A short description of the error that occurred (specify error code if possible)
• Operating time of the device.

8.8 Disposal
In case of disposal please seperate the different components according to their material consistence.

8.9 Software history

Software version / date Changes to software Changes to documentation

V 01.02.00 / 01.2002 Original software

V 01.02.02 / 03.2003 Compatible with:
• ToF Tool
• Commuwin II (version 2.05.03 and
higher
• HART Communicator DXR 275 (from
OS 4.6) with Rev. 1, DD 1
V 01.02.04/02.2004 • FMU 42 added FMU 42 added
• compatible with HART Communicator
DXR 375

8.10 Contact addresses of Endress+Hauser

Contact addresses can be found on our homepage: www.endress.com/worldwide. If you have any
questions, please do not hesitate to contact your Endress+Hauser representative.

68
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Accessories

9 Accessories

9.1 Weather protection cover

A Weather protection cover made of stainless steel is recommended for outdoor mounting (order
code: 543199-0001). The shipment includes the protective cover and tension clamp.

F12 / F23 / T12 housing

EN
DR
Orde MIC ES
r
Se Code
RO S+H
r.-No : PIL AU
.: OT SE
II R
Me
Messbere
asur ich
ing
rang
U 16 e ma
4...20...36 x. 20
Maulburg

m
mAV DC
IP
65
T
Made in Germany

A >7
0°C
: t >8
5°C

L00-FMR2xxxx-00-00-06-en-001

9.2 Installation bracket for FMU 40/41

400
120
G

A ø16
250

120

3
30

L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-de-001

• for FMU 40, G1½: Order No. 942669-0000

• for FMU 41, G2: Order No. 942669-0001
suited for NPT 1½" and 2" as well

69
Accessories Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

9.3 Adapter flange for FMU 40 / FMU 41

sealing ring
EPDM adapter flange
(supplied)

sensor nozzle
L00-FMUX3XXX-00-00-00-en-001

9.3.1 Version with metrical thread (FAU 70 E)

Version
12 DN 50 PN 16
14 DN 80 PN 16
15 DN 100 PN 16

Thread
3 G 1½, ISO 228
4 G 2, ISO 228

Material
2 1.4435 (316L)
7 PPs (Polypropylene)

FAU 70 E Product designation

9.3.2 Version with conical thread(FAU 70 A)

Version
22 ANSI 2" 150 psi
24 ANSI 3" 150 psi
25 ANSI 4" 150 psi

Thread
5 NPT 1½ - 11,5
6 NPT 2 - 11,5

Material
2 1.4435 (316L)
7 PPs (Polypropylene)

FAU 70 A Product designation

70
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Accessories

9.4 Cantilever

20
C

20

100
50
35

25
D M8

75 75 100 B 35

50/
62

22

C
105

6.5

15
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-005

A B C D for Sensor Material Order Code

585 mm 250 mm 2 mm 200 mm FMU 40 1.4301 (AISI 304) 52014132

galv. steel 52014131

FMU 41 1.4301 (AISI 304) 52014136

galv. steel 52014135

1085 mm 750 mm 3 mm 300 mm FMU 40 1.4301 (AISI 304) 52014134

galv. steel 52014133

FMU 41 1.4301 (AISI 304) 52014138

galv. steel 52014137

• The 50 mm or 62 mm orifices serve for the mounting of the FMU 40 or FMU 41 sensor,
respecitvely.
• The 22 mm orifice may be used for an additional sensor.

71
Accessories Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

9.5 Mounting Frame

13

100
25
55

3.2
Ø 33.7
60
20 4

700/1400
6.5
45

76
200
100
100
130 150
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-005

Height Material Order Code

700 mm galv. steel 919791-0000

700 mm 1.4301 (AISI 304) 919791-0001

1400 mm galv. steel 919791-0002

1400 mm 1.4301 (AISI 304) 919791-0003

9.6 Wall Bracket

3.2
5 ø 33.7
6.5
180

213
150
110

25
13

88 110
150

L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-006

Material Order Code

galv. steel 919792-0000

316Ti/1.4571 919792-0001

72
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Accessories

9.7 Mounting bracket for FMU 43

119 25

Material: 1.4301

~123
120
Order-Code.: 942666-0000

2 25

11

L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-en-003.eps

9.8 Service Interface FXA193

The Service-Interface connects the Service plug of Proline and ToF instruments with the 9 pin
RS 232C interface of a PC. (USB connectors must be equipped with a usual commercial USB/Serial
adapter.)

9.8.1 Product structure

Approvals
A For use in non-hazardous areas
B ATEX II (1) GD
C CSA/FM Class I Div. 1
D ATEX, CSA, FM
9 other

Connection cable
B Connection cable for ToF devices
E Connection cable for Proline and ToF devices
H Connection cable for Proline and ToF devices and Connection cable for Ex two-wire devices
X without connection cable
9 others

FXA193- Complete product designation

9.8.2 Associated documentation

• Technical Information: TI063D
• Safety Instructions for ATEX II (1) GD: XA077D
• Supplementary information for the cable adapters: SD092D

73
Accessories Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

9.9 Remote display FHX40

Wall-mounting Pipe-mounting
(without mounting bracket) (mounting bracket and plate
supplied optionally,
s. product structure)

5
8,
0 Separate housing
15 FHX 40 (IP 65)

Micropilot M 122

180

160
Levelflex M
Prosonic M

80
EN
DR
Orde ES
r Co S+H
Se
r.-N de: AU
o.: SE
Me
Messberei
asuri ch
ng
U 16
ran
ge
ma
R

Cable 88
4...20...36 x. 20
Maulburg

m
mAV DC

T
IP
65
120 118
Made in Germany

A >7
0°C
: t
>8 5°C

82
96
3
6,

max. 80
min. 30
106

122

pipe

L00-FMxxxxxx-00-00-06-en-003

9.9.1 Technical data (cable and housing) and product structure:

Max. cable length 20 m (65 ft)

Temperature range -30 °C...+70 °C (-22 °F...158 °F)

Degree of protection IP65 acc. to EN 60529 (NEMA 4)

Materials Housing: AlSi12; cable glands: nickle plated brass

Dimensions [mm] / [inch] 122x150x80 (HxWxD) / 4.8x5.9x3.2

Approval:
A Nn-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6, ATEX II 3D
S FM IS Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D
U CSA IS Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D
N CSA General Purpose
K TIIS ia IIC T6 (in preparation)

Cable:
1 20m/65ft; for HART
5 20m/65ft; for PROFIBUS PA/FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Additional option:
A Basic version
B Mounting bracket, pipe 1"/ 2"

FHX40 - Complete product designation

For connection of the remote display FHX40 use the cable which fits the communication version of
the respective instrument.

74
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Technical Data

10 Technical Data

10.1 Technical data at a glance

10.1.1 Input

Measured variable The distance D between the sensor membrane and the product surface is measured.
Using the linearisation function, the device uses D to calculate:
• level L in any units
• volume V in any units
• flow Q across measuring weirs or open channels in any units

Maximum range/blocking Sensor Maximum range in liquids1 Maximum range in solids1 blocking distance
distance
FMU 40 5m 2m 0,25 m

FMU 41 8m 3,5 m 0,35 m

FMU 42 10 m 5m 0,4 m

FMU 43 15 m 7m 0,6 m

1Theactual range is dependent on the measuring conditions. Refer to Technical Information TI

365F/00/en for an estimation.

10.1.2 Output

Output signal Foundation Fieldbus

Signal on alarm • Error symbol, error code and plain text description on the on-site display
• Status byte of the digital signal input

10.1.3 Auxiliary energy

Cable entry • Cable gland M20x1.5 (recommended cable diameter 6 ... 10 mm)
• Cable entry G½ or ½ NPT
• 7/8" Foundation Fieldbus plug

Supply voltage 9 V ... 32 V

There may be additional restrictions for devices with an explosion protection certificate. Refer to the
notes in the appropriate safety instructions (XA).

Current consumption approx. 12 mA for the range of voltages given above

75
Technical Data Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

10.1.4 Performance characteristics

Reaction time The reaction time depends on the parameter settings (min. 2s).

Reference operating • Temperature = +20 °C

conditions • Pressure = 1013 mbar abs.
• Humidity = 50 %
• Ideal reflective surface (e.g. calm, smooth fluid surface)
• No interference reflections within signal beam
• Set application parameters:
– Tank shape = flat ceiling
– Medium property = liquid
– process conditions = calm surface

Measured value resolution Sensor Measured value resolution

FMU 40 1 mm

FMU 41 1 mm

FMU 42 2 mm

FMU 43 2 mm

Measuring error Typical specifications for reference operating conditions (include linearity, repeatability, and
hysteresis):

Sensor Measuring error

FMU 40 ±2mm or 0.2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU 41 ± 2 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU 42 ± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU 43 ± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

1
whichever is greater

76
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Technical Data

10.1.5 Ambient conditions

Ambient temperature -40 °C ... +80 °C

The functionality of the LC display becomes restricted at Tu<-20 °C and Tu>+60 °C.
If the device is operated outdoors in strong sunlight, you should use a protective cover.

Storage temperature -40 °C ... +80 °C

Climate class DIN EN 60068-2-38 (Test Z/AD) DIN/IEC 68 T2-30Db

Ingress protection • With closed housing, tested according to

– IP 68, NEMA 6P (24h at 1.83m under water surface)
– IP 66, NEMA 4x
• With open housing: IP 20, NEMA 1 (also ingress protection of the display)

Vibration resistance DIN EN 60068-2-64 / IEC 68-2-64: 20…2000 Hz, 1 (m/s2)2/Hz; 3 x 100 min

Electromagnetic compatibility • Interference emission to EN 61326, Equipment Class B

(EMC) • Interference immunity to EN 61326, Appendix A (Industrial) and NAMUR Recommendation NE
21 (EMC).
• A standard installation cable is sufficient if only the analogue signal is used. Use a screened cable
when working with a superimposed communication signal (HART).

10.1.6 Process conditions

Process temperature -40°C ... +80°C

A temperature sensor is integrated in the sensor for correction of the temperature-dependent time-
of-flight.

Process pressure • FMU 40/41: 0.7 bar ... 3bar abs.

• FMU 42/43: 0.7 bar ... 2.5bar abs.

! Note!
For pressures less than 0.7 bar please contact Endress+Hauser

77
Appendix Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

11 Appendix

11.1 Operating menu

basic setup 00 tank shape 002 medium property 003 process cond. 004 empty calibr. 005 full calibr. 006
dome ceiling liquid standard liquid distance membrane span
horizontal cyl. solid < 4mm calm surface to min. level max.: empty - BD
bypass solid > 4mm turb. surface Default: Default:
stilling well unknown add. agitator FMU 40: 5 m FMU 40: 4,75 m
flat ceiling fast change FMU 41: 8 m FMU 41: 7,6 m
sphere standard solid FMU 42: 10 m FMU 42: 9,6 m
no ceiling solid dusty FMU 43: 15 m FMU 43: 14,4 m
conveyor belt
test: no filter

safety settings 01 output on alarm 010 outp. echo loss 012 delay time 014
MAX 110% 22 mA hold in case of echo loss
hold alarm max. 4000 sec.
MIN - 10% 3,6 mA Default: 30 s
ramp %/min Rampe %span/min 013
specify value

temperature 03 measured temp. 030 max. temp. limit 031 max. meas. temp. 032 react. high temp 033 defect temp. sens. 034
is displayed is displayed is displayed warning alarm
alarm warning

linearisation 04 level/ullage 040 linearisation 041

level CU 040 clear table customer unit 042 linearisation next point 045
ullage CU table on TabNo 043 yes
manual Level 044
semi-automatic volum 045 no
horizontal cyl. customer unit 042
linear customer unit 042
level DU 040
ullage DU

extended calibr. 05 selction 050 dist./meas. value 008 check distance 051 range of mapping. 052 start mapping 053
mapping the following are manual accept proposed value off
displayed: distance = ok or on
- distance membrane distance too small specify range of
to level mapping
- measured value
dist. unknown
distance too big
common

extended map.
pres. map dist. 054 cust. tank map 055
is displayed inactive
active
reset

output 06

envelope curve 0E plot settings 0E1 recording curve 0E2

envelope curve single curve
env. curve + FAC cyclic
env. curve + cust. map

display 09 language 092 back to home 093 format display 094 no. of decimalas 095
specify time decimal x
Default: 100 s 1/16” x.x
x.xx
x.xxx

diagnostics 0A present error 0A0 previous error 0A1 clear last error 0A2 reset 0A3 unlock parameter 0A4
keep for reset code for unlock code
erase see manual see manual

system parameters 0C device tag 0C0 protocol + sw-no. 0C2 device id 0C4

Note! The Default values of the parameters are typed in bold face.
L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-01-en-017

78
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Appendix

dist./meas. value 008 check distance 051 range of mapping. 052 start mapping 053 dist./meas. value 008
the following are manual accept proposed value off the following are
displayed: distance = ok or on displayed:
- distance membrane distance too small specify range of - distance membrane
to level mapping to level
- measured value - measured value
dist. unknown
distance too big

safety distance 015 in safety dist. 016 ackn. alarm 017

from blocking distance warning no
Default: 0,1m self holding yes
alarm

max. scale 046 diameter vessel 047

Return to Group selection

max. scale 046

dist./meas. value 008

the following are
displayed:
- distance membrane
to level
- measured value

echo quality 056 offset 057 output damping 058 blocking dist. 059
is displayed will be added to the Default: 2 s is displayed
measured level

simulation 065

sim. off
sim. level simulation value 066
sim. volume
sim. current

sep. character 096 display test 097

. period off
, comma on

measured dist. 0A5 measured level 0A6 application par. 0A8

not modified
modified

distance unit 0C5 temperature unit 0C6 download mode 0C8

parameter only
param. + cust. map
mapping only

L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-02-en-017

79
Appendix Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus

11.2 Measuring principle

BD
20 mA
100%

E F

4 mA
0%
L00-FMU4x-15-00-00-de-001

E: Empty distance; F: Span (full distance); D: Distance from sensor membrane - product surface; L: Level; BD: Blocking
distance

Sensor BD Max. range fluids Max. range bulk materials

FMU 40 0.25 m 5m 2m

FMU 41 0.35 m 8m 3.5 m

FMU 42 0.4 m 10 m 5m

FMU 43 0.6 m 15 m 7m

11.2.1 Time-of-flight method

The sensor of the Prosonic M transmits ultrasonic pulses in the direction of the product surface.
There, they are reflected back and received by the sensor. The Prosonic M measures the time t
between pulse transmission and reception. The instrument uses the time t (and the velocity of sound
c) to calculate the distance D between the sensor membrane and the product surface:

D = c ⋅ t/2

As the device knows the empty distance E from a user entry, it can calculate the level as follows:

L=E-D

An integrated temperature sensor compensates for changes in the velocity of sound caused by
temperature changes.

11.2.2 Interference echo suppression

The interference echo suppression feature on the Prosonic M ensures that interference echos (e.g.
from edges, welded joints and installations) are not interpreted as a level echo.

11.2.3 Calibration
Enter the empty distance E and the span F to calibrate the device.

11.2.4 Blocking distance

Span F may not extend into the blocking distance BD. Level echos from the blocking distance cannot
be evaluated due to the transient characteristics of the sensor.

80
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Index

Index
A R
adapter flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 repairs to Ex-approved devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
application errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

B S
blocking distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 51 service interface FXA193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
shafts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
C software security locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
cantilever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 T
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 turn housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
W
D warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
declaration of conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 weather protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
declaration of contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
display appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
display symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

E
error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

F
FHX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
flow measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
full calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

H
hardware security locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
hazardous area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

I
installation bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
interference echo suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

K
key assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Khafagi-Venturi flume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

L
level measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

M
measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

N
nozzle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

O
on-site display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

P
process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

81
Prosonic M FMU 40/41/42/43 with Foundation Fieldbus Index

82
 Declaration of Contamination
Erklärung zur Kontamination
Because of legal regulations and for the safety of our employees and operating equipment, we need the "declaration of
contamination", with your signature, before your order can be handled. Please make absolutely sure to include it with
the shipping documents, or - even better - attach it to the outside of the packaging.
Aufgrund der gesetzlichen Vorschriften und zum Schutz unserer Mitarbeiter und Betriebseinrichtungen, benötigen wir die
unterschriebene "Erklärung zur Kontamination", bevor Ihr Auftrag bearbeitet werden kann. Legen Sie diese unbedingt den
Versandpapieren bei oder bringen Sie sie idealerweise außen an der Verpackung an.

Type of instrument / sensor Serial number

Geräte-/Sensortyp _______________________________________ Seriennummer ___________________

Process data/Prozessdaten Temperature / Temperatur _________ [°C] Pressure / Druck __________ [ Pa ]

Conductivity / Leitfähigkeit _________ [ S ] Viscosity / Viskosität __________ [mm2/s]

Medium and warnings

Warnhinweise zum Medium

harmful/
Medium /concentration Identification flammable toxic corrosive irritant other * harmless
Medium /Konzentration CAS No. entzündlich giftig ätzend gesundheits- sonstiges* unbedenklich
schädlich/
reizend
Process
medium
Medium im
Prozess
Medium for
process cleaning
Medium zur
Prozessreinigung
Returned part
cleaned with
Medium zur
Endreinigung
* explosive; oxidising; dangerous for the environment; biological risk; radioactive
* explosiv; brandfördernd; umweltgefährlich; biogefährlich; radioaktiv
Please tick should one of the above be applicable, include security sheet and, if necessary, special handling instructions.
Zutreffendes ankreuzen; trifft einer der Warnhinweise zu, Sicherheitsdatenblatt und ggf. spezielle Handhabungsvorschriften beilegen.

Reason for return / Grund zur Rücksendung _____________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________

Company data /Angaben zum Absender

Company /Firma ________________________________ Contact person / Ansprechpartner ______________________

______________________________________________ Department / Abteilung ______________________________
Address / Adresse Phone number/ Telefon ______________________________
______________________________________________ Fax / E-Mail _______________________________________
______________________________________________ Your order No. / Ihre Auftragsnr. _______________________
We hereby certify that the returned parts have been carefully cleaned. To the best of our knowledge they are free from any residues in
dangerous quantities.
Hiermit bestätigen wir, dass die zurückgesandten Teile sorgfältig gereinigt wurden, und nach unserem Wissen frei von Rückständen in
gefahrbringender Menge sind.
P/SF/Konta VIII

_____________________________________________ ______________________________________________
(place, date / Ort, Datum) (Company stamp and legally binding signature)
(Firmenstempel und rechtsverbindliche Unterschrift)
 www.endress.com/worldwide

BA239F/00/en/04.05
CCS/FM+SGML 6.0/ProMoDo
52010988
Technical Information

Prosonic M FMU40/41/42/43
Ultrasonic Level Measurement
Compact transmitters for non-contact level measurement of fluids,
pastes and coarse bulk materials

Application Features and benefits

• Continuous, non-contact level measurement in fluids, • Quick and simple commissioning via menu-guided on-
pastes, sullages and coarse bulk materials site operation with four-line plain text display
• Flow measurement in open channels and measuring • Envelope curves on the on-site display for simple
weirs diagnosis
• System integration via: • Easy remote operation, diagnosis and measuring point
– HART (standard), 4...20mA documentation with the supplied ToF Tool operating
– PROFIBUS PA program.
– Foundation Fieldbus • Suitable for explosion hazardous areas
• Maximum measuring range: (Gas-Ex, Dust-Ex)
– FMU 40: • Linearisation function (up to 32 points) for conversion
– 5 m in fluids of the measured value into any unit of length, volume
– 2 m in bulk materials or flow rate
– FMU 41: • Non-contact measurement method minimizes service
– 8 m in fluids requirements
– 3,5 m in bulk materials • optional remote display and operation (up to 20 m
– FMU 42: from transmitter)
– 10 m in fluids • Installation possible from thread G 1½“ or 1½ NPT
– 5 m in bulk materials upwards
– FMU 43: • Integrated temperature sensor for automatic
– 15 m in fluids correction of the temperature dependent sound
– 7 m in bulk materials velocity

TI365F/00/en
 Prosonic M

Inhaltsverzeichnis

Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Process temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Equipment architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Process pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Operating frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Load HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Output damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Linearisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Auxiliary energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terminal compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fieldbus plug connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Current consumption
(2-wire-instruments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
HART ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Max. noise HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Design / dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Housing design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Process connection,
sealing material,
sensor material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
On-site operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Certificates and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Ex-Zulassung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
External standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Product structure FMU 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Product structure FMU 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Product structure FMU 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Product structure FMU 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Reaction time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Weather protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installation bracket for FMU 40/41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Measured value resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Adapter flange for FMU 40 / FMU 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Pulse frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cantilever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Measuring error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Mounting Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Wall Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Commubox FXA191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installation variants FMU 40, FMU 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Service Interface FXA193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Installation variants FMU 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Remote display FHX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Installation variants FMU 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Installation conditions for level measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installation in narrow shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installation conditions for flow measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Blocking distance,
Description of device functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
nozzle installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Short instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Control drawings Installation drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Resistance to alternating
temperature cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Ingress protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

2 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Function and system design

Measuring principle

BD
20 mA
100%

E F

4 mA
0%
L00-FMU4x-15-00-00-de-001

E: Empty distance; F: Span (full distance); D: Distance from sensor membrane - product surface; L: Level; BD: Blocking
distance

Sensor BD Max. range fluids Max. range bulk materials

FMU 40 0.25 m 5m 2m

FMU 41 0.35 m 8m 3.5 m

FMU 42 0.4 m 10 m 5m
FMU 43 0.6 m 15 m 7m

Time-of-flight method
The sensor of the Prosonic M transmits ultrasonic pulses in the direction of the product surface. There, they
are reflected back and received by the sensor. The Prosonic M measures the time t between pulse transmission
and reception. The instrument uses the time t (and the velocity of sound c) to calculate the distance D between
the sensor membrane and the product surface:

D = c ⋅ t/2

As the device knows the empty distance E from a user entry, it can calculate the level as follows:

L=E-D

An integrated temperature sensor compensates for changes in the velocity of sound caused by temperature
changes.

Interference echo suppression

The interference echo suppression feature on the Prosonic M ensures that interference echos (e.g. from edges,
welded joints and installations) are not interpreted as a level echo.

Calibration
Enter the empty distance E and the span F to calibrate the device.

Blocking distance
Span F may not extend into the blocking distance BD. Level echos from the blocking distance cannot be
evaluated due to the transient characteristics of the sensor.

Endress + Hauser 3
 Prosonic M

Equipment architecture 4…20 mA output with HART protocol

The complete measuring system consists of:

PLC
- ToF Tool - - ToF Tool -
FieldTool FieldTool
Package Package
- FieldCare

Commubox Netz service adapter

FXA 191 (for 4-wire) FXA193

transmitter power
supply unit
RMA422 operating and ENDRESS + HAUSER

or RN221N display module – +

%

(communication resistor VU331

included) 3 PV
4 SV
DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
ONLINE
1 QUICK SETUP
2 OPERATING MENU
352 mbar
0 °C
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.

HELP SAVE

Page
Up

ENDRESS + HAUSER
RMA 422 Bksp Delete

Page
On

#%& ABC DEF

1 2 3
Copy Paste Hot Key

GHI JKL MNO

4 5 6
Insert + Hot Key

PQRS TUV W XY Z
7 8 9
,()‘
.
_<>
0
+*/
-
HART handheld
FXA191 375
FIELD COMMUNICATOR

DXR375
or
DXR375

L00-FMxxxxxx-14-00-06-en-007

If the HART communication resistor is not built into the supply unit, it is necessary to insert a communication
resistor of 250 Ω into the 2-wire line.

On-site operation
• with display and operating module VU 331
• with a Personal Computer, FXA 193 and the operating software ToF Tool

Remote operation
• with HART handheld terminal DXR 375
• with a Personal Computer, Commubox FXA 191 and the operating software COMMUWIN II respectively
ToF Tool.

4 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

System integration using PROFIBUS PA

A maximum of 32 transmitters (8 if mounted in an explosion hazardous location EEx ia IIC according to
FISCO-model) can be connected to the bus.The segment coupler provides the operating voltage to the bus.
Both on-site as well as remote operation are possible.

personal computer e.g. with

Commuwin II or
ToF Tool - FieldTool PLC
Package and
Profibard resp. Proficard

segment coupler
PROFIBUS DP
ENDRESS + HAUSER

PROFIBUS PA
T

More
operating and Functions
display module (valves etc)
VU331 ENDRESS + HAUSER

– + E

Micropilot M Prosonic M
FXA193
Levelflex M

ToF Tool - FieldTool Package

L00-FMxxXXXX-14-00-06-en-001

System integration using Foundation Fieldbus (FF)

A maximum of 32 transmitters (standard or EEx d) can be connected to the bus. For protection class EEx ia:
the maximum number of transmitters depends on the established rules and standards for intrinsically safe
circuits (EN 60070-14) and proof of instrinsic safety. Both on-site and remote operation are possible.

personal computer
e.g. with
NI-FBUS configurator

power supply
FF link
power conditioner T T

Additional
operating and functions
display module (valves etc.)
VU331 ENDRESS + HAUSER

– +
%

Micropilot M Prosonic M
FXA193
Levelflex M

ToF Tool - FieldTool Package

L00-FMxxXXXX-14-00-06-en-003

Endress + Hauser 5
 Prosonic M

System integration using Endress+Hauser Rackbus

You can interconnect a maximum of 64 devices with HART protocol to a Rackbus. Use an FXN 672 interface
module for each device. You can integrate this bus into a higher-level bus by using a ZA gateway. Gateways
are available for MODBUS, FIP, PROFIBUS, INTERBUS etc. Both on-site and remote operation are possible.

PLC
personal computer
with Commuwin II

RS 232C Bus
FXN672
FXN 671 FXN 671 FXN 671 ZA 672 ZA 672
Gateway to
MODBUS, FIP,
PROFIBUS,
INTERBUS etc.
+ + +
mA1 mA1 mA1

4…20 mA with HART

operating and
display module
VU331 ENDRESS + HAUSER

– + E

Micropilot M Prosonic M
FXA193

Levelflex M

ToF Tool - FieldTool Package

L00-FMxxXXXX-14-00-06-en-006

6 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

System integration via Fieldgate

Vendor Managed Inventory

By using Fieldgates to interrogate tank or silo levels remotely, suppliers of raw materials can provide their
regular customers with information about the current supplies at any time and, for example, account for them
in their own production planning. For their part, the Fieldgates monitor the configured level limits and, if
required, automatically activate the next supply. The spectrum of options here ranges from a simple purchasing
requisition via e-mail through to fully automatic order administration by coupling XML data into the planning
systems on both sides.

Remote maintenance of measuring equipment

Fieldgates not only transfer the current measured values, they also alert the responsible standby personnel, if
required, via e-mail or SMS. In the event of an alarm or also when performing routine checks, service
technicians can diagnose and configure connected HART devices remotely. All that is required for this is the
corresponding HART operating software (e.g. ToF Tool - FieldTool Package, FieldCare, ...) for the connected
device. Fieldgate passes on the information transparently, so that all options for the respective operating
software are available remotely. Some on-site service operations can be avoided by using remote diagnosis and
remote configuration and all others can at least be better planned and prepared.

Remote confoguration/diagnosis Remote monitoring

HTTP script
via HART Client: Web browser
- ToF Tool - FieldTool …
Package
- FieldCare
...

Multidrop-Connector
e.g. 2 x RN221N-B … FXN520

ENDRESS+HAUSER
RN 221N
ENDRESS+HAUSER
RN 221N
Analogue
Ethernet
Fieldgate GSM
FXA520

FXN 520
Fieldgate 20...45 VDC
Channel 1 Channel 2 FXA520

-
.
L00-FXA520xx-14-00-06-en-009

! Note!
The number of instruments which can be connected in mutidrop mode can be calculated by the "FieldNetCalc"
program which is available from your Endress+Hauser sales organisation. A description of this program can be
found in Technical Information TI 400F (Multidrop Conncecto FXN520).

Endress + Hauser 7
 Prosonic M

Input
Measured variable The distance D between the sensor membrane and the product surface is measured.
Using the linearisation function, the device uses D to calculate:
• level L in any units
• volume V in any units
• flow Q across measuring weirs or open channels in any units

Measuring range The measuring range is limited by the range of a sensor. The sensor range is, in turn, dependent on the
operating conditions. To estimate the actual range, proceed as follows (see also the calculation example in the
diagram):
1. Determine which of the influences shown in the following table are appropriate for your process.
2. Add the corresponding attenuation values.
3. From the total attenuation, use the diagram to calculate the range.

Fluid surface Attenuation

Calm 0 dB

Waves 5 ... 10 dB

Strong turbulence (e.g. stirrers) 10 ... 20 dB

Foaming Ask Endress+Hauser

Bulk material surface Attenuation

Hard, rough (e.g. rubble) 40 dB

Soft (e.g. peat, dust-covered clinker) 40 ... 60 dB

Dust Attenuation
No dust formation 0 dB

Little dust formation 5 dB

Heavy dust formation 5 ... 20 dB

Filling curtain in detection range Attenuation

None 0 dB

Small quantities 5 ... 10 dB

Large quantities 10 ... 40 dB

Temperature difference between Attenuation

sensor and product surface

to 20 °C 0 dB

to 40 °C 5 ... 10 dB

to 80 °C 10 ... 20 dB

8 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

15
FMU 43
14

13

12

11

10
FMU 42
9
8

range/ m
FMU 41
7

4 FMU 40

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

attenuation / dB
L00-FMU4xxxx-05-00-00-en-002

Example (for FMU 43)

For typical solid applications, a certain amount of dust coverage is normally present. Therefore, the following
range results from the table and the diagram

• Dust-covered rubble approx. 50 dB

• no dust formation 0 dB
• No filling curtain in
detection range 0 dB
• Temperature diff. < 20°C 0 dB
approx. 50 dB => range approx. 7 m

These measuring conditions have been taken into account during the calculation of the maximum measuring
range in solid applications.

Operating frequency Sensor Operating frequency

FMU 40 approx. 70 kHz

FMU 41 approx. 50 kHz

FMU 42 approx. 42 kHz

FMU 43 approx. 35 kHz

Endress + Hauser 9
 Prosonic M

Output
Output signal according to the instrument version ordered:
• 4…20 mA with HART protocol
• PROFIBUS PA
• Foundation Fieldbus (FF)

Signal on alarm Error information can be accessed via the following interfaces:
• On-site display (error symbol, error code and plain text description)
• Current output (error current configurable)
• Digital interface

Load HART Minimum load for HART communication: 250 Ω

Output damping Freely selectable, 0 ... 255 s

Linearisation The linearisation function of the Prosonic M allows conversion of the measured value into any unit of length
or volume. In open channels or measuring weirs, also a flow linearistion is possible (calculation of the flow from
the measured level). The linearisation table for calculating the volume in an horizontal cylindrical tank is
preprogrammed. You can also enter any number of other tables containing up to 32 value pairs either manually
or semi-automatically (by filling the vessel under controlled conditions).
The supplied ToF Tool operating program can automatically calculate the table for any tank, weir or flume and
upload it into the device.
Flow curves for open channels can be calculated and entered into the instrument by the ToT Tool as well.

10 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Auxiliary energy
Terminal compartment In the F12 housing, the terminals are located underneath the housing cover. In the T12 housing, they are under
the cover of the separate terminal compartment.

F12 housing T12 housing

sealed terminal
compartment

L00-FMR2xxxx-04-00-00-en-001

Terminal assignment 4 ... 20 mA with HART, 2-wire 4 ... 20 mA active with HART, 4-wire

DC AC / DC

power display unit, power

alternatively recorder, PCS

Commubox
FXA 191 alternatively
communication
DXR 375
resistor Commubox
(> 250 Ω) communication FXA 191
resistor DXR 375
(> 250 Ω)

4...20 mA
4...20mA

test sockets for testing

of the signal current

plant
1 2 3 4 ground
L- L+ I+ I- plant
5 6 1 2 ground
I+ I- L1/L+ N/L-
L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-015 L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-011

• Connect the connecting line to the screw terminals (line cross-sections of 0.5 ... 2.5mm) in the terminal
compartment.
• Use 2-wire twisted pair cable with screen for the connection.
• Protective circuitry against reverse polarity, RFI and over-voltage peaks is built into the device (see also
Technical Information TI 241F/00/en "EMC Test Procedures")

Endress + Hauser 11
 Prosonic M

PROFIBUS PA Foundation Fieldbus

PROFIBUS PA
T-Box

plant
plant 1 2 3 4 ground
1 2 3 4 ground – +
– +
L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-012 L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-013

The digital communication signal is transmitted to the bus via a 2-wire connection. The bus also provides the
auxiliary energy. Use 2-wire twisted pair cable with screen.
Refer to the following operating manuals for information on cable types, and how to set up and ground the
network:
• BA 198F/00/de „PROFIBIS -DP/-PA, Guidelines for planning and commissioning“
• BA 013S/04/en „Foundation Fieldbus, Installation and Commissioning Guidelines“

Fieldbus plug connectors For the versions with fieldbus plug connector (M12 or 7/8"), the signal line can be connected without opening
the housing.

Pin assignment of the M12 plug connector (PROFIBUS PA plug)

Pin Meaning

1 Ground
1 3 -
2 Signal +

2 + 4 nc 3 Signal -

4 not connected

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-016

Pin assignment of the 7/8" plug connector (FOUNDATION Fieldbus plug)

Pin Meaning
1 Signal -
1 - 3 nc
2 Signal +

2 + 4 3 not connected

4 ground

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-017

12 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Supply voltage HART, 2-wire

The following values are the voltages across the terminals directly at the instrument:

Current Terminal voltage Terminal voltage

Version
consumption minimum maximum

2-wire HART 4 mA 14 V 36 V
Standard
20 mA 8V 36 V

4 mA 14 V 30 V
EEx ia
20 mA 8V 30 V

4 mA 14 V 30 V
EEx d
20 mA 11 V 30 V

Fixed current,
adjustable, e.g. for Standard 11 mA 10 V 36 V
solar power
operation
(measured value via EEx ia 11 mA 10 V 30 V
HART)

Fixed current for Standard 4 mA1 14 V 36 V

HART multidrop
mode EEx ia 4 mA1 14 V 30 V

1) Start-up current 11 mA

HART, 4-wire, active

Version Voltage max. load

DC 10,5 ... 32 V 600 Ω

AC 50/60 Hz 90 ... 253 V 600 Ω

Cable entry • Cable gland: M20x1.5 (recommended cable diameter 6 ... 10 mm)
• Cable entry G ½ or ½ NPT
• PROFIBUS-PA M12 plug
• Fieldbus Foundation 7/8" plug

Power consumption Version Power consumption

2-wire 51 mW ... 800 mW

4-wire AC max. 4VA

4-wire DC; FMU 40/41 330 mW ... 830 mW

4-wire DC; FMU 42/43 600 mW ... 1 W

Current consumption Communication Current consumption

(2-wire-instruments)
HART 3,6 ... 22 mA

PROFIBUS PA max. 13 mA

Foundation Fieldbus max. 15 mA

Endress + Hauser 13
 Prosonic M

HART ripple 47...125 Hz: Vpp = 200 mV (measured at 500 Ω)

Max. noise HART 500 Hz...10 kHz: Vrms = 2.2 mV (measured at 500 Ω)

Galvanic isolation With 4-wire devices, the evaluation electronics and mains voltage are galvanically isolated from each other.

14 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Performance characteristics
Reaction time The reaction time depends on the parameter settings (min. 0.5s for 4-wire devices,
min. 2s for 2-wire devices).

Reference operating • Temperature = +20 °C

conditions • Pressure = 1013 mbar abs.
• Humidity = 50 %
• Ideal reflective surface (e.g. calm, smooth fluid surface)
• No interference reflections within signal beam
• Set application parameters:
– Tank shape = flat ceiling
– Medium property = liquid
– process conditions = calm surface

Measured value resolution Sensor Measured value resolution

FMU 40 1 mm

FMU 41 1 mm
FMU 42 2 mm

FMU 43 2 mm

Pulse frequency • 2-wire devices: max. 0.5Hz

• 4-wire devices: max. 2Hz
The exact values are dependent on the type of device and the parameter settings.

Measuring error Typical specifications for reference operating conditions (include linearity, repeatability, and hysteresis):

Sensor Measuring error

FMU 40 ±2mm or 0.2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU 41 ± 2 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU 42 ± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU 43 ± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

1whichever is greater

Endress + Hauser 15
 Prosonic M

Installation conditions
Installation variants FMU 40,
Installation with counter nut Installation with sleeve
FMU 41

Sealing ring
(EPDM)
supplied

counter nut (PC)

supplied
for G 1½” and
G 2” instruments

Installation with installation bracket Installation with adapter flange

ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M

Sealing ring
(EPDM)
adapter flange supplied

sensor nozzle
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-002

For installation bracket or adapter flange s. chapter "Accessories".

Installation variants FMU 42

Installation with universal flange Installation with mounting bracket

ER
HAUS
ESS+
ENDR ic M

Flange: Proson

DN80/ANSI3"/JIS10K80
DN100/ANSI4"/JIS16K100

L00-FMU42xxxx-17-00-00-en-001

16 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Installation variants FMU 43

Installation with Installation with
universal slip-on flange (option) mounting bracket

ER
HAUS
ESS+
ENDR ic M
Proson

slip-on flange

nozzle -
e.g.Zone 20
sensor .
Zone 20
L00-FMU43xxxx-17-00-00-en-001

Installation conditions for

2 3 4
level measurements

7
1
5

1/6D

D
6 L
α

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-de-005

• Do not install the sensor in the middle of the tank (3). We recommend leaving a distance between the sensor
and the tank wall (1) measuring 1/6 of the tank diameter.
• Use a protective cover, in order to protect the device from direct sun or rain (2).
• Avoid measurements through the filling curtain (4).
• Make sure that equipment (5) such as limit switches, temperature sensors, etc. are not located within the
emitting angle α. In particular, symmetrical equipment (6) such as heating coils, baffles etc. can influence
measurement.
• Align the sensor so that it is vertical to the product surface (7).
• Never install two ultrasonic measuring devices in a tank, as the two signals may affect each other.
• To estimate the detection range, use the 3 dB emitting angle α.

Sensor α Lmax rmax

FMU 40 11° 5m 0,48 m

FMU 41 11° 8m 0,77 m

FMU 42 11° 10 m 0,96 m

FMU 43 6° 15 m 0,79 m

Endress + Hauser 17
 Prosonic M

Installation in narrow shafts In narrow shafts with strong interference echoes, we ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M

recommend using an ultrasound guide pipe (e.g. PE

or PVC wastewater pipe) with a minimum diameter
of 100 mm. venting
Make sure that the pipe is not soiled by accumulated hole
dirt. If necessary, clean the pipe at regular intervals.

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-010

Installation conditions for flow
measurements
• Install the Prosonic M at the inflow side, as close above the maximum water level Hmax as possible (take into
account the blocking distance BD).
• Position the Prosonic M in the middle of the channel or weir.
• Align the sensor membrane parallel to the water surface.
• Keep to the installation distance of the channel or weir.
• You can enter the "Flow to Level" linearisation curve ("Q/h curve") using ToF Tool or manually via the on-
site display.

Example: Khafagi-Venturi flume

inflow outflow
empty calibr.

BD

Khafagi - Venturi - flume

Hmax direction of flow

1 x b0

b0

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-003

18 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Example: Triangular weir

min. 2 Hmax
α

Hmax (= full calibr.)

min. 2 Hmax

min. 3 H max
BD
empty calibr.

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-012

Endress + Hauser 19
 Prosonic M

Blocking distance, Install the Prosonic M at a height so that the blocking distance BD is not undershot, even at maximum fill level.
nozzle installation Use a pipe nozzle if you cannot maintain the blocking distance in any other way. The interior of the nozzle
must be smooth and may not contain any edges or welded joints. In particular, there should be no burr on the
inside of the tank side nozzle end. Note the specified limits for nozzle diameter and length. To minimise
disturbing factors, we recommend an angled socket edge (ideally 45°).

FMU 43
FMU 40/41 FMU 42

BD
SD

E F
L L
L

D D
D

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-004

BD: blocking distance; SD: safety distance; E: empty calibration; F: full calibration (span); D: nozzle diameter; L: nozzle
length

Max. range Max. range

Sensor BD nozzle diameter max. nozzle length
liquids bulk materials

50 mm ca. 80 mm

FMU 40 0.25 m 5m 2m 80 mm ca. 240 mm

100 mm ca. 300 mm

80 mm ca. 240 mm
FMU 41 0.35 m 8m 3.5 m
100 mm ca. 300 mm

80 mm ca. 250 mm
FMU 42 0.4 m 10 m 5m
100 mm ca. 300 mm

FMU 43 0.6 m 15 m 7m min. 100 mm ca. 300 mm

" Caution!
If the blocking distance is undershot, it may cause device malfunction.

! Note!
In order to notice if the level approaches the blocking distance, you can specify a safety distance (SD). If the
level is within this safety distance, the Prosonic M outputs a warning or alarm message.

20 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature -40 °C ... +80 °C
The functionality of the LC display becomes restricted at Tu<-20 °C and Tu>+60 °C.
If the device is operated outdoors in strong sunlight, you should use a protective cover.

Storage temperature -40 °C ... +80 °C

Resistance to alternating to DIN EN 60068-2-14; Nb test : +80°C/-40°C, 1K/min, 100cycles

temperature cycles

Climate class DIN EN 60068-2-38 (Test Z/AD) DIN/IEC 68 T2-30Db

Ingress protection • With closed housing, tested according to

– IP 68, NEMA 6P (24h at 1.83m under water surface)
– IP 66, NEMA 4x
• With open housing: IP 20, NEMA 1 (also ingress protection of the display)

" Caution!
Degree of protection IP 68 NEMA 6P applies for M12 PROFIBUS-PA plugs only when the PROFIBUS cable is
plugged in.

Vibration resistance DIN EN 60068-2-64 / IEC 68-2-64: 20…2000 Hz, 1 (m/s2)2/Hz; 3 x 100 min

Electromagnetic compatibility • Interference emission to EN 61326, Equipment Class B

(EMC) • Interference immunity to EN 61326, Appendix A (Industrial) and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 (EMC).
• A standard installation cable is sufficient if only the analogue signal is used. Use a screened cable when
working with a superimposed communication signal (HART).

Process conditions
Process temperature -40°C ... +80°C
A temperature sensor is integrated in the sensor for correction of the temperature-dependent time-of-flight.

Process pressure • FMU 40/41: 0.7 bar ... 3bar abs.

• FMU 42/43: 0.7 bar ... 2.5bar abs.

! Note!
For pressures less than 0.7 bar please contact Endress+Hauser

Endress + Hauser 21
 Prosonic M

Mechanical construction
Design / dimensions
F12 housing T12 housing
ca. 86 65 78 65 78
68 94
32

Ø 129
ENDRESS+HAUSER

Ø 129
Prosonic M ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M

162
150
85 85

FMU 40 FMU 41 FMU 42 with universal flange

60 AF
60 AF Flange:
DN80/ANSI3"/JIS10K80

~ 110
~ 85
G1½” DN100/ANSI4"/JIS16K100
~148
22

G2”
~148
22

1½ NPT 2 NPT suitable for PN16

acc. to DIN/EN 1092 part1
~87

~83

Ø 70
Ø 39
Ø 50

FMU 42 with mounting bracket FMU 43 with mounting bracket

ER
F12
ENDRESS+HAUSER HAUS
Prosonic M ESS+
ENDR ic M

F12/ Proson

T12

30 M8
75
105

89
75 119 158

FMU 43 with slip-on flange Mounting bracket for FMU 42/43

~86 65 78 25
119
Ø 129

ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
150

~123
120
~248

2 x M8
85

2 25
40 40
Ø 230
ANSI 4” DN 100
Alternatively, a separate flange can be used.
11
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-en-003

22 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Weight Sensor Weight

FMU 40 approx. 2,5 kg

FMU 41 approx. 2,6 kg

FMU 42 approx. 3 kg

FMU 43 approx. 3,5 kg

Housing design Types of housings

• F12 housing with sealed terminal compartment for standard or EEx ia applications
• T12 housing with separate terminal compartment and explosionproof encapsulation

Material
Aluminium, seawater resistant, chromed, powder-coated

Cover
• Aluminium, for version without on-site display
• Inspection glass for version with on-site display. This version cannot be supplied together with the ATEX II
1/2 D certificate.

Process connection, Sensor Process connection Material in contact with process

sealing material,
sensor material • Thread G 1½“ Sensor: PVDF
FMU 40
• Thread NPT 1½“ - 11.5 Seal: EPDM
• Thread 2" Sensor: PVDF
FMU 41
• Thread NPT 2" - 11,5 Seal: EPDM

• Universal flange
DN 80 / ANSI 3" / JIS10K80 Sensor: PVDF
FMU 42 • Universal flange Seal: VITON or EPDM
DN 100 / ANSI 4" / JIS16K100 Flange: PP, PVDF or SS 316L
• Mounting bracket

• Universal flange Sensor: UP and SS 316Ti

FMU 43 DN 100 / ANSI 4" / JIS16K100 Seal: EPDM
• Mounting bracket Flange: PP or SS 316Ti

Endress + Hauser 23
 Prosonic M

Human interface
Display and operating The LCD module VU 331 for display and operation is located beneath the housing cover. The measured value
elements is legible through the glass in the cover. Open the cover to operate the device.

END
Order MICR
RES
S+HA
OPIL
Ser.-NoCode:
.: OT USE
II R
Messbe
Measur reich
ing
range

LCD
U 16...36 max.
4...20 20

Maulburg
mAV DC
m
IP
65
T

Made in Germany
A >70°C
: t
>85°C

(liquid crystal display)

ENDRESS + HAUSER

– + E

Symbols 3 keys

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-en-001

Symbol in display

continuous flashing

Meaning Alarm Warning Communication Security Locking

Function of the keys

Key(s) Meaning

O or V Navigate upwards in the selection list

Edit numeric value within a function

S or W Navigate downwards in the selection list

Edit numeric value within a function

X or Z Navigate to the left within a function group

F Navigate to the right within a function group, confirmation.

O and F
or Contrast settings of the LCD
S and F
Hardware lock / unlock
After a hardware lock, an operation of the instrument via display or
O and S and F communication is not possible!
The hardware can only be unlocked via the display. An unlock parameter must
be entered to do so.

24 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

On-site operation Operation with VU 331

The LC-Display VU 331 allows configuration via 3 keys directly at the instrument. All device functions can be
set through a menu system. The menu consists of function groups and functions. Within a function, application
parameters can be read or adjusted. The user is guided through a complete configuration procedure.

Headline Position indicator

ENDRESS + HAUSER

Symbol Main value Unit

– + E

Selection list

Function groups -> Functions

HOME X F
F FG00 X F000 F001 F002 F003 F004 ...

X
FG01
O FG02 F F
FG03
O Help text
FG04 S
S
FG05
FG06
X
FG07 Envelope
... curve

L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-en-004

Operation with the handheld terminal DXR 375

On devices with HART communication, you can also access the menu using the handheld terminal DXR 375.

dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.

dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
FMU43: LIC0001
FMU42: LIC0001 ONLINE
ONLINE
1 GROUP SELECTION
1 GROUP SELECT
2 PV 8.7 m 2 PV 8.7 m Delete

HELP SAVE

H dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.

6
9
HELP SAVE FMU43: LIC0001
Page GROUP SELECTION
Up

1 BASIC SETUP
Bksp Delete 2 SAFETY SETTINGS Delete
3 TEMPERATURE
Page 4 LINEARISATION
On Bksp 5 EXTENDED CALIBR.
#%& ABC DEF
1 2 3
Copy

GHI
Paste

JKL
Hot Key

MNO
H dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.

4 5 6 SAVE HOME FMRU43: LIC0001

Insert + Hot Key
BASIC SETUP
PQRS TUV W XY Z
1 MEASURED VALUE
Page
7 8 9
2 TANK SHAPE Up
,()‘ _<> +*/ 3 MEDIUM PROPERTY
. 0 - 4 PROCESS COND.
Bksp 5 EMPTY CALIBR. Page
On
375
FIELD COMMUNICATOR
SAVE HOME

L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-de-005

Endress + Hauser 25
 Prosonic M

Remote operation Operation with ToF Tool

The ToF Tool is a graphical operation software for instruments from Endress+Hauser. It is used to support
commissioning, securing of data, signal analysis and documentation of the instruments. It is compatible with
the following operating systems: WinNT4.0, Win2000 and WinXP.
The ToF Tool supports the following functions:
• Online configuration of transmitters
• Signal analysis via envelope curve
• Linearisation table (graphically supported creation, editing, importing and exporting)
• Loading and saving of instrument data (Upload/Download)
• Documentation of measuring point
Connection options
• HART with Commubox FXA 191 (available as accessory)
• PROFIBUS PA
• Service-interface with adapter FXA 193 (available as accessory)

Menu-guided commissioning:

L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-003

26 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Signal analysis via envelope curve:

L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-004

Operation with FieldCare

FieldCare is Endress+Hauser's FDT based Plant Asset Management Tool. It can configure all intelligent field
devices in your plant and supports you in managing them. By using status information, it also provides a simple
but effective means of checking their health.
• Supports Ethernet, HART, PROFIBUS, FOUNDATION Fieldbus etc.
• Operates all Endress+Hauser devices
• Operates all third-party actuators, I/O systems and sensors supporting the FDT standard
• Ensures full functionality for all devices with DTMs
• Offers generic profile operation for any third-party fieldbus device that does not have a vendor DTM

Operation with Commuwin II (for communication variants HART or PROFIBUS-PA)

Commuwin II is an operating software with graphical support (MS Windows) for intelligent transmitters with
the communication protocols Rackbus, Rackbus RS-485, HART and PROFIBUS-PA.
Commuwin II supports the following functions:
• Online configuration of transmitters
• Loading and saving of instrument data (Upload/Download)
• Orderly visualisation of measured values and limit values
• Display and recording of measured values with a line recorder
It is not possible to display envelope curves with Commuwin II. To display them, please use the ToF Tool
program supplied.
Connections:
• HART with Commubox FXA 191 (available as accessory)
• PROFIBUS PA

Endress + Hauser 27
 Prosonic M

Operation with NI-FBUS Configurator (only Foundation Fieldbus)

The NI-FBUS Configurator is an easy-to-use graphical environment for creating linkages, loops, and a schedule
based on the fieldbus concepts.
You can use the NI-FBUS Configurator to configure a fieldbus network as follows:
• Set block and device tags
• Set device addresses
• Create and edit function block control strategies (function block applications)
• Configure vendor-defined function and transducer blocks
• Create and edit schedules
• Read and write to function block control strategies (function block applications)
• Invoke Device Description (DD) methods
• Display DD menus
• Download a configuration
• Verify a configuration and compare it to a saved configuration
• Monitor a downloaded configuration
• Replace devices
• Save and print a configuration

Certificates and Approvals

CE mark The measuring system meets the legal requirements of the EC-guidelines. Endress+Hauser confirms the
instrument passing the required tests by attaching the CE-mark.

Ex-Zulassung Die erhältlichen Zertifikate sind in den Bestellinformationen aufgeführt. Beachten Sie jeweils die zugehörigen
Sicherheitshinweise (XA) bzw. Control oder Installation Drawings (ZD).

External standards and EN 60529

guidelines
Protection class of housing (IP-code)

EN 61326
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements)

NAMUR
Standards committee for measurement and control in the chemical industry

28 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Ordering information
Product structure FMU 40
Certificates
A Variant for non-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX ia IIC T6
4 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX d [ia] IIC T6
G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6
2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover
5 ATEX II 1/3D
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
N CSA General Purpose
K TIIS Ex ia II C T6
Y Special certificate

Process connection
R G 1½“ threadISO 228
N NPT 1½“ - 11,5 thread
Y Special version

Power supply/communication
B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version

Display / on-site operation

1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version

Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment;
with overvoltage protection
9 Special version

Screw union/entry
2 M20x1.5 screw union
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version

FMU 40 - Product designation

Endress + Hauser 29
 Prosonic M

Product structure FMU 41 Certificates

A Variant for non-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX ia IIC T6
4 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX d [ia] IIC T6
G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6
2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover
5 ATEX II 1/3D
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
N CSA General Purpose
K TIIS Ex ia II C T6
Y Special certificate

Process connection
R G 2“ threadISO 228
N NPT 2“ - 11,5 thread
Y Special version

Power supply/communication
B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version

Display / on-site operation

1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version

Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68 with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment;
with overvoltage protection
9 Special version

Screw union/entry
2 M20x1.5 screw union
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version

FMU 41 - Product designation

30 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Product structure FMU 42 Certificates

A Variant for non-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 1/2 G EEX ia IIC T6
4 ATEX II 1/2 G EEX d [ia] IIC T6
G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 (in preparation)
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
N CSA General Purpose
K TIIS Ex ia II C T6 (in preparation)
Y Special certificate

Process connection
M mounting bracket FAU20
P DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS10K80, PP, Universal flange
Q DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS10K80, PVDF, Universal flange
S DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS10K80, 316L, Universal flange
T DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS16K100, PP, Universal flange
U DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS16K100, PVDF, Universal flange
V DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS16K100, 316L, Universal flange
Y Special version

Power supply/communication
B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version

Display / on-site operation

1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version

Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68, with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminium T 12 housing coated to IP 68, with separate terminal compartment; with
overvoltage protection
Y Special version

Gland/Entry
2 M20x1.5 gland
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version

Sealing Sensor/Flange
2 VITON flat sealing
3 EPDM flat sealing
9 special version

Additional options
A Additional options not selected

FMU 42 - Product designation

Endress + Hauser 31
 Prosonic M

Product structure FMU 43 Certificates

A Variant for non-hazardous area
2 ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D, Aluminium Deckel
5 ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D, Sichtdeckel
M FM DIP Class II, III, Div. 1, Gr. E,F,G NI
N CSA General Purpose
P CSA DIP, Class II, III, Div. 1, Gr. E,F,G NI
Y Special version

Process connection/material
P Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, PP (universal slip-on flange included)
S Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, SS 316TI (universal slip-on flange included)
K Without slip-on flange/without mounting bracket (customer mounting equipment)
M With mounting bracket
Y Special version

Power supply/communication
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version

Display / on-site operation

1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version

Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
9 Special version

Screw union/entry
2 M20x1.5 screw union
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version

FMU 43 - Product designation

Scope of delivery • Instrument according to the version ordered

• "ToF Tool FieldTool Package (2 CD-ROMs: Program CD-ROM, Utility CD-ROM)
• Operating manual according to the communication version
• for certified instrument versions: Safety Instructions, Control- or Installation drawings
• for FMU 40 *R**** and FMU 41 *R****: counter nut (PC)
• for FMU 40/41: sealing ring (EPDM)
• for gland M20x1.5:
– 1 cable gland for 2-wire instruments
– 2 cable glands for 4-wire instruments
The cable glands are mounted on delivery.

32 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Accessories
Weather protection cover A Weather protection cover made of stainless steel is recommended for outdoor mounting (order code:
543199-0001). The shipment includes the protective cover and tension clamp.

F12 / F23 / T12 housing

EN
DR
Orde MIC ES
r
Se Code
RO S+H
r.-No : PIL AU
.: OT SE
II R
Me
Messbere
asur ich
ing
rang
U 16 e ma
4...20...36 x. 20

Maulburg
m
mAV DC
IP
65
T

Made in Germany
A >7
0°C
: t >8
5°C

L00-FMR2xxxx-00-00-06-en-001

Installation bracket for

400
FMU 40/41 120
G

A 250 ø16

120
3
30 L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-de-001

• for FMU 40, G1½: Order No. 942669-0000

• for FMU 41, G2: Order No. 942669-0001
suited for NPT 1½" and 2" as well

Endress + Hauser 33
 Prosonic M

Adapter flange for FMU 40 /

sealing ring
FMU 41 EPDM adapter flange
(supplied)

sensor nozzle
L00-FMUX3XXX-00-00-00-en-001

Version with metrical thread (FAU 70 E)

Version
12 DN 50 PN 16
14 DN 80 PN 16
15 DN 100 PN 16

Thread
3 G 1½, ISO 228
4 G 2, ISO 228

Material
2 1.4435 (316L)
7 PPs (Polypropylene)

FAU 70 E Product designation

Version with conical thread(FAU 70 A)

Version
22 ANSI 2" 150 psi
24 ANSI 3" 150 psi
25 ANSI 4" 150 psi

Thread
5 NPT 1½ - 11,5
6 NPT 2 - 11,5

Material
2 1.4435 (316L)
7 PPs (Polypropylene)

FAU 70 A Product designation

34 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Cantilever
A

20
C

20

100
50
35

25
D M8

75 75 100 B 35

50/
62

22

C
105

6.5

15
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-005

A B C D for Sensor Material Order Code

585 mm 250 mm 2 mm 200 mm FMU 40 1.4301 (AISI 304) 52014132

galv. steel 52014131

FMU 41 1.4301 (AISI 304) 52014136

galv. steel 52014135

1085 mm 750 mm 3 mm 300 mm FMU 40 1.4301 (AISI 304) 52014134

galv. steel 52014133

FMU 41 1.4301 (AISI 304) 52014138

galv. steel 52014137

• The 50 mm or 62 mm orifices serve for the mounting of the FMU 40 or FMU 41 sensor, respecitvely.
• The 22 mm orifice may be used for an additional sensor.

Endress + Hauser 35
 Prosonic M

Mounting Frame

13

100
25
55

3.2
Ø 33.7
60
20 4

700/1400
6.5
45

76
200
100
100
130 150
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-005

Height Material Order Code

700 mm galv. steel 919791-0000

700 mm 1.4301 (AISI 304) 919791-0001

1400 mm galv. steel 919791-0002

1400 mm 1.4301 (AISI 304) 919791-0003

Wall Bracket
3.2
5 ø 33.7
6.5
180

213
150
110

25
13

88 110
150
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-006

Material Order Code

galv. steel 919792-0000

316Ti/1.4571 919792-0001

Commubox FXA191 For intrinsically safe communication between instruments with the HART protocol and the RS232 interface of
a PC. Further Information can be found in Technical Information TI 237F.

36 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Service Interface FXA193 The Service-Interface connects the Service plug of Proline and ToF instruments with the 9 pin RS 232C
interface of a PC. (USB connectors must be equipped with a usual commercial USB/Serial adapter.)

Product structure
Approvals
A For use in non-hazardous areas
B ATEX II (1) GD
C CSA/FM Class I Div. 1
D ATEX, CSA, FM
9 other

Connection cable
B Connection cable for ToF devices
E Connection cable for Proline and ToF devices
H Connection cable for Proline and ToF devices and Connection cable for Ex two-wire devices
X without connection cable
9 others

FXA193- Complete product designation

Associated documentation
• Technical Information: TI063D
• Safety Instructions for ATEX II (1) GD: XA077D
• Supplementary information for the cable adapters: SD092D

Endress + Hauser 37
 Prosonic M

Remote display FHX40 Dimensions

Wall-mounting Pipe-mounting
(without mounting bracket) (mounting bracket and plate
supplied optionally,
s. product structure)

5
8,
0 Separate housing
15 FHX 40 (IP 65)

Micropilot M 122

180

160
Levelflex M
Prosonic M

80
EN
DR
Orde ES
r Co S+H
Se
r.-N de: AU
o.: SE
R
Me
Messberei
asuri ch
ng
U 16
ran

4...20...36
ge
ma
x. 20
Cable
Maulburg

m
mAV DC

EN
DR T
IP
65
88
Made in Germany

A >7
Orde ES 0°C
r Co S+H : t
Se >85°C
r.-N de: AU
SE
120
o.:
R
Me
Messberei
asuri ch

118
ng
ran
U 16 ge
ma

82
4...20...36 x. 20
Maulburg

m
mAV DC

T
Made in Germany

A >7
0°C
: t
>85°C

96
3
6,

max. 80
min. 30
106

122

pipe

L00-FMxxxxxx-00-00-06-en-003

Technical data (cable and housing) and product structure:

Max. cable length 20 m (65 ft)

Temperature range -30 °C...+70 °C (-22 °F...158 °F)

Degree of protection IP65 acc. to EN 60529 (NEMA 4)

Materials Housing: AL Si 12; cable glands: nickle plated brass

Dimensions [mm] / [inch] 122x150x80 (HxWxD) / 4.8x5.9x3.2

Approval:
A Nn-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6, ATEX II 3D
S FM IS Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D
U CSA IS Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D
N CSA General Purpose

Cable length:
1 20m/65ft

Additional option:
A Basic version
B Mounting bracket, pipe 1"/ 2"

FHX40 - Complete product designation

38 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Supplementary documentation
System Information SI 005F
Ultrasonic level measurement

Operating manual Depending on the communication variant ordered, the following operating manuals are supplied with the
device:

Communication Operating manual

4 ... 20mA, HART BA 237F

Profibus PA BA 238F
Foundation Fieldbus BA 239F

These instructions describe the installation and first commissioning of the Prosonic M. From the operating
menu, all functions are included, which are required for standard measurement tasks. Additional functions are
not contained in the manual.

Description of device BA 240F

functions
This contains a detailed description of all the functions of the Prosonic M and is valid for all communication
variants.
A pdf file of this document can be found
• in the supplied "ToF Tool - FieldTool Package" at "Help/ToF Tool Help/ Online Manual/ Operating
Manual/Ultrasonic/Prosonic M FMU4x Functions"1.
• in the internet at "www.endress.com". Klick "Download" and enter the product code "FMU4*" into the
search form.

Short instructions KA 183F

can be found under the device housing cover.
The most important menu functions are summarised on this sheet. It is intended primarily as a memory jogger
for users who are familiar with the operating concept of Endress+Hauser time-of-flight instruments.

Safety Instructions The following safety instructions are supplied with ATEX-certified device versions. If the devices are used in
explosive areas, comply with all the specifications in these safety instructions.

Instrument version Certificate Communication Housing Safety Instructions

• FMU40 - 1*B*A*
ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G
• FMU41 - 1*B*A* HART (2-wire) F12 XA 174F
EEx ia II C T6
• FMU42 - 1*B*A***
• FMU40 - 1*B*D*
ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G
• FMU41 - 1*B*D* HART (2-wire) T12 with overvoltage protection XA 224F
EEx ia II C T6
• FMU42 - 1*B*D***
• FMU40 - 1*D*A*
- 1*F*A*
• FMU41 - 1*D*A* ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G • Profibus-PA
F12 XA 175F
- 1*F*A* EEx ia II C T6 • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - 1*D*A***
- 1*F*A***
• FMU40 - 1*D*D*
- 1*F*D*
• FMU41 - 1*D*D* ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G • Profibus-PA
T12 with overvoltage protection XA 225F
- 1*F*D* EEx ia II C T6 • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - 1*D*D***
- 1*F*D***

1) If the Operating Instructions have not been installed together with the "ToF Tool - FieldTool Package", they can be added to the installation subsequently.

Endress + Hauser 39
 Prosonic M

Instrument version Certificate Communication Housing Safety Instructions

• FMU40 - 4*B*C*
- 4*D*C*
- 4*F*C*
• FMU41 - 4*B*C* • HART (2-wire)
ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G
- 4*D*C* • Profibus-PA T12 XA 176F
EEx d [ia] II C T6
- 4*F*C* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - 4*B*C***
- 4*D*C***
- 4*F*C***

• HART (2-wire)
• FMU40 - G***** • HART (4-wire, DC) • F12
• FMU41 - G***** ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 • HART (4-wire, AC) • T12 XA 179F
• FMU42 - G******* • Profibus-PA • T12 with overvoltage protection
• Foundation Fieldbus

• FMU40 - 2*B*A*
- 2*D*A*
- 2*F*A*
- 5*B*A*
- 5*D*A*
- 5*F*A*
• FMU41 - 2*B*A*
- 2*D*A*
• HART (2-wire)
- 2*F*A* • ATEX II 1/2D
• Profibus-PA F12 XA 180F
- 5*B*A* • ATEX II 1/3D
• Foundation Fieldbus
- 5*D*A*
- 5*F*A*
• FMU42 - 2*B*A***
- 2*D*A***
- 2*F*A***
- 5*B*A***
- 5*D*A***
- 5*F*A***

• FMU40 - 2*G*A*
- 2*H*A*
- 5*G*A*
- 5*H*A*
• FMU41 - 2*G*A*
- 2*H*A* • ATEX II 1/2D • HART (4-wire, DC)
F12 XA 259
- 5*G*A* • ATEX II 1/3 D • HART (4-wire, AC)
- 5*H*A*
• FMU42 - 2*G*A***
- 2*H*A***
- 5*G*A***
- 5*H*A***

• FMU43 - 2*G*A*
- 2*H*A* • ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D • HART (4-wire, DC)
F12 XA 177F
- 5*G*A* • ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D • HART (4-wire, AC)
- 5*H*A*
• FMU43 - 2*D*A*
- 2*F*A* • ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D • Profibus-PA
F12 XA 178F
- 5*D*A* • ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D • Foundation Fieldbus
- 5*F*A*

40 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic M

Control drawings Installation The following control or installation drawings are supplied with the FM, CSA and TIIS-certified device
drawings versions:

Instrument version Certificate Communication Housing Control or Installation

Drawing

• FMU40 - S*B*A*
• FMU41 - S*B*A* FM IS HART (2-wire) F12 ZD 096F
• FMU42 - S*B*A***

• FMU40 - S*D*A*
- S*F*A*
• FMU41 - S*D*A* • Profibus-PA
FM IS F12 ZD 097F
- S*F*A* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - S*D*A***
- S*F*A***

• FMU40 - S*B*D*
• FMU41 - S*B*D* FM IS HART (2-wire) T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 139F
• FMU42 - S*B*D***

• FMU40 - S*D* D*
- S*F*D*
• FMU41 - S*D* D* • Profibus-PA
FM IS T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 140F
- S*F*D* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - S*D* D***
- S*F*D***

• FMU40 - T*B*C*
- T*D*C*
- T*F*C*
• FMU41 - T*B*C* • HART (2-wire)
- T*D*C* FM XP • Profibus PA T12 ZD 098F
- T*F*C* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - T*B*C***
- T*D*C***
- T*F*C***

• FMU40 - U*B*A*
• FMU41 - U*B*A* CSA IS HART (2-wire) F12 ZD 088F
• FMU42 - U*B*A***

• FMU40 - U*D*A*
- U*F*A*
• FMU41 - U*D*A* • Profibus-PA
CSA IS F12 ZD 099F
- U*F*A* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - U*D*A***
- U*F*A***

• FMU40 - U*B* D*
• FMU41 - U*B* D* CSA IS HART (2-wire) T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 101F
• FMU42 - U*B* D***

• FMU40 - U*D*D*
- U*F*D*
• FMU41 - U*D*D* • Profibus-PA
CSA IS T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 102F
- U*F*D* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - U*D*D***
- U*F*D***

• FMU40 - V*B*C*
- V*D*C*
- V*F*C*
• FMU41 - V*B*C* • HART (2-wire)
- V*D*C* CSA XP • Profibus PA T12 ZD 100F
- V*F*C* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - V*B*C***
- V*D*C***
- V*F*C***

• FMU 40 - K***** TIIS

HART F12 ZD 138F
• FMU 41 - K***** Ex ia IIC T6

Endress + Hauser 41
 Prosonic M

International Head Quarter

Endress+Hauser
GmbH+Co. KG
Instruments International
Colmarer Str. 6
79576 Weil am Rhein
Deutschland

Tel. +49 76 21 9 75 02
Fax +49 76 21 9 75 34 5
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com

TI365F/00/en/03.05
FM+SGML 6.0 ProMoDo